Secutron MODUL-R MR-2100, MODUL-R MR-2200 Installation Manual

Fire Alarm Systems

sm

MANUALS

CANADA

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan (Toronto), Ontario L4K 5W3

Telephone: 888.732.8876 Fax: 888.660.4113

U.S.A.

60 Industrial Parkway

Cheektowaga (Buffalo), NY 14227

Telephone: 888.732.8876 Fax: 888.660.4113

Web Site: www.secutron.com

Email: [email protected]

a member of the

MR-2100/2200

Fire Alarm Control Unit

I

NSTALLATION

M

ANUAL

Revision E

Document #: LT-2000

WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.

Copyrights and Trademarks

This manual is copyright 1994 - 2005 by Secutron Inc.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.

Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.

Cautions and Warnings

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.

DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED .

Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.

ELECTRICAL HAZARD Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.

STATIC HAZARD Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:

• Ground yourself before opening or installing components

• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.

RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC

Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.

SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-1996,

Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software.

Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.

All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.

MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual

Contents

1.0 Technical Information............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 Features.......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.3 Codes & Standards......................................................................................................................... 1

1.4 Applications & Services ................................................................................................................. 1

1.5 General Installation Requirements.................................................................................................. 2

1.6 System Verification ......................................................................................................................... 2

1.7 System Components....................................................................................................................... 3

2.0 Technical Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 8

2.1 Electrical Specifications .................................................................................................................. 8

3.0 Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 11

3.1 Unpacking the MR-2100 or MR-2200 ............................................................................................. 11

3.2 Mounting and Assembling the MR-2200......................................................................................... 11

3.3 Internal Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 14

3.4 Wiring.............................................................................................................................................. 16

3.5 Maximum Wiring Length for Addressable Circuits .......................................................................... 20

3.6 Maximum Wiring Length for Bell Circuits ........................................................................................ 21

4.0 Appendix A Compatible Addressable Devices......................................................................................... 22

5.0 Appendix B: Battery Calculations & Compatible Batteries ....................................................................... 24

5.1 Battery Calculation Worksheet........................................................................................................ 24

5.2 Battery Selection Calculations ........................................................................................................ 26

6.0 Appendix C: Compatible Notification Appliances ..................................................................................... 27

6.1 Wheelock ........................................................................................................................................ 27

6.2 Gentex ............................................................................................................................................ 29

6.3 Space Age Electronics.................................................................................................................... 29

6.4 System Sensor................................................................................................................................ 30 i

MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual ii


List of Figures and Tables

Figures

Figure 1: Knockouts and Mounting Holes....................................................................................................... 13

Figure 2: Power Limited Wiring Diagram ........................................................................................................ 14

Figure 3: Power Limited Wiring, City Module ................................................................................................. 15

Figure 4: AC Power Wiring Diagram .............................................................................................................. 16

Figure 5. External Battery Cabinet Wiring ...................................................................................................... 17

Figure 6: Class B Wiring................................................................................................................................. 18

Figure 7: Class A Circuit................................................................................................................................. 18

Figure 8: Class B NAC Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 19

Figure 9: Class A NAC Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 19

Figure 10: Function Relay Wiring ................................................................................................................... 19

Tables

Table 1: AC Input............................................................................................................................................ 8

Table 2: Battery Power (Use sealed lead acid batteries only!) ....................................................................... 8

Table 3: Addressable Input (Signaling Line Circuit) ....................................................................................... 9

Table 4: Notification Appliance Circuit Output Circuits ................................................................................... 9

Table 5: Function Relay Output Circuits......................................................................................................... 9

Table 6: Power Outputs.................................................................................................................................. 9

Table 7: Communications Ports ..................................................................................................................... 10

Table 8: Environmental Specifications ........................................................................................................... 10

Table 9: Secutron Compatible Addressable Devices ..................................................................................... 22

Table 10: System Sensor Compatible Addressable Devices ......................................................................... 23 iii

MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual iv


1.0 Technical Information

1.1 Introduction

The MR-2100/MR-2200 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) is the heart of a sophisticated microprocessor based fire detection system. Meeting the demands of economy and capability, these modular panels offer suppor for one or two loops of up to 198 devices on each loop.

Optional modules mount directly to the chassis. Modules are available that provide additional NAC output circuits, function relay output circuits, annunciation, etc. This modular approach to system design virtually guarantees that as your needs -- and applicable local codes -- evolve, your FACP can change along with them.

Networking can be utilized to provide additional input circuits, visual zones, bell circuits and relays.

Up to 254 units (FACPs and/or annuciators) can be connected to form the Class A Style 7 (DCLR) network loop.

Programming the MR-2100/MR-2200 has two components: Input circuit programming and special features, such as day/night mode, et cetera, are done from an externally generated database produced on a Windows based PC, while system parameters are programmed from the LCD and keypad.

This manual covers the installation of the MR-2100 and MR-2200 Fire Alarm Control Panels. For

Programming and Operating Instructions, please refer to the appropriate manuals.

1.2 Features

The MR-2100/MR-2200 includes the following features:

• MR-2100: One (1) Addressable Input (SLC) circuit, Class A (Style 6) or Class B (Style 4).

• MR-2200: Two (2) Addressable Input (SLC) circuits, Class A (Style 6) or Class B (Style 4).

• Two (2) Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Class A (Style Z) or Class B

(Style Y). Expandable to eight (8) NAC with optional module MRNC2 (groups of 2).

• Four (4) Programmable function relays, Form C. Expandable to sixteen (16) relays with optional module MRRL4 (groups of 4).

• Two (2) Auxiliary power outputs.

• Optional peer-to-peer networking with existing Secutron MR network.

• Total 24V Power Supply: 2.6A, expandable to 8.2A.

• Integral battery charger.

• LCD/LED system status display, with optional LED zone display.

• Surface/flush mount cabinet with dead-front construction, capable of holding two 12Ah batteries with removable door for easy installation.

• Removable terminal blocks for easy wiring.

• Operating program and database can both be uploaded/downloaded by PC.

1.3 Codes & Standards

This fire alarm control panel meets the requirements of the following codes and standards:

• NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code, 1999 Edition

• UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

• ULC-S527 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems

• Applicable Local and State Building Codes

• NFPA 70 - National Electric Code

• ULC-S524 Installation of Fire Alarm Systems

1


1.4 Applications & Services

This fire alarm control panel is listed for use in the following applications:

• Local with networking for UL (only) installations

• Auxiliary (Requires MRCTYB Reverse Polarity Municipal Box Module configured for

Municipal Master Box Operation)

• Central Station reporting (using the optional MRDL Dual Line Dialer-Communicator)

• Remote Station reporting (Requires MRCTYB Reverse Polarity Municipal Box Module configured for Reverse Polarity Operation or MRDL Dialer)

And for the following types of service:

• M - Manual

• A - Automatic

• SS - Sprinkler Supervisory

• WF - Waterflow

1.5 General Installation Requirements

The information provided with this unit is intended as a guide. Installation of this equipment, optional system components, alarm initiating devices and notification appliances must follow the manufacturer's guidelines as contained in their respective installation documents, all applicable codes and the instructions of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

Manufacturer’s Documents

When installing the fire alarm control panel, refer to this manual. When installing optional system components refer to the installation documents included with those components. When installing compatible alarm initiating devices or notification appliances, refer to the installation documents included with those products.

Field Wiring

Field wiring recommendations in this document are intended as guidelines. All field wiring must be installed in accordance with the applicable national electrical codes, with all relevant local codes and standards, and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

Compatible Devices

Use UL or ULC listed smoke detectors and notification devices that are compatible with the fire alarm control panel from the lists included in this manual.

1.6 System Verification

The complete fire alarm system must be verified for proper installation and operation when:

• The initial installation is ready for inspection by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction;

• Any system component is added, changed or deleted;

• Any programming changes are made;

• System wiring has been altered or repaired;

• System failure due to the external influences such as lightning, water damage or extended power outages has occurred.

Standby Power

The fire alarm control panel uses sealed lead-acid rechargeable batteries as a secondary power source in the event of a main power failure. The required capacity of the standby batteries must be calculated using the charts and tables within this manual for the period as required by national or local codes and standards. Even though the calculation table within this manual includes a safety margin, lead-acid batteries commonly used for standby can have variable capacity as a result of age and ambient conditions. Periodic inspection for damage and the batteries' ability to support the attached equipment is highly recommended.

2

1.7 System Components

Basic System

A basic system consists of the Back Box, Main Board,

Display Board and one transformer. Canadian versions also include an Eight Zone LED Module.

Back Box

The enclosure includes the back box, outer door, dead front door and hardware plate. It can be flush or surface mounted without requiring additional hardware.

Both the outer door and dead front doors are quickly removable using pin-hinges. The hardware plate holds the main printed circuit board and transformer(s). The enclosure holds two transformers, one communicator module (Dialer or City Connect) and up to three NAC or

Relay expander modules.

Transformer

The FACP is shipped with either a 120V or 240V transformer (specified at the time of ordering).

The total NAC power can be increased by adding a second transformer of the same voltage. The expansion transformer is available as a separate order item under model numbers MR12VAC (for 120V systems) and MR24VAC (for 240V systems).

MR12VAC


MR24VAC

Main Board

The MR-2100 / MR-2200 Main Board contains the system power supply, master CPU and memory, two

Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs), four Auxiliary

Function Relays, two Auxiliary power points, one or two

Signal Line Circuits (SLCs), and communications ports for the Display Board and optional equipment.

The MR-2100 Main Board has one SLC for connecting

System Sensor Addressable devices. The MR-2200

Main Board has two SLCs. Each SLC can support 198 total devices, 99 detectors/sensors and 99 control/ monitor type devices.

Replacement Main Boards are available under the following PIDs:

MR-2100 Main Board – SMR21MPCB

MR-2200 Main Board – SMR22MPCB

3


Display Board

The Display Board provides LED and LCD status annunciation, hotkeys, and keypads for message retrieval and programming. A replacement Display can be ordered under PID SMR22DPCB.

Optional (Internal) Components

NAC Expander Board - PID MRNC2

The NAC Expander Board provides two additional NAC output circuits. A ribbon cable connects this module.

Any combination of NAC and Relay expanders can be added (to a maximum of three modules total) within the basic enclosure.

Refer to the MRNC2 NAC Expander Installation

Instructions (579-499).

Relay Expander - PID MRRL4

The Relay Expander provides four additional function relay output circuits. A ribbon cable connects this module. Any combination of NAC and Relay expanders can be added (to a maximum of three modules total) within the basic enclosure.

Refer to MRRL4 Relay Expander Installation instructions (579-500).

Eight Zone LED Module - PID MRLD8

The MRLD8 module provides eight zones of LED annunciation. The LED strips mount to the dead-front door and connect to the MR-2244 display board. Up to three of these modules can be added to the MR-2244.

Refer to the MRLD8 Eight Zone Expansion Module

(579-498).

4

DACT Module - PID MRDL

The optional Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter

(DACT) module is added to the system to provide

Remote Station monitoring of system alarm, trouble, and supervisory conditions.

Use of the DACT module requires that two telephone lines be provided for connection to the DACT. Service must be arranged with a Central Station monitoring facility for Remote Station Service.

Refer to the MRDL Installation Instructions (579-573).

MRDL not to be used for ULC applications.

MR22NTWR

The MR22NTW provides the network interface between the MR-2200 and the rest of the control units on a peer-to-peer network. This module plugs directly into the MR-2200 main board.

There are four distinct versions of this network interface module. For information on wiring each assembly refer to the MR22NTW Network Card Installation Instructions

(579-541). Secutron Network cards meet requirements for UL864 only.

The MR22NTWR version features two standard ports that provide direct wire connectivity between multiple

FACPs. The MR22NTWR can also be used for creating a Fiber-Optic connection between panels using two

MR-D1010 Fiber Optic Modules.

MR22NTWR1

The MR22NTWR1 provides the network interface between the MR-2200 and the rest of the control units on a peer-to-peer network. This module plugs directly into the MR-2200 main board.

The MR22NTWR1 version features Port 1 as RS232 and Port 2 as standard, RS-232 serial ports are used for connecting the MR-D1010 Fiber Optic Module.

MR22NTWR2


The MR22NTWR2 version features Port 1 as standard and Port 2 as RS232.


5


MR22NTWR12


The MR22NTWR12 version features Port 1 and Port as both RS232.

Reverse Polarity Municipal Box - PID MRCTYB

The optional MRCTYB can be configured for remote

Station (reverse polarity) or Municipal Master (local energy) service. The MRCTYB can transmit alarm, trouble, and supervisory conditions when configured for reverse polarity operation. Alarm condition only is reported when configured for Municipal Master operation.

Refer to the MRCTYB Reverse Polarity Municipal Box

(RPMB) Module Installation Instructions (579-538).

Compatible Products

MR-2644

The MR-2644 is a status annunciator with Liquid

Crystal Display, general system status lights, and general function keys.

MR-2644 is not ULC Listed.

MR-2614

The MR-2614 is a status annunciator with LED zone display, general system status lights, and general function keys.

MR-D1010R

The MR-D1010R is a Fiber Optic Module that can be used with the MR22NTW to create a network connected by fiber.

Refer to the MR-D101R Fiber Optic Module Installation Instructions (579-565)

MR-2900

The MR-2900 is a network able fire alarm panel with both addressable and conventional input capability.

Refer to the MR-2900/MR-2920 Fire Alarm Control Unit Installation Manual (29004336).

6


MR-2944

The MR-2944 is a network annunciator with Liquid Crystal Display and/or LED Zone display, general system status lights, and general function keys.

Refer to the MR-2944 Annunciator Unit Installation Manual (29004339).

Testing Circuit Supervision

Use the following procedures in the table below to confirm that SLCs and NACs are supervising for opens, shorts, and grounds. The right column in this table shows the LEDs that illuminate when an open, short, or ground occurs on a specific circuit. AUX is supervised for shorts and earths only.

Open (NACs) -- Remove the end-of-line and make circuit impedance infinite.

Open (SLCs) -- Break the line anywhere in the loop.

Short -- Apply a zero ohm jumper across the circuit.

NAC illuminates the Trouble LED and the

NAC Trouble LED flashes

SLC illuminates the Trouble LED

SLC illuminates the Trouble LED

NAC illuminates the Trouble LED and the

NAC Trouble LED flashes

AUX illuminates the Trouble LED

Earth Ground (NACs) -- Place a 10K

Ω

or smaller value resistor from the supervised wiring to Earth Ground.

Earth Ground (SLCs) -- Place a 100

Ω or smaller value resistor from the supervised wiring to Earth Ground.

If an Earth Ground occurs on any circuit the

Fault and Trouble LEDs both illuminate

7


2.0 Technical Specifications

2.1 Electrical Specifications

Table 1: AC Input

Circuit / Model / Item

Standard Primary AC Input 1

MR2100R, MR2100B, CA2100E, CA2100F,

MR2200R, MR2200B, CA2200E, CA2200F

MR2100R2, MR2100B2, MR2200R2,

MR2200B2

Optional Primary AC Input 2

MR2100R, MR2100B, CA2100E, CA2100F,

MR2200R, MR2200B, CA2200E, CA2200F

MR2100R2, MR2100B2, MR2200R2,

MR2200B2

Rating

120V, 60Hz, 2.0 A maximum




Table 2: Battery Power (Use sealed lead acid batteries only!)


Battery Charger

Float charge:

Charging current:

Rating

Current limited float charger

27.5 VDC

2.7A maximum (no auxiliary load),

1.7A nominal (0.5A on each AUX)

Maximum Battery Capacity

Batteries larger than 12Ah require the use of a listed battery cabinet.

12Ah (max. internal to cabinet)

35Ah (Largest size battery that can be used, MR-2978B or MR-2978R

External Battery Cabinet required) a. Maximum current available to the battery charging circuit is limited by the power draw from additional devices. As the AUX power circuits are loaded, or additional modules are added, the amount of current available for charging batteries decreases.

b. Reference section 4.4 for Battery Calculations and compatible batteries.

8


Table 3: Addressable Input (Signaling Line Circuit)


Voltage

Maximum loop length:

Maximum loop current:

Maximum # of devices per loop

Rating

24Vdc nominal, 27.5Vdc maximum

Refer to Wiring Tables

450mA (momentary)

198 total (99 detector heads, 99 control/monitor modules)

Table 4: Notification Appliance Circuit Output Circuits


MR-2100/2200 Mainboard and

MRNC2 NAC Expander

NAC1, NAC2*

Rating

Supervised and power limited

End-of-line resistor (EOLR)

(for Class B wiring)

24V full wave rectified DC, 2.0A maximum, power limited.

10kW, ºW, 5%

*Total NAC Current - 1 Transformer: NACs + AUX < 2.5A, 2 Transformers: 7A

Table 5: Function Relay Output Circuits

Circuit / Model / Item Rating

MR-2100/2200 Mainboard and MRRL4

Relay Expander

RELAY1, RELAY2, RELAY3, RELAY4 Form C contact, 2A, 30Vdc resistive, power limited source only.

Table 6: Power Outputs


MR-2100/2200 Mainboard

AUX (x2)

Rating

24Vdc, filtered, regulated and power limited, 500mA maximum rated current (each),

600mVpp ripple.

9


Table 7: Communications Ports

Port

COM1, COM2 (Secutron MR peerto-peer network, redundant DCLR)

ANN (annunciator port)

RS-232-2 (EVAX)

CON4 (Dialer/City Module Port)

J1 (Service and serial printer port)

Rating

10km (33,000 feet) maximum distance between nodes, minimum 28 AWG wires. Programmable baud rate with up to 200 panels at

1200 bps, 254 panels at 2400, 4800, and 9600 bps.

Fixed baud rate 4800bps;(see MR-2644 or

MR-2614 instructions for wiring distances)

Fixed baud rate 9600bps; 6.01m (20ft) maximum distance

Fixed baud rate 4800bps

Fixed baud rate 9600bps; 6m (20ft) maximum distance

Table 8: Environmental Specifications

Condition

Operating Temperature

Humidity

Rating

0ºC – 49ºC / 32ºF – 120ºF

93% RH non-condensing

10


3.0 Installation

3.1 Unpacking the MR-2100 or MR-2200

The basic MR-2200 package includes the following components:

Backbox

Outer door including:

• Lock

• Display window

Inner dead-front door including:

• Display PCB

• Operating instruction insert

• Hotkey label insert

• Wiring label

Hardware backplate including:

• Main PCB

• Transformer

• Ribbon Cable for expansion modules

• Plastic Shield

Hardware pack including:

• 2 x NAC EOL resistors

• Door keys (taped to outside of cabinet)

Installation manual and operating manual

3.2 Mounting and Assembling the MR-2200

Note: All applicable codes and standards should be considered. Specific reference should be made to NFPA 72, or ULC-S524 and CEC Part 1 Section 32.

Surface and Flush Mounting

The MR-2100/MR-2200 can be mounted in either flush or surface mount installations. Before installing the 2100/22200 Panel the following should be considered.

1.

Determine a suitable location for mounting the FACP. Keep in mind that surrounding walls, fixtures, must not hinder access to internal components. etc.

2.

Determine the size and location of conduit entrances. The Backbox provides various knockout locations, however should it be necessary to cut additional conduit entrances the electronics must be removed to avoid metal chip contamination. Reference the ’Remove

Electronics’ paragraph on the following page.

Note: Removing the inner door, outer door, and plate-mounted electronics is recommended in all

MR-2100/2200 installations.

3.

The enclosure must be mounted to provide a 135 o

(minimum) angle of rotation of the outer door to insure easy removal or assembly.

4.

Mark placement of mounting hardware, drill holes and install plugs (if necessary).

5.

Secure the FACP to the wall using hardware suitable to the wall construction. Support backbox in place while inserting hardware and ensure that the backbox is level and plumb before tightening.

Note: Please see the detailed diagram (Figure 1) for location of knockout and mounting holes.

11


Replacing the Outer Door

1.

Unlock the Door with the key provided.

2.

Detach the grounding strap (734-004, Qty: 2) from the backbox by removing the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) that are attached to the studs on the backbox. Reattach the #6 flange nuts

(Qty: 2) to the studs to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.

3.

Open the Door to approximately 135 o

and lift up to remove the outer door from the backbox, store door in a safe place.

Removing the MR2100/2200 Electronics

A. Removing the Inner Door (Dead Front)

1.

Remove the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) that lock down the inner door. Reattach the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) to the studs to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.

2.

Open the inner door and disconnect the display harness (734-146) from either the Display

Board (566-465) or the Main Board (566-458/566-459).

3.

Detach the grounding strap (734-004, Qty: 1) from the backbox by removing the #6 flange nut (Qty: 1) that is attached to the stud on the backbox. Reattach the #6 flange nut (Qty: 1) to the stud to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.

4.

Open the inner door approximately 90

°

and lift up to remove the inner door, store door in a safe place.

B. Removing the Back Plate Electronics

1.

Detach the harness (734-146) from the Display Board (565-465).

2.

Remove the #8 flange nuts (Qty: 4) from the studs on the backbox holding onto the back plate. Remove back Plate Electronic panel and store in a safe place. Reattach the #8 flange nuts to the studs to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.

12


14-1/2" (368 mm)

7/8" (23 mm) lip each side

21-3/4"

(552 mm)

16-1/8" (410 mm)

3" (76 mm)

3/4" (19 mm) lip top and bottom

5-1/2"

(140 mm)

26-1/2"

(673 mm)

29"

(740 mm)

1-1/4"

(32 mm)

27-1/2"

(699 mm)

8-1/2"

(216 mm)

Battery shelf

Figure 1: Knockouts and Mounting Holes

13


3.3 Internal Assembly

• Attach AC wiring to the AC Terminal Block (see Figure 4 on page 16). Attach green ground wire to ground screw on backplate.

Notes:

• Do not apply power to the unit until all doors, cables and wiring are installed and inspected.

• This AC circuit must be a separately fused 20A dedicated circuit. It is recommended that the breaker be locked in the OFF position during installation.

• Place the batteries in the bottom right of the back box or into the battery box. DO NOT

ATTACH BATTERIES UNTIL AFTER THE AC POWER HAS BEEN TURNED ON.

• Attach conduit to the back box as required using knockouts provided. Attach field wiring to the system. The section below describes how each type of circuit is to be wired. Attach conduit to the back box as required using knockouts provided. It is recommended that input circuit wiring be physically separated from output circuit wiring.

• Have the Unit inspected before applying power. Correct and re-inspect any problems found.

• Turn on the AC power to Unit. If no problems occur other than Low Battery, attach the batteries to the wires provided, the black wire to the black (negative) terminal and the red wire to the red (positive) terminal. If the batteries need charging, the Low Battery condition will remain until they are charged.

• Figure 2 shows the areas of the cabinet in which power limited/non-power limited wiring may be routed. Note that the location labeled Option Card 1 is not for the City (MRCTYB).

There is a location above Option Card 1 that is used for this card. Figure 3 shows the routing of power limited wiring to a city module.

Power Limited

Mainboard

Power Limited

14

Vbell 3 Vbell 2 Vbell 1

Non Power Limited

Figure 2: Power Limited Wiring Diagram


Figure 3: Power Limited Wiring, City Module

15


3.4 Wiring

Power Connections

The Main Control Unit requires an AC power supply. This supply is connected as shown below:

16

RED Batt +

BLK Batt -

To Batteries

To Bridge

TB16

AC

AC

BRIDGE

RECTIFIER

RED

Secondary

XFMR

BLUE

RED

Secondary BLUE

XFMR

EARTH

NEUT HOT

AC

TERMINAL

BLOCK

Primary

WHT BLK

Primary

WHT BLK

GND

Figure 4: AC Power Wiring Diagram

The batteries forming the Battery Pack are wired in series. The Battery Pack attaches to the two wires coming from the Power Supply Board, the black wire to the black (negative) terminal and the red wire to the red (positive) terminal.


The internal batteries are not used when an external battery box is used. The wires for connecting the power supply board to the batteries are supplied with the panel if a battery box is ordered at the same time.

Warning: Never connect or disconnect the batteries while the AC power is off.

External Battery Cabinet Wiring

Battery Cabinet

MR-2100 / MR-2200

Main Board

Conduit

3 feet

Max

To Batteries

Cut terminals from battery harness and wire them to the wires from the external battery cabinet.

(Wire Nuts must be internal to MR-2200 Cabinet)

Figure 5: External Battery Cabinet Wiring

17


Addressable Circuit Connections

Addressable Class B (Style 4) Circuit

This is a 2-wire supervised Class B (Style 4) communications circuit using addressable devices.

Wire capacitance and resistance will affect the allowable wire length. The recommended wiring is twisted unshielded pair. Consult Secutron's Applications Department for specific requirements.

Maximum wire lengths are up to 10,000 ft (see Appendix). Devices will be connected as indicated in the diagram below. Use only approved devices.

Figure 6: Class B Wiring

Note: T-taps may NOT be allowed by the authority having jurisdiction. Refer to NFPA 72 and ULC-

S524.

Addressable Class A (Style 6) Circuit

This is a 4-wire supervised Class A (Style 6) communications circuit using addressable devices.

The recommended wiring is twisted unshielded pair. Wire capacitance and resistance will affect the allowable wire length. Consult Secutron's Applications Department for specific requirements.

Maximum wire lengths are up to 10,000 ft (see Appendix). Devices will be connected as indicated in the diagram below. Use only approved devices. Return wiring must be in a separate conduit.

Note: Install wiring in compliance with NFPA 72.

18

Figure 7: Class A Circuit


Notification Appliance Circuit Connections

Class B (Style Y) NAC

This is a 2-wire Class B (Style Y) supervised signaling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices and the 10k ohm end-of-line resister will be connected as indicated in the figure below. Maximum wire lengths are shown in the Appendix. Use only approved devices.

Note:The appliances must incorporate a steering diode or other means of providing activation with the alarm state and no current with the supervision state.

10k

EOLR

Circuit is supervised

24V FWR power limited 2.0A MAX.

Figure 8: Class B NAC Wiring

MDR-EOL-10k

Note: MRD-EOL-10K must be used for all ULC applications.

Class A (Style Z) Bell Circuit

This is a 4-wire Style Z (Class A) supervised signaling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices will be connected as indicated in the diagram below. Maximum wire lengths are shown in the

Appendix. Distances noted therein account for the total length of wire, from the panel to furthest device and back to the panel. Use only approved devices. Return wiring must be in a separate conduit. The EOL is on the board for Class A applications.

Circuit is supervised

24V FWR power limited 2.0A MAX.

Figure 9: Class A NAC Wiring

Function Relay Circuit Connections

Form C programmable relays can only be connected to a Power Limited source limited to 2A @

30VDC. They have a power factor of 0.35.

Figure 10: Function Relay Wiring

19


EVAX System Wiring

MR-2100 / MR-2200

Conduit

20’ Max

MV 2700 M

Main Board

Notes:

• For all EVAX installations, the maximum wiring distance from the FACP to the HMX panel is 20 feet in conduit. The two panels must be in the same room.

• MV-2700M and MV-2700D are not ULC listed.

• MV-2700M must be connected to an MV-2700D. The MV-2700M (M = Master) generates the audio signals. The MV-2700D (D = Distributed) distributes the audio signal via NACs.

• For information on connecting an MV-2700M to an MV-2700D, refer to those module’s installation instructions.

3.5 Maximum Wiring Length for Addressable Circuits

Gauge Belden No. Maximum Distance

18 9571 975m (3200 ft)

16

14

12

9572

9580

9582

1400m (4600 ft)

2435m (8000 ft)

3045m (10000 ft)

Note: Distances noted in this table account for the total length of wire, from the panel to furthest device and back to the panel.

20


3.6 Maximum Wiring Length for Bell Circuits

Max R

7.06

3.06

1.06

0.66

0.39

0.20

0.06

Max I

0.25

0.5

1

1.25

1.5

1.75

2

62

37

19

6 m

12AWG ft m

14AWG ft

664 2179 417 1368

288

100

944

327

181

63

593

205

204

121

63

19

39

23

12

4

128

76

39

12

25

15

8

2

16AWG m ft

263

114

39

863

374

130

81

48

25

7

18AWG m

165

72

25

15

9

5

1 ft

542

235

81

51

30

16

5

Note: Distances noted in this table account for the total length of wire, from the panel to furthest device and back to the panel.

21


4.0 Appendix A: Compatible Addressable Devices

Table 9: Secutron Compatible Addressable Devices

Model Description

MRI-1251

MRI-1251B

MRI-2251

MRI-2251B

Ionization type smoke detector


Photoelectric type smoke detector

MRI-2251T

MRI-2251TB


Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ thermal element


MRI-2251TM Acclimate Photo-Thermal Detector

MRI-2251TMB Acclimate Photo-Thermal Detector

MRI-5251P

MRI-5251B

Thermal detector

MRI-M502M

Thermal detector

Thermal detector w/ rate of rise MRI-5251RP

MRI-5251RB Thermal detector w/ rate of rise

MRI-5251H High Temperature Thermal detector

MRI-M500DM Dual Input Monitor Module

Monitor module, Classes A/B initiating MRI-M500M

MRI-M501M Mini Monitor module, Class B initiating

Monitor Module for 2- wire smoke detectors Classes A/B initiating

MRI-M500R

MRI-M500S

MRI-M500X

Relay Module

Control module

Fault isolator module

Typical Current

Draw µA

300

300

300

360

300

360

300

360

200

300

200

300

300

300

300

300

200

300

300

450

22


Table 10: System Sensor Compatible Addressable Devices


1251

1251B

2251

2251B

2251T

2251TB

2251TM

2251TMB

5251P

5251B

5251RP

5251RB

5251H

M500DM

M500M

M501M

M502M

M500S

M500R

M500X







Acclimate Photo-Thermal Detector

Acclimate Photo-Thermal Detector

Thermal detector

Thermal detector

Thermal detector w/ rate of rise

Thermal detector w/ rate of rise

High Temperature Thermal detector

Dual Input Monitor Module

Monitor module, Classes A/B initiating

Mini Monitor module, Class B initiating

Monitor Module for 2- wire smoke detectors Classes A/B initiating

Control module

Relay Module


Typical Current

Draw µA

360

300

360

200

300

200

300

300

300

360

300

300

300

300

300

300

200

300

300

450

23


5.0 Appendix B: Battery Calculations & Compatible Batteries

5.1 Battery Calculation Worksheet

1.

Enter the number of each installed module type in the ’Quantity’ column next to the appropriate module description.

2.

For each quantity entry, multiply the value in the ’Quantity’ column by the value in the

’Standby’ column and enter the value in the ’Total Standby’ column.

3.

For each quantity entry, multiply the value in the’Quantity’ column by the value in the

’Alarm’ column and enter the value in the ’Total Alarm’ column.

4.

Add all the values in the ’Total Standby’ column and put the answer in the ’Total Standby’ box marked A.

5.

Add all the values in the ’Total Alarm’ column and put the answer in the ’Total Alarm’ box marked B.

6.

Enter the required standby time (hours) in box C, and the total alarm time (minutes) in the alarm time box D.

7.

Substitute the values from boxes A through D in the battery calculation formula and the result is the recommended minimum battery capacity in amp-hours.

Worksheet found on following page.

24


Device Type

MR-2200 mainboard w/ LCD display & primary power supply

Device

Qty.

Standby

Current

1 x 110mA

Total

Standby

110mA

Alarm

Current

175mA

Total

Alarm

175mA

M22NTW Network Card

MRCN2 NAC output extender

MRRL4 function relay o/p extender

MRLD8 8-zone LED annunciator

MRDL dual line DACT

MRCTYB polarity reversal / municipal tie x x x x x x

50mA

10mA

5mA

5mA

40mA

20mA

_____ mA

_____ mA

_____ mA

_____ mA

40mA

20mA

50mA

65mA

17mA*

15mA**

50mA

_____ mA

_____ mA

_____ mA

65mA 65mA

_____ mA*** _____ mA***

Smoke detectors

Smoke detectors

Thermal detectors

Monitor modules

Control modules

Fault isolator modules x _____ µA x _____ µA x _____ µA x _____ µA x _____µA x _____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

_____ µA

See Section 4.4 for details on compatible addressable devices and their respective current draw.

Audible Notification Appliances (mA)

Visual Notification Appliances (mA)

AUX Power Load**** x x

TOTAL (A): TOTAL (B):

See next page for battery selection calculations.

Notes:

* Each relay, when active, will draw 17mA. The alarm current will depend on how many relays are programmed to activate on alarm.

** Represents three (3) devices in alarm. For each additional device, add 5mA.

*** Alarm current depends on module configuration. Please refer to MRCTYB installation

Instructions for further detail.

**** If MR-2614, MR-2644 and MR-D1010R are powered from AUX:

MR-2614 - 20mA Stby, 115mA Alarm (max)

MR-2644 - 30mA Stby, 70mA Alarm (max)

MR-D1010R - 75mA nominal, 100mA Alarm (max)

Add above currents for each annunciator or fiber optic modem, (i.e.) if 2 are present then multiply above by 2.

25


5.2 Battery Selection Calculations

1.

From previous calculations, locate total Standby Current ( A ) and convert to amperes . A =

________

(Note: amperes = mA ÷ 1000; µA ÷ 1,000,000; examples: 250 mA = 0.25 A; 1500 µA =

0.0015 A)

2.

Identify Standby Time ( C ), in hours . C = ______ (typically 4, 24, 48, or 60 hr)

3.

From previous calculations, locate total Alarm Current ( B ) in amperes.

B = ______

4.

Identify Alarm Time ( D ) in minutes.

D = ______ (typically 5, 10, or 15 min)

5.

Using the values in Steps 1-4, perform an Initial Battery Calculation per the following:

(A x C) + (0.0167 x B x D) = _______ Ah (Ah = ampere hours)

6.

Select a battery size LARGER than the number from the Initial Battery Calculation from the following list of SOTA batteries using the 20 Hour Rating value:

Part Number

20

Hour

Rating

C/20

(Amps)

Part Number

20

Hour

Rating

C/20

(Amps)

MR-6V4.5AH

MR-12V7.2AH

MR-12V12AH

4.5 Ah

7.2 Ah

12 Ah

0.225

0.36

0. 6

MR-12V18AH

MR-12V26AH

MR-12V35AH

18 Ah

26 Ah

35 Ah

0.9

1.3

1.75

If either the Standby Current or the Alarm Current is greater than the C/20 current for the initial battery size selected, a discharge factor must be applied per the following table (use the 20 hr value for 24 hr standby):

Discharge Time

0.083 hr 5 min

0.166 hr 10 min

0.249 hr 15 min

0.332 hr 20 min

0.5 hr

1 hr

30 min

60 min

Discharge

Factor

Discharge

Time

3.85

2.78

2.27

2.08

1.96

1.67

2 hr

3 hr

4 hr

5 hr

6 hr

7 hr

Discharge

Factor

Discharge

Time

Discharge

Factor

Discharge

Time

Discharge

Factor

1.43

1.30

1.22

1.18

1.14

1.11

8 hr

9 hr

10 hr

11 hr

12 hr

13 hr

1.10

1.09

1.08

1.06

1.05

1.04

14 hr

16 hr

18 hr

20 hr

48 hr

60 hr

1.03

1.02

1.01

1.00

1.00

1.00

Standby Discharge Factor ( SDF ) = _________ Alarm Discharge Factor ( ADF ) = _________

7.

Minimum Required Battery Capacity Calculation. (to account for battery aging, a 1.17 multiplier is included)

Minimum battery capacity in Ah =

1.17 x [(A x C x SDF) + (0.0167 x B x D x ADF)] = _______

8.

If the battery size initially selected is smaller than the result of step 9 above, repeat the calculations using a larger battery size.

26


6.0 Appendix C: Compatible Notification Appliances

6.1 Wheelock

Model

AH-24*

AH-24WP*

AS-241575W*

AS-2415C*

AS-2430C*

AS-2475C*

AS-24100C*

NH-12/24

AMT-12/24*

AMT4-l2/24*

AMT-2415W

Description

Mini Horn, indoor

Mini Horn, indoor/outdoor

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Horn

Mini Horn

Mini Horn

Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync

CH70-2475W

CH70-24110W

CH90-2415W

CH90-2430W

CH90-2475W

CH90-24110W

CH70-2415C

CH70-2430C

CH70-2475C

CH70-24100C

CH90-2415C

CH90-2430C

CH90-2475C

CH90-24100C

RSS-241575W*

RSSP-241575W*

RSS-2415C*

RSS-243OC*

RSS-2475C*

RSS-24100C*

RSSP-2415C*

RSSP-2430C*

RSSP-2475C*

RSSP-24100C*

ET70-2415W

ET70-241575W

ET70-2430W

*

ULC LISTED

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe

Strobe, retrofit plate

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe





Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

Current Draw @ 24VDC

Audible

41

41

107 (combined)

98 (combined)

133 (combined)

252 (combined)

283 (combined)

28

48

48

48

Visual

-

-

-

-

-

80

70

107

215

250

70

107

215

250

68

140

169

53

85

140

169

68

68

70

107

215

250

70

107

215

250

53

68

85

27


Model

ET70 -2475W

ET70 -24110W

ET90-2415W

ET90-24 30W

ET90-2475W

ET90-24110W

ET90-2415C

ET90-2430C

ET90-2475C

ET90-24100C

ET-1080- LS -24*

ET-1080-LSM-24

ET-1080- MS -24

ET-1080-IS-24

ET-1080-SL-24

ET-1080-SLM-24

ET-1081- LS-24*

ET-1081- LSM -24

ET-1081- MS -24

ET-1081- IS -24

ET-1081-SLM-24

E70-2415W

E70-2430W

E70-2475W

E70-24110W

E70 -2415C

E70 -2430C

E70-2475C

E70 -24100C

E90 -2415W

E90 -241575W

E90 -2430W

E90 -2475W

E90-24110W

E90 -2415C

E90 -2430C

E90 -2475C

E90 -24100C

SM -12/24*

DSM -12/24

*

ULC LISTED

Description

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker, non sync




Strobe Speaker, sync







Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe speaker

Strobe Speaker

Sync Module

Dual Sync Module

28


Audible Visual

-

-

140

169

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

53

68

85

140

169

70

107

215

250

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

25 (combined)

38 (combined)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

250

53

68

85

140

169

70

107

215

250

53

68

85

140

169

70

107

215

80

115

135

225

96

138

80

115

135

225

138


6.2 Gentex

Model

GEH24

GES24-15

GES24-15/75

GES24-30

GES24-60

GES24-75

GES24-110

GEC24-15

GEC24-15/75

GEC24-30

GEC24-60

GEC24-75

GEC24-110

GCS24-R, -W, -P

GCC24-R, -W, -P

6.3 Space Age Electronics

Description

Commander2 Horn

Commander2 Strobe 15 cd

Commander2 Strobe 15/75cd





Commander2 Horn/Strobe 15 cd

Commander2 Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd





Commander4 Strobe 15, 30, 75, 110 cd

Commander4 Horn/Strobe 15, 30, 75, 110 cd

Model

SSU07650

SSU07652

SSU07654

SSU07656

SSU07550

SSU07551

SSU07555

SSU07556

SSU07560

SSU07561

SSU07565

SSU07566

Description

15cd Strobe

30cd Strobe

75cd Strobe

110cd Strobe

Horn/15cd Strobe

Speaker/15cd Strobe

Horn/30cd Strobe

Speaker/30cd Strobe

Horn/75cd Strobe

Speaker/75cd Strobe

Horn/110cd Strobe

Speaker/110cd Strobe


Audible Visual

-

-

21

-

-

-

-

67 (combined)

78 (combined)

78 (combined)

103 (combined)

110 (combined)

123 (combined)

-

46

57

57

82

89

102

-


Audible

NA

NA

NA

Visual

97mA

123mA

196mA

NA

13mA

2A @ max output

13mA

2A @ max output

13mA

2A @ max output

13mA

2A @ max output

211mA

97mA

97mA

123mA

123mA

196mA

196mA

211mA

211mA

29


6.4 System Sensor

System Sensor Model numbers that are followed by a “W” designate the white version of the Horn/

Strobe, Strobe, or Horn.

Model

P2415*

P241575*

P2475*

P24110*

P241575K

P2475K

P24110K

P241575F

S2415*

S241575*

S2475*

S24110*

S241575K

S2475K

S24110K

S241575F

H12/24

H12/24K

HC12/24

HC12/24K*

SS24LO

SS24LOC

SS24M

SS24MC

SS24LOLA

PA400R (R) (W) (B)

PA400RF (R) (W)

PS24LO (R) (W) (B)

SS2415ADA (R) (B)

SS241575ADA (R) (B)

SS2475ADA (R) (B)

SS24110ADA (R) (B)

MASS2415ADA (R) (B)

MASS241575ADA (R) (B)

MASS2475ADA (R) (B)


Description

Strobe

Strobe

Horn

Horn

Horn

Horn

Strobe

Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Sounder

Sounder

Add on Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe


Audible Visual

-

-

-

-

-

39

-

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

-

-

39

39

39

39

-

-

-

12

12

-

-

-

125

125

80

-

-

25

64

60

64

159

191

64

159

60

64

159

191

64

159

191

45

45

-

-

191

64

-

-

90

120

200

59

59

59

59

245

90

120

200

245

SS2415ADAS

SS241575ADAS

MASS2415ADAS

MASS241575ADAS

Strobe

Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

59

59

-

-

125

180

125

180

30

© 2005 Secutron, Inc.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.

Canada

Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Tel: (905)-695-3545

Fax: (905)-660-4113

USA


Cheektowaga, New York 14227

Tel: (888)-660-4655

Fax:(888) 660-4113

MR-2100/2200


P

ROGRAMMING

M

ANUAL

Revision D




This manual is copyright 1994 - 2006 by Mircom Technologies Limited.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Mircom Technologies Limited.

Mircom Technologies Limited.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Please call us at 1-888-660-4655 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.mircom.com.




DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED.






RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.

Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.

SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-

1996, Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.


MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual

Contents

1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts ................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 General Information ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.3 Addressable Devices ...................................................................................................................... 2

1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors............................................................................................................. 5

2.0 Editing NP Databases.............................................................................................................................. 6

2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 6

2.2 General Comments......................................................................................................................... 6

2.3 System Window .............................................................................................................................. 7

2.4 Switches Window............................................................................................................................ 11

2.5 Groups Window .............................................................................................................................. 13

2.6 Panel Window ................................................................................................................................. 14

2.7 Annunciators Window ..................................................................................................................... 17

2.8 Outputs Dialog ................................................................................................................................ 18

2.9 Options Dialog ................................................................................................................................ 20

2.10 Circuits and Devices Windows...................................................................................................... 29

2.11 Internal Circuits Window ............................................................................................................... 34

2.12 Relate Window.............................................................................................................................. 35

2.13 Pushbuttons .................................................................................................................................. 37

3.0 LCD Programming ................................................................................................................................... 38

3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 38


3.3 Menus ............................................................................................................................................. 39

4.0 Appendix A: Condition Codes and Zone Numbers .................................................................................. 45

4.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 45

4.2 List of Codes and Zone Numbers ................................................................................................... 45

5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation ............................................................................................... 51

6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal ................................................................................................................. 52

6.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 52

6.2 Control Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 52 i

MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual ii


List of Figures

Figure 1: Four Wire Device Wiring (Typical)................................................................................................... 5

Figure 2: Network Plus System Window ........................................................................................................ 7

Figure 3: Switches Window ............................................................................................................................ 11

Figure 4: Groups Window............................................................................................................................... 13

Figure 5: Panel Window ................................................................................................................................. 14

Figure 6: Annunciator Panel Window ............................................................................................................. 17

Figure 7: Panel Outputs.................................................................................................................................. 18

Figure 8: Options Dialog................................................................................................................................. 20

Figure 9: Default Key Assignments ................................................................................................................ 22

Figure 10: Dialer Settings ............................................................................................................................... 25

Figure 11: Dialer Configuration 1.................................................................................................................... 26


Figure 13: Call Directions ............................................................................................................................... 28

Figure 14: Zone Data...................................................................................................................................... 28

Figure 15: Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes..................................................................... 29

Figure 16: Circuits Window............................................................................................................................. 29

Figure 17: Devices Window............................................................................................................................ 30

Figure 18: Copy Window ................................................................................................................................ 33

Figure 19: Internal Circuits Window................................................................................................................ 34

Figure 20: Relates Window ............................................................................................................................ 35

Figure 21: Program Menu............................................................................................................................... 38

Figure 22: Selector Screen............................................................................................................................. 39 iii

MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual iv


1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts


This chapter provides an overview of the MR-2100/2200’s (hereafter called the MR-2200) features and supported devices.

1.2 General Information

Warnings: Before Programming

1. All applicable codes and standards should be considered when programming the Control

Unit.

2. The Control Unit continues to monitor input circuits and devices and acts according to the current program settings if an alarm is received while it is being programmed.

3. Loading a new database erases the current database before loading the new database. If the new database is not loaded after the erasure, the panel will not operate.

4. The database internal revision number included must match the number required by the

MR2 program, otherwise a Database Mismatch trouble condition is generated. This condition disables the panel until a correct MR2 program is loaded.

5. The database must be completely loaded for it to be considered valid. The program keeps track if the last database load was valid/complete or not. An invalid database load disables the panel until a valid database load is done.

Downloadable Database

The panel uses a downloaded database for input circuit programming. This database includes the addressable devices on-line, and the Zone LEDs, Bells, Functions Relays and Control Modules activated by addressable devices. This database is created and downloaded from an IBM compatible computer using the Modul-R Human Interface (MHI) program. Refer to the Modul-R

Human Interface Database Editor for instructions on downloading the database.

Note: All communications are stopped during the database load. This causes a trouble to be recorded by those units that are normally communicating with the panel.

1.3 Networks

General

The MR-2200 can be incorporated into a network including other MR-2900 panels and MR-2944 annunciators. Though up to 254 panels and annunciators can be supported by the network, such a network would probably be too large to properly maintain. The network can be setup for single building or multiple building operation.

Com2

MR 2200

ID #1

Com1 Com2

MR 2900

ID #2

Com1 Com2

MR 2944

ID #3

Com1

Com2

MR 2200

ID #5

Com1

Figure 1: Typical Network Layout

Com2

MR 2944

ID #4

Com1

1


The basic layout of the network is a single loop (see Figure 1). Each panel and annunciator has a unique ID. There is no requirement that the IDs be sequential or that they start with 1. The master panel can be any fire panel in the network. The panels work in a peer-to-peer fashion. This means that each panel is responsible for the programming of the inputs connected to it. The master panel does not control the network, but it is the central location for network information. Information is exchanged over the network via two basic means: a) specific frames, which are from one panel to another, and b) broadcast frames, which are from one panel to all others.

Notes:

1. For correct operation of the network, all panels and annunciators need to be loaded with the same version of operating programs and with the same database. If changes are made to the database, it is necessary that ALL panels and annunciators be reloaded.

2. When panels and annunciators are first installed, the panel ID must be entered into it before loading the database.

The special functions of master panel are: a) synchronize the clocks on the network by broadcasting the date and time at 3:30am every day; this means that only the master panel of a network requires that its clock be calibrated; b) maintain a network alarm list that includes all alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions induced on any panel on the network; c) transmit all signals from the network to a monitoring location.

Feature Operation

The following are the various types of frames that are sent on the network.

Commands & Restores

These specific frames are sent when a device in alarm requires operation of outputs at another unit. These commands are for the bells, relays, control modules, device messages and LEDs.

When the device itself restores, the restore commands are sent right away so that the other panels know that they can be reset. Anything operated stays latched until the Reset key is pressed.

Hotkey and Hotkey LED Operation

If a unit has its hotkey routing set for specific panels only, it sends Acknowledge, Reset, Signal

Silence and Second Stage Inhibit to these panels as specific frames. If hotkey routing is Global in the database, these are sent as broadcast frames.

If a panel’s function keys are sent to other panels, those panels send commands to the panel to have it turn on and off the hot key LEDs. This is so that there is indication that the key function has become available. This causes the LEDs to continue flashing after the key is pressed until the frame is received to turn off the LED.

Time/Date Change

This broadcast frame is sent by a panel or annunciator if the time or date is changed. The master panel also sends both a date and time change frame at 3:30am every day to synchronize all the clocks in the network.

Manual Switch Operation

If the state of any of the 16 software switches is changed manually at any panel, this change is broadcast to all other panels. The software switches are a system resource.

Network Reboot

If a Network Reboot command is initiated at a panel, it is broadcast normally and then the panel reboots itself. Upon receiving the Network Reboot command, a panel passes the command on to the next panel and then reboots itself. This has the affect of causing all the panels to reboot simultaneously.

2


Network Verify

Network Verify is an active process in which each panel and annunciator checks to make sure that all other panels can communicate with it. This requires that ALL PANELS in the network have same operating software and database.

Each panel sends out a Network Verify frame which is then passed around the network loop.

When the frame returns to its originating panel, it is checked to ensure it passed through the correct number of panels. Also, each panel checks the Network Verify frames from other panels to ensure that they are correct. Any errors and mismatches are identified.

Network Communications

Information is sent across the network in frames. In addition to the operator generated frames described above, alarm, supervisory, and trouble frames are sent across the network whenever a device or panel indicates a problem . There are two types of frames: specific and broadcast. Specific frames are sent from one unit to another. Broadcast frames are sent from one unit to all others.

Specific Frames

Specific frames deal with information generated at one panel and required at another. This type of frame is passed from panel to panel until it reaches its destination. Each panel has a list as to which port to send frames from to reach all other panels through the fewest number of panels.

Since networks generally have all communications links running at the same baud rate, this is generally the shortest time as well.

If there is a break in the communications (see Figure 2 ), the panel that cannot pass the message on sends it back the way it came. This causes the frame to go the long way around the network. If there are two breaks in the network loop, the frame is again reversed at the second break. When the originating panel receives it after the second turn around, the originating panel realizes there is a major fault in the network and considers the frame to be orphaned and destroys it. This generates a Network Reboot Required trouble. This is passed on to all other panels (or at least as many as can be reached). The reason the orphan frame is destroyed is to prevent unexpected operation when the network is finally repaired, such as a panel starts ringing its bells because of an alarm from the previous day.

M R 2 2 0 0

I D # 1

C O M 2 C O M 1

M R 2 9 0 0

I D # 2

C O M 2 C O M 1

M R 2 9 4 4

I D # 3

C O M 2 C O M 1

M R 2 2 0 0

I D # 5

C O M 1 C O M 2

M R 2 9 4 4

I D # 4

C O M 1 C O M 2

Figure 2: Single Network Break

Broadcast Frames

Broadcast frames deal with information that affects the entire network. When a broadcast frame is created by a panel or annunciator, it is sent out both network communications ports. Each unit in turn receives the broadcast in one port, act upon it and pass it on out the other port. Upon reaching the unit that generated the broadcast frame, that unit then disposes of it. This means that under normal circumstances, all units receive a broadcast twice and act upon it twice.

If there is break in a communications link (see Figure 2) the broadcast is disposed of by the unit unable to pass it on. In the situation where a unit has been removed from the loop (see Figure 3), the broadcast is passed only from com2 to com1 at the jump. In Figure 3, panel 5 passes the

3

MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual broadcast to panel 3, but panel 3 will not pass the broadcast on to panel 5 since it is supposed to be communicating to panel 4.

M R 2 2 0 0

I D # 1

C O M 2 C O M 1

M R 2 9 0 0

I D # 2

C O M 2 C O M 1

M R 2 9 4 4

I D # 3

C O M 2 C O M 1

M R 2 2 0 0

I D # 5

C O M 1 C O M 2

M R 2 9 4 4

I D # 4

C O M 1 C O M 2

Figure 3: Panel Removed from Network

1.4 Addressable Devices

Supported Devices

The MR-2200 can use analog/addressable devices. There are two general types of devices: sensors and modules. The following devices are supported:

MRI-M500C

MRI-M500X

Control module

Isolator module

Modules


MRI-M500M

MRI-M501M

MRI-M502M



Monitor Module for 2- wire smoke detectors

Classes A/B initiating

MRI-M500S

MRI-M500R

MRI-M500X

Control module

Relay Module


4


MRI-1251

MRI-1551

MRI-2251

MRI-2551

MRI-2251T

MRI-2551TH

Ionization type smoke detector, low profile


Photoelectric type smoke detector, low profile


Photoelectric type smoke detector c/w heat detector, low profile

Photoelectric type smoke detector c/w heat detector Sensors

MRI-3251

MRI-5251

MRI-5551

Combination photo, ion and heat detector, low profile

Fixed temperature detector, low profile

Fixed temperature detector

MRI-5251R Rate of Rise and fixed temperature detector, low profile

Rate of Rise and fixed temperature detector MRI-5551R

The MRI-M500S control module can be used to control a supervised output, such as a bell or strobe circuit. The control module monitors the circuit wiring and troubles will be reported. The module will require a separate 24 VDC supply for the controlled circuit. When programming the database in MHI, be sure to program the control module correctly. Choose any “Control ( str )” other than “Control (relay)” for the MRI-M500S module. The MR-2400 will not operate a control module if the supervised circuit is shorted. Also there are options in MHI that affect the MRI-M500S control module but not the MRI-M500R relay module.

The MRI-M500R relay provides two Form C relays. Choose “Control (relay)” for the MRI-M500R module. There are options in MHI that affect the MRI-M500R relay module that do not affect the

MRI-M500S control module.

The MRI-M500X isolator module is used to prevent wiring faults from affecting the entire circuit. It divides the addressable circuit into sections. The isolator has separate IN and OUT wiring. A short on one side of the isolator is not seen on or affects the other side. Isolator modules do not use addresses. The isolator relies on a voltage threshold to determine whether it should be isolating or not. This voltage threshold is around 6.5V. All isolators in a system are in isolated mode on system power up. If there is an excess of current draw, the isolator will not close. When the short is removed, the isolator module automatically closes the circuit again. The LED on the isolator module turns on when the module is in isolated mode, otherwise it flashes periodically. System

Sensor recommends no more than 25 devices between isolator modules since the inrush current of the devices may mimic a short condition preventing the isolator from closing. MRI-3251 detectors have an inrush current of up to 10 times that of other devices, thus only two can be placed between isolators.

The sensors all use bases for mounting. Besides the standard plain bases, there are also relay bases, isolator bases and a sounder base. The available bases are:

MRI-B501

MRI-B501B

MRI-B210LP

Flangeless base for all sensors

Flanged base for MRI-x551 sensors

Flanged base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile

5


MRI-B501BH

MRI-B524BI

MRI-B224BI

MRI-B524RB

Sounder base for all sensors

Isolator base for MRI-x551 sensors

Isolator base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile

Relay base for MRI-x551 sensors

MRI-B224RB Relay base for MRx251 sensors, low profile

The sensor LED activates the relay and sounder bases. When this LED stays on for more than 10 seconds, the base activates. This requires that the MR-2200 have the LED mode set to FLASH/

ON. This is done through the LCD Menu by choosing PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/LED MODE/

FLASH. The MR-2200 only turns on the LEDs of up to 5 devices per addressable circuit to prevent excess current flow. While the panel continues to respond to further alarms from the circuit, the panel does not turn on additional LEDs. The MRI-B501BH sounder base requires a separate 24

VDC supply for operation. If the polarity of this supply is reversed for more than 10 seconds, the sounder base activates.

Isolator bases function the same as isolator modules. The sensor plugged into the base is connected to the IN wiring to the base. The isolator is between the sensor and the OUT wiring.

While both sensors and modules have rotary dials that allow for addresses from 00 to 99, modules add 100 internally to the address programmed, thus using the address range 100 to 199. Since sensors and modules come from the factory addressed as 00, we do not allow that address to be used for an installed device. Address 0 is used for indication of wiring faults on the addressable circuit.

6


Device Faults

The following troubles (with condition code letter) can be reported by or for addressable devices:

• Missing (M): A device listed in the database is not reporting back when polled by the panel. For a new installation, this is generally indicative of devices that have been misaddressed. This error can also occur if there are any wiring faults.

• Illegal (I): A device is reporting in on an address that the database shows as unused. For a new installation, this is generally indicative of devices that have been mis-addressed.

For illegal sensors, since there is no programming available, if an alarm condition is detected, the MR-2200 operates all its bell circuits. In a network system, only the local panel activates its bells. The MR-2200 always ignores illegal modules.

• Wrong Type (U): This occurs if the device is not the type expected for the address. For example, the database lists an address to have a ion smoke detector, but a photo smoke detector has reported for the address. This error is also used if the panel cannot determine the type of the device. If the device goes into alarm, the panel operates normally.

• Trouble (T): Sensors: The device is defective and needs to be replaced.

Modules: The extended circuit from the module has a wiring fault. Note: Control modules that supervise their output circuits are not operated if the output circuit is shorted.

• Duplicate (D): This means that two devices are using the same address. The MR-

2200HS-3200 does a check every hour for duplicate devices. If either device goes into alarm, the panel operates normally. Note: Due to the method used to detect duplicate devices, it is possible for a single device to appear as duplicate devices. Generally, the device needs to be replaced.

7


1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors

General

4-wire detectors can be reset by using one of the function relays on the panel. The relay is not programmed for any use, that is, it is unassigned. The next requirement is that a non-zero duration be programmed for it (see Section 2.5.1). A duration of zero disables this function. Once this is done, wire the power for the device as shown in Figure 4. A third party power supply (must be UL/

ULC-listed compatible power supply suitable for fire applications) can be used instead of the Aux

Power as shown. Whenever the System Reset operator key is pressed when neither LED is flashing, causes the relay to operate for the duration programmed.

To Monitor Module

Input

-

+

4 Wire Device

RLY 4

RLY 3

RLY 2

-

AUX

+

-

AUX

+

COM

NC

NO

COM

NC

NO

COM

NC

NO

RLY 1

COM

NC

NO

Figure 4: Four Wire Device Wiring (Typical)

8


2.0 Editing MHINP Databases


This chapter describes the windows used to program the system.

2.2 General Comments

Overview

The editing of a system is done through a series of input windows. Editing starts with the System

Level and progresses to the Panel Level, then to the Input Level, and finally to the Relate Level.

The Main Menu and option speed keys are not available while editing/viewing the system. While editing is being done, the word OPEN is displayed in the Status Bar. This is to remind the user that the system database is open and that the computer should not be turned off. If the computer is turned off while the database is open, it may become corrupted.

If the current database has been previously verified and you select Edit, a requester is displayed confirming your request to edit the database. If No is chosen, then the database is displayed in

View mode. Editing the database changes the database to a non-verified state and changes the

Last Edit Date.

Prior to an editing session, the database is automatically backed up. This back up copy has the same name as the original database, but incorporates a .BAK extension. If a database becomes corrupted, delete it and rename its .BAK backup file to have a .DBA extension. This restores the database to the state prior to the last editing session.

Note: When upgrading from a version 17 (or earlier) system, a number of items that were programmed at the panel are now included in the database. See the file UPDATE.TXT for a complete description of these changes. Follow these instructions to obtain the required information before upgrading your firmware to version 18 or higher:

1. Connect your computer to the panel and open the Terminal window.

2. Select the Printer screen in the Terminal: press 14<Tab>.

3. You should note that the title bar of the Terminal window displays the text "File logging in progress...". If this does not appear, press the button Log On.

4. In the terminal window, type the following command: 99?

5. The panel's configuration settings are listed in the Terminal window and it is also saved in the file: LOG_CONT.TXT, located in your program directory. (This filename is programmable in Version 18 or higher.)

6. Close the Terminal window.

7. You may now view the contents of the file using any standard word processor or the

NOTEPAD program supplied with Windows.

Network-Capable Panel Types MHIThe following panels can be used in a network configuration.

• MR-2200HS-3200 Fire Panel: The MR-2200 has two (Class A or B) SLCs and two

(expandable to eight) NACs. The NACs can be programmed to be used as either bells or strobe type circuits. The MR-2614 Annunciator can be attached to the MR-2200 panel. It is considered an extension of the panel by MHI and does not change how the panel interfaces with other annunciators.

• MR-2900 (mb2931) Fire Panel: This is an MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2931 motherboard. This panel accepts all input circuit modules and has four Class A or eight

Class B power-reversing output circuits. These output circuits can be programmed to be used as either bells or releaser type circuits. This is the standard board for the MR-2900.

These panels can be used in a network configuration.

• MR-2944 Annunciator: It includes the memory required to have a database loaded into it.

This allows for less information to be sent on the network. An optional 4x20 LCD can be

9

MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual included. This annunciator has two communications ports. This allows the annunciator to reside in the network loop. It uses the MR-2910 Network Board.

10


2.3 System Window

Description

The System Window (see Figure 5 ) allows editing of all system level options, as well as detailing other system wide information.

The Title Bar of the window shows whether editing or viewing of the database is being preformed and the name of the current database.

Figure 5: Modul-R System Window

The text in the top left corner provides information about the database. The top line gives the date and time the database was last edited. The next line states whether the current contents have been verified or not; and whether the database has been compressed or not.

The options Bell System, Subsequent Alarm, Resound, Evac and Waterflow all affect how the notification appliance circuits (NAC), hereafter referred to as bells, react to alarm conditions.

Bell System

Bell System is a drop down list for selecting how the bells and strobes will operate. This sets the base operation for the entire network. If coded bells are required, the bell codes are defined for each input individually. The following options are available:

• Alert: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAC timeout, the panel will progress to Second Stage. Second stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.

• Evac: A First Stage alarm will activate selected bells in Evacuation mode. Second Stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode. There is no timeout from First to Second Stage.

• Alert/Evac: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Evacuation mode and all other bells on the panel in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot

Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the system will progress to Second Stage.

Second Stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.

• Staged: The 1st alarm will activate selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or

Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the selected bells are switched to Evacuation mode and the next bells, i.e. the ones with the next higher

11

MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual number, are activated in Alert mode. This sequence is repeated until all bells are in

Evacuation mode. When the highest numbered bell circuit switches to Evacuation mode, all bell and strobe circuits on the panel will be turned on in Evacuation mode. For example, if the alarm activates Bells 1 and 4, after the NAK timeout, Bells 1 and 4 are switched to

Evacuation mode and Bells 2 and 5 are set to Alert mode. A 2nd alarm will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.

Notes:

1. Bells must be assigned consecutive bells circuits with no Releasers assigned in between Bells. For example: circuits 1, 2, 3, 4 can be assigned as Bells but not circuits 1, 2, 4, 5 with circuit 3 a Releaser.

2. Control modules cannot be programmed as bell or strobe if the Staged Bell system is used.

Subsequent Alarm

Subsequent Alarm controls how Alert, Evac and Alert/Evac type bell systems behave when a new alarm is received while one is still active. 1st Stage has the panel repeat the First Stage operation.

2nd Stage has the panel go immediately to Second Stage operation.

Resound

Resound controls how the panel handles the automatic resounding of silence bells when a new alarm is received. There are two modes:

• Local: Each panel resounds only its own silenced bells when a new alarm is received.

This would be used when panels in a network are in different buildings, such as a campus.

• Global: All panels in a network resound silenced bells when a new alarm condition is received on any panel in the network. This is used when the panels are all in the same building, such as a large plant.

Evac

Evac controls whether the bell system Evacuation Mode sounds Steady (continuously) or uses a

Temporal pattern as specified in ANSI S3.41 and ISO 8201 Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal .

The pattern used ½s On, ½s Off, ½s On, ½s Off, ½s On, 1½s Off repeated.

Waterflow

Waterflow controls if bells can be silenced if they are started by a waterflow type input. If Non-

Silenceable is chosen, bell circuits activated due to a waterflow input cannot be silenced until the waterflow device has restored.

Language

Language chooses English (default), French or Hungarian characters to be used in messages.

See Appendix C Languages of the Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for a description of the letters supported and the method of entering them.

12


Alarm List Sequence

Alarm List Sequence controls which end of the Alarm List is shown automatically. If First is chosen, the first (oldest) item in the alarm list is shown. If Last is chosen, the last (newest) item in the alarm list is shown. Regardless of order, alarms always take precedence in being shown. Another way to think of it is that First shows where the fire started while Last shows where the fire has gotten to.

Disconnects

Disconnects controls which panels the Signal Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Releaser Disconnect and Common Disconnect hot keys affect.

• Local: The Disconnect hot keys affect only the panel they are on.

• Global: The Disconnect hot keys affect all the panels in the network. This means that if any Disconnect key is pressed on a panel, all other panels in the system take on the state of that Disconnect, either on or off.

System Message

The System Message is a text entry box for defining a message that is 3 lines by 20 characters that is used to identify the system. This message is printed at the top of printouts and shown on some service terminal screens, but it is not used in any LCD except in STATUS/IDENTIFICATION.

System Banner

The System Banner is a 20 character message that is used as a banner for the Main Menu of the

LCD. The default banner is “Modul-R by Secutron”.

Enforce Local LED Rules

The Enforce Local LED Rules check box forces an LED on an input's panel be related. Normally an LED anywhere in the system is all that is required. Note: The common LEDs of any panel are based upon the zone LEDs that are displayed by the panel, not based upon the inputs to the panel.

Enforce Group Association

The Enforce Group Association checking check box enables MHI to check to see if a group association has been included in the relates of inputs.

Observe Daylight Savings Time

The Observe Daylight Savings Time check box enables or disables the automatic changing of the clock for Daylight Savings Time. If enable, the system moves 1 hour ahead the first Sunday of

April and fall back 1 hour the last Sunday of October (North American dates).

Pre-Alarm Buzzer

The Pre-Alarm Buzzer, when enabled, will cause a tone to sound when an addressable device is in alarm during the Retard period. The tone is a triple beep repeated every second.

Master ID

Master ID defines which panel in a network acts as the Master panel. Only control panels may be chosen as the Master panel. The Master panel retains an alarm list for the entire network and synchronizes the date and time on all panels and annunciators at 3:30am everyday. (The alarm list functionality is programmable for several modes of operation. See below for more detail.)

13


Alarm List Mode

Alarm List Mode sets the way the Alarm List messages are displayed on fire panels in the system.

Annunciators always receive messages as marked in the database. There are three modes of displaying messages:

• Local: Each fire panel shows only Alarm List entries that are for that panel only.

• Global: Each fire panel shows Alarm List entries for itself and all other panels and annunciators.

• Master: The master fire panel shows the Alarm List entries for all panels and annunciators while all other fire panels show only their own Alarm List entries.

Common Relays

Common Relays controls what signals affect the common alarm, common supervisory and common trouble relays of each panel. The are two settings:

• Local: The common relays of a panel follow the events of events on that panel only.

• follow Alarm List Mode: The common relays of a panel react to both events of the panel and any events listed in its Alarm List.

Pushbuttons

The System Window has the following push buttons on the right hand side:

• Exit: Closes the System Window and, if editing, causes the database to be saved. After an edit session, a requester asks if the database should be Verified. A database has to verify without errors before it can be downloaded.

• Panels: Displays the Panel Window. If no panel is currently defined, the Add Panel Box

(see page 19) is displayed.

• Switches: Displays the Switches Window. This window determines which devices are attached to the switches and the timers associated to each switch. See section 2.3

Switches Window.

• Groups: Displays the Groups Window. This window is used to define groups of relates.

See section 2.4 Groups Window.

• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the

Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .

• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 of the Modul-R Human

Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.

• Settings: Defines the Verify warnings to disable and/or errors to reduce to warnings for the current database. Not all warnings/errors can be disabled/reduced. The use of this is not recommended, but provided for special circumstances.

14


2.4 Switches Window

Overview

The Switches Window (see Figure 6 ) allows for the setting of the On/Off (Day/Night) switches.

There are 16 system wide switches available. All panels in the network keep track of their portion of the devices related to each switch. Relays, LEDs and control modules follow the On/Off state of the switch they are related to. Addressable sensors use Day sensitivity while the switch is on and

Night sensitivity while the switch is off. The timers can be used to have the switch change state at set times each day. Switches can be operated manually at the panel whether they have timers or not. If the Switch is associated to a Hot Key, the Hot Key then operates the switches, causing the related LEDs, relays and control modules to react. Changing a switch manually at one panel causes all panels in the network to change switch state.

Figure 6: Switches Window

Notes:

1. Addressable detectors can only be related to a single switch each.

2. Relays, LEDs and control modules controlled by more than one switch stay on as long as any switch operating them is on.

The title bar of the window always lists the currently highlighted switch.

Switches Table

The Switches Table shows all 16 possible switches and highlights the current one. Select any one to make it the current switch. List entries show the message RELATES FOUND for switches that have related devices.

HH:MM (Timer)

The HH:MM (Timer) entries control the times that the switch changes state. An even number of times must be entered, ie. each on must have a corresponding off. All times are entered using 24 hour notation, e.g.: one minute after midnight=0:01, noon=12:00, 3 PM=15:00, 4 AM=4:00, etc. A time of 0:00 is considered as not used. If an action at midnight is desired set the time to 0:01, one minute after midnight; or 23:59, a minute before midnight. MHI sorts the times into ascending order after the Switches Window is closed.

15


Start Mode - On

The Start Mode - On check box determines if the first time listed should turn the switch On or Off. If it is not checked, the first time turns the switch off. If it is checked, the first time turns the switch on.

The on and off indication beside each time entry changes to reflect what each time in the sorted list does.

Use Switch as Custom Hot Key

Use switch as Custom Hot Key allows the switch to be manually controlled by the Hot Keys. A hot key can be assigned to turn the switch on and another to turn it off. These keys are marked as HK in the Switches Table.

Description

Description is a 20 character message that describes the Switch usage. This is useful in that the switch now has a description of its usage that is easier to understand when assigning Switches to

Hot Keys.

Pushbuttons

There are five push buttons on the right side:

• Exit: Close the Switches Window and return to the System Window. If there are any invalid times entered (ie greater than 23:59), MHI requests corrections.

• Reset: This removes all relates and all times for the currently highlighted switch.

• Relate: Shows the Relate Window. Items marked *on* are operated/controlled by the switch.





16


2.5 Groups Window

Overview

The Groups Window (see Figure 7 ) is used for creating and editing the Groups of relates. The

Title Bar shows the current group.

This dialog allows you to setup "Groups" which are composed of a text description/message and relates. Groups are a method of establishing zone representations. A zone representation may include a message and/or a group of Relates. Inputs (ie. circuits and/or devices) may relate to a

Group or number of Groups and thus acquire all Relates that are referenced by them. Inputs can also separately adopt the Group message. Making a change to a Group affects all inputs (circuits and devices) related to the Group. This is a very powerful feature that can significantly speed up the creation of medium to large size systems as well as simplify changes. Forethought should be placed in defining appropriate Groups. Up to 250 groups may be defined.

Figure 7: Groups Window

The use of Groups greatly simplifies the changes made to a database as changes are needed by the system. For example, if new door is installed that has to be unlocked during a fire alarm, the control module that unlocks the door is simply added a Group. This single change is then automatically picked up by any inputs that are related to the Group. Since this number could be hundreds, the use of the Groups makes databases easier to maintain and decreases the likelihood of mistakes when items are added.

Note: Though any relationship can be selected for inclusion into a group, an input that references the group must be able to accommodate the group’s relates. It may be advantageous to separate groups in these cases.

Group List

The Group List shows all the defined groups along with their message (if any) and if there are any relates defined for the group. The current group is highlighted. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another group.

Message Description

The Message/Description is used to enter a message for the group. This set of text-boxes allows you to enter a message describing the Group. You are allowed space for 3 lines by 20 characters.

If desired, this message may be adopted by a circuit or device by checking the Use Grp Msg check-box and specifying this Group ID. This is a powerful feature if you are defining a large number of inputs that require the same message.

17


Pushbuttons

The following push buttons are defined:

• Exit: Close the Groups Window and return to the previous window.

• Add Group: This defines a new group ID. The new group can have any number between

1 and 250. By default, the number is the next one available. There is no need for the groups to be sequentially numbered or to start at 1.

• Delete Group: This removes the group from the list. You are asked if you want to have references to the group automatically removed.

• Reset Group: This removes all relates for the currently highlighted group.

• Change ID: This allows the group ID to be changed. This may need to be done if two databases are being merged together. MHI automatically changes all references to use the new ID. A gauge is displayed to show the progress of the change.

• Relate: Shows the Relate Window. Items marked *on* are operated by inputs related to the group. When relating inputs to groups, be sure that all relates defined by the group are allowable for the input.

• Copy Relates: Copies the relates and/or message from an input point to the current group (see Figure 21). The values of the panel, circuit and device are required. Most conventional circuits use a device number of 0 (zero). Press Copy to copy the information.





2.6 Panel Window

Overview

The Panel Window (see Figure 8 ) allows editing of all panel level options. It defines the hardware mounted in the panel and the functionality of the programmable outputs. The programming controls provided change to reflect the capabilities of the currently selected panel. The Title Bar describes the currently highlighted panel or annunciator.

18

Figure 8: Panel Window


Pushbuttons

The Panel Window has the following push buttons along the right side:

• Exit: Close the Panel Window and return to the System Window.

• Add Panel: Add another panel to the system. A dialog box is displayed. The default options are to use the next available panel ID and to select an MR-2200 or MR-2900 panel. Change these values as required. You are also asked if you want MHI to automatically set the Next ID. If allowed, this panel has the next higher numbered panel as its Next ID and the panel with the next lower number is set to have this panel as its Next

ID. If the new panel is the highest numbered panel, it uses the lowest numbered panel as its Next ID.

• Delete: Remove the current panel from the system. This also loses all input circuit information for the panel. Any of the panel's outputs that are referenced become invalid and are removed by the next verify.

• Input Circuits: Display the Circuits Window.

• Internal Circuits: Display the Internal Circuit Window.

• More Info: This displays a dialog box listing basic information about the panel including the date the database was last downloaded into a panel, the number of times downloaded, etc.

• Change Type: Displays a dialog box for changing the type of the current panel. This allows for easier correction of mistakes in creating the initial database and for easier updating of the database if a panel type is changed in the field. Only certain type changes are allowed.

Note: This can have far reaching effects on a system. Ensure that changing the panel type is required prior to doing so. Any information that is no longer valid with the new panel type is lost.

• Change ID: Displays a dialog box for changing the ID of the current panel. MHI automatically changes all references to use the new ID. This process could take a long time for a large database. A gauge is displayed to show the progress of the change.





Message

The Message is a text entry box. This is a 3 line by 20 character message that is associated with the Panel. This message is displayed in Alarm Lists with signals that are generated by this panel.

It also is included in any print-outs generated by the Master Panel of the system. This message should include enough information that identifies the panel and its location to fire or service personnel.

Mode

The Mode list-box allows you to select the circuit type for the addressable (SLC) circuits. Choices are 2 Class B (Style 4) Circuits or 2 Class A (Style 6) Circuits for the MR-2200 and 1 Class B (Style

4) Circuit or 1 Class A (style 6) Circuit for the MR-2100.

Outputs

The Outputs area lists the function of the outputs of the panel. Use the Outputs Button to show the

Outputs Dialog, which allows for the programming of the Outputs and the relays.

19


Options

The Options button displays the Options Dialog. This allows for the programming of the various panel options, such as Hot Keys, bell timers, etc.

LED Annunciator Connect

The LED Annunciator Connect is marked by default (to enable the main display). You can select the number of LEDs, up to 72 LED zones, which are considered an extension of the panel itself.

Choose the number of LED zones using the Local Ann. LED Cnt drop down box. Up to seven

MR-2614s can be attached to the panel, each one shows the same information.

IDs Button

The IDs button displays all possible IDs of the MR-2614 and MR-2644 annunciators. Check those

IDs that are connected to the system.

Panel List

The Panel List is a list-box located in the top left corner of the window. It lists all the panels, both

Control and Annunciator, which are defined in the system. The highlighted entry in the List is the one that is currently being edited. I’s description is also shown in the title bar of the Panel Window.

If a different panel is selected, all the controls in the window change to reflect this. Use the

<Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another panel.

Next ID

The Next ID is a text entry box located to the right of the push buttons at the top of the Panel

Window. It is not displayed for single panel systems. It is used to define the ID of the next panel in the network loop. Specify the panel ID of the panel to be connected to the COM 1 terminals of the current panel

Hot Key Routing

Hot Key Routing is a set of radio buttons for setting the other panels or annunciators to be controlled by the current panel. To have no other panels affected by the current panel, mark Local.

To have the current panel affect all other panels on the network, mark Global. To choose only some panels, mark Custom. A text entry box entitled route panel IDs is then displayed. Enter the panel IDs to be controlled separated by commas, e.g. “2, 3, 4". Each ID listed receives Hot Key commands from the current panel whenever its Hot Keys are pressed.

20


2.7 Annunciators Window

Overview

Annunciators have the following unique controls for programming (see Figure 9 ).

Figure 9: Annunciator Panel Window

LCD Check Box

The LCD check box is located immediately left of the buttons. It indicates whether or not the annunciator has an optional alpha-numeric LCD. This setting is used by MHI only to determine if the Message Receive check box should be shown for the annunciator in the Relate Window. This value is not sent to the annunciator. The annunciator determines for itself if an LCD is installed or not.

LED Count

LED Count is located directly below the LCD check box. This defines the number of LED zones the annunciator uses. A count of zero disables the Hot LEDs and Common LED.

Hot LED

Hot LED is located directly below the LED Count drop down. This value defines the first of four

LED zones the annunciator uses for internal functions. Any of the zones can be chosen with the requirement that there are four consecutive zones available. Entering a zone of 0 disables the hot key zones. These zones reflect the current status of the annunciator and the panel(s) to which it sends commands.

21


Interpreting Flashing LEDs

The LEDs have the following meaning when flashing:

Zone n alarm: Acknowledge available

Zone n supervisory: Reset available (green)

Zone n trouble: Reset available (yellow)

Zone n+1 alarm: Signal Silence active

Zone n+1 supervisory: Signal Silence available

Zone n+1 trouble: 2nd Stage Inhibit active

Zone n+2 alarm: 2nd Stage Inhibit available

Zone n+2 supervisory: Future use

Zone n+2 trouble: Future use

Zone n+3 alarm: Future use

Zone n+3 supervisory: Future use

Zone n+3 trouble: Power On

Note: The Power On LED refers to the 24 VDC to the annunciator, not to any AC source.

Common LED

Common LED is located directly below the Hot LED setting. This is the LED zone the annunciator uses as a common alarm, supervisory and trouble indication. It is a summation of the zone LEDs of the annunciator. Any LED zone may be used. The zone chosen is not available for general annunciation. Entering a zone of 0 disables the common zone.

Ports

Ports is located below the Common LED setting. This option enables (double) or disables (single) the COM 1 network port. If both ports are enabled, the Next ID text box becomes available (see above for a description of Next ID).

2.8 Outputs Dialog

Overview

The Outputs Dialog (see Figure 10 ) allows for the programming of the panel’s outputs and function relays.

22

Figure 10: Panel Outputs


Outputs

The Outputs section is a list box that is used to select the output to program. Once the output is selected, it is programmable for the following output types:

• Bell: This is a standard signalling circuit. It does not sound codes.

• Strobe: This signalling circuit for use with strobes. Strobe circuits cannot be silenced until the system is reset.

• Coded Bell: This signalling circuit sounds out the code for any input that operates it and then silences.

• Auxiliary Power (AuxPwr): This turns on the Output continuously to supply power for auxiliary devices, such as annunciators. If a Duration time is given for the Auxiliary Power circuit, the circuit is powered off for that number of seconds (from 1 to 30) when the panel

Reset key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing. This allows for the reset of 4 wire detectors. A duration time of 0 prevents this operation. Auxiliary Power circuits are turned off by the panel while it is in its power up cycle.

• Follow Supervisory (follow Supv): The output sounds when there is any supervisory condition present on the panel. Pressing Acknowledge silences the circuit.

• Follow Trouble (follow Trbl): The output sounds when there is any trouble condition present on the panel. Pressing Acknowledge silences the circuit.

Relay Delay

Relay Delay is the times that the relay waits before activating. A delay of 0 causes instant operation. This can be from 0 to 60 seconds.

Relay Duration

Relay Duration affects the time the relay is activated. For relays operated from inputs, it is the minimum time the relay operates. The relay must stay on for this length of time before it can be reset. This is for equipment that must remain off a length of time before it can be started up again.

If no input operates the relay, it is available for the reset of 4 wire devices. If the duration is not 0

(zero), then the relay activates for the duration time when the Reset hot key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing. The duration can be from 0 to 300 seconds (5 minutes).

23


2.9 Options Dialog

Overview

The Options Dialog (see Figure 11 ) allows for the programming of the panel and annunciator options. These settings affect the current panel only.

24

Figure 11: Options Dialog

Buzzer Mode

Buzzer Mode sets when the panel buzzer sounds. Normal causes the buzzer to sound for new supervisory and trouble conditions. All causes the buzzer to sound for all new conditions.

Note: Always set this option to All (default) to meet current codes.

Bypass Priv

Bypass Priv.

sets the privilege level required to set circuit and device bypasses, and manual control of relays, control modules and switches. This privilege can be set to Level 2 (default) or

Level 1.

Disconnect

Disconnect sets the privilege level required for the Disconnect and Test Mode Hot Keys. These can be set to Level 1 (default) or Level 0. If Level 0 is chosen, the Disconnect Hot Keys can be operated without a passcode being entered into the panel.

Banner Mode

Banner Mode dictates what the top line of the Main Menu of the LCD is. There are four modes of operation:

• Status Ind.: This mode displays the lines SYSTEM NORMAL and SYSTEM OFF

NORMAL.

• Panel Ban.: This mode displays the 20 characters of text entered into the text box that appears below the drop down while this mode is selected.

• System Ban.: This mode displays the text defined by the System Banner.

• Equip. Desc.: This mode allows the panel to display its own identification text.


AC Fail

The AC Fail is the delay before the panel reports that it has lost AC power. The panel itself goes into AC Fail mode to conserve power immediately upon losing AC. This delay is the length of time before the panel generates the trouble condition. This can be set from 0 to 1800 minutes (30 hours). If a time of 0 minutes is entered, the panel uses a 10 second delay. Note: For a panel connected to UL-listed monitoring stations, a time of 6 to 12 hours (360 to 720 minutes) is required. The 30-hour time is available for those locations with long standby requirements.

Fan Delay

Fan Delay sets the number of scans between the reset of each Control Module (relay) on an addressable circuit. This is to allow for the staggered restart of fans when the system is reset. This option can be enabled or disabled on each addressable circuit as required. It has no affect on

Control Modules (supervising).

Bell Cutoff

Bell Cutoff is the length of time the bells sound before they are automatically silenced by the panel.

A time of 0 disables this feature. The cutoff can be set from 5 to 30 minutes.

Coded Bell Speed

Coded Bell Speed sets the time interval between the bits of the codes. This speed can be 1, ¾, ½ or ¼ second. The time between digits is three times this speed. The time between rounds is seven times this speed. Note that a minimum of three rounds of coded bells is required per NFPA 72.

Maintenance Margin

Maintenance Margin sets the gap between the maintenance threshold and the alarm threshold for addressable sensors. If the sensor stays between these two values for the Maintenance Retard time, the panel reports a Maintenance Alert trouble for the sensor. The margin can be set from 0 to

500, with 0 giving no warning and 500 giving the earliest warning.

Maintenance Retard

Maintenance Retard is the number of consecutive scans the addressable sensor has to stay between the maintenance and alarm thresholds to generate the Maintenance Alert trouble. This retard can be from 5 to 50 scans. Scan time can vary from 2.5 to 5 seconds with usual values from

3.5 to 4 seconds.

Enable Disconnect and Test Timeout

Enable Disconnect & Test Timeout enables or disables disconnect timeouts. If the timeouts are disabled, Relay Disconnect, Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect and Test Mode must all be manually ended. If enabled, these functions are automatically ended after four hours.

Suppress Missing Signals

Suppress Missing Signals allows for the suppression of device missing signals for a loop that has a short or ground fault condition. If enabled, the panel only reports the short or ground fault condition, but not the missing device messages.

25


Hot Keys

Hot Keys are a set of drop down boxes that allow you to set the functions of the operator keys on the front of the panel. There are 8 keys, each with red and green LED (some keys may have yellow instead of red LEDs). The LEDs are used to display function status.

SYSTEM CONTROLS

Acknowledge

Signal Silence

System Reset

User Assigned

Figure 12: Default Key Assignments

26


The keys and their functions are as follows:

Key Action

Acknowledge Silences the buzzer and acknowledges new troubles and alarms. If the buzzer is on, Acknowledge will silence it. If the buzzer is not on, any flashing LEDs will become steady. The green LED will flash when there is something to acknowledge.

Signal

Silence

Silences the bells. The green LED will flash when Signal Silence is available. There may be a silence inhibit before the bells can be silenced if they are activated by an

Alarm condition. The yellow LED flashes when the bells have been silenced. The bells will reactivate if a subsequent Alarm is received by the panel.

System

Reset

Second

Stage Inhibit

System Reset resets part or all of the system.

The green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset. The yellow LED flashes when there are conventional smoke detector circuits in alarm.

Press System Reset to reset the smoke detectors. The yellow LED also flashes if the ground fault relay is activated. Press System Reset to deactivate the ground fault relay to check for restores and additional ground faults. If ground faults remain, the relay will be re-activated after 5 to 30 seconds.

Pressing System Reset with no LEDs flashing will operate any relays that are not used by the system and deactivate any Aux Power outputs. The time they remain open is determined by the Duration time programmed. If the Duration is 0, the relay or Aux Power output will not operate.

Notes:

1. The system cannot be reset until all circuits and devices are reset.

2. If both LEDs are flashing, the green LED function has precedence.

3. The green LED will remain flashing after System Reset is pressed until addressable devices have had their LEDs reset.

Prevents the automatic operation of second stage operation. This applies only to panels with ALERT or STAGED type bell systems. For ALERT systems, pressing the Second Stage Inhibit will prevent the panel from going into second stage. For

STAGED systems, it will prevent the system from going to the next stage. Second

Stage Inhibit has no effect on an EVAC type bell system. The green LED will flash when Second Stage Inhibit is available, and the yellow LED will flash when it has been activated.

Fire Drill

Releaser

Disconnect

Activates all the bell circuits, both regular and coded, in Alert mode. Press a second time to have all bell circuits sound in Evacuation mode. Press a third time to end the

Fire Drill. The red LED will flash while the Fire Drill is happening. The Fire Drill cannot be performed if the bells are already activated, or if AC power is off. The Fire

Drill is automatically ended if an alarm condition occurs.

Causes the releaser circuits to ignore any new alarms. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the releasers are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press again to restore normal operation. The red

LED will flash while active. If no releasers can be disconnected, Releaser Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

27


Key

Relay

Disconnect

Test Mode

Signal

Disconnect

Common

Disconnect

General

Alarm

Halt

Switch n On

Switch n Off

Action

Causes the function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms. Press again to restore normal operation. The red LED will flash while active. If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

Places panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The red LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. It follows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI). During test mode, the remote annunciator zone LEDs becomes non-latching for the zone(s) under test. The common indicators, bells, relays and releasers are not activated and no commands are sent to other units and no signal is sent out of Port 3. Test signals can be archived or not as required.

Before beginning testing, the circuits/devices to be tested must be selected. All unselected circuits/devices will operate normally. Be sure that the panel is in test mode. To select circuits/devices, select PROGRAM from the Main Menu on the

LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter> key selects the item. Then select ADDRESSABLE, then TEST. Enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear> will return to the previous menu.

When test mode is ended, all zones and devices selected for testing automatically return to normal operation.

Note: There is no Ground Fault isolation while Test Mode is active.

Disables sounding of the bells. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the bells are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press Signal Disconnect again to re-enable the bells. The red LED will flash while the bells are disabled. Signal Disconnect is not available if the bells are already activated. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

Disables the municipal relays from functioning. Press again to enable relays. The yellow LED flashes while the relays are disabled. The municipal relays affected are programmable. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

Initiates the general evacuation sequence. All bells are activated in Evacuation mode, selected function relays are activated and selected releaser circuits are activated and municipal alarm relay is activated. The yellow LED will flash when activated. Press System Reset to cancel the General Alarm. Note: General Alarm is recorded in the panel archive.

Stops the operation of all releaser type outputs on the panel. The green LED flashes when the key is available and the yellow LED flashes when it has been pressed.

Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and On. The yellow LED will flash while the switch is forced On. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is on, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.

Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and Off. The yellow LED will flash while the switch is forced Off. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is off, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.

28


Key

Manual

Restart

Action

This will cause the programmed control modules to reset after the system has been reset in general. This is an MEA (New York City) requirement.

Dialer Settings

The Dialer Settings dialog (see Figure 10 ) allows for the programming of various communications options.

The 1 st , 2 nd and 3 rd Telephone Numbers can be up to 32 digits. Special digits may be used to perform the following functions:

• HEX (B)-simulates the [*] key

• HEX (C)-simulates the [#] key

• HEX (D)-forces the panel to search for dial tone; must be first digit of telephone number

• HEX (E)-forces the panel to pause for 2 seconds

• HEX (F)-end of telephone number marker

Figure 13: Dialer Settings

The first number is the primary number, the second number is for a second monitoring station, and the third number is the backup number for the first number.

The 1 st and 2 nd Account Codes identify the system to the central station when a communication is sent. The code can be programmed for up to four digits. The first and third telephone number transmit the first account code. The second telephone number transmits the second account code.

The 1 st and 2 nd # Format setting affects the type of communication that the dialer sends to the central station. There are seven formats available including 4 BPS formats, Contact ID, SIA and a pager format.

The Dialer Settings window has the following push buttons along the right side:

• Exit: Close the Dialer Settings window and return to the IDs window.

• Configuration 1: Display the Dialer Configuration 1 dialog.


• Call Directions: Display the Call Directions dialog.

• Zone Data: Display the Zone Data dialog.

• Maintenance/Common: Display the Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes dialog.

29


Dialer Configuration 1

The Dialer Configuration 1 dialog (see Figure 14 ) contains the First

Communicator Options,

Second Communicator

Options and International

Options.

The Communications option determines if the dialer will communicate to the central station. When Enabled is selected, the dialer will communicate all events as programmed. When

Disabled is selected, the

Figure 14: Dialer Configuration 1 dialer will not communicate any events.

The TLM One/Two Check options determine whether the dialer will test for telephone line faults on line one and line two respectively.

The Third Phone # can be programmed for two different modes of operation. When Alternate

Dialing Enabled is selected, the dialer switches between the first and third telephone numbers after each dialing attempt, until the maximum number of dialing attempts have been made to each number. When Third Number Backup is enabled, the dialer will use the third telephone number only if all attempts to communicate to the first telephone number fail. If all attempts to communicate to the third number also fail, a failure to communicate trouble will be generated.

When Disabled is selected, the third telephone number is not used.

The Dialing option has three different options for pulse or DTMF dialing. If All attempts Pulse is selected, the dialer will always use pulse (rotary) dialing. If All attempts DTMF Dialing is selected, the dialer will always use DTMF dialing. If 4 attempts DTMF then Pulse is selected, the dialer will use DTMF dialing for the first four attempts. If unsuccessful, the dialer will switch to pulse (rotary) dialing for the remaining attempts.

The SIA Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send the automatic reporting codes that are in the dialer, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and

Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic SIA

Reporting Codes.

The SIA Max Events option sets the maximum number of events the dialer will send for one SIA transmission. When 20 per Round is selected, SIA sends a maximum of 20 events per round.

When 8 per Round is selected, SIA sends maximum of 8 events per round.

The Contact ID Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send the automatic reporting codes that are in the dialer, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and

Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic

Contact ID Reporting Codes.

The Test Transmission Line option determines how the dialer chooses a telephone line to send the automatic test transmission. If Alternate is selected, the dialer will alternate between using

Telephone Lines 1 and 2 for transmissions, regardless of telephone line troubles. If Available is selected, the dialer will use Telephone Line 1 for transmissions. If a trouble exists on Telephone

Line 1, the dialer will switch to Line 2.

When the Force Dialing option is set to enabled, if the first attempt by the panel to call the monitoring station fails, on every subsequent attempt the panel will dial regardless of the presence

30

MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual of dial tone. When Disabled is selected, the panel will not dial the programmed telephone number if dial tone is not present.

When the Busy Tone Detection option is enabled, if busy tone is detected, the dialer will disengage the phone line and try to place the call again following the delay between dialing attempts. When

Disabled is selected, the dialer will use the standard dialing procedure for every attempt.

The Pulse Make/Break Ratio option is for panels in international applications. When 40/60 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is the 40/60. When 33/67 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is 33/67.

The Handshake option determines the handshake used for BPS transmissions. When 1600 Hz is selected, the dialer responds to a 1600 Hz handshake. When Standard is selected, the dialer responds to the handshake designated by the format selected (1400 or 2300 Hz).

The ID Tone can be set to 1300Hz or 2100 Hz. The panel will emit a tone at the selected frequency for 500 ms every 2 seconds when it places a call to indicate that it is a digital equipment call, not voice. When Disabled is selected, this feature will not be used.


The Dialer Configuration

2 screen (see Figure 15 ) contains the Swinger

Shutdown Variables, Test

Transmission options and

Other Options.

The Swinger Shutdown options determine the maximum number of zone events and trouble events that the dialer will transmit in one day. The trouble or alarm will still be displayed on the panel and logged in the archive, but the dialer will not transmit the event. There are individual counters for

Figure 15: Dialer Configuration 2

Zone Alarm and Restore, Zone Supervisory and Restore, Zone Trouble and Restore and

Maintenance Trouble and Restore. This feature will be reset at midnight. To disable the feature, program 000.

The Test Transmission Time of Day determines when the automatic test transmission will occur.

The entry is four digits (HH:MM). To disable the feature, program the time as [9999].

The Test Transmission Cycle determines the number of days between test transmissions

The TLM Trouble Delay controls the number of telephone line monitoring checks required before a telephone line trouble is generated. The dialer checks the telephone connection at 10-second intervals.

The Maximum Dialing Attempts to Each Phone Number is the number of attempts that the dialer will make to each telephone number before generating a fail to communicate trouble.

Post Dial Wait for Handshake is the amount of time the dialer will wait for a valid initial handshake from the receiver after dialing the programmed telephone number.

31


Call Directions

The Call Directions dialog (see

Figure 16 ) contains the options that determine which telephone numbers will be used to communicate events.

There are five different types of events that can each be sent to telephone number one or telephone number two. The event types are

Fire Zone Alarm/Restore,

Supervisory Zone Alarm/Restore,

Zone Trouble/Restore, Maintenance

Trouble/Restore and Test

Transmissions.

Figure 16: Call Directions

NOTE: UL Listing requires that the Test Transmission be sent to both telephone numbers

Zone Data

The Zone Data dialog (see Figure 17 ) contains zone definitions and reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate events.

The Groups List is a list of all currently defined groups. Each line entry includes the Group ID and its message/description. Click on the desired group in order to program it.

The Definition specifies the identifier of the alarm or trouble being sent to the central station.

The zone types that are available are Fire, Sprinkler, Heat, Water and Untyped.

The Reporting Codes are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to

Programmed, or when using BPS formats. There are six reporting codes for each group. They are: Figure 17: Zone Data

• Zone Alarm Reporting

Code

• Zone Alarm Restoral Reporting Code

• Trouble Reporting Code

• Trouble Restoral Reporting Code

• Supervisory Reporting Code

• Supervisory Restoral Reporting Code

32


Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes

The Dialer Maintenance and

Common Reporting Codes dialog (see Figure 18 ) contains maintenance and common reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate those events.

The Reporting Codes List is a list of all available maintenance and common reporting codes.

Select one to program its reporting code.

The Reporting Code is used when SIA or Contact ID is set to

Programmed, or when using

BPS formats. There are many different reporting codes in this group.

Figure 18: Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting

Codes

2.10 Circuits and Devices Windows

Overview

The Circuits Window (see Figure 19 ) allows for the defining of addressable input circuits. The

Devices Window (see Figure 20 ) allows for the defining of addressable devices. These two windows are nearly identical. Most controls on one are found on the other with the few exceptions noted. The current Circuit or Device is shown in the Title Bar of the window.

Figure 19: Circuits Window

33


34

Figure 20: Devices Window

Circuit List

The Circuit List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Circuits Window only. This lists any defined circuits for the current panel. Each circuit shows the circuit number, type of circuit and function if applicable. The highlighted circuit is described in the title bar of the

Circuits Window. Unused circuits are shown using three dashes. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another circuit. The <Up> and <Down> Arrow keys change the current circuit. The <Right> and <Left> Arrow keys change the type of the current circuit. The <Plus> and <Minus> keys change the function of the current circuit.

Circuit Type Selector

The Circuit Type Selector is located below Circuit List on the left hand side. It is shown on the

Circuit Window only. It is a drop down box used to assign the current circuit type. If the circuit is unused, select not assigned. Only options supported by the Input Circuit Modules programmed for the current panel are assignable.

Device Type Selector

The Device Type Selector is located below Device List on the left hand side. It is shown on the

Device Window only. It is a drop down box used to assign the current device type. For addressable circuits, it displays all the sensors or modules that can be programmed for the current device address, sensors for addresses 1 to 99 and modules for addresses 101 to 199. If the address is unused, select not assigned. The following module types are available:

• Monitor (Class B): This is a standard monitor module using Class B (Style B) wiring and an end-of-line resistor. This must be chosen for MRI-M500DM, MRI-M501M and MRI-

M503M modules.

• Monitor (Class A): This is a standard monitor module using Class A (Style D) wiring. This can be used only with the MRI-M500M and MRI-M502M modules.

• Control (supervising): This programs the MRI-M500S for use as a generic signalling circuit. It can be turned on by alarm or supervisory inputs. It will remain on until the system is reset.

• Control (relay): This is used for programming the MRI-M500R relay module.


• Control (Bell): This programs the MRI-M500S as a standard signalling circuit. It will turn on continuously when activated by an alarm. They will silence when the Signal Silence button is pressed. It does not sound codes.

• Control (Strobe): This programs the MRI-M500S as a signalling circuit for use with strobes. They are non-silenceable and will be turned on continuously for both Alert and

Evacuation mode operation. Strobe circuits cannot be silenced until the system is reset

(unless the strobe duration is programmed – see Strobe Duration in section 2.5.2).

• Control (C-Releaser): This programs the MRI-M500S as a continuous releaser which remains on until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then turned off after the Delay until the panel is reset. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds.

• Control (M-Releaser): This programs the MRI-M500S as a momentary releaser which is inactive until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then not activated until after the Delay time. The releaser is turned off after the Duration time, or the activating zone and panel are reset. Momentary releasers function normally during an

AC power fail. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds and the Duration can be up to

1800 seconds. 1800 seconds is 30 minutes. A Duration of zero (0) will cause the releaser to stay on until it is reset.

Function Type Selector

The Function Type Selector is used to display and edit the function of the current input point. The following function types are available:

• Alarm: This is a generic fire input. Displays **ALARM** in the Alarm List when activated.

• Pull Station: This is a fire input similar to Alarm. The differences are it displays **PULL

STATION** in the Alarm List and may not have a retard time programmed.

• Waterflow: This is a fire input similar to Alarm except that it displays **WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List. Bell circuits can be made non-silenceable for waterflow type inputs (see section 2.2 System Window).

• Supervisory: This is used for such inputs as Low Water Pressure, Sprinkler Shut Off

Valve Closed, etc.

• Halt: This causes the related releaser outputs to not operate. The supervisory LED will be turned on by activation of this type of input. See section 1.3 Releaser Programming.

• Abort: This causes the related releaser outputs to have their associated timers to be stopped. The timers will start to run again when the input goes back to normal. The supervisory LED will be turned on by activation of this type of input. See section 1.3

Releaser Programming .

• Monitor: This is used to monitor the action of items such as dampers, door, fans, etc. The supervisory LED is used. Monitor inputs can operate relays and control modules.

• Non-reporting: This is a non-latching type of input. They can only operate LEDs, function relays and control modules. The supervisory LED will be operated. Outputs operated by a

Non-reporting input cannot be also operated by another type of input or switch.

• Trouble: This function type is used for various circuit types and for control modules.

Trouble type inputs operate LEDs only, no other outputs are allowed. This function type is assigned by MHI automatically.

Message

The Message is located in the middle of the top of the window. This 3 line by 20 character text message is displayed or printed for all signals originating from the current input point. Circuit types that use devices have a default message created for them when defined. This message can be changed.

35


Use Grp Message

The Use Grp Msg check box is used if the input point is to use a group message. A text entry box appears when the box is checked. Enter the ID of the group message to be used. Only one ID can be entered. If a group message is being used, it is displayed in the Message area, but the message cannot be altered.

Input Circuit or Device Options

There are a number of options that can be used for each input circuit or device. Not all options apply to all inputs. MHI only shows those options that are currently usable. The following options are available:

• Enable Fan Delay: Controls the staggered turning off of Control Modules (relay). If checked, Control Modules (relay) on this circuit are turned off in sequence, from the lowest address to the highest address, at a rate set by the Fan Delay option in the Panel Options

Dialog, when Reset is pressed on the panel. The operation of Control Modules

(supervising) is not affected by this setting.

• Disable Maintenance Alert: Disables the addressable smoke or heat sensor from reporting Maintenance Alert. Maintenance Alert is defined by the device staying at almost alarm threshold for an extended period of time. This is usually an indication that a smoke sensor requires cleaning. Heat sensors in high temperature areas may need the

Maintenance Alert disabled to limit nuisance troubles. Standard room temperature (20 ° C) does not cause a Maintenance Alert on a heat detector.

• Code Bells: Checking this option causes only selected coded bells to sound coded signals. If coded bells are used the following options are then also shown:

-- No Restore: If checked, the panel does not sound the Code again when the input restores. If not checked, the panel sounds a single round of the Code when the input restores

-- Code: This is the sequence that is sounded when an alarm is received on this input. It can be up to 4 digits long. Hexadecimal digits are used, thus each digit can be from 1 to

F, where A=10, B=11, C=12, D=13, E=14 and F=15.

-- Round: This is the number of times the Code is repeated. It can be between 1 and 4 times for no restore inputs, and between 2 and 4 for restore inputs. Note: A minimum of three rounds of code is required per NFPA 72.

• Night Sens. and Day Sens.: Selects the Alarm threshold sensitivity for addressable smoke sensors. Heat sensors always use Normal sensitivity. Increased sensitivity causes alarms at lower levels of smoke. Sensors not attached to a switch always use the Night

Sensitivity. Sensors attached to a switch use Night Sensitivity while the switch is Off and

Day Sensitivity while the switch is On. Night Sensitivity must always be equal to or more sensitive than the Day Sensitivity.

• Manual Restart: Check this to require that the control module not be reset by System

Reset but by Manual Restart . Use of this option requires that there be a Manual Restart function key assigned to the panel.

Pushbuttons

The push buttons located on the right hand side are:

• Exit: Closes the window and returns to the previous window.

• Devices: Opens the Devices Window for the current circuit (Circuits Window only).

• Copy: Copies the circuit/device information, relates and message from another input to the current input (see Figure 21). The current input does not have to be defined. Relates cannot be copied between conventional and addressable input points. The Panel ID,

Circuit ID and Device ID (not always shown) list the circuit/device to be copied from.

Marking Transfer Main Definition copies the listed circuit/device type and function to the

36

MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual current circuit/device. Note: Not all inputs can be copied to all other possible inputs.

Marking Transfer Relates copies the relates from the listed circuit/device relates to the current one. This may cause some invalid relates. Marking Transfer Message causes the message to be copied. Marking Transfer Devices (if shown) copies any device definitions that the listed circuit contains. These devices copy messages and relates as based on those settings above. There is no checking made at this time as to the validity of the values copied. Unexpected results can occur if care is not taken.

For each database that is created, a warning about using copy is shown. Marking the check box in the warning stops the box from appearing again for the database. This option can help speed up the creation of a database. By completely defining one input, these values can be copied to all other inputs, making any minor changes that are required after the copy.

Figure 21: Copy Window

• Relate or Trbl Relate: Opens the Relate Window for the current circuit or device. This allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, relays and control modules to be operated when the input goes into alarm. The Relate button displays all output types that are available depending on the function type of the input. The Trbl Relate button displays only

LEDs that can be related. Note: All panel outputs and control modules to be operated must be defined before they can be included in the relates of an input.





37


2.11 Internal Circuits Window

Overview

The Internal Circuits Window (see Figure 22 ) allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, etc.

for the various internal circuits (functions) of the Control Panel. Internal circuits 0, 71, 72, 73, 74,

75, 81 and 82 are fire alarm functions while all others are trouble functions. All internal circuits have specific meanings and are stored in the archive of the panel. See Appendix A) Condition

Codes and Zone Numbers for a list of all the internal circuits.

Some of the internal circuits are:

• Internal Circuit 0, General Alarm: This is the General Alarm function. It can be assigned to one of the Hot Keys on the control panel. General Alarm causes all the bells and strobes on the panel to operate in Evacuation mode. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc.

that require operation are programmed using the Relate button.

• Internal Circuit 51, Comlink #1 Supervision: This is used for communications errors on

COM1 port of the panel or annunciator.



• Internal Circuit 99, Common Trouble: This circuit is tripped by any internal circuit or trouble condition not associated with an internal circuit that turns on the Common Trouble

LED on the panel. This circuit is used to annunciate common trouble conditions at a remote location. This circuit is not tripped by troubles generated by input circuits or addressable devices. This circuit is not recorded in the archive of the panel.

38

Figure 22: Internal Circuits Window

Internal Circuits List

The Internal Circuits List displays all of the internal circuits for the current Control Panel. Each line includes the internal circuit number, its description and if relates have been assigned.

Warning: Some of the internal circuits (e.g. checksum) do not have restore signals associated with them. They generally relate to a condition that requires either service work or a reboot of the panel. Any relates assigned to such an internal circuit have no way to be reset short of re-booting the entire network.


Pushbuttons

The following push buttons are available:

• List Entries: This new feature allows the user to control the information displayed.

Relevant only lists items applicable to the current version only. All lists all possible items so that relates made on previous versions may be removed.

• Exit: Closes the Internal Circuits Window and returns to the Panel Window.

• Reset: Clears all relates associated with the current internal circuit.

• Relate: Opens the Relate Window for the internal circuit. This allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, relays and control modules to be operated by the internal circuit.

• Copy Relates: Copies the relates from another input to the current internal circuit (see

Figure 21). The values of the panel and circuit are required. Press Copy to copy the information. If the function type of the two circuits is different, a requester is presented to confirm the copy.





2.12 Relate Window

Overview

The Relate Window (see Figure 23 ) allows for the relating of inputs, switches and groups to outputs, LEDs, relays, etc. These relationships are used by the panel to determine which outputs to operate for alarm and trouble states. Inputs can operate bells/strobes, LEDs, relays, control modules on any panel in the system. Switches can operate relays, LEDs, control modules on any panel in the system and control the day/night sensitivity change of any addressable detector on any panel. The title bar describes the current input point/switch/group and current output panel or annunciator.

Figure 23: Relates Window

39


Groups

Groups is a comma separated list of all the groups that the point is to use for relates. Up to ten groups can be listed. These groups are assigned to the point itself and does not change as the current output panel changes. Relates that are part of the groups are not shown in the Relate

Window but can be shown on the Map Window if so desired.

Panel List


Control and Annunciator, that are defined in the system along with their panel message. The highlighted entry in the list is the one that is being related to by the current input. When a different panel is selected, all the controls in the window change to reflect this. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another panel.

Outputs List

The Outputs List shows the programmable outputs of the panel. It is not shown for annunciators. It lists all outputs, along with their definition and current state. The states are *on* for selected, blank for not selected, act if they activated by default, and n/a for not available. A blank definition is for unused outputs. Bell and Strobe outputs can only be selected for Fire Alarm type inputs. If

Complex Releasers are enabled, releasers can have three other states: Fast which operates the releaser immediately regardless of any delay that is programmed in; *A* or *B* which allow for

AND logic. The releaser will not operate until both an A and a B input have been activated. Use the

<space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the

<Backspace> key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another output.

Relays List

The Relays List shows the general purpose function relays of the panel. It is not shown for annunciators. Each is listed by number and state. The states are *on* for selected, n/a for not available, and blank for not selected. Use the <space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another relay.

LEDs List

The LEDs List shows the LED zones available on the panel or annunciator. This is not shown if the panel has no LEDs. Each is listed by number and state. The states are *on* for selected, blank for not selected and n/a for not available. Use the <space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another LED. The actual number of LED zones varies depending upon the panel or annunciator.

Device List

The Device List shows the addressable devices that can be related to the current point. For system inputs and groups, it is displayed only if there are any control modules defined for the panel; for switches, it is displayed if there are any addressable detectors or control modules defined. Each entry shows the devices’s address (panel.circuit.device), its state and its device message. The states are *on* for selected and blank for not selected. Devices that are not available are not shown. Use the <space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections.

Evac

THe EVAC checkbox is an option for fire alarm type inputs only. Checking this option will cause all bells and strobes to operate in second stage (evacuation) mode.

40


Msg Receive Check Box

The Msg Receive check box is an option for annunciators with LCDs only. If marked, this annunciator receives messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List. If not marked, the annunciator does not receive messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List.

2.13 Pushbuttons

The push buttons, located on the right side of the window, are:

• Exit: Closes the Relate Window and returns to the previous window.



• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See the Modul-R Human Interface Database

Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.

• View Groups: Displays the Groups Window. This is for reviewing the defined groups. No editing can be done to the groups. To edit the groups, return to the System Window. See

41


3.0 LCD Programming


This chapter describes the panel components that are programmed via the LCD and keypad.


About the LCD Menu

A number of items are programmed through the LCD and keypad. This is called the LCD menu. All options are under the PROGRAM option on the Main Menu of the panel. The Main Menu can be recalled to the LCD by pressing <Home> .

Note: The only item that must be programmed from the LCD menu is the Panel ID. This must be done before the database is downloaded.

There are multiple levels of program access. Privilege Level 0 is the base level of operation.

Privilege Level 1 allows access to privileged Hot Key functions and limited programming. Privilege

Level 2 allows programming of almost all system parameters. (Note that a Service Mode Trouble occurs when logged in Level 2.) Higher Privilege Levels are reserved for Secutron's own use and are not discussed here. Certain functions can be assigned to different privilege levels. These functions default to the higher of the two privilege levels.

While programming through the LCD menu, the panel beeps once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid key is pressed. Programming is done through a series of menus and requester screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information. Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item. Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press <Enter> to select. In Figure 24, pressing

<Enter> brings up the Program Menu.

Title

Menu Item

Selected Menu Item

Module-R by Secutron

12:22

>STATUS HISTORY<

> PROGRAM PASSCODE<

Menu Item

Menu Item

Figure 24: Program Menu

A menu option of more displays further menu options that do not fit on the current screen. All the screens of a menu loop around continuously. The default option, ie the option next to the cursor, is the one to the upper left of the screen. Generally, but not always, more is the default option.

Selector screens (see Figure 22) are screens where options are toggled on or off. Options that are on are marked by an asterisk(*) while options that are off are marked with a dash (-). Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press <Enter> to change it.

Move the cursor to OK and press <Enter> to save any changes, or press <Clear> to lose any changes. In Figure 22, the alarm and trouble relays are selected and the supervisory relay is not selected to be disconnected when the Common Disconnect hotkey is pressed. Pressing <Enter> causes the alarm relay to be not selected.

T itle

Options

Selections

COMMON DISCONNECT

A S T

* - * OK<

42


Figure 25: Selector Screen

For all screens, <Clear> returns to the previous menu level without changing any information and

<Home> returns to the Main Menu without changing any information.

3.3 Menus

Clock Menu

This menu has the following options:

• Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter> to accept date typed. <Clear> removes any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> returns you to the Clock

Menu. The new date is sent to all other panels on the Network, if used. All panels assume this date. The date change is recorded in the Archive.

• Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter> to accept time typed. <Clear> removes any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> returns you to the Clock Menu. The new time is sent to all other panels on the Network, if used. All panels assume this time. If <Enter> is pressed with no time entered, the current time is sent to all panels on the network. If a change of greater than 5 minutes occurs, the new time is recorded in the archive.

Notes:

1. The Master Panel in a network synchronizes all clocks in the network at 03:30 every day, sending both date and time.

2. Changing the time while the panel is calibrating aborts the calibration.

• Calibrate: Calibrates the clock so that it keeps correct time. Calibration takes 2 to 45 days. Waiting longer gives more accurate results. The panel functions normally while calibrating. When sufficient time has passed, re-selecting this function asks for the correct time. The calibration is then be reported. In a network, only the master panel needs to calibrated.

Note: Changing the time using the Time option aborts the calibration. If a panel is currently in a calibration, it ignores time changes sent over the network.

Common Relays Menu

This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. The menu has the following options:

• Disconnect: View or change the relays that can be disconnected by the Common

Disconnect hot key. Selected relays are marked by an asterisk (*). To change the selection, move the cursor to the desired relay A(larm), S(upervisory) or T(rouble) and press <Enter> to change. Select OK when done. <Clear> returns you to Program Menu without making changes.

• Test Inhibit: View or change whether common relays are disconnected during Test Mode or not. <Clear> returns you to Program Menu without making changes.

Switches Menu

This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. View or change the status of any switches.

These switches can be set to On, Off or Auto. The Auto state only applies to switches that have a timer associated with them. The Auto state allows the switch to follow the timer settings. Any changes made are broadcast to the network so that all panels have the same state. Settings are retained by the panel if it is re-booted and the Master Unit broadcasts its settings to the network upon start up. See Switches Window for information on programming what the switch affects.

The menu has the following options:

43


• Individual: View or change the status of an individual switch. Each switch is shown in turn. If a switch has no timer, the Auto option is not shown.

• All Off: Force switches into the Off mode. The number displayed is the number of timers that are switched On. This option is shown only if no switches have timers associated with them.

• All Auto: Force all switches with timers to Auto mode. All switches with timers go into the state dictated by the time. The number displayed is the number of switches with timers forced On or Off. This option has no effect on switches without timers. This option is not shown if no timers are associated with the switches.

Battery

Displays the current battery status. The display shows:

Line 1: Screen Title

Line 2: AC State (diagnostic use only)

Line 3: Current State of the Battery and Menu Option (see below)

Line 4: Menu Options (listed below)


• OK: Return to Program Menu.

• Test: Force an immediate battery test.

• Calibrate: This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This calibrates the Battery

Charger. The batteries must be disconnected before beginning calibration. No keypad control is provided during calibration. The calibration display will return when calibration is over. Calibration only needs to be done when the configuration is erased. All Battery

Chargers come calibrated from the factory.

Addressable


• Reset Max/Min: Clears the stored values for the maximum and minimum values returned by the addressable devices. These values are automatically cleared when the panel reboots.

• Duplicates Check: This causes an immediate check to see if more than one device is using an address. The panel automatically does this check on the hour.

• LED Mode: This controls how the LEDs on the devices are used. There are three options:

-- OFF/FLASH: The device LEDs are normally off and flash when an alarm is reported.

The flashing LED is reset when System Reset is pressed.

-- FLASH/ON: The device LEDs flash each time they are polled. They latch on in Alarm.

The LEDs are reset when System Reset is pressed. Note: Due to current draw limitations, only the first 5 detectors on a circuit latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation.

-- OFF/ON: The LEDs are normally off and latch on in Alarm. The LEDs are reset when

System Reset is pressed. Note: Due to current draw limitations, only the first 5 detectors on a circuit latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation.

-- RESET: This functions resets the LEDs to their off state.

• Sensitivity: This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This allows for the manual adjustment of the sensitivity of addressable detectors. All devices have a default sensitivity assigned in the database. The detector can be set to the database default value or to one of the pre-defined levels replacing the database values. These manual values are retained if the panel is re-booted.

-- SELECT : Change the manual sensitivity of addressable detectors. The first screen asks for a circuit and device number. Enter the circuit and device or press <Enter> without

44

MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual entering any number to view the first detector in the database. Each detector is displayed in turn, showing the current sensitivity and allowing for it to be changed or the next detector to be displayed. Press <Clear> to stop viewing the detector list.

-- PRINT: Print a list of all detectors that have a sensitivity other than the one selected in the database. This option is not shown if no manual sensitivities have been set.

-- ALL DEFAULT: Change all manual sensitivity settings to the default values set in the database.

• Bypass: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. This selects devices to be bypassed. A bypassed device is ignored by the system. Addressable bypasses are retained when the panel is re-booted. Only devices included in the database can be bypassed. Bypasses are annunciated by a common trouble condition. The Bypass menu has the following options:

-- ON: Select devices to be bypassed. Enter the circuit and device number. Press

<Enter> to accept the device and to enter the next one. Pressing <Clear> removes any numbers entered. Pressing either <Enter> or <Clear> with no numbers displayed ends the input mode.

-- OFF: Select bypassed devices to be returned to normal operation. Each bypassed device is listed in order. Select next to keep the bypass on or select OFF to remove the bypass. After the last device, display returns to the Bypass menu. Press <Clear> to return to the Bypass Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices bypassed.

- ALL OFF: Remove all bypasses, if any, from the system. The number of bypassed devices is displayed next to this option.

• Test: Select devices to be tested. Test Mode must be active for this selection to be available. All devices selected for testing are automatically deselected when Test Mode is turned off. The Test Menu has the following options:

-- ON: Select devices for testing. Enter the circuit and device number, or enter the circuit number only to select all devices on the circuit. Press <Enter> to accept the device and to enter the next one. Pressing <Clear> removes any numbers entered. Pressing either <Enter> or <Clear> with no numbers displayed ends the input mode.

-- OFF: Select devices under test to be returned to normal operation. Each device under test is listed in order. Select next to keep the device under test or select OFF to remove the test mode. After the last device, display returns to the Test menu. Press <Clear> to return to the Test Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices selected for testing.

-- ALL OFF: Remove all devices being tested, if any, from the test mode. The number of devices being tested is displayed next to this option.

• Control Modules: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. Allow for the manual operation of the control modules included in the database. There are three states available: Automatic (controlled by device inputs), Manual On, and Manual Off. This mode is retained if the panel is re-booted. Manually controlled modules are annunciated by a common trouble condition. The menu has the following options:

-- SELECT: Change the Auto/On/Off state of control modules. The first screen asks for a circuit and device number. Enter the circuit and device or press <Enter> without entering any number to view the first control module in the database. Each control module is displayed in turn, showing the current state and allowing for it to be changed or the next control module to be displayed. Press <Clear> to stop viewing the control module list.

-- ALL AUTO: Change any control modules that are forced on or off back to automatic mode.

45


Archive

This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. View and change the settings for the recording of optional entries into the history. The following items can be included or not included in the history:

• Test: View or change whether Test signals should be recorded in the history. The current setting is shown in the upper right corner. Test signals are marked as such.

• Non-Reporting: View or change whether non-reporting signals are recorded in the history or not. Non-reporting signals are recorded by default.

• Network: View or change the type of archive events that the panel will record in the archive. This is only available on the network master panel. The options are:

-- LOCAL: Record only panel events in the archive.

-- GLOBAL: Record all events in the archive.

Relays

This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. If Privilege Level 1 is set and Level 2 is required, access to the menu is denied. This function allows for the manual operation of the relays. There are three possible states: Automatic (state determined by inputs), Forced On, or Forced Off. This mode is retained if the panel is re-booted.

• SELECT: Change the Auto/On/Off state of relay. Each relay is shown in turn, showing the current state and allowing for it to be changed or the next relay to be displayed. Press

<Clear> to stop viewing the relay list.

• ALL AUTO: Change any relays that are forced on or off back to automatic mode.

Ports


• Network: Allows for the setting of parameters related to the network. If the downloaded database indicates that there is no network, the only option is Panel ID. The Network

Menu has the following options:

-- Panel ID: This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. Set the Network ID number.

This is between 1 and 254.

-- Reboot: Cause all panels on the network to do a Hard reboot, ie equivalent to pressing the Hard Reboot button on the top of the main board. Each panel records in the history the time it received the Network Reboot command.

-- Global Commands: Sends the selected key (acknowledge, signal silence, or system reset) to all Control panels and annunciators on the Network. Each unit, including the sending unit, responds as if that key has been pressed.

-- Verify: This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. Enable or disable Network Verify reporting troubles. If disabled, the panel does not report a Network Verify trouble (no common trouble sequence), but still displays the error information in the Misc. Troubles.

This should be left enabled.

-- Retry: Set the number of times to try to resend a message before giving up. If this number of retries are attempted without success, the other panel or annunciator is considered to be off-line. The default value is 8.

-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate for Com Port 1. This value may need to be changed if the default rate (4800) does not allow for communications. Since each installation is different, this value needs to be chosen by trial and error. If the default rate does not work, chose the next slower rate. Continue this process until a rate that works is chosen. The available baud rates are: 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300. The

46

MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual recommended rates are: 4800, 2400, and 1200. Below is a table documenting the maximum wire capacitance allowed on a single port connection.

Baud Rate

9600

4800

2400

1200

Maximum Capacitance

100 nF

220 nF

470 nF

680 nF

• Port 3: These options are restricted to Privilege 2. The options available vary depending upon the Port 3 setting in the database. This port can only be disabled from the database.

PC Connect (MR2-8G Program): Allows for the configuration of the communications to a

GRID package. If more than one signal needs to be sent, new alarms take precedence.

-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. The available fixed baud rates are 9600,

4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.

-- Delay: Sets the length of time the panel will wait before reporting the GRID package offline. This can be set from 10 to 255 seconds.

-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3. The

GRID package will report the panel as offline.

Voice Evac.System (MR2-8E Program): Allows for setting parameters related to the connection to the MV2700 voice evacuation panel.

-- Mode: Selects how information is sent to the MV2700. There are the following options:

DEVICE (default): Send the device address or internal circuit number without translation.

ZONE: Send the LED number turned on for input circuits and devices and send the internal circuit for internal circuits.

GROUP: Send the associated Group ID(s) for all conditions. Anything not associated with a specific group sends a group number of 0.

-- Retry: Set the number of times to try to resend a message before giving up. If this number of retries are attempted without success, the other panel is considered to be off-line. The default value is 8. This would be increased only if the communications line cycles between on-line and off-line. (Range: 1 to 25)

-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key shuts down Port 3.


4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.

• Terminal: Select ANSI or TeleVideo protocol. Most terminals and terminal emulator programs support ANSI protocol.

• Port 6: Allows for the setting of the baud rate to MR-2614 and MR-2644 annunciators, the city tie modules, and the MRDL dialer. The settings are 4800 and 1200. If none of these devices are programmed in the database, the message “nothing to program” is shown.

Alarm List

This menu controls the operation of the Alarm List. This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. It has the following options:

• Reset: Select when entries are taken out of the Alarm List. AUTO removes entries as soon as the condition restores. MANUAL requires that Reset be pressed before they are

47

MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual removed. Conditions that have restored are shown as a restored condition in the Alarm

List.

• Remote: Routes the messages for events from the panel to annunciators. The options are:

-- ALL: All messages are sent to all annunciators.

-- SELECT: Messages are sent as directed in the database.

Passcode

Allows for the changing of passcodes. The Privilege Level 2 can change both the Level 1 and 2 passcodes, while Level 1 can only change the Level 1 passcode. Passcodes are four digit numbers in the range 1000 to 9999. Type in the new passcode and press <Enter> to accept.

Asterisks are displayed instead of the numbers. <Clear> removes any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> returns to the Program or Passcode Menu.

The default Level 2 passcode is 2222. The default Level 1 passcode is 1111. These passcodes should be changed to prevent unauthorized access.

There is a special Level 2 passcode that is variable from day to day. It can be obtained from

Secutron if the Level 2 passcode is forgotten.

Memory

This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This menu has the following options:

• Erase Configuration: This erases all initiating circuit, bell, relay, and privilege values entered from the keypad and LCD menu, and replace them with default values. With MR2 programs, this has no effect on information contained in the downloaded database.

Confirmation is asked before erasure. After the Configuration has been erased, the panel must be reset using the reset button at the top of the Main Circuit Board, if the panel does not do this automatically. The following items are not erased: Serial Number, Clock

Calibration, Level 1 Passcode, Level 2 Passcode, Main Board Type, Input Circuit

Modules.

48


4.0 Appendix A: Condition Codes and Zone Numbers


This appendix lists the condition codes and zone numbers used by the panel.

4.2 List of Codes and Zone Numbers

Condition Codes

The alarm list and archive use the following formats for condition codes.

Archive

H

I

E

G

C

D

A

B

J

M

N

P

S

T

U

W

Alarm List

ALARM bypass com dupl alert ground ilgl msng nofire

M.PULL

spv trbl wrong

WFLOW

Alarm

Description

Bypassed Circuit/Device

Comlink

Duplicate Addressable Device

Maintenance Alert

Ground Fault

Hot Key Pressed

Illegal Addressable Device

Switch

Missing Addressable Device

Non-Fire

Pull Station Alarm

Supervisory

Trouble or Parameter Change

Wrong Device Type

Waterflow Alarm

A plus sign (+) refers to a new or on condition, a minus sign (-) refers to a restoral or off condition, and an equal sign (=) refers to a one time event.

49


Zone Number

PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:

PPP Control Panel Number

ZZ Panel Zone

64

1

65

1

66

67

69

1

80

2

52

53

54

60

61

Panel

Zone

0

1

2

50

51

Description

General Alarm

Initiating Circuit 1


Network Verify

Comlink 1

Comlink 2

Comlink 3

Comlink 6

Output (bell/releaser) Supervision

Auxiliary Power Supervision

Program Checksum

Database Checksum

AC Power

Low Battery

Program Restart

Privilege Level

Panel

Zone

89

1

90

1

91

1

86

3

87

88

1

92

1

93

1

94

1

95

1

81

82

83

84

85

1

Description

1st Stage Alarm

2nd Stage Alarm

Switch

Test Mode

Erase Configuration

Change Configuration

Passcode Tamper

Database Loaded

Time/Date Change

Hot Key Activation

Memory Overflow

Network Reboot

New Program

Network Reboot Required who

Network Reboot Required why

Notes:

1. These zones do not restore.

2. Privilege Level 0 generates a restore signal; all others generate a trouble signal.

3. This zone does not restore and is not repeated sequentially in the archive.

4. Programs dated before March 4, 1996 use a different numbering sequence. Panels updated erase the archive the first time the new program runs.

50


SSS Sub-Zone Number

Zone

Addressable Circuit

Comlink 1 (Zone 51)

Comlink 3 (Zone 53)

Comlink 6 (Zone 54)

Output Supervision (Zone 60)


(Zone 61)

Program Re-start (Zone 69)

Privilege Level (Zone 80):

Switch (Zone 83):

Meaning of SubZone Number

000 - Wiring Fault

All Others - Device Number

Unit Network ID number

Unit ID number

Output Circuit Number

Auxiliary Power Circuit Number

000 - Power On/Hard reboot

001 - Watchdog

002 - Clock Monitor

003 - Illegal Instruction

004 - Unused Interrupt

005 - Orphan Interrupt

Level Set

Switch Number

51


Zone

Hot Key Activation (Zone 90):

Function Number of the Hot key pressed


001 - Fire Drill

002 - Lamp Test

004 - Relay Disconnect

005 - Test Mode

006 - Signal Disconnect

007 - Acknowledge

008 - Signal Silence

009 - Reset

010 - Common Disconnect

011 - General Alarm

016 - Switch 1 On

017 - Switch 2 On

018 - Switch 3 On

52


Zone

Hot Key Activation (Zone 90):

Function Number of the Hot key pressed

Network Reboot (Zone 92):


019 - Switch 4 On

020 - Switch 5 On

021 - Switch 6 On

022 - Switch 7 On

023 - Switch 8 On

024 - Switch 9 On

025 - Switch 10 On

026 - Switch 11 On

027 - Switch 12 On

028 - Switch 13 On

029 - Switch 14 On

030 - Switch 15 On

031 - Switch 16 On

032 - Switch 1 Off

033 - Switch 2 Off

034 - Switch 3 Off

035 - Switch 4 Off

036 - Switch 5 Off

037 - Switch 6 Off

038 - Switch 7 Off

039 - Switch 8 Off

040 - Switch 9 Off

041 - Switch 10 Off

042 - Switch 11 Off

043 - Switch 12 Off

044 - Switch 13 Off

045 - Switch 14 Off

046 - Switch 15 Off

047 - Switch 16 Off

051 - Manual Restart

Unit ID of panel broadcasting the command

53


Zone

Network Reboot Required Who

(Zone 94):

Network Reboot Required Why

(Zone 95)

All Others:


Unit ID of panel generating the Network Reboot

Required trouble

001 - network

002 - network

003 - port 3

006 - negative counter

008 - memory overflow

009 - co-processor memory overflow

Always 000

54


5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation

Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10

Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it delivers ½ A (500 mA) for 20 hours. A car battery is designed to deliver "cranking" power for a short time, (a few hundred Amps for a few minutes). Unfortunately, fire alarm control panels need both of these characteristics, that is, driving a heavy bell load for a relatively short time, at the end of a 24 hour standby current drain. This protection necessitates certain over sizing.

Regardless of the standby calculation and tables, the battery must be at least 150% of the bell load. e.g. A 4 A total bell load necessitates at least 6 A hour battery (in terms of 20 hour rating).

The standard battery options available for the MR-2200 Control Unit are: a) 4 Ah internal, b) 7 Ah internal, c) 10 Ah internal, d) 24 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, e) 35 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet,

55


6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal

6.1 General

The MR-2200 Control Unit displays information and accept commands via the service terminal port. The information includes initiating circuit configuration, current status of bell, relays, etc., diagnostic information, the archive, etc. The commands allow for the selection of the information to view, limited programming and basic operation. Certain Control Unit commands are available only at certain privilege levels. Units beep once when a valid character is received and three times if an invalid character is received. If a command is not finished within about 10 seconds, the unit beeps three times and loses any information sent.

The service terminal program provides the information on a number of different screens. When the terminal is first connected, it views whatever screen was the last to be viewed. To view Screen 0, which lists all the screens that are available, press 0 <Tab> . Press <Delete> to refresh the screen. Press the <Tab> key to view the next screen. See below for a complete description on the

<Tab> key commands. Certain Control Unit screens are available only at higher privilege levels.

6.2 Control Unit

Screens

The Control Unit uses 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit for communication over the serial port. The default baud rate is 9600 bps.

All screens have a common status line across the top. It shows, from left to right, the current time, the current date, the current privilege level, the panel number, the current screen number and name. All available screens are listed and described below along with any key commands valid only on that screen. To view a particular screen, enter n <Tab> where n is the screen number.

Those screens marked with an asterisk (*) are useful in trouble shooting the panel.

Screen Name Description

0*

1

2

3

4

Index

LCD

Misc

Battery

AC

A list of all the available screens.

Display and control the panel LCD. This is useful for training sessions since more people can view the terminal screen than can view the LCD directly. All keypad keys are mapped to the equivalent key board key, with the keypad <Clear> being mapped to the key board <End> . Note: The control feature does not work over a network.

A list of the program version, boards installed in the system and other information not listed elsewhere.

Displays the current battery level, and the current status of the battery and AC power. Also shows the timer for the battery test.

Commands

<Ctrl-B>

0<Ctrl-B>

Print battery calculation

Execute a dynamic battery test once and end continuous testing if on.

9900 <Ctrl-B> Start continuous dynamic battery testing.

Display the current status of the AC power and the delay timer for report AC fail.

56


6

7

Screen

5*

8

9*

10*

11*

12

13*

Name Description

Bells Displays the current status of the bell circuits. Also shows the timers and settings for the cut-off. See screen 11 for acceptable supervision values.

Function Relays Displays the current settings and timers for the 4 function relays.

Releasers Displays the current settings and timers for the releasing circuits

(if any).

Common Relays Displays the current status of the 3 common system relays. Also shows which relays may be disconnected by the Common

Disconnect hot-key.

Alarm List Shows the current alarm list. This is the same list that is displayed on the LCD menu. Each screen in the LCD corresponds to one line on the terminal screen. See Appendix A for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.

Commands

J Page down

0 J Go to the end of the list

K Page up

0 K Go to the beginning of the list

Miscellaneous

Troubles

Output

Supervision

Display a list of all the troubles currently displayed by the

STATUS/MISC. TROUBLES selection from the LCD.

Displays the current status of each of the outputs and the aux power outputs. An asterisk is shown for each output that is assigned, if it is turned on (if applicable) and the current supervision condition. The aux power outputs show a scaled number that should be about 225. An output with a power fault has had the 24VDC power connection to the MRNC2 board disconnected.

Relay Summary Displays the installed expansion modules and which relays have been operated. The first section shows which modules have been installed in the panel. Module 0 is the main board itself. The second section shows how many of each of the MRNC2 (UA228) and MRRL4 (UA229) modules are needed and installed. The bottom section shows all the relays in the system, which ones are on and the function of each. Note that a common trouble relay is turned on when the panel has no troubles; the minus sign is a reminder of this.

Archive Displays the Archive History List. This is the list of the last 900

(approximate) events that happened. See Appendix A for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.

Commands

J Page down


K Page up


57


27

29

38

49

50

Screen

14

15

16

17

18

19

26

Name

Printer

Printer Status

Network

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 6

Misc. Outputs

System Reset

Switches

Clock

Tasks

Description

A copy of everything sent to the printer. This is useful for capturing print-outs to a file. Note: Status line updating is disabled while on this screen.

Displays the current printer status.

Displays information about network communications. This includes frames sent and received, frames in error and orphan messages.

Commands

0 V Clear counters on screen

Displays information about the primary network port. Includes the status of the panels that are and should be online.

Commands


Displays information about the secondary network port. A question mark appears in front of the baud rate when the port is off-line.

Commands


Shows the current status ID, frame count and baud rate for the central station communications link. A question mark will appear in front of the baud rate when the port is offline.

Commands


Shows the current status of the MR-2614 and MR-2644 annunciators, as well as the city tie module or dialer. Note: ID 1 is the MR-2200HS-3200 front display.

Displays the status of follow trouble, follow supervisory and aux power output types.

Displays a list of resettable items. These are the items that are reset when System Reset is pressed.

Show the current on/off status of each switch and list the timer associated with each one.

Shows the status of the Daylight Savings Time option & clock calibration.

This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. This screen is for factory use only.

58


52

61

69*

79

80*

Screen

51*

68*

81*

82

Name

FIFO

Description

This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory

Overflow trouble. The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used. For each task, the first number is the current usage and the second is the maximum usage. If a task uses a large amount of FIFO memory, this means that task is having difficulty in operating.

Displays the type and amount of extended memory installed in the system.

Displays the states of the optional LED zones on the front panel.

Memory

Local

Annunciator

Remote

Terminal

Network Verify

Addressable

Info

Totals

Displays the service terminal screens for another panel in the network. This allows for the trouble shooting of a system from a single location. This screen automatically disconnects the remote connection if memory gets low or if no communication is received for 15 seconds. The remote panel stops sending data after 15 minutes.

Commands

(id) N Display the service terminal for Panel id

<Esc> Disconnect remote connection

Displays the current status of the network verify feature.

System Settings regarding addressable settings.

Detail

Type On-Line

Displays totals for both SLCs, including items such as assigned, on-line, missing, etc. Also lists the total number of devices in alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions. Also lists current wiring supervision status for each loop.

For a single device, shows all the programming, analog values, status and commands sent.

Commands

A Display next device

( address)A Display selected device at address

0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values

0 P

1 P

2 P

Energize both sets of terminals

Energize only B terminals

Energize only A terminals

For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are actually on the circuit.

Commands




0 P

1 P

2 P




59


Screen Name

83 Type Assigned

84*

85

86

Errors

Alarms

Function

Description

For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are programmed to be on the circuit.

Commands




0 P

1 P

2 P




For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the incorrect, missing and mismatched devices. This shows the differences between what is expected to be on the circuit and what actually is on the circuit.

Commands




0 P

1 P

2 P




For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current Alarm,

Early Warning, Supervisory and Trouble conditions for all devices on the circuit.

Commands




0 P

1 P

2 P




For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the Alarm and

Supervisory initiating devices. Control modules are neither type and are displayed as a dash (-).

Commands




0 P

1 P

2 P




60


Screen Name Description

88

89

90

92

Control Modules For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current status of all the Control modules.

Commands




0 P

1 P

2 P




Bypass & Test Displays the Bypass and Test status of all devices on an addressable circuit.

Commands




0 P

1 P

2 P




Analog

Sensitivity

Displays the analog values of 10 consecutive addresses for a single circuit.

Commands




0 P

1 P

2 P




Displays the Day/Night status, the default and manual sensitivities of all sensors on an addressable circuit. Dots are shown for any value that is not used.

Commands

C Display next addressable circuit

93 Sensitivity List Displays the value each sensitivity setting represents.

These keyboard commands are available on all screens.

Command

<Del>

<Tab>

<Backspace>

0<Tab>

Description

Clear and redisplay screen.

View next available screen. Unused/unavailable screens are skipped over.

View previous available screen. Unused/unavailable screens are skipped over.

View Index screen showing the numbers of all available screens.

61


Command

0-127<Tab>

0.0<Tab>

0.1<Tab>

A

D

(month).(date) D

(month).(date).(year) D

(hours).(minutes) T

(hours).(minutes).(seconds) T

<Ctrl-V>

(code)<Ctrl-V>

0 ?

90 ?

99 ?

<Esc>

<Enter>

Description

View Selected Screen. If selected screen is unused/ unavailable, the next available screen is shown.

TeleVideo cursor control mode.

VT100 cursor control mode.

Silence buzzer.

Print the date and time.

Enter the date.

Enter the date and year. The year may be entered as 00 to 99 in a two-digit format, or as 1991 to 2090 in a fourdigit format.

Set the time.

Set the time.

Clear privilege (Set to User Privilege.)

Set privilege. (code) is either the Level 1 or Level 2 passcode programmed into the panel.

Print downloaded database.

Print archive.

Print configuration.

Stop Printout.

Advance printer (paper feed).

62



Canada

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Tel: (888) SECUTRON

(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A

60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278

Cheektowaga, New York 14227


(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

MR-2100/2200


O

PERATOR’S

M

ANUAL

Revision C




The installer is to hand over this manual to the owner of the system upon completion of work.



Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3


MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual

Contents

1.0 Unit Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Power Up Sequence ....................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 Types of Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.3 Status Display ................................................................................................................................. 1

1.4 Zone LEDs ...................................................................................................................................... 2

1.5 Buzzer............................................................................................................................................. 2

1.6 Operator Keys................................................................................................................................. 2

1.7 Alarm List ........................................................................................................................................ 5

1.8 LCD and Keypad............................................................................................................................. 6

2.0 Supplementary Information ...................................................................................................................... 9

2.1 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers.............................................................................................. 9

2.2 Miscellaneous Troubles .................................................................................................................. 10 i

MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual ii


1.0 Unit Operation

1.1 Power Up Sequence

The power up sequence of the MR 2100/2200 (hereafter referred to as the MR 2200) panel is started in the following ways: power is applied to the panel; the hard reboot button at the top of the main board is pressed; a Network Reboot command is issued; or the panel has a fault that triggers the internal watch-dog.

The LCD will first display configuration information, then "INITIALIZING MEMORY PLEASE

WAIT". The panel will not respond to key presses or to zone activity. Once this step is done the panel will start to beep (buzzer does not sound after a Network Reboot). Press Acknowledge to silence the panel.

When the initialization is complete, the Main Menu will be displayed on the LCD. At this time the panel is fully operational.

1.2 Types of Inputs

There are a number of types of inputs that can be used in the system. Each has different uses and limitations. They are:

• Alarm: This type of input is the normal inputs to the system from smoke detectors, heat detectors, etc. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules on a network panel. It displays

**ALARM** in the Alarm List.

• Pull Station: This type of input is for pull stations. They are required to activate bells and/ or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules on a network panel. This type cannot have a retard time. It displays **PULL STATION** in the

Alarm List.

• Waterflow: This type of input is for water flow detectors. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules on a network panel. This type displays **WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List.

Through programming, Waterflow type alarms can make the bell circuits they activate to be non-silenceable.

• Supervisory: This type of input is for items such as Shut-Off valves and Pressure sensors for sprinkler systems. They are required to operate an LED. They cannot operate bells/ strobes but can optionally operate relays and control modules on a network panel.

• Halt: This type of input can only stop the operation of a releaser type output. An LED if there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system is required for annunciation of the Halt function. It will use the supervisory LED. Note: Use of this type of input must be limited access to maintain UL listing.

• Abort: This type of input can only delay the operation of a releaser type output. The Abort function maintains the current state of the releaser. The delay timer will continue to run until 10 seconds are left. The releaser will resume normal operation as soon as the input restores. If there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system, an LED is required for annunciation of the abort function. It will use the supervisory LED.

• Monitor: This type of input is used to monitor the action of items such as dampers, door, fans, etc. The supervisory LED is used. Monitor inputs can operate relays and control modules.

• Non-Reporting: These are non-latching inputs. They use the supervisory LED for annunciation. They can operate only relays and control modules. The LEDs, relays and control modules will follow the non-reporting input's status. The LEDs, relays and control modules operated by non-reporting inputs cannot also be operated by Fire, Supervisory or

Abort type inputs.

1


1.3 Status Display

The status display is located in the middle of the main display. It consists of 8 LEDs. The alarm

(red), supervisory (yellow), trouble (yellow), ground fault (yellow), and NAC trouble (yellow) LEDs will flash for any new condition and will be latched by the Acknowledge key. The AC LED (green) will be on while the panel has AC power applied to it. The monitor LED (green) will turn on if any monitor type input is active. The bypass LED (yellow) will turn on if any addressable device has been bypassed.

1.4 Zone LEDs

The optional zone LEDs are across the bottom of the main display. They are visible through the front door. Each zone has an alarm (red), supervisory (yellow), and trouble (yellow) LED. The alarm and supervisory LEDs will turn on as required by the inputs. The trouble LED will light for either an input trouble condition, a ground fault or if there is a bypass present. Use the LCD and keypad (see Section 1.8 below) to determine the exact condition. A new condition is shown by a flashing LED. After the Acknowledge button (see Section 1.6 below) has been pressed, the LED will be lit steadily. Note: If the buzzer is sounding on the panel, Acknowledge will silence the buzzer, but not latch the LEDs. Press Acknowledge again to latch the LEDs.

Each set of zone LEDs is programmed via the database to represent whatever logical zoning is required.

1.5 Buzzer

The buzzer gives audible indication of any conditions in the panel. It may sound in any of four modes. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the buzzer. ( Acknowledge will need to be pressed again to latch flashing LEDs.)

The four buzzer modes are:

• Steady: This indicates any new fire alarm conditions.

• Fast: This indicates any critical failures that must be attended to. These failures can include, but are not limited to memory overflow, network reboot required, database mismatch, etc. The pattern is 50ms on/off.

• Medium: This indicates any new supervisory conditions. The pattern is 200ms on/off.

• Slow: This indicates any new trouble conditions. The pattern is 500ms on/off.

2


1.6 Operator Keys

There are 8 operator keys. In the figure below, the keys are located on the lower left and are labelled “System Controls” The LEDs associated with these keys are used to display function status. The top three keys (Acknowledge, Signal Silence, and System Reset) are not userassignable. The bottom 5 keys are user-assignable for the functions listed in the following table.

The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid

(unavailable) key is pressed. The panel will record every key press in the history.

INSTRUCTIONS:

SYSTEM CONTROLS

Acknowledge

Signal Silence

System Reset

User Assigned

ALARM

SUPERVISORY

TROUBLE

AC

MONITOR

BYPASS

GROUND FAULT

NAC TROUBLE

SYSTEM DISPLAY AND PROGRAMMING

ALARM SUPERV TROUBLE MONITOR

1

4

7

2

5

8

3

6

9

ENTER

CLEAR

HOME

LAMP

TEST


Key

Action

Acknowledge Silences the buzzer and acknowledges new troubles and alarms. If the buzzer is on, Acknowledge will silence it. If the buzzer is not on, any flashing LEDs will become steady. The yellow LED will flash when there is something to acknowledge.

Signal

Silence

Silences the bells. The yellow LED to the right will flash when Signal Silence

The bells will reactivate if the panel receives a subsequent alarm.

is available. The yellow LED to the left flashes when the bells have been silenced.

3


Key

System

Reset

Relay

Disconnect

Test Mode

Signal

Disconnect

Action


• The rightmost green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset.

• The leftmost green LED flashes if the ground fault relay is activated.

Press System Reset to deactivate the ground fault relay to check for restores and additional ground faults. If ground faults remain, the relay will be reactivated after 5 to 30 seconds.

Pressing System Reset with no LEDs flashing will operate any relays that are not used by the system and deactivate any Aux Power outputs. The time they remain open is determined by the Duration time programmed. If the Duration is

0, the relay or Aux Power output will not operate.

Notes:

1.

The system cannot be reset until all circuits and devices are reset.

2.

If both LEDs are flashing, the rightmost LED function has precedence.

3.

The green LED will remain flashing after System Reset is pressed until addressable devices have had their LEDs reset.

Causes the local function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms.

Press again to restore normal operation. The yellow LED will flash while active.

If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

Places the panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The yellow LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege

Level 0 or 1. It follows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI). During test mode, the panel annunciator becomes non-latching for the zone(s) under test.

The common indicators, bells, relays are not activated, and no signal is sent out of Port 3. Test signals can be archived or not as required.

Before beginning testing, the circuits/devices to be tested must be selected. All unselected circuits/devices will operate normally. Be sure that the panel is in test mode. To select circuits/devices, select PROGRAM from the Main Menu on the LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter> key selects the item.

Then select ADDRESSABLE. Then select TEST. For addressable devices, enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear> will return to the previous menu.

When test mode is ended, all devices selected for testing automatically return to normal operation.


Disables sounding of the bells. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the bells are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press Signal Disconnect again to re-enable the bells. The yellow LED will flash while the bells are disabled. Signal Disconnect is not available if the bells are already activated. This function can be set to Privilege

Level 0 or 1.

4


Key

Action

Common

Disconnect

General

Alarm

Switch n On

This function is configurable. It can be programmed to disable the relays or to disable a City Tie module (MRCTYB). When an MRCTYB module is disconnected, a trouble will be reported to the city and then any subsequent signals will not be reported until the card is re-enabled. When the relays are disabled, the yellow LED flashes while the relays are disabled. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. Common disconnect also disconnects the city module MRCTY-B if present and generates a system trouble to indicate that the module is disconnected.

Initiates the general evacuation sequence. All bells are activated in Evacuation mode, selected function relays are activated and the common alarm relay is activated. The yellow LED will flash when activated. Press System Reset to cancel the General Alarm. Note: General Alarm is recorded in the panel archive.

Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and On. The yellow

LED will flash while the switch is forced On. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is on, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.

Switch n Off Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and Off. The yellow

LED will flash while the switch is forced Off. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is off, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.

Manual

Restart


Relay Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect and Test Mode can be made to time out automatically after 4 hours. Relay Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Test Mode and Common

Disconnect all use the same privilege level.

1.7 Alarm List

The Alarm List contains all the current Alarms, Supervisory Conditions and Troubles. Each panel can be configured for one of three modes of operation: In Local mode, each panel only logs events generated from devices that are directly connected to it. For example, a trouble generated on

Panel #1 will not be reflected in the alarm list of Panel #2. Each archive only stores locally generated events. In Master mode, the panel defined as the master collects all network data and maintains an alarm list of all events generated in every panel. If set to Global, every panel displays all other panel’s events.

In all modes, the first/last entry of highest priority will be shown, instead of the Main Menu, if there are any entries in the Alarm List. Alarms are the highest priority, Supervisory Conditions are the

2nd priority and Troubles the 3rd priority. The LCD back light will turn on if any new entry is received. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.

Each entry in the Alarm List consists of one to three screens. Each entry will include an event screen giving a short description of the event. Also, device and panel message screens as required.

For more control in viewing the Alarm List, when the summary screen is showing press <Enter> .

Options for viewing All, Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble entries are provided. Display can begin with

5

MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual the First or Last entry. Once viewing the events, one can look at the next one using the <Right

Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> . <Enter> will act as either <Left Arrow> or <Right Arrow> , whichever was pressed last. <Up Arrow> and <Down Arrow> will rotate between pages of the event.

The event screen of an entry shows one of two forms:

1) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition

Code

Line 2: date and Zone Number

Line 4: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)

or 2) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition

Code


Line 3: description of event

Line 4: circuit/device type

The device and panel message screens, if any, show:

Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition Code

Lines 2 to 4: description from the database

See Section 2.1 for a description of Condition Codes and Zone Numbers.

The summary screen shows either the number of alarm, supervisory and trouble entries in the Alarm

List (shown).

1.8 LCD and Keypad

The LCD is located in the top centre of the front panel. The keypad is to the right of the LCD. They are used to view the status of the panel, to view the latest events, to set the date and time and to enter a passcode. The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed, and three times if an invalid or unavailable key is pressed. The LCD back light will turn on when any key is pressed. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.

Pressing the Lamp Test button causes all panel LEDs to flash. Pressing Lamp Test again will stop the flashing. Timeout for this option is 30 seconds. The LCD will show Lamp Test active.

Information is presented to the user through a series of menus and information screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information. The Main

Menu is displayed under normal conditions. If a privilege level has been entered into the panel, it will be displayed on the Main Menu as well instead of the time. Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item. Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press

<Enter> to select. <Clear> returns to the previous menu without changing any information and


The second line of the display is a clock which shows the current time in 24 hour format. If a privilege level other than zero has been entered, that privilege level will be shown instead of the time. The flashing colon shows that the panel is functioning correctly. All the digits of the clock flash if the time has not been set after a Hard reboot of the panel; also if the time is not set, the panel will show a common trouble. If any memory error occurs (Program Checksum Error,

Database Mismatch, FIFO Overflow, etc.) the clock will display 4 dashes instead of the time. The buzzer will also beep rapidly to indicate the memory error. The clock will also display 4 dashes if any configuration parameter is changed which requires a Hard reboot.

6


The Main Menu has the following selections:

Status: Displays the current status of various parts of the panel. The following options are available:

More: Displays the next screen of menu options. When the last screen of the menu is displayed the next screen will be the first one again.

Misc. Trouble: Displays any troubles with the bells, releasers, AC power, batteries, etc., that are not shown elsewhere. Only sections in trouble will be displayed. Press <Enter> to go to the next screen. See section 2.2 for a list of all possible messages.

Alarm List: Displays the Alarm List under manual control. See Alarm List above, Using the Keypad.

Addressable: This menu has the following options:

Select: Displays the current status of a single device. The device address is entered into the screen saying "circuit or circuit.device". If only a circuit number is entered, the first programmed device on that circuit will be displayed. If <Enter> is pressed without any entry, the first addressable device will be displayed. <Clear> will remove any values entered. If there is no value entered, <Clear> will return to the Status

Menu. If the selected device is not in the database, the next device in the database is shown.

The display shows the device address in the top left corner and the current condition codes in the top right corner (see section 2.0 for a description of the condition codes).

The second line shows the headings for the third line, which contains the analog values sent from the device. Press <Enter> to view the next device or <Clear> to get the address input screen.

Print Sensors: Prints the analog value for every addressable smoke and thermal detector. This is the value of the detector at the time the command is issued.

Identification: Displays a sequence of screens that provide the program and version, the panel's serial number, database version, etc. Press <Enter> to go to the next screen.

Print Database: This function is restricted to Level 1. Print the current configuration

(values entered through the LCD menu) and downloaded database of the panel to screen

14 of the service terminal.

Print Archive: This function is restricted to Level 1. Prints all or part of the history. A selection menu is presented to select which kinds of events to print. The choices are: All,

Alarms, Supervisory, Trouble, Monitor, Bypass and Non-reporting.

Each entry consists of one or two lines. The information provided on the first line, from the left, is:

1. Event Number

2. Time (24 Hour Clock)

3. Date (MM/DD/YY Format)

4. Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)

5. Description

A second line will be printed for addressable devices if a message exists in the database.

This history is sent to the service terminal port if Screen 14 is active. Screen 14 of the service terminal is a copy of all items sent to the printer port.

Archive: The archive is a list of the last 1000 events (approx.). These include all signals, programming changes, time/date changes, etc., that have occurred. Test signals may or may not be recorded but "Test On" and "Test Off" are. The archive is not lost when there is a loss of both

AC and battery power. Each entry includes a short description of the event, and the date and time

7

MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual of occurrence for events occurring at or to the panel. There may be a second screen including information from the database. You can start by looking at either the last event (newest) or the first event (oldest). When viewing the events, scroll to the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> . <Enter> will act as the last Left or Right arrow key pressed. <Up Arrow> and <Down Arrow> will flip between pages of the event.

The screen of a single screen event shows:

Line 1: time, sequence number, and date

Line 2: Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)


The first screen of a two screen event shows:




Line 4: device type

The second screen shows:



Program: Displays the Clock Menu. This menu has 2 options:

Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter> to accept date typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock Menu.

The date change is recorded in the history.

Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter> to accept time typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed,

<Clear> will return to the Clock Menu. The new time entered will be sent to all units on the network, if any. A time change of greater than 5 minutes will be recorded in the archive.

8


2.0 Supplementary Information

53

54

60

61

64

1

65

1

66

67

69

1

80

2

Panel

Zone

0

1

2

50

51

52

2.1 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers

The History and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering.

Condition Code

T

U

W

P

Q

R

S

I

J

M

N

D

E

G

H

Archive Alarm List

A ALARM

B

C bypass com dupl alert ground ilgl msng nofire

M.PULL

abort halt spv trbl wrong

WFLOW

Description

Alarm

Bypass

Comlink


Maintenance Alert

Ground Fault

Hot Key Pressed


Switch


Non-Fire/Non-Reporting

Pull Station Alarm

Releaser Abort

Releaser Halt

Supervisory


Wrong Device Type

Waterflow Alarm


Zone Number

PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:


ZZ Panel Zone

Description

General Alarm



Network Verify

Comlink 1

Comlink 2

Comlink 3

Comlink 6



Program Checksum

Database Checksum

AC Power

Low Battery

Program Restart

Privilege Level

Panel

Zone

86

3

87

88

1

89

1

90

1

91

1

81

82

83

84

85

1

92

1

93

1

94

1

95

1

Description

1st Stage Alarm

2nd Stage Alarm

Switch

Test Mode

Erase Configuration


Passcode Tamper

Database Loaded

Time/Date Change

Hot Key Activation

Memory Overflow

Network Reboot

New Program



9


Notes:

1.

These zones do not restore.

2.

Privilege Level 0 generates a restore signal; all others generate a trouble signal.

3.

This zone does not restore and is not repeated sequentially in the archive.

SSS Sub-Zone Number

Addressable Circuit: Device Number

Comlink 1 (Zone 51): Unit Netowork ID number

Comlink 3 (Zone 53): Unit ID number

Note: Only MR-2614 Annunciators use IDs other than 000.

Comlink 6 (Zone 54): 000 to 008 - MR-2614

009 to 016 - MR-2644

239 - MR-2801

240 - MRDL

Output Supervision (Zone 60): Output Circuit Number

Program Re-start (Zone 69): 000 - Power On/Hard reboot

001 - Watchdog

002 - Clock Monitor




Privilege Level (Zone 80): Level Set

Switch (Zone 83): Switch Number

Hot Key Activation (Zone 90): Function Number of the Hot key pressed

Network Reboot (Zone 92): Unit ID of panel broadcasting the command

Network Reboot Required who (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the Network Reboot

Required trouble

Network Reboot Required why (Zone 95): Reason the panel generated the Network

Reboot Required

001 -- network

002 -- network

003 -- port 3

006 -- negative counter

008 -- memory overflow

All Others: Always 000

10


2.2 Miscellaneous Troubles

This is a list of all possible messages that can be displayed by Miscellaneous Trouble on the LCD.

Only those conditions that are in trouble will be shown. Some of the messages are always displayed if the panel is in Test Mode.

Message Description

PROGRAM checksum

EEPROM checksum

DATABASE checksum

EEPROM failure not enough EEPROM to save addressable settings

The memory chip containing the operating program has an error in it.

Reloading the operating program will correct this problem. If this error keeps reoccurring, the unit will need replacement.

The memory chip containing the configuration information has an error in it. Changing a value of an item set through the LCD menu will cause the panel to create a new checksum. If this error keeps reoccurring, the unit will need replacement.

The memory chip containing the downloaded database has an error in it. Reloading the database will correct this problem. If this error keeps occurring, the unit will need replacement.

The memory chip containing the configuration information is not working correctly. It will need to be erased. This requires a Level 9 passcode.

Erasing the EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive. Be sure to record this information before you erase the

EEPROM. Contact a service representative for help and a Level 9 passcode.

The panel has a 64k EEPROM. The addressable device bypasses and the manual operation of control modules requires a 256k EEPROM for the settings to be retained when the panel is rebooted. Note: This will not cause a common trouble on the panel.

program mismatch hardware mismatch no database loaded

The version number stored in the EEPROM is different from the version number in the program. Either reload the old program or erase the

EEPROM. Erasing the EEPROM requires Privilege Level 9. Erasing the

EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive. Be sure to record this information before you erase the EEPROM. Contact a service representative for help and a Level 9 passcode.

The hardware listed in the database does not match the hardware listed in the panel. Correct the database and reload.

The panel does not have a database in memory. Load a database into the panel.

wrong database version or database mismatch no database for this panel low battery

The database is the incorrect version for the operating program running.

Download a database with the same version number as the operating program.

The panel contains a valid database, but the database does not contain the information for this panel. Either change the panel ID to the correct value, or load a database that includes the panel's ID.

The battery needs recharging or replacement.

11



BBBBBBAA

1234567812

Network module not installed

List the status of the 8 bell circuits and the 2 auxiliary power circuits.

Each column represents one circuit. A dot (.) indicates a normal condition, an S indicates a short, an O indicates an open and a G indicates a ground. Auxiliary power circuits are not supervised for opens. A bell that has been installed with the polarity the wrong way may appear as a short on the bell circuit. Note: This message will always be shown if the panel is in Test Mode. Bells 3-8 indicates status on the optional NAC expansion modules.

The MR22NTWR Network Board has not been installed. The network cannot be used unless this board is installed.

This Control or Annunciator Unit is not reporting in over network port 1.

This message will be repeated for each panel that is off line.

port 1 panel ?

off line port 2 off line The network communications on port 2 have stopped.

The communications on port 3 have stopped.

port 3 off line wrong port 3 program The port 3 selections in the MHI database do not match the firmware option. Either correct the database or load the correct firmware.

BBBBBBBBFFFF

123456781234ASTWGL

The current status of the relays in the system. Each column represents one relay. A dot (.) will appear under each relay that is off and an asterisk (*) will appear under each relay that is currently switched on.

Note: This message appears in Test Mode only.

B Bell Circuit 1 to 8 T Trouble Relay

F Function Relay 1 to 4 W Walk Test Relay

A Alarm Relay

S Supervisory Relay

G

L

Ground Fault Relay

LCD Back Light Relay passcode tamper watchdog disabled

There have been 3 consecutive attempts to enter an invalid passcode.

The watchdog causes the panel to be reset if it fails to operate correctly.

If the watchdog is disabled, the panel will not automatically reboot if it fails to operate correctly.

NETWORK REBOOT required time not set illegal addressable devices network verify ? missing

There has been a loss of communications on the network resulting in lost frames. The panel ID listed is the panel that detected the problem.

This trouble will be sent to all other panels and annunciators on the network. Select PROGRAM/PORTS/NETWORK/REBOOT from the

LCD menu to send the reboot command to all panels.

The time has not been set since the panel has been Rebooted. The time displayed on the clock may be wrong. Enter the correct time.

There are addressable devices connected to the panel that are not included in the downloaded database.

The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is not reporting in. This is indicative of a communications error.

12

MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual network verify ? illegal

Message network verify ? version addressable devices bypassed manual control modules manual function relays manual switches

MEMORY OVERFLOW memory lockout not enough ram

Description

The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is not this panel’s database. Update the database in this panel. Remember that it is recommended that all panels be downloaded with the same database for correct operation.

The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is running a different version of operating program and database. Update all panels in the network to use the same operating program and database.

One or more addressable devices have been bypassed. To view which devices have been bypassed, select PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/

BYPASS/OFF from the LCD menu.

One or more control modules have been forced either on or off. To view which control modules are forced, select PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/

CONTROL MODULES/OFF from the LCD menu.

One or more general function relays have been forced either on or off.

To view which relays are forced, select PROGRAM/RELAYS/MODES/

INDIVIDUAL from the LCD menu.

One or more switches with timers have been forced either on or off. This is not shown for switches that do not have timers. To view which switches are forced, select PROGRAM/SWITCHES/INDIVIDUAL from the LCD menu.

An event happened that caused an out of memory condition. This means that an event has been lost by the panel. The printer and Port 3 will discard frames to help relieve the memory problem. The panel will have to have a Hard reboot done.

The extended memory lockout has timed out. The panel will need a

Hard Reboot to correct this problem. Please notify Secutron of the occurrence of this error. Include in your report the panel serial number and the name, date and time of the operating program.

The operating program requires more extend RAM then the panel actually has. Certain addressable functions and/or the alarm list may not work. Basic fire detection will continue to operate. Upgrade the RAM in the panel to clear this trouble. This should only appear when upgrading the operating program of panels that have been in the field for a number of years.

13



Canada

Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Tel: (905)-695-3545

Fax: (905)-660-4113

USA



Tel: (888)-660-4655

Fax:(888) 660-4113

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

SECUTRON MODUL-R

™

MR-2100/2200 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT

THIS SYSTEM MUST BE TESTED REGULARLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE FIRE CODES. CONSULT

THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL IF UNCERTAIN OF REQUIREMENTS.

•

•

•

•

•

•

GENERAL

A flashing alarm (red), supervisory (yellow), or trouble (yellow) light indicates an unacknowledged (new) condition.

A steady alarm, supervisory, or trouble light indicates an acknowledged condition.

A flashing light to the immediate left of a pushbutton indicates that key is available for use.

A flashing light to the far left of a pushbutton (except SYSTEM RESET) indicates that function has been activated.

One beep when a pushbutton is pressed indicates that pushbutton is valid.

Three beeps when a pushbutton is pressed indicates the pushbutton is unavailable.

•

•

•

•

TROUBLE CONDITION

The yellow SYSTEM TROUBLE light is flashing and the panel audible device is sounding.

NOTIFY AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL IMMEDIATELY. IF

THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY, IT

MAY BE UNABLE TO PERFORM ITS INTENDED FUNCTION. DO

NOT LEAVE THE PANEL IN A TROUBLE CONDITION, SINCE IT

MAY NOT WORK PROPERLY AND LIVES MAY BE LOST IN THE

EVENT OF A FIRE.

To silence the panel audible device, press ACKNOWLEDGE.

To acknowledge the trouble condition and latch the flashing lights, press ACKNOWLEDGE again.

To reset the system once the cause of the trouble condition has been corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.

NORMAL CONDITION

Green AC POWER light is on. All other lights and sounding devices are off.

•

•

•

•

•

ALARM CONDITION

The red ALARM light is flashing, one or more red zone alarm lights are flashing, and alarm signals are sounding.

FOLLOW ESTABLISHED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES FOR

NOTIFYING THE FIRE DEPARTMENT, EVACUATING THE

BUILDING, ETC.

To acknowledge the alarm and latch the flashing lights, press

ACKNOWLEDGE.

To silence the alarm signals, press SIGNAL SILENCE.

To reset the system once the cause of the alarm has been determined and corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.

AFTER THE ALARM CONDITION, IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY

AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

•

•

•

SYSTEM RESET

The green SYSTEM RESET light will flash to indicate that the system

(or some portion of the system) can be reset.

To reset the alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals which have had their causes corrected, press SYTEM RESET.

Any alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions that still exist will not be reset, and will require separate attention.

BYPASS

Bypass allows a specific device to be ignored during service. For example, if work was being done in an area of a building and a smoke detector has been disabled, the bypass feature allows service to configure the panel to ignore troubles, alarms or supervisory indications sent from the disabled device.

NOTE: Bypass must not be used to perform the alarm silence function.

LAMP TEST

To test all panel indicating lamps, press LAMP TEST. To return the system to normal, press Lamp Test again.

•

•

•

•

SUPERVISORY CONDITION

The yellow SUPERVISORY light is flashing, one or more yellow zone supervisory lights are flashing, and the panel audible device is sounding.

NOTIFY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL IMMEDIATELY


To acknowledge the supervisory condition and latch the flashing lights, press ACKNOWLEDGE again.

To reset the system once the cause of the supervisory condition has been corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.

Note: Only authorized service personnel must service this equipment. For service contact:

Service Company Name: _______________________________________

Address ____________________________________________________

Phone # ____________________________________________________

CAUTION: DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER PRIOR TO

SERVICING OR ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY RESULT.

The AC disconnect is located at:

____________________________________________

FRAME AND MOUNT THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO THE PANEL

©

2004 Secutron Inc., Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5W3 Canada LT-2003 Rev. A



™

MR-2900/2920 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT



•

•

•

•

•

•

GENERAL

A flashing alarm (red), supervisory (amber), or trouble (yellow) light indicates an unacknowledged (new) condition.


A flashing green light adjacent to a pushbutton indicates that key is available for use.

A flashing red light adjacent to a pushbutton (except SYSTEM

RESET) indicates that function has been activated.



•

•

•

•













Green AC POWER light is on and clock colon is flashing. All other lights and sounding devices are off.

•

•

•

SYSTEM RESET



To reset the alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals that have had their causes corrected, press SYTEM RESET.


•

•

•

•

•

ALARM CONDITION

The red ALARM light is flashing, one or more red zone alarm lights are flashing, and alarm signals are sounding.



BUILDING, ETC.


ACKNOWLEDGE.

To silence the alarm signals, press SIGNAL SILENCE. The red

SIGNAL SILENCED light will illuminate.




LAMP TEST

To test all panel indicating lamps, press LAMP TEST repeatedly to cycle through all zone alarm lamps, zone supervisory lamps, zone trouble lamps, status lamps, pushbutton lamps, and return to normal. To return the system to normal, press Lamp Test again.



Address ____________________________________________________

•

•

•

•


The yellow SUPERVISORY light is flashing, one or more yellow zone supervisory lights are flashing, and the panel audible device is sounding.

NOTIFY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL IMMEDIATELY.




Phone # ____________________________________________________




____________________________________________


©

2004 Secutron Inc., Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5W3 Canada LT-2004 Rev. A

M R - 2 4 0 0


I

NSTALLATION

M

ANUAL

Revision E






Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the

Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.


READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.

DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.

ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.

STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:



RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY - This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.


SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES - To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-



HS-3400 Installation Manual

Contents


1.1 General.............................................................................................................................................. 1

1.2 Main Circuit Board ............................................................................................................................. 1

1.3 Front Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 2

1.4 Input Circuits...................................................................................................................................... 2

1.5 Output Circuits................................................................................................................................... 2

1.6 Power Supply .................................................................................................................................... 3

1.7 Enclosure........................................................................................................................................... 3

2.0 Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 4

2.1 Mounting and Assembling Unit.......................................................................................................... 4

2.2 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................ 5


4.0 Parts List .................................................................................................................................................. 14

5.0 Appendix A: Stand-by Battery Calculation ............................................................................................... 15

5.1 Battery Calculations........................................................................................................................... 16

6.0 Appendix B: UL Listed Compatible Devices ........................................................................................... 17

6.1 Notification Appliances ...................................................................................................................... 17

6.2 Auxiliary Power Devices .................................................................................................................... 29

6.3 Analog Addressable Devices............................................................................................................. 30

6.4 Releasing Devices............................................................................................................................. 31

7.0 Appendix C: Interconnection To Other Equipment .................................................................................. 32

7.1 Radionics 2071C and 2071AC .......................................................................................................... 32

7.2 Silent Knight 5104 ............................................................................................................................. 33

7.3 CTM City Tie Module......................................................................................................................... 34

7.4 Keltron 3158 TTM.............................................................................................................................. 35 i

HS-3400 Installation Manual ii

HS-3400 Installation Manual

List Of Figures And Tables

Figures

Figure 1: Exploded View ................................................................................................................................ 4

Figure 2: Knockouts ....................................................................................................................................... 5

Figure 3: Style 6 (Class A) ............................................................................................................................. 5

Figure 4: Style 4 (Class B) Wiring .................................................................................................................. 6

Figure 5: M500M Wiring................................................................................................................................. 7

Figure 6: M501M Wiring................................................................................................................................. 7

Figure 7: M502M Wiring................................................................................................................................. 7

Figure 8: M500S Wiring For Signalling Circuits ............................................................................................. 7

Figure 9: M500R Wiring Form C Relay Use................................................................................................... 8

Figure 10: M500X Wiring ............................................................................................................................... 8

Figure 11: Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit Wiring.............................................................................................. 8

Figure 12: Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit Wiring ............................................................................................. 9

Figure 13: Class A Releasing Circuit Wiring .................................................................................................. 9

Figure 14: Class B Releasing Circuit Wiring .................................................................................................. 9

Figure 15: AC Power Connection .................................................................................................................. 10

Figure 16: Relay Connections........................................................................................................................ 10

Figure 17: Auxiliary Power Connections ........................................................................................................ 10

Figure 18: HS-3434 Wiring ............................................................................................................................ 11

Figure 19: HS-2802 and HS-3644 Wiring ...................................................................................................... 11

Tables

Table 1: Maximum Wire Lengths for Addressable Circuits ............................................................................ 6

Table 2: Maximum Wire Lengths for Bell Circuits .......................................................................................... 9 iii

HS-3400 Installation Manual iv

MR-2400 Installation Manual


1.1 General

The MR-2400 Fire Alarm Control Unit provides capability for up to 4 Input Circuits, 6 Polarity

Reversing Bell Circuits, 2 General Purpose Form "C" Relays and 2 auxiliary power outputs as well as system operated relays for alarm and trouble indication.

The basic MR-2400 Fire Alarm Control Unit consists of Main Circuit Board (MR-2401), Power

Supply (MR-2905), Enclosure (MR-2470).

1.2 Main Circuit Board

The Main Circuit Board (MR-2401) provides system controls and visual indications. It contains the system processor, programming port, printer port and non-volatile memory for system firmware.

Software is installed on the main board for critical functions such as programmable logic and timing functions and non-critical functions, such as custom zone and devices messages. All jumpers on the board are for diagnostic and test purposes.

The visual display consists of a series of LEDs for common system indication of alarm, supervisory, trouble and power.

The Circuit Board has an 80 character backlit alpha-numeric LCD. The display provides descriptions of inputs, display of history files, first/last device in alarm, custom messages, display of detector sensitivity, etc. The keypad is used to scroll through the display.

There is a terminal strip on the bottom of the circuit board for the termination of field wiring. Behind the terminal strip there are three connectors: an audio output jack, a 9-pin service terminal port and a 25-pin printer port. The ports are discussed below. The audio jack produces various tones in accordance with a system walk test.

Communication Ports

The Control Unit has a number communication ports available:

• The annunciator port is for connection to the MR-2614 LED Annunciator and MR-2644

Annunciator.

• The general communications port is available for a variety of purposes. Each different purpose will require a different operating program. This port requires the use of an

MR-2109-x communications board. It uses the terminal strip on the bottom of the main circuit board. Typical uses are for connection to a central station, or for connection to an

MR-2944 LCD annunciator. There are a number of versions available:

MR-2109-2 Driver for communications to MR-2944

MR-2109-4 RS-232 driver

• The service terminal port will permit the programming of custom software, such as device messages and I/O functions.

• The printer port connects to any standard parallel printer. The system will print every occurrence as it happens. It can be used for system commissioning and testing by producing a printed log of received events. This can then be checked against a log of tests performed to confirm correct operation.

1


1.3 Front Panel

The system controls consist of 10 system switches, a 15 position alpha-numeric keypad, and a Scroll Button. The 10 system switches are factory defined for operations such as general evacuation, alarm acknowledge, signal silence and system reset. The 15 position keypad is used for technical functions, system/detector maintenance, history recall, device/circuit disarming and manual operation of addressable output modules, relay modules, releasing circuits and bell circuits. The Scroll

Button is used to view the Alarm List.

Front Panel

1.4 Input Circuits

There are two classes of input circuits supported by the Control Unit:

SCROLL

Style 6 (Class A) This is a 4 wire circuit supporting addressable detectors and modules. It requires two input circuits, one (1 or 3) for signal out and following one (2 or 4) for signal return. Up to 99 detectors and up to 99 modules can be connected to the circuit.

Style 4 (Class B) This is a 2 wire circuit supporting addressable detectors and modules. Up to 99 detectors and up to 99 modules can be connected to the circuit.

Notes:

1.

Applicable codes and standards as well as good engineering practices must be considered with regards to the number of addressable devices connected to one addressable circuit. Isolation modules (MRI-500X) should be used whenever more than one fire zone is protected by one addressable circuit.

2.

Current MR-2400 panels will change style to match the database. Older MR-2400 panels were fixed as either Style 4 or Style 6.

1.5 Output Circuits

The bell circuits are rated at 1.0A @ 24VDC. They are protected with solid state fuses. (Note:

Maximum system loading and stand-by battery power must be considered when determining actual bell loading.) A 10 k

Ω

end-of-line resistor is required for supervision of Class B wiring. Class

A bell circuits do not require any end-of-line device. The bell circuits are supervised for open, short and ground fault conditions. The panel will activate bell circuits in three modes: Evacuation, which activates the bells continuously or with the temporal pattern as specified in ANSI S3.41 and ISO

8201 Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal; Alert, which activates the bells in a repeated 1½ s on and 3 s off pattern; and Coded, which sounds short "bings" to represent numbers. Through programming, bell circuits can be used for releaser and releasing type functions.

The general purpose Form "C" relay operation is program defined. The relays are rated at 0.6A @

120VAC / 2.0A @ 30VDC. The system defined Form "C" relays are for Alarm and Trouble indication. These relays are rated at 1.0A @ 24VDC / 0.5A @ 120VAC. The Trouble relay is normally energized so that loss of both AC power and battery power is indicated. The N.O. and

N.C. markings on the Trouble relay refer to this energized state.

The operation of the general purpose relays, releasing circuits and the bell circuits is totally program defined. It is possible to program the activation of circuits to any zone, group of zones, device, group of devices and to further inhibit the operation for a specifiable period of time. Any relays not programmed for use in the database are available for auxiliary power reset, ie the relay

2

MR-2400 Installation Manual will toggle for duration time when the Reset key is pressed. A duration time of zero will disable this feature.

The auxiliary power circuits are rated for 24 VDC @ 150 mA. They are supervised for shorts. Any load placed on the auxiliary power circuits must be included when calculating stand-by battery requirements.

1.6 Power Supply

The Power Supply (MR-2905) is rated at 8A unregulated, providing the system with primary DC power. It is complete with a battery charger rated at 2A and battery supervision circuitry. The power supply and battery are located in separate compartments within the control unit back box.

Battery supervision uses true dynamic supervision circuitry to simulate a load condition approximately every 90 seconds to ensure that the battery is capable of handling the system load requirements on loss of primary power.

If the battery voltage drops too low it is disconnected to protect against damage from a deep discharge.

The battery charger is temperature compensating. The constant used is -0.044V/ C.

Note: Never disconnect or reconnect the batteries while AC power is off.

1.7 Enclosure

The enclosure for MR-2400 Control Unit consists of a back box complete with door, power supply, and Main Board Assembly. The back box is fabricated from 1/16" steel. The back box provides necessary "knock out" type openings for conduit entry. The back box dimensions are 14 ½" Wide x

20 ½" High x 4 ½" Deep. A trim is available for flush mounting the enclosure.

3



2.1 Mounting and Assembling Unit

The Control Unit is shipped in two sections: the

Cabinet complete with Door, Main Board

Assembly, Power Supply and Toroidal

Transformer; and the Battery Pack. The Main

Board Assembly needs no field assembly work.

Figure 1 shows an exploded view of the unit

(door not shown).

Note:

All applicable codes and standards should be considered. Specific reference should be made to NFPA 72 (Local

Systems; formerly NFPA 72A), or CAN/

ULC-S524 and CEC Part 2 Section 32.

Figure 1: Exploded View

Preparing Mounting Surface:

1.

Choose a suitable place for mounting.

2.

Mark placement of mounting screws. Use #10 screws. Drill holes and install plugs (if necessary).

For Surface Mounting:

3.

Support back box in place while inserting screws. Ensure that the cabinet is level before tightening screws.

For Flush Mounting:

4.

The Flush Mount Trim is placed on the back box from the rear of the box. It is attached by four screws. There are slots in the sides of the back box for the trim. Do not tighten the screws all the way so that the trim's position can be changed after the enclosure is mounted.

5.

Support back box in place while inserting screws. Ensure that the cabinet is level before tightening screws. Position the Flush Mount Trim and tighten the four screws holding it in place.

Assembly of Unit:

6.

Attach AC wiring to the transformer wires. The conduit/BX must attach to the back box at one of the three knock-outs inside the AC power compartment (see AC Power

Connections and Figure 15 ). DO NOT APPLY POWER TO THE UNIT UNTIL ALL

DOORS, CABLES AND WIRING ARE INSTALLED AND INSPECTED.

Note: This AC circuit must be a separately fused 15A dedicated circuit. It is recommended that the breaker be locked in the OFF position during installation.

7.

Place the batteries in the bottom of the back box. DO NOT ATTACH BATTERIES UNTIL

AFTER THE AC POWER HAS BEEN TURNED ON.

8.

Mount the Main Board Assembly on the studs. This will cover the 120 VAC compartment and the Power Supply Board.

4


9.

Attach field wiring to the terminal strip on the bottom of the Main Board Assembly. Section

2.2 below describes how each type of circuit is to be wired. Attach conduit to the back box as required using knock-outs (see Figure 2 ) provided. It is recommended that input circuit wiring be physically separated from output circuit wiring.

10. Have the Unit inspected before applying power. The Main Board Assembly will need to be removed to allow for inspection of the

AC power connection. Replace the

Assembly after inspection. Correct and reinspect any problems found.

11. Turn on the AC power to Unit. If no problems occur other than Low Battery, attach the batteries to the wires provided, the black wire to the black (negative) terminal and the

Figure 2: Knockouts red wire to the red (positive) terminal. If the batteries need charging, the Low Battery condition will remain until they are charged.

2.2 Wiring

Style 6 (Class A) Addressable Circuit

This is a 4 wire supervised Style 6 (Class A) communications circuit using addressable devices.

Maximum wire loop lengths are shown in Table 1 .

The recommended wiring is unshielded twisted pair. Wire capacitance and resistance will affect the allowable wire length. Consult Secutron's

Applications Department for specific requirements.

Devices will be connected as in Figure 3 . Use only approved devices. The return wiring must be in a separate conduit.

Figure 3: Style 6 (Class A)

5


Style 4 (Class B) Addressable Circuit

This is a 2 wire supervised Style 4 (Class B) communications circuit using addressable devices. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 1 . Wire capacitance and resistance will affect the allowable wire length. The recommended wiring is unshielded twisted pair. Consult Secutron's Applications

Department for specific requirements. Devices will be connected as in Figure 4 . Use only approved devices.

Note: T-taps may NOT be allowed by the authority having jurisdiction. Refer to NFPA 72 and ULC-S524.

Figure 4: Style 4 (Class B)

Wiring

Table 1: Maximum Wire Lengths for Addressable Circuits

Gauge

18

16

14

12

Belden No.

9571

9572

9580

9582

Distance

975m (3 200 ft)

1 400m (4 600 ft)

2 435m (8 000 ft)

3 045m (10 000 ft)

Note: All distances refer to total wire length.

6


Addressable Modules

The addressable module extended circuits are wired as shown in the following Figures.

Figure 5: MRI-M500M Wiring Figure 6: MRI-M501M Wiring

Figure 7: MRI-M502M Wiring Figure 8: MRI-M500S Wiring For Signalling

Circuits

7


Figure 9: MRI-M500R Wiring Form C Relay Use

Figure 10: MRI-M500X Wiring

Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit

This is a 4 wire Style Z (Class A) signalling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices will be connected as in Figure

11 . Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2 . This is the total length of the wire, from the panel to the furthest device and back to the panel. Use only approved devices. The return wiring must be in separate conduit. The inrush current of some devices may cause the current to exceed the 1A current limit momentarily.

Figure 11: Style Z (Class A) Bell

Circuit Wiring

8


Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit

This is a 2 wire Style Y (Class B) signalling

(notification appliance) circuit. Devices and the 10 k

Ω

end-of-line resister will be connected as in Figure 12 . Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2 . Use only approved devices. The inrush current of some devices may cause the current to exceed the

1A current limit momentarily.

Figure 12: Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit

Wiring

Class A Releasing Circuit

This is a 4 wire Class A releasing circuit. Devices will be connected as in Figure 13 . Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2 . This is the total length of the wire, from the panel to the furthest device and back to the panel. This circuit is rated for 24 VDC and is current limited to 1.0 A.

Use only approved devices. The return wiring must be in a separate conduit.

Ω

Class B Releasing Circuit

This is a 2 wire Class B releasing circuit. Devices and the 10 k

Ω

end-of-line resister will be connected as in Figure 14 . Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2 . This circuit is rated for 24 VDC and is current limited to 1.0 A. Use only approved devices.

Figure 13: Class A Releasing

Circuit Wiring

Table 2: Maximum Wire Lengths for Bell Circuits

12 AWG

14 AWG

16 AWG

250 mA

1219m (4000 ft)

731m (2400 ft)

457m (1500 ft)

500 mA

609m (2000 ft)

365m (1200 ft)

228m (750 ft)

Figure 14: Class B Releasing Circuit

Wiring

750 mA

396m (1300 ft)

243m (800 ft)

152m (500 ft)

1.0 A

304m (1000 ft)

182m (600 ft)

114m (375 ft)


Ω

9


AC Power Connections

The Main Control Unit requires an AC power supply. This supply is connected as shown in Figure 15 .

The batteries forming the Battery Pack are wired in series. The

Battery Pack attaches to the two wires coming from the Power

Supply Board, the black wire to the black (negative) terminal and the red wire to the red (positive) terminal.

Warning:

Never connect or disconnect the batteries while the AC power is off.

Figure 15: AC Power

Connection

Relay Connections

Unused relays are left unconnected. General Purpose Relays and System

Relays operate identically and are wired the same (see Figure 16 ).

Auxiliary Power Circuits

The auxiliary power circuits provide 24 VDC for external devices. The polarity of the circuits is shown in Figure 17 . The Control Unit does not interrupt this circuit.

Figure 16:

Relay

Connections

Figure 17:

Auxiliary

Power

Connections

10


MR-2944 Annunciator

The MR-2944 Annunciator is connected to the panel by 4 wires, 2 for communications and 2 for power. The communications wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is done as shown in Figure 18 .

More than one MR-2944 annunciator can be connected to the panel.

Figure 18: MR-2944 Wiring

MR-2614HS-2802 and MR-2644 Wiring

The MR-2614HS-2802 and MR-2644 are connected to the panel by 4 wires, 2 for communications and 2 for power. The communications wiring is polarity sensitive. An example of the wiring is shown in Figure

19 . Up to eight of each type of annunciator and either one dialer or one reverse polarity module can be connected to the panel. If more than one MR-2614HS-

2802 is used, the 3.9k resistor across the MR-

2614HS-2802 terminals should be removed from all but the last MR-2614HS-2802. The maximum length of communications wiring is 900m (3000 ft) using 22

AWG. The maximum length of power wiring is 300m

(1000 ft) using 18 AWG.

MR-2400

AUX

POWER

ANN

+

+

RX

TX

MR-2614

RED

BLACK

WHITE

GREEN

Figure 19: MR-2614 and MR-2644

Wiring

11



Power

Line

Standby

Alarm

Brown Out Voltage

Battery Charger

Battery Type

120 VAC, 300 VA (nominal)

24 VDC, 100 mA (nominal) plus Bell/Releasing Circuits

93 VAC (typical) normal standby

95 VAC (typical) alarm

2.3 A maximum charging current

Sealed lead acid, up to 48 Ah, 24 V (UL listed up to 38Ah)

Input (Initiating Device) Circuits (4)

Voltage

Max. No. of Devices

Compatible Devices

20-28 VDC

99 Detectors / 99 Modules

MR Series

Note:

Consult Appendix B UL Listed Compatible Devices

Total Line Capacitance 0.5

µ

F

Total Line Resistance 40

Ω

Bell (Notification Appliance) / Releasing Circuits (6)

Supervisory Current 1.0 mA, power limited

Alarm Current 1.0 A, power limited

Voltage 24 VDC, nominal, full wave rectified, unfiltered

End of Line Device 10 k

Ω

Resistor; Class B (Style Y) Only

Note:

Consult Appendix B UL Listed Compatible Devices

System Relays (2)

Type

Rating

Form C, one each for Alarm and Trouble

0.5 A @ 120 VAC (resistive) / 1.0A @ 24VDC

General Purpose Relays (2)

Type

Rating

Form C

0.6A @ 120 VAC (resistive) / 2.0A @ 30VDC

Auxiliary Power Outputs (2)

Voltage

Ripple Voltage

Current

24 VDC @ 150 mA

2 Vrms, maximum

135 mA per circuit, power limited

Note: Consult Appendix B UL Listed Compatible Devices

12


MR-2109-X Communication Boards

Transmission Type

Wire Type

Wire Gauge

Distance

Application

MR-2109-2

Opto-coupled

Twisted Pair

18-22 AWG

10 km (approximately)

Circuit

Description

Addressable

Input Circuit

Signalling

Output Circuit

Class

A

B

A

B

Style (NFPA-72A)

Z

Y

6

4

MR-2109-4

RS-232

Twisted Pair

18-22 AWG

10-20 m

No. of

Devices

99 Detectors

99 Modules

1.0 A Cct.

End of Line

No

No

Yes

13


4.0 Parts List

Basic Control Unit

Packages

Optional Modules

Annunciators

Accessories

Replacement

Modules


MR-2400

HS-3400B

MR-2109-2

Basic Control Unit, 2 Class A Circuits

Basic Control Unit, 2 Class B Circuits

Opto-Coupled Party Line Driver for connection to MR-2944 or SE

2000

MR-2109-4

MR-2944

RS-232 Line Driver for computer connection

Annunciator Driver

MR-2944LCD Annunciator Driver c/w 80 Character LCD

MR-2614HS-2802 LED Annunciator

MR-2614HS-

2802EH

Enhanced LED Annunciator

MR-2915

MR-2644

MR-2902

HS-2802X

LED Driver for Annunciators

LCD Annunciator

Annunciator Strip, 3 x 24 LEDs


MHI Modul-R Human InterfaceNetwork Plus

MR-2976HS-3736 Flush Trim

End-of-Line Resistor for Class B bell circuits MRD-EOL-

10kT301-9008

MRD-

MP300T301-9091

Plate for end-of-line resistors

MR-2401 Motherboard Assembly

MR-2905HS-3035 Power Supply, included with Back Box for Basic System

14


5.0 Appendix A: Stand-by Battery Calculation


Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it will deliver ½ A (500 mA) for 20 hours. A car battery is designed to deliver "cranking" power for a short time, (a few hundred Amps for a few minutes). Unfortunately, fire alarm control panels need both of these characteristics, that is, driving a heavy bell load for a relatively short time, at the end of a 24 hour standby current drain. This protection necessitates certain over sizing.


Note:

The MR-2400 Control Panel is capable of driving a bell load of 8 A maximum. This restriction must be considered when laying out a bell system.

The standard battery options available for the MR-2400 Control Unit are:

• 4 Ah internal

• 7 Ah internal

• 10 Ah internal

• 24 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet


• 48 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet (not UL listed)

The components of the MR-2400 Control Panel and other devices have the following typical current draws:

MR-2400

MR-2944LC

MR-2915

MR-2614HS-

2802

MR-2622HS-

2802X

MR-2644

MRI-1251

MRI-1551

MRI-2251

MRI-2551

124 mA (includes MR-2905) MRI-3251

65 mA MRI-5551

1 mA

20 mA

MRI-M500M

MRI-M501M

5 mA

30 mA

300

µ

A

200

µ

A

300

µ

A

200

µ

A

MRI-M502M

MRI-M503ME

MRI-M500R

MRI-M500S

MRI-M500X

300

µ

A

200

µ

A

300

µ

A

300

µ

A

300

µ

A

300

µ

A

300

µ

A

300

µ

A

450

µ

A

The following page is a sheet suitable for battery calculations.

15


5.1 Battery Calculations

Job: ___________________________________Date: _________

Total Power = Draw x Quantity x Time

For Panels and Input Devices:

Time = Standby Time + Alarm Time = _____ + _____ = _______

Panel/Device

MR-2400

MRI-1551/2551/5551 Detectors

MRI-500M/501M Monitor Modules

MRI-500R Relay Modules

MRI-500S Control Modules, supervised output

MRI-500X Isolator Modules

MRI-502M Monitor Modules

Draw (mA)

124

0.20

0.40

0.30

0.40

0.45

0.30

1

Quantity Total Power (Ah)

Total A:


For Signal Devices

Time = Alarm Time = ______

Signal Device Draw Quantity Total Power

Total Power Requirement = Total A + Total B = ____________________

Note:

5 min = 0.083 hour; 10 min = 0.167 hour; 30 min = 0.5 hour

Total B:

16


6.0 Appendix B: UL Listed Compatible Devices

6.1 Notification Appliances

The following notification appliances, where a current rating is shown, may be used with the

MR-2400 Control Units.

Wheelock

Model

MT-12/24-R

MT-24-WH-VN-W

MT-24-WM-VF-R

Type

Multi tone Horn

Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe, ADA


Current Draw @24 VDC

Audible

48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)

48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)

48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)

Visual

-

78

96

-

-

EH-DL1-R

EH-EL1-R

EHS-DL1-W-VF-R

EHS-EL1-W-VF-R

EH-DL1-WS-24-VF-R

EH-EL1-WS-24-VF-R

EH-DL1-WH-24-VF-R

EH-EL1-WH-24-VF-R

EH-DL1-WM-24-VF-R

EH-EL1-WM-24-VF-R

AES-DL1-R

AES-EL1-R

AES-DL1-WS-24-VF-R

AES-EL1-WS-24-VF-R

AES-DL1-WH-24-VF-R

AES-EL1-WH-24-VF-R

AES-DL1-WM-24-VF-R

AES-EL1-WM-24-VF-R

Electronic Horn

Electronic Horn

Electronic Strobe Horn, Single

Input

Electronic Strobe Horn, Single

Input

Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual

Input


Input


Input


Input


Input


Input

Multi tone Horn

Multi tone Horn

Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe






17

17

35 (combined)

35 (combined)

17

17

17

17

17

17

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

75

75

88

88

25

25

-

-

25

25

75

75

88

88

17


Model

WST-24-FR

WS1T-24-FR

WS3T-24-FR

WHT-24-FR

WH1T-24-FR

WH3T-24-FR

WMT-24-FR

WM1T-24-FR

WM3T-24-FR

VLPM-24-W-VF-R

34T-24-R

7001T-24-W-FR

7002T-24-W-FR

V7001T-24-W-FR

MIZ-24-R

MIZ-24-W

MIZ-24-WS-VF-R

MIZ-24-WS-VF-W

MIZ-24-WH-VF-R

MIZ-24-WM-VF-W

CH-BF1-R

CH-BF1-WS-24-HF-R

CH-CF1-W

CH-CF1-WS-24-CF-W

CH-DF1-R

CH-DF1-WS-24-VF-R

CH-DF1-WM-24-VF-R

MB-G6-24-R

MB-G10-24-R

MBS-G6-24-W-HF-R

MBS-G10-24-W-HF-R

46T-G4-24-R

46T-G6-24-R

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Type

Mini-Horn

Mini-Horn

Mini-Horn w/ Strobe

Mini-Horn w/ Strobe

Mini-Horn w/ Strobe

Mini-Horn w/ Strobe

Chime

Strobe Chime

Chime

Strobe Chime

Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Motorized Bell, 6 in.


Motorized Strobe Bell, 6 in.


Vibrating Bell, 4 in.


20

20

20

20

20

20

20

30

30

55 (combined)

55 (combined)

63

63


Audible

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Visual

25

25

25

75

75

75

88

88

88

88

63

63 (combined)

63 (combined)

63 (combined)

15

15

40 (combined)

40 (combined)

90 (combined)

103 (combined)

-

-

-

25

88

-

25

-

25

-

-

-

-

18

Model

46T-G10-24-R

Type


46T-G6-24-WS-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 6 in.


46T-G6-24-WH-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 6 in.


E-7025-WS-24-VF-R

E-7025-WS-24-VF-W

E-7070-WS-24-VF-R

E-7070-WS-24-VF-W

E-9025-WS-24-CF-W

E-9070-WS-24-CF-W

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

E-7025-WH-24-VF-R

E-7025-WH-24-VF-W

E-7070-WH-24-VF-R

E-7070-WH-24-VF-W

E-9025-WH-24-CF-W

E-9070-WH-24-CF-W

E-7025-WM-24-VF-R

E-7025-WM-24-VF-W

E-7070-WM-24-VF-R

E-7070-WM-24-VF-W

ET-1010-WS-24-HF-R

ET-1070-WS-24-VF-R

ET-1080-WS-24-VF-R

ET-1090-WS-24-CF-W

ET-1070-WM-24-VF-R

ET-1070-WM-24-VF-W

ET-1080-WM-24-VF-R

ET-1080-WM-24-VF-W

CSX10-24DC-R

CSXG10-24DC-R

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Explosion-Proof Bell, Indoor

Explosion-Proof Bell, Outdoor


-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

500

500

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-


Audible

63

Visual

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

63

63

63

63

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

75

75

88

88

88

88

25

25

25

25

-

-

75

75

75

75

75

75

88

88

88

88

19


AH-24

AH-24WP

Model

AS-2415W

AS-241575W

AS-2430W

AS-2475W

AS-24110W

AS-2415C

AS-2430C

AS-2475C

AS-24100C

NH-12/24

NS-2415W

NS-241575W

NS-2430W

NS-2475W

NS-24110W

NS4-2415W

NS4-241575W

NS4-2430W

NS4-2475W

NS4-24110W

MT-24-LS

MT-24-LSM

MT-24-MS

MT-24-IS

MT-24-SL

MT-24-SLM

MT4-24-LS

Type

Mini Horn, indoor


Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn




Multitone Strobe Signal, non syne

Multitone Strobe Signal, sync



76 (combined)

90 (combined)

102 (combined)

163 (combined)

195 (combined)

28

28

28

28

28

128 (combined)

163 (combined)

183 (combined)

273 (combined)

144 (combined)

186 (combined)

48


Audible

41

41

Visual

-

-

92 (combined)

107 (combined)

126 (combined)

186 (combined)

213 (combined)

98 (combined)

133 (combined)

252 (combined)

283 (combined)

28 -

57

72

85

140

169

80

20

Model

MT4-24-LSM

MT4 -24- MS

MT4-24-IS

MT4-24-SL

MT4-24-SLM

AMT-12/24

AMT4-l2/24

AMT-24-LS

AMT-24-LSM

AMT-24-MS

AMT-24-IS

AMT-24-SL

AMT-24-SLM

AMT4-24-LS

AMT4-24-LSM

AMT4-24-MS

AMT4-24-IS

AMT4-24-SL

AMT4-24-SLM

CH70-24

CH90-24

CH70-2415W

CH'70-243OW

CH70-2475W

Type






Mini Horn

Mini Horn













Chime

Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime


48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

20

20

20

20

20

20


Audible

48

Visual

115

48

48

48

48

135

225

96

138

48

48

-

-

-

-

53

68

85

140

80

115

135

225

96

138

80

115

135

225

96

138

21


Model

CH70-24110W

CH90-2415W

CH90-2430W

CH90-2475W

CH90-24110W

CH70-2415C

CH70-2430C

CH70-2475C

CH70-24100C

CH90-2415C

CH90-2430C

CH90-2475C

CH90-24100C

RSS-24l5W

RSS-241575W

RSS-243OW

RSS-2475W

RSS-24110W

RSSP-24110W

RSSP-241575W

RSSP-2475W

RSSP-24110W

RSS-2415C

RSS-243OC

RSS-2475C

RSS-24100C

RSSP-2415C

RSSP-2430C

RSSP-2475C

RSSP-24100C

ET70-2415W

ET70-241575W

ET70-2430W

22

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Type

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe





Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe





Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-


20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

Audible

20

20

20

20

20

20

70

107

215

250

70

107

215

250

Visual

169

53

68

85

140

169

215

250

70

107

140

169

70

107

215

250

53

68

85

140

169

53

68RSSP-

2430W

Strobe, retrofit plate-85

53

68

85

Model

ET70 -2475W

ET70-24110W

ET90-2415W

ET90-24 30W

ET90-2475W

ET90-24110W

ET90-2415C

ET90-2430C

ET90-2475C

ET90-24100C

ET-1080- LS -24

ET-1080-LSM-24

ET-1080- MS -24

ET-1080-IS-24

ET-1080-SL-24

ET-1081- LS-24

ET-1081- LSM -24

ET-1081- MS -24

ET-1081- IS -24

ET-1081-SL-24

E70-2415W

E70-2430W

E70-2475W

E70-24110W

E70 -2415C

E70 -2430C

E70-2475C

E70 -24100C

E90 -2415W

E90 -241575W

E90 -2430W

Type

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker











Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker



Audible

-

-

Visual

140

169

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

169

70

107

215

53

68

85

140

250

53

68

85

96

138

80

115

80

115

135

225

135

225

96

138

169

70

107

215

250

53

68

85

140

23


Model

E90 -2475W

E90-24110W

E90 -2415C

E90 -2430C

E90 -2475C

E90 -24100C

SM -12/24

DSM -12/24

Type

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe speaker

Strobe Speaker

Sync Module

Dual Sync Module


Audible

-

-

-

-

-

-

Visual

140

169

70

107

215

250

25 (combined)

38 (combined)

24


Gentex

Model

GEH24

GES24-15

GES24-15/75

GES24-30

GES24-60

GES24-75

GES24-110

GEC24-15

GEC24-15/75

GEC24-30

GEC24-60

GEC24-75

GEC24-110

Type

Commander2 Horn













GMH24

GMS24-15

GMS24-15/75W

GMS24-15/75C

GMS24-15/75Z

GMS24-30

GMS24-30/75

GMS24-60

GMS24-110

WGMS-4-75

Mechanical Horn

Mechanical Horn/Strobe 15 cd

Mechanical Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd





Mechanical Horn/Strobe 60 Cd


Mechanical Horn/Strobe 75cd

Weather

GX90-4

GX90S-4-15

Piezo Horn 24 Vdc

Piezo Horn/Strobe 15 cd

GX90S-4-15/75W Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Wall

GX90S-4-15/75C Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Ceiling

GX90S-4-15/75Z

GX90S-4-30

GX90S-4-30/75

GX90S-4-60

GX90S-4-110

Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Sync


Piezo Horn/Strobe 30/75 cd



GXS-4-15 Strobe 15 Cd

Audible

21

-

-

-

-

-

-


Visual

-

46

57

57

82

89

102

67 (combined)

78 (combined)

78 (combined)

103 (combined)

110 (combined)

123 (combined)

38

116 (combined)

131 (combined)

153 (combined)

168 (combined)

131 (combined)

180 (combined)

153 (combined)

258 (combined)

143 (combined)

-

15

93 (combined)

108 (combined)

130 (combined)

145 (combined)

108 (combined)

157 (combined)

130 (combined)

235 (combined)

-

-

78

25


Model

GXS-4-15/75-W

GXS-4-15/75-C

GXS-4-15/75-Z

GXS-4-30

GXS-4-30/75

GXS-4-60

GXS-4-110

Type

Strobe 15/75 Cd Wall

Strobe 15/75 Cd Ceiling

Strobe 15/75 Cd Sync

Strobe 30 Cd

Strobe 30/75 Cd

Strobe 60 Cd

Strobe 110 Cd

HG124

SHG24-15

SHG24-15/75-W

SHG24-15/75-C

SHG24-15/75-Z

SHG24-30

SHG24-30/75

SHG24-60

SHG24-110

Electronic Horn 12 or 24 Vdc

Electronic Horn/Strobe 15 cd

Electronic Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd







SPKE4-15

SPKE8-15

SPKE4-15/75-W

SPKE8-15/75-W

SPKE4-15/75-C

SPKE8-15/75-C

SPKE4-15/75-Z

SPKE8-15/75-Z

SPKE4-30

SPKE8-30

SPKE4-30/75

SPKE8-30/75

SPKE4-60

SPKE8-60

SPKE4-110

SPKE8-110

Speaker/Strobe 4" 15 cd


Speaker/Strobe 4" 15/75 cd Wall

Speaker/Strobe 8" 15/75 cd Wall

Speaker/Strobe 4" 15/75 cd Ceiling

Speaker/Strobe 8" 15/75 cd Ceiling

Speaker/Strobe 4" 15/75 cd Sync

Speaker/Strobe 8" 15/75 cd Sync



Speaker/Strobe 4" 30/75 cd

Speaker/Strobe 8" 30/75 cd





ST24-15

ST24-15/75

ST24-30

Commander Strobe 15 cd

Commander Strobe 15/75 cd



Audible

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Visual

93

115

130

93

142

115

220

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

30

108 (combined)

123 (combined)

145 (combined)

160 (combined)

123 (combined)

172 (combined)

145 (combined)

250 (combined)

-

-

-

115

115

220

220

93

93

142

142

115

115

130

130

78

78

93

93

45

57

57

26

Model

ST24-60

ST24-75

ST24-110

HS24-15

HS24-15/75

HS24-30

HS24-60

HS24-75

HS24-110

Potter

Model

PBD-246

PBD-248

PBD-2410

Space Age

Model

SSU7620

SSU7625

SSU7630

SSU7521

SSU7522

SSU7526

SSU7527

SSU7531

SSU7532


Type




Commander Horn/Strobe 15 cd

Commander Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd





Vibrating Bell

Vibrating Bell

Vibrating Bell

Type


Audible

-

-

-

75 (combined)

87 (combined)

87 (combined)

114 (combined)

116 (combined)

140 (combined)

Visual

84

86

110


Audible

60

60

60

Visual

-

-

-

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Speaker/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Speaker/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Speaker/Strobe

Type


Audible

-

-

-

93 (combined)

-

143 (combined)

-

173 (combined)

-

Visual

80

130

160

80

130

160

27


System Sensor

Model

P2415 (R) (W)

P241575 (R) (W)

P2475 (R) (W)

P24110 (R) (W)

P241575K

P2475K

P24110K

P241575F

S2415 (R) (W)

S241575 (R) (W)

S2475 (R) (W)

S24110 (R) (W)

S241575K

S2475K

S24110K

S241575F

H12/24

H12/24K (R) (W)

HC12/24

HC12/24K

MDL

SSM24-6

SSM24-8

SSM24-10

MA12/24D

SS24LO

SS24LOC

SS24M

SS24MC

SS24LOLA

MASS24LO

MASS24LOC

MASS24LOLA

MASS24M

Type

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn

Horn

Horn

Horn

Sync Module

Bell

Bell

Bell

Electronic Sounder

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Electronic Sounder/Strobe




28

15 (combined)

30

30

30

59

59

-

-

-

-

59

-

59

59


-

-

-

-

-

-

39

-

Audible

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

-

39

39

39

39

191

64

159

191

64

60

64

159

-

-

64

-

-

Visual

60

64

159

191

64

159

191

125

80

45

45

-

45

45

125

80

125

-

-

-


Model

MASS24MC

Type


PA400R (R) (W) (B) Sounder

PA400RF (R) (W) Sounder

PS24LO (R) (W) (B) add on Strobe

SS2415ADA (R) (B) Strobe

SS241575ADA (R)

(B)

Strobe



Horn/Strobe MASS2415ADA (R)

(B)

MASS241575ADA

(R) (B)

Horn/Strobe

MASS2475ADA (R)

(B)

MASS24110ADA (R)

(B)

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

SS2415ADAS

SS241575ADAS

Strobe

Strobe

MASS2415ADAS Horn/Strobe

MASS241575ADAS Horn/Strobe

59

59

59

-

-

59

-

-


Audible

59

Visual

125

12

12

-

-

-

25

120

200

245

90

120

200

245

90

59

59

-

-

125

180

125

180

RP2415ADA

RP241575ADA

RP2475ADA

RP24110ADA

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

-

-

-

-

90

120

200

245

6.2 Auxiliary Power Devices

The following Listed devices are compatible with the output of the 24 VDC auxiliary power circuits of the MR-2400. Each circuit may be loaded to a maximum of 150 mA in standby or alarm conditions.

Manufacturer

Air Products

Model

PAM-4

Type

Relay Module

Input Current at 24 VDC

29


6.3 Analog Addressable Devices

The following Listed analog addressable smoke detectors, detector bases, monitor modules, control modules and fault isolator modules are compatible with the MR-2400 Control Panel. Up to

99 detectors and 99 monitor/control modules may be connected to each addressable communications circuit. Refer to the installation instructions which accompany each device for details of installation wiring and proper application.

Manufacturer

Secutron

System

Sensor

Model Type

MRI-1251

MRI-1251B

MRI-2251

MRI-2251B

MRI-2251T





MRI-2251TB


Photoelectric type smoke detector w/thermal element

MRI-2251TMB Acclimate photoelectric type smoke detector w//thermal element

MRI-5251P Thermostat

MRI-5251B Thermostat

MRI-5251RP Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise

MRI-5251RB

MRI-5251H

Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise

High Temperature Thermostat

MRI-M500M

MRI-M501M

Intelligent Monitor Module

Mini Monitor Module

MRI-M502M Zone Interface Module


MRI-M500R

MRI-M500S

MRI-M500C

MRI-M500X

1251

Relay Module

Supervised Control Module

Control module

Isolator Module


Installation

Instructions

D200-51-00

D200-28-00

D200-03-00

D200-29-00

D200-03-00

D200-29-00

D200-29-00

D200-88-00

D200-30-00

D200-89-00

D200-30-00

D200-30-00

M500-09-00

M500-10-00

M500-11-00

D500-42-00

M500-08-00

M500-07-00

D500-37-00

D200-51-00

1251B

1551

2251

2251B

2251T

2251TB

2251TMB

2551






Photoelectric type smoke detector w/thermal element

Acclimate photoelectric type smoke detector w/thermal element


D200-28-00

D500-03-00

D200-03-00

D200-29-00

D200-03-00

D200-29-00

D200-29-00

D500-04-00

30


Manufacturer

System

Sensor

(cont’d)

Model

2551TH Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ thermal element

Type

Installation

Instructions

D500-04-00

3251 Combination smoke detector and thermostat

5251P Thermostat

5251B

5251RP

5251RB

5251H

Thermostat




5551 Thermostat

5551R Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise

M500M

M501M

M502M



M500C

Monitor Module for 2-wire smoke detectors

Classes A/B initiating

Control module

M500R

M500S

Relay module

Supervised control module

D200-57-00

D200-88-00

D200-30-00

D200-89-00

D200-30-00

D200-30-00

D500-11-00

D500-11-00

M500-05-00

M500-02-00

D500-42-00

M500-0800

M500-07-00

M500X Fault isolator module 0500-37-00

6.4 Releasing Devices

The following Listed releasing devices are compatible with the MR-2400 Control Unit.

Manufacturer

ASCO

Skinner

Model

T8210A107

R8210A107

8210A107

73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2

Type

Solenoid Valve

Solenoid Valve

Solenoid Valve

Solenoid Valve

31


7.0 Appendix C: Interconnection To Other Equipment

7.1 Radionics 2071C and 2071AC

The wiring between the MR-2400 and the Radionics 2071C and 2071AC Dialers is as shown in the following diagram:

An addressable module may be substituted as follows for the alarm contacts: to MR-2900

4

6

MRI-500R

7

8

2071C/AC

Trouble contacts must be connected to the panel.

Note:

The Radionics 2071C and 2071AC are separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.

32


7.2 Silent Knight 5104

The wiring between the MR-2400 and the Silent Knight 5104 dialer is as shown in the following diagram:

An addressable module may be substituted as follows for alarm contacts only: to FACP

4

6

MRI-500R

1

4

2

3

5104


Note:

The Silent Knight 5104 is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.

33


7.3 CTM City Tie Module

The CTM is designed to interface between a control panel and a local city tie box. The interface from the control panel is via a 24VDC signal circuit. This module is intended for connection to the control unit at the protected premises.

Ratings:

City Tie Module

Operating Voltage 24 VDC

Standby Current 2 mA

Alarm Current

UL listed

1.5 A (less than 10 milliseconds) for Model DC-2A Master Box

File S3610

City Tie Box

Series type Coil Resistance 14.5 ohms

The CTM is wired as shown below.

34

Notes:

• The CTM is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.

• When connecting the CTM module to any of the bell (NAC) circuits, that circuit(s) must be programmed as a strobe circuit.


7.4 Keltron 3158 TTM

The Keltron 3158 TTM and the MR-2400 are wired together as shown below:

Addressable control modules cannot be used with the Keltron 3158 TTM.

Note:

The Keltron 3158 TTM is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.

35


Warranty & Warning Information

Warning Please Read Carefully

Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:

Note to Installers

This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system end-users of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.

System Failures

36


Limited Warranty

Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period,

Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron

Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.

International Warranty

The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.

Conditions to Void Warranty

This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:

•damage incurred in shipping or handling;

•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;

•damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or

•water damage;

•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;

•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);

•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;

•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;

•damage from improper maintenance;

•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.

Warranty Procedure

To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from

Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.

Note: Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.

Disclaimer of Warranties

This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.

This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.

37


Out of Warranty Repairs

Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.

Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which

Secutron Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.

Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.

38

WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.

However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.

NOTE: Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.

SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY,

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.



Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

M R - 2 4 0 0


P

ROGRAMMING

M

ANUAL

Revision D






Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3


MR-2400 Programming Manual

Contents


Warnings: Before programming............................................................................................................... 1

1.1 General.............................................................................................................................................. 1

1.2 Addressable Devices......................................................................................................................... 1

1.3 Releasing Service............................................................................................................................. 4

1.4 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors ............................................................................................................... 5

2.0 Editing MHI Databases ............................................................................................................................ 6

2.1 General Programming Notes............................................................................................................. 6

2.2 System Window................................................................................................................................. 7

2.3 Switches Window .............................................................................................................................. 10

2.4 Groups Window ................................................................................................................................. 11

2.5 Panel Window.................................................................................................................................... 12

2.6 Circuits and Devices Windows .......................................................................................................... 24

2.7 Internal Circuits Window.................................................................................................................... 28

2.8 Relate Window .................................................................................................................................. 29

3.0 LCD Programming ................................................................................................................................... 31

3.1 General Comments ........................................................................................................................... 31

3.2 Clock.................................................................................................................................................. 32

3.3 Common Relays ................................................................................................................................ 32

3.4 Switches ............................................................................................................................................ 32

3.5 Addressable....................................................................................................................................... 33

3.6 Battery ............................................................................................................................................... 34

3.7 Archive............................................................................................................................................... 35

3.8 Relays................................................................................................................................................ 35

3.9 Ports .................................................................................................................................................. 35

3.10 Alarm List......................................................................................................................................... 37

3.11 Passcode......................................................................................................................................... 37

3.12 Memory............................................................................................................................................ 38

3.13 Buzzer ............................................................................................................................................. 38



5.1 Battery Calculations........................................................................................................................... 42


6.1 Control Unit........................................................................................................................................ 43

6.2 Addressable Module.......................................................................................................................... 47

7.0 Appendix D: Table of Reporting Codes ................................................................................................... 50 i

MR-2400 Programming Manual ii



Figures

Figure 1: 4-Wire Device Wiring (typical)......................................................................................................... 5

Figure 2: System Window .............................................................................................................................. 7

Figure 3: Switches Window............................................................................................................................ 10

Figure 4: Groups Window .............................................................................................................................. 11


Figure 6: IDs Supervised ............................................................................................................................... 14

Figure 7: Annunciator Panel Window............................................................................................................. 14

Figure 8: Outputs Dialog ................................................................................................................................ 15

Figure 9: Options Dialog ................................................................................................................................ 16

Figure 10: Default Key Assignment ............................................................................................................... 18

Figure 11: Fixed Key Assignment .................................................................................................................. 18

Figure 12: Dialer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 20

Figure 13: Dialer Configuration 1 ................................................................................................................... 21

Figure 14: Dialer Configuration 2 ................................................................................................................... 22

Figure 15: Call Directions............................................................................................................................... 23

Figure 16: Zone Data ..................................................................................................................................... 23

Figure 17: Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes .................................................................... 24

Figure 18: Circuits Window ............................................................................................................................ 24

Figure 19: Devices Window ........................................................................................................................... 25

Figure 20: Copy Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................... 27

Figure 21: Internal Circuits Window ............................................................................................................... 28

Figure 22: Relate Window.............................................................................................................................. 29

Figure 23: Typical Menu ................................................................................................................................ 31

Figure 24: Typical Selector ............................................................................................................................ 31

Tables

Table 1: Maximum Capacitance for Network Baud Rates ............................................................................. 36

Table 2: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes .................................................................................... 50

Table 3: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restoral Event Codes................................................................................. 51

Table 4: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restoral Codes......................................................................... 52 iii

MR-2400 Programming Manual iv



Warnings: Before programming

1.

All applicable codes and standards should be considered when programming the Control

Unit.

2.

The Control Unit will continue to monitor input circuits and devices and will act according to the current program settings if an alarm is received while it is being programmed.

3.

Loading a new database will erase the current database before loading the new database.

If the new database is not loaded after the erasure, the panel will not operate.

4.

The database version number must match the number required by the operating program, otherwise a Database Mismatch trouble condition is generated. This condition will disable the panel until a correct operating program is loaded.

5.

The database must be completely loaded for it to be considered valid. The program keeps track if the last database load was valid/complete or not. An invalid database load will disable the panel until a valid database load is done.

1.1 General

The control unit uses a downloaded database for input circuit programming. This database includes the addressable devices on-line, and the Bells, Releasers, Functions Relays and Control

Modules activated by the addressable devices. This database is created and downloaded from an

IBM compatible computer using the Modul-R Human Interface (MHI) program. Refer to the

Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for instructions on downloading the database.

Note: All communications are stopped during the database load. This will cause an off-line trouble to be recorded by the central station that communicates with the panel.


The MR-2400 uses analog/addressable devices. There are two general types of devices: sensors and modules. The following devices are supported:

Modules

MRI-M500M

MRI-M501M

MRI-M502M

MRI-M503M

MRI-M500DM

MRI-M500R

MRI-M500S

MRI-M500X

Sensors

MRI-1251

MRI-1551

MRI-2251

MRI-2551

MRI-2251T

MRI-2551TH

MRI-3251

MRI-5251

MRI-5551

MRI-5251R

MRI-5551R

Monitor module

Mini monitor module

Monitor module for conventional 2-wire smoke detectors

Micro monitor module (EN54 listed only)

Dual monitor module

Relay Module

Control module

Isolator module






Photoelectric type smoke detector c/w heat detector




Rate of Rise and fixed temperature detector, low profile

Rate of Rise and fixed temperature detector

1


The MRI-M500M, MRI-M500DM, MRI-M501M, MRI-M502M and MRI-M503M monitor modules all appear the same to the MR-2400. This allows for the easy substitution of devices if field requirements change. The MRI-M501M and MRI-M503M modules are intended for mounting inside the back box of a conventional contact device. The MRI-M500M, MRI-M500DM and

MRI-M502M require back boxes for mounting.

The MRI-M500DM dual monitor module has two input circuits, both Class B (Style B). The first input is on the address dialed into the module and the second circuit uses the dialed address plus

1. That is if the dials are set for address 34, the monitor modules to be programmed into MHI are at addresses 134 and 135.

The MRI-M502M monitor module can be used for monitoring up to 20 System Sensor two-wire smoke detectors. The module requires a separate 24 VDC supply to power the smoke detectors.

Also, some external means of resetting the power must be provided since the module cannot reset the detectors. This can be accomplished with one of the general purpose relays of the MR-2900.

Do not assign any usage to the relay in the MHI database. Also, the relay must be assigned a non-zero duration. Then the relay will operate whenever the Reset hot key is pressed when it has nothing else to reset (neither LED is flashing).

The MRI-M500S control module can be used to control a supervised output, such as a bell or strobe circuit. The control module monitors the circuit wiring and troubles will be reported. The module will require a separate 24 VDC supply for the controlled circuit. When programming the database in MHI, be sure to program the control module correctly. Choose any “Control ( str )” other than “Control (relay)” for the MRI-M500S module. The MR-2400 will not operate a control module if the supervised circuit is shorted. Also there are options in MHI that affect the MRI-M500S control module but not the MRI-M500R relay module.

The MRI-M500R relay provides two Form C relays. Choose“Control (relay)” for the MRI-M500R module. There are options in MHI that affect the MRI-M500R relay module that do not affect the


The MRI-M500X isolator module is used to prevent wiring faults from affecting the entire circuit. It divides the addressable circuit into sections. The isolator has separate IN and OUT wiring. A short on one side of the isolator will not be seen on or affect the other side. Isolator modules do not use addresses. The isolator relies on a voltage threshold to determine whether it should be isolating or not. This voltage threshold is around 6.5V. All isolators in a system are in isolated mode on system power up. If there is an excess of current draw, the isolator will not close. When the short is removed, the isolator module will automatically close the circuit again. The LED on the isolator module will turn on when the module is in isolated mode, otherwise it will flash periodically. System



MRI-B501

MRI-B501B

MRI-B210LP

MRI-B501BH

MRI-B524BI

MRI-B224BI

MRI-B524RB

MRI-B224RB



Flanged base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile

Sounder base for all sensors

Isolator base for MRI-x551 sensors

Isolator base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile

Relay base for MRI-x551 sensors

Relay base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile

The relay and sounder bases are activated by the sensor LED. When this LED stays on for more than 10 seconds, the base will activate. This requires that the MR-2400 have the LED mode set to

2


FLASH. This is done through the LCD Menu by choosing PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/

LED MODE/FLASH. The MR-2400 will only turn on the LEDs of up to 5 devices

1

per addressable circuit to prevent excess current flow. While the panel will continue to respond to further alarms from the circuit, the panel will not turn on additional LEDs. The MRI-B501BH sounder base requires a separate 24 VDC supply for operation. If the polarity of this supply is reversed for more than 10 seconds, the sounder base will activate.



Device Faults



• Illegal (I): A device is reporting as an address that the database shows as unused. For a new installation, this is generally indicative of devices that have been mis-addressed. For illegal sensors, since there is no programming available, if an alarm condition is detected, the MR-2400 will operate all its bell circuits.

2

The MR-2400 will always ignore illegal modules.

• Wrong Type (U): This occurs if the device is not the type expected for the address. For example, the database lists an address to have an ion smoke detector, but a photo smoke detector has reported for the address. This error will also be used if the panel cannot determine the type of the device.


3

• Modules: The extended circuit from the module has a wiring fault. Note: Control modules that supervise their output circuit will not be operated if the output circuit is shorted

4

.

• Duplicate (D): This means that two devices are using the same address. The MR-2400 does a check every hour for duplicate devices. If either device goes into alarm, the panel operates normally. Note: Due to the method used to detect duplicate devices, it is possible for a single device to appear as duplicate devices. Generally, the device will need to be replaced.

1. BRK programs dated before 2 April 1999 limit the number of LEDs to 3.

2. BRK programs dated before 18 February 1999 always ignore illegal sensors.

3. BRK programs dated before 9 March 1999 do not report sensor troubles.

4. BRK programs dated before 10 September 1999 do not operate control modules if in any fault.

3


Class A Inputs

The Class A Addressable Inputs uses two input circuits, out on the odd numbered circuit and in on the following even numbered circuit, for example: out on circuit 1 and in on circuit 2. Both circuits are powered by the panel from a single source, so that there is no internal isolation between the circuits. This means that a short across one circuit will affect the other circuit.

1.3 Releasing Service

The six output circuits are available for releasing service through programming. The MRI-M500S control module can also be programmed for releasing. Releasers can be programmed to be normally On (Continuous) or normally Off (Momentary). Continuous releasers will be turned off by a loss of AC power as well as by input. There can be three types of inputs to start operation:

Normal, Fast and Cross-Zoned. There are also Abort and Halt features available. Releaser operation is subject to both a delay and a duration time.

Normal operation of a releaser is as follows:

1.

An Alarm input causes the start of the releaser delay.

2.

After the delay time, the releaser is activated for the duration time.

3.

After the duration time, the releaser is returned to its normal state.

After this sequence of operation, the releaser will have to be reset before it will operate again.

The inputs that activate and control releaser operation are as follows:

• Normal Input: Causes the selected releaser to start its normal operating sequence.

• Fast Input: Causes the selected releaser to operate immediately, ignoring any delay time and will over-ride the Halt function (see below). The releaser will run for its standard duration.

• Cross-Zoned Input: These inputs allow for multiple inputs to be required before the releaser is activated. Inputs are assigned either to the “A-side” or “B-side”. If an alarm is received from both an A-side and a B-side detector, the releaser will start its normal operation.

• Halt Input: This will cause the selected releaser not to operate. The releaser will have to be reset before it will operate normally again. The Fast Input will over-ride the Halt function

(see above). Note: If used, this type of input must be controlled access to maintain UL listing.

• Abort Input: This will cause the selected releaser to stop running its timer once it reaches

10 seconds. The timer will stay at 10 seconds until the Abort input is restored. The timer will then resume.

Restrictions on Releaser Programming

1.

Normal, Cross-zoned and Fast inputs can be any of Alarm, Pull Station, Waterflow or

Supervisory functions.

2.

Abort and Halt functions can only be assigned to monitor modules.

4



4-wire detectors can be reset by using one of the function relays on the panel. The relay is not programmed for any use, that is, it is unassigned. The next requirement is that a non-zero duration be programmed for it (see

Section 2.5.1). A duration of zero disables this function. Once this is done, wire the power for the device as shown in Figure 1 . A third party power supply can be used instead of the Aux Power as shown. Whenever the

System Reset operator key is pressed when neither LED is flashing, the relay will operate for the duration programmed.

Figure 1: 4-Wire Device Wiring (typical)

5


2.0 Editing MHI Databases

2.1 General Programming Notes




If the current database has been previously verified and you select Edit, a requester will be displayed confirming your request to edit the database. If No is chosen, then the database is displayed in View mode. Editing the database will change the database to a non-verified state and will change the Last Edit Date.

Prior to an editing session, the database will be automatically backed up. This back up copy will have the same name as the original database, but will incorporate a .BAK extension. If a database becomes corrupted, delete it and rename its .BAK backup file to have a .DBA extension. This will restore the database to the state prior to the last editing session .

Note: When upgrading from a version 17 (or earlier) system, a number of items that were programmed at the panel are now included in the database. See the file UPGRADE.TXT for a complete description of these changes. Follow these instructions to obtain the information required before upgrading your firmware:

1.

Connect your computer to the panel and open the Terminal window

2.

Select the Printer screen in the Terminal: press

14

<Tab >

3.

You should note that the title bar of the Terminal window displays the text "File logging in progress...". If this does not appear, press the button Log On .

4.

In the terminal window, type the following command: 99?

5.

The panel's configuration settings will be listed in the Terminal window and it will also be saved in the file: LOG_CONT.TXT, located in your program directory.

6.

Close the Terminal window

7.

You may now view the contents of the file using any standard word processor or the

NOTEPAD program supplied with Windows

8.

You must perform the above procedure for ALL panels in your system

Panel Types

There are a number of different types of panels that may be programmed.

• MR-2900 (mb2931) Fire Panel: Not covered in this manual.



• MR-2200 Fire Panel: Not covered in this manual.

• MR-2400 Fire Panel: This panel has four addressable input circuits that can be programmed for either 2 Class A or 4 Class B input circuits. New MR-2400 panels will use the class set in the database. Older MR-2400 panels will need the database to match the class fixed in the panel. There are six power-reversing output circuits. These output circuits can be programmed to be used as either bells or releaser type circuits. This is a stand-alone fire panel but it can be networked to the MR-2944 or MR-2934 annunciators.


This allows for less information to be sent on the network. An optional 4x20 LCD can be included. It requires the MR-2910 Network Board for communications.

• MR-2934 Annunciator: It is identical to the MR-2944 in operation. It has the network communications built onto the board instead of using the MR-2910 Network Board. This annunciator is no longer produced.

6


• MR-2924 Annunciator: Not covered in this manual.

• MR-2914 Annunciator: Not covered in this manual.

Notes:

1.

The MR-2614 and MR-2644 Annunciators can be attached to the MR-2400 panel. They are considered an extension of the panel by MHI and do not change how these panels interface with other annunciators.

2.

All products no longer produced will be supported for existing systems.


The System Window (see

Figure 2 ) allows editing of all system level options, as well as detailing other system wide information.

The Title Bar of the window will show whether editing or viewing of the database is being performed and the name of the current database.

The text in the top left corner provides information about the database. The top line gives the date and time the database was last edited.

The next line states whether

Figure 2: System Window the current contents have been verified or not; and whether the database has been compressed or not.


• Bell System is a drop down list for selecting how the bells and strobes will operate. This sets the base operation for the entire network. If coded bells are required, the bell codes are defined for each input individually. The following options are available:

-- Alert: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal

Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAC timeout, the panel will progress to Second Stage. Second stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.

-- Evac: A First Stage alarm will activate selected bells in Evacuation mode. Second Stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode. There is no timeout from First to Second

Stage.

-- Alert/Evac: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Evacuation mode and all other bells on the panel in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot



-- Staged: The 1st alarm will activate selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or

Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the selected bells are switched to Evacuation mode and the next bells, ie the ones with the next higher number, are activated in Alert mode. This sequence is repeated until all bells are in

Evacuation mode. When the highest numbered bell circuit switches to Evacuation mode, all bell and strobe circuits on the panel will be turned on in Evacuation mode. For

7

MR-2400 Programming Manual example, if the alarm activates Bells 1 and 4, after the NAK timeout, Bells 1 and 4 are switched to Evacuation mode and Bells 2 and 5 are set to Alert mode. A 2nd alarm will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.

Notes:

1.

Bells must be assigned consecutive bells circuits with no Releasers assigned in between Bells. For example: circuits 1, 2, 3, 4 can be assigned as Bells but not circuits 1, 2, 4, 5 with circuit 3 a Releaser.

2.

Control modules cannot be programmed as bell or strobe if the Staged Bell system is used.

• Subsequent Alarm controls how Alert, Evac and Alert/Evac type bell systems behave when a new alarm is received while one is still active. 1st Stage has the panel repeat the

First Stage operation. 2nd Stage has the panel go immediately to Second Stage operation.

• Resound controls how the panels handle the automatic resounding of silence bells when a new alarm is received. There are two modes:

-- Local: Each panel will resound only its own silenced bells when a new alarm is received. This would be used when panels in a network are in different buildings, such as a campus.

-- Global: All panels in a network will resound silenced bells when a new alarm condition is received on any panel in the network. This is used when the panels are all in the same building, such as a large plant. (This setting is not applicable to the MR-2400

FACP as it is not networkable.)

• Evac controls whether the bell system Evacuation Mode sounds Steady (continuously) or uses a Temporal pattern as specified in ANSI S3.41 and ISO 8201 Audible Emergency

Evacuation Signal . The pattern used ½s On, ½s Off, ½s On, ½s Off, ½s On, 1½s Off repeated.

• Waterflow controls if bells can be silenced if they are started by a waterflow type input. If

Non-Silenceable is chosen, bell circuits activated due to a waterflow input cannot be silenced until the waterflow device has restored.

Note: This setting affects the bell circuits only. It has no affect on control module operation.

• Language chooses English (default), French or Hungarian characters to be used in messages. See Appendix C Languages of the Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for a description of the letters supported and the method of entering them.

• Alarm List Sequence controls which end of the Alarm List is shown automatically. If First is chosen, the first (oldest) item in the alarm list will be shown. If Last is chosen, the last

(newest) item in the alarm list is shown. Regardless of order, alarms always take precedence in being shown. Another way to think of it is that First shows where the fire started while Last shows where the fire has gotten to.

• Disconnects controls which panels the Signal Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Releaser

Disconnect and Common Disconnect hot keys affect. This option is for MR-2200 and

MR-2900 networks. For the MR-2400, choose Local.

-- Local: The Disconnect hot keys affect only the panel they are on.

-- Global: The Disconnect hot keys affect all the panels in the network.

The System Message is a text entry box for defining a message that is 3 lines by 20 characters that is used to identify the system. This message is printed at the top of printouts and shown on some service terminal screens, but it is not used in any LCD except in STATUS/IDENTIFICATION.



8


The Enforce Local LED Rules check box forces an LED on an input's panel be related. Normally an LED anywhere in the system is all that is required. This option will need to be unselected if the

MR-2400 panel does not have any MR-2614 annunciators.

The Allow Complex Releaser Definitions check box enables the extended functionality of the releaser type circuits and control modules programmed for releasing. This allows for the Fast (no delay) operation of a releaser and for the AND functioning of A and B side inputs to a releaser. See section 1.3 Releaser Programming for details.

The Enforce Group Association checking check box enables MHI to check to see if a group association has been included in the relates of inputs. This option must be enabled when using an

MRDL Dialer.

The Observe Daylight Savings Time check box enables or disables the automatic changing of the clock for Daylight Savings Time. If enable, the system will move 1 hour ahead the first Sunday of


The Pre-alarm Buzzer , when enabled, will cause a tone to sound when an addressable device is in alarm during the Retard period. The tone that is used is a triple beep repeated every second.

Master ID defines which panel in a network will act as the Master panel. This must be set to the same ID as the MR-2400.

• Alarm List Mode sets the way the Alarm List messages are displayed on fire panels in the system. Annunciators will always receive messages as marked in the database. There are three modes of displaying messages:

-- Local: Each fire panel shows only Alarm List entries that are for that panel only.

-- Global: Each fire panel shows Alarm List entries for itself and all other panels and annunciators.

-- Master: The master fire panel shows the Alarm List entries for all panels and annunciators while all other fire panels show only their own Alarm List entries.

• Common Relays controls what signals affect the common alarm, common supervisory and common trouble relays of each panel. The are two settings:

-- Local: The common relays of a panel follow the events of events on that panel only.

-- follow Alarm List Mode: The common relays of a panel will react to both events of the panel and any events listed in its Alarm List.


• Exit: Closes the System Window and, if editing, causes the database to be saved. After an edit session, a requester will ask if the database should be Verified. A database has to verify without errors before it can be downloaded.

• Panels: Displays the Panel Window. If the system has no panels defined, the Add Panel

Box (see p12) is displayed to obtain the first control panel for the system.

• Switches: Displays the Switches Window. This window determines which devices are attached to the switches and the timers associated to each switch. See section 2.3

Switches Window .


See section 2.4 Groups Window .



• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R

Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.


9



The Switches Window (see

Figure 3 ) allows for the setting of the On/Off (Day/

Night) switches. There are

16 system wide switches available. All panels in the network will keep track of its portion of the devices related to each switch. Relays,

LEDs and control modules will follow the On/Off state of the switch they are related to. Addressable sensors will use Day sensitivity while the switch is on and Night sensitivity while the switch is off. The timers can be used to have the switch change

Figure 3: Switches Window state at set times each day.

Switches can be operated manually at the panel whether they have timers or not. If the Switch is associated to a Hot Key, the Hot Key will then operate the switches, causing the related LEDs, relays and control modules to react. Changing a switch manually at one panel will cause all panels in the network to change switch state.

Notes:

1.

Addressable detectors can only be related to a single switch each.

2.

Relays, LEDs and control modules controlled by more than one switch will stay on as long as any switch operating them is on.

The title bar of the window will always list the currently highlighted switch.

The Switches Table shows all 16 possible switches and highlights the current one. Select any one to make it the current switch. List entries will show the message RELATES FOUND for switches that have related devices.

The HH:MM (Timer) entries control the times that the switch will change state. An even number of times must be entered, ie. each on must have a corresponding off. All times are entered using 24 hour notation, eg: one minute after midnight=0:01, noon=12:00, 3 PM=15:00, 4 AM=4:00, etc. A time of 0:00 is considered as not used. If an action at midnight is desired set the time to 0:01, one minute after midnight; or 23:59, a minute before midnight. MHI will sort the times into ascending order after the Switches Window is closed.


The on and off indication beside each time entry will change to reflect what each time in the sorted list will do.

Use switch as custom Hot Key allows the switch to be manually controlled by the Hot Keys. A hot key can be assigned to turn the switch on and another to turn it off. These keys will be marked as

HK in the Switches Table.


Hot Keys.

10



• Exit: Close the Switches Window and return to the System Window.

• Reset: This will remove all relates and all times for the currently highlighted switch.

• Relate: Shows the Relate Window. Items marked *on* will be operated/controlled by the switch.






The Groups Window (see

Figure 4 ) is used for creating and editing the

Groups of relates. The Title

Bar will show the current group.

This dialog allows you to setup "Groups" which are composed of a text description/message and relates. Groups are a method of establishing zone representations. They are also used to program zone information for the MRDL

Dialer (see section 2.5.3.4

Figure 4: Groups Window

Zone Data). A zone representation may include a message and/or a group of Relates. Inputs (ie.

circuits and/or devices) may relate to a Group or number of Groups and thus acquire all Relates that are referenced by them. Inputs can also separately adopt the Group message. Making a change to a Group will affect all inputs (circuits and devices) related to the Group. This is a very powerful feature that can significantly speed up the creation of medium to large size systems as well as simplify changes. Forethought should be placed in defining appropriate Groups. Up to 250 groups may be defined.

The use of Groups greatly simplifies the changes made to a database. For example, if a new door is installed that has to be unlocked during a fire alarm, the control module that unlocks the door is simply added to a Group. This single change is then automatically picked up by any inputs that are related to the Group. Since this number could be hundreds, the use of the Groups makes databases easier to maintain and decreases the chance of mistakes when items are added.

Note: Though any relationship can be selected for inclusion into a group, an input that references the group must be able to accommodate the group’s relates. For example, if a group includes relates to Bell or Strobe output, associating this group to a Supervisory type input will generate an error during verification because this type of input cannot operate Bells or Strobes. It may be advantageous to separate groups in these cases.

The Group List shows all the defined groups along with their message (if any) and if there are any relates defined for the group. The current group will be highlighted. Use the <Backspace > key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another group.

The Message/Description is used to enter a message for the group. This set of text-boxes allows you to enter a message describing the Group. You are allowed space for 3 lines by 20 characters.

If desired, this message may be adopted by a circuit or device by checking the Use Grp Msg

11

MR-2400 Programming Manual check-box and specifying this Group ID. This is a powerful feature if you are defining a large number of inputs that require the same message.




1 and 250. By default, the number will be the next one available. There is no need for the groups to be sequentially numbered or to start at 1.

• Delete Group: This will remove the group from the list. You will be asked if you want to have references to the group automatically removed.

• Reset Group: This will remove all relates for the currently highlighted group.

• Change ID: This allows the group ID to be changed. This may need to be done if two databases are being merged together. MHI will automatically change all references to use the new ID. A gauge will be displayed to show the progress of the change.

• Relate: Shows the Relate Window. Items marked *on* will be operated by inputs related to the group. When relating inputs to groups, be sure that all relates defined by the group are allowable for the input.

• Copy Relates: Copies the relates and/or message from an input point to the current group (see Figure 20 ). The values of the panel, circuit and device are required. Most conventional circuits use a device number of 0 (zero). Press Copy to copy the information.






The Panel Window (see Figure 5 ) allows editing of all panel level options. It defines the hardware mounted in the panel and the functionality of the programmable outputs. The programming controls provided will change to reflect the capabilities of the currently selected panel. The Title

Bar will describe the currently highlighted panel or annunciator.


• Exit: Close the

Panel Window and return to the

System Window.

• Add Panel: Add another panel to the system. A dialog box will be displayed. The default options are to use the next available panel ID and to select an

MR-2944

Figure 5: Panel Window annunciator.

Change these values as required.

• Delete: Remove the current panel from the system. This will also lose all input circuit information for the panel. Any of the panel's outputs that are referenced will become invalid and will be removed by the next verify.

12


• Input Circuits: Display the Circuits Window. See section 2.6.

• Internal Circuits: Display the Internal Circuit Window. See section 2.7.


• Change Type: Displays a dialog box for changing the type of the current panel. This allows for easier correction of mistakes in creating the initial database and for easier updating of the database if a panel type is changed in the field. Only certain type changes are allowed.

• Note: This can have far reaching effects on a system. Ensure that changing the panel type is required prior to doing so. Any information that is no longer valid with the new panel type will be lost.

• Change ID: Displays a dialog box for changing the ID of the current panel. MHI will automatically change all references to use the new ID. This process could take a long time for a large database. A gauge will be displayed to show the progress of the change.






Control and Annunciator, that are defined in the system. The highlighted entry in the List is the one that is currently being edited. It’s description is also shown in the title bar of the Panel Window. If a different panel is selected, all the controls in the window will change to reflect this. Use the

<Backspace > key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another panel.

The Mode drop down box defines Class A or Class B operation for the addressable circuits. The panel will configure itself for this value.

Note: Older MR-2400 panels were factory set for either Class A or Class B operation. For these panels this value must match the value in the panel. If these values are different a HARDWARE

MISMATCH error will occur and the panel will not operate.

The Message is a text entry box located to the right of the Panel List. This is a 3 line by 20 character message that is associated with the Panel. This message will be displayed in Alarm

Lists with signals that are generated by this panel. It will also be included in any print-outs generated by the Master Panel of the system. This message should include enough information that it will identify the panel and its location to fire or service personnel.


Outputs Dialog (see section 2.5.1) which allows for the programming of the Outputs and the relays.

• The Options button displays the Options Dialog (see section 2.5.2). This allows for the programming of the various panel options, such as Hot Keys, bell timers, etc.

• Port 3 Connect sets the purpose of the Port 3 general communications port. If the operating program loaded does not support the selected setting, a wrong port 3 program trouble will be generated by the panel. The options are: none: Port 3 is not used.

Digitel Protocol 1: Sets Port 3 to use the old protocol to the SE 2000.

Digitel Protocol 2: Sets Port 3 to use the new protocol to the SE 2000.

PC Connect: Sets Port 3 to use the GRID program interface.

Voice Evac. System: Sets Port 3 to communicate with the MV-2700 voice evacuation panel.

2944 connect: Sets Port 3 to communicate with the MR-2944 annunciators. MHI will

13

MR-2400 Programming Manual automatically choose this option if any MR-2944 annunciators are included in the database.

The MR2614 Connect should be marked if an MR-2614 LED Annunciator is attached. It has up to

72 LED zones which are considered an extension of the panel itself. Choose the number of LED zones using the Local Ann. LED Cnt drop down box. The MR-2400 panel will show this number of

LED zones. Though up to eight MR-2614s can be attached to the panel, each one will show the same information.

The IDs button displays all possible IDs of the

MR-2614 and MR-2644 annunciators (see

Figure 6 ). Also, the MR-2801b-MR and MRDL

(MR-2806-MR) can be enabled on this screen.

Check those IDs that will be connected to the system. If the MR2614 Connect box is checked, IDs for MR-2614 annunciators must also be checked. When the MR-2806-MR is enabled, a button will appear next to that option called Dialer Settings (see section 2.5.3 for a description of the dialer options).

Hot Key Routing is a set of radio buttons for setting the other panels or annunciators to be controlled by the current panel. To have no other panels affected by the current panel, mark Local . To have the current panel affect all other panels on the network, mark Global . To

Figure 6: IDs Supervised choose only some panels, mark Custom . A text entry box entitled route panel ids is then displayed. Enter the panel IDs to be controlled separated by commas, eg “2, 3, 4". Each ID listed will receive Hot Key commands from the current panel whenever its Hot Keys are pressed.

Annunciators have the following unique controls for programming

(see Figure 7 ).

The LCD check box is located immediately left of the buttons. It indicates whether or not the annunciator has an optional alpha-numeric LCD. This setting is used by MHI only to determine if the Message Receive check box should be shown for the annunciator in the Relate Window.

This value is not sent to the annunciator. The annunciator will determine for itself if an LCD is installed or not.


LED Count is located directly below the LCD check box. This defines the number of LED zones the annunciator will be using. A count of zero will disable the Hot LEDs and Common LED.


LED zones the annunciator will use for internal functions. Any of the zones can be chosen with the requirement that there are four consecutive zones available. Entering a zone of 0 will disable the hot key zones. These will reflect the current status of the annunciator and the panel(s) it sends commands to.

14



Zone n alarm: Acknowledge

Zone n supervisory:

Zone n trouble: Reset

Zone n+1 alarm:

Reset

available

available (green)

available (yellow)

Signal Silence active



Zone n+2 alarm: 2nd Stage Inhibit available

Zone n+2 supervisoryFuture use

Zone n+2 troubleFuture use

Zone n+3 alarmFuture use

Zone n+3 supervisoryFuture use

Zone n+3 troublePower On

Note: The Power On LED refers to the 24 VDC to the annunciator, not to any AC source.

Common LED is located directly below the Hot LED setting. This is the LED zone the annunciator will use as a common alarm, supervisory and trouble indication. It is a summation of the zone

LEDs of the annunciator. Any LED zone may be used. The zone chosen will not be available for general annunciation. Entering a zone of 0 will disable the common zone.

Outputs Dialog

The Outputs Dialog (see Figure 8 ) allows for the programming of the panel’s outputs and function relays.

The outputs section is a list box that is used to select the output to program.

The following output types are available:

• Bell: This is a standard signalling circuit. It sounds in

Alert or Evacuation mode as required. It does not sound codes.

• Strobe: This signalling circuit for use with strobes. They are non-silenceable and will be

Figure 8: Outputs Dialog turned on continuously for both Alert and Evacuation mode operation. Strobe circuits cannot be silenced until the system is reset (unless the strobe duration is programmed – see Strobe Duration in section 2.5.2).

• Coded Bell: This signalling circuit will sound out the code for any input that operates it and then silence. It does not sound in Alert or Evacuation mode.

• Continuous Releaser (C. Releaser): This type of releaser remains on until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then turned off after the Delay until the panel is reset. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds. Warning: Continuous releasers are also turned off when there is an AC power fail or when the panel is in its power up cycle.

• Momentary Releaser (M. Releaser): This type of releaser is inactive until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then not activated until after the

Delay time. The releaser is turned off after the Duration time, or the activating zone and panel are reset. Momentary releasers function normally during an AC power fail. The

Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds and the Duration can be up to 1800 seconds. 1800 seconds is 30 minutes. A Duration of zero (0) will cause the releaser to stay on until it is reset.

15


• Note: Releaser type circuits can only be activated by inputs on the same panel.

• Auxiliary Power (AuxPwr): This turns on the Output continuously to supply power for auxiliary devices, such as annunciators. If a Duration time is given for the Auxiliary Power circuit, the circuit will be powered off for that number of seconds (from 1 to 30) when the panel Reset key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing. This allows for the reset of 4 wire detectors. A duration time of 0 prevents this operation. Auxiliary Power circuits will be turned off by the panel while it is in its power up cycle.

• Follow Supervisory (follow Supv): The output will sound when there is any supervisory condition present on the panel. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the circuit.

• Follow Trouble (follow Trbl): The output will sound when there is any trouble condition present on the panel. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the circuit.


Relay Duration affects the time the relay is activated. For relays operated from inputs, it is the minimum time the relay will operate. The relay must stay on for this length of time before it can be reset. This is for equipment that must remain off a length of time before it can be started up again.


(zero), then the relay will activate for the duration time when the Reset hot key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing. The duration can be from 0 to 300 seconds (5 minutes).

Options Dialog

The Options Dialog (see Figure 9 ) allows for the programming of the various panel options.

Buzzer Mode sets when the panel buzzer will sound. Normal causes the buzzer to sound for new supervisory and trouble conditions. All causes the buzzer to sound for all new conditions.

MR-2934 Annunciators always use All .

All needs to be chosen to meet current

UL & NFPA requirements.

Bypass Priv.

sets the privilege level required to set circuit and device

Figure 9: Options Dialog bypasses, and manual control of relays, control modules and switches. This privilege can be set to

Level 2 (default) or Level 1.


Banner Mode dictates what the top line of the Main Menu of the LCD will be. There are four modes of operation:


NORMAL.




The AC Fail is the delay before the panel will report that it has lost AC power. The panel itself will go into AC Fail mode to conserve power immediately upon losing AC. This delay is the length of time before the panel generates the trouble condition. This can be set from 0 to 1800 minutes (30

16

MR-2400 Programming Manual hours). If a time of 0 minutes is entered, the panel will use a 10 second delay. Note: Most installations will require a time of 1 minute (default) to meet required codes and standards. For panels connected to UL listed monitoring stations, normally a time of 6 to 12 hours (360 to 720 minutes) is required. The 30 hour time is available for those locations with long standby requirements.

Fan Delay sets the number of scans between the reset of each Control Module (relay) on an addressable circuit. This allows for the staggered restart of fans when the system is reset. This option can be enabled or disabled on each addressable circuit as required. It has no affect on


Bell Inhibit is the length of time the bells must sound before they can be silenced. This time can be from 0 to 120 seconds. Coded bells will always sound out their complete code and then stop.

Bell Timeout is the length of time the panel will stay in First Stage operation before automatically progressing to Second Stage. This can be set from 2 to 10 minutes. Most codes do not allow this time to exceed 5 minutes. Check with local codes and the authority having jurisdiction for the allowable limits for this time. Both the Second Stage Inhibit and Signal Silence will prevent this timeout from occurring.

Bell Cutoff is the length of time the bells will sound before they are automatically silenced by the panel. A time of 0 disables this feature. The cutoff can be set from 5 to 30 minutes. If the cutoff is used, it must be longer than the Bell Timeout .

Coded Bell Speed sets the time interval between the bits of the codes. This speed can be 1, ¾, ½ or ¼ second. The time between digits is three times this interval. The time between rounds is seven times this interval.

Maintenance Margin sets the gap between the maintenance threshold and the alarm threshold for addressable sensors. If the sensor stays between these two values for the Maintenance Retard time, the panel will report a Maintenance Alert trouble for the sensor. The margin can be set from 0 to 500, with 0 giving no warning and 500 giving the earliest warning.


3.5 to 4 seconds.

Smoke Detector Reset Time sets the time the MR-2900 will power off conventional 2-wire smoke detectors when they need to be reset. This time can be from 1 to 20 seconds. Current smoke detectors only need the default value of 1 second. Older smoke detectors, such as may be found in a retrofit installation, may need a longer time to reset.

Strobe Duration Time sets the time that strobe circuits will operate when activated when operated along with coded bells. The timer starts when the coded bells start. At the end of the timer, the strobes are silenced. A time of 0 (zero) disables the automatic silence. This value can be from 10 to 510 seconds.

Enable Disconnect & Test Timeout enables or disables disconnect timeouts. If the timeouts are disabled, Relay Disconnect, Releaser Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect and

Test Mode must all be manually ended. If enabled, these functions will be automatically ended after four hours.

Trbl/Supv Output Auto Silence enables or disables the automatic silencing of the Follow Trouble and Follow Supervisory outputs during a fire condition. If enabled, the Follow Trouble and Follow

Supervisory outputs will automatically sound again once the fire bells and strobes have been silenced.

Suppress Missing Signals allows for the suppression of device missing signals for a loop that has a short or ground fault condition. If enabled, the panel will only report the short or ground fault

17

MR-2400 Programming Manual condition, but not the missing device messages. Note: This feature requires that the BRK program be dated 9 September 1999 or later (version 17.20 or later).

Hot Keys are a set of drop down boxes that define the functions of the operator keys on the front of the panel. There are 10 keys, each with red and green LED (some keys may have yellow instead of red LEDs). The LEDs are used to display function status. There are fixed placement function keys as shown in Figure 11 . The default layout is shown in Figure 10 . The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid (unavailable) key is pressed. The panel will record every key press in the history.

18

Figure 10: Default Key Assignment

The keys and their functions are as follows::

Figure 11: Fixed Key Assignment

Key Action


Signal

Silence



System

Reset





Notes:

1.


2.

If both LEDs are flashing, the green LED function has precedence.

3.



Key

Second

Stage Inhibit

Fire Drill

Lamp Test

Releaser

Disconnect

Relay

Disconnect

Test Mode

Signal

Disconnect

Action



Stage Inhibit has no effect on an EVAC type bell system. The green LED will flash when Second Stage Inhibit is available, and the red LED will flash when it has been activated.


Fire Drill. The red LED will flash while the Fire Drill is happening. The Fire Drill cannot be performed if the bells are already activated, or if AC power is off. The Bell

Test is automatically ended if an alarm condition occurs.

Flashes the panel's LEDs. The test will automatically end if any new condition is received, or after 5 minutes. The lamp test cannot be performed if AC power is off.






LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter > key selects the item. Then select ADDRESSABLE, then TEST. Enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear > will return to the previous menu.




19


Key

Common

Disconnect

General

Alarm

Halt

Switch

Switch n n

On

Off

Action

Disables the municipal relays from functioning. Press again to enable relays. The red LED flashes while the relays are disabled. The municipal relays affected are programmable. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

Initiates the general evacuation sequence. All bells are activated in Evacuation mode, selected function relays are activated and selected releaser circuits are activated and municipal alarm relay is activated. The red LED will flash when activated.

Press System Reset to cancel the General Alarm. Note: General Alarm is recorded in the panel archive.

Stops the operation of all releaser type outputs on the panel. The green LED flashes when the key is available and the red LED flashes when it has been pressed.

Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and On. The red LED will flash while the switch is forced On. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is on, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and

LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.

Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and Off. The red LED will flash while the switch is forced Off. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is off, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and



Manual

Restart



The 1 st

, 2 nd

and 3 rd

Telephone Numbers can be up to 32 digits. Special digits may be used to perform the following functions:



• HEX (D)-forces the panel to search for dial tone; must be first digit of telephone number



Figure 12: Dialer Settings

The first number is the primary number, the second number is for a second monitoring station, and the third number is the backup number for the first number.

The 1 st

and 2 nd

Account Codes identify the system to the central station when a communication is sent. The code can be programmed for up to four digits. The first and third telephone number transmit the first account code. The second telephone number transmits the second account code.

20


The 1 st

and 2 nd

# Format setting affects the type of communication that the dialer sends to the central station. There are seven formats available including 4 BPS formats, Contact ID, SIA and a pager format.





• Call Directions: Display the Call Directions dialog.

• Zone Data: Display the Zone Data dialog.

• Maintenance/Common: Display the Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes dialog.


The Dialer Configuration 1 dialog (see Figure 13 ) contains the First

Communicator Options,

Second Communicator

Options and International

Options.

The Communications option determines if the dialer will communicate to the central station. When Enabled is selected, the dialer will communicate all events as programmed. When

Disabled is selected, the

Figure 13: dialer will not communicate any events.

Dialer Configuration 1



Dialing Enabled is selected, the dialer switches between the first and third telephone numbers after each dialing attempt, until the maximum number of dialing attempts have been made to each number. When Third Number Backup is enabled, the dialer will use the third telephone number only if all attempts to communicate to the first telephone number fail. If all attempts to communicate to the third number also fail, a failure to communicate trouble will be generated.

When Disabled is selected, the third telephone number is not used.

The Dialing option has three different options for pulse or DTMF dialing. If All attempts Pulse is selected, the dialer will always use pulse (rotary) dialing. If All attempts DTMF Dialing is selected, the dialer will always use DTMF dialing. If 4 attempts DTMF then Pulse is selected, the dialer will use DTMF dialing for the first four attempts. If unsuccessful, the dialer will switch to pulse (rotary) dialing for the remaining attempts.

The SIA Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send the automatic reporting codes that are in the dialer, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and

Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic SIA

Reporting Codes.



21


The Contact ID Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send the automatic reporting codes that are in the dialer, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and

Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic

Contact ID Reporting Codes.

The Test Transmission Line option determines how the dialer chooses a telephone line to send the automatic test transmission. If Alternate is selected, the dialer will alternate between using

Telephone Lines 1 and 2 for transmissions, regardless of telephone line troubles. If Available is selected, the dialer will use Telephone Line 1 for transmissions. If a trouble exists on Telephone

Line 1, the dialer will switch to Line 2.

When the Force Dialing option is set to enabled, if the first attempt by the panel to call the monitoring station fails, on every subsequent attempt the panel will dial regardless of the presence of dial tone. When Disabled is selected, the panel will not dial the programmed telephone number if dial tone is not present.



The Pulse Make/Break Ratio option is for panels in international applications. When 40/60 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is the 40/60. When 33/67 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is 33/67.




The Dialer Configuration

2 screen (see Figure 14 ) contains the Swinger

Shutdown Variables, Test

Transmission options and

Other Options.

The Swinger Shutdown options determine the maximum number of zone events and trouble events that the dialer will transmit in one day. The trouble or alarm will still be displayed on the panel and logged in the archive, but the dialer will not transmit the event. There are individual counters for

Figure 14: Dialer Configuration 2

Zone Alarm and Restore, Zone Supervisory and Restore, Zone Trouble and Restore and

Maintenance Trouble and Restore. This feature will be reset at midnight. To disable the feature, program 000.



22


The Test Transmission Cycle determines the number of days between test transmissions


The Maximum Dialing Attempts to Each Phone Number is the number of attempts that the dialer will make to each telephone number before generating a fail to communicate trouble.


Call Directions



There are five different types of events that can each be sent to telephone number one or telephone number two. The event types are


Supervisory Zone Alarm/Restore,

Zone Trouble/Restore, Maintenance

Trouble/Restore and Test

Transmissions.


Zone Data








Code





23





Common Reporting Codes dialog (see Figure 17 ) contains maintenance and common reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate those events.



The Reporting Code are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to



Figure 17: Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting

Codes

2.6 Circuits and Devices Windows

The Circuits Window (see Figure

18 ) allows for the defining of addressable input circuits. The

Devices Window (see Figure 19 ) allows for the defining of addressable devices. These two windows are nearly identical. Most controls on one are found on the other with some exceptions noted.

The current Circuit or Device is shown in the Title Bar of the window.

The Circuit List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Circuits Window only. This lists any defined circuits Figure 18: Circuits Window for the current panel. Each circuit shows the circuit number, type of circuit and function if applicable. The highlighted circuit is described in the title bar of the Circuits Window. Unused circuits are shown using three dashes.

Use the <Backspace > key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another circuit. The

Up and Down Arrow keys change the current circuit. The Right and Left Arrow keys will change the type of the current circuit. The Plus and Minus keys will change the function of the current circuit.

24


Device List

The Device List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Devices Window only. It lists any defined addressable devices for the current addressable circuit. For addressable devices, the type of device and its function are shown for each one defined. Unused addresses are shown with three dashes. Use the

<Backspace

> key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another

Figure 19: Devices Window device. The <Up> and <Down>

Arrow keys change the current device. The <Right> and <Left Arrow> keys will change the type of the current device. The <Plus> and <Minus> keys will change the function of the current device.

Device Type Selector


Device Window only. It is a drop down box used to assign the current device type. For addressable circuits, it displays all the sensors or modules that can be programmed for the current device address, sensors for addresses 1 to 99 and modules for addresses 101 to 199. If the address is unused, select not assigned. The following module types are available:


M503M modules.


• Control (supervising): This programs the MRI-M500S for use as a generic signalling circuit. It can be turned on by alarm or supervisory inputs. It will remain on until the system is reset.


• Control (Bell): This programs the MRI-M500S as a standard signalling circuit. It will turn on continuously when activated by an alarm. They will silence when the Signal Silence button is pressed. It does not sound codes.

• Control (Strobe): This programs the MRI-M500S as a signalling circuit for use with strobes. They are non-silenceable and will be turned on continuously for both Alert and

Evacuation mode operation. Strobe circuits cannot be silenced until the system is reset

(unless the strobe duration is programmed – see Strobe Duration in section 2.5.2).

• Control (C-Releaser): This programs the MRI-M500S as a continuous releaser which remains on until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then turned off after the Delay until the panel is reset. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds.

• Control (M-Releaser): This programs the MRI-M500S as a momentary releaser which is inactive until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then not activated until after the Delay time. The releaser is turned off after the Duration time, or the activating zone and panel are reset. Momentary releasers function normally during an

AC power fail. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds and the Duration can be up to

1800 seconds. 1800 seconds is 30 minutes. A Duration of zero (0) will cause the releaser to stay on until it is reset.

25


Function Type Selector

The Function Type Selector is used to display and edit the function of the current input point. The following function types are available:




• Waterflow: This is a fire input similar to Alarm except that it displays **WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List. Bell circuits can be made non-silenceable for waterflow type inputs (see section 2.2 System Window).


Valve Closed, etc.

• Halt: This causes the related releaser outputs to not operate. The supervisory LED will be turned on by activation of this type of input. See section 1.3 Releaser Programming.








Message

The Message is located in the middle of the top of the window. This 3 line by 20 character text message is displayed or printed for all signals originating from the current input point. Circuit types that use devices will have a default message created for them when defined. This message can be changed.

Use Grp Msg

The Use Grp Msg check box is used if the input point is to use a group message. A text entry box will appear when the box is checked. Enter the ID of the group message to be used. Only one ID can be entered. If a group message is being used, it will be displayed in the Message area, but the message cannot be altered.

There are a number of options that can be used for each input circuit or device. Not all options apply to all inputs. MHI will only show those options that are currently usable. The following options are available:

• Retard: This is the amount of time the input must stay in an alarm state before it is treated as a valid alarm. This option is not valid with Pull Station function type inputs. Addressable devices are programmed for a number of additional consecutive scans that must be in alarm before the panel will accept the alarm. The duration of a scan varies between 2.5

and 5 seconds. Note: It is the responsibility of the person writing the database to ensure that the retard time chosen does not exceed any limits allowed by code.

It is possible to generate long retard times that are in the two to three minute range if a large number of scans is chosen. For example, UL states that the system cannot take more than 50 seconds to report a waterflow condition. One has to ensure that the total delay of the waterflow detector and the input combined does not exceed 50 seconds.

• Enable Fan Delay: Controls the staggered turning off of Control Modules (relay). If checked, Control Modules (relay) on this circuit will be turned off in sequence, from the

26

MR-2400 Programming Manual lowest address to the highest address, at a rate set by the Fan Delay option in the Panel

Options Dialog, when Reset is pressed on the panel. The operation of Control Modules



Maintenance Alert disabled to limit nuisance troubles. Standard room temperature (20°C) will not cause a Maintenance Alert on a heat detector.

• Code Bells: Note that only coded bells will sound the codes. If coded bells are used the following options are then also shown:

-- No Restore: If checked, the panel will not sound the Code again when the input restores. If not checked, the panel will sound a single round of the Code when the input restores

-- Code: This is the sequence that will be sounded when an alarm is received on this input. It can be up to 4 digits long. Hexadecimal digits are used, thus each digit can be from 1 to F, where A=10, B=11, C=12, D=13, E=14 and F=15.

-- Round: This is the number of times the Code will be repeated. It can be between 1 and

4 times for no restore inputs, and between 2 and 4 for restore inputs.

• Night Sens. and Day Sens.: Selects the Alarm threshold sensitivity for addressable smoke sensors. Heat sensors always use Normal sensitivity. Increased sensitivity will cause alarms at lower levels of smoke. Sensors not attached to a switch always use the

Night Sensitivity. Sensors attached to a switch will use Night Sensitivity while the switch is

Off and Day Sensitivity while the switch is On. Night Sensitivity must always be equal to or more sensitive than the Day Sensitivity.


Reset but by Manual Restart . Use of this option will require that there be a Manual Restart function key assigned to the MR-2400.




• Copy: Copies the circuit/device information, relates and message from another input to the current input

(see Figure 20 ). The current input does not have to be defined. Relates cannot be copied between conventional and addressable input points. The

Panel ID, Circuit ID and Device ID (not always shown) list the circuit/device to be copied from.

Marking Transfer Main Definition will copy the listed circuit/device type and function to the current circuit/ device. Note: Not all inputs can be copied to all other possible inputs. Marking Transfer Relates will copy the relates from the listed circuit/device relates to the current one. This may cause some invalid relates.

Marking Transfer Message will cause the message to be copied. Marking Transfer Devices (if shown) will copy any device definitions that the listed circuit

Figure 20: Copy Dialog Box contains. These devices will copy messages and relates as based on those settings above.

There is no check at this time as to the validity of the values copied. Unexpected results can occur if care is not taken.

For each database that is created, a warning about using

27

MR-2400 Programming Manual copy is shown. Marking the check box in the warning will stop the box from appearing again for the database.

This option can help speed up the creation of a database. By completely defining one input, these values can be copied to all other inputs, making any minor changes that are required after the copy.

• Relate or Trbl Relate: Opens the Relate Window for the current circuit or device. This allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, relays and control modules to be operated when the input goes into alarm. The Relate button will display all output types that are available depending on the function type of the input. The Trbl Relate button will display only LEDs that can be related. Note: All panel outputs and control modules to be operated must be defined before they can be included in the relates of an input.



• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R Human



The Internal Circuits Window (see Figure

21 ) allows for the programming of outputs,

LEDs, etc. for the various internal circuits

(functions) of the Control Panel. Internal circuits 0, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 81 and 82 are fire alarm functions while all others are trouble functions. All internal circuits have specific meanings and are stored in the archive of the panel. See Appendix A:

Condition Codes and Zone Numbers for a list of all the internal circuits.


• Internal Circuit 0, General

Alarm : This is the General Alarm

Figure 21: Internal Circuits Window function. General Alarm can be received from an annunciator or from an SE 2000. It can be assigned to one of the Hot

Keys of control panel. General Alarm causes all the bells and strobes on the panel to operate in Evacuation mode. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require operation are programmed using the Relate button.

• Internal Circuit 81, 1st Stage Alarm: This circuit is activated if the bells and strobes are activated in first stage by an alarm input. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require operation are programmed using the Relate button. If the bells have been disconnected on the panel, this circuit will not be generated.

• Internal Circuit 82, 2nd Stage Alarm: This circuit is activated if the bells and strobes are activated in the second stage mode by an alarm input or by a time-out. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require operation are programmed using the Relate button. If the bells have been disconnected on the panel, this circuit will not be generated.

• Internal Circuit 96, Fire Pre-alarm: This circuit is activated by any smoke detector in the auto-verify process or addressable device in alarm during the Retard period. It can be related to an LED to give a visual indication that an alarm is in the verification process.


LED on the panel. This circuit is used to annunciate common trouble conditions at a

28

MR-2400 Programming Manual remote location. This circuit is not tripped by troubles generated by input circuits or addressable devices. This circuit is not recorded in the archive of the panel.

The Internal Circuits List displays all of the internal circuits for the current Control Panel.

Each line includes the internal circuit number, its description and if relates have been assigned.

• Warning: Some of the internal circuits (eg. checksum) do not have restore signals associated with them. They generally relate to a condition that requires either service work or a reboot of the panel. Any relates assigned to such an internal circuit will have no way to be reset short of re-booting the entire network.

List Entries: This feature allows the user to control the information displayed. Relevant lists items applicable to the current version only. All lists all possible items so that relates made on previous versions may be removed.






Figure 20 ). The values of the panel and circuit are required. Press Copy to copy the information. If the function type of the two circuits is different, a requester is presented to confirm the copy.






The Relate Window (see Figure

22 ) allows for the relating of inputs, switches and groups to outputs,

LEDs, relays, etc. These relationships are used by the panel to determine which outputs to operate for alarm and trouble states. Inputs can operate bells/ strobes, LEDs, relays, control modules on any panel in the system and continuous/momentary releasers on the same panel.

Switches can operate relays, LEDs, control modules on any panel in the system and control the day/night sensitivity change of any

Figure 22: Relate Window addressable detector on any panel. The title bar describes the current input point/switch/group and current output panel or annunciator.



29



Control and Annunciator, that are defined in the system along with their panel message. The highlighted entry in the list is the one that is being related to by the current input. When a different panel is selected, all the controls in the window will change to reflect this. Use the <Backspace > key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another panel.

The Outputs List shows the programmable outputs of the panel. It is not shown for annunciators. It lists all outputs, along with their definition and current state. The states are *on* for selected, blank for not selected, act if they activated by default, and n/a for not available. A blank definition is for unused outputs. Bell and Strobe outputs can only be selected for Fire Alarm type inputs. If



<space > key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the

<Backspace > key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another output.

The Relays List shows the general purpose function relays of the panel. It is not shown for annunciators. Each is listed by number and state. The states are *on* for selected and blank for not selected. Use the <space > key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the <Backspace > key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another relay.

The LEDs List shows the LED zones available on the panel or annunciator. This will not be shown if the panel has no LEDs. Each is listed by number and state. The states are *on* for selected, blank for not selected and n/a for not available. Use the <space > key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the <Backspace > key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another LED. The actual number of LED zones varies depending upon the panel or annunciator.

The Device List shows the addressable devices that can be related to the current point. For system inputs and groups, it is displayed only if there are any control or relay modules defined for the panel; for switches, it is displayed if there are any addressable detectors, or any control or relay modules defined. Each entry shows the devices’s address (panel.circuit.device), its state and its device message. The states are *on* for selected and blank for not selected. Devices that are not available or are invalid are not shown. Use the <space > key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections.

The Evac check box is an option for Fire Alarm type inputs only. Selecting this option will cause all

Bells and Strobes for this panel to operate in Second Stage (Evacuation) mode. If selected, Bell and Strobe type outputs for this panel will not be selectable.

The Msg Receive check box is an option for annunciators with LCDs only. If marked, this annunciator will receive messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List. If not marked, the annunciator will not receive messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List.







• View Groups: Displays the Groups Window. This is for reviewing the defined groups. No editing can be done to the groups. To edit the groups, return to the System Window. See section 2.4 Groups Window .

30




A number of items are programmed through the LCD and keypad. This is called the LCD menu. All options are under the PROGRAM option on the Main Menu of the panel. The Main Menu can be recalled to the LCD by pressing <Home > .

Note: The only item that must be programmed from the LCD menu is the Panel ID. This must be done before the database is downloaded.



Level 2 allows programming of almost all system parameters. Higher Privilege Levels are reserved for Secutron's own use and are not discussed here. Certain functions can be assigned to different privilege levels. These functions default to the higher of the two privilege levels.

While programming through the LCD menu, the panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid key is pressed. Programming is done through a series of menus and requester screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information (see Figure 23 ). Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item.

Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press <Enter > to select. In Figure 23 , pressing <Enter > will bring up the Program Menu.

Title

Menu Item

Selected Menu Item

Module-R by Secutron

12:22

>STATUS HISTORY<

>

PROGRAM PASSCODE<

Menu Item

Menu Item

Figure 23: Typical Menu

A menu option of more will display further menu options that do not fit on the current screen. All the screens of a menu will loop around continuously. The default option, ie the option next to the cursor, is the one to the upper left of the screen. Generally, but not always, more is the default option.

Selector screens (see Figure 24 ) are screens where options are toggled on or off. Options that are on are marked by an asterisk(*) while options that are off are marked with a dash (-). Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press <Enter > to change it.

Move the cursor to OK and press <Enter > to save any changes, or press <Clear > to lose any changes. In Figure 24 , both common relays are selected to be disconnected when the Common

Disconnect hot key is pressed. Pressing <Enter > will cause the alarm relay to be not selected.

Title

Options

Selections

AT

*

*

COMMON DISCONNECT

OK<

Figure 24: Typical Selector

For all screens, <Clear > returns to the previous menu level without changing any information and

<Home > returns to the Main Menu without changing any information.

31


3.2 Clock


• Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter > to accept date typed. <Clear > will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear > will return to the Clock Menu.

The new date will be sent to MR-2944 annunciators, if used. All units will assume this date. The date change will be recorded in the Archive.

• Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter > to accept the time typed. <Clear > will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear > will return to the Clock Menu. The new time will be sent to MR-2944 annunciators, if used. All units will assume this time.

• Calibrate: Calibrates the clock so that it keeps correct time. Calibration takes 2 to 45 days. Waiting longer will give more accurate results. The panel will function normally while calibrating. When sufficient time has passed, re-selecting this function will ask for the correct time. The calibration will then be reported. Changing the time using the Time option will abort the calibration.

3.3 Common Relays



Disconnect hot key. Selected relays will be marked by an asterisk (*). To change the selection, move the cursor to the desired relay A(larm), or T(rouble) and press <Enter > to change. Select OK when done. <Clear > will return to Program Menu without making changes.

• Test Inhibit: View or change whether common relays are disconnected during Test Mode or not. <Clear > will return to Program Menu without making changes.

3.4 Switches


These switches can be set to On, Off or Auto. The Auto state only applies to switches that have a timer associated with them. The Auto state allows the switch to follow the timer settings. Any changes made are broadcast to the network so that all panels have the same state. Settings are retained by the panel if it is re-booted and the Master Unit will broadcast its settings to the network upon start up. See section 2.3 Switches Window for information on programming what the switch affects.


• Individual: View or change the status of an individual switch. Each switch will be shown in turn. If a switch has no timer, the Auto option is not shown.


• All Auto: Force all switches with timers to Auto mode. All switches with timers will go into the state dictated by the time. The number displayed is the number of switches with timers forced On or Off. This option has no effect on switches without timers. This option is not shown if no timers are associated with the switches.

32


3.5 Addressable



• Duplicates Check: This will cause an immediate check to see if more than one device is using an address. The panel automatically does this check on the hour.


-- OFF/FLASH: The device LEDs are normally off and will flash when an alarm is reported. The flashing LED will be reset when System Reset is pressed.

-- FLASH/ON: The device LEDs flash each time they are polled. They will latch on in

Alarm. The LEDs will be reset when System Reset is pressed. Note: Due to current draw limitations, only the first 5 detectors

1

on a circuit will latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation.

-- OFF/ON: The LEDs are normally off and will latch on in Alarm. The LEDs will be reset when System Reset is pressed. This option will not be shown if the addressable coprocessor cannot support this mode. Note: Due to current draw limitations, only the first

5 detectors on a circuit will latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation.

-- RESET : This function resets the LEDs to their off state.

• Sensitivity: This allows for the manual adjustment of the sensitivity of addressable detectors. All devices have a default sensitivity assigned in the database. The detector can be set to the database default value or to one of the pre-defined levels replacing the database values. The range of values varies with device type. These manual values are retained if the panel is re-booted.

-- SELECT: Change the manual sensitivity of addressable detectors. The first screen asks for a circuit and device number. Enter the circuit and device or press <Enter > without entering any number to view the first detector in the database. Each detector will be displayed in turn, showing the current sensitivity and allowing for it to be changed or the next detector to be displayed. Press <Clear > to stop viewing the detector list.

-- ALL DEFAULT: Change all manual sensitivity settings to the default values set in the database. The number shown is the number of detectors that have a manual sensitivity set.

-- PRINT: Print a list of all manually set sensitivities. Any device not included in the printout is using the sensitivity set in the database.

• Monitor: This function is restricted to Privilege 2. Allows you to select between all Class A monitors and individually selected ones in MHI.

• Bypass: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. This selects devices to be bypassed. A bypassed device will be ignored by the system. Addressable bypasses are retained when the panel is re-booted. Only devices included in the database can be bypassed. Bypasses are annunciated by a common trouble. The Bypass menu has the following options:

-- ON: Select devices to be bypassed. Enter the circuit and device number. Press <Enter > to accept the device and to enter the next one. Pressing <Clear > will remove any numbers entered. Pressing either <Enter > or <Clear > with no numbers displayed will end the input mode.

-- OFF: Select bypassed devices to be returned to normal operation. Each bypassed device is listed in order. Select next to keep the bypass on or select OFF to remove the

1. BRK programs dated before 2 April 1999 limit the number of LEDs on to 3 per circuit.

33

MR-2400 Programming Manual bypass. After the last device, display returns to the Bypass menu. Press <Clear > to return to the Bypass Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices bypassed.

-- ALL OFF: Remove all bypasses, if any, from the system. The number of bypassed devices is displayed.


-- ON: Select devices for testing. Enter the circuit and device number, or enter the circuit number only to select all devices on the circuit. Press <Enter > to accept the device and to enter the next one. Pressing <Clear > will remove any numbers entered. Pressing either <Enter > or <Clear > with no numbers displayed will end the input mode.

-- OFF: Select devices under test to be returned to normal operation. Each device under test is listed in order. Select next to keep the device under test or select OFF to remove the test mode. After the last device, display returns to the Test menu. Press <Clear > to return to the Test Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices selected for testing.

-- ALL OFF: Remove all devices being tested, if any, from the test mode. The number of devices being tested is displayed.

• Control Modules: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. Allow for the manual operation of the control and relay modules included in the database. There are three states available: Automatic (controlled by device inputs) Manual On, and Manual Off. This mode is retained if the panel is re-booted. Manually controlled modules will be annunciated by a common trouble. The menu has the following options:

-- SELECT: Change the Auto/On/Off state of control modules. The first screen asks for a circuit and device number. Enter the circuit and device or press <Enter > without entering any number to view the first control module in the database. Each control module will be displayed in turn, showing the current state and allowing for it to be changed or the next control module to be displayed. Press <Clear > to stop viewing the control module list.


3.6 Battery

Displays the current battery status and charger calibration. The display shows:

• Line 1: Screen Title

• Line 2: AC State and Battery Charger Calibration Numbers (diagnostic use only)

• Line 3: Current State of the Battery and Menu Option (see below)

• Line 4: Menu Options (listed below)



• Test: Perform a battery test.


Charger. The batteries must be disconnected before beginning calibration. No keypad control is provided during calibration. The calibration display will return when calibration is over. Calibration only needs to be done when the main board assembly/power supply board pair is changed, or when the configuration is erased. All Battery Chargers come calibrated from the factory.

34


3.7 Archive


• Test: View or change whether Test signals should be recorded in the history. The current setting is shown in the upper right corner. Test signals will be marked as such.


• Network: View or change the type of archive events that the panel will record in the archive. The options are:

-- LOCAL: Record only panel events in the archive.

-- GLOBAL: Record all events in the archive.

3.8 Relays

This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. If Privilege Level 1 is set and Level 2 is required, access to the menu will be denied. This function allows for the manual operation of the relays.

There are three possible states: Automatic (state determined by inputs), Forced On, or Forced Off.

This mode will be retained if the panel is re-booted.

• Individual : Change the Auto/On/Off state of relay. Each relay will be shown in turn, showing the current state and allowing for it to be changed or the next relay to be displayed. Press <Clear > to stop viewing the relay list.

• All Auto : Change any relays that are forced on or off back to automatic mode. The number following All Auto is the number of relays that are in a forced on or off state.

3.9 Ports


• Network: Allows for the setting of parameters related to the network. If the downloaded database indicates that there is no network, the only option is Panel ID . The Network Menu has the following options:



-- Reboot: Cause all panels on the network to do a Hard reboot, ie equivalent to pressing the Hard Reboot button on the top of the Inner Door. Each panel will record in the history the time it received the Network Reboot command.

-Verify: Enable or disable Network Verify reporting troubles. If disabled, the panel will not report a Network Verify trouble (no common trouble sequence), but will still display the error information in the Misc. Troubles.

• Port 3: These options are restricted to Privilege 2. The options available vary depending upon the Port 3 setting in the database. This port can only be disabled from the database.

2944 Connect (MR2-4A Program): Allows for the configuration of the communications to a

2944 annunciator.

-- Retry: Set the number of times to try to resend a message before giving up. If this number of retries are attempted without success, the other panel or annunciator is considered to be off-line. The default value is 8. This would be increased only if the communications line cycles between on-line and off-line (Range: 1-25).


4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300. See Table 1 below.

35


Table 1: Maximum Capacitance for Network Baud Rates

Baud Rate

9600

4800

2400

1200


100 nF

220 nF

470 nF

680 nF

Digitel Protocol 1 (MR2-4 Program): Allows for the setting of parameters related to the connection to the SE-2000. It has the following options:

-- ID: Select the panel ID number for the central station/city-tie connection communications port. Valid ID numbers are 1 to 16.

-- Mode: Select whether circuits 1 to 24 or LEDs 1 to 24 are transmitted. Transmitting the

LED numbers allows for zone information to be sent when addressable devices are used.

-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. Select Auto to have the panel automatically choose the SE 2000 baud rate. If required a fixed baud rate can be used. The available fixed baud rates are 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300. See Table 1 below.

-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3. The SE

2000 will report the panel as offline.

Digitel Protocol 2 (MRZ-413 Program): Allows for the setting of parameters related to the connection to the SE-2000. The panel will use the Network ID for identification. If more than one signal needs to be sent, new alarms take precedence. It has the following options:

-- Mode: Selects how information is sent to the SE 2000. There are the following options:



GROUP: Send the associated Group ID(s) for all conditions. Anything not associated with a specific group will send a group number of 0.

-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. Select Auto to have the panel automatically choose the SE 2000 baud rate. If required a fixed baud rate can be used. The available fixed baud rates are 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300. See Table 1 below.



PC Connect (MR2-4G Program): Allows for the configuration of the communications to a



4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.




36


Voice Evac. System (MR2-4E Program): Allows for setting parameters related to the connection to the MV2700 voice evacuation panel.





-- Retry: Set the number of times to try to resend a message before giving up. If this number of retries are attempted without success, the other panel or annunciator is considered to be off-line. The default value is 8. This would be increased only if the communications line cycles between on-line and off-line (Range: 1-25).

-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3.


4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.

• Port 6: Allows for setting the baud rate for the MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2801-MR and

MR2806-MR. The available settings are 1200 and 4800 baud.

1

• Terminal: Select ANSI or TeleVideo protocol. Most terminals and terminal emulator programs support ANSI protocol.

3.10 Alarm List


• Reset: Select when entries are taken out of the Alarm List. AUTO removes entries as soon as the condition restores. MANUAL requires that Reset be pressed before they are removed. Conditions that have restored will be shown as a restored condition in the Alarm

List.




3.11 Passcode

Allows for the changing of passcodes. The Privilege Level 2 can change both the Level 1 and 2 passcodes, while Level 1 can only change the Level 1 passcode. Passcodes are four digit numbers in the range 1000 to 9999. Type in the new passcode and press <Enter > to accept.

Asterisks will be displayed instead of digits. <Clear > will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear > will return to the Program or Passcode Menu.




1. Only MR-2614 v2.1 and up support 4800 baud. Previous versions only support 1200 baud.

37


3.12 Memory


Erase Configuration: This will erase all initiating circuit, bell, relay, releaser and privilege values entered from the LCD and keypad, and replace them with default values. This has no effect on information contained in the downloaded database. Confirmation is asked before erasure. After the Configuration has been erased, the panel must be reset using the reboot button at the bottom of the Main Circuit Board. The following items are not erased: Serial Number, Level 1 Passcode,

Level 2 Passcode, and Clock Calibration. Note: The panel ID will need to be programmed aand the battery charger will need to be re-calibrated (see Section 3.6) after erasing the configuration.

3.13 Buzzer

This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This sets the length of the Trouble Buzzer Inhibit time. This is the length of time that a new trouble will not cause the buzzer to sound after it has been silenced for a trouble. The time can be set to 0 or from 15 to 255 seconds. If 0 is chosen, the buzzer will sound for every trouble.

38




Condition Code

T

U

W

P

Q

R

S

I

J

M

N

D

E

G

H

Archive Alarm List

A ALARM

B


M.PULL


WFLOW

Description

Alarm

Bypass

Comlink


Maintenance Alert

Ground Fault

Hot Key Pressed


Switch



Pull Station Alarm

Releaser Abort

Releaser Halt

Supervisory


Wrong Device Type

Waterflow Alarm


Zone Number

PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:


ZZ Panel Zone

64

1

65

1

66

67

69

1

53

54

59

60

61

Panel

Zone

0

3

4

1

2

50

Description

General Alarm





Network Verify

Comlink 3

Comlink 6

Addressable Modules Comlink



Program Checksum

Database Checksum

AC Power

Low Battery

Program Restart

Panel

Zone

91

1

92

1

93

1

94

1

95

1

85

1

86

3

87

88

1

89

1

90

1

80

2

81

82

83

84

Description

Privilege Level

1st Stage Alarm

2nd Stage Alarm

Switch

Test Mode

Erase Configuration


Passcode Tamper

Database Loaded

Time/Date Change

Hot Key Activation

Memory Overflow

Network Reboot

New Program



39


Notes:

1.


2.


3.




Comlink 6 (Zone 54): ID of MR-2614, MR-2644, MR2801-MR or MR2806-MR

Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): Always 001



001 - Watchdog

002 - Clock Monitor







Memory Overflow (Zone 91): 000 - MR-2400 panel

001 - CoProcessor for address loops


Network Reboot Required who (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the

Network Reboot Required trouble

Network Reboot Required why (Zone 95): Reason the panel generated the

Network Reboot Required

001 -- network

002 -- network

003 -- port 3



009 -- co-processor memory overflow


40






Note: The MR-2400 Control Panel is capable of driving a bell load of 8 A maximum. This restriction must be considered when laying out a bell system.

The standard battery options available for the MR-2400 Control Unit are:

• 4 Ah internal

• 7 Ah internal

• 10 Ah internal



• 48 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet (not UL listed)


MR-2400

MR-2944LC

MR-2915

MR-2614

MR-2622

MR-2644

MRI-1251

MRI-1551

MRI-2251

MRI-2551

124 mA (includes MR-2905) MRI-3251

65 mA MRI-5551

1 mA

20 mA

MRI-M500M

MRI-M501M

5 mA

30 mA

300

µ

A

200

µ

A

300

µ

A

200

µ

A

MRI-M502M

MRI-M503ME

MRI-M500R

MRI-M500S

MRI-M500X

300

µ

A

200

µ

A

300

µ

A

300

µ

A

300

µ

A

300

µ

A

300

µ

A

300

µ

A

450

µ

A

The following page is a sheet suitable for battery calculations.

41


5.1 Battery Calculations

Job: ___________________________________Date: _________


For Panels and Input Devices:

Time = Standby Time + Alarm Time = _____ + _____ = _______

Panel/Device

MR-2400

MRI-1551/2551/5551 Detectors

MRI-500M/501M Monitor Modules

MRI-500R Relay Modules

MRI-500S Control Modules, supervised output

MRI-500X Isolator Modules

MRI-502M Monitor Modules

Draw (mA)

124

0.20

0.40

0.30

0.40

0.45

0.30

1

Quantity Total Power (Ah)

Total A:


For Signal Devices

Time = Alarm Time = ______

Signal Device Draw Quantity Total Power

Total Power Requirement = Total A + Total B = ____________________

Note: 5 min = 0.083 hour; 10 min = 0.167 hour; 30 min = 0.5 hour

Total B:

42



The MR-2400 Control Unit and the Addressable Input Module will display information and accept commands via the service terminal port. The information includes initiating circuit configuration, current status of bell, relays, etc., diagnostic information, the Archive, etc. The commands allow for the selection of the information to view, limited programming and basic operation. Certain Control

Unit commands are available only at certain privilege levels. Units will beep once when a valid character is received and three times if an invalid character is received. If a command is not finished within about 10 seconds, the unit will beep three times and will lose any information sent.

The service terminal program provides the information on a number of different screens. When the terminal is first connected, it will be viewing whatever screen was the last viewed. To view Screen

0, which lists all the screens that are available, press

0

<Tab > . Press <Delete > to refresh the screen. Press the <Tab > key to view the next screen. See below for a complete description on the

<Tab > key commands. Certain Control Unit screens are available only at higher privilege levels.

The service terminal of the addressable module is available through the Control Unit's service terminal.


The Control Unit uses 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit for communication over the serial port. The default baud rate is 9600 bps, but this can be changed to values between 150 and 9600 bps.

All screens have a common status line across the top. It shows, from left to right, the current time, the current date, the current privilege level, the panel number, the current screen number and name. All available screens are listed and described below along with any key commands valid only on that screen. To view a particular screen, enter

n

<Tab > where n is the screen number.

Screen Name

0

1

Index

LCD

2

3

4

5

Misc

Battery

AC

Bells

Description


Display and control the panel LCD. This is useful for training sessions since more people can view the terminal screen than can view the

LCD directly. All keypad keys are mapped to the equivalent keyboard key, with the keypad <Clear > being mapped to the keyboard <End > .


Displays the current battery level, the calibrated high and low values and the current status of the battery and ac power. Also shows the timer for the battery test.

Commands

<Ctrl-B>

0<Ctrl-B>

9900<Ctrl-B>

99<Ctrl-B>

Print battery calibration.


Start continuous dynamic battery testing.

Calibrate battery charger. This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2.

Displays the current status of the AC power and the delay timer for reporting AC failure.

Displays the current status of the bell circuits. Also shows the timers and settings for the silence inhibit, No Acknowledge, and cut-off.

43


Screen Name

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Description

Function

Relays

Releasers

Displays the current settings and timers for the 2 function relays.

Common

Relays

Displays the current settings and timers for the releasing circuits (if any).

Displays the current status of the 3 common system relays. Also shows which relays may be disconnected by the Common Disconnect hot-key.

Alarm List

Miscellaneous

Troubles

Display a list of all the troubles currently displayed by the STATUS/

MISC. TROUBLES selection from the LCD.

Output

Supervision

Shows the current alarm list. This is the same list that is displayed on the LCD menu. Each screen in the LCD corresponds to one line terminal screen. See Appendix A for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.

Commands

J Page down


K Page up


Relay

Summary

Shows the current supervision readings and status for the releasers, bells and auxiliary power circuits. These values should be in the range

130 to 150 for Vhi, and 10 to 20 for Vlo (low gain) or around 100 for

Vlo (high gain). If the numbers are jumping all over the place, there is a hardware fault with the terminal board.

Displays which relays and functions have been activated:

Commands

Bn

A

Bell Circuits 1 to 6

Common Alarm

T

G

W

L

Common Trouble

Ground Fault

Walk Test

LCD Back light


(approximate) events that happened. See Appendix 39 for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.

Commands

J

0 J

K

0 K

Page down

Go to the end of the list (oldest entry)

Page up

Go to the beginning of the list (newest entry)

Printer A copy of everything sent to the printer. This is useful for capturing print-outs to a file. Note: Status line updating is disabled while on this screen.

Printer Status Displays the current printer status.

44


Screen Name

19

26

27

29

30

31

34

35

36

37

38

49

Description

Port 3

Port 6

Misc Outputs

Shows the current status, ID, frame count and baud rate for the central station communications link. A question mark will appear in front of the baud rate when the port is off-line.

Commands

0 V Clear counters

Shows the online status of the equipment connected to the panel’s annunciator port.


System Reset Displays a list of resettable items. These are the items that will be reset when System Reset is pressed.

Port 9 Shows the current condition of the addressable module and the communications with it. Also displays information about screen 31.

Commands

0 V Clear counters

Addressable

1..4

Addressable

Relays

Connect to the Addressable Module controlling circuits 1 to 4. Press

<Esc > to return to the Control Panel screens.

Notes for Screen 31:

1.The keyboard commands (see below) are not available.

2.The Addressable Module will display "Co-processor Screen #" on the status line to distinguish its screens from the Control

Panel's screens.

Displays the state for all the control modules on a circuit.

Commands


(1-4) C Display specified addressable circuit

Sensitivity

Sensitivity List Displays the value each sensitivity setting represents.

Bypass and

Test

Displays the Bypass and Test status of all devices on an addressable circuit.

Commands



Switches

Displays the Day/Night setting, default and manual sensitivities of all sensors on an addressable circuit. Dots will be used for any value that is not used.

Commands



Clock

Shows the current on/off status of each switch and lists the timer associated with each switch.


45


Screen

50

51

52

61

Name

Tasks

FIFO

Extended

Memory

Load

Annunciator

Description


This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. Displays the

FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory Overflow trouble.

The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used. For each task, the first number is the current usage and the second is the maximum usage. If a task uses a large amount of FIFO memory, this means that task is having difficulty in operating. For example, if the Network task has large usage, then there are problems with the communications to the MR-2944. The task “SPI comlink” is the one that handles the addressable coprocessor.


Dispalys the current status of each of the MR-2614 annunciator LEDs.

These keyboard commands are available on all screens except when the service terminal is connected to the Addressable Module (Screen 31). The exceptions to this are the first five commands listed below which are also functional from Screen 31.

<Del > Clear and redisplay screen

<Tab > View next available screen. Unused/unavailable screens will be skipped

<Backspace > View previous available screen. Unused/unavailable screens will be skipped

0 <Tab > View Index screen showing the numbers of all available screens

(0-127) <Tab > View selected screen. If selected screen is unused/ unavailable, the next available screen will be shown

0.0 <Tab > TeleVideo cursor control mode

0.1 <Tab > VT100 cursor control mode

A Silence buzzer

D Print the date and time

(month).(date) D Enter the date

(month).(date).(year) D Enter the date and year. The year may be entered as 00 to

99 in a two-digit format, or as 1991 to 2090 in a four-digit number.

(hours).(minutes) T Set the time

46


(hours).(minutes).(seconds) T Set the time

<Ctrl-V > Clear privilege (Set to User Privilege)

(code) <Ctrl-V > Set privilege. (code) is either the Level 1 or Level 2 passcode programmed into the panel.

0 ?

Print database

90 ?

Print archive

99 ?

Print configuration

<Esc > Stop printout

<Enter > Advance printer (paper feed)

6.2 Addressable Module

The Addressable Module's service routines can be accessed through the Control Panel's service terminal using screen 31. While the service terminal is accessing the Addressable Module, all

Control Panel Commands are unavailable. Press <Esc > to return to the Control Panel service routines.

All screens have a common status line across the top. It shows, from left to right, the current time, a diagnostic number, the current screen number and name. All available screens are listed and described below. Note: The Addressable Module will display "Co-processor Screen #" on the status line to distinguish its screens from the Control Panel's screens.

18

19

20

Screen

0

2

10

15

Name

Index

Misc

Miscellan eous

Troubles

ComLink

21

22

23

Description


A list of the program date and time and other information.

Displays a list of addressable circuit module troubles.

Read Me

Debug

Totals

Detail

Type

On-Line

Type

Assigned

Displays the status of the communications between the panel and the addressable module.

List of all the keyboard commands.

Factory use only.

Lists for all circuits the number of devices assigned, on-line, missing, etc. Also lists the total number of devices in alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions. Also list loops in “Class A” Trouble, ie. broken loop, for Class A systems.

For a single device, shows all the programming, analog values, status and commands set.



47


43

50

51

Screen

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

41

42

101

118


Errors

Alarms

Function

Control

Modules

Bypass

For a signle circuit, shows a grid displaying all the incorrect, missing and mismatched devices. This shows the differences between what is expected to be on the circuit and what actually is on the circuit.

For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current Alarm, Early

Warning, Supvervisory and Trouble conditions for all devices on the circuit.

For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the Alarm and Supervisory initiating devices. Control modules are neither type and are displayed as a dash (-).

For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current status of all the

Control modules.

For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are currently bypassed.

Test Mode For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are currently under test.

Analog Displays the analog values of 10 consecutive addresses for a single circuit.

Command Factory use only.

Alarm

Latch

Factory use only.

Feedback Factory use only.

Tasks Factory use only.

FIFO Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory

Overflow trouble. The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used. For each task, the first number is the current usage and the second is the maximum usage. If a task uses a large amount of FIFO memory, this means that task is having difficulty operating.

Factory use only.

Scan

Sequence

Fault

Masks

Factory use only.

The Addressable Module supports the following keyboard commands:

<Del > Clear and redisplay screen

<Tab > View next available screen. Unused screens will be skipped over

<Backspace > View previous available screen. Unused screens will be skipped over

0 <Tab > View Index screen showing the numbers of all available screens

48


(0-127) <Tab > View selected screen. If selected screen is unused, the next available screen will be shown

A Display Next Address

(0-199) A Display Selected Address

C Display Next Circuit

(1-24) C Display Selected Circuit


If Class A addressable circuits are programmed, the Addressable Module also supports the following commands:

0 P Energize All Circuits

1 P Energize Odd Circuits Only

2 P Energize Even Circuits Only

49


7.0 Appendix D: Table of Reporting Codes

The following tables contain automatic Contact ID and SIA format reporting codes.

Contact ID: The first digit (in parentheses) will automatically be sent by the control. The second two digits are to indicate specific information about the signal. For example, if zone 1 is a fire zone point, you could program the event code as [1A]. The central station would receive the following:

*FIRE* - FIRE ALARM - 1where the “1” indicates which zone went into alarm.

SIA Format – Level 2: The SIA format used in this product follows the Level 2 specifications of the

SIA Digital Communication Standard – October 1997. This format will send the account code along with its data transmission. The transmission would look similar to the following at the receiver:

N Ri00 FA 01

N = New Event

Ri00 = System Event

FA = Fire Alarm

01 = Zone 1

Table 2: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes

Reporting Code Code sent when...

Dialer

Direction

*

Contact

ID Auto

Rep

Codes

SIA Auto Rep

Codes

AA See Table 3 Zone Supv./Rest.

zone goes into supervisory/ restore (2)

Zone Alarms/Rest.

zone goes into alarm/ alarm condition has been restored

Zone Trouble/

Rest.

AC Fail Trouble/

Rest.

zone exhibits a trouble condition/ zone trouble condition has been restored

AC power to control panel is disconnected or interrupted/AC power restored; both codes follow the AC Trouble Delay

Battery Trouble/

Rest.

Ground Fault

Trouble/Rest.

NAC Trouble/

Rest.

Dialer Bus

Trouble/Rest.

Line 1 or 2 TLM

Trouble/Rest.

Dialer Bus connection is lost/ restored connection via Telephone

Numbers 1 or 2 is lost/restored

S/R

A/R

T/R

MA/R control panel battery is low/ battery restored

Earth Ground Fault is detected/ restored

MA/R

MA/R

NAC circuit is opened/restored MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

(1) 3A

(3) 73

(3) A1

(3) A2

(3) 1A

(3) 21

(3) 33

(3) 51

See Table 3

See Table 3

AT-000/

AR-000

YT-000/

YR-000

UT-000/

UJ-000

YA-000/

YH-000

NT-000/

NR-000

LT-XXX/

LR-XXX**

50


Phone # 1 or 2

FTC Trouble/Rest.

Walk Test Start/

Stop communication is restored after a failure to communicate trouble has occurred; events not communicated during lapse will be sent control panel has entered/ exited walk test mode; no events will be communicated

MA/R

MA/R

(3) 54

(6) A7

YC-XXX/

YK-XXX**

TS-000/

TE-000

Test Transmission

Normal/

Off-Normal test transmission reports system normal or off-normal

(alarm, supervisory or trouble) control panel condition

T (6) A2 RP-000/

RY-000

* Call directions: A/R = alarm/restoral; T/R = trouble/restoral; MA/R = maintenance alarm/restoral;

S/R = supervisory/restore; T = test transmission

** Line number/telephone number is identified (XX)

Table 3: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restoral Event Codes

Program any of these codes for zone alarms/restorals when using the standard (i.e. not automatic)

Contact ID reporting format:

Medical Alarms

(1)A1 Emergency

(1)A2 Fail to Report In

Fire Alarms

(1)1A Fire Alarm

(1)11 Smoke

(1)12 Combustion

(1)13 Water Flow

(1)14 Heat

(1)15 Pull Station

(1)16 Duct

(1)17 Flame

(1)18 Near Alarm

Panic Alarms

(1)2A Panic

(1)21 Duress

(1)22 Silent

(1)23 Audible

General Alarms

(1)4A General Alarm

24 Hour Non Fire

(1)51 Gas Detected

(1)52 Refrigeration

(1)53 Loss of Heat

(1)54 Water Leakage

(1)55 Foil Break

(1)56 Day Trouble

(1)57 Low Bottled Gas Level

(1)4A General Alarm (1)58 High Temp

(1)43 Expansion module failure (1)59 Low Temp

(1)44 Sensor tamper

(1)45 Module Tamper

(1)61 Loss of Air Flow

51


Table 4: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restoral Codes

Zone

Definition

Fire

Sprinkler

Alarm/Rest Rep

Codes*

FA-ZZZ/FH-ZZZ

SA-ZZZ/SH-ZZZ

Supervisory/Rest. Rep

Codes*

FS-ZZZ/FR-ZZZ

SS-ZZZ/SR-ZZZ

Water WA-ZZZ/

WH-ZZZ

WS-ZZZ/WR-ZZZ

Trouble/Rest. Rep

Codes*

FT-ZZZ/FJ-ZZZ

ST-ZZZ/SJ-ZZZ

KT-ZZZ/KJ-ZZZ

WT-ZZZ/WJ-ZZZ

UT-ZZZ/UJ-ZZZ

ZZZ = zones 01-250, 256

52



Canada

Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Tel: (905)-695-3545

Fax: (905)-660-4113

USA



Tel: (888)-660-4655

Fax:(888) 660-4113

M R - 2 4 0 0


O

PERATOR’S

M

ANUAL

Revision D







Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3


MR-2400 Operator’s Manual

Contents

1.0 Unit Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Power Up Sequence.......................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 Types of Inputs .................................................................................................................................. 1

1.3 Status Display.................................................................................................................................... 2

1.4 Buzzer ............................................................................................................................................... 2

1.5 Operator Keys ................................................................................................................................... 3

1.6 Alarm List.......................................................................................................................................... 6

1.7 LCD and Keypad ............................................................................................................................... 8

1.8 Silent Walk Test................................................................................................................................. 10


2.1 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers ................................................................................................ 11

2.2 Miscellaneous Troubles..................................................................................................................... 13 i

MR-2400 Operator’s Manual ii




The power up sequence of the panel is started in the following ways: power is applied to the panel; the hard reboot button underneath the terminal strip is pressed; a Network Reboot command is issued; or the panel has a fault that triggers the internal watch-dog.

The LCD will first display "INITIALIZING MEMORY PLEASE WAIT". The panel will not respond to key presses or to zone activity. Once this step is done the panel will start to beep (the buzzer does not sound after a Network Reboot). Press Acknowledge to silence the panel.

Next the panel will display the message "LOADING DATABASE PLEASE WAIT". At this time, the panel will respond to key presses and communications, but not to input circuit conditions.




• Alarm: This type of input is the normal inputs to the system from smoke detectors, heat detectors, etc. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED if there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system. They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. It displays

**ALARM** in the Alarm List.

• Pull Station: This type of input is for pull stations. They are required to activate bells and/ or strobes, as well as an LED if there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system. They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. This type cannot have a retard time. It displays **PULL STATION** in the

Alarm List.

• Waterflow: This type of input is for water flow detectors. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED if there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system.

They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. This type displays **WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List. Through programming, Waterflow type alarms can make the bell circuits they activate to be nonsilenceable.

• Supervisory: This type of input is for items such as Shut-Off valves and Pressure sensors for sprinkler systems. They are required to operate an LED if there is an annunciator with

LEDs in the system. They cannot operate bells/strobes but can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, and releasers on the same panel.

• Halt: This type of input can only stop the operation of a releaser type output. An LED if there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system is required for annunciation of the Halt function. It will use the supervisory LED. Note: Use of this type of input must be limited access to maintain UL listing.

• Abort: This type of input can only delay the operation of a releaser type output. The Abort function maintains the current state of the releaser. The delay timer will continue to run until 10 seconds are left. The releaser will resume normal operation as soon as the input restores. If there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system, an LED is required for annunciation of the abort function. It will use the supervisory LED.

• Monitor: This type of input is used to monitor the action of items such as dampers, door, fans, etc. The supervisory LED is used. Monitor inputs can operate relays and control modules.

• Non-Reporting: These are non-latching inputs. They use the supervisory LED for annunciation. They can operate only relays and control modules. The LEDs, relays and

1



The status display is the top centre section of the front panel. It is visible through the front door. It consists of the common alarm LED, common supervisory LED, common trouble LED and

AC power LED. The LCD will show the current time.

The common alarm (red) and supervisory (amber or yellow) LEDs will flash with any new alarm or supervisory signal. The common trouble (yellow) LED will flash with any new zone trouble or a new panel trouble, such as low battery, bell trouble, etc. The AC power (green) LED is lit if AC power is on. The common trouble LED will flash rapidly if there is a condition that requires a reboot of the system, such as memory overflow, database change, database mismatch, etc. The buzzer will also beep at 2 second intervals.

The LCD will show the current time, in 24 hour format, while the Main Menu is displayed. The colon flashes to indicate that the processor is still running. The time will flash if it has not been set since the unit was last re-booted. The time will be replaced by dashes if there is a condition that requires a re-boot of the system, such as memory overflow, database change, database mismatch, etc. If the unit has a privilege entered, the privilege will be displayed instead of the time.

1.4 Buzzer

control modules will follow the non-reporting input's status. The LEDs, relays and control modules operated by non-reporting inputs cannot also be operated by Fire, Supervisory or

Abort type inputs.



• Steady: This indicates any new fire alarm conditions. This mode can be disabled in the database.

• Fast: This indicates any critical failures that must be attended to. These failures can include, but are not limited to memory overflow, network reboot required, database mismatch, etc. The pattern in 50ms on/off.


• Slow: This indicates any new trouble conditions. The pattern in 500ms on/off.

2



These are located below the Status Display. They are visible through the front door. There are 10 keys, each with red and green LED (some keys may have yellow instead of red LEDs). The LEDs are used to display function status. The individual keys are located under the rectangles marked

PRESS, not under the key description. The key assignments are assigned by the database. There are fixed placement function keys as shown in Figure 2 . The default layout is shown in Figure 1 .

The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid

(unavailable) key is pressed. The panel will record every hotkey pressed in the archive.

Figure 1: Default Key Assignment


Figure 2: Fixed Key Assignment

Key Action


Signal

Silence



3


Key

System

Reset

Second

Stage Inhibit

Fire Drill

Lamp Test

Releaser

Disconnect

Relay

Disconnect

Action





Notes:

1.


2.


3.




Stage Inhibit has no effect on an EVAC type bell system. The green LED will flash when Second Stage Inhibit is available, and the red LED will flash when it has been activated.


Fire Drill. The red LED will flash while the Fire Drill is happening. The Fire Drill cannot be performed if the bells are already activated, or if AC power is off. The Bell

Test is automatically ended if an alarm condition occurs.

Flashes the panel's LEDs. The test will automatically end if any new condition is received, or after 5 minutes. The lamp test cannot be performed if AC power is off.




4


Key

Test Mode

Signal

Disconnect

Common

Disconnect

General

Alarm

Halt

Switch n On

Switch n Off

Manual

Restart

Action



LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter> key selects the item. Then select ADDRESSABLE, then TEST. Enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear> will return to the previous menu.




Disables the municipal relays from functioning. Press again to enable relays. The red LED flashes while the relays are disabled. The municipal relays affected are programmable. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.



Stops the operation of all releaser type outputs on the panel. The green LED flashes when the key is available and the red LED flashes when it has been pressed.

Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and On. The red LED will flash while the switch is forced On. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is on, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and


Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and Off. The red LED will flash while the switch is forced Off. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is off, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and



5


Releaser Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect and Test Mode can be made to time out automatically after 4 hours. Releaser Disconnect, Relay Disconnect,

Signal Disconnect , Test Mode, and Common Disconnect all use the same privilege level.

1.6 Alarm List


Panel #1 will not be reflected in the alarm list of Panel #2. Each alarm list only stores locally generated events. In Master mode, the panel defined as the master collects all network data and maintains a list of all events generated in every panel. If set to Global, every panel displays all other panel’s events.


2nd priority and Troubles the 3rd priority and Non-reporting signals are the lowest priority. The

LCD back light will turn on if any new entry is received. The back light will automatically turn off in

5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.

Each entry in the Alarm List consists of one or two screens. Each entry will include an event screen giving a short description of the event. A device message screen is shown as required.

To view additional entries in the Alarm List when an entry is showing, press the Scroll button on the keypad. This will display the next/previous entry of the highest priority showing the device message, if any, otherwise the event screen is shown. Press Scroll again to view the next/ previous entry. Use the <Up Arrow> and <Down Arrow> to rotate between screens of the event.

One can also look at the next entry using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left

Arrow> . A summary screen will be shown when all entries have been shown. To view the summary screen directly, press <Clear> at any time.


Options for viewing All, Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Non-Reporting entries are provided. The display can begin with the First or Last entry. Once viewing the events, one can look at the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> . <Enter> will act as either <Left Arrow> or <Right Arrow> , whichever was pressed last. <Up Arrow> and

<Down Arrow> will rotate between pages of the event.

While viewing entries in the Alarm List, the currently displayed input can be Bypassed by pressing the <#> key on the keypad. This will cause the panel to consider the input to be in a normal condition.

Note: Bypass is a privileged function. A passcode will have to be entered in the system before a

Bypass will be accepted.


1.

Line 1: time, sequence number, and

Condition Code



or

2.

Line 1: time, sequence number, and

Condition Code




6


The device message screen, if any, shows:

Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition

Code


See section 2.10 for a description of Condition

Codes and Zone Numbers.

The summary screen shows either the number of alarm, supervisory and trouble entries in the

Alarm List (shown) or the number of supervisory, trouble and non-reporting entries if there are non-reporting entries and no alarm entries.


The LCD is located in the top centre of the front panel. The keypad is to the right of the LCD. They are used to view the status of the panel, to view the latest events, to set the date and time and to enter a passcode. The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed, and three times if an invalid or unavailable key is pressed. The LCD back light will turn on when any key is pressed. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.

Information is presented to the user through a series of menus and information screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information. The Main

Menu is displayed under normal conditions. If a privilege level has been entered into the panel, it will be displayed on the Main Menu as well instead of the time. Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item. Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press



The second line of the display is a clock which shows the current time in 24 hour format. If a privilege level other than zero has been entered, that privilege level will be shown instead of the time. The flashing colon shows that the panel is functioning correctly. All the digits of the clock flash if the time has not been set after a Hard reboot of the panel; also if the time is not set, the panel will show a common trouble. If any memory error occurs (Program Checksum Error,

Database Mismatch, FIFO Overflow, etc.) the clock will display 4 dashes instead of the time. The buzzer will also beep rapidly to indicate the memory error. The clock will also display 4 dashes if any configuration parameter is changed which requires a Hard reboot.


• Status: Displays the current status of various parts of the panel. The following options are available:

-- More: Displays the next screen of menu options. When the last screen of the menu is displayed the next screen will be the first one again.

-- Misc. Trouble: Displays any troubles with the bells, releasers, AC power, batteries, etc., that are not shown elsewhere. Only sections in trouble will be displayed. Press <Enter> to go to the next screen. See section 2.2 for a list of all possible messages.

-- Alarm List: Displays the Alarm List under manual control. See Alarm List above, Using the Keypad.

-- Addressable: This menu has the following options:

Select: Displays the current status of a single device. The device address is entered into the screen saying "circuit or circuit.device". If only a circuit number is entered, the first programmed device on that circuit will be displayed. If <Enter> is pressed without any entry, the first addressable device will be displayed. <Clear> will remove

7

MR-2400 Operator’s Manual any values entered. If there is no value entered, <Clear> will return to the Status

Menu. If the selected device is not in the database, the next device in the database is shown.




Identification: Displays a sequence of screens that provide the program and version, the panel's serial number, database version, etc. Press <Enter> to go to the next screen.

-- Print Database: This function is restricted to Level 1. Print the current configuration

(values entered through the LCD menu) and downloaded database of the panel to a printer connected to the panel's printer port. The printer port is at the bottom of the main assembly and is the one on the right.

-- Print Archive: This function is restricted to Level 1. Prints all or part of the history. A selection menu is presented to select which kinds of events to print. The choices are: All,

Alarms, Supervisory, Trouble, Monitor, Bypass and Non-reporting.


1. Event Number




5. Description


This history is sent to the printer port(s) and to the service terminal port if Screen 1 is active. Screen 1 of the service terminal is a copy of all items sent to the printer port.

• Archive: The archive is a list of the last 900 events (approx.). These include all signals, programming changes, time/date changes, etc., that have occurred. Test signals may or may not be recorded but "Test On" and "Test Off" are. The archive is not lost when there is a loss of both AC and battery power. Each entry includes a short description of the event, and the date and time of occurrence for events occurring at or to the panel. There may be a second screen including information from the database. You can start by looking at either the last event (newest) or the first event (oldest). When viewing the events, scroll to the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> .

<Enter> will act as the last Left or Right arrow key pressed. <Up Arrow> and <Down

Arrow> will flip between pages of the event.








8



Line 4: device type




• Program: Displays the Clock Menu. This menu has 2 options:

-- Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter> to accept date typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock

Menu. The date change is recorded in the history.

-- Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter> to accept the time typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock Menu. A time change greater than 5 minutes is recorded in the history.

• Passcode: Allows access to privileged functions. Enter the four digit passcode. Asterisk will be displayed instead of digits. A passcode of zero removes all privileges. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits have been typed, <Clear> will return to the Main

Menu. Privileged access will last two hours before the panel removes all privileges. The panel will beep once if a valid passcode is entered or three times if an invalid passcode is entered. An invalid passcode will not change the current privilege of the panel.

1.8 Silent Walk Test

The Silent Walk Test allows for single person testing of the system. This is done by providing an audio output that can be used by a radio with a microphone input. The system will produce tones through the audio output jack to give the inspector a positive indication of system behaviour. The audio jack should be connected to the Mic In or Line In of a radio. Ensure that the radio is set to automatically broadcast whenever a signal is sent to it. Alarm and supervisory conditions produce a 1500 Hz tone, trouble conditions produce a 1000 Hz tone and ground conditions produce a 500

Hz tone. Two short pulses are given for a new condition and one long pulse for a restore. Tones are generated for input circuits only. The output circuits are not part of the walk test.

To activate the walk test, first connect the radio to the audio output jack. Then activate the walk test by pressing the Test Mode key. The red LED next to Test Mode will flash while the Test Mode is active. Addressable devices will need to be chosen for testing. While selected for testing, devices will not activate relays, control modules, bells, releasers or send signals to monitoring stations on port 3. Any LEDs assigned to the test inputs will follow the device state. See the section on the Test Mode key (page 4) for more information on Test Mode. All devices not chosen for testing will operate as normal.

If a printer is attached to the printer port, a print-out of all events received by the Unit can be obtained for cross-referencing with the test procedures. Test signals will be marked as such in the print-out.

9





Condition Code

T

U

W

P

Q

R

S

I

J

M

N

D

E

G

H

Archive Alarm List

A ALARM

B


M.PULL


WFLOW

Description

Alarm

Bypass

Comlink


Maintenance Alert

Ground Fault

Hot Key Pressed


Switch



Pull Station Alarm

Releaser Abort

Releaser Halt

Supervisory


Wrong Device Type

Waterflow Alarm


Zone Number

PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:


ZZ Panel Zone

Panel

Zone

0

54

59

60

61

64

1

65

1

66

3

4

1

2

50

53

67

69

1

Description

General Alarm





Network Verify

Comlink 3

Comlink 6




Program Checksum

Database Checksum

AC Power

Low Battery

Program Restart

Panel

Zone

86

3

87

88

1

89

1

90

1

91

1

80

2

81

82

83

84

85

1

92

1

93

1

94

1

95

1

Description

Privilege Level

1st Stage Alarm

2nd Stage Alarm

Switch

Test Mode

Erase Configuration


Passcode Tamper

Database Loaded

Time/Date Change

Hot Key Activation

Memory Overflow

Network Reboot

New Program



10


Notes:

1.


2.


3.




Comlink 6 (Zone 54): ID of MR-2614, MR-2644, MR2801-MR or MR2806-MR

Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): Always 001



001 - Watchdog

002 - Clock Monitor








001 - CoProcessor for address loops


Network Reboot Required who (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the Network Reboot

Required trouble

Network Reboot Required why (Zone 95): Reason the panel generated the Network

Reboot Required

001 -- network

002 -- network

003 -- port 3



009 -- co-processor memory overflow


11






PROGRAM checksum

EEPROM checksum

EEPROM failure not enough EEPROM to save addressable settings

DATABASE checksum program mismatch


Reloading the operating program will correct this problem. If this error recurs, please contact Secutron Technical Support.

The memory chip containing the configuration information has an error in it.

Changing a value of an item set through the LCD menu will cause the panel to create a new checksum. If this error recurs, please contact Secutron Technical

Support.

The memory chip containing the configuration information is not working correctly. It will need to be erased. Erasing the EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive. Be sure to record this information before you erase the EEPROM. Please contact Technical Support to report this error.

The panel has a 64k EEPROM. The addressable device bypasses and the manual operation of control modules requires a 256k EEPROM for the settings to be retained when the panel is rebooted. Note: This will not cause a common trouble on the panel.

The memory chip containing the downloaded database has an error in it.

Reloading the database will correct this problem. If this error keeps occurring, the unit will need replacement.

The version number stored in the EEPROM is different from the version number in the program. Either reload the old program or erase the EEPROM.

Erasing the EEPROM will require the operator to contact Technical Support.

no database loaded

The panel does not have a database in memory. Load a database into the panel.

wrong database version

or

database mismatch



no database for this panel

CoProcessor 1..4 off line

CoProcessor 1..4 memory overflow


The CoProcessor for the addressable circuits is not communicating with the main CPU. This is a major fault. None of the addressable devices are being monitored. If a reboot of the MR-2400 does not correct this problem, the MR-

2400 needs replacement.

The CoProcessor for the addressable circuits has had a memory overflow. A reboot of the MR-2400 should be done to correct any problems.

low battery


12



battery charger not calibrated

BBBBBBAA

12345612

........

port 3 off line

wrong port 3 program

port 6 off line

BBBBBBFF

12345612ATWGL

.............

passcode tamper

The battery charger needs to be calibrated to provide proper supervision of the batteries. To calibrate the charger, disconnect the batteries and select

PROGRAM/BATTERY/CALIBRATE from the LCD menu.

List the status of the 6 bell circuits and the 2 auxiliary power circuits. Each column represents one circuit. A dot (

.

) indicates a normal condition, an

S

indicates a short, an

O

indicates an open and a

G

indicates a ground. Auxiliary power circuits are not supervised for opens. A bell that has been installed with the polarity the wrong way may appear as a short on the bell circuit. Note:

This message will always be shown if the panel is in Test Mode.

The communications on the general purpose communications port has stopped.

The port 3 selection in the MHI database does not match the firmware option.

Either correct the database or load the correct firmware.

The communications to one or more MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2806-MR or

MR-2801-MR has stopped.

The current status of the relays in the system. Each column represents one relay. A dot (.) will appear under each relay that is off and an asterisk (*) will appear under each relay that is currently switched on. Note: This message appears in Test Mode only.

B Bell Circuit 1 to 6 W Walk Test Relay

F Function Relay 1 to 2

A Alarm Relay

T Trouble Relay

G

L

Ground Fault Relay

LCD Back light Relay


watchdog disabled illegal addressable devices

The watchdog causes the panel to be reset if it fails to operate correctly. If the watchdog is disabled, the panel will not be reset if it fails to operate correctly.


addressable devices bypassed

NETWORK REBOOT required network verify ?

missing

One or more addressable devices have been bypassed. To view which devices have been bypassed, select PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/BYPASS/

OFF from the LCD menu.

There has been a loss of communications on the network resulting in lost frames. The panel ID listed is the panel that detected the problem. This trouble will be sent to all other panels and annunciators on the network. Select

PROGRAM/PORTS/NETWORK/REBOOT from the LCD menu to send the reboot command to all panels.


13


Message

network verify ?

illegal network verify ?

version negative counters time not set manual control modules manual function relays manual switches

MEMORY OVERFLOW memory lockout parallel printer off-line parallel printer out of paper coprocessor class changed hardware mismatch

Description

The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is not using this panel’s database. Update the database in this panel. Remember that it is recommended that all panels be downloaded with the same database for correct operation.

The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is running a different version of operating program and database. Update all panels in the network to use the same operating program and database.

This is indicative of a network communications fault. Network Reboot

Required will automatically be generated by the unit.


One or more addressable control modules have been forced either on or off.

To view which control modules are forced, select PROGRAM/

ADDRESSABLE/CONTROL MODULES/OFF from the LCD menu.

One or both of the general purpose relays has been forced either on or off. To view which relays are forced, select PROGRAM/RELAYS/MODES/



An event happened that caused an out of memory condition. This means that the event has been lost by the panel. The printer and Port 3 will discard frames to help relieve the memory problem. The panel will require a Hard reboot to be done.

The extended memory lockout has timed out. The panel will need a Hard

Reboot to correct this problem. If the panel is connected to an MR-2944 annunciator, do a Network Reboot. Please notify Secutron of the occurrence of this error. Include in your report the panel serial number and the name, date and time of the operating program.

The printer connected to the printer port is not responding to the MR-2400 panel. Ensure that the cable is not broken. If no printer is being used, reboot the panel to clear this trouble.

The printer connected to the printer port is out of paper. Add paper to it.

The new database changed the addressable loops from either Class A or B to the other. Reboot the panel to clear this trouble.

The class (A or B) programmed in the database does not match the hardware in the panel. This will occur for older MR-2400 panels that cannot change the class of the addressable loops. Correct the database and reload.

14

Message

not enough ram


Description

The operating program requires more extend RAM than the panel actually has. Certain addressable functions and/or the alarm list may not work. Basic fire detection will continue to operate. Upgrade the RAM in the panel to clear this trouble. This should only appear when upgrading the operating program of panels that have been in the field for a number of years.

15



Canada

Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Tel: (905)-695-3545

Fax: (905)-660-4113

USA



Tel: (888)-660-4655

Fax:(888) 660-4113



™

MR-2400 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT



•

•

•

•

•

•

GENERAL

A flashing alarm (red), supervisory (amber), or trouble (yellow) light indicates an unacknowledged (new) condition.


A flashing green light adjacent to a pushbutton indicates that key is available for use.

A flashing red light adjacent to a pushbutton (except SYSTEM

RESET) indicates that function has been activated.



•

•

•

•













Green AC POWER light is on. All other lights and sounding devices are off.

•

•

•

•

•

ALARM CONDITION

The red ALARM light is flashing, the LCD will display the affected zone(s), and alarm signals are sounding.



BUILDING, ETC.


ACKNOWLEDGE.

To silence the alarm signals, press SIGNAL SILENCE. The red

SIGNAL SILENCED light will illuminate.




•

•

•

SYSTEM RESET



To reset the alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals that have had their causes corrected, press SYTEM RESET.


LAMP TEST

To test all panel indicating lamps, press LAMP TEST to flash the status of the lamps/pushbutton lamps. Press Lamp Test again to end the test.



•

•

•

•


The yellow SUPERVISORY light is flashing, the LCD will display the affected zone(s), and the panel audible device is sounding.

NOTIFY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL IMMEDIATELY.




Address ____________________________________________________

Phone # ____________________________________________________




____________________________________________


©

2004 Secutron Inc., Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5W3 Canada LT-2008 Rev. B

M R - 2 9 0 0


I

NSTALLATION

M

ANUAL

Revision E






Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
















Contents


1.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 Main Circuit Board .......................................................................................................................... 1

1.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2

1.4 Input Circuits ................................................................................................................................... 2

1.5 Input Circuits Modules .................................................................................................................... 3

1.6 Terminal Board ............................................................................................................................... 4

1.7 Annunciator Strip ............................................................................................................................ 5

1.8 Power Supply.................................................................................................................................. 5

1.9 Enclosure ........................................................................................................................................ 5

1.10 Networking .................................................................................................................................... 5

1.11 Optional Integrated Printer............................................................................................................ 6

2.0 Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 7

2.1 Unpacking the HS-3030.................................................................................................................. 7

2.2 Mounting and Assembling the HS-3030 ......................................................................................... 7

2.3 Internal Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 8

2.4 Wiring.............................................................................................................................................. 10


4.0 Parts List .................................................................................................................................................. 22

5.0 Appendix A: Stand-by Battery Calculation ............................................................................................... 24

5.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 24

5.2 Sample Calculation ......................................................................................................................... 25

6.0 Appendix B: ULC Listed Compatible Smoke Detectors ........................................................................... 26

7.0 Appendix C: UL Listed Compatible Devices ............................................................................................ 27

7.1 Smoke Detectors A ......................................................................................................................... 27

7.2 Smoke Detectors B ......................................................................................................................... 30

7.3 Notification Appliances.................................................................................................................... 31

7.4 Auxiliary Power Devices ................................................................................................................. 45

7.5 Analog Addressable Devices .......................................................................................................... 46

7.6 Releasing Devices .......................................................................................................................... 47

8.0 Appendix D: Interconnection to Other Equipment.................................................................................... 48

8.1 Radionics 2071C and 2071AC........................................................................................................ 48

8.2 Silent Knight 5104........................................................................................................................... 49

8.3 CTM City Tie Module ...................................................................................................................... 50

8.4 Keltron 3158 TTM ........................................................................................................................... 51

1



Figures

Figure 1: Exploded View................................................................................................................................. 7

Figure 2: Back Box Dimension and Knockout Reference............................................................................... 9

Figure 3: AC Power Connection ..................................................................................................................... 10

Figure 4: Conventional Style B (Class B) Wiring ............................................................................................ 10

Figure 4: Conventional Style B (Class B) Wiring ............................................................................................ 10

Figure 6: Smoke Detector Circuit Wiring, Style B (Class A) Wiring ................................................................ 10

Figure 7: Smoke Detector Circuit Wiring, Style D (Class A) ........................................................................... 11

Figure 8: Normally Closed Wiring................................................................................................................... 11

Figure 9: Normally Open Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 11

Figure 10: Addressable Style 4(Class B) Wiring ............................................................................................ 12

Figure 11: Addressable Style 6 (Class A) Wiring ........................................................................................... 12

Figure 12: HSI-M500M Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 13

Figure 13: M501 Wiring .................................................................................................................................. 14

Figure 14: M502M Wiring ............................................................................................................................... 14

Figure 15: M500S Wiring for Signalling Circuits ............................................................................................. 14

Figure 16: M500R Wiring for Form C Relay Use ............................................................................................ 14

Figure 17: M500X Wiring................................................................................................................................ 15

Figure 18: Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit Wiring .............................................................................................. 15

Figure 19: Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit Wiring .............................................................................................. 15

Figure 20: Class B Releasing Circuit Wiring................................................................................................... 16

Figure 21: Class A Releasing Circuit Wiring................................................................................................... 16

Figure 22: Relay ............................................................................................................................................. 17

Figure 23: Auxiliary Power Connections......................................................................................................... 17

Figure 24: Ribbon Cable Installation .............................................................................................................. 17

Figure 25: Standard Network Wiring .............................................................................................................. 17

Figure 26: RS-232 Network Wiring................................................................................................................. 18

Figure 27: HS-2614, HS-2644, HS-2801-HS, and HS-2806-HS Wiring ......................................................... 18

Tables

Table 1: Input Circuit Module Compatibility .................................................................................................... 4

Table 2: Maximum Wire Lengths for Conventional Input Circuits................................................................... 11

Table 3: Maximum Wiring Length for Addressable Circuits............................................................................ 12

Table 4: Maximum Wire Lengths for Bell Circuits........................................................................................... 16

Table 5: Maximum Capacitance for Network Baud Rates .............................................................................. 18 iii

MR-2900 Installation Manual iv



1.1 General

The MR-2900 Fire Alarm Control Unit provides capability for up to 24 Input Circuits, 4 or 8 Polarity

Reversing Bell Circuits, network capabilities (with use of an MR-2910 Network Board) and 4

General Purpose Form "C" Relays as well as system operated relays for alarm, trouble and supervisory indication. If the MR-2900 is ordered with a printer, it is ordered under the panel number MR-2920.

The Control Unit can be networked to provide additional input circuits, visual zones, bell circuits and relays. Up to 254 Units (Control and/or Annunciator) can be connected to form the network.

The network is a Style 7 (Data Communications Link, Redundant (DCLR)) loop.

There are two main operating programs available for use in the Control Panel. The MR1 program only works with a stand alone panel and conventional input circuits. All programming is done through the LCD and keypad. The MR2 program handles all variations. Input circuit programming and special features, such as releasing function, day/night mode, etc., are done from an externally generated database, while system parameters are programmed from the LCD and keypad. The

LCD display is the same for the two programs except for those areas dealing with programming.

The basic MR-2900 Fire Alarm Control Unit consists of Main Circuit Board (MR-2931), Terminal

Board (MR-2926 or MR-2925), Annunciator Strip (MR-2902), Power Supply (MR-2905), Door

Assembly (MR-2972) and Back Box (MR-2971).

1.2 Main Circuit Board

The Main Circuit Board (MR-2931) provides system controls and visual indications, and contains the system processor, programming port, printer port and non-volatile memory for system firmware. Software is installed on the main board for critical functions such as programmable logic and timing functions and non-critical functions, such as custom zone and devices messages. All jumpers on the board are for diagnostic and test purposes. There are 6 LEDs in the middle of the right edge for diagnostic purposes.

The visual display consists of a series of LEDs for common system indication of power, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. An LED clock display is provided to display real time. The flashing colon of the clock provides visual indication of system processor operation. The clock also displays dashes if a major error/change occurs. When this happens, the system requires a Hard reboot. A

Hard reboot is done by pressing and releasing the button inside the top of the inner door assembly.

The Circuit Board has an 80-character alphanumeric LCD. It provides descriptions for inputs, display of archived events, first/last device in alarm, custom messages, etc. The keypad is used to scroll through the display.

There are three connectors on the bottom of the Main Circuit Board, an audio output jack, a 9-pin service terminal port and a 25-pin printer port. The ports are discussed below. The audio jack produces various tones in accordance with the system.

Communication Ports

The Control Unit has 6 communication ports available:

• Port #1- network (Proprietary)

• Port #2- network (Proprietary)

• Port #3- general purpose (Proprietary)

• Port #4- service terminal (RS232 - DB9)

• Port #5- printer interface, Parallel (IBM/Centronics - DB25)

• Port #6- serial printer interface (RS-232)

1


Ports 1 to 3 use the terminal strip on the Terminal Board for connection. Ports 4 and 5 use the connectors mounted on the bottom of the Main Circuit Board. Port 6 uses a connector on the top of the Terminal Board. It is for the optional factory installed MR-2920 strip printer.

The system network ports, Ports 1 and 2, allow for the networking of units. Up to 254 units (Control and/or Annunciator) can be networked together. The network wiring is a Style 7 (DCLR) loop layout. An MR-2910 Series Network Board is required by each Control Unit to use these ports.

Port 3 is available for different uses depending upon the operating program loaded in the panel.

Different uses require different variants of the operating program. Typical uses are a central station connection or remote LED annunciation of system status. The operation of this port is software defined and requires the use of an MR-2109-x communications board. The MR-2109-3 Driver is for communication to MR-2614 MR-2644, and the following dialers MR28-9001, MR28-9002,

MR28-9801, MR28-9804 and MR295101 (henceforth referred to as Dialer). The MR-2109-4 Driver is for communication to the MV-2700 voice system.

The service terminal port, Port 4, permits the downloading and uploading of custom software, such as device messages and I/O functions. The default baud rate is 9600 bps. It is intended for temporary connection to provide supplementary information during servicing of the panel.

The parallel printer port, Port 5, connects to any standard parallel printer. The system prints every occurrence as it happens. It is intended for temporary connection and can be used for system commissioning and testing by producing a printed log of received events. This can then be checked against a log of tests performed to confirm operation.

The serial printer interface, Port 6, is for the optional factory installed strip printer.

Note: If either of the printers or the service terminal printer screen is stalled, it causes the other printers to stall.

1.3 Front Panel

The system controls consist of 12 system switches and a 20 position alphanumeric keypad. The 12 system switches are factory defined for operations such as alarm acknowledge, signal silence and system reset.

The 20-position keypad is used for technical functions, system/detector maintenance, history recall, and device/circuit disarming and manual operation of addressable output modules, relay modules and bell circuits.

1.4 Input Circuits

There are seven classes of conventional input circuits supported by the Control Unit. Not all classes are supported by all the Conventional Input Circuit

Modules. See Table 1 to determine which circuits are supported by each module.

• "Class A" - This is a 4 wire supervised circuit supporting normally open contact initiating devices. Two-wire smoke detectors are not supported by this type of circuit. A "Class A" circuit requires two of the input circuits, one for the high loop and one for the low loop.

• "Class B" - This is a 2 wire supervised circuit supporting only normally open contact initiating

2

MR-2900 Installation Manual devices and using a 470

Ω

End-of-Line Resistor, model T301-9020. Two-wire smoke detectors cannot be used on this type of circuit.

• Smoke Detector - This is a supervised circuit supporting two-wire smoke detectors only.

Both "Class B", using the Resistor (T301-9017), and "Class A" wiring is available depending upon the Input Circuit Module used (see ' 1.5 next page). Contact initiating devices cannot be used with this type of circuit. A short is reported as a trouble, not as an

Alarm.

• Smoke Detector and Contact Device - This is a supervised circuit supporting two-wire smoke detectors and normally open contact initiating devices. This circuit is wired the same as a Smoke Detector circuit. Shorts on this type of circuit are reported as Alarms, not as troubles.

• Normally Open - This is an unsupervised 2-wire circuit. Normally Open circuits are always Supervisory circuits. This circuit is listed by UL for connection to other control equipment through less than 20 feet of conduit.

• Normally Closed - This is an unsupervised 2-wire circuit. This circuit shall not be used to monitor fire alarm or supervisory initiating devices. This circuit is listed by UL for connection to other control equipment through less than 20 feet of conduit.

Note: The Control Unit shows spurious alarms and troubles due to any mismatches between the programmed circuit classes and the actual field wiring.

There are two classes of addressable input circuits supported by the Control Unit:

• "Class A" (Style 6) - This is a 4 wire circuit supporting addressable detectors and modules. It requires two input circuits, one for signal out and one for signal return. Up to

99 detectors and up to 99 modules can be connected to the circuit.

• "Class B" (Style 4) - This is a 2 wire circuit supporting addressable detectors and modules. Up to 99 detectors and up to 99 modules can be connected to the circuit.

Note: Applicable codes and standards as well as good engineering practices must be considered with regards to the number of addressable devices connected to one addressable circuit.

Isolation modules (MRI-500X) should be used whenever more than one fire zone is protected by one addressable circuit.

1.5 Input Circuits Modules

There are six types of Input Circuit Modules. Table 1 list circuit classes are supported by each conventional module.

Conventional Input Modules

• Model MR-2908 - supports five classes of conventional circuits. All circuits are current limited to 10 mA. Note: This board does not support 2-wire smoke detectors.

• Model MR-2918 - supports two wire smoke detector circuits and Normally Open circuits.

All circuits are current limited to 80 mA. Note: This board does not support “Class B” Endof-Line Resistor circuits or Normally Closed circuits.

• Model MR-2928 - supports all seven classes of conventional circuits. Smoke detector circuits are current limited to 80 mA while all other circuits are current limited to 10 mA.

Note: This board does not support 2-wire smoke detectors on a "Class A" circuit.

• Model MR-2938 - supports only "Class A" 2-wire smoke detectors circuits. All circuits are current limited to 80 mA.

3


Table 1: Input Circuit Module Compatibility

Class A (Contact)

Class B (Contact)

Smoke Detector

Smoke Detector and

Contact Device

Normally Open

Normally Closed

Dual End-of-Line

O

O

MR-2908

O

O

O

MR-2918

Class B Only

Class B Only

O O

O

O

MR-2928

O

O

Class B Only

Class B Only

MR-2938

Class A Only

Class A Only

Addressable Input Modules

• Model MR-2909 - supports 8 addressable Style 4 (Class B) circuits.

• Model MR-2919 - supports 4 addressable Style 6 (Class A) circuits.

All Input Circuit Modules control eight of the input circuits, one of circuits 1 to 8, 9 to 16 or 17 to 24.

Any of the Input Modules can be used to control circuits 9 to 16, and circuits 17 to 24. Addressable

Input Modules do not physically fit in the location for circuits 1 to 8.

Note: The panel comes from the factory with the installed boards already programmed. The panel only allows programming of the circuit classes that each board supports.

Ground fault conditions occurring on the input circuits are indicated as to the circuit of origin.

1.6 Terminal Board

Field connections are terminated on the Terminal Board, which in addition to terminal blocks contains a portion of the circuitry for output circuits and relays. Some of this circuitry is on a plug-in board (MR-2927) on the underside of the Terminal Board. This plug-in board is factory installed.

The Terminal Board includes connections for 24 input circuits, 4 or 8 supervised polarity reversing bell circuits, 4 general purpose Form "C" relays, 3 system Form "C" relays and 2 auxiliary power outputs. There may be a ten-pin cable connector on the top of the Terminal Board for connection of the optional factory installed printer.

There are two versions of the Terminal Board. The MR-2926 Terminal Board has 8 Class B bells circuits. The MR-2925 Terminal Board has 4 Class A bell circuits. The two versions are identical otherwise.

The bell circuits are rated at 1.5 A @ 24 VDC. They are power-limited and protected with solid state fuses. ( Note: Maximum system loading and stand-by battery power must be considered when determining actual bell loading.) A 10 k end-of-line resistor, T301-9008, is required for supervision. Bell circuits are supervised for open, short and ground fault conditions. The panel activates bell circuits in two modes: Evacuation, which activates the bells continuously or with the temporal pattern as specified in ANSI S3.41 and ISO 8201 Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal ;

Alert, which activates the bells in a repeated 1 2 s on and 3 s off. Through programming, bell circuits can be used for releaser and releasing type functions.

The general purpose Form "C" relay operation is program defined. The relays have a power factor of .35 and are rated at 0.6A @ 30VAC / 2.0A @ 30VDC. The system defined Form "C" relays are for Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble indication. These relays have a power factor of .35 and are rated 1.0A @ 24VDC / 0.5A @ 30VAC. The Trouble relay is normally energized so that loss of both

4


AC power and battery power is indicated. The N.O. and N.C. markings on the Trouble relay refer to this energized state.

The operation of the general purpose relays and bell/releasing circuits is totally program defined. It is possible to program the activation of circuits to any zone, group of zones, device, group of devices and to further inhibit the operation for a specifiable period of time. Any relays not programmed for use in either the database (MR2) or LCD menu (MR1) are available for auxiliary power reset, i.e. the relay toggles for a programmable time when the Reset key is pressed provided the programmed time is a value other than zero.

The auxiliary power outputs provide 24 VDC @ 135 mA each. They are supervised for shorts only.

Any load attached to the auxiliary power outputs have to be considered when calculating stand-by battery size.

1.7 Annunciator Strip

The Annunciator Board (MR-2902) contains 24 sets of zone indicating LEDs. Individual LEDs are provided to display alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions by zone. The LED functions, from the left, are: Alarm (red), Supervisory (amber or yellow) and Trouble (yellow). The LEDs flash on status change and go to steady on acknowledge. The trouble LEDs turn on for both open circuit and ground fault with the specific fault indicated on the LCD.

1.8 Power Supply

The Power Supply (MR-2905) is rated at 8A unregulated, providing the system with primary DC power. It is complete with a battery charger rated at 2 A and battery supervision circuitry. The power supply and battery are located within the control unit back box.

Battery supervision uses true dynamic supervision circuitry to simulate a load condition approximately every 90 seconds to ensure that the battery is capable of handling the system load requirements on loss of primary power.

If the battery voltage drops below 18.5V it is disconnected to protect against damage from a deep discharge.

The battery charger is temperature compensating. The constant used is -0.044 V/C.

A second compartment adjacent to the power supply compartment is provided for 120 VAC terminations.

Note: Never disconnect or reconnect the batteries while AC power is off.

1.9 Enclosure

The enclosure (MR-2971/MR-2972) for MR-2900 Control Unit consists of a back box complete with power supply, inner door assembly complete with main control board, and outer door assembly. The back box and door assemblies are fabricated from 1/16 " steel. The outer door includes tempered glass window, hinge, and lock assembly. The back box provides necessary

"knock out" type openings for conduit entry. The back box dimensions are 14 2 " Wide x 27 2 "

High x 4" Deep. The outer door assembly is 16 ¾ " Wide x 21 2 " High x 1 ¼" Deep. The details and dimensions of the enclosure (MR-2973) and the MR-2900 Control Unit with integrated printer are detailed below in section 1.11.

1.10 Networking

The basic MR-2900 Control Unit can be networked to other Control Units and Annunciator Units to provide additional input circuits, relays, bells and

5


LEDs. Up to 254 units (Control and/or Annunciator) can be networked togetherThe MR-2900 network meets UL requirements only.

The network is a Class A/Style 7 DCLR loop layout (see diagram). Each unit on the network requires the MR-2910 Network Board. Programming, servicing and testing are done at each individual unit. One Control Unit is designated, using the downloaded database, the Master

Control Unit for the network. The Master Control Unit displays the Alarm List for the entire network if configured to do so. The Alarm List is programmable such that events may be archived locally on each individual panel or the archived collectively at the Master Panel. Please see the

Programming Manual for further details.

There are four different MR-2910 boards available:

• MR-2910 Standard Version

• MR-2910-R1 Port 1 RS-232, Port 2 Standard

• MR-2910-R2 Port 1 Standard, Port 2 RS-232

• MR-2910-R12 RS-232 Version

Standard communications is for direct wire or fiber optic connections between units. RS-232 communications is for connection to fiber optic modems only. Refer to the MR-D1010R Installation

Instructions (579-565) for information on connecting a fiber-optic network.

1.11 Optional Integrated Printer

The MR-2900 Control Unit can be ordered integrated with the MR-2920 Printer. The MR-2920

Printer is a 20 column thermal printer. The Control Unit and Printer come in a larger cabinet

(MR-2973) with the Printer in a compartment adjacent to the Control Unit. A compartment for 10

Ah batteries is located below the Control Unit and Printer.

The printer uses thermal paper. A Paper Advance button is on the right side of the Printer

Compartment Cover. If the paper runs out, the printer stops printing. To start printing after installing paper, hold the Paper Advance button for a few seconds. Paper Out is reported to the Control

Panel.

The Terminal Board, Power Supply Board and Toroid are in the main compartment of the back box in the same locations as they are in the regular back box. The backbox dimensions for the MR-

2973 enclosure are 22 1/16” Wide x 27 ½” High x 4” Deep. The outer door dimensions are 24 5/16”

Wide x 29 High x 1 ¼” Deep.

6



2.1 Unpacking the MR-2900


Backbox

Outer door including:

• Lock

• Display window

• Dead front door

PRINTER

ASSEMBLY

DEAD

FRONT DOOR

TOROIDAL

TRANSFORMER

POWER

SUPPLY

Inner Door Assembly including:

• Main PCB

• Display PCB

• Operating instruction insert

• Hotkey label insert

• Wiring label

ALL CIRCUITS EXCEPT AUX. POWER

ARE SUPERVISED

OUTER DOOR WITH

GLASS PANEL (MR-2920 SHOWN)

Figure 1: Exploded View

Hardware backplate including:

• Power Supply

• Transformer

• Terminal Board

Hardware pack including:

• 8 x NAC EOL resistors


• Installation manual and operating manual

BACKBOX

PHONE DIALER

MODULE

ISOLATOR MODULE

INNER DOOR

AND CPU

POWER SUPPLY

COMPARTMENT COVER

MR-2900

BACKBOX

USE #10 SCREWS

FOR MOUNTING

BACKBOX TO

WALL STUDS

2.2 Mounting and Assembling the MR-2900

Note: All applicable codes and standards should be considered. Specific reference should be made to NFPA 72, or ULC-S524 and CEC Part 1 Section 32.

Surface and Flush Mounting

The MR-2900 can be mounted in either flush or surface mount installations. Before installing the

MR-2900 Panel the following should be considered.

1.

Determine a suitable location for mounting the FACP. Keep in mind that surrounding walls, fixtures, must not hinder access to internal components. etc.

2.

Determine the size and location of conduit entrances. The Backbox provides various knockout locations, however should it be necessary to cut additional conduit entrances the electronics must be removed to avoid metal chip contamination. Reference the “Remove

Electronics” paragraph on the following page.

Note: Removing the inner door, outer door, and plate-mounted electronics is recommended in all

MR-2900 installations.

3.

The enclosure must be mounted to provide a 135 o

(minimum) angle of rotation of the outer door to insure easy removal or assembly.

7


4.

Mark placement of mounting hardware, drill holes and install plugs (if necessary).

5.

Secure the FACP to the wall using hardware suitable to the wall construction. Support backbox in place while inserting hardware and ensure that the backbox is level and plumb before tightening.

Note: Please see the detailed diagram (Figure 2) for location of knockout and mounting holes.

Replacing the Outer Door

1.

Unlock the Door with the key provided.

2.

Detach the (734-004) grounding strap (Qty: 2) from the backbox by removing the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) that are attached to the studs on the backbox. Reattach the #6 flange nuts

(Qty: 2) to the studs to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.

Open the Door to approximately 135 o

and lift up to remove the outer door from the backbox, store door in a safe place.

Removing the MR-2900 Electronics

A. Removing the Dead Front

1.

Remove the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) that lock down the dead front. Reattach the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) to the studs to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.

2.

Open the dead front.

3.

Detach the (734-004) grounding strap (Qty: 1) from the backbox by removing the #6 flange nut (Qty: 1) that is attached to the stud on the backbox. Reattach the #6 flange nut (Qty: 1) to the stud to prevent it from getting lost or discarded.

4.

Open the dead front approximately 90

°

and lift up to remove the dead front, store in a safe place.

B. Removing the Inner Door

1.

Remove the four (4) flange nuts (Qty:4) and reattach to the studs after removal to prevent being lost or discarded.

2.

Detach the (734-004) ground straps (Qty: 2)

3.

Detach the two ribbon cables and remove inner door.

C. Removing the Back Plate Electronics

1.

Detach the (734-146) harness from the (565-465) Display Board.

2.

Remove the #8 flange nuts (Qty: 4) from the studs on the backbox holding onto the back plate. Remove back Plate Electronic panel and store in a safe place. Reattach the #8 flange nuts to the studs to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.

2.3 Internal Assembly

• Attach AC wiring to the AC Terminal Block. Attach green ground wire to ground screw on backplate.

Note: Do not apply power to the unit until all doors, cables and wiring are installed and inspected.

Note: This AC circuit must be a separately fused 20A dedicated circuit. It is recommended that the breaker be locked in the OFF position during installation.

• Place the batteries in the bottom right of the back box or into the battery box. DO NOT

ATTACH BATTERIES UNTIL AFTER THE AC POWER HAS BEEN TURNED ON.

• Attach conduit to the back box as required using knockouts provided. Attach field wiring to the system. The section below describes how each type of circuit is to be wired. Attach conduit to the back box as required using knockouts provided. It is recommended that input circuit wiring be physically separated from output circuit wiring.

• Have the Unit inspected before applying power. Correct and re-inspect any problems found.

• Turn on the AC power to Unit. If no problems occur other than Low Battery, attach the batteries to the wires provided, the black wire to the black (negative) terminal and the red

8

MR-2900 Installation Manual wire to the red (positive) terminal. If the batteries need charging, the Low Battery condition remains until they are charged.

9


14-1/2" (368 mm)


21-3/4"

(552 mm)

16-1/8" (410 mm)

3" (76 mm)


5-1/2"

(140 mm)

26-1/2"

(673 mm)

29"

(740 mm)

1-1/4"

(32 mm)

27-1/2"

(699 mm)

8-1/2"

(216 mm)

Battery shelf

22-1/16" (560 mm)

MR2971 Back Box


23-11/16" (602 mm)

EOLR

470

3" (76 mm)

VRD-EOL-470

Figure 4: Conventional Style B (Class B) Wiring

Printer Section Control Panel Section

26-1/2"

(673 mm)

29"

(740 mm)

21-3/4"

(552 mm)


5-1/2"

(140 mm)

1-1/4"

(32 mm)

27-1/2"

(699 mm)

16" (406 mm)

Battery shelf

MR2973 Back Box

Figure 2: Back Box Dimension and Knockout Reference

10


2.4 Wiring

Power Connections

The Main Control Unit requires an AC power supply. This supply is connected as shown in Figure 3.

The batteries forming the Battery Pack are wired in series.

The Battery Pack attaches to the two wires coming from the Power Supply Board, the black wire to the black

(negative) terminal and the red wire to the red (positive) terminal. The internal batteries are not used when an external battery box is used. The wires for connecting the power supply board to the batteries are supplied with the panel if a battery box is ordered at the same time.

Figure 3: AC Power Connection

Warning: Never connect or disconnect the batteries while the AC power is off.

Conventional Style B (Class B) Circuit

This is a 2-wire power-limited and supervised Style B (Class B) initiating device circuit using conventional normally open contact devices and an end-of-line resistor. It is supported by the

MR-2908 and MR-2928 modules. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2. The end-of-line resistor is a 470

Ω

resistor (T301-9020). Devices and the end-of-line resistor are connected as illustrated in Figure 4.

Note: 2-wire smoke detectors cannot be used on this type of circuit. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-TB5.

Conventional Style D (Class A) Circuit

This is a 4-wire power-limited and supervised Style D (Class A) initiating device circuit using conventional normally open contact devices. It is supported by the

MR-2908 and MR-2928 modules. Maximum wire loop lengths are shown in Table 2.

Devices are connected as illustrated in

Figure 5. The return wiring must be in a separate conduit.

Note: 2-wire smoke detectors cannot be used on this type of circuit. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-

2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-TB5.

Smoke Detector Circuits, Style B (Class B)

This is a 2-wire power-limited and supervised Class B (Style B) initiating device circuit using 2-wire smoke detectors, conventional normally open contact devices (optional) and an end-ofline device. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2. The end-of-line device is

T301-9017

EOL DEVICE

Figure 6: Smoke Detector Circuit Wiring, Style B

(Class A) Wiring

11


T301-9017 resistor. Detectors and the end-of-line device are connected as illustrated in Figure 6.

Use only smoke detectors that are listed for compatibility.

Note: This circuit is supported only by the MR-2918 and MR-2928 Input Circuit Modules. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-TB5.

Smoke Detector Circuits, Style D (Class A)

+

This is a 4-wire power-limited and supervised Style D (Class A) initiating device circuit using 2-wire smoke detectors and conventional normally open contact devices (optional). Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2. Detectors are connected as illustrated in Figure 7. Use only smoke detectors that are listed for compatibility. Return wiring must be in a separate conduit.

+ +

NOTE: WIRING REQUIRES

TWO CIRCUITS

Figure 7: Smoke Detector Circuit Wiring, Style

D (Class A)

Note: This circuit is supported only by the

MR-2938 Conventional "Class A" Input Circuit Module. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-

TB5.

Normally Closed Circuit

This is a 2-wire supervisory circuit. It is supported by the MR-2908 and MR-2928 modules. This circuit is listed by UL for connection to other control equipment through less than 20 feet of conduit.


Figure 8. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2.

Figure 8: Normally Closed Wiring

Notes:

• This circuit shall not be used to monitor fire alarm or supervisory initiating devices .

This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-TB5.

• All distances refer to total wire length.

Normally Open Circuit

This is a 2-wire supervisory circuit. It is supported by the MR-2908 and MR-2928 modules. This circuit is listed by UL for connection to other control equipment through less than 20 feet of conduit.


Figure 9. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2.

Figure 9: Normally Open Wiring

Note: No fire alarm initiating devices can be connected to this class of circuit. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-TB5.

12


Table 2: Maximum Wire Lengths for Conventional Input Circuits

AWG

14

16

18

22

Length

7 620m (25 000 ft)

4 846m (15 900 ft)

3048m (10 000 ft)

1524m (5 000 ft)

Addressable Style 4 (Class B) Circuit

This is a 2-wire power-limited and supervised

Style 4 (Class B) communications circuit using addressable devices. It requires the use of the

MR-2909 module. Wire capacitance and resistance affects the allowable wire length.

The recommended wiring is twisted unshielded pair. Consult Secutron's Applications

Department for specific requirements.

Maximum wire lengths are up to 10,000 ft (see

Table 3). Devices are connected as illustrated in Figure 10. Use only approved devices .

Figure 10: Addressable Style 4(Class B)

Wiring

Note: T-taps may NOT be allowed by the authority having jurisdiction. Refer to NFPA 72 and

ULC-S524. This circuit may be wired on any input circuit from 9-24 on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB2-TB5.

Addressable Style 6 (Class A) Circuit

This is a 4-wire power-limited and supervised Style

6 (Class A) communications circuit using addressable devices. It requires the use of the

MR-2919 module. Maximum wire loop lengths are up to 10 000 ft (see Table 3). The recommended wiring is twisted unshielded pair. Wire capacitance and resistance affects the allowable wire length.

Consult Secutron's Applications Department for specific requirements. Devices are connected as illustrated in Figure 11. Use only approved devices.

Return wiring must be in a separate conduit.

Figure 11: Addressable Style 6 (Class A)

Wiring

Notes:

• All distances refer to total wire length.

• This circuit may be wired on any input circuit from 9-24 on the MR-2900 terminal boards.

These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB2-TB5.

Table 3: Maximum Wiring Length for Addressable Circuits

Gauge

18

16

Belden No.

9571

9572

Distance

975m (3 200 ft)

1 400m (4 600 ft)

13


14

12

9580

9582

2 435m (8 000 ft)

3 045m (10 000 ft)

Addressable Modules

The addressable module extended circuits are wired as shown on the next page in Figures 12 -

16.

Figure 12: MRI-M500M Wiring

14


Figure 13: MRI-M501 Wiring

S

Figure 14: MRI-M502M Wiring

Figure 15: MRI-M500S Wiring for Signalling Circuits

Figure 16: MRI-M500R Wiring for Form C Relay Use

15


16

Figure 17: MRI-M500X Wiring

Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit

This is a 2-wire Style Y (Class B) power-limited and supervised signalling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices and the 10 k end-ofline resister are connected as illustrated in

Figure 18. Maximum wire lengths are shown in

Table 4. Use only approved devices.

Notes:

Figure 18: Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit

Wiring

1.

This bell circuit is supported by the

MR-2926 Terminal Board only. It may be wired to any of the 8 Bell Circuits located on the MR-2926 terminal board, found on terminal blocks TB6 and TB7.

2.

The inrush current of some devices may cause the current to exceed the 1A current limit momentarily.

3.

In order to meet NFPA 72 requirements in section 1-5.4.7 for distinctive signals, you must mount a separate audible device in the same room as the fire alarm control panel. Audible indicating appliance circuit shall be run in conduit and loaded no more than 15ft from the fire alarm control unit.

Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit

This is a 4-wire Style Z (Class A) power-limited and supervised signalling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices are connected as illustrated in Figure 19. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 4. This is for the total length of wire, from the panel to furthest device and back to the panel. Use only approved devices. Return wiring must be in a separate conduit.

Notes:

Figure 19: Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit

Wiring

1.

This bell circuit is supported by the MR-2925 Terminal Board only. It may be wired to any of the 4 Bell Circuits located on the MR-2925 terminal board, found on terminal blocks TB6 and TB7.


2.

The inrush current of some devices may cause the current to exceed the 1.5A current limit momentarily.

3.

In order to meet NFPA 72 requirements in section 1-5.4.7 for distinctive signals, you must mount a separate audible device in the same room as the fire alarm control panel. Audible indicating appliance circuit shall be run in conduit and loaded no more than 15ft from the fire alarm control unit.

“Class B” Releasing Circuit

This is a 2-wire Class B Releasing circuit.

Polarized devices and the 10 k end-of-line resister are connected as illustrated in Figure 20.

Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 4. This circuit is rated for 24 VDC and is current limited to

1.0 A. Use only approved devices. The wiring is power-limited and supervised.

Note: This releasing circuit is supported by the

MR-2926 Terminal Board only. It may be wired to

Figure 20: Class B Releasing

Circuit Wiring any of the 4 Bell Circuits located on the MR-2926 terminal board, found on terminal blocks TB6 and TB7.

"Class A” Releasing Circuit


This is a 4-wire Class A releasing circuit.

Polarized devices are connected as illustrated in

Figure 21. Maximum wire lengths are shown in

Table 4. This is for the total length of wire, from the panel to furthest device and back to the panel.

This circuit is rated for 24 VDC and is current limited to 1.0 A. Use only approved devices.

Return wiring must be in a separate conduit. The wiring is power-limited and supervised.

Figure 21: Class A Releasing Circuit Wiring

Note: This releasing circuit is supported by the

MR-2925 Terminal Board only. It may be wired to any of the 4 Bell Circuits located on the MR-2925 terminal board, found on terminal blocks TB6 and TB7.

Table 4: Maximum Wire Lengths for Bell Circuits

12 AWG

14 AWG

16 AWG

250 mA

1219m (4000 ft)

731m (2400 ft)

457m (1500 ft)

500 mA

609m (2000 ft)

365m (1200 ft)

228m (750 ft)

750 mA

396m (1300 ft)

243m (800 ft)

152m (500 ft)

1.0 A

304m (1000 ft)

182m (600 ft)

114m (375 ft)

17


Relay Connections

Unused relays are left unconnected. General Purpose Relays and

System Relays operate identically and are wired the same (see

Figure 22).

All relay wiring is supervised. The general purpose relays (Function

Relays 1-4) have a power factor of .35, power-limited at .6A @

30VAC/2.0A @ 30VDC and are located on terminal blocks TB7 and

TB8 on the MR-2900 terminal board. The Alarm, Supervisory, and

Trouble relays have a power factor of .35, power-limited at .5A @

30VAC/1.0A @ 24VDC and are located on terminal blocks TB8 and

TB9 on the MR-2900 terminal board.

Figure 22: Relay

Auxiliary Power Circuits

The auxiliary power circuits provide 24 VDC for external devices. The polarity of the circuits is shown in Figure 23. The Control Unit does not interrupt this circuit. For the wiring to be powerlimited and supervised an end-of-line relay (Part number 430-573) must be used. The relay is a

24VDC coil with 3A contacts.

TB6

Figure 23: Auxiliary Power Connections

Inner Door Ribbon Cables

Two ribbon cables connect the Terminal Board to the Main Circuit Board. These cables are on the hinged side of the Inner Door and are long enough that the Inner Door can be fully opened without removing the cables. Ensure that the cables are not twisted and that the cable locks are fully engaged.

These cables must be attached before the unit is powered (see Figure 24). Remove any foam on the ribbon cables after installation.

Note: Inserting or removing the ribbon cables while the unit is powered can result in damage to the unit.

Figure 24: Ribbon Cable Installation

Standard Network Wiring

Standard Network wiring uses a twisted pair of wires between each panel (see Figure 25). The

COM1 of each Unit is connected to the COM2 of the next Unit. MR-2944, MR-2934 and MR-2924

Annunciator Units are connected the same as the

Control Unit. Wiring is not polarity sensitive.

Network wiring is power-limited and supervised.

TB9

Figure 25: Standard Network Wiring

Notes:

1.

Ensure that only one COM2 is connected to each COM1. If two or more are connected, the network segment does not work.

2.

The following table shows the maximum wiring capacitance for the various baud rates supported by the Network using the standardMR-2910. The maximum allowable line resistance is 680 ohms.

18


Table 5: Maximum Capacitance for Network Baud Rates

Baud Rate

9600

4800

2400

1200


100 nF

220 nF

470 nF

680 nF

Maximum Network Nodes

254

254

254

200

RS-232 Network Wiring

RS-232 Network wiring uses three (3) wires between each panel

(see Figure 26). The COM1 of each Unit is connected to the

COM2 of the next Unit. MR-2944, MR-2934 and MR-2924

Annunciator Units are connected the same as the Control Unit.

Wiring is polarity sensitive.

Notes:

1.

Ensure that only one COM 2 is connected to each COM

1. If two or more are connected, the network segment does not work.

2.

The wire length limit for RS-232 is 20 feet (6m) in conduit, in the same room. For systems using modems, this is the maximum distance between the panel and the modem.

TB9

TB9

MR-D1010R Wiring

Refer to the MR-D1010R Fiber Optic Modem Installation

Instructions (579-565).

Figure 26: RS-232 Network

Wiring

MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2801-MR,MR295104 and MR295101 Wiring

The MR-2614 and MR-2644 Annunciators, the MR-2801-MR Reverse Polarity module and the MR295101MR Dialer are connected to the panel by 4 wires, 2 for power and 2 for communications. The communications wiring is polarity sensitive. An example of the wiring is shown in Figure 27. Up to eight of each type of annunciator and either one dialer or one reverse polarity module can be connected to the MR-2900. If more than one

MR-2614 is used, the 3.9k

Ω

resistor across the MR-2614 terminals should be removed from all but the last MR-2614. The MR-2900 panel requires that the MR-2109-3 communications board be installed. The

Figure 27: MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2801-MR, and MR295102 Wiring maximum length of communications wiring is 900m (3000 ft) using 22 AWG. The maximum length of power wiring is 300m (1000 ft) using 18 AWG.

19


MR-2801-MR and MR295101 Wiring

If the MR295104-MR Isolator is not used, then the MR-2801-MR or MR295101 are wired as shown.

RED

MR-2900

TB5

AUX 1 or

AUX 2

TB9

COMLINK3

TXD

RXD

WHITE

STRIPED

BLACK

CABLE

PROVIDED

CON1

MR-2801 or

MR-295101

Figure 28: MR-2801-MR and

MR295101 Wiring

Evax System Wiring

MR2900 BACKPLATE

MV 2700 M

CONDUIT

20’ MAX

MR2925 OR MR2926

TERMINAL BOARD

TX

RX

GND

TS3

20

COMLINK 3

TX

RX

TB9 GND

**The MR-2900 panel requires the use of the MR-2109-4 board.

Notes:

• For all EVAX installations, the maximum wiring distance from the FACP to the HMX panel is 20 feet in conduit. The two panels must be in the same room.

• MV-2700M and MV-2700D are not ULC listed.

• MV-2700M must be connected to an MV-2700D. The MV-2700M (M = Master) generates the audio signals. The MV-2700D (D = Distributed) distributes the audio signal via NACs.

• For information on connecting an MV-2700M to an MV-2700D, refer to those modules installation instructions.



Power

Line

Standby

Alarm

Brown Out Voltage

Battery Charger

Battery Type

120 VAC, 300 VA (nominal)

24 VDC, 100 mA (nominal) plus Bell/Releasing Circuits

93 VAC (typical) normal standby/95 VAC (typical) alarm

2.3 A max. charging current

Sealed lead acid, up to 48 Ah, 24 V (UL listed up to 38Ah)

Input (Initiating Device) Circuits (24)

Conventional Addressable

Voltage

Ripple Voltage

Supervisory Current

Contact Devices

Smoke Detectors

Alarm Current

Contact Devices

Smoke Detectors

Max. No. of Devices

Compatible Devices

24 VDC

2 V p-p

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

90 mA

25 (Smoke Detectors)

MR Series

24 VDC

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

99 Detectors / 99 Modules

MR Series

Note: Consult Appendix C UL Listed Compatible Devices

End of Line Device

Contact Circuit 470

Ω

Resistor

(T301-9020)

N.A.

Smoke Detectors

Total Line Resistance

Total Line Capacitance

Total Line Length

T-Tapping

T301-9017

200

100 F

See Table 2

No

N.A.

40

0.5 F

See Table 3

Class B (Style 4) Only

Bell (Notification Appliance) / Releaser Circuits

Number & Type 8 Class B, NFPA Style Y/4 Class A, NFPA Style Z

Supervisory Current 1.0 mA, power limited

Alarm Current 1.5 A, power limited (NAC/1.0 A, power limited, Releasing)

Voltage 24 VDC, nominal, full wave rectified, unfiltered

End of Line Device Class B (Style Y) only: 10 K

Ω

Resistor, T301-9008

21



System Relays (3)

Type

Rating

Form C, one each for Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble

0.5 A @ 30VAC (resistive) / 1.0A @ 24VDC

Note:

These relays are not listed by UL for use for connection to equipment outside the same room as the Control Panel.

General Purpose Relays (4)

Type Form C

Rating 0.6A @ 30VAC (resistive) / 2.0A @ 30VDC

Auxiliary Power Outputs (2)

Voltage 24 VDC

Ripple Voltage 2 Vrms, maximum

Current 135 mA per circuit, power limited


MR-2910 Network Communication Boards

MR-2910 Network Communication Module, Both Ports Standard

MR-2910-R1 Network Communication Module, Port 1 RS-232, Port 2 Standard

MR-2910-R2 Network Communication Module, Port 1 Standard, Port 2 RS-232

MR-2910-R12 Network Communication Module, Both Ports RS-232

Wire Type

Gauge

Distance

Application

Standard

Twisted Pair

18-22 AWG

*10 km (apr. 6 miles)

Direct Wire & Fiber

Modems

RS-232

Twisted Pair

18-22 AWG

Under 6m (20 ft)

Fiber Modems (typical)

*Using 22 AWG wire.

MR-2109-x Communication Boards

22

Battery Boxes

MR-2996

MR-2997

MR-2998

MR-2999

Model

10 Ah

24 Ah

38 Ah

48 Ah

Capacity Size

15" x 5 d " x 4 3 "

21" x 9" x 7"

21" x 9" x 7"

21" x 9" x 7"


23


4.0 Parts List

Model

Basic Control Unit

MR-2900

Optional Modules

MR-2908

MR-2918

MR-2928

MR-2938

MR-2909HS-3039

MR-2919

MR-2910

MR-2910-R1

MR-2910-R2

MR-2910-R12

MR-2109-3

MR-D1010R1

MR-D1010R2

Annunciators

MR-2944

MR-2944LCD

MR-2614

MR-2614EH

MR-2644

MR-2915

MR-2902

MR-2622

MR-2109-3

Accessories

MHI

T301-9020

T301-9008

T301-9021

T301-9017

Replacement Modules

MR-2931

MR-2902

Description

Basic Control Unit (with or without MR-2920 strip printer)

Conventional Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, 10 mA, contact circuits only

Conventional Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, 80 mA, smoke circuits only

Conventional Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, Software Selectable for 10 or 80 mA, smoke and contact circuits

Conventional Input Circuit Module, 4 Circuit, "Class A", 80 mA, smoke and contact circuits

Addressable Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, "Class B"

Addressable Input Circuit Module, 4 Circuit, "Class A"

Network Communication Module, Both Ports Standard

Network Communication Module, Port 1 RS-232, Port 2 Standard

Network Communication Module, Port 1 Standard, Port 2 RS-232

Network Communication Module, Both Ports RS-232

Driver for connection to MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2801-MR and

Dialer

Fiber Optic Module, One Modem

Fiber Optic Module, Two Modem

Annunciator Driver

Annunciator Driver c/w 80 Character LCD

LED Annunciator

Enhanced LED Annunciator

LCD Annunciator

LED Driver for Annunciators



Port 3 Communications Board for connection to MR-2614, MR-

2644, MR-2801-MR and Dialer

Modul-R Human Interface database editor

470

Ω

End-of-Line Resistor for conventional contact circuits

10k

Ω

End-of-Line Resistor for bell circuits

Plate for End-of-Line Resistor

End-of-Line Device for conventional smoke circuits

Motherboard, included with Inner Door Assembly


24

MR-2905

MR-2926

Model

MR-2925

MR-2927

Hardware

MR-2970

MR-2971

MR-2972

MR-2972F

MR-2973

MR-2977

MR-2978

MR-2979

MR-2994

MR-2995

MR-2996

MR-2997

MR-2998

MR-2999


Description

Power Supply, included with Back Box for Basic System

Terminal Board, c/w Class B Bell Circuits, Relays and MR-2927

Board

Terminal Board, c/w Class A Bell Circuits, Relays and MR-2927

Board

Terminal Board Plug-in Board for MR-2926 and MR-2925

Inner Door Assembly for Basic System, c/w MR-2921, MR-2902 &

Cables

Back Box, complete with power supply

Front Door Assembly for Basic System

Front Door Assembly for Basic System, French

Back Box for MR-2900 System, complete with power supply and printer

Battery Box for 7.0 and 10 Ah batteries c/w cables, 15" x 5 d" x 4 3"

Battery Box for 24 to 48 Ah batteries c/w cables, 21" x 9" x 7"

Battery Box for 24 to 48 Ah batteries c/w V/A meter and cables

7.0 Ah Battery Pack

4.0 Ah Battery Pack

10 Ah Battery Pack c/w Battery Box, 15" x 5 d" x 4 3"

24 Ah Battery Pack c/w Battery Box, 21" x 9" x 7"



25


5.0 Appendix A: Stand-by Battery Calculation

5.1 General


Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it does deliver 2 A (500 mA) for 20 hours.

A car battery is designed to deliver "cranking" power for a short time, (a few hundred Amps for a few minutes). Unfortunately, fire alarm control panels need both of these characteristics, that is, driving a heavy bell load for a relatively short time, at the end of a 24 hour standby current drain.

This protection necessitates certain over sizing.



The standard battery options available for the MR-2900 Control Unit are: a) 4 Ah internal, b) 7 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, c) 10 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, d) 24 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, e) 38 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, f) 48 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet (not UL listed).


MR-2900 92 mA + 5 mA per LED (includes MR-2931,

MR-2905 and MR-2902 boards)

MR-2910

MR-2908

MR-2918

MR-2928

MR-2938

MR-2909

MR-2919

MR-2614

50 mA

14 mA

14 mA + 80 mA per circuit in alarm



50 mA

50 mA

20 mA

MR-2622

MR-2644

5 mA

30 mA

MR-2801-MR 20 mA stand by in municipal box mode 315 mA in alarm in reverse polarity mode 35 mA in alarm (+ load - 65mA for 3 circuits)

Dialer 40 mA stand by

60 mA in alarm

MR-2109-3

MR-2944LC

MR-2915

8 mA

65 mA

1 mA

MR-2920 125 mA

(+ 675 mA when printing)

MR-D1010R1 75mA

MR-D1010R2 150mA

MR-2690

MRI-1251

MRI-1551

MRI-2251

10 mA

300 A

200 A

300 A

MRI-2551

MRI-3251

MRI-5551

MRI-M500M

MRI-M501M

200 A

300 A

200 A

300 A

300 A

MRI-M502M

MRI-M500C

MRI-M500X

200 A

300 A

450 A

26


5.2 Sample Calculation

The current draw of any other devices, such as detectors, addressable modules, also have to be included in the calculations. This would include any devices connected to the two Aux Power connections. A typical calculation for 24 hour stand-by operation plus 5 minutes of signalling device operation would be:

Board/Device

Basic MR-2900 Panel

MR-2908 Input Module


MR-2910 Network Board

MRI-1251 Smoke Detector

MRI-5551 Heat Detector

MRI-500M Monitor Module

MRI-500C Control Module

Device

MRA-MBG6 Bell

MRL-WST Strobe

Draw (mA)

0.30

0.20

0.30

0.20

74

14

50

30

Draw (mA)

22

50

Quantity

1

1

1

1

80

80

20

33

Sub-Total:

Quantity

73

21

Sub-Total:

Total:

24 hour (Ah)

0.58

0.38

0.15

0.16

5.21

1.78

0.34

1.20

0.72

5 min (Ah)

0.14

0.09

0.23

5.44

27


6.0 Appendix B: ULC Listed Compatible Smoke Detectors

The following conventional smoke detectors are ULC listed for compatibility with the MR-2900

Control Panel using Conventional Circuit Input Modules:

Company

System Sensor

Hochiki

Cerberus Pyrotronics

Edwards

Model

1400

1451

2400

2400TH

2451

2451TH

Photoelectric

Ionization

DI-3C

DI-4

DI-4B

PEC-3

6249

6250C

6270C

73494 (Mirtone)

28


7.0 Appendix C: UL Listed Compatible Devices

7.1 Smoke Detectors A

The following Listed 2-wire smoke detectors and bases are compatible with the MR-2900 Control

Panel using the MR-2918 and MR-2928 Conventional Input Circuit Modules (with compatibility identifiers MR-2918 and MR-2928, respectively). Up to 5

µ

A of smoke detector normal standby load may be connected to each MR-2918 and MR-2928 conventional initiating device circuit.

Manufacturer

Smoke

Detector

Model

Base

Identifier

Model

Standby

Identifier

System Sensor

Apollo

1400

1451

1451

2300T

2300TB

2400

2400TH

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

N/A

B401

B401B

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

A

A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2451

2451

2451

2451TH

A

A

A

A

B401

B401B

DH400

B401

A

A

A

A

2451TH A B401B A

55000-250 55000-250 45681-200 45681-200

55000-250 55000-250 45681-230 45681-230

55000-250 55000-250 45681-231 45681-231

55000-350 55000-350 45681-200 45681-200

55000-350 55000-350 45681-230 45681-230

55000-350 55000-350 45681-231 45681-231

DI-3C Cerebrus

Pyrotronics DI-4

DI-4B

PEC-3

Detection Systems DS200 A MB200-2W A

Edwards

DS200HD

6250B

6270B

A

001

001

MB200-2W

6251B

6251B

A

001

001

Current

80

µ

A

80

µ

A

30

µ

A

50

µΑ

100

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

59

µ

A

80

µ

A

80

µ

A

110

µ

A

130

µ

A

130

µ

A

29


Manufacturer

Fenwal

Smoke

Detector

Model

Base

Identifier

CPD-7023 I3FE1

CPD-7023 I3FE1

CPD-7023 I3FE1

CPD-7023 I3FE1

Model

CPD-001

CPD-002

CPD-003

CPD-005

Standby

Identifier

FE01A

FE02A

FE03A

FE05A

CPD-7051

CPD-7051

CPD-7051

CPD-7051

CPD-7051

CPD-7051

CPD-7051

PSD-7134

PSD-7134

PSD-7134

PSD-7134

PSD-7135

PSD-7135

PSD-7155

PSD-7155

PSD-7155

PSD-7155

PSD-7155

PSD-7155

PSD-7155

PSD-7156

PSD-7156

PSD-7156

PSD-7156

PSD-7156

PSD-7156

PSD-7156

I3FE1

I3FE1

I3FE1

I3FE1

I3FE1

I3FE1

I3FE1

P14FE1

P14FE1

P14FE1

P14FE1

P15FE1

PSD-7135 P15FE1

PSD-7135 P15FE1

P15FE1

P55FE1

P55FE1

P55FE1

P55FE1

P55FE1

P55FE1

P55FE1

P56FE1

P56FE1

P56FE1

P56FE1

P56FE1

P56FE1

P56FE1

2-Wire

2WRLT

2WRB

CPD-001*

CPD-002*

CPD-003*

CPD-005*

CPD-001

CPD-002

CPD-003

CPD-005

CPD-001

CPD-002

CPD-003

CPD-005

2-Wire

2WRLT

2WRB

CPD-001*

CPD-002*

CPD-003*

CPD-005*

2-Wire

2WRLT

2WRB

CPD-001*

CPD-002*

CPD-003*

CPD-005*

FE51A

FE52A

FE53A

FE01A

FE02A

FE03A

FE05A

FE01A

FE02A

FE03A

FE05A

FE01A

FE02A

FE03A

FE05A

FE51A

FE52A

FE53A

FE01A

FE02A

FE03A

FE05A

FE51A

FE52A

FE53A

FE01A

FE02A

FE03A

FE05A

* - Requires Fenwal MA-001 adapter with compatibility identifier MAFE.

Current

80

µ

A

80

µ

A

80

µ

A

80

µ

A

60

µ

A

60

µ

A

60

µ

A

60

µ

A

60

µ

A

60

µ

A

60

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

70

µ

A

30


Manufacturer

Gentex

Hochiki

Smoke

Detector

Model

224

224-25

SIF-24F

SIF-24F

Base

Identifier

-1

-1

HD-2

HD-2

Model

Standby

Identifier

N/A

N/A

HS-221D

N/A

N/A

HB-4

YBA-M221 HB-4

SIH-24F

SIH-24F

SLK-24F

SLK-24F

SLK-24FH

SLK-24FH

HD-3

HD-3

HD-3

HD-3

HD-3

HD-3

HS-221D

YBA-M221

HS-221D

YBA-M221

HS-221D

YBA-M221

HB-4

HB-4

HB-4

HB-4

HB-4

HB-4

Current

102

µ

A

102

µ

A

130

µ

A

130

µ

A

142

µ

A

142

µ

A

142

µ

A

142

µ

A

31


7.2 Smoke Detectors B

The following Listed 2-wire smoke detectors and bases are compatible with the MR-2900 Control

Panel using the MR-2938 Conventional Input Circuit Module with compatibility identifier as MR-

2938. Up to 2.50 mA of smoke detector normal standby load may be connected to each MR-2938 conventional initiating device circuit.

Manufacturer

System

Sensor

Smoke

Detector

Model

1400

1451

1451

Base

Identifier

A

A

A

Model

N/A

B401

B401B

Standby

Identifier

N/A

A

A

Current

100

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

2400

2400TH

2451

2451

2451

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

2451TH

1451

2451

2451TH

4451TH

4451TH

1151

1151

2151

2151

2151

2151

5451

5451

2100AT

2100TR

2W-B

2WT-B

A

A

A

A

A

N/A

N/A

B401

B401B

DH400

B401

B401BH

B401BH

B401BH

B401

B401B

B401BH

B116LP

B401

B401BH

B110LP

B116LP

B401

B401BH

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

A

A

A

A

A

A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

N/A

N/A

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

120

µ

A

100

µ

A

100

µ

A

100

µ

A

100

µ

A

32


7.3 Notification Appliances

The following notification appliances, where a current rating is shown, may be used with the

MR-2900 Control Units.

Model Type


(in mA)

Audible Visual

Wheelock

MT-12/24-R

MT-24-WH-VN-W

MT-24-WM-VF-R

Multi tone Horn



48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)

48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)

48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)

-

78

96

EH-DL1-R

EH-EL1-R

EHS-DL1-W-VF-R

EHS-EL1-W-VF-R

Electronic Horn

Electronic Horn

17

17

Electronic Strobe Horn, Single Input

Electronic Strobe Horn, Single Input

35 (combined)

35 (combined)

-

-

EH-DL1-WS-24-VF-R

EH-EL1-WS-24-VF-R

EH-DL1-WH-24-VF-R

EH-EL1-WH-24-VF-R

EH-DL1-WM-24-VF-R

EH-EL1-WM-24-VF-R

AES-DL1-R

AES-EL1-R

AES-DL1-WS-24-VF-R

AES-EL1-WS-24-VF-R

AES-DL1-WH-24-VF-R

AES-EL1-WH-24-VF-R

AES-DL1-WM-24-VF-R

AES-EL1-WM-24-VF-R

Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual Input






17

17

17

17

17

17

Multi tone Horn

Multi tone Horn







50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)

75

75

88

88

-

-

25

25

25

25

75

75

88

88

33


Model

WST-24-FR

WS1T-24-FR

WS3T-24-FR

WHT-24-FR

WH1T-24-FR

WH3T-24-FR

WMT-24-FR

WM1T-24-FR

WM3T-24-FR

VLPM-24-W-VF-R

34T-24-R

7001T-24-W-FR

7002T-24-W-FR

V7001T-24-W-FR

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Type

MIZ-24-R

MIZ-24-W

MIZ-24-WS-VF-R

MIZ-24-WS-VF-W

MIZ-24-WH-VF-R

MIZ-24-WM-VF-W

Mini-Horn

Mini-Horn

Mini-Horn w/ Strobe

Mini-Horn w/ Strobe

Mini-Horn w/ Strobe

Mini-Horn w/ Strobe

CH-BF1-R

CH-BF1-WS-24-HF-R

CH-CF1-W

CH-CF1-WS-24-CF-W

CH-DF1-R

CH-DF1-WS-24-VF-R

Chime

Strobe Chime

Chime

Strobe Chime

Chime

Strobe Chime

34

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-


(in mA)

Audible Visual

75

75

88

88

25

25

25

75

88

88

63

63 (combined)

63 (combined)

63 (combined)

-

20

20

20

20

20

20

15

15

40 (combined)

40 (combined)

90 (combined)

103 (combined)

-

-

-

25

-

25

-

25

Model

CH-DF1-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Chime

Type

MB-G6-24-R

MB-G10-24-R

MBS-G6-24-W-HF-R

MBS-G10-24-W-HF-R





46T-G4-24-R

46T-G6-24-R

46T-G10-24-R








E-7025-WS-24-VF-R

E-7025-WS-24-VF-W

E-7070-WS-24-VF-R

E-7070-WS-24-VF-W

E-9025-WS-24-CF-W

E-9070-WS-24-CF-W

E-7025-WH-24-VF-R

E-7025-WH-24-VF-W

E-7070-WH-24-VF-R

E-7070-WH-24-VF-W

E-9025-WH-24-CF-W

E-9070-WH-24-CF-W

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker


-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

63

63

63

63

63

63

63


(in mA)

Audible

20

Visual

88

30

30

55 (combined)

55 (combined)

-

-

75

75

75

75

75

75

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

75

75

-

-

-

35


CSX10-24DC-R

CSXG10-24DC-R

AH-24

AH-24WP

AS-2415W

AS-241575W

AS-2430W

AS-2475W

AS-24110W

AS-2415C

AS-2430C

AS-2475C

AS-24100C

Model

E-7025-WM-24-VF-R

E-7025-WM-24-VF-W

E-7070-WM-24-VF-R

E-7070-WM-24-VF-W

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

ET-1010-WS-24-HF-R

ET-1070-WS-24-VF-R

ET-1080-WS-24-VF-R

ET-1090-WS-24-CF-W

ET-1070-WM-24-VF-R

ET-1070-WM-24-VF-W

ET-1080-WM-24-VF-R

ET-1080-WM-24-VF-W

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Type

Explosion-Proof Bell, Indoor

Explosion-Proof Bell, Outdoor

Mini Horn, indoor


Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

Audible Strobe

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-


(in mA)

Audible Visual

88

88

88

88

88

88

88

88

25

25

25

25

500

500

41

41

92 (combined)

107 (combined)

126 (combined)

186 (combined)

213 (combined)

98 (combined)

133 (combined)

252 (combined)

283 (combined)

-

-

-

-

36

Model

MT-24-LS

MT-24-LSM

MT-24-MS

MT-24-IS

MT-24-SL

MT-24-SLM

MT4-24-LS

MT4-24-LSM

MT4 -24- MS

MT4-24-IS

MT4-24-SL

MT4-24-SLM

AMT-12/24

AMT4-l2/24

NH-12/24

NS-2415W

NS-241575W

NS-2430W

NS-2475W

NS-24110W

NS4-2415W

NS4-241575W

NS4-2430W

NS4-2475W

NS4-24110W


Type


(in mA)

Audible Visual

Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn

Strobe Horn













Mini Horn

Mini Horn

28 -

76 (combined)

90 (combined)

102 (combined)

163 (combined)

195 (combined)

28

28

28

28

28

57

72

85

140

169

48

48

48

48

128 (combined)

163 (combined)

183 (combined)

273 (combined)

144 (combined)

186 (combined)

48

48

80

115

135

225

96

138

48

48

-

-

37


Model

CH70-24

CH90-24

CH70-2415W

CH70-243OW

CH70-2475W

CH70-24110W

CH90-2415W

CH90-2430W

CH90-2475W

CH90-24110W

CH70-2415C

CH70-2430C

AMT-24-LS

AMT-24-LSM

AMT-24-MS

AMT-24-IS

AMT-24-SL

AMT-24-SLM

AMT4-24-LS

AMT4-24-LSM

AMT4-24-MS

AMT4-24-IS

AMT4-24-SL

AMT4-24-SLM

38

Type

Chime

Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime







48

48

48

48

48

48







48

48

48

48

48

48

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20


(in mA)

Audible Visual

80

115

135

225

96

138

80

115

135

225

96

138

68

85

140

169

70

107

85

140

169

53

-

-

53

68

Model

CH70-2475C

CH70-24100C

CH90-2415C

CH90-2430C

CH90-2475C

CH90-24100C

RSS-24l5W

RSS-241575W

RSS-243OW

RSS-2475W

RSS-24110W

RSSP-24110W

RSSP-241575W

RSSP-2430W

RSSP-2475W

RSSP-24110W

RSS-2415C

RSS-243OC

RSS-2475C

RSS-24100C

RSSP-2415C

RSSP-2430C

RSSP-2475C

RSSP-24100C

ET70-2415W

ET70-241575W

ET70-2430W

Type

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe Chime

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe






Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe





Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker


-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

20

20

20

20

20

20


(in mA)

Audible Visual

215

250

70

107

215

250

53

68

85

215

250

70

107

140

169

70

107

215

250

169

53

68

85

53

68

85

140

39


Model

ET70 -2475W

ET70-24110W

ET90-2415W

ET90-24 30W

ET90-2475W

ET90-24110W

ET90-2415C

ET90-2430C

ET90-2475C

ET90-24100C

ET-1080- LS -24

ET-1080-LSM-24

ET-1080- MS -24

ET-1080-IS-24

ET-1080-SL-24

ET-1081- LS-24

ET-1081- LSM -24

ET-1081- MS -24

ET-1081- IS -24

ET-1081-SL-24

Type

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker











E70-2415W

E70-2430W

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

40

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-


(in mA)

Audible Visual

140

169

53

68

85

96

138

80

115

80

115

135

225

135

225

96

138

169

70

107

215

250

53

68

85

140

Model

E70-2475W

E70-24110W

E70 -2415C

E70 -2430C

E70-2475C

E70 -24100C

E90 -2415W

E90 -241575W

E90 -2430W

E90 -2475W

E90-24110W

E90 -2415C

E90 -2430C

E90 -2475C

E90 -24100C

SM -12/24

DSM -12/24

Gentex

GEH24

GES24-15

GES24-15/75

GES24-30

GES24-60

GES24-75

GES24-110

GEC24-15

GEC24-15/75

Type

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe Speaker

Strobe speaker

Strobe Speaker

Sync Module

Dual Sync Module


-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-


(in mA)

Audible Visual

85

140

169

70

107

215

250

215

250

53

68

140

169

70

107

25 (combined)

38 (combined)

Commander2 Horn









-

-

21

-

-

-

-

67 (combined)

78 (combined)

-

46

57

57

82

89

102

41


Model

GEC24-30

GEC24-60

GEC24-75

GEC24-110

GMH24

GMS24-15

GMS24-15/75W

GMS24-15/75C

GMS24-15/75Z

GMS24-30

GMS24-30/75

GMS24-60

GMS24-110

WGMS-4-75

GX90-4

GX90S-4-15

GX90S-4-15/75W

GX90S-4-15/75C

GX90S-4-15/75Z

GX90S-4-30

GX90S-4-30/75

GX90S-4-60

GX90S-4-110

GXS-4-15

GXS-4-15/75-W

Type





Mechanical Horn









Mechanical Horn/Strobe 75cd

Weather

Piezo Horn 24 Vdc


Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Wall

Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Ceiling

Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Sync


Piezo Horn/Strobe 30/75 cd



15

93 (combined)

108 (combined)

130 (combined)

145 (combined)

108 (combined)

157 (combined)

130 (combined)

235 (combined)

-

Strobe 15 Cd

Strobe 15/75 Cd Wall

-

-

78

93


(in mA)

Visual Audible

78 (combined)

103 (combined)

110 (combined)

123 (combined)

38

116 (combined)

131 (combined)

153 (combined)

168 (combined)

131 (combined)

180 (combined)

153 (combined)

258 (combined)

143 (combined)

-

42

Model

GXS-4-15/75-C

GXS-4-15/75-Z

GXS-4-30

GXS-4-30/75

GXS-4-60

GXS-4-110

HG124

SHG24-15

SHG24-15/75-W

SHG24-15/75-C

SHG24-15/75-Z

SHG24-30

SHG24-30/75

SHG24-60

SHG24-110

SPKE4-15

SPKE8-15

SPKE4-15/75-W

SPKE8-15/75-W

SPKE4-15/75-C

SPKE8-15/75-C

SPKE4-15/75-Z

SPKE8-15/75-Z

SPKE4-30

SPKE8-30

SPKE4-30/75


Type

Strobe 15/75 Cd Ceiling

Strobe 15/75 Cd Sync

Strobe 30 Cd

Strobe 30/75 Cd

Strobe 60 Cd

Strobe 110 Cd

-

-

-

-

-

-


(in mA)

Audible Visual

115

130

93

142

115

220

Electronic Horn 12 or 24 Vdc









30

108 (combined)

123 (combined)

145 (combined)

160 (combined)

Speaker/Strobe 4@ 15 cd


Speaker/Strobe 4@ 15/75 cd Wall

Speaker/Strobe 8@ 15/75 cd Wall

Speaker/Strobe 4@ 15/75 cd Ceiling

Speaker/Strobe 8@ 15/75 cd Ceiling

Speaker/Strobe 4@ 15/75 cd Sync

Speaker/Strobe 8@ 15/75 cd Sync



Speaker/Strobe 4@ 30/75 cd

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

123 (combined)

172 (combined)

145 (combined)

250 (combined)

-

115

115

130

130

78

78

93

93

93

93

142

43


Potter

PBD-246

PBD-248

PBD-2410

Space Age

SSU7620

SSU7625

SSU7630

SSU7521

Model

SPKE8-30/75

SPKE4-60

SPKE8-60

SPKE4-110

SPKE8-110

ST24-15

ST24-15/75

ST24-30

ST24-60

ST24-75

ST24-110

HS24-15

HS24-15/75

HS24-30

HS24-60

HS24-75

HS24-110

44

Type

Speaker/Strobe 8@ 30/75 cd





-

-

-

-

-


(in mA)

Audible Visual

142

115

115

220

220


Commander Strobe 15/75 cd






Commander Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd





-

-

-

-

-

-

75 (combined)

87 (combined)

87 (combined)

114 (combined)

116 (combined)

140 (combined)

45

57

57

84

86

110

Vibrating Bell

Vibrating Bell

Vibrating Bell

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Horn/Strobe

60

60

60

-

-

-

93 (combined)

-

-

-

80

130

160

Model

SSU7522

SSU7526

SSU7527

SSU7531

SSU7532

System Sensor

P2415 (R) (W)

P241575 (R) (W)

P2475 (R) (W)

P24110 (R) (W)

P241575K

P2475K

P24110K

P241575F

S2415 (R) (W)

S241575 (R) (W)

S2475 (R) (W)

S24110 (R) (W)

S241575K

S2475K

S24110K

S241575F

H12/24

H12/24K (R) (W)

HC12/24

HC12/24K

MDL

SSM24-6

Speaker/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Speaker/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Speaker/Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Horn

Horn

Horn

Horn

Sync Module

Bell

Type


-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39


(in mA)

Audible

-

143 (combined)

-

173 (combined)

-

Visual

80

130

160

64

159

191

64

60

64

159

191

-

-

-

-

64

159

191

64

60

64

159

191

15 (combined)

30 -

45


Model

SSM24-8

SSM24-10

MA12/24D

SS24LO

SS24LOC

SS24M

SS24MC

SS24LOLA

MASS24LO

MASS24LOC

MASS24LOLA

MASS24M

MASS24MC

PA400R (R) (W) (B)

PA400RF (R) (W)

PS24LO (R) (W) (B)

Sounder

Sounder add on Strobe

SS2415ADA (R) (B)

SS241575ADA (R) (B)

SS2475ADA (R) (B)

SS24110ADA (R) (B)

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

MASS2415ADA (R) (B) Horn/Strobe

MASS241575ADA (R) (B) Horn/Strobe

MASS2475ADA (R) (B)


Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

SS2415ADAS

SS241575ADAS

Strobe

Strobe

Type

Bell

Bell

Electronic Sounder

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe






46

-

-

59

59

59

59

-

-

-

-

12

12

-

-

-

59

59

-

-

59

-

59

59

59

30

30


(in mA)

Audible

-

-

Visual

125

80

45

45

-

45

45

125

80

125

125

-

-

25

90

120

200

245

90

120

200

245

125

180


Model

MASS2415ADAS

MASS241575ADAS

Horn/Strobe

Horn/Strobe

Type

59

59


(in mA)

Audible Visual

125

180

RP2415ADA

RP241575ADA

RP2475ADA

RP24110ADA

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

Strobe

-

-

-

-

90

120

200

245

7.4 Auxiliary Power Devices

The following Listed devices are compatible with the output of the 24 VDC auxiliary power circuits of the MR-2900. Each circuit may be loaded to a maximum of 150 mA in standby or alarm conditions.

Manufacturer Model Type

Input Current at

24 VDC

Air Products PAM-4 Relay Module

47


7.5 Analog Addressable Devices

The following Listed analog addressable smoke detectors, detector bases, monitor modules, control modules and fault isolator modules are compatible with the MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2909 and/or MR-2919 Addressable Input Circuit Modules. Up to 99 detectors and 99 monitor/control modules may be connected to each addressable communications circuit. Refer to the installation instructions which accompany each device for details of installation wiring and proper application.

Manufacturer

Secutron

Model

MRI-1251B

MRI-2251B

Type



MRI-2251TMB Acclimate Photoelectric type smoke Detector w/ thermal element

MRI-5251B Thermostat

MRI-5251RB Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise

MRI-5251H

MRI-M500M

MRI-M501M

MRI-M502M




Monitor Module for 2-wire smoke detectors to FACP

MRI-M500R

MRI-M500S

MRI-M500X

4

6

Control module

Control module


7

8

MRI-500C

2071C/AC

48


Manufacturer Model

System Sensor 1251

1251B

1551

2251

2251B

Type





Photoelectric type smoke detector to FACP

2251TMB

2551

Acclimate Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ thermal element


3251 Combination smoke detector and thermostat

5251P Thermostat

5251B Thermostat

4

6

5251H

MRI-500C

1

2 w/ Rate of Rise

3


5104

M501M

M502M


Monitor Module for 2-wire smoke detectors Classes A/B initiating

M500R

M500S

M500X

Control module

Control module


49


7.6 Compatible Door Holder/Releasers

The following listed door holders are compatible with the MR-2900 and MR-2400 door holder/ releaser circuits:

Manufacturer

Harrington

Model

1501-G1

1502-G1

1504-G1

1505-G1

1508-G1

1509-G1

Type

Single Door, Floor Mount

Double Door, Floor Mount

Flush Wall Munt, Large Catch Plate

Flush Wall Mount

Surface Wall Mount

Completely Flush Wall Mount


70 mA

140 mA

70mA

70 mA

70 mA

70 mA

7.7 Releasing Devices

The following Listed releasing devices are compatible with the MR-2900 Control Unit.

Manufacturer

ASCO

Skinner

Model Type

T8210A107

R8210A107

Solenoid Valve

Solenoid Valve

8210A107 Solenoid Valve

73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 Solenoid Valve

50


8.0 Appendix D: Interconnection to Other Equipment

8.1 Radionics 2071C and 2071AC

The wiring between the MR-2900 and the Radionics 2071C and 2071AC Dialers is as shown in the following diagram:

An addressable module may be substituted for the alarm relay as follows:

Trouble and supervisory contacts must be connected to the panel.

Note: The Radionics 2071C and 2071AC are separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.

51


8.2 Silent Knight 5104

The wiring between the MR-2900 and the Silent Knight 5104 Dialer is as shown in the following diagram:

52

An addressable module may be substituted for the common alarm relay as follows:

An addressable module may be substituted for the common supervisory relay as follows:

4.7k

4 to FACP

5

6

6

MRI-500C

5104


Note: The Silent Knight 5104 is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.


8.3 CTM City Tie Module

The CTM is designed to interface between a control panel and a local city tie box. The interface from the control panel is via a 24VDC signal circuit. This module is intended for connection to the control unit at the protected premises.

Ratings:

City Tie Module

• Operating Voltage 24 VDC

• Standby Current 2 mA

• Alarm Current

• UL listed

City Tie Box

1.5 A (less than 10 milliseconds) for Model DC-2A Master Box

File S3610

• Series type Coil Resistance 14.5 ohms

The CTM is wired as shown below.

Notes:

1.

The CTM is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.

2.

When connecting the CTM module to any of the bell (NAC) circuits, that circuit(s) must be programmed as a strobe circuit.

53


8.4 Keltron 3158 TTM

The Keltron 3158 TTM and the MR-2900 are wired together as shown below:

54

Addressable control modules cannot be used with the Keltron 3158 TTM.

Note: The Keltron 3158 TTM is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.







System Failures

This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:

• Inadequate Installation

A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.

• Power Failure

Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by

AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.

• Failure of Replaceable Batteries

Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.

•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices

Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.

•System Users

A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.

•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices

Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.

• Software

Most Secutron products contain software. With respect to those products, Secutron does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. Secutron shall not be liable for any delays,

55

MR-2900 Installation Manual breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.

Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.

Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.

•Alarm Notification Appliances

Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearing-impaired person.

• Telephone Lines

If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.

•Insufficient Time

There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.

•Component Failure

Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.

•Inadequate Testing

Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority Having

Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.

•Security and Insurance

Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.

IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.

56




Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron

Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.








•water damage;








To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from

Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.





57




Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which

Secutron Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.


58









Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

M R - 2 9 0 0


P

ROGRAMMING

M

ANUAL

Revision D






Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3



Contents



1.2 Networks ......................................................................................................................................... 2

1.3 Addressable Devices ...................................................................................................................... 4

1.4 Releasing Service ........................................................................................................................... 7

1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors............................................................................................................. 8

2.0 Editing MHI Databases ............................................................................................................................ 9


2.2 System Window .............................................................................................................................. 10

2.3 Switches Window............................................................................................................................ 13

2.4 Groups Window .............................................................................................................................. 14

2.5 Panel Window ................................................................................................................................. 16

2.6 Circuits and Devices Windows........................................................................................................ 30

2.7 Internal Circuits Window ................................................................................................................. 34

2.8 Relate Window................................................................................................................................ 35

3.0 LCD Programming ................................................................................................................................... 37


3.2 Clock ............................................................................................................................................... 38

3.3 Common Relays ............................................................................................................................. 38

3.4 Switches.......................................................................................................................................... 38

3.5 Battery............................................................................................................................................. 39

3.6 Conventional ................................................................................................................................... 39

3.7 Addressable .................................................................................................................................... 39

3.8 Archive ............................................................................................................................................ 41

3.9 Relays ............................................................................................................................................. 41

3.10 Ports.............................................................................................................................................. 41

3.11 Alarm List ...................................................................................................................................... 44

3.12 Passcode ...................................................................................................................................... 44

3.13 Memory ......................................................................................................................................... 44

3.14 Buzzer........................................................................................................................................... 44



5.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 49

5.2 Sample Calculation ......................................................................................................................... 50


6.1 Control Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 51

6.2 Addressable Module ....................................................................................................................... 56

7.0 Appendix D: Table of Reporting Codes ................................................................................................... 59 i

MR-2900 Programming Manual ii



Figures

Figure 1: Typical Network Layout ................................................................................................................... 2

Figure 2: Single Network Break...................................................................................................................... 3

Figure 3: Panel Removed From Network ....................................................................................................... 4

Figure 4: 4-Wire Device Wiring (Typical) ........................................................................................................ 8

Figure 5: System Window............................................................................................................................... 10

Figure 6: Switches Window ............................................................................................................................ 13

Figure 7: Groups Window............................................................................................................................... 14


Figure 9: IDs Supervised ................................................................................................................................ 18

Figure 10: Annunciator Panel Window ........................................................................................................... 18

Figure 11: Output Dialog ................................................................................................................................ 19

Figure 12: Options Dialog............................................................................................................................... 20

Figure 13: Default Key Assignments .............................................................................................................. 22

Figure 14: Fixed Key Assignments................................................................................................................. 22

Figure 15: Dialer Settings ............................................................................................................................... 25



Figure 18: Call Directions ............................................................................................................................... 28

Figure 19: Zone Data...................................................................................................................................... 29



Figure 22: Devices Window............................................................................................................................ 30

Figure 23: Copy Dialog Box............................................................................................................................ 33

Figure 24: Internal Circuits Window................................................................................................................ 34

Figure 25: Relate Window .............................................................................................................................. 35

Figure 26: Typical Menu ................................................................................................................................. 37

Figure 27: Typical Selector............................................................................................................................. 37

Tables

Table 1: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes ..................................................................................... 59

Table 2: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restore Event Codes.................................................................................. 60

Table 3: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restore Codes .......................................................................... 60 iii

MR-2900 Programming Manual iv



Warnings: Before Programming

1.

All applicable codes and standards should be considered when programming the Control

Unit.

2.

The Control Unit continues to monitor input circuits and devices and acts according to the current program settings if an alarm is received while it is being programmed.

3.

Loading a new database erases the current database before loading the new database. If the new database is not loaded after the erasure, the panel will not operate.

4.

The database internal revision number included must match the number required by the

MR2 program, otherwise a Database Mismatch trouble condition is generated. This condition disables the panel until a correct MR2 program is loaded.

5.

The database must be completely loaded for it to be considered valid. The program keeps track if the last database load was valid/complete or not. An invalid database load disables the panel until a valid database load is done.


There are two different programs available for use in the Control Panel:

• The MR1 program only works with a stand alone panel and conventional input circuits. All programming is done through the LCD and keypad. This is not discussed here; see the

MR1 Programming Manual for a discussion of MR1 programming.

• The MR2 program handles all variations. Input circuit programming is done from a database, while system parameters are programmed from the LCD and keypad. The programs and their port 3 usages are: MR2-x: old SE 2000 protocol; MR2-xA: MR-2614 annunciator, MR-2644 annunciator, MR-2801-MR Reverse Polarity module, and MR28-

9001, MR28-9002, MR28-9801, MR28-9804, and MR295101 Dialler. Note that these

PIDS will henceforth be referred to as Dialler; MR2-xB: new SE 2000 protocol (device level); MR2-xG: GRID; MR2-xE: MV-2700 Voice Evacuation panel. MR2-7y programs are for MR-2931 based systems and MR2-3y programs are for MR-2921 based systems.

Due to programming and hardware limitations, units using the MR-2901C and MR-2921 main circuit boards may not have some of the LCD options that are listed here.

The MR2 program uses a database for input circuit programming. This database includes the conventional circuit definitions, addressable devices on-line, and the Zone LEDs, Bells, Releasers,

Functions Relays and Control Modules activated by the conventional circuits and addressable devices. This database is created and downloaded from an IBM compatible computer using the

Modul-R Human Interface (MHI) program. Refer to the Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for instructions on downloading the database.

Note: All communications are stopped during the database load. This will cause trouble to be recorded by those units that are normally communicating with the panel.

The use of Port 3 on the panel is handled by loading different versions of the operating program.

Each different protocol has its own operating program. If an incorrect operating program is detected, a Miscellaneous Trouble is generated, but the panel will continue to work except for the

Port 3 functions.

1


1.2 Networks

General

The MR-2900 can be incorporated into a network including other MR-2900 panels, MR-2200 panels and MR-2944 annunciators. Though up to 254 panels and annunciators can be supported by the network, such a network would probably be too large to properly maintain. The network can be setup for single building or multiple building operation.

The basic layout of the network is a single loop (see Figure 1 ).

Each panel and annunciator has a unique ID. There is no requirement that the IDs be sequential or that they start with

1. The master panel can be any fire panel in the network. The panels work in a peer-to-peer fashion. This means that each panel is responsible for the programming of the inputs

Figure 1: Typical Network Layout connected to it. The master panel does not control the network, but is a central location for information. Information is exchanged over the network via two basic means: a) specific frames, which are from one panel to another, and b) broadcast frames, which are from one panel to all others.

Notes:

1.

For correct operation of the network, all panels and annunciators need to be loaded with the same version of operating programs and with the same database. If changes are made to the database, it is recommended that ALL panels and annunciators be reloaded.

2.

When panels and annunciators are first installed, the panel ID must be entered into it before loading the database.

The special functions of the master panel are: a) synchronize the clocks on the network by broadcasting the date and time at 3:30am every day; this means that only the master panel of a network requires that its clock be calibrated; b) maintain a network alarm list; c) transmit all signals from the network to a monitoring location; d) operate its common/municipal relays in accordance with the network condition.

Feature Operation

The following are the various types of frames that are sent on the network.

Commands & Restores

These specific frames are sent when a device in alarm requires operation of outputs at another unit. These commands are for the bells, relays, control modules, device messages and LEDs.

When the device itself restores, the restore commands are sent right away so that the other panels know that they can be reset. Anything operated will stay latched until the Reset key is pressed.

Hotkey and Hotkey LED Operation

If a unit has its hotkey routing set for specific panels only, it will send Acknowledge, Reset, Signal

Silence and Second Stage Inhibit to these panels as specific frames. If hotkey routing is Global in the database, these are sent as broadcast frames.

If a panel’s function keys are sent to other panels, those panels will send commands to the panel to have it turn on and off the hot key LEDs. This is so that there is indication that the key function

2

MR-2900 Programming Manual has become available. This will cause the LEDs to continue flashing after the key is pressed until the frame is received to turn off the LED.

Time/Date Change

This broadcast frame is sent by a panel or annunciator if the time or date is changed. The master panel also will send both a date and time change frame at 3:30am every day to synchronize all the clocks in the network.

Manual Switch Operation

If the state of any of the 16 software switches is changed manually at any panel, this change is broadcast to all other panels. The software switches are a system resource.

Network Reset

If a Network Reset command is initiated at a panel, it is broadcast normally and then the panel will reboot itself. Upon receiving the Network Reset command, a panel will pass it on to the next panel and then reboot itself. This has the affect of causing all the panels to reboot simultaneously.

Network Verify

Network Verify is an active process in which each panel and annunciator checks to make sure that all other panels can communicate with it. This requires that ALL PANELS in the network have same operating software and database.

Each panel sends out a Network Verify frame which is then passed around the network loop.

When the frame returns to its originating panel, it is checked to ensure it passed through the correct number of panels. Also, each panel checks the Network Verify frames from other panels to ensure that they are correct. Any errors and mismatches will be identified.

Network Communications

Information is sent across the network in frames. There are two types of frames: specific and broadcast. Specific frames are sent from one unit to another. Broadcast frames are sent from one unit to all others.

Specific Frames

Specific frames deal with information generated at one panel and required at another. It is passed from panel to panel until it reaches its destination. Each panel has a list as to which port to send frames from to reach all other panels through the fewest number of panels. Since networks will generally have all communications links running at the same baud rate, this is generally the shortest time as well.

If there is a break in the communications (see Figure 2 ), the panel that can not pass the message on will send it back the way it came.

This will cause the frame to go the long way around the network. If there are two breaks in the network loop, the frame is again reversed at the second break. When it is received by the originating panel after this second Figure 2: Single Network Break turn around, the frame is considered to be orphaned and destroyed. This generates a Network Reboot Required trouble. This will be passed on to all other panels. The reason the orphan frame is destroyed is to prevent unexpected operation when the network is finally repaired, such as a panel starts ringing its bells because of an alarm from the previous day.

3


Broadcast Frames

Broadcast frames deal with information that affects the entire network. When a broadcast frame is created by a panel or annunciator, it is sent out both network communications ports. Each unit in turn will receive the broadcast in one port, act upon it and pass it on out the other port. Upon reaching the unit that generated the broadcast frame, that unit then disposes of it. This means that under normal circumstances, all units will receive a broadcast twice and act upon it twice.

If there is a break in a communications link (see Figure

2 ) the broadcast will be disposed of by the unit unable to pass it on.

In the situation where a unit has been removed from the loop (see

Figure 3 ), the broadcast will be passed only from com2 to com1 at the jump. In Figure 3 , panel 5 will pass the broadcast to panel 3, but panel 3 will not pass the broadcast on to panel 5 since it is supposed to be communicating to panel 4.

Figure 3: Panel Removed From Network


The MR-2900 can use analog/addressable devices. There are two general types of devices: sensors and modules. The following devices are supported:

Modules

MRI-M500M Monitor module

MRI-M501M Mini monitor module

MRI-M502M Monitor module for conventional 2-wire smoke detectors

MRI-M503M Micro monitor module (EN54 listed only)

MRI-M500DM Dual monitor module

MRI-M500R

MRI-M500S

MRI-M500X

Relay module

Control module

Isolator module

Sensors

MRI-1251

MRI-1551

MRI-2251

MRI-2551

MRI-2251T






MRI-2551TH Photoelectric type smoke detector c/w heat detector

MRI-3251

MRI-5251



MRI-5251H

MRI-5551

MRI-5251R

MRI-5551R

Fixed temperature, high temperature


Rate of Rise and fixed temperature detector, low profile

Rate of Rise and fixed temperature detector

The MRI-M500M, MRI-M500DM, MRI-M501M, MRI-M502M and MRI-M503M monitor modules all appear the same to the MR-2900. This allows for the easy substitution of devices. The

MRI-M501M and MRI-M503M modules are intended for mounting inside the back box of a conventional contact device. The MRI-M500M, MRI-M500DM and MRI-M502M require back boxes for mounting.

4


The MRI-M500DM dual monitor module has two Class (Style) B input circuits. The first input uses the address dialled into the module and the second uses that address plus 1. That is, if the dials are set for address 34, the monitor modules to be programmed into MHI are at addresses 134 and

135.

The MRI-M502M monitor module can be used for monitoring up to 20 System Sensor two-wire smoke detectors. The module requires a separate 24 VDC supply to power the smoke detectors.

Also, some external means of resetting the power must be provided since the module cannot reset the detectors. This can be accomplished with one of the general purpose relays of the MR-2900.

Do not assign any relates to the relay in the MHI database. Also, the relay must be assigned a non-zero duration with the LCD menu. Then the relay will operate whenever the Reset hot key is pressed when it has nothing else to reset (neither LED is flashing).

The MRI-M500S control module can be used to control a supervised output, such as a bell or strobe circuit. The control module monitors the circuit wiring and troubles will be reported. The module will require a separate 24 VDC supply for the controlled circuit. When programming the database in MHI, be sure to program the control module correctly. Choose any “Control ( str )” option other than “Control (Relay)” for the MRI-M500S module. The MR-2900 will not operate a control module if the supervised circuit is shorted. Also there are options in MHI that affect the

MRI-M500S control module but not the MRI-M500R relay module.

The MRI-M500R relay provides two Form C relays. Choose “Control (relay)” for the MRI-M500R module. There are options in MHI that affect the MRI-M500R relay module that do not affect the


The MRI-M500X isolator module is used to prevent wiring faults from affecting the entire circuit. It divides the addressable circuit into sections. The isolator has separate IN and OUT wiring. A short on one side of the isolator will not be seen on or affect the other side. Isolator modules do not use addresses. The isolator relies on a voltage threshold to determine whether it should be isolating or not. This voltage threshold is around 6.5V. All isolators in a system are in isolated mode on system power up. If there is an excess of current draw, the isolator will not close. When the short is removed, the isolator module will automatically close the circuit again. The LED on the isolator module will turn on when the module is in isolated mode, otherwise it will flash periodically. System



MRI-B501

MRI-B501B



MRI-B210LP Flanged base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile

MRI-B501BH Sounder base for all sensors

MRI-B501BHT sounder base, temporal

MRI-B524BI Isolator base for MRI-x551 sensors

MRI-B224BI Isolator base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile

MRI-B524RB Relay base for MRI-x551 sensors

MRI-B224RB Relay base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile

The relay and sounder bases are activated by the sensor LED. When this LED stays on for more than 10 seconds, the base will activate. This requires that the MR-2900 have the LED mode set to

FLASH. This is done through the LCD Menu by choosing PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/

LED MODE/FLASH. The MR-2900 will only turn on the LEDs of up to 5 devices

1

per addressable

1. BRK programs dated before 2 April 1999 limit the number of LEDs to 3.

5

MR-2900 Programming Manual circuit to prevent excess current flow. While the panel will continue to respond to further alarms from the circuit, the panel will not turn on additional LEDs. The MRI-B501BH and MRI-B501BHT sounder bases require a separate 24 VDC supply for operation. If the polarity of this supply is reversed for more than 10 seconds, the sounder base will activate.



Device Faults



• Illegal (I): A device is reporting on an address that the database shows as unused. For a new installation, this is generally indicative of devices that have been mis-addressed. For illegal sensors, since there is no programming available, if an alarm condition is detected, the MR-2900 will operate all its bell circuits.

1

In a network system, only the local panel will activate its bells. The MR-2900 will always ignore illegal modules.

• Wrong Type (U): This occurs if the device is not the type expected for the address. For example, the database lists an address to have a ion smoke detector, but a photo smoke detector has reported for the address. This error will also be used if the panel cannot determine the type of the device. If the device goes into alarm, the panel will operate normally.


2

Modules: The extended circuit from the module has a wiring fault. Note: Control modules that supervise their output circuit will not be operated if the output circuit is shorted

3

.

• Duplicate (D): This means that two devices are using the same address. The MR-2900 does a check every hour for duplicate devices. If either device goes into alarm, the panel will operate normally. Note: Due to the method used to detect duplicate devices, it is possible for a single device to appear as duplicate devices. Generally, the device will need to be replaced.

MR-2919 Class A Input Module

The MR-2919 Class A Addressable Input Module uses two input circuits, out on the odd numbered circuit and in on the following even numbered circuit, for example: out on circuit 9 and in on circuit

10. Both circuits are powered by the panel from a single source, so that there is no internal isolation between the circuits. This means that a short across one circuit will affect the other circuit.

6

1. BRK programs dated before 18 February 1999 always ignore illegal sensors.

2. BRK programs dated before 9 March 1999 do not report sensor troubles.

3. BRK programs dated before 10 September 1999 do not operate control modules if in any fault.


1.4 Releasing Service

The eight output circuits are available for releasing service through programming. The MRI-M500S control module can also be programmed for releasing. Releasers can be programmed to be normally On (Continuous) or normally Off (Momentary). Continuous releasers will be turned off by a loss of AC power as well as by input. There can be three types of inputs to start operation:

Normal, Fast and Cross-Zoned. There are also Abort and Halt features available. Releaser operation is subject to both a delay and a duration time. These are all programmed in the database.

Normal operation of a releaser is as follows:

1.

An Alarm input causes the start of the releaser delay.

2.

After the delay time, the releaser is activated for the duration time.

3.

After the duration time, the releaser is returned to its normal state.

After this sequence of operation, the releaser will have to be reset before it will operate again.

The inputs that activate and control releaser operation are as follows:

• Normal Input: Causes the selected releaser to start its normal operating sequence.

• Fast Input: Causes the selected releaser to operate immediately, ignoring any delay time and will over-ride the Halt function (see below). The releaser will run for its standard duration.

• Cross-Zoned Input: These inputs allow for multiple inputs to be required before the releaser is activated. Inputs are assigned either to the “A-side” or “B-side”. If an alarm is received from both an A-side and a B-side detector, the releaser will start its normal operation.

• Halt Input: This will cause the selected releaser not to operate. The releaser will have to be reset before it will operate normally again. The Fast Input will over-ride the Halt function

(see above). Note: If used, this type of input must be controlled access to maintain UL listing.

• Abort Input: This will cause the selected releaser to stop running its timer once it reaches

10 seconds. The timer will stay at 10 seconds until the Abort input is restored. The timer will then resume.

Restrictions on Releaser Programming

1.

Cross-zoning and Fast operation require the use of the MR2 program and MHI.

2.

Normal, Cross-zoned and Fast inputs can be any of Alarm, Pull Station, Waterflow or

Supervisory functions.

3.

Abort and Halt functions cannot be assigned to Smoke Detector circuits or Smoke Detector and Contact Device circuits.

4.

All inputs affecting a releaser must be wired to the same panel as the releaser. This means that inputs from remote panels in a network cannot affect releasers.

7



4-wire detectors can be reset by using one of the function relays on the panel. The relay is not programmed for any use, that is, it is unassigned. The next requirement is that a non-zero duration be programmed for it (see the section Outputs Dialog ). A duration of zero disables this function.

Once this is done, wire the power for the device as shown in Figure 4 . A third party power supply can be used instead of the

Aux Power as shown Whenever the

System Reset operator key is pressed when neither LED is flashing, will cause the relay to operate for the duration programmed.

Figure 4: 4-Wire Device Wiring (Typical)

8


2.0 Editing MHI Databases





If the current database has been previously verified and you select Edit, a requester will be displayed confirming your request to edit the database. If No is chosen, then the database is displayed in View mode. Editing the database will change the database to a non-verified state and will change the Last Edit Date.

Prior to an editing session, the database will be automatically backed up. This back up copy will have the same name as the original database, but will incorporate a .BAK extension. If a database becomes corrupted, delete it and rename its .BAK backup file to have a .DBA extension. This will restore the database to the state prior to the last editing session .

Note: When upgrading from a version 17 (or earlier) system, a number of items that were programmed at the panel are now included in the database. See the file UPGRADE.TXT for a complete description of these changes. Follow these instructions to obtain the required information before upgrading your firmware :

1.

Connect your computer to the panel and open the Terminal window

2.

Select the Printer screen in the Terminal: press

14

<Tab>

3.

You should note that the title bar of the Terminal window displays the text "File logging in progress...". If this does not appear, press the button Log On .

4.

In the terminal window, type the following command:

99?

5.

The panel's configuration settings will be listed in the Terminal window and it will also be saved in the file: LOG_CONT.TXT, located in your program directory

6.

Close the Terminal window

7.

You may now view the contents of the file using any standard word processor or text editor

8.

You must perform the above procedure for ALL panels in your system

Panel Types

There are a number of different types of panels that may be programmed. These are the ones covered:

• MR-2900 (mb2931) Fire Panel: This is an MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2931 motherboard. This panel accepts all input circuit modules and has four Class A or eight

Class B power-reversing output circuits. These output circuits can be programmed to be used as either bells or releaser type circuits. This is the standard board for the MR-2900.

These panels can be used in a network configuration.

• MR-2900 (mb2921) Fire Panel: This is an MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2921 motherboard. It is identical to the MR-2900 (mb2931) in hardware capability, but does not support all software features. This panel type is no longer produced.

• MR-2900 (mb2901) Fire Panel: This is an MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2901 motherboard. This panel accepts conventional input circuit modules only and has four bell circuits and four releaser type circuits. These circuits use different circuitry and cannot have their function changed. These panels can be used in a network configuration. This panel type is no longer produced.

• MR-2100/MR-2200 Fire Panel: Can be used in a network configuration with MR-2900 control panels.

9


• MR-2400 Fire Panel: Not discussed in this manual.


This allows for less information to be sent on the network. An optional 4x20 LCD can be included. This annunciator has two communications ports. This allows the annunciator to reside in the network loop. It uses the MR-2910 Network Board. One of the network ports can be disabled. This results in the annunciator having to be linked to a Control Panel.

With one of the ports disabled, the annunciator can not be in the network loop.

• MR-2934 Annunciator: It is identical to the MR-2944 in operation. It has the network communications built onto the board instead of using the MR-2910 Network Board. This annunciator is no longer produced.

• MR-2924 Annunciator: It is similar to the MR-2944 in operation. It does not have any onboard database memory, so messages are sent from the control panels. It has the network communications built onto the board instead of using the MR-2910 Network Board. This annunciator is no longer produced.

• MR-2914 Annunciator: It is similar to the MR-2924 except as follows: (a) the optional

LCD is 2x20; (b) there is only one network communication port. These annunciators are linked to a Control Panel and can not reside in the network loop. This annunciator is no longer produced.

Notes:

1.

The MR-2614 and MR-2644 Annunciators can be attached to the MR-2900 panel. They are considered an extension of the panel by MHI and do not change how these panels interface with other annunciators.

2.

All products no longer produced will be supported by MHI for existing systems.


The System Window (see

Figure 5 ) allows editing of all system level options, as well as detailing other system wide information.

The Title Bar of the window will show whether editing or viewing of the database is being preformed and the name of the current database.

The text in the top left corner provides information about the database. The top line gives the date and time the database was last edited.

The next line states whether

Figure 5: System Window the current contents have been verified or not; and whether the database has been compressed or not.


Bell System is a drop down list for selecting how the bells and strobes will operate. This includes both the panel outputs and any control modules programmed for bell or strobe operation. This sets the base operation for the entire network. If coded bells are required, the bell codes are defined for each input individually. The following options are available:

10


• Alert: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the panel will progress to Second Stage. Second stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.

• Evac: A First Stage alarm will activate selected bells in Evacuation mode. Second Stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode. There is no timeout from First to Second Stage.

• Alert/Evac: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Evacuation mode and all other bells on the panel in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot



• Staged: The 1st alarm will activate selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or

Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the selected bells are switched to Evacuation mode and the next bells, ie the ones with the next higher number, are activated in Alert mode. This sequence is repeated until all bells are in

Evacuation mode. When the highest numbered bell circuit switches to Evacuation mode, all bell and strobe circuits on the panel will be turned on in Evacuation mode. For example, if the alarm activates Bells 1 and 4, after the NAK timeout, Bells 1 and 4 are switched to

Evacuation mode and Bells 2 and 5 are set to Alert mode. A 2nd alarm will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.

Notes:

1.

Bells must be assigned consecutive bells circuits with no Releasers assigned in between Bells. For example: circuits 1, 2, 3, 4 can be assigned as Bells but not circuits

1, 2, 4, 5 with circuit 3 a Releaser.

2.

Control modules cannot be programmed as bell or strobe if the Staged Bell system is used.

Subsequent Alarm controls how Alert, Evac and Alert/Evac type bell systems behave when a new alarm is received while one is still active. 1st Stage has the panel repeat the First Stage operation.

2nd Stage has the panel go immediately to Second Stage operation.

Resound controls how the panels handle the automatic resounding of silenced bells when a new alarm is received. There are two modes:

• Local: Each panel will resound only its own silenced bells when a new alarm is received.

This would be used when panels in a network are in different buildings, such as a campus.

• Global: All panels in a network will resound silenced bells when a new alarm condition is received on any panel in the network. This is used when the panels are all in the same building, such as a large plant.

Evac controls whether the bell system Evacuation Mode sounds Steady (continuously) or uses a

Temporal pattern as specified in ANSI S3.41 and ISO 8201 Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal .

The pattern used ½s On, ½s Off, ½s On, ½s Off, ½s On, 1½s Off repeated.

Waterflow controls if bells can be silenced if they are started by a waterflow type input. If Non-

Silenceable is chosen, bell circuits activated by a waterflow input cannot be silenced until the device has restored.

Language chooses English (default), French or Hungarian characters to be used in messages.

See Appendix C Languages of the Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for a description of the letters supported and the method of entering them.

Alarm List Sequence controls which end of the Alarm List is shown automatically. If First is chosen, the first (oldest) item in the alarm list will be shown. If Last is chosen, the last (newest) item in the alarm list is shown. Regardless of order, alarms always take precedence in being shown. Another way to think of it is that First shows where the fire started while Last shows where the fire has gotten to.

11


Disconnects controls which panels the Signal Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Releaser Disconnect and Common Disconnect hot keys affect.

• Local: The Disconnect hot keys affect only the panel they are on.

• Global: The Disconnect hot keys affect all the panels in the network. This means that if a

Disconnect key is pressed on any panel, all panels in the system will be affected.

The System Message is a text entry box for defining a message used to identify the system. The message is three lines by twenty characters long. It is printed at the top of printouts and shown on some service terminal screens, but only seen on the LCD in the STATUS/IDENTIFICATION menu.



The Enforce Local LED Rules check box forces an LED on an input's panel be related. Normally an LED anywhere in the system is all that is required. Note: The common LEDs of any panel are based upon the zone LEDs that are displayed by the panel, not based upon the inputs to the panel.

The Allow Complex Releaser Definitions check box enables extended functionality of releaser circuits and control modules programmed for releasing. This allows for Fast (no delay) operation of a releaser and for AND function using A and B side inputs to a releaser. See section 1.4 Releaser

Programming for details.

The Enforce Group Association checking check box enables MHI to check to see if a group association has been included in the relates of inputs. This option must be enabled when using an

MR-2806-MR Dialer.

The Observe Daylight Savings Time check box enables or disables the automatic changing of the clock for Daylight Savings Time. If enabled, the system will move 1 hour ahead the first Sunday of


The Pre-alarm Buzzer , when enabled, will cause a tone to sound when a smoke detector circuit is in the auto-verify process or an addressable device is in alarm during the Retard period. The tone used is a triple beep every second.

Master ID defines which panel in a network will act as the Master panel. Only control panels may be chosen as the Master panel. The Master panel synchronizes the date and time on all panels and annunciators at 3:30am everyday.

Alarm List Mode sets the way the Alarm List messages are displayed on fire panels in the system.

Annunciators will always receive messages as marked in the database. There are three modes of displaying messages:

• Local: Each fire panel shows only Alarm List entries that are for that panel only.

• Global: Each fire panel shows Alarm List entries for itself and all other panels and annunciators.

• Master: The master fire panel shows the Alarm List entries for all panels and annunciators while all other fire panels show only their own Alarm List entries.

Common Relays controls what signals affect the common alarm, common supervisory and common trouble relays of each panel. The are two settings:

• Local: The common relays of a panel follow the events of events on that panel only.

• follow Alarm List Mode: The common relays of a panel will react to both events of the panel and any events listed in its Alarm List.

12



• Exit: Closes the System Window and, if editing, saves the database. At this time, a requester will ask if the database should be Verified. A database has to verify without errors before it can be downloaded.

• Panels: Displays the Panel Window. If the system has no panels defined, the Add Panel

Box is displayed to obtain the first control panel for the system.

• Switches: Displays the Switches Window. This window determines which devices are attached to the switches and the timers associated to each switch. See section 2.3 for the

Switches Window .


See section 2.4 for the Groups Window .



• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section Verify of the Modul-R Human




The Switches Window (see

Figure 6 ) allows for the setting of the On/Off (Day/

Night) switches. There are

16 system wide switches available. All panels in the network will keep track of its portion of the devices related to each switch.

Relays, LEDs and control modules will follow the On/

Off state of the switch they are related to. Addressable sensors will use Day sensitivity while the switch is on and Night sensitivity while the switch is off. The timers are used to have the

Figure 6: Switches Window switch change state at set times each day. Switches can also be operated manually at the panel. If the Switch is associated to a Hot Key, the Hot Key will then operate the switches. Changing a switch manually at one panel will affect all panels in the network.

Notes:

1.

Each addressable detector can only be related to a single switch.

2.

Relays, LEDs and control modules controlled by more than one switch will stay on as long as any switch operating them is on.

The title bar of the window will always list the currently highlighted switch.The Switches Table shows all 16 possible switches and highlights the current one. Select any one to make it the current switch. List entries will show the message RELATES FOUND for switches that have related devices.

13


The HH:MM (Timer) entries control the times that the switch will change state. An even number of times must be entered, ie. each on must have a corresponding off. All times are entered using 24 hour notation, eg: one minute after midnight=0:01, noon=12:00, 3 PM=15:00, 4 AM=4:00, etc. A time of 0:00 is considered as not used. If an action at midnight is desired set the time to 0:01, one minute after midnight; or 23:59, a minute before midnight. MHI will sort the times into ascending order after the Switches Window is closed.


The on and off indication beside each time entry will change to reflect what each time in the sorted list will do.

Use switch as Custom Hot Key allows the switch to be manually controlled by the Hot Keys. A hot key can be assigned to turn the switch on and another to turn it off. These keys will be marked as

HK in the Switches Table.


Hot Keys.


• Exit: Close the Switches Window and return to the System Window.

• Reset: This will remove all relates and all times for the currently highlighted switch.

• Relate: Shows the Relate Window. Items marked *on* will be operated/controlled by the switch.

• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 for Map Window of the





The Groups Window (see

Figure 7 ) is used for creating and editing the

Groups of relates. The Title

Bar will show the current group.

This dialog allows you to setup "Groups" which are composed of a text description/message and relates. Groups are a method of establishing zone representations. They are also used to program zone information for the Dialler

(see the Zone Data section).

A zone representation may include a message and/or a

Figure 7: Groups Window group of Relates. Inputs (ie. circuits and/or devices) may relate to a Group or number of Groups and thus acquire all Relates that are referenced by them. Inputs can also adopt a Group message.

Making a change to a Group will affect all inputs (circuits and devices) related to the Group. This feature can significantly speed up the creation of medium to large size systems as well as simplify changes. Up to 250 groups may be defined.

14


The use of Groups greatly simplifies the changes made to a database. For example, if a new door is installed that has to be unlocked during a fire alarm, the control module that unlocks the door is simply added to a Group. This single change is then automatically picked up by any inputs that are related to the Group. Since this number could be hundreds, the use of the Groups makes databases easier to maintain and decreases the likelihood of mistakes when items are added.

Note: Though any relationship can be selected for inclusion into a group, an input that references the group must be able to accommodate the group’s relates. For example, if a group includes relates to Bell or Strobe output, associating this group to a Supervisory type input will generate an error during verification because this type of input cannot operate Bells or Strobes. It may be advantageous to separate groups in these cases.

The Group List shows all the defined groups along with their message (if any) and if there are any relates defined for the group. The current group will be highlighted. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another group.

The Message/Description allows you to enter a message describing the Group. You are allowed space for 3 lines by 20 characters. If desired, this message may be adopted by a circuit or device by checking the Use Grp Msg check-box and specifying this Group ID.




1 and 250. There is no need for the groups to be sequentially numbered or to start at 1.

• Delete Group: This will remove the group from the list. You will be asked if you want to have references to the group automatically removed.

• Reset Group: This will remove all relates for the currently highlighted group.

• Change ID: This allows the group ID to be changed. MHI will automatically change all references to use the new ID. A gauge will be displayed to show the progress of the change.

• Relate: Shows the Relate Window. Items marked *on* will be operated by inputs related to the group.

• Copy Relates: Copies the relates and/or message from an input point to the current group (see Figure 23 ). The values of the panel, circuit and device are required. Most conventional circuits use a device number of 0 (zero). Press Copy to copy the information.

• Map: Displays and updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the Modul-

R Human Interface Database Editor .

• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, you will be given the option to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R Human Interface Database

Editor .

15



The Panel Window (see Figure 8 ) allows editing of all panel level options. It defines the hardware mounted in the panel and the functionality of the programmable outputs. The programming controls provided will change to reflect the capabilities of the currently selected panel. The Title

Bar will describe the currently highlighted panel or annunciator.


• Exit: Close the

Panel Window and return to the

System Window.

• Add Panel: Add another panel to the system. A dialog box will be displayed. The default options are to use the next available panel ID and to select an

MR-2900 panel.

You will also be asked if you want

Figure 8: Panel Window

MHI to automatically set the Next ID. If allowed, this panel will have the next higher numbered panel as its Next ID and the panel with the next lower number will be set to have this panel as its Next ID. If the new panel is the highest numbered panel, it will use the lowest numbered panel as its Next ID.

• Delete: Remove the current panel from the system. All programming for that panel will be lost. Any of the panel's outputs that are referenced will become invalid and will be removed by the next verify.

• Input Circuits: Display the Circuits Window. See section 2.6

• Internal Circuits: Display the Internal Circuit Window. See section 2.7.


• Change Type: Displays a dialog box to change the type of the current panel. This makes it easier to correct mistakes when creating a database and to update the database if a panel type is changed in the field. Only certain type changes are allowed.

Note: This can have far reaching effects on a system. Any information that is no longer valid with the new panel type will be lost.

• Change ID: Displays a dialog box for changing the ID of the current panel. MHI will automatically change all references to use the new ID. This process could take a long time for a large database. A gauge will be displayed to show the progress of the change.



• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, you will be given the option to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R Human Interface Database

Editor.

The Panel List is located in the top left corner of the window. It lists all the panels, both Control and

Annunciator, that are defined in the system. The highlighted entry in the List is the one that is currently being edited. Its description is also shown in the title bar of the Panel Window. If a

16

MR-2900 Programming Manual different panel is selected, all the controls in the window will change to reflect this. Use the

<Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another panel.

The Message is located to the right of the Panel List. This is a 3 line by 20 character message that is associated with the Panel. This message will be displayed in Alarm Lists with signals that are generated by this panel. It will also be included in any print-outs generated by the Master Panel of the system. This message should include enough information that it will identify the panel and its location to fire or service personnel.


Outputs Dialog (see the Outputs Dialog section) which allows for the programming of the Outputs and the relays.

The Options button displays the Options Dialog (see the Options Dialog section). This allows for the programming of the various panel options, such as Hot Keys, bell timers, etc.

The Next ID is located to the left of the push buttons at the top of the Panel Window. It is not displayed for single panel systems. It is used to define the ID of the next panel in the network loop.

Specify the panel ID of the panel to be connected to the COM 1 terminals of the current panel. See

Links for notes on programming systems that contain MR-2914 Annunciators or single-port

MR-2944, MR-2934 or MR-2924 Annunciators. Note: For MR-2924 Annunciators, this value is used by the Verify only. Each MR-2924 must be field programmed with the correct Next ID.

Links is used to enter the IDs of single port annunciators that are connected to COM 1 of the

MR-2900 panel. Any of the following can be used in this manner, the MR-2914, or the MR-2944,

MR-2934 or MR-2924 (with one comport disabled). These annunciators do not reside in the network loop, but are branches off of it.

Port 3 Connect sets the purpose of the Port 3 general communications port. If the operating program loaded does not support the selected setting, a wrong port 3 program trouble will be generated by the panel. The options are:

• none: Port 3 is not used.

• Digital Protocol 1: Sets Port 3 to use the old protocol to the SE 2000.

• Digital Protocol 2: Sets Port 3 to use the new protocol to the SE 2000.

• PC Connect: Sets Port 3 to use the GRID program interface.

• Voice Evac. System: Sets Port 3 to communicate with the MV-2700 voice evacuation panel.

• Annunciator Connect: Sets Port 3 to communicate with the Dialler, MR-2614 or MR-

2644 annunciators, or city tie module.

The MR2614 Connect is marked to enable supervision of an MR2614 annunciator. You can select the number of LEDs, up to 72 zones, which are considered an extension of the panel itself.

Choose the number of LED zones using the Local Ann. LED Cnt drop down box. This means that

MR-2900 panels will display up to 96 zones instead of 24, with zones 25 to 96 being zones 1 to 72 of the annunciator. Though up to eight MR-2614s can be attached to the panel, each one will show the same information.

17


The IDs button displays all possible IDs of the MR-2614 and MR-

2644 annunciators (see Figure 9 ) as well as the MR-2801B-MR and Dialler. Check the IDs that will be connected to the system. If the MR2614 Connect box is checked, IDs for MR-2614 annunciators must also be checked. When the MR-2806-MR is enabled, a button will appear next to that option called Dialer

Settings (see the section on Dialer Options for a description of the dialer options).

Hot Key Routing is a set of radio buttons for setting the other panels or annunciators to be controlled by the current panel. To have no other panels affected by the current panel, mark Local .

To have the current panel affect all other panels on the network, mark Global . To choose only some panels, mark Custom . A text entry box entitled route panel ids is then displayed. Enter the

Figure 9: IDs

Supervised panel IDs to be controlled separated by commas, eg. “2, 3, 4".

Each ID listed will receive Hot Key commands from the current panel whenever its Hot Keys are pressed.

Note: MR-2924 and MR-2914 annunciators do not use this setting. They are field programmed.

Annunciators have the following unique controls for programming (see

Figure 10 ).

The LCD check box is located immediately left of the buttons. It indicates whether or not the annunciator has an alphanumeric LCD. This setting is used by MHI only to determine if the Message

Receive check box should be shown for the annunciator in the Relate

Window. This value is not sent to the annunciator.


LED Count is located directly below the LCD check box. This defines the number of LED zones the annunciator will be using. A count of zero will disable the Hot LEDs and Common LED.


LED zones the annunciator will use for internal functions. Any of the zones can be chosen with the requirement that there are four consecutive zones available. Entering a zone of 0 will disable the hot key zones. These will reflect the current status of the annunciator and the panel(s) it sends commands to.

18



Zone n alarm: Acknowledge available Zone n+2 alarm: 2nd Stage Inhibit available

Zone n supervisory: Reset available (green) Zone n+2 supervisory Future use

Zone n trouble: Reset available (yellow)

Zone n+1 alarm: Signal Silence active

Zone n+2 trouble Future use

Zone n+3 alarm Future use



Zone n+3 supervisory Future use

Zone n+3 trouble Power On

Notes:

1.

The Power On LED refers to the 24 VDC to the annunciator, not to any AC source.

2.

MR-2924 and MR-2914 annunciators must be field programmed to have a Hot LED.

Common LED is located directly below the Hot LED setting. This is the LED zone the annunciator will use for common alarm, supervisory and trouble indication. It is a summation of the zone LEDs of the annunciator. Any LED zone may be used. The zone chosen will not be available for general annunciation. Entering a zone of 0 will disable the common zone. Note: MR-2924 and MR-2914 annunciators must be field programmed to have a Common LED.

Ports is located below the Common LED setting. It is not displayed for MR-2914 Annunciators.

This option enables (double) or disables (single) the COM 1 network port. If both ports are enabled, the Next ID text box will become available (see above for a description of Next ID ).

Note: MR-2924 Annunciators must be field programmed for COM 1 port operation.

Outputs Dialog

The Outputs Dialog (see Figure

11 ) allows for the programming of the panel’s outputs and function relays.

The Outputs section is a list box that is used to select the output to program. Once the output is selected, it is programmable for the following output types:

• Bell: This is a standard signalling circuit. It sounds in Alert or Evacuation mode as required. It does not sound codes.

• Strobe: This signalling circuit for use with strobes. They are non-

Figure 11: Output Dialog silenceable and will be turned on continuously for both Alert and Evacuation mode operation. Strobe circuits cannot be silenced until the system is reset (unless the Strobe

Duration timer is programmed – see the Options Dialog section for Strobe Duration ).

• Coded Bell: This signalling circuit will sound out the code for any input that operates it and then silence. It does not sound in Alert or Evacuation mode.

• Continuous Releaser (C. Releaser): This type of releaser remains on until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then turned off after the Delay until the panel is reset. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds. Warning: Continuous releasers are also turned off when there is an AC power fail or when the panel is in its power up cycle.

19


• Momentary Releaser (M. Releaser): This type of releaser is inactive until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then not activated until after the

Delay time. The releaser is turned off after the Duration time, or the activating zone and panel are reset. Momentary releasers function normally during an AC power fail. The

Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds and the Duration can be up to 1800 seconds. 1800 seconds is 30 minutes. A Duration of zero (0) will cause the releaser to stay on until it is reset.

Note: Releaser type circuits can only be activated by inputs on the same panel.

• Auxiliary Power (AuxPwr): This turns on the Output continuously to supply power for auxiliary devices, such as annunciators. If a Duration time is given for the Auxiliary Power circuit, the circuit will be powered off for that number of seconds (from 1 to 30) when the panel Reset key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing. This allows for the reset of 4 wire detectors. A duration time of 0 prevents this operation. Auxiliary Power circuits will be turned off by the panel while it is in its power up cycle.

• Follow Supervisory (follow Supv): The output will sound when there is any supervisory condition present on the panel. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the circuit.

• Follow Trouble (follow Trbl): The output will sound when there is any trouble condition present on the panel. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the circuit.

The Output Class drop down box is for MR-2900 (mb2931) and MR-2900 (mb2921) panels only.

This selects whether there are eight Class B outputs (MR-2926 Terminal Board) or four Class A outputs (MR-2925 Terminal Board).


Relay Duration affects the time the relay is activated. For relays operated from inputs, it is the minimum time the relay will operate. The relay must stay on for this length of time before it can be reset. This is for equipment that must remain off a length of time before it can be started up again.


(zero), then the relay will activate for the duration time when the Reset hot key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing. The duration can be from 0 to 300 seconds (5 minutes).

Options Dialog

The Options Dialog (see

Figure 12 ) allows for the programming of the panel and annunciator options. These settings will affect the current panel only.

Buzzer Mode sets when the panel buzzer will sound.

Normal causes the buzzer to sound for supervisory and trouble conditions. All causes the buzzer to sound for all conditions. MR-2934, MR-

2924 and MR-2914

Annunciators always use All .

to meet NFPA 72 requirements, section 1-5.4.7

you must choose All .

Figure 12: Options Dialog

20


Bypass Priv.

sets the privilege level required to set circuit and device bypasses, and manual control of relays, control modules and switches. This privilege can be set to Level 2 (default) or

Level 1.


Banner Mode dictates what the top line of the Main Menu of the LCD will be. There are four modes of operation:


NORMAL.




The AC Fail is the delay before the panel will report that it has lost AC power. The panel itself will go into AC Fail mode to conserve power immediately upon losing AC. This delay is the length of time before the panel generates the trouble condition. This can be set from 0 to 1800 minutes (30 hours). If a time of 0 minutes is entered, the panel will use a 10 second delay. Note: Most installations will require a time of 1 minute (default) to meet required codes and standards. For panels connected to UL listed monitoring stations, normally a time of 6 to 12 hours (360 to 720 minutes) is required.

Fan Delay sets the number of scans between the reset of each Control Module (relay) on an addressable circuit. This allows for the staggered restart of fans when the system is reset. This option can be enabled or disabled on each addressable circuit as required. It has no affect on


Bell Inhibit is the length of time the bells must sound before they can be silenced. This time can be from 0 to 120 seconds. Coded bells will always sound out their complete code and then stop.

Bell Timeout is the length of time the panel will stay in First Stage operation before automatically progressing to Second Stage. This can be set from 2 to 10 minutes. Most codes do not allow this time to exceed 5 minutes. Check with local codes and the authority having jurisdiction for the allowable limits for this time. Both the Second Stage Inhibit and Signal Silence will prevent this timeout from occurring.

Bell Cutoff is the length of time the bells will sound before they are automatically silenced by the panel. A time of 0 disables this feature. The cutoff can be set from 5 to 30 minutes. If the cutoff is used, it must be longer than the Bell Timeout .

Coded Bell Speed sets the time interval between the bits of the codes. This speed can be 1, ¾, ½ or ¼ second. The time between digits is three times this speed. The time between rounds is seven times this speed.

Maintenance Margin sets the gap between the maintenance threshold and the alarm threshold for addressable sensors. If the sensor stays between these two values for the Maintenance Retard time, the panel will report a Maintenance Alert trouble for the sensor. The margin can be set from 0 to 500, with 0 giving no warning and 500 giving the earliest warning.


3.5 to 4 seconds.

Smoke Detector Reset Time sets the time the MR-2900 will power off conventional 2-wire smoke detectors to reset them. This time can be from 1 to 20 seconds. Current smoke detectors only need the default value of 1 second. Older smoke detectors may need a longer time to reset.

21


Strobe Duration Time sets the time that strobe circuits will operate when activated when operated along with coded bells. The timer starts when the coded bells start. At the end of the timer, the strobes are silenced. A time of 0 (zero) disables the automatic silence. This value can be from 10 to 510 seconds.

Enable Disconnect & Test Timeout enables or disables disconnect timeouts. If the timeouts are disabled, Relay Disconnect, Releaser Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect and

Test Mode must all be manually ended. If enabled, these functions will be automatically ended after four hours.

Trbl/Supv Output Auto Silence enables or disables the automatic silencing of the Follow Trouble and Follow Supervisory outputs during a fire condition. If enabled, the Follow Trouble and Follow

Supervisory outputs will automatically sound again once the fire bells and strobes have been silenced.

Suppress Missing Signals allows for the suppression of device missing signals for a loop that has a short or ground fault condition. If enabled, the panel will only report the short or ground fault condition, but not the missing device messages. Note: This feature requires that the BRK program be dated 9 September 1999 or later (version 17.20 or later).

Hot Keys are a set of drop down boxes that control the functions of the operator keys on the front of the panel. There are 2 keys, each with yellow and green LED (some keys may have red instead of yellow LEDs). The LEDs are used to display function status. There are fixed placement function keys as shown in Figure 14 . The default layout is shown in Figure 13 . The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid (unavailable) key is pressed. The panel will record every key press in the history.

Figure 13: Default Key Assignments Figure 14: Fixed Key Assignments

22



Key Action


Signal

Silence



System

Reset

Second

Stage Inhibit


• The green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset.

• The yellow LED flashes when there are conventional smoke detector circuits in alarm, or there is a ground fault.



Notes:

1.


2.


3.





Fire Drill

Lamp Test

Releaser

Disconnect


Fire Drill. The yellow LED will flash while the Fire Drill is happening. The Fire Drill cannot be performed if the bells are already activated, or if AC power is off. The

Fire Drill is automatically ended if an alarm condition occurs.

Flashes the panel LEDs in sequence starting with the zone alarm LEDs. Press

Lamp Test repeatedly to cycle through the zone supervisory LEDs, zone trouble

LEDs, system LEDs, and Lamp Test Off.

Causes the releaser circuits to ignore any new alarms. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the releasers are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press again to restore normal operation.

The yellow LED will flash while active. If no releasers can be disconnected,

Releaser Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or

1.

23


Key

Relay

Disconnect

Test Mode

Signal

Disconnect

Common

Disconnect

General

Alarm

Halt

Action

Causes the function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms. Press again to restore normal operation. The yellow LED will flash while active. If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing.

This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

Places panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The yellow LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. It follows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI). During test mode, the remote annunciator zone LEDs becomes non-latching for the zone(s) under test. The common indicators, bells, relays and releasers are not activated and no commands are sent to other units and no signal is sent out of Port 3. Test signals can be archived or not as required.


LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter> key selects the item. Then select INITIATING CIRCUITS for MR1 programs, or ADDRESSABLE or

CONVENTIONAL for MR2 programs. Then select TEST. For conventional circuits, each zone will then be presented in turn for selection. Select either TEST or

NORMAL. For addressable devices, enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear> will return to the previous menu. While in Test Mode, any conventional smoke detectors activated on the test circuits will be automatically reset after 30 seconds.



Disables sounding of the bells. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the bells are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press Signal Disconnect again to re-enable the bells. The yellow LED will flash while the bells are disabled. Signal Disconnect is not available if the bells are already activated. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

Disables the relays or a City Tie Module (MRCTYB). When a MRCTYB module is disconnected, a trouble will be reported to the city and then any subsequent signals will not be reported until the card is re-enabled. When the relays are disabled, the yellow LED flashes. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.




24


Key

Switch

Switch n n

On

Off

Action




Manual

Restart



The 1 st

, 2 nd

and 3 rd

Telephone Numbers can be up to 32 digits. Special digits may be used to perform the following functions:



• HEX (D)-forces the panel to search for dial tone



The 1 st

and 2 nd

Account Codes identify the system to the central station when a communication is sent. The code can be

Figure 15: Dialer Settings programmed for up to four digits. The first and third telephone number transmit the first account code. The second telephone number transmits the second account code.

The 1 st

and 2 nd

Format setting affects the type of communication that the dialer sends to the central station. There are seven formats available including 4 BPS formats, Contact ID, SIA and a pager format.



• Configuration 1: Display the Dialer Configuration 1 screen.


• Zone Data: Display the Zone Data screen.

• Maintenance/Common: Display the Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes screen.

25


Dialer Configuration 1

The Dialer Configuration 1 dialog

(see Figure 16 ) contains the First

Communicator Options, Second

Communicator Options and

International Options.

The Communications option determines if the dialer will communicate to the central station.

When Enabled is selected, the dialer will communicate all events as programmed. When Disabled is selected, the dialer will not communicate any events.




Dialing Enabled is selected, the dialer switches between the first and third numbers after each dialing attempt, until the maximum number of dialing attempts have been made to each number.

When Third Number Backup is enabled, the dialer will use the third number only if all attempts to communicate to the first number fail. If all attempts to communicate to the third number also fail, a failure to communicate trouble will be generated. When Disabled is selected, the third telephone number is not used.

The Dialing option has three different options for pulse or DTMF dialing. If All attempts Pulse is selected, the dialer will always use pulse (rotary) dialing. If All attempts DTMF Dialing is selected, the dialer will always use DTMF dialing. If 4 attempts DTMF then Pulse is selected, the dialer will use DTMF dialing for the first four attempts. If unsuccessful, the dialer will switch to pulse dialing for the remaining attempts.

The SIA Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send automatic reporting codes, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic SIA Reporting Codes.



The Contact ID Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send automatic reporting codes, or use the values that are programmed in the Zone Data and Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic Contact ID Reporting Codes.

The Test Transmission Line option determines how the dialer chooses a telephone line to send the automatic test transmission. If Alternate is selected, the dialer will alternate between using lines 1 and 2 for transmissions, regardless of telephone line troubles. If Available is selected, the dialer will use Line 1 for test transmissions. If a trouble exists on Line 1, the dialer will switch to Line 2.




26


The Pulse Make/Break Ratio option is for panels in international applications. When 40/60 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is the 40/60, and when 33/67 is selected it is 33/67.



Dialer Configuration 2

The Dialer Configuration 2 screen (see Figure 17 ) contains the Swinger Shutdown

Variables, Other Options and

Test Transmission options.

The Swinger Shutdown options determine the maximum number of zone and trouble events that the dialer will transmit in one day. The alarm or trouble will still be displayed on the panel and logged in the archive, but the dialer will not transmit the event. There are individual counters for Zone

Alarm and Restore, Zone

Supervisory and Restore, Zone


Trouble and Restore and Maintenance Trouble and Restore. This feature will be reset at midnight.

To disable the feature, program 000.



The Test Transmission Cycle determines the number of days between test transmissions. This is automatically set so that tests are performed daily and may not be varied.


The Maximum Dialing Attempts to Each Phone Number is the number of attempts that the dialer will make to each telephone number before generating a fail to communicate trouble. The default setting is 5 attempts.


27


Call Directions



There are five different types of events that can each be sent to telephone number one or telephone number two. The event types are Fire Zone Alarm/

Restore, Supervisory Zone Alarm/

Restore, Zone Trouble/Restore,

Maintenance Trouble/Restore and

Test Transmissions.


Zone Data


The Groups List is a list of all currently defined groups. Each line entry includes the Group ID and its message/description.

Click on the desired group in order to program it.






Code






28



Common Reporting Codes dialog (see Figure 20) contains maintenance and common reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate those events.






Figure 20: Circuits Window

2.6

Circuits and Devices Windows

The Circuits Window (see

Figure 21 ) allows for the defining of conventional and addressable input circuits. The Devices

Window (see Figure 22 ) allows for the defining of addressable devices, and for the smoke and contact type inputs of the Smoke

Detector + N/O Contact

Device circuit. These two windows are nearly identical. Most controls on one are found on the other with the few exceptions

Figure 21: Circuits Window noted. The current Circuit or Device is shown in the Title Bar of the window.

The Circuit List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Circuits Window only. This lists any defined circuits for the current panel. Each circuit shows the circuit number, type of circuit and function if applicable. The highlighted circuit is described in the title bar of the

Circuits Window. Unused circuits are shown using three dashes. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another circuit. The <Up> and <Down> Arrow keys change the current circuit. The <Right> and <Left> Arrow keys will change the type of the current circuit. The <Plus> and <Minus> keys will change the function of the current circuit.

The Circuit Type Selector is located below Circuit List on the left hand side. It is shown on the

Circuit Window only. It is a drop down box used to assign the current circuit type. If the circuit is unused, select not assigned. Only options supported by the Input Circuit Modules programmed for the current panel will be assignable.

29


The Device List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Devices Window only. It lists any defined addressable devices for the current addressable circuit, the two entries for a dual end-of-line circuit, and the separate smoke detector and n/o contract device for a Smoke Detector + N/O

Contact circuit. For addressable devices, the type of device and its function are shown for each one. Unused addresses are shown with three dashes. Use the <Backspace> key in order to

Figure 22: Devices Window quickly re-position the current selection to another device. The <Up> and <Down> Arrow keys change the current device. The <Right> and <Left Arrow> keys will change the type of the current device. The <Plus> and <Minus> keys will change the function of the current device.

Note: Both devices listed for Dual end-of-line and Smoke Detector + N/O Contact circuits must be defined.


Device Window only. It is used to assign the current device type. For addressable circuits, it displays sensors for addresses 1 to 99 and modules for addresses 101 to 199. If the address is unused, select not assigned. The following module types are available:


M503M modules.


• Control (supervising): This programs the MRI-M500S as a generic signalling circuit. It can be turned on by alarm or supervisory inputs. It will remain on until the system is reset.


• Control (Bell): This programs the MRI-M500S as a standard signalling circuit. It will turn on continuously when activated by an alarm. It will turn off when Signal Silence is pressed.

It does not sound codes.

• Control (Strobe): This programs the MRI-M500S as a signalling circuit for use with strobes. It will be turned on continuously for both Alert and Evacuation mode operation until the system is reset (unless the strobe duration is programmed – see the Options

Dialog section for Strobe Duration ).

• Control (C-Releaser): This programs the MRI-M500S as a continuous releaser. It will remain on until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. After the Delay, the releaser is turned off until the panel is reset. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds.

• Control (M-Releaser): This programs the MRI-M500S as a momentary releaser. It is inactive until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. After the Delay , the releaser is activated. The releaser is turned off after the Duration time, or the activating zone and panel are reset. Momentary releasers function normally during an AC power fail.

The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds and the Duration can be up to 1800 seconds.

1800 seconds is 30 minutes. A Duration of zero (0) will cause the releaser to stay on until it is reset.

The Function Type Selector is used to program the function of the current input point. The following function types are available:

30





• Waterflow: This is a fire input similar to Alarm except that it displays **WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List. Bell circuits can be made non-silenceable for waterflow type inputs (see section 2.2 System Window ).


Valve Closed, etc.

• Halt: This causes the related releaser outputs to not operate. The supervisory LED will be turned on by activation of this type of input. See section 1.4 Releaser Programming .








The Message is located in the middle of the top of the window. This 3 line by 20 character text message is displayed or printed for all signals originating from the current input point. Circuit types that use devices will have a default message created for them when defined. This message can be changed.

The Use Grp Msg check box is used if the input point is to use a group message. A text entry box will appear when the box is checked. Enter the ID of the group message to be used. Only one ID can be entered. If a group message is being used, it will be displayed in the Message area, but the message cannot be altered.

There are a number of options that can be used for each input circuit or device. Not all options apply to all inputs. MHI will only show those options that are currently usable. The following options are available:

• Retard: This is the amount of time the input must stay in an alarm state before it is treated as a valid alarm. This option is not valid with Pull Station function type inputs nor for

Conventional Smoke Detector inputs. Conventional circuits are programmed for seconds of delay time. Addressable devices are programmed for a number of additional consecutive scans that must be in alarm before the panel will accept the alarm. The duration of a scan varies between 2.5 and 5 seconds. Note: It is the responsibility of the person writing the database to ensure that the retard time chosen does not exceed any limits allowed by code.

It is possible to generate long retard times that are in the two to three minute range if a large number of scans is chosen. For example, UL states that the system cannot take more than 50 seconds to report a waterflow condition.

One has to ensure that the total delay of the waterflow detector and the input combined does not exceed 50 seconds.

• Verify: Select to have Conventional Smoke Detector inputs verified. Verification causes the smoke detector to be reset. If the detector goes into alarm again within the verification time, the alarm is considered valid.

• Enable Fan Delay: Controls the staggered turning off of Control Modules (relay). If checked, Control Modules (relay) on this circuit will be turned off in sequence, from the lowest address to the highest address, at a rate set by the Fan Delay option in the Panel

31


Options Dialog, when Reset is pressed on the panel. The operation of Control Modules



Maintenance Alert disabled to limit nuisance troubles. Standard room temperature (20°C) will not cause a Maintenance Alert on a heat detector.

• Code Bells: Checking this option will cause only selected coded bells to sound coded signals

1

. If coded bells are used the following options are then also shown:

-- No Restore: If checked, the panel will not sound the Code again when the input restores. If not checked, the panel will sound a single round of the Code when the input restores

-- Code: This is the sequence that will be sounded when an alarm is received on this input. It can be up to 4 digits long. Hexadecimal digits are used, thus each digit can be from 1 to F, where A=10, B=11, C=12, D=13, E=14 and F=15.

-- Round: This is the number of times the Code will be repeated. It can be between 1 and

4 times for no restore inputs, and between 2 and 4 for restore inputs.

• Night Sens.

and Day Sens.: Selects the Alarm threshold sensitivity for addressable smoke sensors. Heat sensors always use Normal sensitivity. Increased sensitivity will cause alarms at lower levels of smoke. Sensors not attached to a switch always use the

Night Sensitivity. Sensors attached to a switch will use Night Sensitivity while the switch is

Off and Day Sensitivity while the switch is On. Night Sensitivity must always be equal to or more sensitive than the Day Sensitivity.


Reset but by Manual Restart . Use of this option will require that there be a Manual Restart function key assigned to the panel.




• Copy: Copies the circuit/device information, relates and message from another input to the current input

(see Figure 23 ). The current input does not have to be defined. Relates cannot be copied between conventional and addressable input points. The

Panel ID, Circuit ID and Device ID (not always shown) list the circuit/device to be copied from.

Marking Transfer Main Definition will copy the listed circuit/device type and function to the current circuit/ device. Note: Not all inputs can be copied to all other possible inputs. Marking Transfer Relates will copy the relates from the listed circuit/device relates to the current one. This may cause some invalid relates. Marking Transfer Message will cause the message to be copied. Marking Transfer Devices (if shown) will copy any device definitions that the listed

Figure 23: Copy Dialog

Box circuit contains. These devices will copy messages and relates as based on those settings above.

1. Regular bells will only sound their respective Alert or Evac tones regardless of the settings chosen in this area.

32


There is no check at this time as to the validity of the values copied. Unexpected results can occur if care is not taken.

For each database that is created, a warning about using copy is shown. Marking the check box in the warning will stop the box from appearing again for the database.

This option can help speed up the creation of a database. By completely defining one input, these values can be copied to all other inputs, making any minor changes that are required after the copy.

• Relate or Trbl Relate: Opens the Relate Window for the current circuit or device. This allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, relays and control modules to be operated when the input goes into alarm. The Relate button will display all output types that are available depending on the function type of the input. The Trbl Relate button will display only LEDs that can be related. Note: All panel outputs and control modules to be operated must be defined before they can be included in the relates of an input.






The Internal Circuits Window (see

Figure 24 ) allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, etc. for the various internal circuits (functions) of the

Control Panel. Internal circuits 0, 72,

73, 74, 75, 81, 82, and 96 are fire alarm functions while all others are trouble functions. All internal circuits have specific meanings and are stored in the archive of the panel. MR-2944 and

MR-2934 annunciators only use internal circuits 51 and 52. See

Appendix 45) Condition Codes and

Zone Numbers for a list of all the internal circuits.


Figure 24: Internal Circuits Window

• Internal Circuit 0, General

Alarm : This is the General Alarm function. General Alarm can be received from an annunciator or from an SE 2000. It can be assigned to one of the Hot Keys of control panels. General Alarm causes all the bells and strobes on the panel to operate in

Evacuation mode. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require operation are programmed using the Relate button.





• Internal Circuit 71, Network Ground Fault : This indicates one of the COM1 wires is shorted to ground.

• Internal Circuit 81, 1st Stage Alarm: This circuit is activated if the bells and strobes are activated in first stage by an alarm input. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require

33

MR-2900 Programming Manual operation are programmed using the Relate button. If the bells have been disconnected on the panel, this circuit will not be generated.

• Internal Circuit 82, 2nd Stage Alarm: This circuit is activated if the bells and strobes are activated in the second stage mode by an alarm input or by a time-out. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require operation are programmed using the Relate button. If the bells have been disconnected on the panel, this circuit will not be generated.

• Internal Circuit 96, Fire Pre-alarm: This circuit is activated by any smoke detector in the auto-verify process or addressable device in alarm during the Retard period. It can be related to an LED to give a visual indication that an alarm is in the verification process.


LED on the panel. This circuit is used to annunciate common trouble conditions at a remote location. This circuit is not tripped by troubles generated by input circuits or addressable devices. This circuit is not recorded in the archive of the panel.

The Internal Circuits List displays all of the internal circuits for the current Control Panel. Each line includes the internal circuit number, its description and if relates have been assigned.

Warning: Some of the internal circuits (eg. checksum) do not have restore signals associated with them. They generally relate to a condition that requires either service work or a reboot of the panel.

Any relates assigned to such an internal circuit will have no way to be reset short of re-booting the entire network.

List Entries: This is a set of radio buttons for a new feature that allows the user to control the information displayed. Relevant lists only items applicable to version 20. All lists all possible items so that relates made on previous versions may be removed.






Figure 16 ). The values of the panel and circuit are required. Press Copy to copy the information. If the function type of the two circuits is different, a requester is presented to confirm the copy.





34



The Relate Window (see Figure

25 ) allows for the relating of inputs, switches and groups to outputs, LEDs, relays, etc. These relationships are used by the panel to determine which outputs to operate for alarm and trouble states. Inputs can operate bells/ strobes, LEDs, relays, control modules on any panel in the system and continuous/ momentary releasers on the same panel. Switches can operate relays, LEDs, control modules on any panel in the system and control the day/night sensitivity

Figure 25: Relate Window change of any addressable detector on any panel. The title bar describes the current input point/switch/group and current output panel or annunciator.




Control and Annunciator, that are defined in the system along with their panel message. The highlighted entry in the list is the one that is being related to by the current input. When a different panel is selected, all the controls in the window will change to reflect this. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another panel.

The Outputs List shows the programmable outputs of the panel. It is not shown for annunciators. It lists all outputs, along with their definition and current state. The states are *on* for selected, blank for not selected, act if they are activated by default, and n/a for not available. A blank definition is for unused outputs. Bell and Strobe outputs can only be selected for Fire Alarm type inputs. If



<space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the

<Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another output.

The Relays List shows the general purpose function relays of the panel. It is not shown for annunciators. Each is listed by number and state. The states are *on* for selected and blank for not selected. Use the <space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another relay.

The LEDs List shows the LED zones available on the panel or annunciator. This will not be shown if the panel has no LEDs. Each is listed by number and state. The states are *on* for selected, blank for not selected and n/a for not available. Use the <space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another LED. The actual number of LED zones varies depending upon the panel or annunciator.

The Device List shows the addressable devices that can be related to the current point. For system inputs and groups, it is displayed only if there are any control or relay modules defined for

35

MR-2900 Programming Manual the panel; for switches, it is displayed if there are any addressable detectors, or any control or relay modules defined. Each entry shows the devices’s address (panel. circuit.device), its state and its device message. The states are *on* for selected and blank for not selected. If Complex

Releasers are enabled, control modules programmed for releasers can have three other states:

Fast which operates the releaser immediately regardless of any delay that is programmed in; *A* or *B* which allow for AND logic. The releaser will not operate until both an A and a B input have been activated. Devices that are not available or are invalid are not shown. Use the <space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections.

The Evac check box is an option for Fire Alarm type inputs only. Selecting this option will cause all

Bells and Strobes for this panel to operate in Second Stage (Evacuation) mode. If selected, Bell and Strobe type outputs for this panel will not be selectable. This will not affect the Bell and Strobe selection of other panels.

The Msg Receive check box is an option for annunciators with LCDs only. If marked, this annunciator will receive messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List. If not marked, the annunciator will not receive messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List.







• View Groups: Displays the Groups Window. This is for reviewing the defined groups. No editing can be done to the groups. To edit the groups, return to the System Window. See section 2.4 Groups Window .

36




A number of items are programmed through the LCD and keypad. This is called the LCD menu. All options are under the PROGRAM option on the Main Menu of the panel. The Main Menu can be recalled to the LCD by pressing <Home> .

Note: The only item that must be programmed from the LCD menu is the Panel ID. This must be done before the database is downloaded.



Level 2 allows programming of almost all system parameters. Higher Privilege Levels are reserved for Secutron's own use and are not discussed here. Certain functions can be assigned to different privilege levels. These functions default to the higher of the two privilege levels.

While programming through the LCD menu, the panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid key is pressed. Programming is done through a series of menus and requester screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information (see Figure 26 ). Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item.

Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press <Enter> to select. In Figure 26 , pressing <Enter> will bring up the Program Menu.

Title

Menu Item

Selected Menu Item

Modul-R by Secutron

12:22

>STATUS

>

PROGRAM

HISTORY<

PASSCODE<

Menu Item

Menu Item

Figure 26: Typical Menu

A menu option of more will display further menu options that do not fit on the current screen. All the screens of a menu will loop around continuously. The default option, ie. the option next to the cursor, is the one to the upper left of the screen. Generally, but not always, more is the default option.

Selector screens (see Figure 27 ) are screens where options are toggled on or off. Options that are on are marked by an asterisk(*) while options that are off are marked with a dash (-). Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press <Enter> to change it.

Move the cursor to OK and press <Enter> to save any changes, or press <Clear> to lose any changes. In Figure 27 , the alarm and trouble relays are selected and the supervisory relay is not selected to be disconnected when the Common Disconnect hotkey is pressed. Pressing <Enter> will cause the alarm relay to be not selected.

Title

Options

Selections

COMMON DISCONNECT

A S T

*

- * OK<

Figure 27: Typical Selector

37


For all screens, <Clear> returns to the previous menu level without changing any information and


3.2 Clock


• Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter> to accept date typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock Menu.

The new date will be sent to all other panels on the Network, if used. All panels will assume this date. The date change will be recorded in the Archive.

• Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter> to accept time typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock Menu. The new time will be sent to all other panels on the Network, if used. All panels will assume this time. If <Enter> is pressed with no time entered, the current time will be sent to all panels on the network. If a change of greater than 5 minutes occurs, the new time will be recorded in the archive.

Notes:

1.

The Master Panel in a network will synchronize all clocks in the network at 03:30 every day, sending both date and time.

2.

Changing the time while the panel is calibrating will abort the calibration.

• Calibrate: Calibrates the clock so that it keeps correct time. Calibration takes 2 to 45 days. Waiting longer will give more accurate results. The panel will function normally while calibrating. When sufficient time has passed, re-selecting this function will ask for the correct time. The calibration will then be reported. In a network, only the master panel needs to be calibrated. Note: Changing the time using the Time option will abort the calibration. If a panel is currently in a calibration, it will ignore time changes sent over the network.

3.3 Common Relays

This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. The menu has the following options:


Disconnect hot key. Selected relays will be marked by an asterisk (*). To change the selection, move the cursor to the desired relay A(larm), S(upervisory) or T(rouble) and press <Enter> to change. Select OK when done. <Clear> will return to Program Menu without making changes.

• Test Inhibit: View or change whether common relays are disconnected during Test Mode or not. <Clear> will return to Program Menu without making changes.

3.4 Switches


These switches can be set to On, Off or Auto. The Auto state only applies to switches that have a timer associated with them. The Auto state allows the switch to follow the timer settings. Any changes made are broadcast to the network so that all panels have the same state. Settings are retained by the panel if it is re-booted and the Master Unit will broadcast its settings to the network upon start up. See section 2.3 Switches Window for information on programming what the switch affects.


• Individual: View or change the status of an individual switch. Each switch will be shown in turn. If a switch has no timer, the Auto option is not shown.

38



• All Auto: Force all switches with timers to Auto mode. All switches with timers will go into the state dictated by the time. The number displayed is the number of switches with timers forced On or Off. This option has no effect on switches without timers. This option is not shown if no timers are associated with the switches.

3.5 Battery

Displays the current battery status and charger calibration. The display shows:

Line 1: Screen Title

Line 2: AC State and Battery Charger Calibration Numbers (diagnostic use only)

Line 3: Current State of the Battery and Menu Option (see below)

Line 4: Menu Options (listed below)




Charger. The batteries must be disconnected before beginning calibration. No keypad control is provided during calibration. The calibration display will return when calibration is over. Calibration only needs to be done when the main circuit board/power supply board pair is changed, or when the configuration is erased. All Battery Chargers come calibrated from the factory.

• Test: Force an immediate battery test.

3.6 Conventional

This menu provides for the testing and bypassing of conventional circuits. Each function will present each zone in turn for selection. Press <Clear> to return to this menu without making changes. The menu has the following options:

• Test: Select which zones to test. Test Mode must be on to select zones for testing. All zones selected are automatically deselected when Test Mode is turned off.

• Bypass: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. Select conventional circuits to bypass. A bypassed circuit will be ignored by the panel. Bypasses are retained when the panel is re-booted. Bypasses are annunciated by a common trouble condition.

3.7 Addressable

The menu has the following options

1

:


• Duplicates Check: This will cause an immediate check to see if more than one device is using an address. The panel automatically does this check on the hour.


-- OFF/FLASH: The device LEDs are normally off and will flash when an alarm is reported.

The flashing LED will be reset when System Reset is pressed.

-- FLASH/ON: The device LEDs flash each time they are polled. They will latch on in

Alarm. The LEDs will be reset when System Reset is pressed. Note: Due to current

1. Panels with 64K EEPROM will not retain Bypass, Sensitivity or Control Module forced states when restarted.

39

MR-2900 Programming Manual draw limitations, only the first 5 detectors

1

on a circuit will latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation.

-- OFF/ON: The LEDs are normally off and will latch on in Alarm. The LEDs will be reset when System Reset is pressed. This option will not be shown if the addressable coprocessor cannot support this mode. Note: Due to current draw limitations, only the first

5 detectors on a circuit will latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation.

-- RESET: This functions resets the LEDs to their off state.

• Sensitivity: This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This allows for the manual adjustment of the sensitivity of addressable detectors. All devices have a default sensitivity assigned in the database. The detector can be set to the database default value or to one of the pre-defined levels replacing the database values. These manual values are retained if the panel is re-booted.

-- SELECT: Change the manual sensitivity of addressable detectors. The first screen asks for a circuit and device number. Enter the circuit and device or press <Enter> without entering any number to view the first detector in the database. Each detector will be displayed in turn, showing the current sensitivity and allowing for it to be changed or the next detector to be displayed. Press <Clear> to stop viewing the detector list.

-- PRINT: Print a list of all detectors that have a sensitivity other than the one selected in the database. This option is not shown if no manual sensitivities have been set.

-- ALL DEFAULT: Change all manual sensitivity settings to the default values set in the database.

• Monitor: Allows you to select between all Class A monitor modules and individually selected ones in MHI.

• Bypass: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. This selects devices to be bypassed. A bypassed device will be ignored by the system. Addressable bypasses are retained when the panel is re-booted. Only devices included in the database can be bypassed. Bypasses are annunciated by a common trouble condition. The Bypass menu has the following options:

-- ON: Select devices to be bypassed. Enter the circuit and device number. Press

<Enter> to accept the device and to enter the next one. Pressing <Clear> will remove any numbers entered. Pressing either <Enter> or <Clear> with no numbers displayed will end the input mode.

-- OFF: Select bypassed devices to be returned to normal operation. Each bypassed device is listed in order. Select next to keep the bypass on or select OFF to remove the bypass. After the last device, display returns to the Bypass menu. Press <Clear> to return to the Bypass Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices bypassed.

-- ALL OFF: Remove all bypasses, if any, from the system. The number of bypassed devices is displayed next to this option.


-- ON: Select devices for testing. Enter the circuit and device number, or enter the circuit number only to select all devices on the circuit. Press <Enter> to accept the device and to enter the next one. Pressing <Clear> will remove any numbers entered.

Pressing either <Enter> or <Clear> with no numbers displayed will end the input mode.

1. BRK programs dated before 2 April 1999 limit the number of LEDs on to 3 per circuit.

40


-- OFF: Select devices under test to be returned to normal operation. Each device under test is listed in order. Select next to keep the device under test or select OFF to remove the test mode. After the last device, display returns to the Test menu. Press <Clear> to return to the Test Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices selected for testing.

-- ALL OFF: Remove all devices being tested, if any, from the test mode. The number of devices being tested is displayed next to this option.

• Control Modules: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. Allow for the manual operation of the control and relay modules included in the database. There are three states available: Automatic (controlled by device inputs), Manual On, and Manual Off. This mode is retained if the panel is re-booted. Manually controlled modules are annunciated by a common trouble condition. The menu has the following options:

-- SELECT: Change the Auto/On/Off state of control modules. The first screen asks for a circuit and device number. Enter the circuit and device or press <Enter> without entering any number to view the first control module in the database. Each control module will be displayed in turn, showing the current state and allowing for it to be changed or the next control module to be displayed. Press <Clear> to stop viewing the control module list.


3.8 Archive


• Test: View or change whether Test signals should be recorded in the history. The current setting is shown in the upper right corner. Test signals will be marked as such.


• Network: Local causes only the local panel’s events to be stored in its archive. Global causes all panel’s events to be stored in this panel’s archive. This option is shown only for the master panel in a network.

3.9 Relays

This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. This function allows for the manual operation of the relays. There are three possible states: Automatic (state determined by inputs), Forced On, or

Forced Off. This mode will be retained if the panel is re-booted.

• Individual : Change the Auto/On/Off state of relay. Each relay will show the current state and allow it to be changed or the next relay to be displayed. Press <Clear> to stop viewing the relay list.

• All Auto : Change any relays that are forced on or off back to automatic mode. The number after All Auto is the number of relays in a forced on or off state.

3.10 Ports


• Network: Allows for the setting of parameters related to the network. If the downloaded database indicates that there is no network, the only option is Panel ID . The Network

Menu has the following options:



41


-- Reboot: Cause all panels on the network to do a Hard reboot, ie. equivalent to pressing the Hard Reboot button on the top of the Inner Door. Each panel will record in the history the time it received the Network Reboot command.

-- Global Commands: Sends the selected key to all Control and Annunciator Units on the

Network. Each unit, including the sending unit, will respond as if that key has been pressed.

-- Verify: Enable or disable Network Verify reporting troubles. If disabled, the panel will not report a Network Verify trouble (no common trouble sequence), but will still display the error information in the Misc. Troubles.

-- Retry: Set the number of times to try to resend a message before giving up. If this number of retries are attempted without success, the other panel or annunciator is considered to be off-line. The default value is 8. This would be increased only if the communications line cycles between on-line and off-line.

-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate for Com Port 1. Since each installation is different, this value will need to be chosen by trial and error. If the default rate does not work, chose the next slower rate. Continue this process until a rate that works is chosen. The available baud rates are: 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300. The recommended rates are: 4800, 2400, and 1200.

Baud Rate

9600

4800

2400

1200


100 nF

220 nF

470 nF

680 nF

• Port 3: The options available vary depending upon the Port 3 setting in the database and the operating program installed:

Digital Protocol 1 (MRZ-7 Programs): Allows for the setting of parameters related to the connection to the SE-2000. It has the following options:

-- ID: Select the panel ID number for the central station/city-tie connection communications port. Valid ID numbers are 1 to 16.

-- Mode: Select whether circuits 1 to 24 or LEDs 1 to 24 are transmitted. Transmitting the

LED numbers allows for zone information to be sent when addressable devices are used.

-- Baud: Set the communication baud rate. Select Auto to have the panel automatically choose the SE 2000 baud rate. If required a fixed baud rate can be used. The available fixed baud rates are 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.



Digital Protocol 2 (MRZ-7B Programs): Allows for the setting of parameters related to the connection to the SE-2000. The panel will use the Network ID for identification. If more than one signal needs to be sent, new alarms take precedence. It has the following options:

-- Master: This option is available only on the master panel of a network. GLOBAL causes the master to transmit all signals in the network. LOCAL causes the master to transmit only its own signals.

-- Mode: Selects how information is sent to the SE 2000. There are the following options:

42





-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. Enter a value of 0 (zero) to have the panel to automatically choose the SE 2000 baud rate. If required a fixed baud rate can be used.

The available fixed baud rates are 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.



PC Connect (MR2-7G Programs): Allows for the configuration of the communications to a


-- ON/OFF: Allows for enabling or disabling of the port. The master panel will report for all panels in the network.

-- Baud: Sets the communications baud rate. The available fixed baud rates are 9600,

4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.




Annunciator Connect (MR2-7A Programs): Allows for the configuration of the communications to MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2801-MR and Dialler.

-- Baud: Sets the communications baud rate. The available fixed baud rates are 4800 and

1200.

1

Voice Evac. System (MR2-7E Programs): Allows for setting parameters related to the connection to the MV2700 voice evacuation panel.





-- Retry: Set the number of times to try to resend a message before giving up. If this number of retries are attempted without success, the other panel is considered to be off-line. The default value is 8. This would be increased only if the communications line cycles between on-line and off-line. (Range: 2 – 99)

-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3.


4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.

• -- Terminal: Select ANSI or TeleVideo protocol. Most terminals and terminal emulator programs support ANSI protocol.

• -- Printer: MR1-1 and MRx-2 Programs: Select the baud rate for the printer port. The available rates are 9600 (default), 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, and 300.

1. Only MR-2614 v2.1 and up support 4800 baud. Previous versions only support 1200 baud.

43


MRx-3 and MRx-7 Programs: There are two options for configuring the Port 6 serial printer port:

-- Size: Set the width of the lines sent to the Port 6 printer or disable the printer. Options are None, 20 and 80. The default is None, which disables this feature. Use 20 when using an MR-2920 printer.

-- Baud: Select the baud rate for the printer port if the size is 80 columns. The available rates are 9600 (default), 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, and 300.

3.11 Alarm List


• Reset: Select when entries are taken out of the Alarm List. AUTO removes entries as soon as the condition restores. MANUAL requires that Reset be pressed before they are removed. Conditions that have restored will be shown as a restored condition in the Alarm

List.




3.12 Passcode

Allows for the changing of passcodes. The Privilege Level 2 can change both the Level 1 and 2 passcodes, while Level 1 can only change the Level 1 passcode. Passcodes are four digit numbers in the range 1000 to 9999. Type in the new passcode and press <Enter> to accept.

Asterisks will be displayed instead of the numbers. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Program or Passcode Menu.




3.13 Memory


• Erase Configuration: This will erase all initiating circuit, bell, relay, releaser and privilege values entered from the keypad and LCD menu, and replace them with default values.

With MR2 programs, this has no effect on information contained in the downloaded database. Confirmation is asked before erasure. After the Configuration has been erased, the panel must be reset using the reset button at the top of the Main Circuit Board, if the panel does not do this automatically. The following items are not erased: Serial Number,

Clock Calibration, Level 1 Passcode, Level 2 Passcode, Main Board Type, Terminal Board

Type, Input Circuit Modules. Note: The battery charger will need to be re-calibrated (see

Section 3.5, page 39) after erasing the configuration.

3.14 Buzzer

This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This sets the length of the Trouble Buzzer Inhibit time. This is the length of time that a new trouble will not cause the buzzer to sound after it has been silenced for a trouble. The time can be set to 0 or from 15 to 255 seconds. If 0 is chosen, the buzzer will sound for every trouble.

44



The Alarm List and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering.

Condition Code

T

U

W

P

Q

R

S

I

J

M

N

D

E

G

H

Archive Alarm List

A ALARM

B


M.PULL


WFLOW

Description

Alarm

Bypass

Comlink


Maintenance Alert

Ground Fault

Hot Key Pressed


Switch



Pull Station Alarm

Releaser Abort

Releaser Halt

Supervisory


Wrong Device Type

Waterflow Alarm


45


Zone Number

PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:


ZZ Panel Zone

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

50

51

52

4

5

6

2

3

0

1

7

Panel

Zone

Description

General Alarm

























Network Verify

Comlink 1

Comlink 2

Panel

Zone

80

2

81

82

83

84

85

1

86

3

87

65

1

66

67

69

1

71

53

54

55

59

60

61

64

1

88

1

89

1

90

1

91

1

92

1

93

1

94

1

95

1

Description

Comlink 3

Comlink 6

Printer Port




Program Checksum

Database Checksum

AC Power

Low Battery

Program Restart

Network Ground Fault

Privilege Level

1st Stage Alarm

2nd Stage Alarm

Switch

Test Mode

Erase Configuration


Passcode Tamper

Database Loaded

Time/Date Change

Hot Key Activation

Memory Overflow

Network Reboot

New Program



Notes:

1.


2.


3.


SSS Sub-Zone Number

Addressable Circuit:

Dual End-of-Line Circuit:

000 - Wiring Fault


000 - Wiring Fault

001 - Switch #1

002 - Switch #2

Smoke Detector and Contact Device Circuit: 000 - Wiring Fault

001 - Smoke Detector

002 - Contact Device

46


Comlink 1 (Zone 51): Unit Network ID number


Note: Only MR-2614 Annunciators use IDs other than 000.

Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): 001 - Circuits 1 to 8


Auxiliary Power Supervision (Zone 61): Auxiliary Power Circuit Number


001 - Watchdog

002 - Circuits 9 to 16


002 - Clock Monitor







001 - Fire Drill

002 - Lamp Test

003 - Releaser Disconnect

004 - Relay Disconnect

005 - Test Mode

006 - Signal Disconnect

007 - Acknowledge

008 - Signal Silence

009 - Reset

010 - Common Disconnect

011 - General Alarm

012 - Halt

013 - Abort

014 - 2nd Stage Inhibit

016 - Switch 1 On

017 - Switch 2 On

018 - Switch 3 On

019 - Switch 4 On

020 - Switch 5 On

021 - Switch 6 On

022 - Switch 7 On

023 - Switch 8 On

024 - Switch 9 On

025 - Switch 10 On

026 - Switch 11 On

027 - Switch 12 On

028 - Switch 13 On

029 - Switch 14 On

030 - Switch 15 On

031 - Switch 16 On

032 - Switch 1 Off

033 - Switch 2 Off

034 - Switch 3 Off

035 - Switch 4 Off

036 - Switch 5 Off

037 - Switch 6 Off

038 - Switch 7 Off

47


039 - Switch 8 Off

040 - Switch 9 Off

041 - Switch 10 Off

042 - Switch 11 Off

043 - Switch 12 Off

044 - Switch 13 Off

045 - Switch 14 Off

046 - Switch 15 Off

047 - Switch 16 Off

051 - Manual Restart


001 - CoProcessor for circuits 1..8




Network Reboot Required Who (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the Network

Reboot Required trouble

Network Reboot Required Why (Zone 95): 001 - network

002 - network

003 - port 3





48



5.1 General





The standard battery options available for the MR-2900 Control Unit are: a) 4 Ah internal, b) 7 Ah, c) 10 Ah, d) 24 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, e) 38 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, f) 48 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet (not UL listed).


MR-2900

MR-2910

MR-2908

MR-2918

MR-2928

MR-2938

MR-2909

MR-2919

MR-2944LC

74 mA (includes MR-2931, MR-2905 and

MR-2902 boards)

30 mA

14 mA




50 mA

50 mA

65 mA

MR-2915 1 mA

MR-2801-MR 20 mA in municipal box mode 250 mA in alarm in reverse polarity mode 25 mA in alarm (+ load)

Dialer 45 mA stand by

60 mA in alarm

MR-D1010R1 100 mA

MR-D1010R2 200 mA

MR-2644 20mA

MR-2690

MR-2614

MR-2622

MRI-1251

MRI-1551

MRI-2251

MRI-2551

MRI-3251

MRI-5551

MRI-M500M

MRI-M501M

MRI-M502M

5 mA

20 mA

5 mA

300 µA

200 µA

300 µA

200 µA

300 µA

200 µA

300 µA

300 µA

200 µA

MRI-M503ME 300 µA

MRI-M500C

MRI-M500X

300 µA

450 µA

49


5.2 Sample Calculation

The current draw of any other devices, such as detectors, addressable modules, will also have to be included in the calculations. This would include any devices connected to the two Aux Power connections. A typical calculation for 24 hour stand-by operation plus 5 minutes of signalling device operation would be:

Board/Device

Basic MR-2900 Panel



MR-2910 Network Board

MRI-1251 Smoke Detector

MRI-5551 Heat Detector

MRI-500M Monitor Module

MRI-500C Control Module

Device

MRA-MBG6 Bell

MRL-WST Strobe

30

0.30

0.20

0.30

0.20

Draw (mA)

74

14

50

Draw (mA)

22

50

1

80

80

20

1

1

Quantity

1

33

Sub-Total:

Quantity

73

21

Sub-Total:

Total:

0.72

0.58

0.38

0.15

24 hour (Ah)

1.78

0.34

1.20

0.16

5.21

5 min (Ah)

0.14

0.09

0.23

5.44

50



The MR-2900 Control Unit, MR-2909 Addressable Input Module and MR-2919 Addressable Input

Module will display information and accept commands via the service terminal port. The information includes initiating circuit configuration, current status of bell, relays, etc., diagnostic information, the archive, etc. The commands allow for the selection of the information to view, limited programming and basic operation. Certain Control Unit commands are available only at certain privilege levels. Units will beep once when a valid character is received and three times if an invalid character is received. If a command is not finished within about 10 seconds, the unit will beep three times and will lose any information sent.

The service terminal program provides the information on a number of different screens. When the terminal is first connected, it will be viewing whatever screen was the last viewed. To view Screen

0, which lists all the screens that are available, press

0

<Tab> . Press <Delete> to refresh the screen. Press the <Tab> key to view the next screen. See below for a complete description on the

<Tab> key commands. Certain Control Unit screens are available only at higher privilege levels.

The service terminal of the addressable modules, if any installed, is available through the Control

Unit's service terminal.


Screens

The Control Unit uses 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit for communication over the serial port. The default baud rate is 9600 bps.

All screens have a common status line across the top. It shows, from left to right, the current time, the current date, the current privilege level, the panel number, the current screen number and name. All available screens are listed and described below along with any key commands valid only on that screen. To view a particular screen, enter n <Tab> where n is the screen number.

Those screens marked with an asterisk (*) are useful in trouble shooting the panel.

Screen Name

Description

0*

1

2

3

4

Index

LCD

Misc

Battery

AC


Display and control the panel LCD. This is useful for training sessions since more people can view the terminal screen than can view the LCD directly. All keypad keys are mapped to the equivalent key board key, with the keypad <Clear> being mapped to the key board <End> . Note: The control feature does not work over a network.


Displays the current battery level, and the current status of the battery and AC power. Also shows the timer for the battery test.

Commands

<Ctrl-B>

0<Ctrl-B>

Print battery calculation


9900 <Ctrl-B> Start continuous dynamic battery testing.

Display the current status of the AC power and the delay timer for report AC fail.

51


6

7

Screen

5*

8

9*

10*

11*

12

13*

14

Name

Description

Bells Displays the current status of the bell circuits. Also shows the timers and settings for the cut-off. See screen 11 for acceptable supervision values. See screen 39 for addressable bells.

Function Relays Displays the current settings and timers for the 4 function relays.

Releasers Displays the current settings and timers for the releasing circuits

(if any). See screen 40 for addressable releasers.

Common Relays Displays the current status of the 3 common system relays. Also shows which relays may be disconnected by the Common

Disconnect hot-key.

Alarm List Shows the current alarm list. This is the same list that is displayed on the LCD menu. Each screen in the LCD corresponds to one line on the terminal screen. See Appendix A for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.

Commands

J Page down


K Page up


Miscellaneous

Troubles

Output

Supervision



Shows the current supervision readings and status for the bells and auxiliary power circuits. These values should be in the range

130 to 150 for Vhi, and 10 to 20 for Vlo (low gain) or around 100 for Vlo (high gain). If the numbers are jumping all over the place, there is a hardware fault with the terminal board.

Relay Summary Displays which relays and functions have been activated:

O Bell Circuits 1 to 8, MRx-3 & MRx-7

F Function Relays 1 to 4

A Common Alarm

S Common Supervisory

T Common Trouble

G Ground Fault

W Walk Test

L LCD Back Light


(approximate) events that happened. See Appendix A for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.

Commands

J Page down


K Page up


Printer A copy of everything sent to the printer. This is useful for capturing print-outs to a file. Note: Status line updating is disabled while on this screen.

52


Screen

15

16

17

18

19

21

22

23

27

29

30

31

32

Name

Description

Printer Status

Network

Port 1

Port 3

Conventional

Database

Conventional

Analog

Conventional

Detail

Misc. Outputs

System Reset

Port 9

(addressable)

Addressable

1..8

Addressable

9..16


Displays information about network communications. This includes frames sent and received, frames in error and orphan messages. Orphan message destruction is subject to the timers shown.

Commands


Displays information about the primary network port. Includes the status of the panels that are and should be online.

Commands


Displays information about the secondary network port. A question mark appears in front of the baud rate when the port is off-line.

Commands


Shows the current status ID, frame count and baud rate for the central station communications link. A question mark will appear in front of the baud rate when the port is offline.

Commands


Displays the current alarm and trouble status of each of the installed conventional input circuits.

Displays the current supervision readings of each of the installed conventional input circuits.

Displays the programming and status for a single conventional input circuit. This includes any timers that are connected to smoke detector operation.

Commands

C Display next initiating circuit

(1-24)C Display specified initiating circuit



Shows the current condition of the three possible addressable boards and the status of the communications to the boards. Also displays information about screens 31 to 33.

Connect to the Addressable Module controlling circuits 1 to 8 if it exists. Press <Esc> to return to the Control Panel screens. This is for a future use.

Connect to the Addressable Module controlling circuits 9 to 16 if it exists. Press <Esc> to return to the Control Panel screens.

53


Screen Name

Description

33 Addressable

17..24

Connect to the Addressable Module controlling circuits 17 to 24 if it exists. Press <Esc> to return to the Control Panel screens.

Notes for Screens 31 to 33:

1.

The keyboard commands (see below) are not available.

2.

The Addressable Module will display “Co-processor Screen #” on the status line to distinguish its screens from the Control Panel’s screen.

34 Addressable

Relays

Displays the automatic and force states for all the control modules on a circuit.

Commands



35 Sensitivity Displays the Day/Night status, the default and manual sensitivities of all sensors on an addressable circuit. Dots will be shown for any value that is not used.

Commands



36

37

Sensitivity List

Bypass & Test

38

39

40

49

50

Switches

Addressable

Bells

Addressable

Releasers

Clock

Tasks

Displays the value each sensitivity setting represents.

Displays the Bypass and Test status of all devices on an addressable circuit.

Commands




Displays a grid for one addressable circuit of the modules programmed as a bell or strobe. A B is shown for control modules programmed as a bell and an S for control modules programmed as a strobe. The second character is the current status. See Screen 5 for the panel bell outputs.

Displays 10 consecutive address. Each control module that is programmed as a releaser will have an asterisk shown in either the continuous or momentary line as required. Each column will show the current state at the top and programmed settings at the bottom. See screen 7 for the panel releaser outputs.



54


Screen Name

Description

51*

52

60

68*

FIFO

Memory

Annunciator

Remote

Terminal

This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory

Overflow trouble. The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used. For each task, the first number is the current usage and the second is the maximum usage. If a task uses a large amount of FIFO memory, this means that task is having difficulty in operating. The task “SPI comlink” is the one that handles the addressable co-processor.


Displays the states of the 24 LED zones on the front panel.


Commands



69* Network Verify Displays the current status of the network verify feature.

These keyboard commands are available on all screens except when the service terminal is connected to an Addresable Module (Screens 31 to 33). These keys are also available directly from the Addressable Module.

Command

<Del>

<Tab>

<Backspace>

0<Tab>

0-127<Tab>

0.0<Tab>

0.1<Tab>

A

D

(month).(date) D

Description








Silence buzzer.


Enter the date.

55


Command


(hours).(minutes) T


<Ctrl-V>

(code)<Ctrl-V>

0 ?

90 ?

99 ?

<Esc>

<Enter>

Description


Set the time.

Set the time.



Print downloaded database.

Print archive.

Print configuration.

Stop Printout.

Advance printer (paper feed).

6.2 Addressable Module

The Addressable Module's service routines can be accessed through the Control Panel's service terminal using screens 31, 32 and 33. While the service terminal is accessing the Addressable

Module, all Control Panel Commands are unavailable. Press <Esc> to return to the Control Panel service routines.

All screens have a common status line across the top. It shows, from left to right, the current time, a diagnostic number, the current screen number and name. All available screens are listed and described below. Screens useful for trouble shooting are marked with an asterisk (*).

Note: The Addressable Module will display "Co-processor Screen #" on the status line to distinguish its screens from the Control Panel's screens.

Screen Name

0*

2

10*

15

19*

20*

Index

Misc

Miscellaneous

Troubles

Comlink

Read Me

Totals

Description





Displays the status of communications between the panel and the addressable module.

List of all the keyboard commands.

Lists for all circuits the number of devices assigned, on-line, missing, etc. Also lists the total number of devices in alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions. Also lists current wiring supervision status for each loop.

56


Screen Name

Description

21

22

23

24*

25

26

27

28

Detail

Type On-Line

Type Assigned

Errors

For a single device, shows all the programming, analog values, status and commands sent.



For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the incorrect, missing and mismatched devices. This shows the differences between what is expected to be on the circuit and what actually is on the circuit.

Alarms

Function

For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current Alarm,

Early Warning, Supervisory and Trouble conditions for all devices on the circuit.

For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the Alarm and

Supervisory initiating devices. Control modules are neither type and are displayed as a dash (-).

Control Modules For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current status of all the Control modules.

Bypass For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are currently bypassed.

29

30

Test Mode

Analog

For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are currently under test.

Displays the analog values of 10 consecutive addresses for a single circuit.

This screen is for factory use only.

50

51

Tasks

FIFO Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a

Memory Overflow trouble. The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used. For each task, the first number is the current usage and the second is the maximum usage. If a task uses a large amount of FIFO memory, this means that task is having difficulty in operating.

The Addressable Module supports the following key board commands:

<Del>

<Tab>

Command

<Backspace>

Description




57


Command Description

0<Tab>

0-127<Tab>

A

(0-199)A

C

(1-24)C

0M


View selected screen. If selected screen is unused/ unavailable, the next available screen is shown.

Display next address.

Display selected address.

Display next circuit.

Display selected circuit.

Reset minimum/maximum values.

The MR-2919 Class A Addressable Module also supports the following commands:

0P

1P

2P

Command Description

Energize all circuits

Energize odd circuits only

Energize even circuits only

58


7.0 Appendix D: Table of Reporting Codes

The following tables contain automatic Contact ID and SIA format reporting codes.

Contact ID: The first digit (in parentheses) will automatically be sent by the control. The second two digits are to indicate specific information about the signal. For example, if zone 1 is a fire zone, you could program the event code as [1A]. The central station would receive the following:

*FIRE* - FIRE ALARM - 1 where the “1” indicates which zone went into alarm.

SIA Format – Level 2: The SIA format used in this product follows the Level 2 specifications of the

SIA Digital Communication Standard – October 1997. This format will send the account code along with its data transmission. The transmission would look similar to the following at the receiver:N

Ri00 FA 01

N = New Event

Ri00 = System Event

FA = Fire Alarm

01 = Zone 1

Table 1: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes


Zone Supv./Rest.

zone goes into supervisory/ restore (2) S/R

Zone Alarms/

Rest.

zone goes into alarm/ alarm condition has been restored

A/R

T/R Zone Trouble/

Rest.

AC Fail Trouble/

Rest.

zone exhibits a trouble condition/ zone trouble condition has been restored

AC power to control panel is disconnected or interrupted/AC power restored; both codes follow the AC

Trouble Delay=

MA/R

Battery Trouble/

Rest.

Ground Fault

Trouble/Rest.

NAC Trouble/

Rest.

Dialler Bus

Trouble/

Rest.

Line 1 or 2 TLM

Trouble/Rest.

Phone # 1 or 2

FTC Trouble/

Rest.

control panel battery is low/battery restored

Earth Ground Fault is detected/ restored

NAC circuit is opened/restored

Dialer Bus connection is lost/restored connection via Telephone Numbers 1 or 2 is lost/restored communication is restored after a failure to communicate trouble has occurred; events not communicated during lapse will be sent

MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

Dialer

Direction*

Contact

ID Auto

Rep.

Codes

AA

(1) 3A

SIA Auto

Rep.

Codes

See Table 4

See Table 4

(3) 73

(3) A1

(3) A2

(3) 1A

(3) 21

(3) 33

(3) 51

(3) 54

See Table 4

AT-000/

AR-000

YT-000/

YR-000

UT-000/

UJ-000

YA-000/

YH-000

NT-000/

NR-000

LT-XXX/

LR-XXX**

YC-XXX/

YK-XXX**

59



Dialer

Direction*

Contact

ID Auto

Rep.

Codes

SIA Auto

Rep.

Codes

Walk Test Start/

Stop

Test

Transmission

Normal/

Off-Normal control panel has entered/exited walk test mode; no events will be communicated test transmission reports system normal or off-normal (alarm, supervisory or trouble) control panel condition

MA/R

T

(6) A7

(6) A2

TS-000/

TE-000

RP-000/

RY-000

* Call directions: A/R = alarm/restoral; T/R = trouble/restoral; MA/R = maintenance alarm/restoral; S/R = supervisory/restore; T = test transmission


Table 2: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restore Event Codes



Medical Alarms Alarm

(1)A1 Emergency Panic Alarms

(1)A2 Fail to Report In (1)2A Panic

Fire Alarms

(1)1A Fire Alarm

(1)11 Smoke

(1)12 Combustion

(1)21 Duress

(1)22 Silent

(1)23 Audible

General Alarms

(1)13 Water Flow

(1)14 Heat

(1)15 Pull Station

(1)16 Duct

(1)17 Flame

24 Hour Non Fire

(1)51 Gas Detected

(1)52 Refrigeration

(1)53 Loss of Heat

(1)54 Water Leakage

(1)55 Foil Break

(1)56 Day Trouble

(1)4A General Alarm

(1)4A General Alarm


(1)44 Sensor tamper (1)61 Loss of Air Flow

(1)45 Module Tamper


(1)58 High Temp

Table 3: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restore Codes

Zone

Definition

Fire

Sprinkler

Alarm/Rest Rep.

Codes*

FA-ZZZ/FH-ZZZ

SA-ZZZ/SH-ZZZ

Untyped UA-ZZZ/UH-ZZZ

ZZZ = zones 01-250, 256

Supervisory/Rest. Rep.

Codes*

FS-ZZZ/FR-ZZZ

SS-ZZZ/SR-ZZZ

US-ZZZ/UR-ZZZ

Trouble/Rest. Rep.

Codes*

FT-ZZZ/FJ-ZZZ

ST-ZZZ/SJ-ZZZ

KT-ZZZ/KJ-ZZZ

WT-ZZZ/WJ-ZZZ

UT-ZZZ/UJ-ZZZ

60



Canada

Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Tel: (905)-695-3545

Fax: (905)-660-4113

USA



Tel: (888)-660-4655

Fax:(888) 660-4113

M R - 2 9 0 0


O

PERATOR’S

M

ANUAL

Revision D







Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3



Contents

1.0 Unit Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Power Up Sequence ....................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 Types of Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.3 Status Display ................................................................................................................................. 2

1.4 Zone LEDs ..................................................................................................................................... 2

1.5 Buzzer............................................................................................................................................. 2

1.6 Operator Keys................................................................................................................................ 3

1.7 Alarm List ........................................................................................................................................ 6

1.8 LCD and Keypad............................................................................................................................. 7

1.9 Silent Walk Test .............................................................................................................................. 9


2.1 Diagnostic LEDs ............................................................................................................................. 11

2.2 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers.............................................................................................. 11

Miscellaneous Troubles ....................................................................................................................... 13 i

MR-2900 Operator’s Manual ii



The operation of the MR1 and MR2 programs are almost identical. This chapter applies to both programs. Those functions that are different are noted.


The power up sequence of the panel is started in the following ways: power is applied to the panel; the hard reboot button at the top of the Inner Door is pressed; a Network Reboot command is issued; or the panel has a fault that triggers the internal watch-dog.

The LCD will first display "INITIALIZING MEMORY PLEASE WAIT". The panel will not respond to key presses or to zone activity. Once this step is done the panel will start to beep (buzzer does not sound after a Network Reboot). Press Acknowledge to silence the panel.

Panels running the MR2 program will display the message "LOADING DATABASE PLEASE

WAIT". At this time, the panels will respond to key presses, but not to input circuit conditions.

Note: Since the LCD menu is unavailable, any keys requiring a privilege level other than zero to be active will be unavailable.




• Alarm: This type of input is the normal inputs to the system from smoke detectors, heat detectors, etc. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. It displays **ALARM** in the Alarm List.

• Pull Station: This type of input is for pull stations. They are required to activate bells and/ or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. This type cannot have a retard time. It displays **PULL STATION** in the Alarm List.

• Waterflow: This type of input is for water flow detectors. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. This type displays

**WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List. Through programming, Waterflow type alarms can make the bell circuits they activate to be non-silenceable.

• Supervisory: This type of input is for items such as Shut-Off valves and Pressure sensors for sprinkler systems. They are required to operate an LED. They cannot operate bells/ strobes but can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, and releasers on the same panel.

• Halt: This type of input can only stop the operation of a releaser type output on the same panel. An LED is required for annunciation of the Halt function. It will use the supervisory

LED. Note: Use of this type of input must be limited access to maintain UL listing.

• Abort: This type of input can only hold the operation of a releaser type output on the same panel. This Abort function maintains the current state of the releaser. The delay timer will continue to run until 10 seconds are left. The releaser will resume normal operation as soon as the input restores. An LED is required for annunciation of the Abort function. It will use the supervisory LED.

• Monitor: This type of input used to monitor the action of items such as dampers, door, fans, etc. The supervisory LED is used. Monitor inputs can operate relays and control modules.

1


• Non-Reporting: These are non-latching inputs. They are also referred to as Non-Fire.

There is no requirement that these inputs cause any action whatsoever. They use the supervisory LED for annunciation. They can operate only relays and control modules. The

LEDs, relays and control modules will follow the non-reporting input's status. The LEDs, relays and control modules operated by non-reporting inputs cannot also be operated by

Fire, Supervisory, Abort or Halt type inputs.


The status display is the top-right section of the front panel. It is visible through the front door. It consists of the common alarm LED, common supervisory LED, common trouble LED, AC power

LED, and the clock.

The common alarm (red) and supervisory (amber or yellow) LEDs will flash with any new alarm or supervisory signal. The common trouble (yellow) LED will flash with any new zone trouble or a new panel trouble, such as low battery, bell trouble, etc. The common LEDs will react to all panel inputs plus to most conditions it displays from other panels. The AC power (green) LED is lit if AC power is on. If the AC power has failed, the common LEDs will blink slowly instead of staying on steady.

The clock shows the current time in 24 hour format. The flashing colon shows that the panel is functioning correctly. If the AC power is off, the time is not displayed but the colon continues to flash. The entire clock display flashes if the time has not been set after a Hard reboot of the panel; also if the time is not set, the panel will show a common trouble. If any memory error occurs

(Program Checksum Error, Database Mismatch, FIFO Overflow, etc.) the clock will display 4 dashes instead of the time. The buzzer will also beep rapidly to indicate the memory error. The clock will also display 4 dashes if any configuration parameter is changed which requires a Hard reboot.

1.4 Zone LEDs

The zone LEDs are along the left side of the front panel. They are visible through the front door.

Each zone has an alarm (red), supervisory (yellow or amber), and trouble (yellow) LED. The alarm and supervisory LEDs will turn on as required by the inputs. The trouble LED will light for either an input trouble condition, a ground fault or if there is a bypass present. Use the LCD and keypad

(see section 1.8 below) to determine the exact condition. A new condition is shown by a flashing

LED. After the Acknowledge button (see section 1.6 below) has been pressed, the LED will be lit steadily.

Note: If the buzzer is sounding on the panel, Acknowledge will silence the buzzer, but not latch the

LEDs. Press Acknowledge again to latch the LEDs.

For panels running the MR1 program, each set of zone LEDs corresponds to the input circuit. For panels running the MR2 program, each set of zone LEDs is programmed via the database to represent whatever logical zoning is required.

1.5 Buzzer

The buzzer gives audible indication of any new conditions in the panel. It may sound in any of four modes. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the buzzer. ( Acknowledge will need to be pressed again to latch flashing LEDs.)


• Steady: This indicates any new fire alarm conditions. This mode can be disabled in the database.

• Fast: This indicates any critical failures that must be attended to. These failures can include, but are not limited to memory overflow, network reboot required, database mismatch, etc. The pattern in 50ms on/off.

2



• Slow: This indicates any new trouble conditions. The pattern in 500ms on/off.


These are located below the Status Display. They are not visible through the front door. There are

Figure 1: Default Key Assignments Figure 2: Fixed Key Assignments

12 keys, each with a yellow and green LED (some keys may have red instead of yellow LEDs).

The LEDs are used to display function status. The individual keys are located under the rectangles marked PRESS, not under the key description. The key assignments are fixed for MR1 programs

(see Figure 1 ). For MR2 programs, the keys are assigned by the database. There are fixed placement function keys as shown in Figure 2 . The default layout is the same as for the MR1 program. The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid

(unavailable) key is pressed. The panel will record every key press in the history.


Key Action


Signal

Silence



3


Key

System

Reset

Second

Stage Inhibit

Fire Drill

Lamp Test

Releaser

Disconnect

Relay

Disconnect

Action


• The green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset.

• The yellow LED flashes when there are conventional smoke detector circuits in alarm.



Notes:

1.


2.


3.






Fire Drill. The yellow LED will flash while the Fire Drill is happening. The Fire Drill cannot be performed if the bells are already activated, or if AC power is off. The

Fire Drill is automatically ended if an alarm condition occurs.

Flashes the panel LEDs in sequence starting with the zone alarm LEDs. Press

Lamp Test repeatedly to cycle through the zone supervisory LEDs zone trouble

LEDs, system LEDs, and Lamp Test Off.

Causes the releaser circuits to ignore any new alarms. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the releasers are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press again to restore normal operation.

The red LED will flash while active. If no releasers can be disconnected, Releaser

Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

Causes the function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms. Press again to restore normal operation. The yellow LED will flash while active. If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing.

This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

4


Key

Test Mode

Signal

Disconnect

Common

Disconnect

General

Alarm

Halt

Switch n On

Action

Places panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The yellow LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. It follows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI). During test mode, the remote annunciator zone LEDs becomes non-latching for the zone(s) under test. The common indicators, bells, relays and releasers are not activated and no commands are sent to other units and no signal is sent out of Port 3. Test signals can be archived or not as required.


LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter> key selects the item. Then select INITIATING CIRCUITS for MR1 programs, or ADDRESSABLE or

CONVENTIONAL for MR2 programs. Then select TEST. For conventional circuits, each zone will then be presented in turn for selection. Select either TEST or

NORMAL. For addressable devices, enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear> will return to the previous menu. While in Test Mode, any conventional smoke detectors activated on the test circuits will be automatically reset after 30 seconds.



Disables sounding of the bells. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the bells are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press Signal Disconnect again to re-enable the bells. The yellow LED will flash while the bells are disabled. Signal Disconnect is not available if the bells are already activated. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

Disables the relays or a City Tie Module (MRCTYB). When a MRCTYB module is disconnected, a trouble will be reported to the city and then any subsequent signals will not be reported until the card is re-enabled. When the relays are disabled, the yellow LED flashes. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.

Initiates the general evacuation sequence. All bells are activated in Evacuation mode, selected function relays are activated and selected releaser circuits are activated and municipal alarm relay is activated. The red LED will flash when activated. Press System Reset to cancel the General Alarm. Note: General Alarm is recorded in the panel archive.



5


Key

Switch n Off

Manual

Restart

Action



Releaser Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect, and Test Mode can be made to time out automatically after 4 hours. Releaser Disconnect, Relay Disconnect,

Signal Disconnect, Test Mode, and Common Disconnect all use the same privilege level.

1.7 Alarm List


Panel #1 will not be reflected in the alarm list of Panel #2. Each archive only stores locally generated events. In Master mode, the panel defined as the master collects all network data and maintains an alarm list of all events generated in every panel. If set to Global, every panel displays all other panel’s events.


2nd priority and Troubles the 3rd priority and Non-reporting signals are the lowest priority. The

LCD back light will turn on if any new entry is received. The back light will automatically turn off in

5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.

Note: A panel that does not have extended RAM memory will not show an Alarm List.

Each entry in the Alarm List consists of one screen for MR1 programs and one to three screens for

MR2 programs. Each entry will include an event screen giving a short description of the event.

MR2 programs will add device and panel message screens as required.

To view additional entries in the Alarm List when an entry is showing, press the <Scroll> ( <A> ) key on the keypad. This will display the next/previous entry of the highest priority showing the device message, if any, otherwise the event screen is shown. Press <Scroll> again to view the next/previous entry. Use the <Up Arrow> and <Down Arrow> to rotate between screens of the event. One can also look at the next entry using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the

<Left Arrow> . A summary screen will be shown when all entries have been shown. To view the summary screen directly, press <Clear> at any time.


Options for viewing All, Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Non-Reporting entries are provided.

Display can begin with the First or Last entry. Once viewing the events, one can look at the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> . <Enter> will act as either <Left Arrow> or <Right Arrow> , whichever was pressed last. <Up Arrow> and

<Down Arrow> will rotate between pages of the event.

While viewing entries in the Alarm List, the currently displayed input can be Bypassed by pressing the <Bypass> ( <B> ) key on the keypad. This will cause the panel to consider the input to be in a normal condition.

Note: Bypass is a privileged function. A passcode will have to be entered in the system before a

Bypass will be accepted.

6




Code



or 2) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition Code






Code


See Section 2.2 for a description of Condition Codes and Zone Numbers.

The summary screen shows the number of alarm, supervisory and trouble entries in the Alarm List.


The LCD and keypad are located below the Operator

Keys. The display may or may not be visible through the front door. The keypad is not visible through the front door. They are used to view the status of the panel, to view the latest events, to set the date and time and to enter a privilege passcode. The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed, and three times if an invalid or unavailable key is pressed. The LCD back light will turn on if any key is pressed. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.

Information is presented to the user through a series of menus and information screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information. The panel displays the Main Menu under normal conditions. If a privilege level has been entered, it will be displayed in the Main Menu as well instead of the time. Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item. Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press




• Status: Displays the current status of various parts of the panel. The following options are available:

-- More: Displays the next screen of menu options. When the last screen of the menu is displayed the next screen will be the first one again.

-- Misc. Trouble: Displays any troubles with the bells, releasers, AC power, batteries, etc., that are not shown elsewhere. Only sections in trouble will be displayed. Press

<Enter> to go to the next screen. See section 2.2 for a list of all possible messages.

-- Alarm List: Displays the Alarm List under manual control. See Alarm List above, Using the Keypad.

-- Addressable: This menu has the following options:

Select: Displays the current status of a single device. The device address is entered into the screen saying "circuit or circuit.device". If only a circuit number is entered, the first

7

MR-2900 Operator’s Manual programmed device on that circuit will be displayed. If <Enter> is pressed without any entry, the first addressable device will be displayed. <Clear> will remove any values entered. If there is no value entered, <Clear> will return to the Status Menu. If the selected device is not in the database, the next device in the database is shown.




-- Conventional or Initiating Circuits: Displays the type, and alarm, trouble and ground fault status of each of the 24 input zones (conventional zones only). Once viewing the initiating circuit status, one can choose to look at the next circuit or the previous circuit.

<Clear> will return to the Status Menu.

The display shows:

Line 1: zone number and zone type

Line 2: factory diagnostic information

Line 4: alarm 1, alarm 2, trouble and ground fault status. Alarm 2 is used by Dual

EOLR circuits and by contact devices on Smoke Detector and Contact Device circuits. Smoke detector circuits that have alarm verification will display the number of failed verifications.

-- Identification: Displays a sequence of screens that provide the program and version, the panel's serial number, database version, etc. Press <Enter> to go to the next screen.

-- Print Database: This function is restricted to Level 1. Print the current configuration

(values entered through the LCD menu) and downloaded database of the panel to a printer connected to the panel's printer port. The printer port is at the bottom of the main assembly and is the one on the right.

-- Print Archive: This function is restricted to Level 1. Prints all or part of the history. A selection menu is presented to select which kinds of events to print. The choices are:

All, Alarms, Supervisory, Trouble, Monitor, Bypass and Non-reporting.


1. Event Number




5. Description


This history is sent to the printer port(s) and to the service terminal port if Screen 1 is active. Screen 1 of the service terminal is a copy of all items sent to the printer port.

• Archive: The archive is a list of the last 900 events (approx.). These include all signals, programming changes, time/date changes, etc., that have occurred. Test signals may or may not be recorded but "Test On" and "Test Off" are. The archive is not lost when there is a loss of both AC and battery power. Each entry includes a short description of the event, and the date and time of occurrence for events occurring at or to the panel. There may be

8

MR-2900 Operator’s Manual a second screen including information from the database. You can start by looking at either the last event (newest) or the first event (oldest). When viewing the events, scroll to the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> .

<Enter> will act as the last <Left> or <Right> arrow key pressed. <Up Arrow> and

<Down Arrow> will flip between pages of the event.









Line 4: device type




• Program: Displays the Clock Menu. This menu has 2 options:

-- Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter> to accept date typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock

Menu. The date change will be recorded in the history.

-- Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter> to accept time typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed,

<Clear> will return to the Clock Menu. The new time entered will be sent to all units on the network, if any. A time change of greater than 5 minutes will be recorded in the history.

• Passcode: Allows access to privileged functions. Enter the four digit passcode. A passcode of zero removes all privileges. Asterisks are displayed instead of the numbers to maintain security of the passcode. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits have been typed, <Clear> will return to the Main Menu. The panel will beep once if a valid passcode is entered or three times if an invalid passcode is entered. An invalid passcode will not change the current privilege of the panel. Higher level passcodes timeout after two hours and the panel reverts to Level 0.

The number at the end of the top line shows the current privilege level. The number at the beginning of the second line is a sequence number. This number is required if special higher level passcodes are needed. This number will change with each successful special passcode entered. This makes the special passcodes single use only.

9


1.9 Silent Walk Test

The Silent Walk Test allows for single person testing of the system. This is done by providing an audio output that can be used by a radio with a microphone input. The system will produce tones through the audio output jack to give the inspector a positive indication of system behaviour. The audio jack should be connected to the Mic In or Line In of a radio. Ensure that the radio is set to automatically broadcast whenever a signal is sent to it. Alarm and supervisory conditions produce a 1500 Hz tone, trouble conditions produce a 1000 Hz tone and ground conditions produce a 500

Hz tone. Two short pulses are given for a new condition and one long pulse for a restore. Tones are generated for input circuits only. The output circuits are not part of the walk test.

To activate the walk test, first connect the radio to the audio output jack. Then activate the walk test by pressing the Test Mode key. The yellow LED next to Test Mode will flash while the Test

Mode is active. Conventional circuits and addressable devices will need to be chosen for testing.

While selected for testing, circuit and devices will not activate relays, control modules, bells, releasers or send signals to monitoring stations on port 3. Any LEDs assigned to the test inputs will follow the circuit or device state. See the section on the Test Mode key on page 5 for more information on Test Mode. All circuits and devices not chosen for testing will operate as normal.

If a printer is attached to the printer port, a print-out of all events received by the Unit can be obtained for cross-referencing with the test procedures. Test signals will be marked as such in the print-out.

10



2.1 Diagnostic LEDs

There are 6 LEDs in the middle of the right edge of the Inner Door Assembly for diagnostic purposes. They are used as follows:

1.

extended memory in use

2.

addressable database in use

3.

follows coded bells

4.

not used

5.

not used

6.

database transfer to co-processor.


The Alarm List and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering.

Condition Code

T

U

W

P

Q

R

S

I

J

M

N

D

E

G

H

Archive Alarm List

A ALARM

B


M.PULL


WFLOW

Description

Alarm

Bypass

Comlink


Maintenance Alert

Ground Fault

Hot Key Pressed


Switch



Pull Station Alarm

Releaser Abort

Releaser Halt

Supervisory


Wrong Device Type

Waterflow Alarm


11


2

3

0

1

4

Zone Number

PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:


ZZ Panel Zone

Panel

Zone

22

23

24

50

51

52

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

5

6

7

18

19

20

21

Description

General Alarm

























Network Verify

Comlink 1

Comlink 2

88

1

89

1

90

1

91

1

84

85

1

86

3

87

92

1

93

1

94

1

95

1

69

1

71

80

2

81

82

83

61

64

1

65

1

66

67

Panel

Zone

53

54

55

59

60

Description

Comlink 3

Comlink 6

Printer Port


Output (bell/releaser)

Supervision


Program Checksum

Database Checksum

AC Power

Low Battery

Program Restart

Network Ground Fault

Privilege Level

1st Stage Alarm

2nd Stage Alarm

Switch

Test Mode

Erase Configuration


Passcode Tamper

Database Loaded

Time/Date Change

Hot Key Activation

Memory Overflow

Network Reboot

New Program



Notes:

1.


2.


3.


SSS Sub-Zone Number

Addressable Circuit:

Dual End-of-Line Circuit:

000 - Wiring Fault


000 - Wiring Fault

001 - Switch #1

002 - Switch #2

12


Smoke Detector and Contact Device Circuit: 000 - Wiring Fault





Note: Only MR-2614, MR-2644, MR2801-MR and MR-2806-MR use IDs other than 000.

Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): 001 - Circuits 1 to 8


Auxiliary Power Supervision (Zone 61): Auxiliary Power Circuit Number


001 - Watchdog



002 - Clock Monitor












Network Reboot Required (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the Network Reboot

Required trouble


002 - network

003 - port 3








Message

PROGRAM checksum

EEPROM checksum

DATABASE checksum

Description


Reloading the operating program will correct this problem. If this error keeps reoccurring, the unit will need replacement.

The memory chip containing the configuration information has an error in it. Changing a value of an item set through the LCD menu will cause the panel to create a new checksum. If this error keeps reoccurring, the unit will need replacement.

The memory chip containing the downloaded database has an error in it. Reloading the database will correct this problem. If this error keeps occurring, the unit will need replacement.

13



EEPROM failure not enough EEPROM to save addressable settings wrong database version or database mismatch no database for this panel

The memory chip containing the configuration information is not working correctly. It will need to be erased. This requires a Level 9 passcode.

Erasing the EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive. Be sure to record this information before you erase the

EEPROM. Contact a service representative for help and a Level 9 passcode.

The panel has a 64k EEPROM and is running an MR2 program. The addressable device bypasses and the manual operation of control modules requires a 256k EEPROM for the settings to be retained when the panel is rebooted. Note: This will not cause a common trouble on the panel.

program mismatch The version number stored in the EEPROM is different from the version number in the program. Either reload the old program or erase the

EEPROM. Erasing the EEPROM requires Privilege Level 9. Erasing the

EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive. Be sure to record this information before you erase the EEPROM. Contact a service representative for help and a Level 9 passcode.

hardware mismatch The hardware listed in the database does not match the hardware listed in the panel. Correct the database and reload.

no database loaded The panel does not have a database in memory. Load a database into the panel.




CoProcessor ?..?

off line

CoProcessor ?..?

memory overflow low battery battery charger not calibrated

This is a major error.

The CoProcessor for the circuits listed (1..8,

9..16, or 17..24) is not communicating with the main CPU. This message will be repeated for each CoProcessor that is off-line. Devices are not being monitored by the system. If a reboot of the MR-2900 does not fix the problem, the addressable input module for those circuits will need to be replaced.

The CoProcessor for the addressable circuits listed (1..8, 9..16, or

17..24) has had a memory overflow. A reboot of the MR-2900 should be done to correct any problems. This message will be repeated for each

CoProcessor that has overflowed.


The battery charger needs to be calibrated to provide proper supervision of the batteries. To calibrate the charger, disconnect the batteries and select PROGRAM/BATTERY/CALIBRATE from the LCD menu.

14


Message

BBBBBBBBAA

1234567812

..........

SE2910 not installed port 1 panel ?

off line port 2 off line port 3 off line wrong port 3 program

BBBBBBBBFFFF

123456781234ASTWGL passcode tamper watchdog disabled

NETWORK REBOOT required network verify ?

missing network verify ?

illegal network verify ?

version

Description

List the status of the 8 bell circuits and the 2 auxiliary power circuits.

Each column represents one circuit. A dot (.) indicates a normal condition, an S indicates a short, an O indicates an open and a G indicates a ground. Auxiliary power circuits are not supervised for opens. A bell that has been installed with the polarity the wrong way may appear as a short on the bell circuit. Note: This message will always be shown if the panel is in Test Mode.

The MR-2910 Network Board has not been installed. The network cannot be used unless this board is installed.

This Control or Annunciator Unit is not reporting in over network port 1.

This message will be repeated for each panel that is off line.

The network communications on port 2 have stopped.

The communications on port 3 have stopped.

The port 3 selections in the MHI database do not match the firmware option. Either correct the database or load the correct firmware.

The current status of the relays in the system. Each column represents one relay. A dot (.) will appear under each relay that is off and an asterisk (*) will appear under each relay that is currently switched on.

Note: This message appears in Test Mode only.

B Bell Circuit 1 to 8 T Trouble Relay

F Function Relay 1 to 4 W Walk Test Relay

A Alarm Relay

S Supervisory Relay

G

L

Ground Fault Relay

LCD Back Light Relay


The watchdog causes the panel to be reset if it fails to operate correctly.

If the watchdog is disabled, the panel will not automatically reboot if it fails to operate correctly.

There has been a loss of communications on the network resulting in lost frames. The panel ID listed is the panel that detected the problem.

This trouble will be sent to all other panels and annunciators on the network., Select PROGRAM/PORTS/NETWORK/REBOOT from the

LCD menu to send the reboot command to all panels.


The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is not this panel’s database. Update the database in this panel. Remember that it is recommended that all panels be downloaded with the same database for correct operation.

The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is running a different version of the operating program database. Update all panels in the network to use the same operating program and database.

15


Message negative counters time not set conventional circuit bypassed

Description

This is indicative of a network communications fault. Network Reboot

Required will automatically be generated by the unit.


One or more conventional circuits have been bypassed. To view which circuits have been bypassed, select PROGRAM/CONVENTIONAL/

BYPASS/INDIVIDUAL from the LCD menu.


illegal addressable devices addressable devices bypassed manual control modules manual function relays manual switches

MEMORY OVERFLOW memory lockout serial printer off-line serial printer out of paper parallel printer off-line parallel printer out of paper

One or more addressable devices have been bypassed. To view which devices have been bypassed, select PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/

BYPASS/OFF from the LCD menu.

One or more control modules have been forced either on or off. To view which control modules are forced, select PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/

CONTROL MODULES/OFF from the LCD menu.

One or more general function relays have been forced either on or off.

To view which relays are forced, select PROGRAM/RELAYS/MODES/



An event happened that caused an out of memory condition. This means that an event has been lost by the panel. The printer and Port 3 will discard frames to help relieve the memory problem. The panel will have to have a Hard reboot done.

The extended memory lockout has timed out. The panel will need a

Hard Reboot to correct this problem. Please notify Secutron of the occurrence of this error. Include in your report the panel serial number and the name, date and time of the operating program.

The MR-2920 strip printer is not responding to the panel. Ensure that the ribbon cable is not broken. The MR-2920 may need to be replaced.

The MR-2920 is out of paper. Place a new roll of paper (SE1002) into the printer.

The printer connected to the printer port is not responding to the panel.

Ensure that the cable is not broken. If no printer is being used, reboot the panel to clear this trouble.

The printer connected to the printer port is out of paper. Add paper to it.

16


Message coprocessor class changed not enough ram

Description

One or more of the addressable input circuit modules have been changed from either Class A or B to the other. Reboot the panel to clear this trouble.

The operating program requires more extend RAM then the panel actually has. Certain addressable functions and/or the alarm list may not work. Basic fire detection will continue to operate. Upgrade the RAM in the panel to clear this trouble. This should only appear when upgrading the operating program of panels that have been in the field for a number of years.

17



Canada

Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Tel: (905)-695-3545

Fax: (905)-660-4113

USA



Tel: (888)-660-4655

Fax:(888) 660-4113

M R - 2 6 0 2


I

NSTALLATION

M

ANUAL

Revision: B






Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3















MR-2602 Installation& Operator’s Manual

Contents

1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 The MR-2602 Fire Alarm Control Unit ............................................................................................ 1

1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements........................................................................... 1

1.3 Technical Support and General Information ................................................................................... 2


1.5 Standby Power................................................................................................................................ 2

2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2602 Fire Panel ............................................................................................ 3

2.1 Unpacking the MR-2602 ................................................................................................................. 3

2.2 Optional Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 3

2.3 MR-2602 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 5

2.4 Planning Your Installation ............................................................................................................... 6


2.6 Module Current Ratings .................................................................................................................. 7

2.7 Standby Battery calculation chart ................................................................................................... 7

2.8 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement ................................................................................. 8

3.0 Installing the MR-2602 Fire Panel............................................................................................................ 9

3.1 Environmental Specifications.......................................................................................................... 9

3.2 Panel Assembly and Modules Locations ........................................................................................ 9

3.3 Mounting the MR-2602 ................................................................................................................... 10

4.0 Wiring the MR-2602 ................................................................................................................................. 11

4.1 Wiring Specifications....................................................................................................................... 11

5.0 Panel Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 17

5.1 Operating Sequences ..................................................................................................................... 17

5.2 General Zone Fire Alarms............................................................................................................... 17

5.3 Waterflow Alarms............................................................................................................................ 17

5.4 Supervisory Zone Alarms................................................................................................................ 18

5.5 Trouble Operation ........................................................................................................................... 18

5.6 System Reset Operation................................................................................................................. 20

5.7 Lamp Test ....................................................................................................................................... 20

5.8 Walk Test (Installer function only)................................................................................................... 21

5.9 NAC operation ................................................................................................................................ 22

5.10 Relay Function .............................................................................................................................. 22

6.0 Programming the MR-2602 System......................................................................................................... 23

6.1 How to Program the MR-2602 ........................................................................................................ 23

6.2 Programming Section Descriptions................................................................................................. 25

6.3 Viewing the Event Buffer................................................................................................................. 31

7.0 Startup of the MR-2602............................................................................................................................ 33

7.1 Prior to power up............................................................................................................................. 33

7.2 Power up sequence ........................................................................................................................ 33

7.3 Default Operation............................................................................................................................ 33

7.4 Programming the Panel .................................................................................................................. 33

7.5 Final Verification ............................................................................................................................. 33

8.0 Programming Worksheets ....................................................................................................................... 34

8.1 Entering Programming Mode .......................................................................................................... 34

8.2 Zone Programming (Section 0)....................................................................................................... 35

8.3 NAC Temporal/Steady Programming (Section 1) ........................................................................... 35

8.4 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2) ..................................................................... 35

8.5 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming (Section 3)................................................................. 36

8.6 Waterflow Programming (Section 4) ............................................................................................... 36

8.7 Auto-Verify Programming (Section 5) ............................................................................................ 36 i

MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual

9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors ................................................................................... 37

9.1 Smoke Detector Bases ................................................................................................................... 39

9.2 Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors.............................................................................................. 39

9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes.............................................................................................................. 40

FCC Compliance Statement .......................................................................................................................... 42

Warranty and Warning Information ................................................................................................................ 43

Warning Please Read Carefully............................................................................................................ 43

Limited Warranty................................................................................................................................... 45 ii



1.1 The MR-2602 Fire Alarm Control Unit

General features

• Two initiating device circuits, class B / style B

• Two notification appliance circuits, class B / style Y (Power Limited)

[can be wired as one NAC, class A / style Z]

• One common alarm-actuated relay, form ‘C’

• One common trouble-actuated relay, form ‘C’

• AUX+ power output, 500 mA max. (Power Limited)

• Unswitched common and switched common auxiliary power returns

• Integral battery charger

• Cabinet with dead-front construction

• Transformer, mounted in the cabinet

Applications

The MR-2602 two zone, fire alarm control panel is listed for use in the following applications.

• Protected Premises Fire Alarm System

• And for the following types of service:

A – automatic, M – Manual, SS – Sprinkler Supervisory, WF – Waterflow

1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements

Relevant codes and standards

The MR-2602 fire alarm control panel is designed to meet the requirements of NFPA 72, 1996 edition, UL 864, Control Units for Fire Protective Systems, 1996 edition and in Canada, CAN/ULC-

S527, Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems, 1999 edition.

Information provided with this unit is intended as a guide. Installation of this equipment, optional system components, alarm initiating devices and notification appliances must follow the manufacturer’s guidelines as contained in their respective installation documents, all applicable codes and the instructions of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

General Installation requirements

Manufacturer’s documents

When installing the MR-2602 control panel, refer to this manual. When installing optional system components refer to the installation documents included with those components. When installing compatible alarm initiating devices or notification appliances, refer to the installation documents included with those products.

Field wiring

Field wiring recommendations in this document are intended as guidelines. All field wiring must be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and in Canada with the standard for installation ULC/S 524, the most current Canadian Electrical Code, with all relevant local codes and standards, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

Compatible devices

Use UL or ULC Listed smoke detectors and notification appliances that are compatible with the

MR-2602 Fire alarm control panel from the lists included in this manual.

1


Smoke detector alarm verification:

The MR-2602 alarm initiating zones can be configured for ‘Alarm Verification’. If this feature is used then do not use smoke detectors with built-in Alarm Verification.

Note: Use of alarm verification may require the approval of the local AHJ.

1.3 Technical Support and General Information

For technical support call 1-888-SECUTRON, or email [email protected].

For general product information visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.



• the initial installation is ready for inspection by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction;

• any system component is added, changed or deleted;

• any programming changes are made;

• system wiring has been altered or repaired;

• system failure due to external influences such as lightning, water damage or extended power outages has occurred.

1.5 Standby Power

The MR-2602 provides standby battery support for lead-acid rechargeable batteries. The required capacity of the standby batteries must be calculated using the charts and tables within this manual for the period as required by national or local codes and standards. Even though the calculation table within this manual includes a safety margin, lead-acid batteries commonly used for standby can have variable capacity as a result of age and ambient conditions. Periodic inspection for damage and the batteries’ ability to support the attached equipment is highly recommended.

2


2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2602 Fire Panel



• Cabinet with hinged door

• Display and control plate c/w display and control printed circuit board.

• Zone label insert

• Battery compartment dead front plate

• Main control PCB

• Transformer

• Installation manual

• Hardware pack

-- 2 × NAC EOL resistors (4.7 K, 5%, ½ W)

-- 2 × Zone EOL resistors (4.7 K, 5%, ½ W)

-- 1 × Battery jumper wire

-- 1 × EGND terminal ring

-- 1 × EGND KEP nut


All components described above are factory assembled into the enclosure.

2.2 Optional Accessories

Model Number

MR-2605-R3

Name

MR-2806

MR-2644

MR-2605-T

MR-2605-AT

Programmer

Remote trouble indicator

Remote trouble indicator and alarm annunciator

Description

Provides 3 relays that are jumper programmable to activate on common ‘alarm’,

‘supervisory’ or ‘trouble’. Mounts inside the enclosure and plugs into the main board.

Communicates all alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions to a Central Station using

Contact ID, SIA or 10/20 BPS communication formats. Programmable using the MR-2644 handheld programmer.

Mounts inside the enclosure and connects to the main panel using a supplied 4-wire cable with connector.

Handheld programmer for the MR-2806 DACT.

Single gang plate complete with common trouble buzzer, trouble visual indicator, ‘AC on’ visual indicator and a trouble silence / lamp test switch. Mounts remotely to a single gang electrical box and is connected to the main panel via the 4-wire ‘secur-bus’.

Two gang plate complete with common trouble buzzer, trouble visual indicator, ‘AC on’ visual indicator and a trouble silence / lamp test switch and 2 red zone alarm visual indicators and 2 yellow zone supervisory indictors.

Mounts to a standard 2 gang electrical box and is connected to the panel via the 4-wire ‘securbus’.

3


Model Number

MR-2605-SR

MRD-EOL4.7K

MRD-MP400


EOL supervision relay Supervises the extended power wiring typically used for installations that employ 4-wire smoke detectors. Mounts in the field.

EOLR

EOLR plate

End-of-Line resistor for NAC and Initiating circuits. Mounts in the field.

Single gang plate with EOL resistor. Mounts to a single gang electrical backbox.

4


2.3 MR-2602 Overview

Figure 1: MR-2602 cabinet with door closed

Figure 2: MR-2602 display and controls

Zone Label Insert

A zone label insert is installed in the zone window area.

Reach behind the display/control panel and remove the blank insert. Zone designations can be written directly on the insert or can be created using Word for Windows, printed on Avery label #5167 and applied to the insert.

5


2.4 Planning Your Installation

This system should be installed and serviced by qualified fire alarm installation professionals.

As a minimum, the following points should be considered to ensure that the installation will be successful and proceed without delay.

• Consult with your local AHJ to ensure that the overall system will meet all requirements.

Have your plans reviewed and approved as required.

• Review the electrical specifications, mounting and wiring instructions in this manual and in the manuals of all connected modules and devices.

• Using the chart in this manual, calculate the standby battery size that will meet the standby time required. Include all components that will draw current from the standby battery when the panel is in the ‘standby’ mode.

• Determine the location of the control panel, all initiating and indicating devices and remote modules and mark them on your system layout plan.

• Using the charts in this manual, determine the wire gauge and wire run distances for the connected components. (initiating devices, indicating devices and ‘secur-bus’ connected components.)

• Review the programming section of this manual and determine the operating characteristics required of the initiating zones, indicating zones and common panel features.


Circuit

Primary AC / MR-2602

Primary AC / MR-2602-240

AUX+

SCOM

COM

Relays (common alarm & trouble)

NAC Outputs

Initiating Zone Inputs

Battery Charging Current

Low Battery Trouble

Rating

120 volts, 60 Hz. 1.5 Amps maximum


500 mA maximum

500 mA maximum (current sink)

500 mA maximum (current sink)

Form ‘C’ contact, 2 Amp, 30 V DC resistive, power limited source

24 volts, full-wave rectified DC, 1.5

Amps max. – Power limited. (3.0 Amps total for both NAC circuits) EOLR –

4.7K ohm, ½ W, 5%

24 V DC , 60 mA max.(in alarm) –

Supervisory current: 6.0 mA – max.

Loop resistance: 100 ohms max. –

EOLR: 4.7 K ohm, ½ W, 5%

350mA maximum

Low Battery Trouble: 22.0 V DC

Low Battery Trouble Restore: 23.0 V DC

Critical Shutdown: 19±0.5 V DC

6


2.6 Module Current Ratings

Module

MR-2602 Control panel

MR-2605-T Remote trouble indicator

MR-2605-AT R.T.I. and remote

5 zone annunciator

MR-2806 DACT

MR-2605-R3 Relay module(**)

Standby Current

(mA) DC

90

15

15

45

0

Alarm Current

(mA) DC

425(*)

15

Max. Alarm

Current (mA) DC

485

15

20(*)

60

24

40

60

24

* Current noted assumes ONE initiating zone is in alarm. The “Max. Alarm Current” assumes all zones are in alarm.

** Values shown are for all relays set for activation on ‘Alarm’. Each relay set for activation on

‘trouble’ is normally energized and on ‘AC fail’ will draw 0 mA.

2.7 Standby Battery calculation chart

All components that draw current from the panel while it is in the ‘standby’ mode (AC OFF) must be considered for the standby battery calculation. All components that draw current while in the

‘Alarm’ mode must be considered for the alarm battery calculation.

1.

The control panel will always draw the currents as shown in the chart.

2.

Typically the alarm current is calculated assuming only one initiating zone is in alarm. If it is required that more than one zone be considered, add 60 mA per zone in the Alarm column. Consult the smoke detector manufacture’s installation sheet to determine the standby current of these devices. Write that number in the ‘current per device’ column then multiply that number by the number of devices on the zone. Repeat for each zone.

3.

Consult the Notification Appliance installation sheet to determine the current draw for each device connected to the NAC. For each NAC, calculate the total current in alarm and put that number (mA) in the ‘Alarm’ column. Note: each NAC can supply 1.5 Amps max.

4.

For each added module in the system, multiply the number of modules times the module

‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ currents and write those totals in the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ columns.

5.

Add up all the current drawn from the AUX+ output in the standby and alarm mode and put those totals in the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ columns.

6.

Add up all the currents in the ‘standby’ column and the ‘Alarm’ column.

7.

Convert the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ currents from mA to Amps. (divide mA by 1000)

8.

Write in the ‘standby’ time required. (24 or 60 Hr.)

9.

Multiply the ‘standby’ Amps times the ‘standby’ time to get the ‘standby’ Amp-Hr. required.

10. Write in the ‘alarm’ time required in hours. (5 min. = .08 Hr.)

11. Multiply the ‘alarm’ Amps times the ‘alarm’ time to get the ‘alarm’ Amp-Hr required.

12. Add the ‘standby’ Amp-Hr. to the ‘alarm’ Amp-Hr. for the total Amp-Hr. required.

13. Multiply the total Amp-Hr. times 1.20 for the minimum Amp-Hr. battery required to support the system for the selected ‘standby time and the selected ‘alarm’ time.

7


2.8 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement

1

2

3

4

5

9

10

11

12

6

7

8

13

14

Step Device

Current per device

(mA)

MR-2602 Standby:

Zone 1

Alarm:

Standby:

Zone 2

Alarm:

Standby:

Alarm:

Alarm: NAC 1

NAC 2

MR-2605-T

MR-2605-AT

Alarm:

Standby:

Alarm:

Standby:

90

365

60

60

MR-2806

MR-2605-R3

Alarm:

Standby:

Alarm:

Standby:

AUX+

Alarm:

Standby:

Alarm:

Total ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ current:

25

45

60

0

24

15

15

15

Divide ‘standby’ mA and ‘alarm’ mA by 1000:

Select ‘standby’ time required (24 or 60 Hr.):

Standby Amp-Hr. - multiply 6 × 7 = (Amps × Hr.):

Select ‘alarm’ time required (.08):

Alarm Amp-Hr. - multiply 6 × 9 = (Amps × Hr.):

Total Amp-Hr = standby Amp-Hr (8) + alarm Amp-Hr. (10):

Multiply the total Amp-Hr. by the safety margin:

Total battery Amp-Hr required to support the system: x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 x 1 x x 1 x x 1 x

Number of device

=

=

=

=

=

= 90

=

=

Total

Standby

Current

(mA)

=

=

= mA

Amp

Hr.

1.20

Total

Alarm

Current

(mA)

365

60 mA

Amp

Amp-Hr.

Hr.

Amp-Hr.

Amp-Hr.

Amp-Hr.

Select a battery with an Amp-Hr. rating that is equal to or larger than the calculated minimum Amp-

Hr. battery required. Note: The maximum battery allowed is 12 Ah.

8


3.0 Installing the MR-2602 Fire Panel

3.1 Environmental Specifications

Consider the following conditions when selecting a mounting location for the MR-2602 panel:

• Operating temperature: 32°F to 122°F / 0°C to 50°C

• Humidity: 95% RH non-condensing

• Close to a source of unswitched AC power

3.2 Panel Assembly and Modules Locations

The panel comes completely assembled from the factory. Remove the lower dead front for access to the battery compartment. Remove display control panel for access to AC connections.

Do not run power limited wiring into this area

MR-2602 = 120 VAC

MR-2602-240 = 240 VAC

9


3.3 Mounting the MR-2602

Mounting Dimensions

Dimensions in inches

Knockout Locations

10


4.0 Wiring the MR-2602

4.1 Wiring Specifications

MR-2602 Terminal Descriptions

Terminal

Label

NAC 1

(+, –)

NAC 2

(+, –)

AUX+

COM

SCOM

DAT

CLK

TRB NO

TRB C

TRB NC

ALM NO

ALM C

Description

Notification Appliance Circuit # 1

24 V

DC

, Full-Wave Rectified voltage, 1.5 Amps max.

Programmable as Steady or Temporal output on alarm.

Supervised for opens, shorts and ground fault.

Power limited.


24 V

DC

, Full-Wave Rectified voltage, 1.5 Amps max.



Power limited

Auxiliary power output

24 V

DC

, filtered and regulated, 500 mA max., 400 mV

P-P ripple, power limited.

Auxiliary common power return, unswitched

24 V

DC

, 500 mA max.

Auxiliary common power return, switched

(open circuit on system reset or on 4-wire smoke detector reset)

24 V

DC

, 500 mA max. (Please refer to Appendix A for compatible 4-wire smoke detectors.)

Data line for remote module communications

Clock line for remote module communications

Common Trouble relay, Normally Open contact

Common Trouble relay, Common contact

Common Trouble relay, Normally Closed contact

The Common Trouble relay is normally energized and is de-energized on trouble.

Contacts are shown in the de-energized state.

Contacts are rated 30 V

DC

, 2 Amps.

Common Alarm relay, Normally Open contact

Common Alarm relay, Common contact

11


Terminal

Label

ALM NC

Description

Z1+

Z1-

Z2+

Z2 -

Common Alarm relay, Normally Closed contact

The Common Alarm relay is normally de-energized.

Contact is shown in the de-energized state.

Contacts are rated 30 V DC , 2 Amps max.

Zone 1 positive input

Zone 1 negative input

Zone output is 24 V DC nominal to power 2-wire smoke detectors. Maximum current draw is 60 mA in alarm and is limited by the zone circuitry. Zones may be configured to monitor both 2-wire smoke detectors and initiating devices that employ dry contacts.

(pullstations & heat detectors)

Same as zone 1 positive

Same as zone 1 negative

Connecting 2-Wire Alarm Initiating Devices

Typical

* See “9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors” on page 37 in this manual for a list of compatible 2-wire smoke detectors.

1.

Maximum 30 smoke detectors per zone (100 µA each standby).

2.

Manual station, heat detector.

3.

Maximum total loop wire resistance = 100 ohms.

4.

Program zone as:

Type 1 - Smoke and contact devices instant alarm (default)

Type 2 - Smoke auto-verify and contact as instant.

12

Connecting 4-Wire Smoke Detectors


1.

Program as zone type 01, instant or 05, 4-wire smoke auto-verify. When programmed as type 05, do not mix 2-wire smoke detectors or contacts from other alarm initiating devices on the zone.

2.

Maximum total loop wire resistance is 100 ohms.

Zone Wiring Chart:

Wire

(Gauge)

18

16

14

Distance

(feet)

7,690

12,195

19,230

Distance

(meters)

2,345

3,717

5,861

Maximum loop resistance is

100 ohms. Maximum current in alarm is 60 mA.

Connecting NAC Devices (Class ‘A’ and Class ‘B’)

Class ‘B’

Class ‘A’

13


NAC Wiring Chart

Maximum

Total

Loop

(ohms)

Maximum

Current

(A)

18-Awg Wire 16-Awg Wire 14-Awg Wire 12-Awg Wire ft m ft m ft m ft m

8.00

5.00

2.70

2.00

0.25

0.50

0.75

1.00

615

308

205

154

188

94

63

47

978

488

325

244

297

149

99

74

1,538 469

769 235

513

385

156

117

2,500 762

1,250 381

833

625

254

191

1.60

1.30

1.25

1.50

123

103

38

31

195

163

59

50

308

256

94

78

500

417

152

127

Note: This chart is based on a minimum source voltage of 22 volts and a maximum line loss of 2 volts thus leaving a minimum of 20 volts at the last notification appliance.

Connecting Batteries

Connecting AC Power

Connecting the Alarm and Trouble Relays

14


Connecting Optional Devices

See installation sheets for the remote devices for detailed wiring and address setup.

1.

Maximum of 4 MR-2605-T per panel.

2.

Maximum of 4 MR-2605-AT per panel.

Secur-bus Wiring Chart

Current

(mA)*

22-awg Wire 18-awg Wire 16-awg Wire 14-awg Wire ft ft ft m ft m ft m

15

30

45

60

75

90

105

120

2,524

1,262

842

631

505

421

361

315

769

384

256

192

154

128

110

96

6,410 1,954 10,160

3,200 976 5,080

2,135 651

1,600 488

3,385

2,540

1,280 390

1,065 325

915

800

279

244

2,030

1,690

1,450

1,270

3,098

1,549

1,032

774

619

515

442

387

16,000

8,000

5,340

4,000

3,200

2,670

2,285

2,000

135

150

165

180

281

252

229

210

86

77

70

64

710

640

580

530

216

195

177

162

1,125

1,015

920

845

343

309

280

258

1,780

1,600

1,455

1,335

543

488

444

407

195

210

194

180

59

55

490

455

149

139

780

725

238

221

1,230

1,145

375

349

225 168 51 425 130 675 206 1,065 325

*See module current ratings chart for current drawn by each module attached to the securbus.

4,878

2,439

1,628

1,220

976

814

697

610

To calculate the wire run distance for any gauge wire and any maximum current value, use the following formula:

Rmax = 1.25

Imax

Amps ohms

Distance = Rmax × 1,000

2(wire resistance in ohms per 1,000 feet) feet

15


Secur-bus Capacitance

Maximum wire capacitance for proper operation of the Secur-bus is 90 nF (nanofarad). Typical wire capacitance for 22 awg quad cable is 20 nF per 1,000 feet. Thus, for 22 awg quad cable, the maximum wire run distance is ((90/20)× 1,000) = 4,500 feet . Other types of wire have different capacitance values. Consult the wire manufacturer’s data sheets for typical capacitance values.

Please note that shielded wire has a much higher capacitance value and distances are severely reduced.

The following devices may be connected to the Secur-bus. All devices are supervised. See section for adding and deleting devices on the Secur-bus.

Devices

MR-2605-T

MR-2605-AT

MR-2806

Description

External to control panel.

Up to 4 of each device may be connected.

Mounted inside control panel. See diagram in “3.3

Mounting the MR-2602” on page 10.

Notes:

1.

Do not run the Secur-bus adjacent to sources of high transient noise such as AC wiring, telephone cable bundles or computer wiring.

2.

If the Secure-bus must go through a high transient area, use shielded cable.

3.

If shielded cable is used, the distances in the chart above are cut in half.

16


5.0 Panel Operation

5.1 Operating Sequences

This section describes how the panel functions under various conditions. The choices you make in panel programming will also affect how the panel operates. Please see “6.0 Programming the

MR-2602 System” on page 23 for information on how to program the panel, and descriptions of each of the programming options.

5.2 General Zone Fire Alarms

Zone alarms have priority over all other annunciation. When an alarm occurs, the following happens:

• The corresponding zone alarm LED begins flashing, the common alarm LED turns on steady, and the alarm relay turns on.

• If a trouble was present on that zone then the zone trouble LED turns off. If the trouble buzzer is audible then it also turns off.

• The NACs sound in a steady or temporal pattern, depending on the option selected (see

“NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)” on page 28).

• If enabled, the silence inhibit timer begins counting down (see “Signal Silence Inhibit

Timer” on page 29). If the silence inhibit timer is enabled, the panel cannot be silenced for

60 seconds following the first fire alarm. Subsequent fire alarms do not restart or extend this timer. While the signal silence inhibit timer is counting down, if the Silence Alarm button is pressed the panel will sound a 1 second ‘error tone’ on the common trouble buzzer.

• The NACs remain on until silenced with the Silence Alarm button, or if the automatic alarm silence is enabled, until the thirty minute bell timer runs out (see “Automatic Signal

Silence” on page 29). If the automatic silence timer is enabled, the panel will automatically silence the NACs 30 minutes after the last fire alarm. Each zone alarm will restart the timer, giving a full 30 minutes after the last alarm before the NACs are silenced.

• Once the NACs are silenced the signals silenced LED turns on and any flashing zone alarm LEDs turn on steady. The common trouble LED and trouble relay also turn on and, if the NACs have been silenced automatically , the buzzer will sound at a rate of ½ second

ON/OFF.

Note: A manual signal silence will not initiate the trouble buzzer. Only the common trouble

LED and signals silenced LED are turned on.

• Any additional zone alarms that occur while the panel is in alarm will reset the auto alarm silence timer and turn on the NACs, but the panel will not restart the 60 second silence inhibit timer.

• The zone alarm LEDs, common alarm LED and alarm relay will remain on steady until a system reset is performed.

5.3 Waterflow Alarms

If the Waterflow Silence option is turned off (see “Silence Waterflow Alarms” on page 30), when a waterflow zone (type 03) initiates an alarm the NACs cannot be silenced until all waterflow zones are returned to normal. If all waterflow zones return to normal after the 30 minute automatic signal silence timer has expired, then the panel will silence the NACs.

If the Waterflow Silence option is turned on, then an alarm on a waterflow zone is treated like any other fire alarm.

Waterflow alarms may be delayed by 60 seconds to prevent false alarms from surges in the sprinkler system. The delay is common to all zones programmed as ‘waterflow’, type 03 zones. If the delay is not used, all waterflow alarms will be instant.

17


5.4 Supervisory Zone Alarms

When an alarm occurs on a supervisory zone (type 04), the corresponding zone supervisory LED begins flashing. The common supervisory LED and supervisory relay (supervisory relay is optional) turn on steady, and the buzzer turns on steady. If there was a trouble on that zone, the zone trouble LED turns off. The buzzer remains on until the trouble silence button is pressed.

Once the buzzer is silenced any flashing zone supervisory LEDs turn on steady. The zone supervisory LEDs, common supervisory LED and supervisory relay remain on steady until a system reset is performed.

Subsequent Fire Supervisory

After silencing a fire supervisory, a subsequent fire supervisory from another zone will resound the trouble/supervisory buzzer and the new zone supervisory LED flashes until the Silence Trouble button is pressed.

Supervisory / Trouble Priority

If a supervisory zone has a trouble and it goes into alarm, the zone trouble LED is extinguished until that zone is restored and the panel has been reset. The common trouble LED will remain on steady until all supervisory alarms have been restored and the panel reset. All other ‘common’ trouble indicators will operate normally.

Supervisory / Fire Alarm Priority

The supervisory zone LED, the common supervisory LED and the buzzer (in the steady supervisory mode) function normally whether there is a fire alarm present or not.

5.5 Trouble Operation

When a trouble occurs, if there is a corresponding trouble LED it turns on steady. The common trouble LED and the trouble relay also turn on. If no alarm is present on the system, the buzzer will sound at a rate of ½ second ON/OFF. The buzzer and trouble LEDs will remain on until the trouble is restored. If the Silence Trouble button is pressed, the buzzer turns off. Subsequent troubles will resound the trouble buzzer.

If there is no trouble present in the system then pressing the Silence Trouble button will result in a

1 second error tone.

Please see the following table for a list of system faults that will initiate a trouble.

18


System Troubles

System faults

Common

Trouble

LED

Alarm zone open circuit – loss of EOLR turns on

NAC open circuit or short circuit

Battery low voltage or disconnected

Signals silenced - automatically

Ground on extended conductor

AC fails completely, or is low for more than 10 seconds

(brownout)

Installer Programming Mode

Active

Loss of Remote Trouble Unit

Loss of Remote Alarm/

Trouble Unit

TLM on one or both telephone lines (Dialer)

Failure to communicate

(Dialer)

Unsuccessful system reset

Loss of Dialer module turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on flashes turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on

Buzzer sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off

Trouble

Relay

Other Indicators deactivates Zone trouble LED turns on steady deactivates NAC1 or NAC2 trouble LED turns on deactivates Battery LED turns on deactivates Signals Silenced

LED turns on deactivates Ground LED turns on deactivates AC LED turns off deactivates AC LED turns off deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates

19


5.6 System Reset Operation

To reset the system, press the ‘Reset System’ button. The panel will remove all power from the zones and the switched auxiliary relay for 10 seconds. During this 10 second period, the buzzer will beep twice every 2 seconds.

The panel can only be reset if:

• the NACs have been silenced

• the supervisory buzzer has been silenced

• and all waterflow zones are restored (only applies if the Silence Waterflow option is turned off - see “Silence Waterflow Alarms” on page 30).

If the panel is not in a condition to be reset, when the ‘Reset System’ button is pressed the panel will sound a 1 second error tone on the buzzer.

After the 10 second reset period, the panel will turn off the zone LED for any zones that have been restored. If one or more zones is still in alarm after the reset period, the panel will activate the

NACs as programmed. If there are no alarms but one or more Supervisory zones is still ‘offnormal’ after the reset period, the panel will sound the trouble buzzer in the Supervisory mode. If there are no alarms or supervisory conditions but a trouble is present in the panel after the reset period, the panel will sound the trouble buzzer. After the reset period, LEDs for any alarms, supervisory off-normal or trouble conditions will be on.

5.7 Lamp Test

The lamp test will check all of the panel and annunciator LEDs. To do a lamp test, press and hold the Lamp Test button. All the LEDs will flash.

A lamp test will only work if the NACs are not active and the supervisory buzzer is not active. If a lamp test is unsuccessful the buzzer will sound a 1 second error tone. If any trouble or zone has a state change during lamp test, the lamp test will be cancelled and the panel will return to normal operation.

20


5.8 Walk Test (Installer function only)

To do a walk test, all zone alarms, troubles and relays must be in their normal state. You can program the walk test to be either audible or silent (see “Audible Walk Test” on page 29).

1.

To walk test the panel press the Walk Test button. The common trouble LED flashes and the buzzer sounds one short beep. The panel will be in walk test mode for one hour, or until you press the Walk Test button again.

2.

As you test each part of the system, the panel will give the following indications:

Type of activation LEDs NACs*

Trouble

Buzzer

Fire Alarm or Fire

Supervisory

Fire Alarm or Fire

Supervisory Restoral

Zone or System Trouble


Restoral

Zone alarm/

Supv LED turns on

Zone alarm/

Supv LED turns off

Zone or system trouble LED turns on

Zone or system trouble LED turns off

1 squawk

1 squawk

2 squawks

2 squawks

Sounds

Stops sounding

Ground Fault Ground trouble LED turns on

3 squawks Sounds

Ground Fault Restoral Ground trouble LED turns off

*Only if Walk Test Audible option is turned on.

3 squawks Stops sounding

Zone LEDs operate normally except that alarms do not latch - the alarm LEDs will turn off when the zone is restored and the auto-reset has been successful.

Alarm and trouble relays are NOT activated. If used, any remote connection is not activated.

3.

To return the system to normal operation, press the Walk Test button. If you do not press the Walk Test button, the system will return to normal operation after one hour. If any zones are in alarm at the end of the walk test, the zones will indicate silenced signals.

The Lamp Test button does not work while the panel is in Walk Test mode.

21


5.9 NAC operation

See also “NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)” on page 28, and “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29 for more information.

Class ‘B’ operation selections:

• Steady (default) – On alarm the NAC will turn on steady. It will turn off on either a manual or automatic signal silence.

• Temporal 3 – On alarm the NAC will turn on with the temporal 3 pattern and turn off on either a manual or automatic signal silence.

• NAC2 Strobe – On alarm NAC2 will turn on steady. It will not turn off on a manual or automatic signal silence. NAC2 set in this mode will only turn off on system reset if all zone fire alarms are restored. Only NAC2 can be set in this mode.

Class ‘A’ operation selections

If the panel NACs are set for class ‘A’ operation then there is only one NAC. In this configuration the NAC output can only be set for steady or temporal using the NAC1 programming options For class ‘A’, the NAC2 Strobe option is not available.

5.10 Relay Function

Alarm Relay

The panel activates the alarm relay upon any (non-supervisory) zone alarm. The panel deactivates the alarm relay upon a successful system reset.

Trouble Relay

The panel deactivates the trouble relay upon any system trouble. The panel activates the trouble relay upon the restoral of all system troubles.

Supervisory Relay (available with the MR-2602-R3 Relay Expander only)

The panel activates the supervisory relay upon any supervisory zone alarm. The panel deactivates the supervisory relay upon a successful system reset.

22


6.0 Programming the MR-2602 System

6.1 How to Program the MR-2602

You can program the panel using the controls and indicator LEDs. There are no DIP switches to set for programming.

Once programmed, the operating modes selected are maintained in non-volatile memory that will retain the programmed information even if all power is removed from the panel.

Entering the Programming mode

All zone alarms must be reset prior to entering the programming mode. While the panel is in programming mode, the annunciators will show a trouble condition.

1.

Remove the lower front cover and locate the ‘Walk Test Switch’ behind the control panel

PCB, as shown below.

2.

Press and hold the Walk Test Switch for two seconds. The common trouble buzzer and common trouble LED turn on and pulse ½ second on/off.

3.

Press any button. The trouble buzzer is silent, and the zone 1 alarm LED turns on steady.

The common trouble LED continues to flash.

4.

The panel is now ready to program.

Programming the Panel

The control panel has six different programming sections, which are shown in the table below. The

Panel Status LEDs indicate which programming section you are currently in.

23


When you first enter programming mode, the panel will be at zone programming (section 0). Each programming section has one or more programming sub-sections (e.g. section 0 has sub-sections for zones 1 through 5). Use the Silence Trouble and Silence Alarm buttons to enter your programming choices:

1.

Each sub-section in a section will have 2 or more programming settings, indicated by the panel Zone Supervisory and Zone Trouble LEDs. To scroll through the programming settings, press the Silence Alarm button. Please see “6.2 Programming Section Descriptions” on page 25 for descriptions of each section and settings, and the LED indications for each setting.

2.

When the LEDs show the setting you want for a sub-section, move to the next programming sub-section by pressing the Silence Trouble button. The panel will save the indicated settings when you exit the programming mode or go to the next programming section.

3.

When you have programmed all the sub-sections in a section, the panel will move to the next programming section when you press the Silence Trouble button.

Pressing Silence Trouble will advance forward through each programming sub-section, and each section.

Example: in the Zone 1 programming sub-section, pressing Silence Alarm will scroll through each zone type setting (null zone, instant zone, auto-verify zone, etc.). When the panel shows the zone type you want for zone 1, press Silence Trouble to move on to Zone 2 programming.

Exiting the Programming Mode

When you come to the end of all the programming sections, press Silence Trouble to exit the programming mode.

To exit programming mode at any other point in the panel programming, press and hold the Walk

Test switch for two seconds.

If 5 minutes elapse without any button presses, the panel will automatically exit the programming mode. During the final 60 seconds before the exit, the panel will sound a warning tone on the buzzer. Press any button to cancel the auto-exit and resume programming.

After you exit the programming mode, the panel performs a system reset for 10 seconds, during which the buzzer sounds double beeps. When the beeping stops the panel returns to normal operating mode and all programming choices are stored in memory.

24


6.2 Programming Section Descriptions

Zone Programming (Section 0)

In this zone programming section, the panel uses the zone alarm, supervisory, and trouble LEDs to indicate the programming as follows:

Zone type 00 – Null zone (Not used)

The zone is not used. The zone is not supervised, alarms and troubles are ignored. The end-of-line resistor is not required.

Zone type 01 – Instant alarm for 2-wire smoke detectors and contact devices

Zone type 01 does not differentiate between 2-wire smoke detectors, contact devices, or 4-wire smoke detectors. When a

2-wire smoke detector, 4 –wire smoke detector or contact device goes into alarm:

1.

The panel goes into alarm without any delay. If an instant zone goes into alarm, any auto-verify sequence in progress on another zone will be immediately cancelled and both zones will indicate an alarm condition.

25


Zone type 02 - Auto-Verify for 2-wire smoke detectors

Zone type 02 can distinguish between 2-wire smoke detector activation and contact activation. This allows you to have manual pullstations and smoke detectors on the same 2-wire zone. With this zone type, smoke detector activation starts the auto-verify sequence, and a contact closure (pullstation activation) initiates an immediate alarm.

When a 2-wire smoke detector on an auto-verify zone goes into alarm:

1.

Power is removed from the zone for 25 seconds to reset the smoke detector(s).

2.

After the verification period starts (power removed) if any contact device on that zone is activated, the verification sequence is cancelled, and the panel goes into immediate alarm.

3.

Power is restored to the zone at the end of the 25 second reset period.

4.

For the next 95 seconds, any smoke detector or contact device that goes into alarm will cause the panel to immediately go into alarm, activate the NACs, the visual indicators and the common alarm relay.

5.

If during the total verification period (120 sec.), any other zone on the panel goes into alarm, the verification sequence is cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm.

6.

If two auto-verify zones activate simultaneously, both verification sequences are cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm.

When a contact alarm initiating device (pullstation) on an autoverify zone goes into alarm:

1.

The panel immediately goes into alarm. Any auto-verification sequence that may be active will be cancelled.

26


Zone type 03 – Waterflow zone

This zone type is intended for waterflow alarm initiating contact devices only. Do not mix other alarm initiating devices on this zone. You can set the panel to include a fixed timer that will delay all ‘Waterflow’ type zone alarms for 60 seconds.

CAUTION: Do not use the waterflow delay timer when:

• The monitored Waterflow alarm actuating devices have a built-in delay of 30 seconds or more. The overall maximum waterflow alarm initiation delay allowed is 90 seconds.

(NFPA A-5-6.2 – 1996 edition)

• The sprinkler system includes ‘ON/OFF’ type sprinkler heads. Such sprinkler heads can cycle on and off within 30 seconds thus preventing an alarm from being registered.

When the contact on a Waterflow alarm initialing device is activated:

1.

If the waterflow delay is not used, the control panel will go into alarm instantly.

2.

If the waterflow delay is used, the waterflow timer will start on the first waterflow alarm. Subsequent waterflow alarms will not restart the 60 second timer.

Once the 60 second time expires, if any waterflow zones are still in alarm, the panel will initiate an immediate alarm. If all waterflow zones have restored at the end of the 60 seconds, an alarm will not be initiated.

Zone type 04 – Supervisory zone

When the contact on a Supervisory device is initiated:

1.

The control panel will immediately indicate the Supervisory

“off-normal” condition.

2.

The zone supervisory LED (yellow) will flash, the common

‘supervisory’ LED will come on steady and the common trouble buzzer will sound steadily. Pressing the ‘trouble silence’ switch will silence the buzzer and the zone supervisory LED will stop flashing and turn on steadily.

3.

Fire supervisory zones are latching and can only be restored when the initiating device is restored and a system reset is performed.

27


Zone type 05 – Auto-verify for four-wire smoke detectors

This zone type is intended for the alarm initiating contacts from

4-wire smoke detectors only and provides the ability to autoverify alarms from those smoke detectors.

CAUTION: Do not mix alarm initiating or supervisory initiating devices on the same zone with 4-wire smoke detector alarm initiating contacts.


1.

The panel open circuits the ‘SCOM’ line, removing power from all 4-wire smoke detectors in the system.

2.

At the end of the 25 second reset period, power is restored to the zone and to all 4-wire smoke detectors. For 95 seconds following the reset period, if any smoke detector on that zone is still in alarm, the panel will activate the NACs as programmed, the visual indicators and the common alarm relay.

3.

If during the total verification period (120 seconds), any other zone on the panel goes into alarm, the verification sequence is cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm. If two auto-verify zones activate simultaneously, both verification sequences are cancelled and the panel goes into alarm without any delay.

NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)

You can individually program both NAC1 and NAC2 to sound in either a temporal or steady pattern. By default, both NAC outputs are programmed as steady.

Temporal

The NAC1 will sound the Temporal/ANSI Fire Pattern: 0.5

seconds ON, 0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 0.5 seconds

OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 1.5 seconds OFF, repeat.

The NAC2 will sound the Temporal/ANSI Fire Pattern: 0.5

seconds ON, 0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 0.5 seconds

OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 1.5 seconds OFF, repeat.

Steady

The NAC1 will sound continuously.


28


NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)

Automatic Signal Silence

If Automatic Signal Silence is enabled, 30 minutes after the last fire alarm on the system, the panel restores the NACs to normal

(alarms are silenced).

If another alarm occurs after the NACs are silenced, the panel will restart the timer for another 30 minute period.

If Automatic Signal Silence is disabled, the panel will not silence the NACs automatically.

NAC2 Strobe

If this option is enabled, on alarm, NAC2 turns on steady and does not turn off on automatic signal silence, or when the

Silence Alarm button is pressed. When NAC2 is set to this mode, it can only be turned off when all zone fire alarms are restored, and the system is reset. Only NAC2 can be set to this mode.

If this option is disabled, the panel will restore NAC2 to normal following an automatic signal silence (see Automatic Signal

Silence, above), or following a press of the ‘Silence Alarm’ button.

Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)

Signal Silence Inhibit Timer

If the Signal Silence Inhibit Timer is enabled, when the first alarm is activated, the panel will begin a 60 second countdown. During this 60 seconds, users will not be able to turn off the NACs by pressing the Silence Alarm button. The timer is started on the first alarm only and is not restarted on subsequent alarms.

If the Signal Silence Inhibit Timer is disabled, users will be able to turn off the NACs at any time, by pressing the Silence Alarm button.

If NAC2 is set as a strobe, users will never be able to turn off

NAC2 using the Silence Alarm button. See “NAC2 Strobe” on page 28.

Audible Walk Test

You can set the One Man Walk Test to be either audible or silent.

If the One Man Walk Test is set for audible, then the following will occur:

• On a fire or Supervisory alarm/restoral the bells will pulse

ONCE

• On a zone or system trouble/restoral, except ground fault, the bells will pulse TWICE

• On any ground fault/restoral the bells will pulse THREE times.

If the One Man Walk Test is set for silent, the bells will not sound during the walk test.

29


Waterflow Programming - Section 4 (‘Ground Fault’ LED on steady)

Delay Waterflow Alarms

If the Waterflow Alarm Delay option is turned on, the panel will start a 60 second timer when the first Waterflow zone goes into alarm. The panel will not restart the timer on subsequent

Waterflow zone alarms. When the timer expires, if any waterflow zone is still in alarm, the panel will immediately go into alarm. If any other type of fire zone goes into alarm during the waterflow delay countdown, the panel will immediately go into alarm in response to that zone.

If the Waterflow Alarm Delay option is turned off, alarms on

Waterflow zones will cause an immediate alarm in the panel.

Silence Waterflow Alarms

If the Silence Waterflow Alarms option is turned on, Waterflow zones can be silenced whether the zones are physically restored or not.

If the Silence Waterflow Alarms option is turned off, Waterflow zones cannot be silenced until they are physically restored. This applies to both automatic signal silence, and the Silence Alarm button. If there is a trouble on a Waterflow zone following the alarm and alarm restore, the zone can be silenced.

Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)

If the Auto Verify Fault is Alarm option is turned on, the following will occur:

• if a zone initiates an auto-verify sequence and returns from power down in the trouble state, the system will treat this as an ALARM condition and assume that the circuit has been forced open by fire. Please see “Zone Programming (Section

0)” on page 25 for more information on auto-verify zones.

If the Auto Verify Fault is Trouble option is turned on, the following will occur:

• if a zone initiates an auto-verify sequence and returns from power down in the trouble state, the system will treat this as an TROUBLE condition. Please see “Zone Programming

(Section 0)” on page 25 for more information on auto-verify zones.

50/60 Hz Option

30


Reset Section Programming (All common trouble LEDs flashing)

To Enter this Programming Section

1.

Enter the installer programming mode, section 0

2.

Press and hold the System Reset button for 2 seconds. The Z1 ALM LED and TRB

LED will be ON and all the System Trouble LEDs will flash.

To Remove Module

Physically remove the module from the system and enter the reset section programming as described above. Press the ‘Silence Alarm’ button until the Z1 SUPV LED is ON. Press the

‘Silence Trouble ’ button to exit this section. Upon exit, the system will reset the ‘supervision’ field for all the modules currently connected to the ‘secur-bus’.

To Add a Module

Just connect it to the system and it will auto-enroll within one minute.

Do not default (Z2)

(Factory default )

ALARM SUPV

Default to factory program (Z2)

TRB

To Default the System

Enter the reset section programming as described above. Press the ‘Silence Trouble’ button until the Z2 ALM LED is ON and Z2

TRB LED is ON. Press the ‘Silence Alarm’ button until the Z2

SUPV LED is ON. Press the ‘Silence Trouble’ to exit this section.

Upon exit, the system will reset all of the panel programmable parameters to their factory default state. Please note that the

‘supervision’ field will be reset as well.

6.3 Viewing the Event Buffer

1.

Enter the programming mode by pressing and holding the Walk Test switch for 2 seconds.

2.

Press any switch. To silence the trouble buzzer and enter the Section 0 programming.

3.

Press and hold the Lamp Test switch for 2 seconds.

4.

The Common Supervisory LED flashes to indicate the View Buffer mode.

5.

Events are shown from the most recent to the oldest.

6.

See the event table below which indicates the LED patterns used to indicate various events.

7.

To advance to the next event press the Silence Trouble switch.

8.

Once all 20 events have been viewed, the next Silence Trouble keypress will exit the view buffer mode and return to the Section 0 programming. To exit the programming mode, press and hold for 2 seconds the Walk Test switch.

9.

Pressing the Silence Signal switch at any time will cause the system to exit the View

Buffer mode. The buzzer will sound. Press any button to go to the Section 0 programming mode.

Event Buffer Table

Display

Steady Common Alarm LED

Flashing Zone X Alarm LED

Steady Zone X Alarm LED

Event

Null Event

Verified Zone X Alarm


Restore

31


Display Event

Flashing Zone X Alarm LED and Flashing

Zone X Supervisory LED

Flashing Zone X Supervisory LED

Steady Zone X Supervisory LED

Flashing Zone X Trouble LED

Steady Zone X Trouble LED

Flashing Common Trouble LED

Steady Common Trouble LED

Flashing NAC1 Trouble LED

Steady NAC1 Trouble LED



Flashing Battery Trouble LED

Steady Battery Trouble LED

Flashing Ground Fault LED

Steady Ground Fault LED

Flashing Signal Silenced Trouble LED

Steady Signal Silenced Trouble LED

Flashing AC On LED

Steady AC On LED

Steady AC On LED and Steady BAT TRB

LED

Flashing AC On LED and Flashing BAT

TRB LED

Flashing (ALL) Zone Trouble LED’s

Unverified Zone X Alarm

Zone X Supervisory

Zone X Supervisory Restore

Zone X Trouble

Zone X Trouble Restore

Expansion Module Fault


Restore

NAC 1 Trouble

NAC 1 Trouble Restore

NAC 2 Trouble


Battery Trouble

Battery Trouble Restore

Ground Fault Trouble

Ground Fault Restore

Manual Signal Silence

(Successful) Reset

AC Failure

AC Fail Restore

Cold Start

Warm Start

Steady (ALL) Zone Trouble LED’s

Walk Test Start / Installer

Mode Entry

Walk Test End / Installer

Mode Exit

32


7.0 Startup of the MR-2602

7.1 Prior to power up

• Verify that all field wiring is free of shorts, opens and grounds and that end-of-line devices are connected and are the proper value.

• Verify that all modules and internal cables are properly seated in their location.

• Verify that all metal components are bonded to the incoming ground. Should measure zero ohms between any metal part and the incoming ground wire.

• Verify that the polarity between the panel and connected devices is correct.

7.2 Power up sequence

• Connect the battery FIRST. The panel will not power up on the battery alone.

• Apply AC power. The panel will power up as follows:

• The panel goes into the Reset mode immediately. This lasts for 10 seconds and the trouble buzzer will beep during the reset period.

• After the reset period ends, the buzzer goes silent, the green AC indicator should be ON and all other LEDs should be OFF.

• If any LED other than the AC LED is ON then there is a fault in the system. Troubleshoot and repair the fault before proceeding.

• If the battery is not fully charged, the battery fault LED will come on after about 2 minutes.

Verify that the battery is connected properly and if it is, it may take up to 24 hours to recharge the batteries. Once the battery is charged, the battery fault LED will go OFF.

7.3 Default Operation

• On first power up, all programmable features will be in the default mode.

• Do a ‘Lamp Test’ to verify that all the indicators function.

• It is suggested that an initial verification of operation be done before the panel is programmed. Verify that each zone will go into alarm and that each NAC operates the

Notification Appliances and that the zone alarm indicator(s) function. Each zone is defaulted as an instant ‘fire alarm’ and each NAC is defaulted for ‘steady’ output on alarm.

An Alarm, Silence, Reset cycle will also verify that the push-button function properly.

• Verify that each zone indicates a trouble on a zone open and that a ground fault on the extended conductors is properly indicated.

7.4 Programming the Panel

• Program the panel for the operational features desired. (section 6)

• Record your configuration choices for future reference. (section 8)

• Verify panel operations and feature selections by initiating alarms and troubles as described above.

7.5 Final Verification

• Verify system operation and fault detection as required by the local Authority Having

Jurisdiction.

• Enable the ‘one-man’ walk test feature to test all the field devices and wiring.

33


8.0 Programming Worksheets

8.1 Entering Programming Mode

Please see “6.0 Programming the MR-2602 System” on page 23 for complete instructions.

All zone alarms must be reset prior to entering the programming mode. While the panel is in the programming mode, the annunciators will show a trouble condition.

To enter the Programming mode:

1.

Press and hold the Walk Test button for two seconds (located behind the display PCB).

2.

Press any button to turn off the trouble buzzer.

3.

Press Silence Alarm to scroll through the settings for each programming section (e.g. to change the zone type, or to turn an option on or off).

4.

Press Silence Trouble to move to the next programming section (e.g. to move from zone

1 to zone 2).

5.

The panel will indicate the current programming section using the Common Trouble LEDs, as shown below .

34

Please see “6.2 Programming Section Descriptions” on page 25 for detailed descriptions of each programming section.


8.2 Zone Programming (Section 0)

Program each of the zones as one of the following types. (See “Zone Programming (Section 0)” on page 25.) Record your programming choices in the table below.

1

2

ZONE

ALARM

LED On

1

2

Zone

No.

Type

(00 - 05)

Label

8.3 NAC Temporal/Steady Programming (Section 1)

Please see “NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)” on page 28.

Settings

ZONE

ALARM

LED On

Programming Section

1

2

NAC1 Temporal / Steady


Temporal

*Steady

Temporal

*Steady

* = Factory default

8.4 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2)

Please see “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29.

Settings

ZONE

ALARM

LED On


1

2

NAC Auto-silence

NAC2 Strobe or Bell

Enabled

*Disabled

Strobe

*Bell

* = Factory default

35


8.5 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming (Section 3)

Please see “Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)” on page 29.

Settings

ZONE

ALARM

LED On


1

2

Signal Silence Inhibit Timer

One Man Walk Test

Enabled

*Disabled

*Audible

Silent

* = Factory default

8.6 Waterflow Programming (Section 4)

Please see “Waterflow Programming - Section 4 (‘Ground Fault’ LED on steady)” on page 30.

Settings

ZONE

ALARM

LED On


1

2

Waterflow Alarm Delay

Silencing of Waterflow Alarms

Enabled

*Disabled

*Enabled

Disabled

* = Factory default

8.7 Auto-Verify Programming (Section 5)

Please see “Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)” on page 30.

Settings

ZONE

ALARM

LED On


*Alarms

Troubles

1 Auto-verify faults are alarms or troubles

* = Factory default

36


9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors

Panel

CID

Max. #

Detectors

01 25

Manufacturer

System Sensor

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

System Sensor 1451

System Sensor 2400

System Sensor 2400TH

System Sensor 2400AT

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

Model

1400/

1400A

2400AIT

2451

2451TH

1100

2100

2100T

Model

CID

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Base

N/A

B401

B401B

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

B401

B401B

DH400

B401

B401B

N/A

N/A

N/A

Base

CID

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Description

Ionization type smoke, 2-wire

12/24V DC

Plug-in –


Photoelectric, 2wire, 12/24V DC

Photoelectric with Thermal, 2wire, 12/24V DC

Photoelectric with Thermal and

Horn, 2-wire,

24V DC

Photoelectric with isolated

Thermal and

Horn, 2-wire,

24V DC

Plug-in –


Plug-in –

Photoelectric type smoke detector with

Thermal

Ionization, 2wire, 12/24V DC , terminal strip

Photoelectric,

2-wire, 12/

24V DC , terminal strip

Photoelectric,

2-wire, 12/

24V DC , thermistor, terminal strip

37


Panel

CID

Max. #

Detectors

01 25

Manufacturer

System

Sensor

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

25

25

25

25

25

25

30

30

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

Model

Model

CID

2112/24T A

4451HT

4451HTA

5451

1151

1151A

2151

2151A

2100S

2100TS

2100AT

2100TR

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Base

N/A

B401

B401B

DH400

B401

B401B

DH400

B401

B401B

DH400

B401

B401B

DH400

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Base

CID

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Description

Photoelectric,

12/24V DC , terminal strip

Plug-in – High

Temp Heat

88°C (190°F)

Plug-in – Fixed

Temp/Rate of

Rise Detector

Plug-in – Low

Profile Ion

N/A

N/A

N/A

Plug-in – Low

Profile Photo

2-wire direct wire

Photoelectric

2-wire direct wire

Photoelectric

Thermal

2-wire direct wire

Photoelectric

Audible

Thermal

2-wire direct wire

Photoelectric

Thermal

Auxiliary Relay

38


9.1 Smoke Detector Bases

Max. #

Detectors

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

Manufacturer

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

Model

B401

B401B

B406B

B401BH

B110LP

B116LP

DH400

RMK400

Base

CID

N/A

Description

2-wire standard base, 4”, 12/24V DC

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A


2-wire base, 24V DC , form contact

24V DC sounder base for use with B401

2-wire, flangeless, 12/24V DC

2-wire base, 24V DC , form contact

Duct Detector Mount

Recessed mount kit for Series 400

9.2 Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Manufacturer

System Sensor

Detection

Systems

Gentex

Hochiki

DSC

ESL

Models

1124B

2124TR

2424TH

2424AIT

2124B

2124AT

2424AT

6424

2124TB

2124ATR

1151*

1451**

2124S

2124AITR

2151*

2451**

*Detector with B112LP Base **Detector with B402B Base

DS284 DS284TH DS284THS DS284THR

DS284THC DS284THE DS284ES

8240 8240T 8240P

DS284IS

8243P

8240PT

SIJ-24

MN240

MN240SR

741U

8243PT

SLR-24

MN240T

MN240SRT -

MN240R

741UT -

-

SLR-24H

-

-

SLR-835B

-

MN240RT

2124TS

1424

-

22451TH** -

-

2124R

2424

-

DS284THSR DS284THCS

-

-

8240PH

-

8243PH

-

-

-

MN240S

-

-

-

MN240ST

39


9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes

System Sensor Type Cd

Voltage

(FWR)

P2415(W)(A)

P241575(W)(A)

P2475(W)(A)

P24110(W)(A)

S2415(W)(A)

S241575(W)(A)

S2475(W)(A)

S24110(W)(A)

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

S

S

S

S

15

15/75

75

110

15

15/75

75

110

H24(W)(A)

MDL(W)(A)

H

Module

-

-

20-30

20-30

No suffix = Red, suffix W = White, suffix A = Canadian version

20-30

20-30

20-30

20-30

20-30

20-30

20-30

20-30

Gentex Type

GEH24

GES24-15

GES24-15/75

GES24-30

GES24-60

GES24-75

GES24-110

GEC24-15

GEC24-15/75

GEC24-30

GEC24-60

GEC24-75

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

GEC24-110 H/S

Available in Red and White.

S

S

S

H/S

S

S

H

S

Cd

60

75

110

15

-

15

15/75

30

15/75

30

60

75

110

Voltage

(FWR)

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

40

Wheelock

NS-2415W-FR(W)

NS-241575W-FR(W)

NS-2430W-FR(W)

NS-2475W-FR(W)

NS-24110W-FR(W)

NS4-2415W-FR(W)

H/S

H/S

NS4-241575W-FR(W) H/S

NS4-2430W-FR(W) H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

NS4-2475W-FR(W)

NS4-24110W-FR(W)

NS = 2-wire, NS4 = 4-wire

AS-2415W-FR(W) S

H/S

H/S

AS-241575W-FR(W)

AS-2430W-FR(W)

AS-2475W-FR(W)

AS-24110W-FR(W)

S

S

S

S

AS4-2415C-FR(W)

AS4-2430C-FR(W)

AS4-2475C-FR(W)

AS4-24110C-FR(W)

AH-24-R

AH-24-WP-R

MT-24-R

MT4-24-R

MT-24-SL-VFR

MT-24-SLM-VFR

MT-24-MS-VFR

MT-24-IS-VFR

MT-24-WM-VFR

H

H

H

H

S

S

S

S

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

Type Cd

15

15/75

30

75

110

15

15/75

30

75

110

Voltage

(FWR)

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

15

15/75

30

75

117

110

15

30

75

15

15/75

30

75

110

-

-

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31


41


FCC Compliance Statement

CAUTION : Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void your authority to use this equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Re-orient the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.

The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: “How to Identify and Resolve

Radio/Television Interference Problems”. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government

Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4.

42







System Failures




• Power Failure

Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.





•System Users



Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not

43

MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.

• Software

Most products contain software. With respect to those products, does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.






If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time.

Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.






Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the

Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.



44



45



warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.


The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.





•damage due to causes beyond the control of such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or

•water damage;


•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by );






To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to must first obtain an authorization number. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.

Note: ’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.


This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.


46



will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to must first obtain an authorization number. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.

Products which determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.

Products which determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.

WARNING: recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.

NOTE: Under no circumstances shall be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory.

Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.




47

Notes



Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

M R - 2 6 0 5


I

NSTALLATION

M

ANUAL

Revision A






Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3















MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual

Contents

1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 The MR-2605 Fire Alarm Control Unit ............................................................................................ 1




1.5 Standby Power................................................................................................................................ 2

2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2605 Fire Panel ............................................................................................ 3

2.1 Unpacking the MR-2605 ................................................................................................................. 3

2.2 Optional Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 4

2.3 MR-2605 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 5

2.4 Planning Your Installation ............................................................................................................... 6


2.6 Module Current Ratings .................................................................................................................. 7

2.7 Standby Battery calculation chart ................................................................................................... 7

2.8 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement ................................................................................. 8

3.0 Installing the MR-2605 Fire Panel............................................................................................................ 10

3.1 Environmental Specifications.......................................................................................................... 10

3.2 Panel Assembly and Modules Locations ........................................................................................ 10

3.3 Mounting the MR-2605 ................................................................................................................... 11

4.0 Wiring the MR-2605 ................................................................................................................................. 12

4.1 Wiring Specifications....................................................................................................................... 12

4.2 Connecting NAC Devices (Class ‘A’ and Class ‘B’) ........................................................................ 14

5.0 Panel Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 18

5.1 Operating Sequences ..................................................................................................................... 18

5.2 General Zone Fire Alarms............................................................................................................... 18

5.3 Waterflow Alarms............................................................................................................................ 18

5.4 Supervisory Zone Alarms................................................................................................................ 19

5.5 Trouble Operation ........................................................................................................................... 19

5.6 System Reset Operation................................................................................................................. 21

5.7 Lamp Test ....................................................................................................................................... 21

5.8 Walk Test (Installer function only)................................................................................................... 21

5.9 NAC operation ................................................................................................................................ 22

5.10 Relay Function .............................................................................................................................. 23

6.0 Programming the MR-2605 System......................................................................................................... 24

6.1 How to Program the MR-2605 ........................................................................................................ 24

6.2 Programming Section Descriptions................................................................................................. 25

6.3 Viewing the Event Buffer................................................................................................................. 30

7.0 Startup of the MR-2605............................................................................................................................ 33

7.1 Prior to power up............................................................................................................................. 33

7.2 Power up sequence ........................................................................................................................ 33

7.3 Default Operation............................................................................................................................ 33

7.4 Programming the Panel .................................................................................................................. 33

7.5 Final Verification ............................................................................................................................. 33

8.0 Programming Worksheets ....................................................................................................................... 34

8.1 Entering Programming Mode .......................................................................................................... 34

8.2 Zone Programming (Section 0)....................................................................................................... 35

8.3 NAC Temporal/Steady Programming (Section 1) ........................................................................... 35

8.4 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2) ..................................................................... 36

8.5 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming (Section 3)................................................................. 36

8.6 Waterflow Programming (Section 4) ............................................................................................... 36

8.7 Auto-Verify Programming (Section 5) ............................................................................................ 37 i


9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors ................................................................................... 38

9.1 Smoke Detector Bases ................................................................................................................... 40

9.2 Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors.............................................................................................. 40

9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes.............................................................................................................. 41

FCC Compliance Statement .......................................................................................................................... 43

Warranty and Warning Information ................................................................................................................ 44

Warning Please Read Carefully............................................................................................................ 44

Limited Warranty................................................................................................................................... 46 ii



1.1 The MR-2605 Fire Alarm Control Unit

General features

• Five initiating device circuits, class B / style B

• Two notification appliance circuits, class B / style Y (Power Limited)

[can be wired as one NAC, class A / style Z]

• One common alarm-actuated relay, form ‘C’

• One common trouble-actuated relay, form ‘C’

• AUX+ power output, 500 mA max. (Power Limited)

• Unswitched common and switched common auxiliary power returns

• Integral battery charger

• Cabinet with dead-front construction

• Transformer, mounted in the cabinet

Applications

The MR-2605 five zone, fire alarm control panel is listed for use in the following applications.

• Protected Premises Fire Alarm System

• And for the following types of service:

A – automatic, M – Manual, SS – Sprinkler Supervisory, WF – Waterflow


Relevant codes and standards

The MR-2605 fire alarm control panel is designed to meet the requirements of NFPA 72, 1996 edition, UL 864, Control Units for Fire Protective Systems, 1996 edition and in Canada, CAN/ULC-

S527, Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems, 1999 edition.

Information provided with this unit is intended as a guide. Installation of this equipment, optional system components, alarm initiating devices and notification appliances must follow the manufacturer’s guidelines as contained in their respective installation documents, all applicable codes and the instructions of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

General Installation requirements

Manufacturer’s documents

When installing the MR-2605 control panel, refer to this manual. When installing optional system components refer to the installation documents included with those components. When installing compatible alarm initiating devices or notification appliances, refer to the installation documents included with those products.

Field wiring

Field wiring recommendations in this document are intended as guidelines. All field wiring must be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and in Canada with the standard for installation ULC/S 524, the most current Canadian Electrical Code, with all relevant local codes and standards, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

Compatible devices

Use UL or ULC Listed smoke detectors and notification appliances that are compatible with the

MR-2605 Fire alarm control panel from the lists included in this manual.

1


Smoke detector alarm verification

The MR-2605 alarm initiating zones can be configured for ‘Alarm Verification’. If this feature is used then do not use smoke detectors with built-in Alarm Verification.

Note: Use of alarm verification may require the approval of the local AHJ.


For technical support call 1-888-SECUTRON, or email [email protected].

For general product information visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com

.








1.5 Standby Power

The MR-2605 provides standby battery support for lead-acid rechargeable batteries. The required capacity of the standby batteries must be calculated using the charts and tables within this manual for the period as required by national or local codes and standards. Even though the calculation table within this manual includes a safety margin, lead-acid batteries commonly used for standby can have variable capacity as a result of age and ambient conditions. Periodic inspection for damage and the batteries’ ability to support the attached equipment is highly recommended.

2


2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2605 Fire Panel



• Cabinet with hinged door

• Display and control plate c/w display and control printed circuit board.

• Zone label insert

• Battery compartment dead front plate

• Main control PCB

• Transformer


• Hardware pack

-- 2 × NAC EOL resistors (4.7 K, 5%, ½ W)

-- 5 × Zone EOL resistors (4.7 K, 5%, ½ W)

-- 1 × Battery jumper wire

-- 1 × EGND terminal ring

-- 1 × EGND KEP nut


All components described above are factory assembled into the enclosure.

3


2.2 Optional Accessories

Model Number Name Description

MR-2605-R3

MR-2806

MR-2644

MR-2605-T

MR-2605-AT

Relay module

Dual line dialer

Programmer

Remote trouble indicator.

Remote trouble indicator and alarm annunciator

Provides 3 relays that are jumper programmable to activate on common ‘alarm’,

‘supervisory’ or ‘trouble’. Mounts inside the enclosure and plugs into the main board.

Communicates all alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions to a Central Station using

Contact ID, SIA or 10/20 BPS communication formats. Programmable using the MR-2644 handheld programmer.

Mounts inside the enclosure and connects to the main panel using a supplied 4-wire cable with connector.

Handheld programmer for the MR-2806 DACT.

Single gang plate complete with common trouble buzzer, trouble visual indicator, ‘AC on’ visual indicator and a trouble silence / lamp test switch. Mounts remotely to a single gang electrical box and is connected to the main panel via the 4-wire ‘secur-bus’.

Two gang plate complete with common trouble buzzer, trouble visual indicator, ‘AC on’ visual indicator and a trouble silence / lamp test switch and 5 red zone alarm visual indicators and 5 yellow zone supervisory indictors.

Mounts to a standard 2 gang electrical box and is connected to the panel via the 4-wire ‘securbus’.

MR-2605-SR EOL supervision relay Supervises the extended power wiring typically used for installations that employ 4-wire smoke detectors. Mounts in the field.

MRD-EOL4.7K

EOLR

MRD-MP400 EOLR plate

End-of-Line resistor for NAC and Initiating circuits. Mounts in the field.

Single gang plate with EOL resistor. Mounts to a single gang electrical backbox.

4


2.3 MR-2605 Overview

Figure 1: MR-2605 cabinet with door closed

Figure 2: MR-2605 display and controls

Zone Label Insert

A zone label insert is installed in the zone window area. Reach behind the display/control panel and remove the blank insert.

Zone designations can be written directly on the insert or can be created using Word for Windows, printed on Avery label #5167 and applied to the insert.

5


2.4 Planning Your Installation

This system should be installed and serviced by qualified fire alarm installation professionals.

As a minimum, the following points should be considered to ensure that the installation will be successful and proceed without delay.

• Consult with your local AHJ to ensure that the overall system will meet all requirements.

Have your plans reviewed and approved as required.

• Review the electrical specifications, mounting and wiring instructions in this manual and in the manuals of all connected modules and devices.

• Using the chart in this manual, calculate the standby battery size that will meet the standby time required. Include all components that will draw current from the standby battery when the panel is in the ‘standby’ mode.

• Determine the location of the control panel, all initiating and indicating devices and remote modules and mark them on your system layout plan.

• Using the charts in this manual, determine the wire gauge and wire run distances for the connected components. (initiating devices, indicating devices and ‘secur-bus’ connected components.)

• Review the programming section of this manual and determine the operating characteristics required of the initiating zones, indicating zones and common panel features.


Circuit / Model(s) Rating

Primary AC / MR-2605

Primary AC / MR-2605-240



AUX+ / MR-2605/MR-2605-240 500 mA maximum

SCOM / MR-2605/MR-2605-240 500 mA maximum (current sink)

COM 500 mA maximum (current sink)

Relays (common alarm & trouble) Form ‘C’ contact, 2 Amp, 30 V DC resistive, power limited source

NAC Outputs 24 volts, full-wave rectified DC, 1.5

Amps max. – Power limited. (3.0 Amps total for both NAC circuits) EOLR – 4.7K ohm, ½ W, 5%

Initiating Zone Inputs

Battery Charging Current

Low Battery Trouble

24 V DC , 60 mA max.(in alarm) –

Supervisory current: 6.0 mA – max.

Loop resistance: 100 ohms max. –

EOLR: 4.7 K ohm, ½ W, 5%

350mA maximum

Low Battery Trouble: 22.0 V DC

Low Battery Trouble Restore: 23.0 VDC

Critical Shutdown: 19±0.5 V DC

6


2.6 Module Current Ratings

Module

MR-2605 Control panel

MR-2605-T Remote trouble indicator

MR-2605-AT R.T.I. and remote 5 zone annunciator

MR-2806 DACT

MR-2605-R3 Relay module(**)

Standby Current

(mA) DC

130

15

15

45

0

Alarm Current

(mA) DC

475(*)

15

Max. Alarm

Current (mA) DC

715

15

20(*)

60

24

40

60

24

* Current noted assumes ONE initiating zone is in alarm. The “Max. Alarm Current” assumes all zones are in alarm.

** Values shown are for all relays set for activation on ‘Alarm’. Each relay set for activation on

‘trouble’ is normally energized and on ‘AC fail’ will draw 0 mA.

2.7 Standby Battery calculation chart

All components that draw current from the panel while it is in the ‘standby’ mode (AC OFF) must be considered for the standby battery calculation. All components that draw current while in the

‘Alarm’ mode must be considered for the alarm battery calculation.

1.

The control panel will always draw the currents as shown in the chart.

2.

Typically the alarm current is calculated assuming only one initiating zone is in alarm. If it is required that more than one zone be considered, add 60 mA per zone in the Alarm column. Consult the smoke detector manufacture’s installation sheet to determine the standby current of these devices. Write that number in the ‘current per device’ column then multiply that number by the number of devices on the zone. Repeat for each zone.

3.

Consult the Notification Appliance installation sheet to determine the current draw for each device connected to the NAC. For each NAC, calculate the total current in alarm and put that number (mA) in the ‘Alarm’ column. Note: each NAC can supply 1.5 Amps max.

4.

For each added module in the system, multiply the number of modules times the module

‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ currents and write those totals in the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ columns.

5.

Add up all the current drawn from the AUX+ output in the standby and alarm mode and put those totals in the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ columns.

6.

Add up all the currents in the ‘standby’ column and the ‘Alarm’ column.

7.

Convert the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ currents from mA to Amps. (divide mA by 1000)

8.

Write in the ‘standby’ time required. (24 or 60 Hr.)

9.

Multiply the ‘standby’ Amps times the ‘standby’ time to get the ‘standby’ Amp-Hr. required.

10. Write in the ‘alarm’ time required in hours. (5 min. = .08 Hr.)

11. Multiply the ‘alarm’ Amps times the ‘alarm’ time to get the ‘alarm’ Amp-Hr required.

12. Add the ‘standby’ Amp-Hr. to the ‘alarm’ Amp-Hr. for the total Amp-Hr. required.

13. Multiply the total Amp-Hr. times 1.20 for the minimum Amp-Hr. battery required to support the system for the selected ‘standby time and the selected ‘alarm’ time.

7


2.8 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement

8

9

6

7

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Device


(mA)

MR-2605 Standby: 130

Alarm: 415

Zone 1 Standby:

Alarm: 60

Zone 2

Zone 3

Standby:

Alarm:

Standby:

Alarm:

60

60

Zone 4

Zone 5

NAC 1

NAC 2

MR-2605-T

Standby:

Alarm:

Standby:

Alarm:

60

60

Alarm:

Alarm:

Standby: 15

Alarm: 15

MR-2605-AT

MR-2806

MR-2605-R3

AUX+

Standby: 15

Alarm: 25

Standby: 45

Alarm: 60

Standby: 0

Alarm: 24

Standby:

Alarm:

Total ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ current:

Divide ‘standby’ mA and ‘alarm’ mA by 1000:

Select ‘standby’ time required (24 or 60 Hr.):

Standby Amp-Hr. - multiply 6 × 7 = (Amps × Hr.): x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 x x 1 x x 1 x x 1 x 1 x 1 x x 1


=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

= 130

=

Total

Standby

Current

(mA)

= mA

Amp

Hr.

415

60

Total

Alarm

Current

(mA) mA

Amp

Amp-Hr.

8


10

11

12

13

14

Step Device


(mA)


Select ‘alarm’ time required (.08):

Alarm Amp-Hr. - multiply 6 × 9 = (Amps × Hr.):

Total Amp-Hr = standby Amp-Hr (8) + alarm Amp-Hr. (10):

Multiply the total Amp-Hr. by the safety margin:

Total battery Amp-Hr required to support the system:

1.20

Total

Standby

Current

(mA)

Total

Alarm

Current

(mA)

Hr.

Amp-Hr.

Amp-Hr.

Amp-Hr.

Select a battery with an Amp-Hr. rating that is equal to or larger than the calculated minimum Amp-

Hr. battery required. Note: The maximum battery allowed is 12 Ah.

9


3.0 Installing the MR-2605 Fire Panel

3.1 Environmental Specifications

Consider the following conditions when selecting a mounting location for the MR-2605 panel:

• Operating temperature: 32°F to 122°F / 0°C to 50°C

• Humidity: 95% RH non-condensing

• Close to a source of unswitched AC power

3.2 Panel Assembly and Modules Locations

The panel comes completely assembled from the factory. Remove the lower dead front for access to the battery compartment. Remove display control panel for access to AC connections.

Do not run power limited wiring into this area

MR-2605 = 120 VAC

MR-2605-240 = 240 VAC

10

3.3 Mounting the MR-2605

Mounting Dimensions


Knockout Locations

Dimensions in inches

11


4.0 Wiring the MR-2605

4.1 Wiring Specifications

MR-2605 Terminal Descriptions

Terminal

Label

NAC 1

(+, –)

NAC 2

(+, –)

AUX+

COM

SCOM

DAT

CLK

TRB NO

TRB C

TRB NC

ALM NO

ALM C

Description


24 V DC , Full-Wave Rectified voltage, 1.5 Amps max.



Power limited.


24 V DC , Full-Wave Rectified voltage, 1.5 Amps max.



Power limited

Auxiliary power output

24 V DC , filtered and regulated, 500 mA max., 400 mV

P-P ripple, power limited.

Auxiliary common power return, unswitched

24 V DC , 500 mA max.

Auxiliary common power return, switched

(open circuit on system reset or on 4-wire smoke detector reset)

24 V DC , 500 mA max. (Please refer to Appendix A for compatible 4-wire smoke detectors.)

Data line for remote module communications

Clock line for remote module communications

Common Trouble relay, Normally Open contact

Common Trouble relay, Common contact

Common Trouble relay, Normally Closed contact

The Common Trouble relay is normally energized and is de-energized on trouble.

Contacts are shown in the de-energized state.

Contacts are rated 30 V DC , 2 Amps.

Common Alarm relay, Normally Open contact

Common Alarm relay, Common contact

12


Terminal

Label

ALM NC

Description

Z1+

Z1-

Z2+…..Z5+

Z2-…..Z5-

Common Alarm relay, Normally Closed contact

The Common Alarm relay is normally de-energized.

Contact is shown in the de-energized state.

Contacts are rated 30 V DC , 2 Amps max.

Zone 1 positive input

Zone 1 negative input

Zone output is 24 V DC nominal to power 2-wire smoke detectors. Maximum current draw is 60 mA in alarm and is limited by the zone circuitry. Zones may be configured to monitor both 2-wire smoke detectors and initiating devices that employ dry contacts.

(pullstations & heat detectors)

Same as zone 1 positive

Same as zone 1 negative

Connecting 2-Wire Alarm Initiating Devices

Typical

* See “9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors” on page 39 in this manual for a list of compatible 2-wire smoke detectors.

1.

Maximum 30 smoke detectors per zone (100 µA each standby).

2.

Manual station, heat detector.

3.

Maximum total loop wire resistance = 100 ohms.

4.

Program zone as:

Type 1 - Smoke and contact devices instant alarm (default)

Type 2 - Smoke auto-verify and contact as instant.

13


Connecting 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

1.

Program as zone type 01, instant or 05, 4-wire smoke auto-verify. When programmed as type 05, do not mix 2-wire smoke detectors or contacts from other alarm initiating devices on the zone.

2.

Maximum total loop wire resistance is 100 ohms.

Zone Wiring Chart

Wire

(Gauge)

18

16

14

Distance

(feet)

7,690

12,195

19,230

Distance

(meters)

2,345

3,717

5,861

Maximum loop resistance is

100 ohms. Maximum current in alarm is 60 mA.

4.2 Connecting NAC Devices (Class ‘A’ and Class ‘B’)

Class ‘B’

Class ‘A’

14


NAC Wiring Chart

Maximum

Total

Loop

(ohms)

Maximum

Current

(A)

18-Awg Wire 16-Awg Wire 14-Awg Wire 12-Awg Wire ft m ft m ft m ft m

8.00

5.00

2.70

2.00

0.25

0.50

0.75

1.00

615

308

205

154

188

94

63

47

978

488

325

244

297

149

99

74

1,538 469

769 235

513

385

156

117

2,500 762

1,250 381

833

625

254

191

1.60

1.30

1.25

1.50

123

103

38

31

195

163

59

50

308

256

94

78

500

417

152

127

Note: This chart is based on a minimum source voltage of 22 volts and a maximum line loss of 2 volts thus leaving a minimum of 20 volts at the last notification appliance.

Connecting Batteries

Connecting AC Power

Connecting the Alarm and Trouble Relays

15


Connecting Optional Devices

See installation sheets for the remote devices for detailed wiring and address setup.

1.

Maximum of 4 MR-2605-T per panel.

2.

Maximum of 4 MR-2605-AT per panel.

Secur-bus Wiring Chart

Current

(mA)*

22-awg Wire 18-awg Wire 16-awg Wire 14-awg Wire ft ft ft m ft m ft m

15

30

45

60

75

90

105

2,524 769

1,262 384

842 256

631

505

421

361

192

154

128

110

6,410

3,200

2,135

1,600

1,280

1,065

915

1,954

976

651

488

390

325

279

10,160 3,098

5,080

3,385

1,549

1,032

2,540

2,030

1,690

1,450

774

619

515

442

16,000 4,878

8,000

5,340

2,439

1,628

4,000

3,200

2,670

2,285

1,220

976

814

697

120

135

150

165

315

281

252

229

96

86

77

70

800

710

640

580

244

216

195

177

1,270

1,125

1,015

920

387

343

309

280

2,000

1,780

1,600

1,455

610

543

488

444

180

195

210

225

210

194

180

168

64

59

55

51

530

490

455

425

162

149

139

130

845

780

725

675

258

238

221

206

1,335

1,230

1,145

1,065

407

375

349

325

*See module current ratings chart for current drawn by each module attached to the securbus.

16


To calculate the wire run distance for any gauge wire and any maximum current value, use the following formula:

Rmax = ohms 1.25

Imax

Amps

Distance = Rmax × 1,000

2(wire resistance in ohms per 1,000 feet) feet

Secur-bus Capacitance

Maximum wire capacitance for proper operation of the Secur-bus is 90 nF (nanofarad). Typical wire capacitance for 22 awg quad cable is 20 nF per 1,000 feet. Thus, for 22 awg quad cable, the maximum wire run distance is ((90/20)× 1,000) = 4,500 feet . Other types of wire have different capacitance values. Consult the wire manufacturer’s data sheets for typical capacitance values.

Please note that shielded wire has a much higher capacitance value and distances are severely reduced.

The following devices may be connected to the Secur-bus. All devices are supervised. See the section Reset Section Programming on page 31 for information on adding and deleting devices on the Secur-bus.

Devices

MR-2605-T

MR-2605-AT

MR-2806

Description

External to control panel.

Up to 4 of each device may be connected.

Mounted inside control panel. See diagram in “3.3

Mounting the MR-2605” on page 11.

Notes:

1.

Do not run the Secur-bus adjacent to sources of high transient noise such as AC wiring, telephone cable bundles or computer wiring.

2.

If the Secure-bus must go through a high transient area, use shielded cable.

3.

If shielded cable is used, the distances in the chart above are cut in half.

17


5.0 Panel Operation

5.1 Operating Sequences

This section describes how the panel functions under various conditions. The choices you make in panel programming will also affect how the panel operates. Please see “6.0 Programming the

MR-2605 System” on page 24 for information on how to program the panel, and descriptions of each of the programming options.

5.2 General Zone Fire Alarms

Zone alarms have priority over all other annunciation. When an alarm occurs, the following happens:

• The corresponding zone alarm LED begins flashing, the common alarm LED turns on steady, and the alarm relay turns on.

• If a trouble was present on that zone then the zone trouble LED turns off. If the trouble buzzer is audible then it also turns off.

• The NACs sound in a steady or temporal pattern, depending on the option selected (see

“Steady” on page 29).

• If enabled, the silence inhibit timer begins counting down (see “Silence Inhibit and Walk

Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)” on page 30). If the silence inhibit timer is enabled, the panel cannot be silenced for 60 seconds following the first fire alarm.

Subsequent fire alarms do not restart or extend this timer. While the signal silence inhibit timer is counting down, if the Silence Alarm button is pressed the panel will sound a 1 second ‘error tone’ on the common trouble buzzer.

• The NACs remain on until silenced with the Silence Alarm button, or if the automatic alarm silence is enabled, until the thirty minute bell timer runs out (see “NAC Auto-silence and

Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29). If the automatic silence timer is enabled, the panel will automatically silence the NACs 30 minutes after the last fire alarm. Each zone alarm will restart the timer, giving a full 30 minutes after the last alarm before the NACs are silenced.

• Once the NACs are silenced the signals silenced LED turns on and any flashing zone alarm LEDs turn on steady. The common trouble LED and trouble relay also turn on and, if the NACs have been silenced automatically , the buzzer will sound at a rate of ½ second

ON/OFF.

Note: A manual signal silence will not initiate the trouble buzzer. Only the common trouble

LED and signals silenced LED are turned on.

• Any additional zone alarms that occur while the panel is in alarm will reset the auto alarm silence timer and turn on the NACs, but the panel will not restart the 60 second silence inhibit timer.

• The zone alarm LEDs, common alarm LED and alarm relay will remain on steady until a system reset is performed.

5.3 Waterflow Alarms

If the Waterflow Silence option is turned off (see “Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals

Silence’ LED on steady)” on page 31), when a waterflow zone (type 03) initiates an alarm the

NACs cannot be silenced until all waterflow zones are returned to normal. If all waterflow zones return to normal after the 30 minute automatic signal silence timer has expired, then the panel will silence the NACs.

If the Waterflow Silence option is turned on, then an alarm on a waterflow zone is treated like any other fire alarm.

18


Waterflow alarms may be delayed by 60 seconds to prevent false alarms from surges in the sprinkler system. The delay is common to all zones programmed as ‘waterflow’, type 03 zones. If the delay is not used, all waterflow alarms will be instant.

5.4 Supervisory Zone Alarms

When an alarm occurs on a supervisory zone (type 04), the corresponding zone supervisory LED begins flashing. The common supervisory LED and supervisory relay (supervisory relay is optional) turn on steady, and the buzzer turns on steady. If there was a trouble on that zone, the zone trouble LED turns off. The buzzer remains on until the trouble silence button is pressed.

Once the buzzer is silenced any flashing zone supervisory LEDs turn on steady. The zone supervisory LEDs, common supervisory LED and supervisory relay remain on steady until a system reset is performed.

Subsequent Fire Supervisory

After silencing a fire supervisory, a subsequent fire supervisory from another zone will resound the trouble/supervisory buzzer and the new zone supervisory LED flashes until the Silence Trouble button is pressed.

Supervisory / Trouble Priority

If a supervisory zone has a trouble and it goes into alarm, the zone trouble LED is extinguished until that zone is restored and the panel has been reset. The common trouble LED will remain on steady until all supervisory alarms have been restored and the panel reset. All other ‘common’ trouble indicators will operate normally.

Supervisory / Fire Alarm Priority

The supervisory zone LED, the common supervisory LED and the buzzer (in the steady supervisory mode) function normally whether there is a fire alarm present or not.

5.5 Trouble Operation

When a trouble occurs, if there is a corresponding trouble LED it turns on steady. The common trouble LED and the trouble relay also turn on. If no alarm is present on the system, the buzzer will sound at a rate of ½ second ON/OFF. The buzzer and trouble LEDs will remain on until the trouble is restored. If the Silence Trouble button is pressed, the buzzer turns off. Subsequent troubles will resound the trouble buzzer.

Note: If there is no trouble present in the system then pressing the Silence Trouble button will result in a 1 second error tone.

Please see the following table for a list of system faults that will initiate a trouble.

19


System Troubles

System faults

Common

Trouble

LED

Alarm zone open circuit – loss of EOLR turns on

NAC open circuit or short circuit

Battery low voltage or disconnected

Signals silenced - automatically

Ground on extended conductor

AC fails completely, or is low for more than 10 seconds

(brownout)

Installer Programming Mode

Active

Loss of Remote Trouble Unit

Loss of Remote Alarm/

Trouble Unit

TLM on one or both telephone lines (Dialer)

Failure to communicate

(Dialer)

Unsuccessful system reset

Loss of Dialer module turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on flashes turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on

Buzzer sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off

Trouble

Relay

Other Indicators deactivates Zone trouble LED turns on steady deactivates NAC1 or NAC2 trouble LED turns on deactivates Battery LED turns on deactivates Signals Silenced

LED turns on deactivates Ground LED turns on deactivates AC LED turns off deactivates AC LED turns off deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates

20


5.6 System Reset Operation

To reset the system, press the ‘Reset System’ button. The panel will remove all power from the zones and the switched auxiliary relay for 10 seconds. During this 10 second period, the buzzer will beep twice every 2 seconds.

The panel can only be reset if:

• the NACs have been silenced

• the supervisory buzzer has been silenced

• and all waterflow zones are restored (only applies if the Silence Waterflow option is turned off - see “Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)” on page 31).

If the panel is not in a condition to be reset, when the ‘Reset System’ button is pressed the panel will sound a 1 second error tone on the buzzer.

After the 10 second reset period, the panel will turn off the zone LED for any zones that have been restored. If one or more zones is still in alarm after the reset period, the panel will activate the

NACs as programmed. If there are no alarms but one or more Supervisory zones is still ‘offnormal’ after the reset period, the panel will sound the trouble buzzer in the Supervisory mode. If there are no alarms or supervisory conditions but a trouble is present in the panel after the reset period, the panel will sound the trouble buzzer. After the reset period, LEDs for any alarms, supervisory off-normal or trouble conditions will be on.

5.7 Lamp Test

The lamp test will check all of the panel and annunciator LEDs. To do a lamp test, press and hold the Lamp Test button. All the LEDs will flash.

A lamp test will only work if the NACs are not active and the supervisory buzzer is not active. If a lamp test is unsuccessful the buzzer will sound a 1 second error tone. If any trouble or zone has a state change during lamp test, the lamp test will be cancelled and the panel will return to normal operation.

21


5.8 Walk Test (Installer function only)

To do a walk test, all zone alarms, troubles and relays must be in their normal state. You can program the walk test to be either audible or silent (see “Audible Walk Test” on page 30).

1.

To walk test the panel press the Walk Test button. The common trouble LED flashes and the buzzer sounds one short beep. The panel will be in walk test mode for one hour, or until you press the Walk Test button again.

2.

As you test each part of the system, the panel will give the following indications:

Type of activation LEDs NACs*

Trouble

Buzzer

Fire Alarm or Fire

Supervisory

Fire Alarm or Fire

Supervisory Restoral



Restoral

Zone alarm/

Supv LED turns on

Zone alarm/

Supv LED turns off

Zone or system trouble LED turns on

Zone or system trouble LED turns off

1 squawk

1 squawk

2 squawks

2 squawks

Sounds

Stops sounding

Ground Fault Ground trouble LED turns on

3 squawks Sounds

Ground Fault Restoral Ground trouble LED turns off

3 squawks Stops sounding

*Only if Walk Test Audible option is turned on.

Zone LEDs operate normally except that alarms do not latch - the alarm LEDs will turn off when the zone is restored and the auto-reset has been successful.

Alarm and trouble relays are NOT activated. If used, any remote connection is not activated.

3.

To return the system to normal operation, press the Walk Test button. If you do not press the Walk Test button, the system will return to normal operation after one hour. If any zones are in alarm at the end of the walk test, the zones will indicate silenced signals.

The Lamp Test button does not work while the panel is in Walk Test mode.

22


5.9 NAC operation

See also “Steady” on page 29, and “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2

(‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29 for more information.

Class ‘B’ operation selections:

• Steady (default) – On alarm the NAC will turn on steady. It will turn off on either a manual or automatic signal silence.

• Temporal 3 – On alarm the NAC will turn on with the temporal 3 pattern and turn off on either a manual or automatic signal silence.

• NAC2 Strobe – On alarm NAC2 will turn on steady. It will not turn off on a manual or automatic signal silence. NAC2 set in this mode will only turn off on system reset if all zone fire alarms are restored. Only NAC2 can be set in this mode.

Class ‘A’ operation selections

If the panel NACs are set for class ‘A’ operation then there is only one NAC. In this configuration the NAC output can only be set for steady or temporal using the NAC1 programming options For class ‘A’, the NAC2 Strobe option is not available.

5.10 Relay Function

Alarm Relay

The panel activates the alarm relay upon any (non-supervisory) zone alarm. The panel deactivates the alarm relay upon a successful system reset.

Trouble Relay

The panel deactivates the trouble relay upon any system trouble. The panel activates the trouble relay upon the restoral of all system troubles.

Supervisory Relay (available with the MR-2605-R3 Relay Expander only)

The panel activates the supervisory relay upon any supervisory zone alarm. The panel deactivates the supervisory relay upon a successful system reset.

23


6.0 Programming the MR-2605 System

6.1 How to Program the MR-2605

You can program the panel using the controls and indicator LEDs. There are no DIP switches to set for programming.

Once programmed, the operating modes selected are maintained in non-volatile memory that will retain the programmed information even if all power is removed from the panel.

Entering the Programming mode

All zone alarms must be reset prior to entering the programming mode. While the panel is in programming mode, the annunciators will show a trouble condition.

1.

Remove the lower front cover and locate the ‘Walk Test Switch’ behind the control panel

PCB, as shown below.

2.

Press and hold the Walk Test Switch for two seconds. The common trouble buzzer and common trouble LED turn on and pulse ½ second on/off.

3.

Press any button. The trouble buzzer is silent, and the zone 1 alarm LED turns on steady.

The common trouble LED continues to flash.

4.

The panel is now ready to program.

Programming the Panel

The control panel has six different programming sections, which are shown in the table below. The

Panel Status LEDs indicate which programming section you are currently in.

24


When you first enter programming mode, the panel will be at zone programming (section 0). Each programming section has one or more programming sub-sections (e.g. section 0 has sub-sections for zones 1 through 5). Use the Silence Trouble and Silence Alarm buttons to enter your programming choices:

1.

Each sub-section in a section will have 2 or more programming settings, indicated by the panel Zone Supervisory and Zone Trouble LEDs. To scroll through the programming settings, press the Silence Alarm button. Please see “6.2 Programming Section Descriptions” on page 26 for descriptions of each section and settings, and the LED indications for each setting.

2.

When the LEDs show the setting you want for a sub-section, move to the next programming sub-section by pressing the Silence Trouble button. The panel will save the indicated settings when you exit the programming mode or go to the next programming section.

3.

When you have programmed all the sub-sections in a section, the panel will move to the next programming section when you press the Silence Trouble button.

Pressing Silence Trouble will advance forward through each programming sub-section, and each section.

Example: in the Zone 1 programming sub-section, pressing Silence Alarm will scroll through each zone type setting (null zone, instant zone, auto-verify zone, etc.). When the panel shows the zone type you want for zone 1, press Silence Trouble to move on to Zone 2 programming.

Exiting the Programming Mode

When you come to the end of all the programming sections, press Silence Trouble to exit the programming mode.

To exit programming mode at any other point in the panel programming, press and hold the Walk

Test switch for two seconds.

If 5 minutes elapse without any button presses, the panel will automatically exit the programming mode. During the final 60 seconds before the exit, the panel will sound a warning tone on the buzzer. Press any button to cancel the auto-exit and resume programming.

After you exit the programming mode, the panel performs a system reset for 10 seconds, during which the buzzer sounds double beeps. When the beeping stops the panel returns to normal operating mode and all programming choices are stored in memory.

25


6.2 Programming Section Descriptions

Zone Programming (Section 0)

In this zone programming section, the panel uses the zone alarm, supervisory, and trouble LEDs to indicate the programming as follows:

Zone type 00 – Null zone (Not used)

The zone is not used. The zone is not supervised, alarms and troubles are ignored. The end-of-line resistor is not required.

Zone type 01 – Instant alarm for 2-wire smoke detectors and contact devices

Zone type 01 does not differentiate between 2-wire smoke detectors, contact devices, or 4-wire smoke detectors. When a 2-wire smoke detector, 4 –wire smoke detector or contact device goes into alarm:

The panel goes into alarm without any delay. If an instant zone goes into alarm, any auto-verify sequence in progress on another zone will be immediately cancelled and both zones will indicate an alarm condition.

26


Zone type 02 - Auto-Verify for 2-wire smoke detectors

Zone type 02 can distinguish between 2-wire smoke detector activation and contact activation. This allows you to have manual pullstations and smoke detectors on the same 2-wire zone. With this zone type, smoke detector activation starts the auto-verify sequence, and a contact closure

(pullstation activation) initiates an immediate alarm.


1.

Power is removed from the zone for 25 seconds to reset the smoke detector(s).

2.

After the verification period starts (power removed) if any contact device on that zone is activated, the verification sequence is cancelled, and the panel goes into immediate alarm.

3.

Power is restored to the zone at the end of the 25 second reset period.

4.

For the next 95 seconds, any smoke detector or contact device that goes into alarm will cause the panel to immediately go into alarm, activate the NACs, the visual indicators and the common alarm relay.

5.

If during the total verification period (120 sec.), any other zone on the panel goes into alarm, the verification sequence is cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm.

6.

If two auto-verify zones activate simultaneously, both verification sequences are cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm.

When a contact alarm initiating device (pullstation) on an auto-verify zone goes into alarm:

1.

The panel immediately goes into alarm. Any auto-verification sequence that may be active will be cancelled.

27


Zone type 03 – Waterflow zone

This zone type is intended for waterflow alarm initiating contact devices only. Do not mix other alarm initiating devices on this zone. You can set the panel to include a fixed timer that will delay all ‘Waterflow’ type zone alarms for 60 seconds.

CAUTION: Do not use the waterflow delay timer when:

• The monitored Waterflow alarm actuating devices have a built-in delay of 30 seconds or more. The overall maximum waterflow alarm initiation delay allowed is 90 seconds. (NFPA A-5-6.2 –

1996 edition)

• The sprinkler system includes ‘ON/OFF’ type sprinkler heads.

Such sprinkler heads can cycle on and off within 30 seconds thus preventing an alarm from being registered.

When the contact on a Waterflow alarm initialing device is activated:

1.

If the waterflow delay is not used, the control panel will go into alarm instantly.

If the waterflow delay is used, the waterflow timer will start on the first waterflow alarm. Subsequent waterflow alarms will not restart the 60 second timer.

2.

Once the 60 second time expires, if any waterflow zones are still in alarm, the panel will initiate an immediate alarm. If all waterflow zones have restored at the end of the 60 seconds, an alarm will not be initiated.

Zone type 04 – Supervisory zone

When the contact on a Supervisory device is initiated:

1.

The control panel will immediately indicate the Supervisory “offnormal” condition.

2.

The zone supervisory LED (yellow) will flash, the common

‘supervisory’ LED will come on steady and the common trouble buzzer will sound steadily. Pressing the ‘trouble silence’ switch will silence the buzzer and the zone supervisory LED will stop flashing and turn on steadily.

3.

Fire supervisory zones are latching and can only be restored when the initiating device is restored and a system reset is performed.

28


Zone type 05 – Auto-verify for four-wire smoke detectors.

This zone type is intended for the alarm initiating contacts from 4-wire smoke detectors only and provides the ability to auto-verify alarms from those smoke detectors.

CAUTION: Do not mix alarm initiating or supervisory initiating devices on the same zone with 4-wire smoke detector alarm initiating contacts.


1.

The panel open circuits the ‘SCOM’ line, removing power from all

4-wire smoke detectors in the system.

2.

At the end of the 25 second reset period, power is restored to the zone and to all 4-wire smoke detectors. For 95 seconds following the reset period, if any smoke detector on that zone is still in alarm, the panel will activate the NACs as programmed, the visual indicators and the common alarm relay.

3.

If during the total verification period (120 seconds), any other zone on the panel goes into alarm, the verification sequence is cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm. If two autoverify zones activate simultaneously, both verification sequences are cancelled and the panel goes into alarm without any delay.

NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)

You can individually program both NAC1 and NAC2 to sound in either a temporal or steady pattern. By default, both NAC outputs are programmed as steady.

Temporal

The NAC1 will sound the Temporal/ANSI Fire Pattern: 0.5 seconds ON,

0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON,

1.5 seconds OFF, repeat.

The NAC2 will sound the Temporal/ANSI Fire Pattern: 0.5 seconds ON,

0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON,

1.5 seconds OFF, repeat.

Steady



NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)

Automatic Signal Silence

If Automatic Signal Silence is enabled, 30 minutes after the last fire alarm on the system, the panel restores the NACs to normal (alarms are silenced).

If another alarm occurs after the NACs are silenced, the panel will restart the timer for another 30 minute period.

If Automatic Signal Silence is disabled, the panel will not silence the

NACs automatically.

29


NAC2 Strobe

If this option is enabled, on alarm, NAC2 turns on steady and does not turn off on automatic signal silence, or when the Silence Alarm button is pressed. When NAC2 is set to this mode, it can only be turned off when all zone fire alarms are restored, and the system is reset. Only NAC2 can be set to this mode.

If this option is disabled, the panel will restore NAC2 to normal following an automatic signal silence (see Automatic Signal Silence, above), or following a press of the ‘Silence Alarm’ button.

Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)

Signal Silence Inhibit Timer

If the Signal Silence Inhibit Timer is enabled, when the first alarm is activated, the panel will begin a 60 second countdown. During this 60 seconds, users will not be able to turn off the NACs by pressing the

Silence Alarm button. The timer is started on the first alarm only and is not restarted on subsequent alarms.

If the Signal Silence Inhibit Timer is disabled, users will be able to turn off the NACs at any time, by pressing the Silence Alarm button.

If NAC2 is set as a strobe, users will never be able to turn off NAC2 using the Silence Alarm button. See “Silence Inhibit and Walk Test

Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)” on page 30.

Audible Walk Test

You can set the One Man Walk Test to be either audible or silent. If the

One Man Walk Test is set for audible, then the following will occur:

• On a fire or Supervisory alarm/restoral the bells will pulse ONCE

• On a zone or system trouble/restoral, except ground fault, the bells will pulse TWICE

• On any ground fault/restoral the bells will pulse THREE times.

If the One Man Walk Test is set for silent, the bells will not sound during the walk test.

Waterflow Programming - Section 4 (‘Ground Fault’ LED on steady)

Delay Waterflow Alarms

If the Waterflow Alarm Delay option is turned on, the panel will start a 60 second timer when the first Waterflow zone goes into alarm. The panel will not restart the timer on subsequent Waterflow zone alarms. When the timer expires, if any waterflow zone is still in alarm, the panel will immediately go into alarm. If any other type of fire zone goes into alarm during the waterflow delay countdown, the panel will immediately go into alarm in response to that zone.

If the Waterflow Alarm Delay option is turned off, alarms on Waterflow zones will cause an immediate alarm in the panel.

30


Silence Waterflow Alarms

If the Silence Waterflow Alarms option is turned on, Waterflow zones can be silenced whether the zones are physically restored or not.

If the Silence Waterflow Alarms option is turned off, Waterflow zones cannot be silenced until they are physically restored. This applies to both automatic signal silence, and the Silence Alarm button. If there is a trouble on a Waterflow zone following the alarm and alarm restore, the zone can be silenced.

Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)

If the Auto Verify Fault is Alarm option is turned on, the following will occur:

• if a zone initiates an auto-verify sequence and returns from power down in the trouble state, the system will treat this as an

ALARM condition and assume that the circuit has been forced open by fire. Please see “Zone Programming (Section 0)” on page 26 for more information on auto-verify zones.

If the Auto Verify Fault is Trouble option is turned on, the following will occur:

• if a zone initiates an auto-verify sequence and returns from power down in the trouble state, the system will treat this as an

TROUBLE condition. Please see “Zone Programming (Section

0)” on page 26 for more information on auto-verify zones.

50/60 Hz Option

Reset Section Programming (All common trouble LEDs flashing)

To Enter this Programming Section

1.

Enter the installer programming mode, section 0

2.

Press and hold the System Reset button for 2 seconds. The Z1 ALM LED and TRB LED will be

ON and all the System Trouble LEDs will flash.

To Remove Module

Physically remove the module from the system and enter the reset section programming as described above. Press the ‘Silence Alarm’ button until the Z1 SUPV LED is ON. Press the ‘Silence Trouble ’ button to exit this section. Upon exit, the system will reset the ‘supervision’ field for all the modules currently connected to the ‘secur-bus’.

To Add a Module

Just connect it to the system and it will auto-enroll within one minute.

Do not default (Z2)

(Factory default )

ALARM SUPV

Default to factory program (Z2)

TRB To Default the System

Enter the reset section programming as described above. Press the

‘Silence Trouble’ button until the Z2 ALM LED is ON and Z2 TRB LED is

ON. Press the ‘Silence Alarm’ button until the Z2 SUPV LED is ON. Press the ‘Silence Trouble’ to exit this section. Upon exit, the system will reset all of the panel programmable parameters to their factory default state.

Please note that the ‘supervision’ field will be reset as well.

31


6.3 Viewing the Event Buffer

1.

Enter the programming mode by pressing and holding the Walk Test switch for 2 seconds.

2.

Press any switch. To silence the trouble buzzer and enter the Section 0 programming.

3.

Press and hold the Lamp Test switch for 2 seconds.

4.

The Common Supervisory LED flashes to indicate the View Buffer mode.

5.

Events are shown from the most recent to the oldest.

6.

See the event table below which indicates the LED patterns used to indicate various events.

7.

To advance to the next event press the Silence Trouble switch.

8.

Once all 20 events have been viewed, the next Silence Trouble keypress will exit the view buffer mode and return to the Section 0 programming. To exit the programming mode, press and hold for 2 seconds the Walk Test switch.

9.

Pressing the Silence Signal switch at any time will cause the system to exit the View

Buffer mode. The buzzer will sound. Press any button to go to the Section 0 programming mode.

Event Buffer Table

Display Event

Steady Common Alarm LED

Flashing Zone X Alarm LED

Steady Zone X Alarm LED

Flashing Zone X Alarm LED and Flashing

Zone X Supervisory LED

Flashing Zone X Supervisory LED

Steady Zone X Supervisory LED

Flashing Zone X Trouble LED

Steady Zone X Trouble LED

Flashing Common Trouble LED

Steady Common Trouble LED





Flashing Battery Trouble LED

Steady Battery Trouble LED

Flashing Ground Fault LED

Steady Ground Fault LED

Null Event



Restore

Unverified Zone X Alarm

Zone X Supervisory

Zone X Supervisory Restore

Zone X Trouble

Zone X Trouble Restore



Restore

NAC 1 Trouble


NAC 2 Trouble


Battery Trouble

Battery Trouble Restore

Ground Fault Trouble

Ground Fault Restore

32


Display Event

Flashing Signal Silenced Trouble LED

Steady Signal Silenced Trouble LED

Flashing AC On LED

Steady AC On LED

Steady AC On LED and Steady BAT TRB

LED

Flashing AC On LED and Flashing BAT

TRB LED

Flashing (ALL) Zone Trouble LED’s

Steady (ALL) Zone Trouble LED’s

Manual Signal Silence

(Successful) Reset

AC Failure

AC Fail Restore

Cold Start

Warm Start

Walk Test Start / Installer

Mode Entry

Walk Test End / Installer

Mode Exit

33


7.0 Startup of the MR-2605

7.1 Prior to power up

• Verify that all field wiring is free of shorts, opens and grounds and that end-of-line devices are connected and are the proper value.

• Verify that all modules and internal cables are properly seated in their location.

• Verify that all metal components are bonded to the incoming ground. Should measure zero ohms between any metal part and the incoming ground wire.

• Verify that the polarity between the panel and connected devices is correct.

7.2 Power up sequence

• Connect the battery FIRST. The panel will not power up on the battery alone.

• Apply AC power. The panel will power up as follows:

• The panel goes into the Reset mode immediately. This lasts for 10 seconds and the trouble buzzer will beep during the reset period.

• After the reset period ends, the buzzer goes silent, the green AC indicator should be ON and all other LEDs should be OFF.

• If any LED other than the AC LED is ON then there is a fault in the system. Troubleshoot and repair the fault before proceeding.

• If the battery is not fully charged, the battery fault LED will come on after about 2 minutes.

Verify that the battery is connected properly and if it is, it may take up to 24 hours to recharge the batteries. Once the battery is charged, the battery fault LED will go OFF.

7.3 Default Operation

• On first power up, all programmable features will be in the default mode.

• Do a ‘Lamp Test’ to verify that all the indicators function.

• It is suggested that an initial verification of operation be done before the panel is programmed. Verify that each zone will go into alarm and that each NAC operates the

Notification Appliances and that the zone alarm indicator(s) function. Each zone is defaulted as an instant ‘fire alarm’ and each NAC is defaulted for ‘steady’ output on alarm.

An Alarm, Silence, Reset cycle will also verify that the push-button function properly.

• Verify that each zone indicates a trouble on a zone open and that a ground fault on the extended conductors is properly indicated.

7.4 Programming the Panel

• Program the panel for the operational features desired. (section 6)

• Record your configuration choices for future reference. (section 8)

• Verify panel operations and feature selections by initiating alarms and troubles as described above.

7.5 Final Verification

• Verify system operation and fault detection as required by the local Authority Having

Jurisdiction.

• Enable the ‘one-man’ walk test feature to test all the field devices and wiring.

34


8.0 Programming Worksheets

8.1 Entering Programming Mode

Please see “6.0 Programming the MR-2605 System” on page 24 for complete instructions.

All zone alarms must be reset prior to entering the programming mode. While the panel is in the programming mode, the annunciators will show a trouble condition.

To enter the Programming mode:

1.

Press and hold the Walk Test button for two seconds (located behind the display PCB).

2.

Press any button to turn off the trouble buzzer.

3.

Press Silence Alarm to scroll through the settings for each programming section (e.g. to change the zone type, or to turn an option on or off).

4.

Press Silence Trouble to move to the next programming section (e.g. to move from zone

1 to zone 2).

5.

The panel will indicate the current programming section using the Common Trouble LEDs, as shown below:

Please see “6.2 Programming Section Descriptions” on page 26 for detailed descriptions of each programming section.

35


8.2 Zone Programming (Section 0)

Program each of the zones as one of the following types. (See “Zone Programming (Section 0)” on page 26.) Record your programming choices in the table below.

3

4

1

2

5

ZONE

ALARM

LED On

3

4

1

2

5

Zone

No.

Type

(00 - 05)

Label

8.3 NAC Temporal/Steady Programming (Section 1)

Please see “Steady” on page 29.

Settings

1

2

ZONE

ALARM

LED On




* = Factory default

Temporal

Temporal

*Steady

*Steady

36


8.4 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2)

Please see “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29.

Settings

ZONE

ALARM

LED On


1

2

NAC Auto-silence

NAC2 Strobe or Bell

Enabled

*Disabled

Strobe

*Bell

* = Factory default

8.5 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming (Section 3)

Please see “Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)” on page 30.

Settings

ZONE

ALARM

LED On


1

2

Signal Silence Inhibit Timer

One Man Walk Test

Enabled

*Disabled

*Audible

Silent

* = Factory default

8.6 Waterflow Programming (Section 4)

Please see “Waterflow Programming - Section 4 (‘Ground Fault’ LED on steady)” on page 30.

Settings

ZONE

ALARM

LED On


1

2

Waterflow Alarm Delay

Silencing of Waterflow Alarms

Enabled

*Disabled

*Enabled

Disabled

* = Factory default

37


8.7 Auto-Verify Programming (Section 5)

Please see “Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)” on page 31.

Settings

ZONE

ALARM LED

On


*Alarms

Troubles

1 Auto-verify faults are alarms or troubles

* = Factory default

38


9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors

Panel

CID

Max. #

Detectors

01 25

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25


System Sensor 1400/

1400A

System Sensor 1451

System Sensor 2400



System Sensor 2400AIT

System Sensor 2451


System Sensor 1100

System Sensor 2100

System Sensor 2100T

System Sensor 2112/24T

Model

CID

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Base

N/A

B401

B401B

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

B401

B401B

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Base

CID

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

B401

B401B

DH400

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Description

Ionization type smoke, 2-wire

12/24V DC

Plug-in –


Photoelectric, 2wire, 12/24V DC

Photoelectric with Thermal, 2wire, 12/24V DC

Photoelectric with Thermal and Horn, 2wire, 24V DC

Photoelectric with isolated

Thermal and

Horn, 2-wire,

24V DC

Plug-in –


Plug-in –

Photoelectric type smoke detector with

Thermal

Ionization, 2wire, 12/24V DC , terminal strip

Photoelectric, 2wire, 12/24V DC , terminal strip

Photoelectric, 2wire, 12/24V DC , thermistor, terminal strip

Photoelectric,

12/24V DC , terminal strip

39


Panel

CID

Max. #

Detectors

01 25


System Sensor 4451HT

4451HTA

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

25

25

25

25

25

30

30

System Sensor 5451

System Sensor 1151

1151A

System Sensor 2151

2151A

System Sensor 2100S

System Sensor 2100TS


System Sensor 2100TR

Model

CID

A

A

A

A

A

Base

B401

B401B

DH400

B401

B401B

DH400

B401

B401B

DH400

B401

B401B

DH400

N/A

Base

CID

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

A

A

A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Description

Plug-in – High

Temp Heat

88°C (190°F)

Plug-in – Fixed

Temp/Rate of

Rise Detector

Plug-in – Low

Profile Ion

Plug-in – Low

Profile Photo

2-wire direct wire

Photoelectric

2-wire direct wire

Photoelectric

Thermal

2-wire direct wire

Photoelectric

Audible

Thermal

2-wire direct wire

Photoelectric

Thermal

Auxiliary Relay

40


9.1 Smoke Detector Bases

Max. #

Detectors

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

Manufacturer

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

System

Sensor

Model

B401

B401B

B406B

B401BH

B110LP

B116LP

DH400

RMK400

Base

CID

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Description


2-wire standard base, 6”, 12/24V

2-wire base, 24V

24V DC sounder base for use with B401

2-wire base, 24V

DC

DC

, form contact

2-wire, flangeless, 12/24V

, form contact

Duct Detector Mount

DC

DC

Recessed mount kit for Series 400

9.2 Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Manufacturer

System

Sensor

Detection

Systems

Gentex

Hochiki

DSC

ESL

Models

1124B

2124TR

2424TH

2124B

2124AT

2424AT

2124TB

2124ATR

1151*

2124S

2124AITR

2151*

2424AIT 6424 1451** 2451**

*Detector with B112LP Base **Detector with B402B Base

DS284 DS284TH DS284THS

DS284THC DS284THE DS284ES

DS284THR

DS284IS

8240

8240PT

SIJ-24

MN240

MN240SR

741U

8240T

8243PT

SLR-24

MN240T

MN240SRT

741UT

-

8240P

SLR-24H

MN240R

-

-

-

8243P

SLR-835B

MN240RT

-

-

2124TS

-

1424

22451TH** -

2124R

-

2424

-

DS284THSR DS284THCS

-

-

8240PH

-

8243PH

-

MN240S

-

-

-

MN240ST

-

-

41


9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes

System Sensor Type Cd

Voltage

(FWR)

P2415(W)(A)

P241575(W)(A)

P2475(W)(A)

P24110(W)(A)

S2415(W)(A)

S241575(W)(A)

S2475(W)(A)

S24110(W)(A)

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

S

S

S

S

15

15/75

75

110

15

15/75

75

110

H24(W)(A)

MDL(W)(A)

H

Synch

-

Module

20-30

20-30

No suffix = Red, suffix W = White, suffix A = Canadian version

20-30

20-30

20-30

20-30

20-30

20-30

20-30

20-30

Gentex Type

GEH24

GES24-15

GES24-15/75

GES24-30

GES24-60

GES24-75

GES24-110

GEC24-15

GEC24-15/75

GEC24-30

GEC24-60

GEC24-75

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

GEC24-110 H/S

Available in Red and White.

S

S

S

H/S

S

S

H

S

Cd

60

75

110

15

-

15

15/75

30

15/75

30

60

75

110

Voltage

(FWR)

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

42


Wheelock

NS-2415W-FR(W)

NS-241575W-FR(W)

NS-2430W-FR(W)

NS-2475W-FR(W)

NS-24110W-FR(W)

NS4-2415W-FR(W)

NS4-241575W-FR(W)

NS4-2430W-FR(W)

NS4-2475W-FR(W)

NS4-24110W-FR(W)

NS = 2-wire, NS4 = 4-wire

AS-2415W-FR(W) S

H/S

H/S

AS-241575W-FR(W)

AS-2430W-FR(W)

AS-2475W-FR(W)

AS-24110W-FR(W)

S

S

S

S

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

AS4-2415C-FR(W)

AS4-2430C-FR(W)

AS4-2475C-FR(W)

AS4-24110C-FR(W)

AH-24-R

AH-24-WP-R

MT-24-R

MT4-24-R

MT-24-SL-VFR

MT-24-SLM-VFR

MT-24-MS-VFR

MT-24-IS-VFR

MT-24-WM-VFR

H

H

H

H

S

S

S

S

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

H/S

Type Cd

15

15/75

30

75

110

15

15/75

30

75

110

Voltage

(FWR)

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

15

15/75

30

75

117

110

15

30

75

15

15/75

30

75

110

-

-

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

20-31

43












44







System Failures




• Power Failure






•System Users



Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not

45

MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.

• Software

Most products contain software. With respect to those products, does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.






If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time.

Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.






Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the

Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.



46



47



warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.


The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.





•damage due to causes beyond the control of such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or

•water damage;


•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by );






To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to must first obtain an authorization number. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.

Note: ’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.


This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.


48



will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to must first obtain an authorization number. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.

Products which determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.

Products which determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.

WARNING: recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.

NOTE: Under no circumstances shall be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory.

Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.




49



Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113


Secutron warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach of such warranty, Secutron shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in materials and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron such as, lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the product.

The foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Secutron neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.

In no event shall Secutron be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product.

Important!

Secutron recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.

However, despite frequent testing and due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.

Secutron Inc.


Vaughan, Ontario, Canada

L4K 5W3

Tel: (905) 695-3545

Fax: (905) 660-4113

E-mail: www.secutron.com

60 Industrial Parkway

Cheektowaga, NY, 14227

Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON

Fax: 888-660-4113

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

MR-2605-R3 Relay Module

The MR-2605-R3 relay module includes three relays with form ‘C’ contacts rated at

30VDC, 2A. Each relay is jumper programmable to activate on ‘Alarm’, ‘Supervisory’ or

‘Trouble’ mode. Refer to MR-2602 or MR-2605 Installation Manual .

Parts List

• Qty 1 MR-2605-R3 module

• Qty 1 #4-40 pan head screw

• Qty 1 spacer

• Qty 3 jumpers

Specifications

• Standby current ... 0 mA

Add 8 mA for each relay programmed for ‘Trouble’

• Alarm current ... 8 mA (for each relay programmed for alarm).

• Relay contacts Vmax ... 30V

DC

• Relay contacts Imax ... 2 A

NOTE: This component must be included in the control panel battery calculation. Refer to the Standby Battery Calculation Sheet (PN# 29005850) included with the control panel.

Installing the MR-2605-R3 Module

The MR-2065-R3 module mounts on the MR-2602/2605 fire alarm control unit board as indicated below. Refer to Fig 1.

1.

Screw the the 1/2 inch nylon hex spacer (provided) hand-tight onto the center pem stud.

2.

Insert the the MR-2605-R3 header pins into the header on the MR-2602/2605

FACP.

3.

Secure the relay module to the nylon spacer using the #4-40 screw provided.

4.

Configure jumper for desired operating modes. Refer figure 1.

5.

Route 14-18 AWG hookup wire through the panel access holes in accordance with local regulations.

6.

Secure wire connections to relay terminals as required.

7.

Refer to MR2602 or MR2605 Installation Manual for programming details.

LT-2018 Rev. A

MR-2605-R3 RELAY MODULE INSTALLATION

Jumper Configuration

Use #4-40 screw to secure relayboard to nylon spacer.

MR-2602 / MR-2605 main board

Screw nylon spacer onto this stud.

MR-2605-R3 header pins insert into header socket on main PC board

Refer to MR-2602 or MR-2605 Fire Alarm Control Unit

Manual f or fur ther details.

Up

SUPERVISORY

Middle

ALARM

Down

TROUBLE

J1 J2 J3

Rel ay 1 Rela y 2 Rel ay 3

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC

1 2 3

Note:

J1= Relay 1

J2 = Relay 2

J3 = Relay 3

Wire Gauge

14 -18 AW G

Note:

Connect rela y contact s to a po wer limited source



The foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Secutron neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.


Important!

Secutron recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to but not limited to criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

MR-2602A/2605A

Class A Zone Input Module

The MR-2602A Zone Input module converts the two zones on the MR-2602 fire alarm control panel from Class ‘B’ Style ‘B’ to Class ‘A’ Style ‘D’. The MR-2605A Zone Input module converts the five zones on the MR-2605 fire alarm control panel from Class ‘B’

Style ‘B’ to Class ‘A’ Style ‘D’.

SPECIFICATIONS

• Voltage: 24 V

DC

(nom)

• Standby current: MR-2602A ... 2 mA, MR-2605A ... 5 mA

• Alarm current: 60 mA (max)

• Loop Resistance: 100 W (max)

• Devices per zone: 20 @ 100mA each

NOTE: This component must be included in the control panel battery calculation. Refer to the Standby Battery Calculation Sheet (PN# 29005850) included with the control panel.

Secutron Inc.


Vaughan, Ontario, Canada

L4K 5W3

Tel: (905) 695-3545

Fax: (905) 660-4113 www.secutron.com

60 Industrial Parkway

Cheektowaga, NY, 14227

Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON

Fax: 888-660-4113

MR-2602A MR-2605A

LT-2019 Rev. A

INSTALLATION

T he MR-2602A/2605A module mounts in the corresponding MR-2602/2605 fire alarm back box. Refer to Figure 1.

1. Place the supplied spacers (2) on the pem studs.

2. Insert the module header pins into the corresponding Class ‘B’ zone terminals on the main board.

3. Secure the module to the the studs with the nuts provided (2).

4. Connect the electrical common wire on the module to the ‘COM’ terminal on the main panel.

5. Tighten all zone terminal screws to ensure reliable electrical connections between the main panel and the

MR2602A/2605A module.

NOTE

Refer to the MR-2602 or MR-2605 Installation Manual for instructions on zone programming, and mixing smoke detectors and contact alarm initiating devices on the same zone.

M R - 2 9 4 4

LCD Remote Annunciator

I

NSTALLATION &

O

PERATING

M

ANUAL

Revision D






Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3





DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED .






RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC

Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.

SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-1996,

Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software.

Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.


MR-2944 Installation and Operatotr’s Manual

Contents


1.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 MR-2915 LED Driver....................................................................................................................... 1

1.3 MR-2902 Annunciator Strip............................................................................................................. 1

1.4 MR-2622 Annunciator Strip............................................................................................................. 1

1.5 Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................. 2

2.0 Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 3

2.1 Mounting ......................................................................................................................................... 3

2.2 Wiring.............................................................................................................................................. 3

3.0 Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 6

3.1 LEDs ............................................................................................................................................... 6

3.2 Buzzer............................................................................................................................................. 6

3.3 Operator Keys................................................................................................................................. 7

3.4 Alarm List ........................................................................................................................................ 7

4.0 Programming ........................................................................................................................................... 9

4.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 9

4.2 Service Terminal Screens............................................................................................................... 9

4.3 Keyboard Commands ..................................................................................................................... 11

5.0 Parts List .................................................................................................................................................. 13


6.1 Condition Code ............................................................................................................................... 14

6.2 Zone Number .................................................................................................................................. 14 i

MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual ii


List of Figures

Figure 1: Wiring Diagram................................................................................................................................ 4

Figure 2: MR-2400 Wiring .............................................................................................................................. 4

Figure 3: Operator Key Wiring (Typical) ......................................................................................................... 5

Figure 4: MR-2622.......................................................................................................................................... 5

Figure 5: MR-2915 LED Pin-Outs................................................................................................................... 5

Figure 6: Alarm List Event Screen.................................................................................................................. 8

Figure 7: Alarm List Message Screen ............................................................................................................ 8

Figure 8: Alarm List Summary Screen............................................................................................................ 8 iii

MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual iv



1.1 General

The MR-2944 Annunciator Driver is capable of controlling up to 576 LEDs, as 192 zones of 3

LEDs each (Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble), for use with columnar or graphic annunciators. Two optional LCD displays are available, an 80 character (4 x 20) display the same size as the

MR-2900 LCD display and a larger display twice that size. Both can be used to display text messages.

The MR-2944 uses the MR-2910 Network Communications Board for network interface. The

MR-2944 can use all variants of the MR-2910 board. The MR-2944 may also use the MR-D1010R

Fiber Optic Modem for connecting a fiber network between panels.

The MR-2944 uses the AN4 program for connection to MR-2900 and MR-2100/2200 networks and the AN4A program for connection to MR-2400 panels. All programs are nearly identical in operation, but the AN4A program may not be used to create a fiber optic network.

The LEDs are interfaced to the Annunciator Driver using the MR-2902 Annunciator Strip, the

MR-2622 Annunciator Strip or the MR-2915 LED Driver.

Communication to the MR-2900 Control Unit is over a proprietary DCLR (Style 7) network. There are two communications ports (COM1 and COM2). These ports are identical to the network ports on the MR-2900 Control Unit. Wiring for standard network communications is not polarity sensitive. RS-232 network communications is polarity sensitive.

1.2 MR-2915 LED Driver

The MR-2915 LED Driver drives up to 24 LEDs. There is a 50 pin connector for connection to a wire-wrap socket. The LEDs would be connected to the wire-wrap legs of the socket.

1.3 MR-2902 Annunciator Strip

The Annunciator Strip contains 24 sets of zone indicating LEDs. Individual LEDs are provided to display alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions by zone. The LED functions, from the left, are:

Alarm (red), Supervisory (yellow or amber) and Trouble (yellow).

1.4 MR-2622 Annunciator Strip

The Annunciator Strip contains 8 sets of zone indicating LEDs. Individual LEDs are provided to display alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions by zone. The LED functions, from the left, are:

Alarm (red), Supervisory (yellow or amber) and Trouble (yellow).

1



Voltage

Normal Current

Max Current

Operator Key

MR-2944

24 VDC

MR-2622

24 VDC

MR-2915

5 VDC

(Optional)

10 mA

MR-2902

24 VDC

10 mA no LCD: 50 mA

LCD: 75 mA

500 mA

5 mA

125 mA

SPST N/O

Contact

250 mA 250 mA

2



2.1 Mounting

These mounting instructions apply only to annunciators that come complete with cabinet.

1.

Choose a suitable location for mounting.

2.

Mark placement of mounting screws using template. Make sure that the template is level.

3.

Drill holes, install plugs (if necessary) and top two screws.

4.

Hang the cabinet on screws and pull down to ensure a snug fit. The cabinet should be level.

5.

Install bottom screw(s) and tighten all screws.

6.

Connect network and power wiring. Operator key wiring and LED wiring, if any, is done at the factory. Power can be taken from the MR-2900 or MR-2400 Fire Alarm Control Unit or an external 24VDC source. An external source must be UL/ULC listed for use with fire alarm systems.

Note: For use with MR-D1010R Fiber Optic Modem, power must be supplied by a regulated, power-limited 24 VDC power supply that is UL-listed for Fire Protective Signalling Service.

2.2 Wiring

Note: Operator key and LED wiring is required only for units that do not come complete in a cabinet.

Power

The Annunciator panel requires 24 VDC for operation from a power limited source. This shall be provided from either the AUX 1 or AUX 2 auxiliary power connections on the Fire Alarm Control

Panel. The 24 VDC is connected to the +24 terminal (positive) and the GND terminal (negative).

See Figure 1 for terminal locations. Note: Annunciator must be powered from panel or from a regulated, power-limited power supply listed for Fire Protective Signalling Service (or any other power supply for which compatibility has been verified by UL).

Network to MR-2900

Network wiring for communications to the MR-2900 is connected to the terminal pairs marked

C1+/C1- and C2+/C2- (see Figure 1 ). The wiring is not polarity sensitive. COM1 (C1+/C1-) is connected to COM2 the next panel in the network loop. Ensure that the Annunciator is

3

MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual programmed to communicate with the next panel or that COM1 is disabled as required in the downloaded database. COM2 (C2+/C2-) is connected to the previous panel in the network loop.

Figure 1: Wiring Diagram

Notes:

1.

If the annunciator is programmed for two port operation, both communications ports must be connected even if there is only one other unit in the system.

2.

If the annunciator is programmed for single port operation, only COM2 (C2+/C2-) is connected.

3.

COM1 and COM2 are power-limited and supervised.

4.

For information on connecting a fiber optic network, please refer to the MR-D1010R Fiber

Optic Module’s Installation Manual (579-565).

Network to MR-2400

Network wiring for communications to the MR-

2400 is connected to the terminal pairs marked

C2+/C2- (see Figure 2 ). The wiring is polarity sensitive. COM1 (C1+/C1-) is not used.

Notes:

1.

Ensure the MR-2944 is running the

AN4A operating program.

2.

COM2 is power-limited and supervised.

Operator Keys


All operator keys are wired between an X and a Y terminal. A key switch may be placed in series with the Y2 terminal to make certain operator

4

MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual keys limited access (see Figure 3 ). The figure is typical only; any, all or none of the operator keys can have the key switch used.

LEDs

The MR-2902 Annunciator Strip, MR-2622 Annunciator Strip and the

MR-2915 LED Driver are connected to the Annunciator by ribbon cables (see Figure 1 ). The eight connectors on the Annunciator are labelled P1 to P8. P1 is for zones 1 to 24, P2 for zones 25 to 48, etc.

Each MR-2622 and MR-2915 controls 8 zones. Up to 3 MR-2622s or

MR-2915s can be chained together to provide up to 24 zones per chain. Each MR-2622 will require a jumper for addressing (see below). No jumpers are set on the MR-2915 for addressing purposes.

Note: Do not use P11 for LEDs. This will cause damage to both the

MR-2944 and the LED driver.

The MR-2915 LED Driver has a 50 pin connector for connection to the LEDs. The LEDs are wired to a 50 pin socket which the MR-2915 plugs into. The pin-outs are shown in Figure 4 . Note: All LEDs share a common positive.

MR-2622 Jumper Settings

The jumpers for setting the octet are located just below the ribbon cable connector (see Figure 5 ). There are three pairs of holes.

Figure 3: Operator

Key Wiring (Typical)

Soldering a wire jumper across the required pair will set the MR-2622 to be the first, second or third octet. There is a trace on the board jumpering the pair for the first octet. This will need to be cut if the board is for the second or third octet.

Figure 4: MR-2622

Figure 5: MR-2915 LED

Pin-Outs

5


3.0 Operation

3.1 LEDs

There are 192 LED zones available on the Annunciator, each zone consisting of Alarm (red),

Supervisory (amber) and Trouble (yellow) LEDs. The LEDs will flash if a new condition is received.

If the buzzer is sounding, press Acknowledge to silence the buzzer. Press Acknowledge (again) to latch the LEDs. Once the condition is restored, the LED can be turned off by pressing Reset . If global commands are enabled, these operator keys will be broadcast to the network, causing all units to respond to the operator keys. An asterisk will appear at the end of the LCD display line showing the current time if any of the LEDs can be reset. If the Alarm List is being displayed, the current time will not be displayed.

If the MR-2944 has a memory or configuration error, the buzzer will sound every 2 seconds. This also occurs while loading a database.

If LEDs are programmed, the table below shows the meaning for each LED when flashing. The

Power On LED flashes when the annunciator first starts operating and stays steady after the

Acknowledge key is pressed.

LED Meaning LED Meaning

Zone 1 alarm Acknowledge available Zone 3 alarm 2nd Stage Inhibit available

Zone 1 supervisory Reset available (green) Zone 3 supervisory Manual Restart available

Zone 1 trouble

Zone 2 alarm

Reset available (yellow) Zone 3 trouble

Signal Silence active Zone 4 alarm future use future use

Zone 2 supervisory Signal Silence available Zone 4 supervisory future use

Zone 2 trouble 2nd Stage Inhibit active Zone 4 trouble Power On

If a common LED is programmed, it will show the sum of all the Zone LEDs that are on. The common LED will also indicate troubles that are local to the Annunciator only. The Hot LEDs have no effect on the common LED.

Lamp Test flashes the LEDs in sequence. Pressing Lamp Test repeatedly will cycle through: alarm

LEDs, supervisory LEDs, trouble LEDs, and Lamp Test off. The test will automatically end if any new condition is received, or after 5 minutes. The lamp test cannot be performed if AC power is off.

3.2 Buzzer



Steady: This indicates any new fire alarm conditions. This mode can be disabled in the database.

Fast: This indicates any critical failures that must be attended to. These failures can include, but are not limited to memory overflow, network reboot required, database mismatch, etc. The pattern in 50ms on/off.

Medium: This indicates any new supervisory conditions. The pattern is 200ms on/off.

6


Slow: This indicates any new trouble conditions. The pattern in 500ms on/off. Through programming, a new trouble condition can be made to not sound the buzzer again for a time after it has been silenced. This time can be set from 15 to 255 seconds. By default, the buzzer will sound for all new troubles.


There are 16 operator key inputs. The operator keys can be programmed in the database to be either local or global. If the operator keys are local, they affect the MR-2944 Annunciator only. If the operator keys are global, they will be broadcast over the network, causing all units on the network to respond to the operator key. The operator keys are laid out in a 4 by 4 matrix as follows:

X1

Y1 Acknowledge

1

Y2 Signal Silence

2

Y3 Manual Restart

2

X2

System Reset

General Alarm

2

X3

Lamp Test

X4

Second Stage Inhibit

2

System Reset

1

Scroll

Y4

Details

Notes:

1.

These operator keys are both Local and Global.

2.

These operator keys are Global only.

3.

All other operator keys are Local only.

4.

Through the downloaded database, global keys can be programmed to affect only certain panels.

If global commands are enabled, all operator keys that have global ability will be broadcast to the network. All units on the network will respond as if the operator key was pressed at the unit itself, except it will not beep. The annunciator will always send the global commands, even when they are not valid at the Annunciator. The LCD back light will turn on if a operator key is pressed. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes if there is no activity.

3.4 Alarm List

The Alarm List contains all the current Alarms, Supervisory Conditions and Troubles. The Alarm

List will hold entries as requested by other panels in the network. The first/last entry of highest priority will be shown, instead of the time display, if there are any entries in the Alarm List. Alarms are the highest priority, Supervisory Conditions are the 2nd priority and Troubles the 3rd priority,

Monitor Conditions are 4th priority and Non-reporting signals are the lowest priority. The Alarm List will turn on the LCD back light when a new entry is received. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes if there is no activity.

To view additional entries in the Alarm List when an entry is showing, press the Scroll key. This will display the next/previous entry of the highest priority showing the device message, if any, otherwise the event screen is shown. Press Scroll again to view the next/previous entry. Use the

Details key to rotate between screens of the event.

There are two display modes of operation:

• First: Displays the first entry of highest priority and then each next entry as requested.

• Last: Displays the last entry of highest priority and then each previous entry as requested.

7


There are two reset modes of operation:

• Automatic: Entries are removed from the Alarm List as soon as the condition restores.

• Manual: Entries that can be removed from the list have the condition code shown with a "-

" instead of a "+". Press Reset to remove these entries from the Alarm List.



Code



Figure 6: Alarm List Event Screen

or 2) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition

Code






Code


See the section entitled Supplementary Information for a description of Condition Codes and Zone

Numbers.

The summary screen shows either the number of alarm, supervisory and trouble entries in the Alarm

List (shown); or the number of supervisory, trouble, and monitor entries (if there are monitor and no alarm entries); or the number of trouble, monitor and nonreporting entries (if there are non-reporting and no alarm or supervisory entries).

Figure 7: Alarm List Message Screen

Figure 8: Alarm List Summary Screen

8


4.0 Programming

4.1 General

The Annunciator Unit's service terminal is accessed through the 9-pin RS-232 serial port located on the bottom of the MR-2944 Driver Board. The programming cable uses pins 2, 3 and 5 straight through from DB9 male to DB9 female plugs. The serial port works at 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no parity.

When programming the Annunciator for the first time, the only item that MUST BE

PROGRAMMED from the service terminal is the Annunciator's network ID (default value is 101).

The network ID is shown on the top line of every screen to identify the panel being serviced. To change the panel's ID, first go to screen 16 by entering the command 16<Tab>. Set Privilege Level

2 by entering (code)<Ctrl-V> where code is the Level 2 passcode (default 2222). To set the ID enter the command id N, where id is the network ID of the Annunciator, a number between 1 and

254.

All other required programming is taken from the database generated by the Modul-R Human

Interface program (MHI). Downloading the database into the MR-2944 annunciator is automatically handled by MHI. See the Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for details on downloading databases.

Non-required programming controlling the operation of the Alarm List and the communications parameters of the primary network port (if used) are set using the service terminal.

There are three operating programs for the MR-2944. The AN4 program is used for communications to an MR-2900 network. The AN4A program is used for communications to an

MR-2400. The AN4N program is used for communications to an MR-2900 when there is no database requirement for the annunciator – essentially, this operating program forces the MR-

2944 to behave like it’s predecessor, the MR-2924 (which could not accept a database). The program loaded will be shown on Screen 2 of the service terminal. If the incorrect program is loaded, MHI can be used to send the correct one. See the Modul-R Human Interface Database

Editor for details on sending operating programs.

4.2 Service Terminal Screens

All screens have a common status line showing the current time, a diagnostic number, the annunciator's ID number and the screen number and name. Screens will also list keyboard commands related to the screen's information. Some commands require a privilege level set before they can be used.

The following screens are available:

Screen Name

7

8

0*

2

Index

Miscellaneous

Info

Keypad

Alarm List

Config

Description



Displays a list of each input operator key function.

Display the current operating modes of the Alarm List, i.e. first or last sequencing, and Auto or Manual restores. See §3.4 Alarm

List for a description of operation.

Level 1 Commands

0 R Set Alarm List to Automatic restore mode

1 R Set Alarm List to Manual restore mode

9


Screen

9*

10*

11*

14

15

16

17

18

29

38

Name

Alarm List

Description

List the first entries in the Alarm List. Up to 20 entries will be shown.

Level 0 Commands

J Page down


K Page up


List of the current troubles.

Miscellaneous

Troubles

LEDs

Printer

Printer Status

Network

Port 1

Port 2

System Reset

Switches

Display a grid showing the status of all LEDs. A dot (.) is off, an F is flashing, an asterisk (*) is on, and an R is on and resettable.

The first row is zones 1 to 24, the second row is zones 25 to 48, etc. The common and hot key zones are identified at the bottom of the screen.

Level 0 Commands

0 A Disable Trouble buzzer inhibit

(15-255) A Set Trouble buzzer inhibit from 15 to 255 seconds

A copy of everything sent to the printer. This is useful for capturing print-outs to a file. Note: Status line updating is disabled while on this screen.


Displays information about network communications. This includes frames sent and received, frames in error and orphan messages.

Level 0 Commands


Displays information about the primary network communication port (COM1).

Level 0 Commands

0 V Clear the network counters.

Level 1 Commands

(1-25) B Set the retry limit for COM1. This is the number of retries attempted before the unit is considered off-line. The default value is 8.

(baud) B Set the baud rate of COM1. This can be any of 9600

(default), 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, 300 or 150.

Displays information about the secondary network port (COM2).

A question mark appears in front of the baud rate when the port is off-line.

Commands




10


Screen Name

49

50

51*

Clock

Stacks

FIFOs

52

68*

69*

Extended

Memory

Remote

Terminal

Network Verify

Description

Show the current clock calibration or calibration status.

This screen is for diagnostic purposes.

This screen is for diagnostic purposes.

Level 0 Commands

0 <Ctrl-F> Clear maximum usage counters



Level 0 Commands



Displays the current status of the network verify feature.

4.3 Keyboard Commands

These keyboard commands are available on all screens.

Command

<Del>

<Tab>

<Backspace>

0<Tab>

0-127<Tab>

A

D

0.0<Tab>

0.1<Tab>

(month).(date) D


Description








Silence buzzer.


Enter the date.


11


Command

(hours).(minutes) T


<Ctrl-V>

(code)<Ctrl-V>

Description

Set the time.

Set the time.



12


5.0 Parts List


MR-2944

MR-2944LC

MR-2944LCD

MR-2910

Annunciator Driver

Annunciator Driver c/w 4x20 LCD Display

Annunciator Driver c/w Double Size 4x20 LCD Display

Network Communications Board

MR-2910-R1

MR-2910-R2

Network Communications Board, Port 1 RS-232, Port 2

Standard

Network Communications Board, Port 1 Standard, Port 2

RS-232

Network Communications Board, Ports 1 and 2 RS-232 MR-2910-R12

Note:

The MR-2944 requires one of the MR-2910 Network Communications Boards to operate.

MR-D1010R

MR-D1010R2

MR-2915

MR-2902

MR-2622

MR-2944C/S

MR-2944C/F-L

MR-2944C/F-D

Fiber Optic Module, one modem

Fiber Optic Module, two modems

LED Driver



LCD Annunciator c/w Surface Mount Cabinet

Flush Mount Annunciator c/w LCD display

Flush Mount Annunciator c/w Double Size LCD display

MR-2944C/F-8

MR-2944C/F-16

MR-2944C/F-24

MR-2944C/F-L-8

Flush Mount Annunciator c/w 8 LED Zones



Flush Mount Annunciator c/w LCD display and 8 LED

Zones

MR-2944C/F-L-16

MR-2944C/F-L-24


Zones


Zones

Custom Graphic Annunciator Panels are available on request

13



The Alarm List uses the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering. Only those zones that are shown by the Annunciator are listed.

6.1 Condition Code

Alarm List

ALARM bypass com dupl alert ground ilgl msng nofire

M.PULL

abort spv trbl wrong

WFLOW

Description

Alarm

Bypass

Comlink


Maintenance Alert

Ground Fault




Pull Station Alarm

Releaser Abort

Supervisory


Wrong Device Type

Waterflow Alarm


6.2 Zone Number

PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:


ZZ Panel Zone

Panel

Zone

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

16

17

18

19

Description

General Alarm




















Panel

Zone

60

61

66

67

53

54

55

59

24

50

51

52

20

21

22

23

84

87

94

1

95

1

Description






Network Verify

Comlink 1

Comlink 2

Comlink 3

Comlink 6

Printer Port




AC Power

Low Battery

Test Mode

Passcode Tamper


Network Reboot Required Why

14


SSS Sub-Zone Number


Dual End-of-Line Circuit:000 - Wiring Fault

001 - Switch #1

002 - Switch #2

Smoke Detector and Contact Device Circuit:000 - Wiring Fault






Note: Only MR-2614 and MR-2644 Annunciators, MR-2801-MR Reverse Polarity modules and

MR-2806-MR Dialers use IDs other than 000.

Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59):





Network Reboot Required (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the trouble


002 - network

003 - port 3





15



Canada

Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Tel: (905)-695-3545

Fax: (905)-660-4113

USA



Tel: (888)-660-4655

Fax:(888) 660-4113

M R D L

D u a l L i n e D i a l e r

I

NSTALLATION

M

ANUAL

Revision B






Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3





DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED.






RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.


SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-



MRDL Installation Manual

Contents

1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 General Features of the MRDL....................................................................................................... 1



2.0 Installing and Wiring the MRDL ............................................................................................................... 3

2.1 Unpacking the MRDL...................................................................................................................... 3

2.2 Mounting & Wiring the MRDL ......................................................................................................... 3

3.0 MRDL Operation ...................................................................................................................................... 4

3.1 LED Indicators ................................................................................................................................ 4

3.2 Communication with the Fire Alarm Control Panel ......................................................................... 4

3.3 Phone Line Communication............................................................................................................ 4

4.0 Programming the MRDL .......................................................................................................................... 5

4.1 Accessing the Dialer Settings ......................................................................................................... 5

4.2 Dialer Settings................................................................................................................................. 6

5.0 Appendix A: Table of Reporting Codes.................................................................................................... 11

5.1 Contact ID ....................................................................................................................................... 11

5.2 SIA Format – Level 2 (Hardcoded) ................................................................................................. 11

6.0 Appendix B: Table of Compatible Receivers ........................................................................................... 14

7.0 Warranty and Warning Information .......................................................................................................... 15

7.1 Warning........................................................................................................................................... 15

7.2 Limited Warranty............................................................................................................................. 16

8.0 FCC Compliance Statement .................................................................................................................... 18 i

MRDL Installation Manual ii

MRDL Installation Manual

List of Figures

Figure 1: MRDL Install Location ..................................................................................................................... 3

Figure 2: Initial Programmer Screen............................................................................................................... 5

Figure 3: Panels Screen ................................................................................................................................. 5

Figure 4: Dialer Settings Button...................................................................................................................... 6

Figure 5: Initial Dialer Screen ......................................................................................................................... 6

Figure 6: Dialer Configuration 1...................................................................................................................... 7

Figure 7: Dialer Configuration 2...................................................................................................................... 9

Figure 8: Call Directions ................................................................................................................................. 9

Figure 9: Zone Data........................................................................................................................................ 10

Figure 10: Reporting Codes ........................................................................................................................... 10 iii

MRDL Installation Manual iv



The MRDL is a dual line dialer that will communicate all alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions to a Central Station using Contact ID, SIA or 10/20 bps communication formats. The MRDL will support the MR-2100 and MR-2200 Fire Panels. The MHI_V21 or greater programmer must be used to program the MRDL Dialer.

1.1 General Features of the MRDL

• Supports all zone alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions

• Supports all panel troubles

• Programmable through MHI_V21 or greater programmer

• Supports 10/20 bps, SIA, Contact ID, and Pager Formats

• Three telephone numbers

• Fully programmable test transmission

• Automatic reporting codes for SIA and Contact ID formats

• 128 Event buffer with date and time stamp

• Communicator call directions by group

• Swinger shutdown options available for all events

• Module current rating: 40mA standby / 65mA when dialing

• Module voltage rating: 19 V DC to 27.5 V DC


Relevant Codes and Standards

The MRDL Dual-Line Digital Dialer is designed to meet the DACT requirements of NFPA 72, 1996 edition UL 864, Control Units for fire Protective Systems, 1996 edition.

General Installation Requirements

Manufacturer’s Documents

When installing the MRDL, refer to this manual and the manual for the control panel into which this module is being installed. This dialer requires programming. Programming is done using the

MHI_V21 or greater programming.

Field Wiring

Field wiring recommendations in these documents are intended as guidelines. All field wiring must be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and with all relevant local codes and standards and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.


For technical support from Secutron: Call toll free 1-888-222-1556.

For general product information visit our web site: www.secutronusa.com

System Verification







1


Standby Power

The MR-2100/MR-2200 Fire Panel provides standby battery support for lead-acid rechargeable batteries. The required capacity of the standby batteries must be calculated using the charts and tables within the MR-2100/MR-2200 Installation Manual for the period as required by national or local codes and standards. Even though the calculation table within the MR-2100/MR-2200

Installation Manual includes a safety margin, lead-acid batteries commonly used for standby can have variable capacity as a result of age and ambient conditions. Periodic inspection for damage and the batteries’ ability to support the attached equipment is highly recommended.

2


2.0 Installing and Wiring the MRDL

2.1 Unpacking the MRDL

The basic MRDL package includes the following components:

• Dialer

• 4-pin polarized locking cable assembly

• Four #4 mounting screws


2.2 Mounting & Wiring the MRDL

Note: Ensure that standby calculations are done before installing the dialer. See the MR-2100/

MR-2200 Fire Panel Installation Manual for all power information and calculation charts. The current rating for the MRDL is:

• 40 mA standby current

• 65 mA alarm current (when dialing)

Mounting & Wiring the MRDL

The MRDL is mounted in the upper right corner of the back box, in the main panel. Route the wiring harness under the plastic shield before mounting the DACT. Attach the harness to the connector labeled DACT/CITY on the main board. Orient the dialer so that the mounting hole with the metal plating is located on the upper right. Position the dialer on the back box and secure with four #4 mounting screws (included). Attach the unconnected end of the wiring harness to the

MRDL. The MRDL requires connection of the Secur-bus from the dialer to the main panel using the provided 4-pin polarized locking cable assembly. Two telephone lines are connected to the Tip/

Ring/T1/R1 terminals.

Dialer

Metal plated mounting hole.

The wiring harness for the Dialer is routed under the plastic shield.

Figure 1: MRDL Install Location

3


3.0 MRDL Operation

3.1 LED Indicators

The dialer’s operating status is visible from its five LED indicators. These indicators are located on the dialer. Each indicator is described in the following table:

1

#

2

3

4

5

Indicator

Secur-bus

Fault

TLM2

Trouble

TLM1

Trouble

FTC

Trouble

Watchdog

LED Color Activates when...

Yellow

Yellow the Secur-bus connection to the main panel has failed there is a trouble on telephone line #2

Yellow

Yellow

Green there is a trouble on telephone line #1 the dialer is unable to communicate the dialer is functioning normally; LED flashes

½ second on, ½ second off

3.2 Communication with the Fire Alarm Control Panel

When connected to the FACP properly, the Watchdog LED will flash at a rate of ½ second on/off when power is applied to the FACP. The dedicated dialer will transmit all events that occur on the

FACP if programmed to do so. Any troubles that occur on the dedicated dialer will be shown on the appropriate LED and communicated (if enabled) as well as causing a common trouble condition on the FACP. If the FACP should lose communication with the dialer a common trouble condition will also be generated.

3.3 Phone Line Communication

The dedicated dialer is equipped with two phone line connections. When an event occurs that initiates communications, the first attempt at dialing will be on the programmed telephone line.

Refer to “Dialer Configuration” later in this manual for dialing attempts and operation.

4


4.0 Programming the MRDL

4.1 Accessing the Dialer Settings

1.

At the initial programming screen (Figure 2), do the following: a. Check the Enforce Group Associations Checking box. b. Click on the Alarm List Mode list box and select the Local option. c. Click on the Panels button to access the Panels screen (Figure 3).

Figure 2: Initial Programmer Screen

2.

In the Panels screen (Figure 3), click on the IDs button to access the IDs dialog (Figure4).

ID

Button

Figure 3: Panels Screen

5


3.

In the IDs dialog (Figure 4), check the MR-2806-MR check box and click on the Dialer

Settings button.

6

Figure 4: Dialer Settings Button

4.2 Dialer Settings

The Dialer Settings dialog allows for the programming of various communications options.

The 1st, 2nd and 3rd Telephone Numbers can be up to 32 digits. Special digits may be used to perform the following functions:



• HEX (D)-forces the panel to search for dial tone



Note: A Hex D is required before the number, example: D9054704070

The 1st and 2nd Account Codes identify the system to the central station when a communication is sent. The code can be programmed for up to four digits. The first and third telephone number transmit the first account code. The second telephone number transmits the second account code.

The 1st and 2nd Format setting affects the type of communication that the dialer sends to the central station.

There are seven formats available including 4 BPS formats, Contact ID, SIA and a pager format.


• Exit: Close the Dialer

Settings window and return to the IDs window.



Figure 5: Initial Dialer Screen


• Zone Data: Display the Zone Data screen.

• Maintenance/Common: Display the Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes screen.


The Dialer Configuration 1 dialog contains the First Communicator Options, Second

Communicator Options and International Options. The Communications option determines if the dialer will communicate to the central station. When Enabled is selected, the dialer will communicate all events as programmed. When Disabled is selected, the dialer will not communicate any events.



Dialing Enabled is selected, the dialer switches between the first and third numbers after each dialing attempt, until the maximum number of dialing attempts have been made to each number.

When Third Number Backup is enabled, the dialer will use the third number only if all attempts to communicate to the first number fail. If all attempts to communicate to the third number also fail, a failure to communicate trouble will be generated. When Disabled is selected, the third telephone number is not used.

The Dialing option has three different options for pulse or

DTMF dialing. If All attempts

Pulse is selected, the dialer will always use pulse (rotary) dialing. If All attempts DTMF

Dialing is selected, the dialer will always use DTMF dialing.

If 4 attempts DTMF then Pulse is selected, the dialer will use

DTMF dialing for the first four attempts. If unsuccessful, the dialer will switch to pulse dialing for the remaining attempts.

The SIA Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer

Figure 6: Dialer Configuration 1 will send automatic reporting codes, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and Maintenance/

Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic SIA Reporting

Codes.



The Contact ID Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send automatic reporting codes, or use the values that are programmed in the Zone Data and Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic Contact ID Reporting Codes.

Pager Format.

Events will be communicated to a pager when using this format. When programming a pager telephone number, extra digits must be used in order for the feature to function properly. Program two hexadecimal digits 'E' at the end of the number (4 second pause).

The panel will attempt to call the pager one time. After dialing the digits in the telephone number

7

MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual the panel will send the account number and reporting code followed by the [#] key (Hex [C]). There is no ringback when using Pager format. The panel has no way of confirming if the paging attempt was successful. Do not use hexadecimal C in a reporting code when using pager format. In most cases the digit C will be interpreted as a [*], which will terminate the page before it has finished.

Example: D19787319876EE

The Test Transmission Line option determines how the dialer chooses a telephone line to send the automatic test transmission. If Alternate is selected, the dialer will alternate between using lines 1 and 2 for transmissions, regardless of telephone line troubles. If Available is selected, the dialer will use Line 1 for test transmissions. If a trouble exists on Line 1, the dialer will switch to Line 2.



Disabled is selected, the dialer will use the standard dialing procedure for every attempt. The

Pulse Make/Break Ratio option is for panels in international applications. When 40/60 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is the 40/60, and when 33/67 is selected it is 33/67.



D i a l e r Configuration 2

The Dialer Configuration 2 screen contains the Swinger Shutdown Variables, Other Options and

Test Transmission options. The Swinger Shutdown options determine the maximum number of zone and trouble events that the dialer will transmit in one day. The alarm or trouble will still be displayed on the panel and logged in the archive, but the dialer will not transmit the event. There are individual counters for Zone Alarm and Restore, Zone Supervisory and Restore, Zone Trouble and Restore and Maintenance Trouble and Restore. This feature will be reset at midnight. To disable the feature, program 000.


The entry is four digits, military 24 hour format (HH:MM). To disable the feature, program the time as [9999]. The Test Transmission Cycle determines the number of days between test transmissions.

8


The TLM Trouble Delay controls the number of telephone line monitoring checks required before a telephone line trouble is generated. The dialer checks the telephone connection at 10-second intervals. The Maximum

Dialing Attempts to Each

Phone Number is the number of attempts that the dialer will make to each telephone number before generating a fail to communicate trouble. Post

Dial Wait for Handshake is the amount of time the

Figure 7: Dialer Configuration 2 dialer will wait for a valid initial handshake from the receiver after dialing the programmed telephone number.

The Call Directions dialog contains the options that determine which telephone numbers will be used to communicate events. There are five different types of events that can each be sent to telephone number one or telephone number two. The event types are


Supervisory Zone Alarm/

Restore, Zone Trouble/Restore,

Maintenance Trouble/Restore and Test Transmissions.

The Zone Data dialog (Figure 9) contains zone definitions and

Figure 8: Call Directions reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate events.


The Definition specifies the identifier of the alarm or trouble being sent to the central station. The zone types that are available are Fire, Sprinkler, Heat, Water and Untyped.

9


The Reporting Codes are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to Programmed, or when using BPS formats. There are six reporting codes for each group. They are:


Code

• Zone Alarm Restoral

Reporting Code

• Trouble Reporting

Code

• Trouble Restoral

Reporting Code

• Supervisory Reporting

Code

• Supervisory Restoral

Reporting Code

Figure 9: Zone Data


The Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes dialog contains maintenance and common reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate those events.

The Reporting Codes List is a list of all available maintenance and common reporting codes. Select one to program its reporting code. The Reporting Codes are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to Programmed, or when using BPS formats. There are many different reporting codes in this group.

Figure 10: Reporting Codes

10


5.0 Appendix A: Table of Reporting Codes

The following tables contain automatic Contact ID and SIA format reporting codes. For more information on reporting formats.

5.1 Contact ID

The first digit (in parentheses) will automatically be sent by the control. The second two digits are programmed to indicate specific information about the signal.

For example, if zone 1 is an fire zone point, you could program the event code as [1A]. The central station would receive the following:

*FIRE* - FIRE ALARM - 1 where the “1” indicates which zone went into alarm.

5.2 SIA Format – Level 2 (Hardcoded)

The SIA communication format used in this product follows the Level 2 specifications of the SIA

Digital Communication Standard – October 1997. This format will send the account code along with its data transmission. The transmission would look similar to the following at the receiver:

N Ri00 FA 01

N = New Event

Ri00 = System Event

FA = Fire Alarm

01 = Zone 1

11


Table 1: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes

Reporting

Code

Code Sent When…

Dialer

Direction*

Contact

ID Auto

Rep

Codes

Sia Auto

Rep Codes

Zone Supv./

Rest.

Zone Alarms/

Rest.

Zone Trouble/

Rest.

AC Fail Trouble/

Rest.

zone goes into supervisory/ restore zone goes into alarm/ alarm condition has been restored zone exhibits a trouble condition/ zone trouble condition has been restored

AC power to control panel is disconnected or interrupted/AC power restored; both codes follow the AC Trouble Delay control panel battery is low/battery restored

S/R

A/R

T/R

MA/R

(2) AA

(1) 3A

(3) 73

(3) A1

See Table 3

See Table 3

See Table 3

AT-00/AR-00

Battery Trouble/

Rest.

Ground Fault

Trouble/Rest.

NAC Trouble/

Rest.

General System

Trouble/Rest.

Gen. System

Supervisory/

Rest.

Secur-bus

Trouble/Rest.

Line 1 or 2 TLM

Trouble/Rest.

Phone # 1 or 2

FTC Trouble/

Rest.

Earth Ground Fault is detected/restored

NAC circuit is opened/restored module trouble is detected/restored control panel loses/restores communications to enrolled modules

Secur-bus connection is lost/restored

MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

(3) A2

(3) 1A

(3) 21

(3) 3A

(3) 33

(3) 33

YT-00/YR-00

UT-OO/UJ-00

YA-99/YH-99

YX-00/YZ-00

ET-00/ER-00

NT-00/NR-00

Walk Test Start/

Stop

Installer Lead In/

Out

Test

Transmission

Normal/Off-

Normal connection via Telephone Numbers 1 or 2 is lost/restored communication is restored after a failure to communicate trouble has occurred; events not communicated during lapse will also be sent control panel has entered/exited walk test mode; no events will be communicated control panel enters/exits programming mode test transmission reports system normal or off-normal (alarm, supervisory or trouble) control panel condition

MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

MA/R

T

(3) 51

(3) 54

(6) A7

(6) 27/28

(6) A2

LT-XX/LR-XX**

YC-XX/YK-XX**

TS-00/TE-00

LB-00/LX-00

RP-00/RY-00

* Call directions: A/R = alarm/restoral; T/R = trouble/restoral; MA/R = maintenance alarm/restoral; S/R = supervisory/restore; T = test transmission


12


Table 2: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restoral Event Codes



Medical Alarms

(1)A1 Emergency

(1)A2 Fail to Report In

Fire Alarms

(1)1A Fire Alarm

(1)11 Smoke

(1)12 Combustion

(1)13 Water Flow

(1)14 Heat

(1)15 Pull Station

(1)16 Duct

(1)17 Flame

(1)18 Near Alarm

Panic Alarms

(1)2A Panic

(1)21 Duress

(1)22 Silent

(1)23 Audible

General Alarms

(1)4A General Alarm

24 Hour Non-Fire

(1)51 Gas Detected

(1)52 Refrigeration

(1)53 Loss of Heat

(1)54 Water Leakage

(1)55 Foil Break

(1)56 Day Trouble


(1)4A General Alarm (1)58 High Temp


(1)44 Sensor tamper

(1)45 Module Tamper

(1)61 Loss of Air Flow

Table 3: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restoral Codes

Zone

Definition

[00] Null Zone

[01] Fire

[02] Fire

Supervisory

[03] Sprinkler

[06] Panic

[07] Emergency

ZZ = zones 01-05

Alarm/Rest.

Rep Codes*

No transm.

FA-ZZ/FH-ZZ

FS-ZZ/FR-ZZ

Trouble/

Rest.

Rep Codes

No transm.

FT-ZZ/FJ-ZZ

FT-ZZ/FJ-ZZ

SA-ZZ/SH-ZZ

PA-ZZ/PH-ZZ

ST-ZZ/SJ-ZZ

PT-ZZ/PJ-ZZ

QA-ZZ/QH/ZZ QT-ZZ/QJ/ZZ

Zone

Definition

[09] Gas

[10] Freeze

[11] Heat

SIA Auto

Rep Codes*

Trouble/

Rest. Rep

Codes

GA-ZZ/GH-ZZ GT-ZZ/GJ-ZZ

ZA-ZZ/ZH-ZZ ZT-ZZ/ZJ-ZZ

KA-ZZ/KH-ZZ KT-ZZ/KJ-ZZ

[12] Water WA-ZZ/WH-ZZ WT-ZZ/WJ-ZZ

[13] Untyped UA-ZZ/UH-ZZ UT-ZZ/UJ-ZZ

13


6.0 Appendix B: Table of Compatible Receivers

Format/

Receiver

10 bps (1400Hz handshake)




SIA (level 2)

Contact ID

Pager

Version

Sur-Gard

SLR

Yes

Sur-Gard

MLR

Sur-Gard

MLR200

0

Yes Yes

Osbourne

Hoffman

Quick

Alert II

Yes

Silent

Knight

Yes

Ademco

685

Radionics

6500

Bell

Mobility

Pager

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

V1.00

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

V1.83

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

V1.2

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

2/20/96

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

SIA-

9004I-

960626

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

Rev4.4d

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

D6500 L/C

1993

Yes

Pager format is to be used for backup troubles only.

14


7.0 Warranty and Warning Information

7.1 Warning

Please Read Carefully

Note to Installers


System Failures


• Inadequate Installation


• Power Failure

Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation.

If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.

• System Users


• Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices

Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.



• Alarm Notification Appliances


• Telephone Lines


• Insufficient Time


15


• Component Failure


• Inadequate Testing

Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority Having

Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.

• Security and Insurance



7.2 Limited Warranty

Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/ or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.




To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.

Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.



• damage incurred in shipping or handling;

• damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;

• damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or water damage;

• damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;

• damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);

• defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;

• damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;

• damage from improper maintenance;

• damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.

Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty. Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.

Disclaimer of Warranties

This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied

(including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.


WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.

Out of Warranty Repairs

16



Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.


17


8.0 FCC Compliance Statement













important information

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the side of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number of this equipment.

NOTIFICATION TO TELEPHONE COMPANY The customer shall notify the telephone company of the particular line to which the connection will be made, and provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence of the protective circuit.

FCC Registration Number: 6OT USA-34879-AL-ERinger Equivalence Number: 0.1BUSOC Jack:

RJ-31X

TELEPHONE CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS Except for the telephone company provided ringers, all connections to the telephone network shall be made through standard plugs and telephone company provided jacks, or equivalent, in such a manner as to allow for easy, immediate disconnection of the terminal equipment. Standard jacks shall be so arranged that, if the plug connected thereto is withdrawn, no interference to the operation of the equipment at the customer’s premises which remains connected to the telephone network shall occur by reason of such withdrawal.

INCIDENCE OF HARM Should terminal equipment or protective circuitry cause harm to the telephone network, the telephone company shall, where practicable, notify the customer that temporary disconnection of service may be required; however, where prior notice is not practicable, the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service if such action is deemed reasonable in the circumstances. In the case of such temporary discontinuance, the telephone company shall promptly notify the customer and will be given the opportunity to correct the situation.

18


ADDITIONAL TELEPHONE COMPANY INFORMATION The security control panel must be properly connected to the telephone line with a USOC RJ-31X telephone jack.

The FCC prohibits customer-provided terminal equipment be connected to party lines or to be used in conjunction with coin telephone service. Interconnect rules may vary from state to state.

CHANGES IN TELEPHONE COMPANY EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES The telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment, operations or procedures, where such actions are reasonably required and proper in its business. Should any such changes render the customer’s terminal equipment incompatible with the telephone company facilities the customer shall be given adequate notice to the effect modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER (REN) The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices that you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to your line, you may want to contact your local telephone company.

EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE FACILITY If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment, please contact the facility indicated below for information on obtaining service or repairs. The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning.

19



Canada

Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3

Tel: (905)-695-3545

Fax: (905)-660-4113

USA



Tel: (888)-660-4655

Fax:(888) 660-4113



The foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Secutron neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.


Important!



Canada

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON, L4K 5W3

Tel: (905) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113 www.secutron.com

LT-2028 Rev. B

USA

60 Industrial Parkway PMB 278

Cheektowaga, NY, 14227

Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON

Fax: 888-660-4113

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

MR-2801 Reverse Polarity/

Municipal Box Module

The MR-2801 Reverse Polarity/Municipal Box Module is jumper programmable for polarity reversal operation or Municipal Box operation, Single or Separate Alarm and

AC Fail delay.

Parts List

• Qty 1 ... MR-2801 Module

• Qty 4 ... Plastic Spacers

• Qty 4 ... KEP Nuts

• Qty 1 ... 4 Pin polarized locking cable assembly

• Qty 6 ... Jumpers

Specifications

Municipal Box Output

• Maximum Voltage ... 28 V DC

• Supervisory Current ... 5.0 mA

• Power Limited Output

• Trip Current ... 1 second momentary @ 0.35 A (subtracted from AUX power)

• Coil Voltage ... 3.65 V DC

• Coil Resistance ... 14.6 ohms

• Total wire resistance between panel and trip coil ... 3 ohms MAX

Reverse Polarity Outputs

• Maximum Voltage ... 28 V DC

• Maximum Current ... 10 mA

• Power Limited ... Yes

NOTE: This component must be included in the control panel battery calculation. Refer to the Standby Battery Calculation Sheet included with the control panel.

Installing the MR-2801 Module

The MR-2801 module mounts on 4 threaded studs located in the MR-2602/2605 Fire Alarm

Control Unit panel below the power transformer. Refer to Figures 1, 2 and Table 1.

1. Configure Jumpers for desired operating modes.

2. Position the MR-2801 Module on the 4 threaded studs. Secure the module to the studs with 4 KEP nuts (provided).

3. Insert the 4-wire Secure-Bus connector into the PRMB Dialer connector located on the

MR-2602/2605 Fire Alarm Unit Control board.

4. Route 14-18 AWG Hookup Wire through the panel access holes in accordance with local regulations.

5. Secure wire connections to output terminals as required. Refer to MR2602 or MR2605

Installation Manual for programming details.

MR-2801

Reverse Polarity/

Municipal Box

Module

Fig 1 MR-2801 Reverse Polarity/Municipal Box Module

Watchdog

Trouble LED

Municipal Box

Trouble LED

J1 J2 J3

J7

J6

J5

J4

Disconnect

Switch

4-Wire Secure-bus

Connector to

PRMB/Dialer

Polarity

Reversal

Outputs

Master Box

Output

T 1

-

Alm

Out

+

-

Trb

Out

+

-

Sup

Out

+

-

MB

+

Option

Module

Configuration

J2

On

Jumper Settings

J1 -

Off

J1 - On

J3 J4

Off

Table 1 JUMPER PROGRAMMING

Function

Municipal Box Output enabled - Polarity Reversal disabled

Polarity Reversal enabled - Municipal Box output disabled

Off During an Alarm event the Alarm output reverses polarity

During a Supervisory event the Supervisory output reverses polarity

During a Trouble event the Trouble output reverses polarity

Off Off Off During an Alarm event the Alarm output reverses polarity

During a Supervisory event the Alarm output disconnects

During a Trouble event the Trouble output is disabled.

Polarity

Reversal

Output

Options

Off Off On During an Alarm event the Alarm output reverses polarity

During a Supervisory event the Alarm output disconnects

During a Trouble event the Alarm output disconnects

AC Delay

Off On Off During an Alarm event the Alarm output reverses polarity


During a Trouble event the Trouble output is disabled.

Off

J5

Off

On

Off

On

On

J6

Off

Off

On

On

On During an Alarm event the Alarm Output reverses polarity


During a Trouble event the Alarm and Supervisory outputs are disconnected.

NO AC fail delay

6 Hr AC fail delay

12 Hr AC fail delay

24 Hr AC fail delay

Fig 2 MR-2602/2605 Fire Panel Layout

120 VAC

GND

Primary

Transformer

4-Wire Secure-bus

Connector

MR-2801

Module

PRMB/Dialer

Connector

KEP Nuts

Front panel display PCB mounted to underside of deadfront.

Cable connected to main PCB

Main PCB

Class A Interface Module

Space for one, 12V

12Ah battery

Space for one, 12V

12Ah battery

MR-2614 Annunciator

Installation Instructions

1.0 General Information

The basic MR-2614 Annunciator has 8 zones consisting of a red alarm

LED and a yellow trouble LED. There are four common LEDs for alarm

(red), supervisory (yellow), trouble (yellow) and power (green). There are four switch inputs that are used as follows: 1) Reset, 2) Signal

Silence (this function is not UL listed), 3) Acknowledge, 4) Local Lamp

Test. There can only be one basic annunciator attached to the FACP.

The enhanced Annunciator, MR-2614EH, has all the features of the basic MR-2614 and also includes yellow supervisory LEDs for each of the 8 zones, connections for off-board LEDs and a service terminal port. The off-board LEDs allow for Zones 1 to 72 or a graphic annunciator; zones 1 to 8 are repeated for convenience of graphic annunciation. The MR-2902 Annunciator Strip, MR-2622 Annunciator

Strip and the MR-2915 LED Driver are connected to the Annunciator by ribbon cables. The three connectors on the Annunciator are labelled

P1 to P3. Each connector handles 24 zones with each zone having 3

LEDs, alarm, supervisory and trouble. P1 is for zones 1 to 24, P2 is for zones 25 to 48 and P3 is for zones 49 to 72. The MR-2902

Annunciator Strip handles 24 zones. Each MR-2622 and MR-2915 controls 8 zones. Up to 3 MR-2622s or MR-2915s can be chained together to provide up to 24 zones per chain. Each MR-2622 will require a jumper for addressing. No jumpers are set on the MR-2915 for addressing purposes. The service terminal allows for addressing the annunciators so that multiple annunciators can be connected to the

FACP. Each annunciator will display the same information. There can be up to 8 MR-2614EHs per FACP, or one basic MR-2614 and up to 7

MR-2614EHs per FACP.

For graphic annunciators, the off-board LEDs are interfaced to the MR-

2614 using the MR-2915 LED Driver, which drives up to 8 zones of 3

LEDs each. There is a 50 pin connector for connection to a wirewrap socket. The LEDs would be connected to the wire-wrap legs of the socket.

1

1.1 Technical Specifications

MR-2614

Voltage 24VDC

Normal Current 20 mA

Max. Current

Switch SPST

MR-2622

N/O momentary contact

Normal Current 5 mA

Maximum Current 125 mA

Data Communications

Maximum Distance 900m (3000 ft), 22 AWG

Communication Wire 18 to 22 AWG Twisted Pair

Power

Power Wire 18 AWG

Maximum distance 300m (1000 ft)

Note: The MR-2614 requires 24 VDC for correct operation.

2


2.1 Mounting

These mounting instruction are specifically for the MR-2614S, MR-

2614EHS and the MR-2614EHS+MR-2622S annunciator packages.

1. Choose a suitable place for mounting, considering all applicable codes and standards.

2. Remove the screws from the top and bottom of the annunciator.

3. Remove the section(s) from the backplate.

4. Mount the backplate in the location chosen.

5. Bring the wiring from the control unit through one of the holes provided in the backplate.

6. Attach the wiring from the control unit to the pigtail on the MR-2614 board. See section

2.2 Wiring

below for wiring instructions.

7. Replace the section(s) into the backplate. Remember to reconnect any ribbon cables between the sections.

8. Replace the screws from the top and bottom of the annunciator.

2.2 Wiring

All wiring must be in accordance with applicable codes and standards.

For reliable communications, the MR-2614 must be powered from the fire panel. If an external power supply is used, 1) the negative of the power supply must be connected to the Aux Power negative of the fire panel; 2) it must be UL/ULC listed for use with fire alarm systems.

MR-2400 Control Unit

The MR-2400 Control

Unit is connected to the

MR-2614 Annunciator by

4 wires, 2 for communications and 2 for power. The communications wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is done as shown in

Figure 1.


3

MR2900 Control Unit

The MR-2900 control unit is connected to the MR-2614 Annunciator by 4 wires, 2 for power and 2 for communications. The wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is as shown in Figure 2.

The MR-2900 panel requires that the

MR-2109-3 communications board be installed.

MR-2608 Control Unit

The MR-2608 control unit is connected to the MR-2614 annunciator by 4 wires, 2 power and 2 communications. The wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is as shown in Figure 3.



MR-2616

The MR-2616 control unit is connected to the MR-2614

Annunciator by 4 wires, 2 power and 2 communications. The wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is as shown in Figure 4. Do not use Aux Pwr 1 on the MR-2616 for the

MR-2614 as Aux Pwr

1 is for resetting 4 wire input devices.


4

Multiple MR-2614EH

Up to 8 MR-2614EH annunciators can be connected a FACP. If more than one MR-2614EH is used, the wiring is done as a daisy chain starting from the panel and going to each MR-2614EH in turn (see

Figure 5). The 3.9 k resistor across the pigtail terminations must be removed from all MR-2614EH annunciators except the last one.

Figure 5: Wiring Multiple MR-2614EH Annunciators

2.3 LEDs

In addition to eight

LED zones on the MR-

2614 itself, up to 72

LED zones can be connected to the LED expansion ports (P1,

P2, P3 see Figure 6).

P1 is for zones 1 to

24, P2 is for zones 25 to 48 and P3 is for zones 49 to 72. The eight zones on the

MR-2614 are same as the first eight zones of

P1.

Figure 6: LED connections

5

MR-2915

The MR-2915 LED Driver has a 50 pin connector for connection to the LEDs. The

LEDs are wired to a 50 pin socket which the

MR-2915 plugs into. The pin-outs are shown in Figure 7. Note: All LEDs wired to the same

MR-2915 share a common positive. The MR-

2915 is self addressing in terms of the octet it displays. The first one in a chain does zones 1 to 8 (25 to 32, 49 to 56), the second does zones 9 to 16 (33 to 40, 57 to 64) and the third

(last) does zones 17 to 24 (41 to 48, 65 to 72).

Figure 7: MR-2915

LED Pin-Outs

MR-2622 Jumper Settings

The MR-2622 LED strip provides 8 zones of 3 LEDs (alarm, supervisory, trouble) each. These can be used as the first (1 to

8), second (9 to 16) or third (17 to 24) octet of a set of 24 zones. The first octet also does zones 25 to 32 and zones 49 to 56, the second octet also does zones 33 to 40 and zones 57 to 64, and the third octet also does zones 41 to 48 and zones 65 to 72 depending on which set of 24 they are connected to. The jumpers for setting the octet are located just below the ribbon cable connector (see Figure 8). There are three pairs of holes. Soldering a wire jumper across the required pair will set the

MR-2622 to be the first, second or third octet. There is a trace on the board jumpering the pair for the first octet. This will need to be cut if the board is for the second or third octet.

Figure 8: MR-2622

6

3.0 Programming

The MR-2614EH annunciator is programmed through the service terminal connection at the bottom of the board, marked P4. This connection is a special 4 pin connector. The MR-2614EH uses serial communication of 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.

Normally, programming is required only when there is more than one

MR-2614EH being used.

There are three program settings for the MR-2614EH, the ID number, the use of supervisory LEDs and the flash mode of LEDs. Under normal circumstances, only the unit ID will need to be programmed.

The other two settings are handled by the factory.

The commands available for programming are:

<Del>

(id)N

1 S

0 S

0 F

1 F

Redraw the programming screen. This screen will show the current settings and the programming commands.

Set the ID of the MR-2614EH. This can be from 1 to 8.

The default value is 1. This value will need to be changed only if there are more than one MR-2614EH being used.

The MR-2614EH uses separate alarm and supervisory

LEDs for each zone.

The MR-2614EH will map supervisory signals to the alarm

LED for each zone.

The MR-2614EH will flash LEDs when a new signal is received.

The MR-2614EH will not flash the LEDs when a new signal is received. This is for future usage.

7

8

Canada

25 Interchange Way


Tel: (905) 695-3545


LT-2029 Rev. B

USA



Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON

Fax: 888-660-4113


This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart “B” of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in any residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to television or radio reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

•

•

Re-orient the receiving antenna

Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver

•

•

Move the alarm control away from the receiver

Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and receiver are on different circuits.

If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC helpful: “How to Identify and Resolve Radio/

Television Interference Problems”. This booklet is available from the U.S.

Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-

00345-4.

Canada

25 Interchange Way


Tel: (905) 660-4655

Fax: (905) 660-4113

USA



Tel: 1-888-660-4655

Fax: 888-660-4113


INSTUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN

MR-2844 Programmer

The MR-2844 is an LCD keypad style programmer specifically design to program the

Dual Line Dialer and the 2 and 5 zone Fire Alarm Control Panels. The programmer includes a power/communications cable which plugs into the Dual Line Dialer. Once connected, the programmer will power up and is ready to program the dialer and the panel.

NOTE: Once programming is complete, the programmer must be removed. The dialer will not function while the programmer is connected.

Le MR-2844 est un programmeur ressemblant à un clavier ACL spécialement conçu pour programmer le communicateur à deux lignes et les panneaux de contrôle d’alarme d’incendie de deux et cinq série. Le programmeur comprend un câble d’alimentation et de communication qui se branche sur le communicateur à deux lignes. Une fois branché, le programmeur s’allume et est prêt à être utilisé pour programmer le communicateur et le panneau.

NOTE: Une fois que la programmation est complétée, le programmeur doit être retiré.

Lorsque le programmeur est branché le communicateur ne fonctionne pas.

El MR-2844 es un programador de estilo de teclado LCD específicamente diseñado para programar el marcador de líneas duales y el dos y cinco zona series de paneles de control de alarmas contra incendio. El programador incluye un cable de energía/ comunicaciones lo cual enchufa en el marcador de líneas duales. Una vez conectado, el programador encenderá y está listo para programar el marcador y control.

NOTA: Una vez que la programación esté completada, el programador debe ser removido. El marcador no funcionará mientras el programador esté conectado.

D u a l L i n e D i a l e r

C o m m u n i c a t e u r

M a r c a d o r R J 1 1

C o n n e c t o r o n t h e D i a l e r

P r i s e R J 1 1 s u r e l e c o m m u n i c a t e u r

C o n e c t o r R J 1 1 e n e l m a r c a r o d r

T M 1 C o n n e c t o r a t t a c h e d t o t h e

P r o g r a m m e r

P r i s e T M 1 s u r l e p r o g r a m m e u r

C o n n e c t o r T M 1 c o n e c t a d o a l p r o g r a m a d o r

P a t c h C o r d

C o r d o n d e r a c c o r d e m e n t

C a b l e d e c o n e x i ó n

P r o g r a m m e r

P r o g r a m m e u r

P r o g r a m a d o r

LT-2035 Rev. B

M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S

LED Fire Alarm Control Panel

I

NSTALLATION &

O

PERATION MANUAL

Revision A

Document #: LT-905SEC





Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3















MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual

Contents

Industry Canada and FCC Notice ........................................................................................... 1

Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2

Overall Features ................................................................................................................... 2

Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3

Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3

Zone...................................................................................................................................... 3

Display Points ....................................................................................................................... 3

Wiring Styles ......................................................................................................................... 3

System Components ............................................................................................................... 4

Main Fire Control Panel ........................................................................................................ 4

Relay Module: 12 Relays ...................................................................................................... 6

Relay Modules: Six Relays ................................................................................................... 6

Polarity reversal/city tie ......................................................................................................... 6

Remote Annunciator ............................................................................................................. 7

Smart Relay Module ............................................................................................................. 7

Input Class A converter: Six Circuits..................................................................................... 8

Output Class A converter: four circuits ................................................................................. 8

Output Class A converter: two circuits .................................................................................. 8

Active end-of-line .................................................................................................................. 8

MR-2312-ATW Remote Annunciator .................................................................................... 9

Additional Fire Alarm System Accessories ........................................................................... 9

Mechanical Installation............................................................................................................ 10

Installing the Enclosure......................................................................................................... 10

Installing the Adder Modules................................................................................................. 12

Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules ............................... 13

Main Fire Alarm Board .......................................................................................................... 13

MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module............................................................. 14

MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module ............................................. 15

Relay Adder Modules (Models MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6) ........................................ 15

MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder Module ................................................................................. 16

Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR) .............................................. 17

Field wiring ............................................................................................................................... 18

Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring ...................................................................................... 18

Relay Adder Module Wiring ................................................................................................. 21

Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring .............................................. 23

Power supply connection ...................................................................................................... 24

Wiring Tables and Information ............................................................................................. 25

Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated) .................................................................................... 25

Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)................................................................................ 25

Auxiliary Power (unregulated)............................................................................................... 26

System Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 27

Before turning the power “ON”.............................................................................................. 27

Power-up procedure ............................................................................................................. 27

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 27 i

Contents

Indicators, Controls and Operations ..................................................................................... 28

Common Indicators .............................................................................................................. 29

Alarm Circuit Indicators ........................................................................................................ 31

Supervisory Circuit Indicators .............................................................................................. 31

Monitor Circuit Indicators ..................................................................................................... 31

Trouble-only Circuit Indicators ............................................................................................. 32

Signal Circuit Indicators ....................................................................................................... 32

Common Controls ................................................................................................................ 32

Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons......................................................................................... 33

Common Relays................................................................................................................... 34

Circuit Types ........................................................................................................................ 34

Evacuation codes................................................................................................................. 36

Single Stage Operation ........................................................................................................ 37

Two-stage Operation............................................................................................................ 37

Supported Protocols/Devices ................................................................................................ 39

Synchronous Strobes........................................................................................................... 39

System Sensor’s i3 Devices................................................................................................. 39

Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool .................................................................... 41

Entering the Passcode ......................................................................................................... 42

Command Menu................................................................................................................... 42

1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu) ............................................................................. 43

2. Config Info (Command-Menu........................................................................................... 52

3. Set Time (Command-Menu)............................................................................................. 53

4. Change password (Command-Menu) .............................................................................. 54

5. View Event Log (Command-Menu) .................................................................................. 54

6. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu) ................................................................................. 55

7. Walk Test (Command-Menu) ........................................................................................... 56

8. i3 Loop Test (Command-Menu) ....................................................................................... 57

9. Dialer Config (Command-Menu) ...................................................................................... 58

10. Test Dialer (Command-Menu)........................................................................................ 64

11. Exit (Command-Menu) ................................................................................................... 66

CFG-300 LCD Service tool operation .................................................................................. 66

Appendix A: Compatible Receivers....................................................................................... 70

Appendix B: Reporting ........................................................................................................... 71

Ademco Contact-ID.............................................................................................................. 71

Security Industries Association SIA-DCS............................................................................. 72

Appendix C: Specifications.................................................................................................... 73

Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)........................... 74

Warranty................................................................................................................................... 75 ii



Figures

Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount ............................................................................10

Figure 2: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring .............................................11

Figure 3: Installation of Adder Modules ...............................................................................12

Figure 4: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings ...............................13

Figure 5: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module .............................................14

Figure 6: MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .............................15

Figure 7: MR-2312-R12 twelve relay adder module ............................................................15

Figure 8: MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay programming ........................................................16

Figure 9: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module ....................................................................16

Figure 10: Polarity reversal and city tie module ...................................................................17

Figure 11: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B wiring .........................................................18

Figure 12: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring .........................................................19

Figure 13: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring .......................................................19

Figure 14: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring ........................................................20

Figure 15: Four-wire smoke detector wiring .........................................................................20

Figure 16: Dialer wiring ........................................................................................................21

Figure 17: Relay per zone (MR-2312-R12) Terminal connection ........................................21

Figure 18: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection ..........................................22

Figure 19: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection ...................................23

Figure 20: Power supply connection ....................................................................................24

Figure 21: LED indicators and control buttons......................................................................28

Figure 21: Evacuation and Alert Codes ...............................................................................36

Figure 22: MR-2300 Configuration .......................................................................................41

Tables

Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board ........................................14

Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings .................................................................................17

Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ...........................................................................................25

Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring .........................................................................................25

iii

List of Figures and Tables iv


Industry Canada and FCC Notice

Notice for all MR-2300 Series Built-In UDACTs Sold in Canada

Secutron's MR-2300 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Canada

(ULC) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel under Standard ULC-S527 (Standard for Control

Units for Fire Alarm Systems) and ULC/ORD-C693-1994 (Central Station Fire Protective Signalling Systems and Services). These

Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the Canadian / Provincial / Local Electrical Code; and/or the local

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

Industry Canada Notice

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alteration made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the Earth Ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This is necessary both for proper operation and for protection.

CAUTION:

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate

Notice for all MR-2300 Series Built-in UDACTs Sold in the U.S.A.

Note:

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.

The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.

Secutron's MR-2300 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Digital Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

(ULI) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel under Standard 864 (Control Units for Fire Protective

Signalling Systems). These Communicators comply with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) performance requirements for

DACTs and should be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 4 (Supervising Station Fire Alarm System). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70); and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction

(AHJ).

FCC Notice

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the telco transformer of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment is capable of siezing the line. This capability is provided in the hardware.

Type of Service: The Communicator is designed to be used on standard device telephone lines. It connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the USOC RJ-11C (or USOC FJ45S). Connection to telephone company provided coin service (central office implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is subject to state tariffs.

Telephone Company Procedures: The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.

In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you concerning the equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number (REN); both of these items are listed on the equipment label. The sum of all of the REN’s on your telephone lines should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on a given line.

If Problems Arise: If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible.

When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

Contact your telephone company if you have any questions about your phone line. In the event repairs are ever needed on the

Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Inc. or an authorized representative of Secutron Inc.. For information contact

Secutron Inc. at the address and phone numbers shown on the back page of this document.

1

Introduction

Introduction

Secutron's MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel is a Digital Signal Processor (DSP)-based fire panel. The MR-

2300 provides a maximum of 12 supervised Class B or A (Style B or D) Initiating circuits, and maximum four supervised Class B or A (Style Y or Z) indicating circuits. All circuits are supervised for opens and ground faults, and indicating circuits are supervised for shorts. Optional modules include Relay, Polarity Reversal and City Tie and

Class A Converters for initiating and indicating circuits. Semi-flush or surface mountable enclosures can be used for retrofits and on new installations.

Note:

Installation of the MR-2300 series fire alarm control panel should be in accordance with Canadian

Electrical Code Part 1, ULC-S524 installation of Fire Alarm System, National Electrical Code NFPA

70 and NFPA 72. Final acceptance subject to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

Overall Features

• Basic unit has 12 Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, which may be configured as Class A (Style D) using input

Class A converter adder modules. Each initiating circuit can be configured as Alarm, Verified Alarm, Water flow

Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory, Monitor or Trouble-Only circuits. There are two

LEDs per circuit, one for Trouble (amber), and one dual color (amber/red) LED for Supervisory (amber) and

Alarm (red).

• Basic unit has four Power Limited Class B (Style Y) indicating circuits with individual trouble indicators. Each indicating circuit may be configured as Class A (Style Z) using output Class A converter adder module. Each indicating circuit may be configured as Silenceable signal, non Silenceable signal, Silenceable strobe, non

Silenceable strobe. The audible signal may be Steady, Temporal Code, California Code, or March Time.

• Two Stage operation available.

• A pushbutton associated with each initiating and indicating circuit can individually disconnect the circuit.

• Configurable Signal Silence Inhibit, Auto Signal Silence, Two-Stage Operation, and One-Man Walk Test.

• Subsequent Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble operation.

• Four-wire resettable smoke power supply 300mA maximum.

• Relay Contacts for Common Alarm, Common Supervisory and Common Trouble all non-disconnectable and

Auxiliary Alarm Relay (disconnectable).

• RS-485 Interface for LCD Annunciators, MR-2300 Series Remote Multiplex Annunciators and Smart relay adder.

• Optional Modules for additional Relay Circuits, City Tie and Polarity Reversal Signaling.

• Extensive transient protection.

• With or without built-in UDACT (Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter.)

• Easy configuration of the panel and built-in UDACT using LCD service tool (CFG-300.)

• Remote dial up (with built-in UDACT version) for event log checking and/or configuration changing.

• Laptop programmer for direct configuration changing and log checking.

2


Conventions

Circuits

Refers to an actual electrical interface for Initiating (Detection) and Indicating (Signal) or Relays.

Zone

Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit.

Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.

Display Points

There is a display point associated with every initiating and indicating circuit of the MR-2300 LED Series fire panel.

For an initiating circuit there are two LEDs for every display point: one single color (amber) and one dual color (red/ amber). For an indicating circuit there is only one LED: one single color (amber), for every display point.

Wiring Styles

Initiating and indicating circuits are Class B (Style B and Y). Changing the initiating circuits to Class A requires an

MR-2300-A adder board which will convert SIX initiating zones from Class B (Style B) circuits to Class A (Style D).

This is done without penalizing the number of circuits, which remains the same as in Class B (Style B). Changing the indicating circuits to Class A requires an MR-2300-NC4 adder board which will convert FOUR indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z) or an MR-2300-NC2 adder board which will convert TWO indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z).

3

System Components

System Components

Main Fire Control Panel

-2&IRE!LARM#ONTROL0ANEL

Model

MR-2312-LDW

MR-2312-LDR

MR-2312-LW

MR-2312-LR

Description

12 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (white door, black box). 12 Class B

(Style B) Initiating circuits, and four Power

Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits (up to 1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total). Two six zone MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter adder modules may be used for Class A (Style

D) wiring of Initiating circuits. One MR-2300-

NC4 Output Class A Converter adder module may be used for Class A (Style Z) wiring of the

Indicating circuits. The MR-2312-LDW contains

Common Alarm, Common Supervisory &

Common Trouble Relays, auxiliary alarm relay

(disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for

Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four

Wire Smoke Detector Power Supply. The unit has a dialer on main board. Used with BA-110

(10 amp-hour) (Sota Enertech model SA12120) batteries (two required).

12 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (red door, black box). 12 Class B


Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits

(up to1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total).

Two six zone MR-2300-A Input Class A converter adder modules may be used for

Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits.

One MR-2300-NC4 Output Class A

Converter adder module may be used for

Class A (Style Z) wiring of the Indicating circuits. The MR-2312-LDR contains Common

Alarm, Common Supervisory & Common

Trouble Relays, auxiliary alarm relay





12 Zone Fire Alarm with LED display (white door, black box). Same as MR-2312-LDW except without dialer.

12 Zone Fire Alarm with LED display (red door, black box). Same as MR-2312-LDR except without dialer.

4

MR-2308-LDW

MR-2308-LW


8 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (white door, black box). 8 Class B




Two six zone MR-2300-A Input Class A converter adder modules may be used for




Class A (Style Z) wiring of the Indicating circuits. The MR-2308-LDW contains Common

Alarm, Common Supervisory & Common

Trouble Relays, auxiliary alarm relay





8 Zone Fire Alarm with LED display (white door, black box). Same as MR-2308-LDW except without dialer.

5

System Components

Relay Module: 12 Relays


RELAY 1 RELAY 2

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 3

NO/NC C

RELAY 4

NO/NC C

RELAY 5 RELAY 6

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 7

NO/NC C

RELAY 8

NO/NC C

RELAY 9

NO/NC

RELAY 10

C NO/NC C

RELAY 11

NO/NC

RELAY 12

C NO/NC C

Relay Modules: Six Relays

MR-2312-R12 Twelve-relay adder module


MR-2306-R6 module

RELAY 1

NO/NC C

RELAY 2

NO/NC C

RELAY 3

NO/NC

C

RELAY 4

NO/NC C

RELAY 5

NO/NC C

RELAY 6

NO/NC C

Polarity reversal/city tie


MR-2300-PR

Polarity Reversal and/or City tie Module

JW4

6

Remote Annunciator

SYSTEM NORMAL

18:01 MON 2003-04-05

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

FIRE

DRILL

BUZZER

SILENCE

LAMP

TEST

A.C. ON ALARM SUPV

1

4

GHI

7

PRS

*

2

ABC

5

JKL

8

TUV

0

QZ

TRBL CPU FAIL

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXY

#

ENTER

MENU

CANCEL

INFO

MR-2300 SERIES Remote Annunciator

Smart Relay Module


Model

MR-2300-LCDW

Description

Remote Annunciator module, LCD display, white painted box

MR-2300-LCDR

Remote Annunciator

Module, LCD display, red painted box


MR-2312-SR12/

MR-2312-SW12

Smart Relay Module (12 relays) with red or white enclosure

MR-2300 SERIES REMOTE RELAY

7

System Components

Input Class A converter: Six Circuits

Model

MR-2300-A

Description

Input Class A converter Module (six circuits). This module has built in

Active End-of-Line resistors.

Output Class A converter: four circuits


MR-2300-NC4

Output Class A converter module (four circuits)

Output Class A converter: two circuits

Model

MR-2300-NC2

Description

Output Class A converter module (two circuits)

Active end-of-line

The MR-2300-X are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.


RED

BLACK MR-2300-X Active end-of-line resistor without plate

8


MR-2312-AT Remote Annunciator


A.C.

ON

BUZZER

SILENCE

LAMP

TEST

COMMON

TROUBLE

SIGNAL

SILEBCE

SWITCH

ENABLE

SIGNAL

SILENCE

SYSTEM

RESET

FIRE ALARM

ANNUNCIATOR

MR-2312-ATW/

MR-2312-ATR

16 Zone remote annunciator

Additional Fire Alarm System Accessories

Model: MR-2306-ATW/MR-2306-ATW/ Eight Zone Remote Annunciator (ULC and ULI Approved)

Model: MR-2605-T Remote Trouble Indicator (ULC and ULI Approved)

9

Mechanical Installation

Mechanical Installation

Installing the Enclosure

Install the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel enclosure as shown below for the twelve and eight-zone models.

Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes, as shown and the screws provided.

Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount

11"

Mounting Hole

1.5"

Mounting Hole

20.5"

25.9"

Mounting Hole

10

5.4" Mounting Hole

4.5"

14.5"

The backbox may be semi-flush mounted using the trim ring model MR-2312-FT (BLACK), see Figure 2. Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front and semi-flush mount the backbox into the wall. Peel the adhesive cover from the trim ring and stick to the wall surface around the backbox, after wall is finished.


Figure 2: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring

The figure below shows a cross-section of the semi-flush mounted backbox and the trim ring. Make sure to allow a minimum depth of 1” above the wall surface for proper door opening.

TRIM RING

WALL

WOOD OR

METAL STUD

BACKBOX

11


Installing the Adder Modules

MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm panels come pre-assembled with all components and boards except for Adder Modules.

Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 4 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information for wiring specifications.

Figure 3: Installation of Adder Modules

MAIN FIRE PANEL BOARD

CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300A

(6 circuits)

LED DISPLAY

JW6

JW5

JW4

ZONE-3

DISCONNECT

ZONE-5

DISCONNECT

ZONE-7

DISCONNECT

ZONE-11

DISCONNECT

NAC-3

DISCONNECT

WALK

TEST

CPU FAIL

GROUND

FAULT

SIGNAL

SILENCE

ACK

GENERAL

ALARM

BUZZER

SILENCE

ZONE-4

DISCONNECT

ZONE-6

DISCONNECT

ZONE-8

DISCONNECT

ZONE-12

DISCONNECT

NAC-4

DISCONNECT

COMMON

SUPV

COMMON

TROUBLE

SYSTEM

RESET

CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300-A

(6 circuits)

CLASS-A converter board for indicating circuits MR-2300-NC4

(4 circuits)

Reverse polarity and city tie module MR-2300-PR.

Mounted on hex spacer with two screws provided

JW3

JW2

JW1

Fuse and terminal

AC wiring

Transformer

P

3

BATTERY

P

4

_

SEC. TX

P

1

P

2

Relay Module MR-2306-R6

Mount relay module on the left side using two screws provided .

BATTERY

Relay Module MR-2312-R12 centre under main fire alarm board using three screws provided .

BATTERY

12


Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder

Modules

Main Fire Alarm Board

Figure 4: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings

JW6-Open all the time

For PC programming use SUIMA interface module not UL-864 or

ULC-S527 listed.

Telephone line #1

JW5-Normally Open

JW4 -Normally open

Telephone line #2

RS-485 for annunciators

For front panel programming use SCFG-200 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed.

JW7 -Normally open

JW7

Auxiliary Relay

Alarm Relay

Supervisory

Relay

Trouble Relay

Auxiliary Supply

4-wire Supply

Unfiltered 24V supply connect to Remote trouble indicator

JW2 - ON- when

MR-2306-R6/2312-R12 not connected

Connect to MR-2306-R6/

MR-2312-R12 Relay module

JW1 - ON- when

MR-2300-PR not connected

Connect to

MR-2300-PR

JW3

JW2

JW1

JW6

JW5

JW4

W ALK

TES T

REMOTE

TROUBLE

CPU FAIL

G ROUN D

FAULT

ZON E-1

DISCON N ECT

ZON E-3

DISCON N ECT

ZON E-5

DISCON N ECT

ZON E-7

DISCON N ECT

ZON E-9

DISCON N ECT

ABORT

N AC-1

DISCON N ECT

RELEASE

CIRCUIT -1

SIG N AL

SILEN CE

FIRE

DRILL

ACK

G EN ERAL

ALARM

JW3- Removed all the time

SYSTEM

RESET

AUX

DISCON N ECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILEN CE

A.C .

ON

COMMON

ALARM

COMMON

SUPV

COMMON

TROUBLE

BATTERY

TROUBLE

ZON E-2

DISCON N ECT

ZON E-4

DISCON N ECT

ZON E-6

DISCON N ECT

ZON E-8

DISCON N ECT

ZON E-10

DISCON N ECT

MAN UAL

RELEASE

N AC-2

DISCON N ECT

RELEASE

CIRCUIT -2

BATTERY

_

P3 P4

SEC. TX

P1 P2

13

Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules

Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board

P5

P6

JW1

Cable from P1 of the MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module connects here.

Otherwise not used.

Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2312-R12 or MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here. Otherwise not used.

On the Main Fire Alarm Module, this jumper must be removed if a MR-2300-PR Polarity

Reversal and City Tie Module is installed.

JW2 Remove this jumper if an MR-2312-R12 or MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module is used.

JW3 Removed all the time.

JW4

JW5

Normally open. Place jumper here and power down (AC and Batteries) then power back to revert back to default password. Once the system has reset, REMOVE the jumper from the pins at JW5. Leave normally open.

Normally open to BLOCK remote configuration via modem, PC with a UIMA converter module or a CFG-300 Configuration Tool. Place jumper here to ALLOW any type of configuration.

JW6 Not used, open.

JW7 Not used, open.

MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module

Figure 5: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module

mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

All these pins comes with red and black wires which are connected to the detection circuit on the main fire alarm board. Red is positive and black is negative mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

14

There are no jumpers or cables to set on this module, just wiring from the converter (wires are fixed here) to the

Main Fire Alarm Board.

Initiating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-A module to the Main Fire Alarm board. For example, Initiating circuit 1 positive (red) and negative (black) wires are connected to the positive and negative terminals (respectively) of Initiating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. From the MR-2300-A converter Initiating circuits are wired out to the devices from the positive and negative terminals marked DET OUT and the circuit return wires are brought back to the converter module to positive and negative terminals marked DET RET.

To convert all 12 initiating circuits of the Fire Alarm Panel, two of these MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter Adder

Modules are required.


MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

Figure 6: MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

mounting hole for

#6-32 screws mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

MR-2300-NC2

SOCA-202 mounting hole for

#6-32 screws mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC4/NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit 1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.

The actual indicating zone is wired from the SIGNAL OUT positive and negative to the signaling devices and then wired back to the SIGNAL RET positive and negative.

Relay Adder Modules (Models MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6)

MR-2312-R12 Twelve-Relay Adder Module

The ribbon cable from P1 of the MR-2312-R12 is connected to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2312-R12 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts.

Figure 7: MR-2312-R12 twelve relay adder module

Connect to P6 on the main fire alarm board INDIVIDUAL

GREEN RELAY

STATUS LEDs

Three mounting holes for #6-32 screws

RELAY 1

NO/NC C

RELAY 2

NO/NC C

RELAY 3 RELAY 4

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 5 RELAY 6

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 7 RELAY 8

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 9 RELAY 10

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 11 RELAY 12

NO/NC C NO/NC C

P1: Cable from MR-2312-R12 Relay Adder Module connects to P6 on Main Fire Alarm Board.

Programming the relays

A typical relay circuit is shown in Figure 8 with the jumper locations and descriptions.

Note:

Relay programming should be done before installing the board

15


Figure 8: MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay programming

ZONE JUMPER

installed: turns ON relay when the zone

(1) is active

removed: does not turn ON the relay when zone (1) is active

Default: Jumper is installed

SUPV/ALARM SELECTION

S: Relay turns ON when common supervisory is active

A: Relay turns ON when common alarm is active

Default: No jumper installed, connected on center pin only

A

Z1

S 1&2

LED (GREEN)

LOGICAL OR WITH ADJACENT ZONE

jumper installed: this relay 1 works in conjunction with relay 2

jumper removed: relay 1 does not operate with the adjacent relay 2

chaining example: if jumper is installed on 1&2 and 2&3 then all the three relays will be ON if any one of relays 1,2 and 3 is active

Default: No jumper installed, connected on one pin only

RELAY 1

NO NC

NC/NO CONNECTION

NC: terminal provides normally closed contacts

NO: terminal provides normally open contacts

Default: jumper is installed on normally open (NO)

Note: if the jumper is not installed on any selection then the relay is not connected to the terminals

NO/NC C

RELAY 12

NO/NC C

MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder Module

Cable from P1 of the MR-2306-R6 is connected to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2306-R6 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts.

Figure 9: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module

Connect to P6 on the main fire alarm board

INDIVIDUAL GREEN

RELAY STATUS LEDs mounting hole for #6-32 screws

RELAY 1

NO/NC C

RELAY 2

NO/NC C

RELAY 3 RELAY 4

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 5 RELAY 6

NO/NC C NO/NC C mounting hole for #6-32 screws

P1 : Cable from MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects to P6 on Main Fire Alarm Board.


See explanation in Figure 8.

Note:


16


Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR)

Figure 10: Polarity reversal and city tie module

Mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

P1 P2

Mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR.

Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings

P1

JW1

JW2

Cable connects to P5 on the Main Fire Alarm Board

Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission. When this jumper is cut and a system trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or

"open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.

Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission of supervisory. When this jumper is cut and a supervisory trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a

"zero volts" or "open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.

The Alarm Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to turn OFF when signal silence is active. This allows the City Tie Box to be manually reset. On subsequent alarms the silenceable signals will resound and the

City Tie Box will be retriggered. See Configuration on page for more information.

The Trouble Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to delay AC power fail for 0, 8 or 18 hours if this is the only system trouble. See SYSTEM CONFIGURATION section.

17

Field wiring

Field wiring

Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring

Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to the Wiring Tables for wire gauges and to

Appendix A for specifications.

CAUTION:

Do not exceed power supply ratings.

Initiating Circuit Wiring

Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below. The panel supports Style B wiring or Style D wiring for the inititating circuits. The initiating circuits are supervised by a 3.9K End-of-Line Resistor or for power saving an

Active-End-of-Line.

Note:

According to Configuration, End-of-Line Resistors on initiating circuits must be all 3.9K ohms or all


Figure 11: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B wiring

FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #1

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

STYLE B

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 1

ALARM ZONE

STYLE B

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 2

SUPERVISORY

ZONE

ION SMOKE

DETECTOR

PHOTO SMOKE

DETECTOR

HEAT

DETECTOR

PULL STATION

SUPERVISORY

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

NOTE: ACTIVE END OF LINE

RESISTORS MAY BE USED, BUT

THEY MUST BE USED ON ALL THE

INITIATING CIRCUITS.

18


Figure 12: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring

CONVERTER MODULE


STYLE D

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 1

ALARM

ZONE

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #1

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

4 MORE INITIATING

CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN

STYLE D

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 2

SUPERVISORY

ZONE

ION SMOKE

DETECTOR

PHOTO

SMOKE

DETECTOR

HEAT

DETECTOR

PULL STATION SUPERVISORY

Note:

When using MR-2300 Class A Converter Adder Modules, always use Active End-of-Line resistors on all initiating circuits including those that are not converted to Class A.

Indicating Circuit Wiring

The MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm supports Class B or Style Y and Class A Style Z wiring for its indicating circuits.

Each circuit is supervised by a 3.9K End-of-Line resistor. Each indicating circuit provides up to 1.7 A, 5 A maximum total if no auxiliaries are used.

Note:

An Active End-of-Line resistor CANNOT be used with any indicating circuits. Always use 3.9K End of

Line resistors for indicating circuits.

Figure 13: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring


INDICATING

CIRCUIT #1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #2

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT - 1

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT - 2

BELL STROBE HORN 3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

19

Field wiring

Figure 14: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring



INDICATING

CIRCUIT #1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #2

-

+

-

+

2 MORE INDICATING


STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT 1

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT 2

BELL

STROBE

HORN

Four Wire Smoke Detector Wiring

Figure 15: Four-wire smoke detector wiring


LEGEND

+

-

+

-

POWER

+

-

RESETTABLE 4-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY

22VDC, 200mA

MAX. CURRENT - 300mA

MAX. RIPPLE VOL. 5mV

(POWER LIMITED)

+

-

+

DETECTION

4-WIRE DETECTION DEVICE

TO INITIATING

CIRCUIT

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

6

3

4

5

2

1

END OF LINE RELAY

LISTED S3403

MODEL A77-716B

MANUFACTURED BY

SYSTEM SENSOR

NOTES

ALL POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS

MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR,

OR FPLP POWER LIMITED

CABLE

20


Dialer Wiring

If you have Fire Alarm Panel Models MR-2312-LDW, MR-2312-LDR, and MR-2308-LDW there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 16 below.

Figure 16: Dialer wiring


LINE-1

LINE-2

RED

GREEN

GREY

BROWN

1

RJ31X

2 3

4

8

7 6

5

TIP

RING

Public switch

Telephone company wiring

TIP

RING premise telephone

IF permitted

Line 2 is Wired as shown for Line 1

Relay Adder Module Wiring

Wire relays on the relay adder modules MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figures 17 and 18.

Figure 17: Relay per zone (MR-2312-R12) Terminal connection

21

Field wiring


22


Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring

Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 19 , below. See Appendix A for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used.

For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective

Device , or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector , as shown.

For use in Canada, the Protective Device is not required but still recommended.

Figure 19: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection

MR-2300-PR

23

Field wiring

Power supply connection

The power supply is part of the Main Chassis. The ratings are:

Type

Electrical Input rating

Power supply total current

Battery fuse on Main module

Rating

120VAC, 60Hz, 3A\ 240 VAC 50Hz 1.5A fuse

6A maximum

10A, slow blow micro fuse

Wire the power supply as shown in Figure 20 using the proper wire gauge. See Appendix A for power supply specifications.

CAUTION:


Figure 20: Power supply connection

blk

J W1 red red

Battery

P3 red

BATTE RY

_

P4 blk

_ red

_

P1 P2

SEC. TX

Battery

NOTE: TO PREVENT SPARKING, CONNECT BATTERIES AFTER THE

SYSTEM MAIN A.C. POWER IS TURNED ON blk

L

G

N green

Connect AC power here: green wire to G

24


Wiring Tables and Information

Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring

Wire gauge

AWG

22

20

18

16

14

12

Maximum wiring run to last device

Feet Meters

2990

4760

7560

12000

19000

30400

910

1450

2300

3600

5800

9200

Notes:

• For Class A the maximum wiring run to the last device is divided by two.

• Maximum loop resistance should not exceed 100 ohms.

• Maximum capacitance of 0.5uF total on each initiating circuit.

Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring

Total signal load in amperes

0.06

0.12

0.30

0.60

0.90

1.20

1.50

1.70

2350

1180

470

235

156

118

94

78

47

36

29

24

716

360

143

71


18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG

Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters

3750

1850

750

375

250

185

150

125

1143

567

229

114

76

56

46

38

6000

3000

1200

600

400

300

240

200

1829

915

366

183

122

91

73

61

Notes:

• For Class A wiring the resistance in ohms is multiplied by two.

• Maximum voltage drop should not exceed 1.8 volts.

8500

4250

1900

850

570

425

343

285

2591

1296

579

259

174

129

105

87

Max. loop resistance in ohms

2

1.5

1.2

1.0

30

15

6

3

Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated)

4-wire smoke power is provided for 4-wire smoke detectors. This filtered supply is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/300mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.

Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)

Supervised auxiliary power is used to power the remote annunciators and smart relay modules. This filtered circuit is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/500mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.

25

Field wiring

Auxiliary Power (unregulated)

This unregulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. The main power must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.

26


System Checkout

Before turning the power “ON”

To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main

AC supply.

1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections.

2. Check all field (external) wiring for opens, shorts, and ground.

3. Check that all interconnection cables are secure, and that all connectors are plugged in properly.

4. Check all jumpers and switches for proper setting.

5. Check the AC power wiring for proper connection.

6. Check that the chassis is connected to EARTH GROUND (cold water pipe).

7. Make sure to close the front cover plate before powering the system from main AC supply.

Power-up procedure

After completing the System Checkout procedures outlined above,

8. Power up the panel. The "AC-ON" green LED and the “Common Trouble” LED should illuminate, and the buzzer should sound. Press the “System Reset” button. Since the batteries are not connected, the trouble buzzer should sound intermittently and the common trouble LED should flash.

9. Connect the batteries while observing correct polarity: the red wire is positive (+) and black wire is negative (-).

All indicators should be OFF except for normal power "AC ON" green LED and green LED I47.

Note:

Green LED I47 is illuminated when the system is normal. This LED indicates that the trouble relay is in normal standby condition.

10.Configure the Fire Alarm Control Panel as described in the Configuration section.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms

Circuit

Trouble

Remote Fail

Ground Fault

Battery

Trouble

Possible Cause

Normally when a circuit trouble occurs, its designated trouble indicator will be illuminated, as well as the common trouble indicator and trouble buzzer. To correct the fault, check for open wiring on that particular circuit loop or that the Circuit Disconnect

Switch is in the ON or CLOSED position.

Note: Disconnecting a Circuit will cause a system trouble (off-normal position).

Remote Fail will be indicated on the main panel display for any failure reported by, or failure to communicate with a remote annunciator or other remote device.

This panel has a common ground fault detector . To correct the fault, check for any external wiring touching the chassis or other Earth Ground connection.

Check for the presence of batteries and their conditions. Low voltage (below 20.4V) will cause a battery trouble. If battery trouble condition persists, replace batteries as soon as possible.

Walk Test

Mode

If the Walk Test LED is illuminated steadily, the system is in Walk Test Mode.

Common

Trouble

If only a common trouble is indicated on the main panel and none of the above confirming trouble indicators are on, check the following for possible fault:

• Check for any missing interconnection wiring.

• Check for any Module missing that was part of the Configuration.

• Check for improperly secured cabling.

27

Indicators, Controls and Operations

Indicators, Controls and Operations

Refer to Figure 21 below for LED Indicator and Control Button locations.

Figure 21: LED indicators and control buttons

This label removed from this location represents the alternate functions of the corresponding buttons in service mode

0

0 Q Z

2

2 A B C

4

4 G H I

6

6 M N O

8

8 T U V

ENTER

INFO

WALK

TEST

REMO TE

TRO UBLE

CP U FAIL

GRO UND

FAULT

ZONE-1

DISCO NNECT

ZONE-3

DISCO NNECT

ZO NE-5

DISCO NNECT

ZO NE-7

DISCO NNECT

ZO NE-9

DISCO NNECT

ZO NE-11

DISCO NNECT

NAC-1

DISCO NNECT

NAC-3

DISCO NNECT

SIGNAL

SILENCE

FIRE

DRILL

ACK

GENERAL

ALARM

A.C.

O N

CO MMO N

ALARM

CO MMO N

SUPV

CO MMO N

TROUBLE

BATTERY

TROUBLE

SYSTEM

RESET

AUX

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST (MENU)

BUZZER

SILENCE (MENU)

ZO NE-2

DISCONNECT

ZO NE-4

DISCONNECT

ZO NE-6

DISCONNECT

ZO NE-8

DISCONNECT

ZO NE-10

DISCONNECT

ZO NE-12

DISCONNECT

NAC-2

DISCONNECT

NAC-4

DISCONNECT


1

1

3

3 D E F

5

5 J K L

7

7 P R S

9

9 W X Y

#

Forward

CANCEL

28


The Main Display Panel on the Main Fire Alarm Control Board consists of:

• 18 common LED Indicators (top half of display)

• Eight Common Buttons (top half of display)

• up to 12 Initiating Circuit Alarm LEDs and 12 Initiating Circuit Trouble LED Indicators

• Four Indicating Circuit LEDs (labeled NAC- Notifying Appliance Circuit)

• up to sixteen disconnect buttons (12 for initiating circuit & four for indicating circuits)

LED Indicators may be Amber, Red, or Green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two Flash

Rates.

• Fast Flash (Supervisory) - 120 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle

• Trouble Flash (Trouble)- 20 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle

Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is # NP-2005 ; this includes English and French versions.

Note:

There are different labels for Two Stage operation.

Common Indicators

Buzzer

The Buzzer is activated by any of the following events:

Fire Alarm: Steady

Supervisory Alarm: Fast Flash

Trouble: Trouble Flash Rate

If the Buzzer is turned on in response to a Non-Latching Trouble or Supervisory, it will be turned off if the condition causing it goes away and there is no other reason for it to be on.

AC ON LED

The green AC ON Indicator will steadily illuminate as long as the main AC power is above minimum level. The indicator turns OFF when the level falls below the power-fail threshold and the panel is switched to standby

(battery) power.

Common Alarm LED

The red Common Alarm Indicator steadily illuminates whenever the panel alarms on any initiating circuit. Activation of the manual General Alarm Button will also turn on the Common Alarm Indicator if the panel is set for Two-stage

Operation. Since all alarms are latched until the panel is reset, the Indicator will remain ON until then.

Common Supervisory LED

The amber Common Supervisory Indicator turns ON steady when there is a Supervisory Alarm in the Panel caused by any Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory Circuit. The Indicator is turned OFF when all Non-Latching

Supervisory Circuits are restored and there are no active Latching Supervisory Circuits. Latching Supervisory

Alarms remain active until the Panel is reset.

Common Trouble LED

The amber Common Trouble Indicator turns ON steady when the panel detects any trouble condition. It turns OFF when all Non-Latching Troubles are cleared.

Remote Trouble LED

The amber Remote Trouble Indicator flashes at the Trouble Flash Rate if there is trouble detected at a City Tie or

DACT, or if there is communication trouble detected with a Remote Annunciator or if a Remote Annunciator reports a local trouble. It is turned off if these conditions go away.

29


Fire Drill LED

The amber Fire Drill Indicator illuminates steadily while Fire Drill is active.

Acknowledge LED

If the Panel is configured as a two-stage system, the Acknowledge Indicator flashes amber at the Fast Flash Rate while the Auto General Alarm Timer is timing out. The Acknowledge Indicator steadily illuminates when the Alarm

Timer is cancelled by the activation of the Acknowledge or Signal Silence buttons. If the Auto General Alarm Timer times out and puts the Panel into General Alarm, the Indicator turns off.

General Alarm LED

In two-stage operation only, the red General Alarm Indicator illuminates steadily when the General Alarm button is pushed, a General Alarm Initiating Circuit is activated, or the Auto General Alarm Timer times out. Once the General

Alarm Indicator has been turned on it will stay active until the panel is reset.

Walk Test LED

The amber Walk Test Indicator illuminates steadily to indicate that the panel is in Walk Test Mode. If the Panel is left in this mode for over an hour with no operator activity, the panel will return to normal and the Walk Test indicator will turn OFF.

CPU Fail LED

The amber CPU Fail LED Indicator flashes at the Trouble Flash Rate to indicate a microprocessor failure on the main board.

Auxiliary Disconnect LED

The amber Auxiliary Disconnect Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed. It turns OFF when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed a second time. When ON flashing, the

Auxiliary Disconnect Indicator signifies that the Auxiliary Alarm Relay is disconnected. Depending on the programming the auxiliary disconnect switch can also disconnect the common alarm and supervisory relay, see

Configuration section. When the Auxiliary Disconnect LED is flashing, the trouble buzzer will also sound.

Signal Silence LED

The Signal Silence indicator flashes amber, at the trouble rate, when indication Circuits are Silenced either by the

Signal Silence button, or by the Auto Signal Silence Timer. It is turned off when the Signals are re-sounded by a subsequent Alarm.

Battery Trouble LED

The amber Battery Trouble Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Battery is either low (below 20.4 VDC) or disconnected.

Ground Fault LED

The amber Ground Fault Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Ground Fault Detector detects a Ground

Fault on any field wiring. It turns off when the Ground Fault is cleared.

System Reset LED

This indicator is activated for a short time when the RESET key is pressed.

30


Alarm Circuit Indicators

This operation applies to Initiating Circuits configured as Verified Alarm, Non-Verified Alarm, Water flow Alarm,

Sprinkler Alarm, or General Alarm Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications at different events.

Event Configuration

Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble

Disconnected

Circuit in Alarm

Circuit Trouble LED

Flashes at the trouble rate

(amber)


(amber)

OFF

Verified Alarm

Non-Verified Alarm

Water flow Alarm

Sprinkler Alarm

General Alarm

Event Circuit Status LED Configuration

Circuit in Alarm Steady (red)

Pre-alarm Fast flash rate (red)

Verified Alarm

Sprinkler Alarm

Water flow Alarm

Active circuit reconnected Fast flash rate (red)

Supervisory Circuit Indicators

This operation applies to Initiating Circuits configured as Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events


Disconnected

Event Circuit Trouble LED


(amber)


(amber)

Configuration

Latching Sup.

Non-Latching Sup.

Circuit in Alarm

Event

Circuit in Alarm

Active circuit reconnected

OFF

Circuit Status LED

Steady (amber)

Fast flash rate (amber)

Configuration

Latching Sup.

Non-Latching Sup.

Monitor Circuit Indicators

This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as monitor circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events.

Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration


Disconnected


(amber)


(amber)

Monitor

Circuit Active

Event

Circuit Active


OFF


Steady (amber)


Configuration

Monitor

31


Trouble-only Circuit Indicators

This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as Trouble-Only Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events.




(amber)

Disconnected


(amber)

Trouble Only

Short Circuit


(amber)

Signal Circuit Indicators

This operation applies to indicating circuits of any type. The Circuit Trouble Indicator flashes amber at the Trouble

Rate to indicate short-circuit or open-circuit trouble, or if the circuit is Disconnected.


Open circuit

Short Circuit

Disconnected


(amber)


(amber)


(amber)

Signal

Common Controls

System Reset Button

The System Reset button resets the Fire Alarm Control Panel and all Circuits. In particular, the system reset button

• Resets all Latching Trouble Conditions.

• Resets all Initiating Circuits.

• Resets 4-Wire Smoke Supply.

• Turns off all Indicating Circuits.

• Turns off Signal Silence, ACK & GA Indicators.

• Turns off Fire Drill.

• Stops and resets all Timers.

• Processes inputs as new events.

• Does not affect Aux Disconnect.

Signal Silence Button

Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm turns on the Signal Silence indicator and deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits. Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will re-sound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence Inhibit Timer period. It also does not function if the Indicating

Circuits are active as the result of a Fire Drill.

In a two-stage system, if the Auto General Alarm Timer has timed out, this button also performs the same function as the Acknowledge button.

32


Fire Drill Button

The Fire Drill button activates all Non-Disconnected Indicating Circuits, but does not transmit any Alarms via the

City Tie, Common Alarm Relay or Auxiliary Alarm Relay. Fire Drill activates the signals in the evacuation code programmed. For example in the Temporal Code, the signals will be pulsed ON for 0.5 seconds, OFF for 0.5 seconds in rounds of 3 and then pause for 1.5 seconds and repeat.

Fire Drill is cancelled by pressing the button again, or if the Panel goes into a real alarm.

Acknowledge Button (or Buzzer Silence button for single stage system)

If the Panel is not configured for two-stage operation, this button becomes Buzzer Silence . If the Panel is configured for two-stage operation, activation of the Acknowledge button while the Auto General Alarm Timer is timing (there is an alarm in the panel, but it is still in the first stage), the timer is cancelled and the amber

Acknowledge Indicator illuminates steady, thereby acknowledging the alarm.

General Alarm Button (or Info button for single stage system)

If the Panel is not configured for two-stage operation, this button becomes the Info button. If the panel is configured for two-stage operation, activation of the General Alarm button immediately sends the panel into second stage:

General Alarm. It will also re-activate the signals if they have been silenced during General Alarm. The General

Alarm condition remains active until the panel is reset.

Info

This button is pressed for further event information when using a CFG-300 Service Tool with LCD, otherwise it does nothing.

Auxiliary Disconnect Button

Activating the Auxiliary Disconnect button activates the Auxiliary Disconnect function. The Auxiliary Alarm Relay is always disconnected with this button. The Common Alarm Relay, the Common Supervisory relay and all correlated alarm relays may be disconnected as selected through configuration. Activating the Auxiliary Disconnect button also causes the Common Trouble LED to illuminate steady, the common trouble relay to send a trouble message and the trouble buzzer to flash at the trouble flash rate. Pressing the Auxiliary Disconnect button again de-activates this function and the system will go back to normal.

Lamp Test Button

Activation of the Lamp Test button causes all front panel Indicators to steadily illuminate and turns the buzzer ON steady. If Lamp Test is active for more than 10 seconds, Common Trouble is activated.

Buzzer Silence Button (or Menu for single stage system)

Activation of the Buzzer Silence button while the Buzzer is sounding silences the Buzzer. The Buzzer will resound if there is a subsequent event. Pressing the button when the Buzzer is not sounding has no effect.

Menu Button

This button is used to select the command menu when a CFG-300 Service Tool with LCD is used, otherwise it does nothing.

Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons

Circuit (Zone) Disconnect pushbuttons are provided for all initiating and indicating circuits on the Fire Alarm Control

Panel. These pushbuttons are located beside their respective indicating LED.

Pressing a Circuit Disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated circuit and turns on its Trouble Indicator, activating Common Trouble. While a Circuit is disconnected, all changes in status (alarms and troubles) on that circuit are ignored. The panel does not activate disconnected indicating circuits. Circuit Disconnect pushbuttons are toggle switches; therefore, pressing an activated switch a second time will un-bypass (reconnect) the circuit.

Disconnecting an active Latching Initiating Circuit (including Alarms, Water flow Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, General

Alarm, and Latching Supervisory) does not affect its status until the panel is reset. Disconnecting an active Non-

Latching Initiating Circuit (including Non-Latching Supervisory and Trouble-Only) causes them to behave as if the alarm situation has disappeared. Disconnecting an active indicating circuit immediately deactivates the circuit.

33


When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to unbypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active, the Status Indicator flashes for 10 seconds at the Fast Rate without processing the input. If the Circuit is not reconnected by then, it will be processed as a new input.

Disconnect pushbuttons are also used during Walk-Test as described in the System Checkout section.

Common Relays

Common Alarm Relay

The Common Alarm Relay activates when the common alarm sequence is activated. On a two-stage system the relay may be configured to operate either on the first stage or both the first and second stage alarm ( see

Configuration section ) . The common alarm relay is disconnected by aux disconnect if programmed (see

Configuration section). Since all alarm conditions are latched until system reset, the relay will remain ON until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset.

Common Supervisory Relay

The Common Supervisory Relay activates when the common supervisory sequence is activated as the result of an alarm on any un-bypassed latching or non-latching supervisory circuit. The relay is turned OFF if all non-latching supervisory circuits are restored and there are no latching supervisory circuits active. The relay can be disconnected by aux disconnect if programmed (see Configuration section). The relay will function the same way as an alarm relay if the supervisory relay is disabled ( see Configuration section ).

Common Trouble Relay

The Common Trouble relay is activated when the common trouble sequence is activated as the result of the trouble condition being detected on the system. It is turned off when all troubles are cleared.

Note:

Some troubles are latching once they are detected they remain active until system reset. In this case the common trouble indicator will also remain active until system reset. The common trouble is not bypassed by the auxiliary disconnect function.

Auxiliary Alarm Relay

The Auxiliary Alarm Relay functions the same way as the Common Alarm Relay in every respect except that it can be disconnected by auxiliary disconnect with or without other correlated relays if it is programmed to do so (see

Configuration section). When configured ( see Configuration section ), the relay can also be disconnected if signal silence is active and reconnected if signal silence is de-activated.

Circuit Types

Initiating (Detection) Circuit Types

Non-Verified Alarm

A Non-Verified alarm is a “normal” type of alarm that can have pull stations, smoke detectors, or heat detectors attached to it. Activation of any of these devices will immediately result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm

Control Panel. An Alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.

Verified Alarm

Verified Alarms are verified by a reset and timing procedure, and may include smoke detectors, heat detectors or pull stations. Activation of pull stations or heat detectors will result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm Control

Panel within four seconds. Smoke detectors will be verified for a real alarm within 60 seconds, depending upon the startup time of the devices being used. If four seconds is too long a response time for pull stations, then wire them separately on a Non-Verified Alarm Circuit. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the

Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.

34


Water Flow Alarm (Water flow Sensors)

Water Flow Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms except that any indicating circuits programmed to these circuits (all are by default) are Non-Silenceable. Also, if Water Flow Retard Operation is enabled, these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Water flow

Alarm is confirmed and processed. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common

Alarm LED to illuminate red.

Note:

Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed

120 seconds.

Sprinkler Alarm (for Sprinkler Flow Sensors)

Sprinkler Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms unless Water flow retard operation is enabled. If Water

Flow Retard Operation is enabled, then these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Sprinkler Alarm is confirmed and processed. An Alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.

Note:


120 seconds.

General Alarm

The General Alarm provides remote general alarm for remote key switches. In a two-stage system these inputs perform exactly the same function as the Front Panel or Remote Annunciator General Alarm button. In a single stage system, these inputs act the same as Non-Verified Alarms; however, if Correlations are enabled, General

Alarm Initiating Circuits are correlated to ALL indicating circuits.

Non-Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Circuits)

Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will clear

(as long as there are no other Supervisory conditions in the system) and the Circuit Status LED will turn off.

Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Devices)

Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will NOT clear.

Monitor

This is a supervised general-purpose non-latching input used mainly for correlating to a relay circuit. No other system condition occurs as a result of its activation (short-circuit), although it is supervised for Trouble (opencircuit).

Trouble-Only

The Trouble-Only circuit monitors a Trouble Condition from an external device. Both open and short circuits generate a non-latching Trouble condition.

Indicating (Signal) Circuits Types

Silenceable Signal

The Silenceable Signal circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during Single-Stage Alarm or Two-Stage General Alarm, or the Alert Code during the alert (first) stage of a two-stage alarm.

Non-Silenceable Signal

The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the

35

Indicators, Controls and Operations condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during Single-Stage Alarm or Two-Stage

General Alarm, or the Alert Code during the alert (first) stage of a two-stage alarm.

Silenceable Strobe

Silenceable strobes will be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed. For synchronous strobes see supported protocol/devices section. (NB: Strobes do not support any code pattern .

)

Non-Silenceable Strobes

Non-Silenceable Strobes will not be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed. For synchronous strobes see supported protocol/devices section. (NB: Strobes do not support any code pattern .

)

Evacuation codes

Single stage codes

Continuous On 100% of the time

Temporal Code 3 of 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off then, 1.5 second pause

March Code 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off

California Code 5 seconds on, 10 seconds off

Two-step codes

Alert Code 0.5 second on, 2.5 seconds off

General Alarm Evacuation Code as selected from above.

Figure 21: Evacuation and Alert Codes

0.5s

2.5s

C O N T IN O U S

0.5s

0.5s

0.5s

0.5s

5s 10s

1.5s

TE M P O R A L C O D E

M A R C H C O D E

C A LIFO R N IA C O D E

A LE R T C O D E

36


Single Stage Operation

In a single stage system all alarm inputs are treated in a similar manner. Alarm inputs include any of the following:

Non-Verified Alarm, Verified Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Water flow Alarm, and General Alarm Circuits. If any of these alarm inputs occur when the panel is not already in alarm, the following occurs:

• The Buzzer sounds steadily.

• If Fire Drill is active, it is cancelled.

• The Common Alarm Indicator turns on.

• The Common Alarm, Auxiliary Alarm and all correlated relays will activate if Aux Disconnect is not active.

• The Auto Signal Silence Timer, if configured, starts.

• The Signal Silence Inhibit Timer, if configured, starts.

• All connected relays programmed to the input are activated (provided that Aux Disconnect is not active.)

• Non-disconnected strobes associated with the input are activated.

• Non-disconnected signals associated with the input are activated at the evacuation rate.

Subsequent alarms when the panel is already in alarm cause the following:

• The alert buzzer sounds steadily.

• If Signals have been silenced as a result of the Signal Silence button or the Auto Signal Silence Timer, Signals are resounded as they were before Signal Silence, the Signal Silence Indicator is turned off, and the Auto

Signal Silence Timer, if configured, is restarted.

• Any additional non-disconnected strobes associated with the new input are activated continuously.

• Any additional non-disconnected signals associated with the new input are activated at the evacuation rate.

Two-stage Operation

In a Two-Stage System Alarm inputs are either First Stage (Alert) inputs or Second Stage (General Alarm) inputs.

First Stage inputs include inputs from the following types of circuits: Non-Verified Alarm, Verified Alarm, Sprinkler

Alarm, and Water flow Alarm. Second Stage inputs include Alarms on General Alarm Circuits, activation of the

General Alarm button, or expiration of the Auto General Alarm Timer.

If any of these alarm inputs occur when the panel is not already in alarm, the following occurs:


• If Fire Drill is active, it is cancelled.

• The Common Alarm Indicator turns on.

• The Common Alarm, Auxiliary Alarm and all correlated relays will activate if Aux Disconnect is not active.

• The Auto Signal Silence Timer, if configured, starts.

• The Signal Silence Inhibit Timer, if configured, starts.

• All non-disconnected relays programmed to the input are activated provided that Aux Disconnect is not active.

If the alarm is a Second Stage alarm all connected strobe circuits are activated continuously, all non-disconnected signal circuits are activated at the evacuation rate, and the General Alarm indicator is turned ON. If the alarm is a

First Stage alarm, non-disconnected strobe circuits programmed to that circuit are activated continuously, nondisconnected signal circuits programmed to that circuit are activated with the Alert Code ( see Indicating Circuit

Types section ) the Auto General Alarm Timer, if configured, starts, and the Acknowledge Indicator starts flashing.

Subsequent First Stage alarms when the panel is already in alarm cause the following:


• If Signals have been Silenced as a result of the Silence button or the Auto Signal Silence Timer, Signals are resounded as they were before Signal Silence, the Signal Silence Indicator is turned off, and the Auto Signal

Silence timer, if configured, is restarted.

• If the panel is not already in General Alarm, additional non-Disconnected Signals programmed to the new input are activated with the Alert Code (see Indicating Circuit Types, in previous section).

37


• If the panel is not already in General Alarm and if the Acknowledge Indicator is ON steady, indicating that the

Auto General Alarm Timer has been acknowledged, the timer is restarted and the Acknowledge LED is extinguished.

A Second Stage Alarm (General Alarm) when the panel is already in alarm causes the following:

• The Buzzer is sounded steady.

• All non-disconnected signals are activated at the evacuation rate.

• If the Signal Silence Indicator is ON, it is turned OFF and the Auto Signal Silence Timer, if configured, is restarted.

• The Acknowledge Indicator if ON, is turned off.

Alarm inputs are latching, which means that they remain active until system reset. Note that if the System is configured for Correlations , any Second Stage/General Alarm (caused by the Auto General Alarm Timer, the

General Alarm button on the Front Panel or Remote Annunciator, or by a General Alarm Initiating Circuit) condition activates ALL Indicating Circuits, whether they are Correlated or not.

38


Supported Protocols/Devices

Synchronous Strobes

The synchronous strobe models that are supported by the MR2300 panel Secutron models MRL-ST and MRA-HS.

A separate compatibility list is available for different supported models.

Strobes can be configures as normal (e.g. not synchronized or any of the above; see configuration section). Any selection made is system-wide (e.g. whatever is selected applies to all the circuits in the system, configured as strobes).

“Signal silence” action on strobes

The “signal silence” action on strobes depends upon the configuration. The following describes the signal silence action on non-silenceable and silenceable strobes.

Non Silenceable strobe

If the output zone is configured as Non-Silenceable Strobe and if the “signal silence” is active on the panel while the strobes are active, the horn should be silenced. If the signal is active again the panel will activate the horn again.

Silenceable strobe

If the output circuit is configured as Silenceable Strobe, and if the “signal silence” is active on the panel, both the horn and strobe are completely turned off by turning off the output circuit. Re-activating the “signal silence” will turn them on again.

Note:

Please see the strobes manufacturer’s data for details.

System Sensor’s i

3

Devices

The MR-2300 fire control panel supports System Sensor’s i

3

devices. Only the two wire smoke detectors are supported on the i

3

zone, which are 2W-B and 2WT-B. Model 2WT-B features a build in fixed temperature (135F /

57.2C) thermal detector and is capable of sensing a freeze condition i.e. if the temperature is below 41F / 5 C.

The zones should be programmed to i

3

devices to be considered as i

3

zone (see configuration section). If the zone is not programmed as i

3

zone and i

3

devices are connected to the zone, it is simply treated as a regular zone. The panel is capable of detecting multiple troubles; if different devices have different troubles on the same zone, all troubles will be reported. The following troubles are reported for the i

3

devices.

i 3 zone Troubles

The following troubles can be reported for a zone configured as i

3

zone:

• Open circuit trouble

• Communication trouble

• Out of sensitivity: defective or dirty device

• Freeze trouble

39

Supported Protocols/Devices

Open circuit trouble

If the loop is broken the panel shows open loop trouble. The panel can still communicate with the devices depending upon where the open occurs.

Z o n e - 1

O p e n T r b . 1 / 1

Communication Trouble

If there is a fault in the line or the line is too noisy, the panel cannot communicate with the devices. The panel shows a communication trouble in this case.

Z o n e - 1

C o m m u n i c . T r b 1 / 1

Dirty Device trouble

If any of the devices on the i

3

zone are dirty, the panel shows a Dirty Device trouble. The device needs cleaning or be replaced with a new device.

Z o n e - 1

D i r t y D e v . T r b 1 / 1

Out of sensitivity trouble


3

zone is out of sensitivity and cannot detect an alarm condition, the panel shows out of sensitivity trouble. In this condition the device is not usable and should be replaced.

Z o n e - 1

O u t o f S e n s T r b 1 / 1

Freeze trouble

If the device has detected a freeze condition, (e.g. the temperature is below 41F / 5 C) then the panel will show a freeze trouble. Only model 2WT-B is capable of thermal detection; model 2W-B does not indicate any freeze trouble.

Z o n e - 1

F r e e z e T r b . 1 / 1

The LEDs on the i

3

smoke detectors provide a local visual indication of the detector status.

The smoke detector LED status should be confirmed with the panel, since Out of Sensitivity and a Dirty Device have the same LED indication on the detector and the only way to distinguish between the two is to use the CFG-300

Configuration Tool and check the messages as noted above.

i 3 Detector Condition

Power-up

Normal (Standby)

Out of sensitivity (defective or dirty)

Freeze trouble

Alarm

Green LED

Blinks every 10 sec

Blinks every 5 sec

OFF

OFF

OFF

Blinks every 10 sec

OFF

Blinks every 5 sec

Blinks every 10 sec

Solid

Red LED

40


Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool

There are three methods of configuring the MR-2300 LED Series Fire Alarm Panels:

1. Using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with CFG-300 for configuration information).

2. Using a PC or Lap Top Computer with a UIMA converter module.

3. Using a PC or laptop computer with remote connection (must use fire alarm with built-in UDACT).

The following information for configuring an MR-2300 LED Series Fire Alarm Panel is based on using CFG-300

LCD service tool for configuration.

To access configuration mode using a CFG-300 tool, connect the CFG-300 and then press the Menu button

(for a single stage system) or simultaneously press the Lamp Test and Buzzer Silence buttons on the front panel display (for a two stage system).

The CFG-300 LCD display will display the Main Menu. The function of different buttons on the front panel display is shown in F igure 22, below. Figure 22 shows a two stage system.

Figure 22: MR-2300 Configuration


0

0 Q Z

2

2 A B C

4

4 G H I

6

6 M N O

8

8 T U V

ENTER

INFO

WALK

TEST

REMO TE

TROUBLE

CPU FAIL

GRO UND

FAULT

SIGNAL

SILENCE

FIRE

DRILL

ACK

GENERAL

ALARM

ZONE-1

DISCO NNECT

ZONE-3

DISCO NNECT

ZONE-5

DISCO NNECT

ZONE-7

DISCO NNECT

ZONE-9

DISCO NNECT

ZO NE-11

DISCO NNECT

NAC-1

DISCO NNECT

NAC-3

DISCO NNECT

A.C.

ON

CO MMON

ALARM

CO MMON

SUPV

CO MMON

TROUBLE

BATTERY

TROUBLE

SYSTEM

RESET

AUX

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST (MENU)

BUZZER

SILENCE (MENU)

ZO NE-2

DISCONNECT

ZO NE-4

DISCONNECT

ZO NE-6

DISCONNECT

ZO NE-8

DISCONNECT

ZONE-10

DISCONNECT

ZONE-12

DISCONNECT

NAC-2

DISCONNECT

NAC-4

DISCONNECT


1

1

3

3 D E F

5

5 J K L

7

7 P R S

9

9 W X Y

#

Forward

CANCEL

41

Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool

Entering the Passcode

The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press the

“ENTER” key after entering the passcode. If the passcode is right, it will take you to the main command menu. If the passcode is wrong the system will ask you to re-enter passcode. The system will be exhausted after three retries and will then take you back to the Normal message display. The default password is “1111” (without quotes).

E n t e r p a s s c o d e

_

Command Menu

The main command menu is pictured below. The first line of the LCD will always show

“-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press the “ENTER” key to make a selection. To exit from the main command menu, select the “Exit” menu option and then press either the “CANCEL” or “ENTER” key.

Note:

Command Menu features 1 and 9 can only be accessed if jumper JW5 is placed on the main board, see Table 1.

&RPPDQG0HQX

05&RQILJ

&RQILJ,QIR

6HW7LPH

6HW3DVVZRUG

9LHZ(YHQW/RJ

&OHDU(YHQW/RJ

:DON7HVW

,/RRSWHVW

'LDOHU&RQILJ

7HVW'LDOHU

%\SDVV'HW&NW

%\SDVV1$&&NW

$X['LVF

([LW

Pressing “LAMP TEST” at any time will show the information about the system and the software version as shown below.

Version 0.0.4

The first line shows the model number and panel type and the second line shows the software version number. The version of the software is read as Major.Minor.Revision.

42


1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu)

The following is a detailed description of the MR-2300 configuration menu.

Command Menu/MR-2300 Config-->Features

- Feature Config -

1 Man. Sig. Sil.

2 Fire Drill

3 Opt. Ckt. Corr

4 Wtr/Sprk. Retd

5 Aux Dis Corr

6 Sig-Sil Inh Tm

7 Aux Dis, Alm&Sup

8 Auto Sil. Tmr

9 Rem. Annun.

10 Alm. Xmit-Sil.

11 Pwr Fail Tmr.

12 Com. Supv. Rly

13 Sig-Sil. Isol.

14 Strobe Type

15 Evac. Code

16 Active EOL

17 Two Stage Op.

18 Gen-Alm Tmr

19 Com Alm Rly Op

43


How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300

1. Press MENU to enter the command menu.

2. Select a Command Menu option by pressing ENTER . The corresponding submenu will display.

3. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the submenu.

4. Press ENTER to select a submenu option.

5. Use the left or right arrow buttons to select/unselect an option (selected = “X”). Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the different options.

6. Once you have made the correct selection, press ENTER to confirm the change. The display will return to the submenu screen.

7. Press CANCEL to return to the previous menu.

Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/

Features/

1. Manual Signal Silence

[X] ENABLE->Default

[ ] DISABLE

Use this function to enable or disable the SIGNAL SILENCE operation from the front panel.

M a n u a l S i g . S i l e n c e

[ X ] E N A B L E


Features/

2.Fire Drill

F i r e D r i l l

[ X ] E N A B L E


Features/

3.Output Circuit Correlation

O p t . C k t . C o r r .

[ X ] D I S A B L E

[X] ENABLE ->Default

[ ] DISABLE

Use this function to enable or disable the FIRE DRILL operation.

[X] DISABLE->Default

[ ] ENABLE

If disabled, whatever correlation is set in the correlation section is effective. If enabled, all the output circuits are correlated to all the input circuits.

44


Features/

4.Waterflow/Sprinkler Retard

Operation

W a t e r f l o w / S p r k . R e t d

[ X ] D I S A B L E

[X] DISABL ->Default

[ ] ENABLE


Features/

5.Aux. disconnect, disconnects

Aux Alarm relay and all correlated relays

A u x D i s C o r r

[ X ] D I S A B L E

[ ] ENABLE


If disabled, all the initiating circuits configured as water flow or sprinkler act as non-verified alarms. If enabled, retard operation is performed for initiating circuits configured as water flow or sprinkler.

(See Water flow Alarm and

Sprinkler Alarm description)

In the default mode this function will disconnect the Auxiliary

Alarm Relay when selected by the Aux Disconnect button.

If enabled, this function will disconnect the Auxiliary Alarm

Relay and all correlated relays by pressing the Aux Disconnect button. Correlated relays include: MR-2312-R12/RM-206 relays, MR-2312-S12 relays.



Features/

6.Signal-Silence Inhibit timer

S i g - S i l . I n h i b i t T m r

[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/

7. Aux. disconnect, disconnects common alarm relay and common supervisory relay

A u x D i s , D i s A l m & S p v

[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/

8.Auto Signal Silence Timer

A u t o S i g - S i l . T i m e r

[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/

9. Number of Remote

Annunciators or smart relays

N o . o f R e m o t e A n n u n .

[ X ] N O N E


Features/

10.Silence Alarm transmit

A l m . X m i t - S i l .

[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/

11.AC power fail delay timer

A C P w r F a i l D l y T m r .

[ X ] N O N E


[ ] 10 SEC

[ ] 20 SEC

[ ] 30 SEC

[ ] 1 MIN

[ ] ENABLE


[X] NONE ->Default

[ ] 8 HRS

[ ] 18 HRS

Use this function to inhibit the

“SIGNAL SILENCE” switch for a desired length of time. This time period should expire before the signals may be silenced.

According to the Canadian

National Building Code, this timer should be set to one minute.

If enabled, this function will disconnect (when the Aux. disconnect switch is pressed) the Common Alarm relay and

Common Supervisory relay and the MR-2300-PR will not transmit a supervisory or alarm event.

If disabled, the Aux disconnect switch has no effect on the

Common Alarm relay, the

Common Supervisory relay and the MR-2300-PR.

Use this function to determine the time period for which the indicating circuits will sound before they are automatically silenced. According to the

Canadian National Building

Code, this timer should not be set to less than 20 minutes.


[ ] 5 Min

[ ] 10 Min

[ ] 15 Min

[ ] 20 Min

[ ] 30 Min

[X] NONE->Default

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

[ ] 3

[ ] 4

[ ] 5

[ ] 6

Use this function to program the number of remote annunciators.

Any combination of remote annunciators or smart relays can be used as long as the number does not exceed 6. The annunciators’ addresses should be linear: without gaps and in sequence.


[ ] ENABLE

Use this function to allow the alarm transmits and auxiliary alarm relay to reset on “SIGNAL

SILENCE” rather than the

“RESET” switch.

Use this function to delay the

AC power fail trouble for the programmed time period. If disabled, the AC power fail is reported right away.

45



Features/

12.Common Supervisory Relay

C o m m o n S u p v . R e l a y

[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/

13.Signal Isolators

S i g - S i l . I s o l a t o r

[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/

14.Strobe Type

S t r o b e T y p e

[ X ] N O R M A L

[ ] ENABLE ->Default

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE


If disabled, the common supervisory relay can be used as common alarm relay. It will act the same way as a common alarm relay. If enabled, it is used a common supervisory relay.

Enable this function only when suite isolators are used (Canada only)

[X] NORMAL ->Default

[ ] SECUTRON

[ ] FARADY

[ ] WHEELOCK

[ ] GENTEX

[ ] SYSTEM SENSOR

Use this function to select the manufacturer of the strobes used in the system. The selection is system-wide and applies to all indicating circuits configured as strobes. For

“NORMAL” strobes there is no synchronization, while other strobes are synchronized and use manufacturer’s protocol to synchronize the strobes.


Features/

15.Evacuation Code

E v a c u a t i o n C o d e

[ X ] T E M P O R A L


Features/

16. Active EOL

A c t i v e E O L

[ X ] D I S A B L E

Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Features/

17. Two-stage Operation

T w o S t a g e O p e r a t i o n

[ X ] D I S A B L E

[X] TEMPORAL->Default

[ ] CONTINOUS

[ ] MARCH TIME

[ ] CALIFORNIA

Use this function to set the rate at which the indicating circuits will sound.


[ ] NO


[ ] ENABLE

Enable this function if using an

Active EOL. If MR-2300-A is used, this function should be enabled since the Class A

Converter has built in Active

EOL resistors.

Use this function to allow the system to perform a two-stage operation. This selection also sets the Auto General Timer to 5 minutes. If the Auto Signal

Silence Timer is greater than the Auto General Alarm Timer, then no error will occur. If the

Auto Signal Silence Timer is equal or less than the Auto

General Alarm Timer, then the

Auto Signal Silence Timer is disabled and the following warning message is displayed:

“Auto Sig. Sil. Has been disabled” The user should set the Auto Signal Silence Timer is always greater than the Auto

General Alarm Timer.

46



18. Auto General Alarm Timer

A u t o G e n - A l a r m T i m e r

[ X ] D I S A B L E


[ ] 5 Min

[ ] 10 Min

[ ] 15 Min

[ ] 20 Min

[ ] 30 Min


3.Common Alarm Relay Operation [ ] BOTH STAGES-

>Default

C o m m o n A l m R l y . O p e r

[X] SECOND STAGE ONLY

[ X ] S E C O N D S T A G E

This function is used for twostage systems only. This function sets the time period for automatic evacuation.

Use this function to allow

“Common Alarm Relay” to operate in second stage only or to operate in both the stages.

47


Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config

Note:

Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.

Inp Zone

I n i t i a t i n g Z o n e

1 Z o n e - 1

2 Z o n e - 2

- -

- -

1 2 Z o n e 1 2

This Inp Zone menu is used to program the process type for the initiating circuits. The maximum number of initiating circuits supported is 12, but only those supported by the particular model will be shown.

Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Ipt. Zone

1.Process Type (Initiating circuit)

12.

Z o n e - 1 T y p e

[ X ] A L A R M

[X] ALARM ->Default

[ ] VERIF ALARM

[ ] SPRKL ALM

[ ] WTR-FLOW ALM

[ ] NON-LATCH SUP

[ ] LATCH SUPV

[ ] GEN ALARM

[ ] MONITOR

[ ] TRB ONLY

Use this function to program the process type of each input zone. ( See CIRCUIT TYPE section for details.)

Z o n e - 1 2 T y p e

[ X ] A L A R M


I 3 Zone

I 3 D e t e c t i o n Z o n e s

[ ] Z o n e - 1

[ ] Z o n e - 2

- -

- -

[ ] Z o n e - 1 2

[ ] Zone-1->Default

.

.

.

[ ] Zone-12->Default

Use this function if i

3

devices are present on a zone. ( See i

3 devices section for details).

48



Note:

Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.

Opt Zone

I n d i c a t i n g Z o n e

1 N A C - 1

2 N A C - 2

3 N A C - 3

4 N A C - 4

This menu is used to program the process type of the indicating circuits. The maximum number of indicating circuits is four, but only those supported by the particular model will be shown.

Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Opt. Zone

1.Process Type (Indicating

Circuits)

N A C - 1 T y p e

[ X ] S I L - A B L E

[X] SIL-ABLE->Default

[ ] NON SIL-ABLE

[ ] SIL-ABLE STR

[ ] NON-SIL STR

Use this function to program the process type of each indicating circuit. See CIRCUIT

TYPE section for details.

4.

N A C - 4 T y p e

[ X ] S I L - A B L E


Correlation

Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Correlation

1.Correlation

Z o n e - 1 C o r r .

[ X ] N A C - 1

[X] NAC-1 ->Default

[X] NAC-2 ->Default

[X] NAC-3 ->Default

[X] NAC-4 ->Default

Use this function to correlate initiating circuits to the indicating circuits. By default all the initiating circuits are correlated to all the indicating circuits.

12.

Z o n e - 1 2 C o r r .

[ X ] N A C - 1

49



Note:


Inp Zone Msg


1 Z o n e - 1

2 Z o n e - 2

- -

- -

1 2 Z o n e 1 2

Use the keys described below for entering message. These keys are alternate functions of bypass switches and are physically located in the same position as described following.

Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Ipt. Zone

Lab

1.Initiating zone label

Z o n e - 1 L a b e l

Z o n e - 1

[Zone-1 ]->Default

[Zone-12 ]->Default

BYPASS SWITCH TRANSLATION

12.

Z o n e - 1 2 L a b e l

Z o n e - 1 2

KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4

--------------------------------------

Zone-1 0 Q Z Zone-2 1

Zone-3 2 A B C Zone-4 3 D E F

Zone-5 4 G H I Zone-6 5 J K L

Zone-7 6 M N O Zone-8 7 P R S

Zone-9 8 T U V Zone-10 9 W X Y

Zone-11 Back Space Zone-12 Forward

50



Note:


Opt Zone Label


1 N A C - 1

2 N A C - 2

3 N A C - 3

4 N A C - 4

Use the keys in described below for entering message. These keys are alternate functions of bypass switches and are physically located in the same position as described below.

Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Opt. Zone

Lab

1.Indicating zone messages

[NAC-1 ]->Default

[NAC-4 ]->Default

N A C - 1 L a b e l

N A C - 1


4.

N A C - 4 L a b e l

N A C - 4

KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4

--------------------------------------




Zone-7 6 M N O Zone-8 7 P R S

Zone-9 8 T U V Zone-10 9 W X Y

Zone-11 Back Space Zone-12 Forward


Default Configuration

L o a d t h e d e f a u l t s e t t i n g s ? Y

Press “UP” and “DOWN” to select between Y/N. if “ENTER” is pressed the default configuration is restored.

D e f a u l t s e t t i n g s h a v e b e e n l o a d e d

Use this function to load the default configuration in the panel.

Warning: By loading default configuration all the previously programmed configuration is lost permanently.

51


2. Config Info (Command-Menu

Note:


C o n f i g u r a t i o n t y p e :

F a c t o r y d e f a u l t

Press down arrow key to see more information.

Configuration type will show how the panel was configured.

“Factory default” means the panel has not been configured, it is as it came from the factory. “Front Panel” means it was configured at the panel. “Serial Port” means the configuration was done from a computer through the serial port. “Modem” means the configuration was completed remotely through a modem.

J o b N a m e :

N o j o b l o a d e d

If you upload a job configuration to the panel using the PC configuration utility, the job name will appear on this screen. The job name can be up to a maximum of 20 characters.

T e c h n i c i a n I D :

U n k n o w n

Press down arrow key for further info

If you upload a job configuration to the panel using the PC configuration utility, the technician’s name (ID) will appear on this screen. The technician ID can be up to a maximum of 10 characters.

C f g . D a t e a n d T i m e : h h : m m d a y y e a r : m m : d d


Configuration date and time will appear for all means of configuration, thus revealing date and time configuration was last changed (if Time and Date have been set at the panel).

C o n f i g u r a t o r V e r s i o n x . x . x . x

This specifies the configuration tool version. It will display

0.0.0.0 if no PC configurator has been used.

52


3. Set Time (Command-Menu)

Note:


1 D a y l i g h t S a v e

2 T i m e C l o c k

3 C o m p e n s a t i o n

Command Menu/Set time Date

1. Daylight saving time

D a y l i g h t S a v i n g

[ X ] D I S A B L E

Command Menu/Time Clock

2. Set time and date

[X] DISABLE ->Default

[ ] ENABLE

Use this function to enable daylight savings time.

H H : M M W K D Y Y Y Y - M M - D D

0 0 : 0 0 M O N 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

Default

00:00 MON 2000-01-01

Use this function to set the time and date. Use the “LEFT” and

“RIGHT” keys to move the cursor to the desired location in the display and use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to increase or decrease the values. Press the “ENTER” key to accept the changes and the “CANCEL” key to ignore the changes.

Note: time is in 24hr format


2. Compensation

D a i l y C o m p e n s a t i o n :

0

When value is entered the following message will appear

Compensation value can range from -15 to

+15 seconds.

Use the up down arrow keys to select daily compensation value and press ENTER. For a fast clock adjust negatively.

For a slow clock adjust positively. For example: for a clock which runs 5 minutes a month (based on 30 days) fast select -10 seconds.


P a n e l C o n f i g U p d a t e d

53


4. Change password (Command-Menu)

Note:


E n t e r n e w p a s s c o d e

[ ]

R e - e n t e r p a s s c o d e

[ ]

If the passcode does not match, the following message appears and the system exit to the main menu

1 -> Default i n v a l i d p a s s c o d e

Use this function to change the pass-code. The minimum number of digits is 4 and the maximum is 10. Only numeric digits are allowed.

If the passcode is OK the following message appears and exits to the main menu

P a s s c o d e u p d a t e d

5. View Event Log (Command-Menu)

The event log looks the same as the normal event queue. Pressing the “INFO” key has the same effect that it does in the event queue. The illustration below provides an example of how the “INFO” key works and shows the CFG-

300 LCD Configuration tool display.

54

E A S T L O B B Y E N T R A N C E

O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9

E V E N T

01 of 09

V E R I F I E D A L A R M Z - 0 1

2 0 0 2 / 1 0 / 2 2 1 1 : 4 5 . A M

D AT E

There are a maximum of 200 recent events saved in the event log. If the number of events goes beyond 200, the oldest event is overwritten by the most recent one.


6. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu)

Note:


- S e l e c t L o g -

1 A l a r m L o g

2 G e n e r a l L o g

3 A l l L o g s

Select the type of log to clear. Press the

“ENTER” key. The system will then confirm before clearing logs.

Use this function to clear alarm logs, event logs, or both.

C l e a r a l l t h e

s e l e c t e d l o g ( s ) ? Y

Press the “ENTER” key to confirm or the

“CANCEL” key to cancel the operation.

L o g ( s ) c l e a r e d

55


7. Walk Test (Command-Menu)

Note:


Walk-Test allows an installer to verify the initiating circuit wiring in a system. When walk test is selected, the following screen confirms the operation:

P e r f o r m t h e w a l k t e s t ? Y

Press the “ENTER” key to activate the walk test and the “CANCEL” key to cancel the walk test. The next screen will allow zones to be selected for walk test. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the zones and use the

“LEFT” or ‘RIGHT” keys to select a zone. Press the “ENTER” key when you are done with all the selections.

- W A L K T E S T Z O N E S -

[ ] Z o n e - 1

The walk test is now active ( see illustration below)

- W a l k t e s t a c t i v e -

A l a r m : 0 0 T r b : 0 0

The activation of any initiating circuit that has been selected for a walk test will cause the Audible Indicating Circuits

(not Strobes) to activate briefly for a number of short bursts corresponding to the selected circuit number. If the first selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for one burst. If the second selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for two bursts, and so on. This means that if, for example, circuits 1, 3 and 5 were selected for the walk test, they would sound with one, two and three bursts respectively. The burst interval is half a second on and half a second off. After the sounding pattern has been sent on the indicating circuits, the initiating circuit is reset and tested again. If it is still active (in alarm) the pattern will be re-sent. Trouble on any initiating circuit selected for the walk test activates the indicating circuits continuously for five seconds. Activation of a circuit will also cause the alarm count to increase while the trouble on the initiating circuit will cause the trouble count to increase.

Alarm Verification and Water flow Alarm Retard Operations are disabled on circuits being walk tested. All circuits not selected for the walk test continue to function normally. If a circuit was disconnected before the walk-test mode was entered and is not selected for the walk-test, it remains disconnected while the walk test is active. Walk test operation is disabled if the Fire Alarm Control Panel is in alarm or goes into alarm while the walk test is active.

Notes:

• If a UDACT is used with the system, all walk-test events will be reported to the monitoring agency. The monitoring agency should be instructed to ignore reported events during the walk-test.

• IF THERE IS NO ACTIVITY FOR ONE HOUR, THE SYSTEM WILL RETURN TO NORMAL

OPERATION.

56


8. i

3

Loop Test (Command-Menu)

Note:


The i

3

maintenance test is designed to test the devices on i

3

zone. If there is noise on the line or if the device is too far away from the panel, the devices may not respond to the panel inquiries. An i

3

maintenance test can be invoked from the command menu six minutes after power-up or after pressing the reset. If the i

3

maintenance test is selected, the following message appears on the screen:

P e r f o r m t h e i 3

L o o p t e s t ? Y

If you select “yes” by pressing “ENTER”, the display will ask you for which zone you want to perform the i

3

test. Note that only one zone at a time can be in maintenance test. Select the zone by pressing the “UP” and “DOWN” keys and then pressing the “RIGHT” key to select the device. After the device is selected press “ENTER”.

- I 3 T E S T Z O N E S -

[ ] Z o n e - 1

If the i

3

maintenance test is selected within six minutes after power-up or reset, the following information message is displayed.

T h e s e l e c t e d z o n e i s n o t r e a d y y e t

If a zone is selected that is not configured as an i

3

zone, the following message is displayed:

T h e s e l e c t e d z o n e i s n o t i 3 t y p e

After the zone goes into the i

3

maintenance test, no other zone can be put into the test. The maintenance test will take five minutes. During this time you can walk through the device and make sure all the devices are working properly. The following table lists the status of the devices while in walk test.


Proper operation

Out of sensitivity

Freeze condition

Green LED

Double blink every 5 sec

OFF

OFF

Red LED

OFF


Double blink every10 sec

You can cancel the maintenance test either by pressing the “RESET” key or by going into the configuration section and canceling the test.

57


9. Dialer Config (Command-Menu)

Note:


The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. This menu will show up only if there is a built-in dialer on the main board. Each item in this menu is described below in detail.

- D i a l e r C o n f i g -

1 A c c o u n t I n f o

2 T e l e p h o n e l i n e

3 R e p o r t O p t i o n s

4 T i m e P a r a m e t e r

5 E n a b l e / D i s a b l e

Command Menu-->Dialer Config

Account Info

- A c c o u n t I n f o -

1 A c c o u n t # 1 I D

2 A c c o u n t # 1 T e l

3 A c c n t # 1 F o r m a t

4 A c c o u n t # 2 I D



Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info

1.Account# 1 Identification

A c c o u n t # 1 I D :

_

123456->Default

Use this function to set the

Account ID for the monitoring station to which the dialer reports events. The maximum # of digits allowed is six. For contact ID, only the first four digits are used; the last two are truncated.

Unless you are using the SIA protocol, the allowed digits for the account ID are simple digits

0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F (the SIA protocol only allows digits 0 to 9).

To enter hexadecimal digits, press the INFO button. The letter “A” will appear. To scroll through the rest of the letters, press INFO repeatedly. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left.

58



2.Account#1 Telephone Number

A c c o u n t # 1 T e l n u m :

_ [101]->Default

Use this function to set the telephone number of the monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is

19 including “,” and numerals.

The “,” will be treated as 1 sec delay. To enter “,” press the

INFO button. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left. An example of a typical telephone

# is 9,,12345678.


3.Account#1 Reporting Format

A C C N T # 1 F o r m a t :

[ X ] C o n t a c t I D

[X] CONTACT ID-Default

[ ] SIA 300 Baud

[ ] SIA 110 Baud

Set the reporting format that is recognized or preferred by the monitoring station.


4. Account# 2 Identification

A c c o u n t # 2 I D :

_


5.Account# 2 Telephone Number


_

654321->Default

[ 101 ]->Default

Same as Account#1.

Same as Account#1.


6.Account# 2 Reporting Format



[X] Contact ID-Default

[ ] SIA 300 Baud

[ ] SIA 110 Baud

Same as Account#1.

59



Note:


Telephone Line

- T e l e p h o n e L i n e -

1 L i n e 1 D i a l t y p e


3 L i n e 1 D i a l t o n e


5 N u m o f R e t r i e s

Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone

Line

1. Line#1 Dialing Type

L i n e # 1 D i a l i n g T y p e :

[ X ] D T M F D i a l

[X] DTMF Dial->Default

[ ] Pulse Dial

Set the dialing type for line #1; this is the type recognized or preferred by the telephone company.


Line





Line

3. Line#1 wait for Dial tone

L i n e # 1 W a i t D i a l t o n e

[ X ] E N A B L E


Line

4.Line#2 wait for Dial tone


[ X ] E N A B L E


Line

5.Number of retries

N u m b e r o f R e t r i e s :

0 6


[ ] Pulse Dial

Same as Line#1.


[ ] DISABLE

Use this function to let the system know whether or not to wait for a dial tone before dialing. Cell phone setup for the dialer requires that the system not wait for dial tone before dialing.


[ ] DISABLE

Same as Line#1.

06 ->Default

Set the number of retries for both line#1 and line#2. This function lets the dialer retry on either line if it is busy or not available. If the retry count expires, the panel reports a line trouble.

60


Command Menu-->Dialer-Config

Note:


Report Options

- R e p o r t O p t i o n s -

1 A l a r m P r i o .

2 T r o u b l e P r i o .

3 S u p v . P r i o .

4 A u x D i s R e p o r t

5 F i r e P a n e l

6 O p e r a t i o n M o d e

7 C h e c k s u m B i t s

Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report

Options

1.Alarm priority

A l a r m P r i o r i t y :

[ X ] A c c o u n t 1


Options

2.Trouble priority

T r o u b l e P r i o r i t y :

[ X ] A c c o u n t 1


Options

3.Supervisory priority

S U P V P r i o r i t y

[ X ] A c c o u n t 1

[X] Account 1->Default

[ ] Account 2


[ ] Account 2


[ ] Account 2

Use this function to set the account priority for reporting alarms. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.

Use this function to set the account priority for reporting trouble. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.

Use this function to set the account priority for reporting supervisory troubles. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.


Options

4.Aux Disconnect, Cancels Alarm

& Supv Reporting Thru dialer

[ ] ENABLE


A u x D i s A l m / S u p v R p t .

[ X ] D I S A B L E

If this function is enabled, the

Aux Disconnect feature

(obtained by pressing the Aux

Disconnect button) will block the alarm and supervisory events from being reported through the built-in dialer.

61



Options

5.Fire Panel type [X] MR-2300 Panel

->Default

Do not change this function; keep it as default.

For factory use only

05


Options

6.Dialer operation mode

D i a l e r O p e r . M o d e :

[ X ] ( U ) D A C T


Options

7.Checksum Bits

C h e c k s u m B i t s :

[ X ] 8 B i t s

[X] (U)DACT ->Default

[ ] DACT

[X] 8 Bit ->Default

[ ] 16 Bits

Use this function to select the functionality of the dialer. In

DACT mode only common trouble/alarm/supervisory are reported while in UDACT mode all point information is reported

Do not change this function; keep it as default

For factory use only.

Command Menu-->Dialer-Config

Note:


Time Parameters

- T i m e P a r a m e t e r -

1 A C - L o s s D e l a y

2 C e l l p h o n e D a t e

3 A u t o - T e s t T i m e

Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time

Parameter

1.AC Loss delay

A C - L o s s D e l a y ( H r s )

0

0 ->Default

Use this function to delay the reporting of AC loss trouble on the dialer for the programmed time period.

62


Parameter

2.Cellular report date

C e l l u l a r R e p o r t D a t e

0


Parameter

3.Auto test time

A u t o - T e s t T i m e

0 0 : 3 0

0 ->Default

00:30 ->Default


Use this function to set the test report date for the cell phone setup. If the date is set to 0, this means there is no test reporting for cell phone or the phone line is a regular line.

Other settings could be anywhere from 01-28, representing which day of the month the test should be performed. When a cell phone service is employed for the panel, it should only be connected to telephone line #2

CO interface. Also, the dial tone detection feature of Line

#2 should be disabled for cell phone application.

Use this function to set the time for auto test. This test has to be performed once a day to send the test report to the monitoring station. The time is in 24hr format, which means

00:30 is 30 minutes after midnight.

Please do not use the following test times: 00:00,

01:55, 02:00 and 03:00.

63



Note:


Dialer Enable/Disable

D i a l e r E n a / D i s

[ X ] E N A B L E

- - - - - - W a r n i n g - - - - - - -

D i a l e r D i s a b l e d ! ! !


[ ] DISABLE

The dialer is enabled by default. When the dialer is enabled or disabled, a warning message appears.

Warning: The dialer cannot report any event to the monitoring station if it is disabled.


Ring Detect

- R i n g D e t ec t N u m b e r -

[ X ] 5

[ ] Disabled

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

[ ] 3

[ ] 4

[X] 5->Default

[ ] 6

[ ] 7

[ ] 8

Use this menu item to select the number of rings on which the panel’s modem will answer.

The default number of rings is five. The maximum number of rings you can define is eight.

If you select the “Disabled” option, the modem will be disabled and the panel will not pick up the incoming call.

10. Test Dialer (Command-Menu)

- D i a l e r T e s t -

1 . L # 1 M a n u a l t e s t

2 . L # 2 M a n u a l t e s t

3 . R e s e t D i a l e r

1 . L # 1 M a n u a l t e s t

2 . L # 2 M a n u a l t e s t

.

Press Enter to test Line #1. Press

Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer

Test Messages on the following page.




This feature flushes all reportable events from the buffer. Press Enter to reset the dialer. Press Cancel to exit this menu.

64


Dialer Test Messages

The following messages will display during the test processes of Lines #1 and #2. The messages that will appear depend on the status of the dialer and the test results that are found.

D i a l e r i d l e n o w

The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This message automatically displays when Maual Test is selected.

N o D C V o l t

No DC line voltage. The line is dead or no phone line is connected.

W a i t i n g f o r D i a l t o n e

The dialer is waiting for a dial tone.

F a i l e d : N o D i a l t o n e

D i a l i n g R e c e i v e r N o w

N o D T M F t o n e

W a i t i n g f o r A c k t o n e

F a i l e d N o A c k t o n e

R e p o r t i n g E v e n t N o w

W a i t i n g f o r K i s s o f f

N o K i s s o f f

This message may indicate a noisy telephone line.

The dial tone was received and telephone number dialing is in process.

This message indicates that the dialer failed to send a DTMF tone.

Waiting for availability of the receiver. The receiver confirms the avialablity by sending an ack tone.

This message indicates that either the telephone number may be wrong or the receiver is not available.

When sending events to the receiver, the display will toggle between this message and “Waiting for

Kissoff “ for all events sent.

The dialer is waiting for the kissoff tone. The kissoff tone indicates that the receiver has received the event reports.

No Kissoff means receiver has not received any event reports.

P a s s e d : M a n u a l t e s t

The line passed the test; everything is OK.

65


11. Exit (Command-Menu)

Pressing, “ENTER” after selecting “Exit“ from the menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation.

CFG-300 LCD Service tool operation

If an LCD service tool is connected to the panel, you will only be able to view the latest message–you cannot scroll through them. In order to see all of the messages, you must enter the programming menu and see the event logs.

The logs are arranged so that the most recent message is shown first. Listed below are the different kinds of messages that can be displayed on the LCD service tool.

Zone messages

Point annunciation is indicated on the LCD. There are no separate queues for “TROUBLE”, “ALARM”,

“SUPERVISORY” and “MONITOR”; instead there is only one queue that indicates all the events. The respective

TROUBLE, ALARM, SUPVISORY and MONITOR LEDs will be flashing if at least one of the given types is in the queue.

The LCD service tool will only show the first alarm or trouble. If a trouble happens first and then an alarm, the alarm will be displayed. Any further events will change the total number of events, shown in the right hand corner of the

LCD display. The order of priority is alarm, supervisory, trouble and monitor.

Example 1 (detection circuit):

Event “ 01/09 ” 01 of 09, “ OPEN TRB ” on physical “ Z-01 ” at “ EAST LOBBY ENTRANCE ”. Press the INFO key to show the process type as “ VERIFIED ALARM ” and the event occurred on “ 2003/04/04 ” at “ 18:01 TUESDAY ”.

ZO N E

M essage

Process

Type

Physical

Zone N o.


O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9

EV E N T type

E V E N T

01 of 09

"IN FO " Key


1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 4

T IM E D AT E

Example 2 (indicating circuit):

Event “ 02/09 ” 02 of 09, “ SHORT TRB ” on physical “ NAC-01 ” at “ EAST WING LOBBY ” with process type as

“ SILENCEABLE ” and the event occurred on “ 2003/02/02 ” at “ 18:01 TUESDAY ”.

ZO N E

M essage

Process

Type

Physical

Zone N o.

66

E A S T W I N G L O B B Y

S H O R T T R B 0 2 / 0 9

EV E N T type

E V E N T

02 of 09

"IN FO " Key

S I L E N C E - A B L E N A C - 1

1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 2

T IM E

D AT E

Other common messages are listed on the following pages.


AC Power Fail

The AC power fail trouble is generated when the power drops below the UL specified value. The trouble is restored when the power returns to the normal value.

T rouble Typ e

A C P o w e r F a i l

A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01

T rouble code T rouble Info

"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 4

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D AT E

Battery trouble

The battery trouble is generated when the battery voltage drops below the specified value. The trouble is restored when the voltage returns to the normal value.

T rouble Typ e

B a t t e r y T r o u b l e

A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 8

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A TE

Ground Fault

T rouble Typ e

G r o u n d F a u l t

A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

Note:

The trouble code and info is for trained service personnel only.

67



Troubles related to the annunciator can have two possibilities: either the main panel and annunciator failed to communicate with each other, or an un-configured remote annunciator is responding to the main panel. In both the cases, the following trouble message is displayed:

T roub le Type

R A U n u m m i s m a t c h t r o u b l e 1 / 1

E V E N T

01 of 09

"IN FO " Key

T rouble info

Trouble code

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

1 1 : 4 5 S A T 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 3

T IM E

D AT E

Four-wire smoke detector supply

The four-wire smoke detector supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on a four-wire smoke supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.

T roub le Type

4 W i r e P w r . S u p p l y s h o r t 1 / 1

E V E N T

01 of 01

Trouble code T rouble Info

"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

T IM E D AT E

Note:


68


Supervised Aux-supply

The supervised aux-supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on supervised aux-supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.

T rouble Typ e

A u x . P o w e r S u p p l y s h o r t 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

City tie Polarity reversal - MR-2300-PR/ Relay module

The city tie or polarity reversal module is supervised for open and whether or not the

MR-2300-PR

is plugged in. The relay module is supervised for whether or not it is plugged in.

If any of the modules are not plugged in, the following trouble message is generated:

T rouble Typ e

A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

If there is an open detected on the city tie output, the following trouble message is displayed:

T rouble Typ e

C i t y T i e t r o u b l e

A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

69

Appendix A: Compatible Receivers

Appendix A: Compatible Receivers

The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR):

DACR Receiver Model Protocols

SurGard MLR2 Multi-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID

SurGard SLR Single-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID

Osborne-Hoffman Quickalert! II Receiver (ULI approved)

Osborne-Hoffman OH-2000 Receiver (ULI Approved)

Silent Knight Model 9500 Receiver (ULI Approved)

Radionics Model D6500 Receiver (ULI Approved)


SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID





70


Appendix B: Reporting

Ademco Contact-ID

MR-2300 Event Codes

Event Description Event Family

Phone Line #1 trouble detected


Phone Line #1 trouble restored


Failure to report to an Account

Report to an Account successful

RS-485 Communication Trouble

Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (NORMAL)

Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (OFF

NORMAL)

Test

Manually initiated dialer test

Zone Fire Alarm

Zone Fire Alarm restored

Zone Trouble detected

Test

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Zone Trouble restored

Zone Supervisory condition

Trouble

Supervisory

Zone Supervisory restored Supervisory

Waterflow Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

Waterflow restored

Indicating Zone Trouble

Indicating Zone Trouble restored

General Alarm

General Alarm restored

AC power lost

AC power restored

Battery Low

Battery Low restored

Ground Fault

Ground Fault restored

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Restore 3 113

New event 1 320

Restore 3 320

New event 1 140

Restore 3 140

New event 1 301

Restore 3 301

New event 1 302

Restore 3 302

New event 1 310

Restore 3 310

Qualifier Code

New event 1 351

New event 1 352

Restore

Restore

3 351

3 352

New event 1 354

Restore 3 354

New event 1 350

New event 1 602

New event 1 608

New event 1 601

New event 1 110

Restore 3 110

New event 1 300

Restore 3 300

New event 1 200

Restore 3 200

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

Group # Contact #

00

00

00

00

Acct #

Acct #

00

00

000

000

000

000

Acct #

Acct #

485

000

000

000

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

000

000

000

000

000

000

71

Appendix B: Reporting

Security Industries Association SIA-DCS

SIA protocol does not define indicating zone troubles, but lists it as Untyped Zone Trouble/Restore.


Event Description Event Family Qualifier

SIA Event

Code

Parameter







RS485 Communication Trouble

Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Normal)

Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Off-normal)


Zone Fire Alarm





Zone Supervisory restored

Waterflow alarm

Waterflow alarm restored

General Alarm


Indicating Zone Trouble (*)

Indicating Zone Trouble restored (*)

AC power lost

AC power restored

Battery Low


Ground Fault


Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

Test

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Supervisory

Supervisory

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

New event

Restore

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

New event

New event

New event

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

UT

UR

AT

AR

WA

WH

QA

QH

YT

YR

YP

YQ

FT

FJ

FS

FR

RY

RX

FA

FH

RT

YK

YS

RP

LT

LT

LR

LR

000

000

000

000

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

000

000

000

000

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

001

002

001

002

Acct #

Acct #

485

000

72


Appendix C: Specifications

MR-2300 Fire Alarm Control Panel (LED)

Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable using front panel LCD display with Password Access.

Electrical Ratings

AC line voltage

120 VAC 60 Hz 3 amps\ 240 VAC 50 Hz 1.5 amps (primary)

Power Suppy Rating

6 amps maximum (secondary)

Battery

Type: 24VDC Gel-Cell/Sealed lead acid

Charging capability: 10AH

Protection: 10A on board (F1) slow blow micro fuse

Indicating circuits

4 supervised style Z (Class B) indicating circuits, configured as strobes or audibles. Terminals are labeled “SIG”.

Power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 1.7A @ 49C per circuit

Max power allowed = 5A

- 1.7A (aux power unfiltered if used)

- 0.5A (aux power filtered if used)

- 0.3A (4-wire smoke power if used)

if no auxiliaries are used the max power is 5A

Current consumption Standby 283mA/Alarm 560mA

Aux supply (non resettable) power limited / 22.3Vdc regulated / 500mA max

4-wire smoke supply (resettable)

Power limited/22.3VDC regulated / 300mA max

Unfiltered supply (full wave rectified)

MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay adder module

Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply

Contact rating NO / NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max

Current consumption standby 0mA / alarm (MR-2312-R12)

160mA / alarm (MR-2306-R6) 80mA

MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter module

Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA

MR-2300-NC4 Output Class A Converter module




MR-2312-S12 Smart Relay Module


Contact rating NO/NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max

Current consumption standby 30mA / alarm 140mA

MR-2300-LCD Remote LCD Annunciator


MR-2306-ATW 8 Zone Remote Annunciator


Remote Trouble Indicator


Polarity reversal and city tie module

Power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 1.7A max at 49C

Auxiliary Relays (Common alarm/supv/trb/ and auxiliary second alarm)


FormC / 28VDC / 1A max

Initiating circuit

12 supervised style B (Class B) initiating circuits, configurable

(normal or verified). Terminals are labeled “DET”. Compatibility

ID “A”

Power limited / 19VDC reg. / 3mA for detectors / 0.15Vp-p ripple

/ 40mA max (alarm short)

1 RS-485 Connection

For remote annunciators. Terminals are labeled “RS-485”.

MR-2300-PR Polarity reversal city tie module (optional)

MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay Module (optional)

City tie power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 250mA max / 14Ohms trip coil

Polarity reversal power limited / 24VDC open / 12VDC at 3.5mA /

8.5mA max (shorted)

Polarity reversal supv terminal

24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (supervisory) / 0V (trouble)

Polarity reversal alarm terminal

24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (alarm) / 0V (trouble)

Current consumption standby 50mA / alarm 300mA (city tie in use) / alarm 70mA (city tie not in use)

System Model: MR-2300 Series LED Version Fire Alarm Control Panel

System Type: Local, Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR), Remote Protected Premises Station (using MR-2300-

PR or

MR-2312-LDR, MR-2312-LDW, or MR-2308-LDW) Central Station Protected Premises (using

MR-2312-LDR, MR-2312-LDW, or MR-2308-LDW)

Type of Service: A, M, WF, SS

Type of Signalling : Non-Coded

Applicable Standards: NFPA 70 and 72, UL-864 Rev. 9, ULC S-524, ULC S-527-99

73

Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)

Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations

(Selection Guide)

Use the form below to determine the required secondary power supply (batteries).

IMPORTANT NOTICE

The main AC branch circuit connection for Fire Alarm Control Panel must provide a dedicated continuous power without provision of any disconnect devices. Use #12 AWG wire with 600-volt insulation and proper over-current circuit protection that complies with the local codes.

Refer to Appendix A for specifications.

POWER REQUIREMENTS (ALL CURRENTS ARE IN AMPERES)

Model Number Description Qty Standby Total Standby Alarm

Total

Alarm

MR-2312-LW

MR-2312-LDW

MR-2308-LW

MR-2308-LDW

MR-2300-A

MR-2300-NC4

MR-2300-NC2

Fire Alarm

Control Panel, 12 Det,

FIXED ELR/ ACTIVE ELR

Fire Alarm Control Panel, 12 Det with UDACT


Fire Alarm

Control Panel, 8 Det


Fire Alarm Control Panel, 8 Det with UDACT


Det Class A Converter Adder

Module

Sig Class A Converter Adder

Module--4 Circuits

Sig Class A Converter Adder

Module--2 Circuits

1

1

1

1

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

X

X

0.164/

0.164/

0.136/

0.136/

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.104

0.104

0.096

0.096

= 0.164/

= 0.164/

= 0.136/

= 0.136/

= 0.000

= 0.000

= 0.000

0.104

0.104

0.096

0.096

0.424/

0.424/

0.366/

0.366/

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.364

0.364

0.326

0.326

= 0.424/

= 0.424/

0.364

0.364

= 0.366/

0.326

= 0.366/

0.326

= 0.000

= 0.000

MR-2300-PR

Polarity Reversal and City Tie

Module

1 X 0.050

= 0.050

0.300

= 0.000

= 0.300

(City Tie in Use)

MR-2312-R12/

2306-R6

MR-2312-S12

MR2300-LCD

MR-2306/2312-

ATW

MR-2605-T

12 Relay or 6 Relay Adder

Module

12 Relay Smart Relay Module

Smart Remote Annunciator

Remote Annunciators

Remote Trouble Indicator

X

X

X

X

X

0.000

0.030

0.016

0.035

0.035

= 0.000

=

=

=

=

0.160/

0.140

0.040

0.090

0.035

0.080

=

=

=

=

=

Two-Wire Smoke Detectors X Ò 0.00012

= * 0.090 = 0.090

Four-Wire Smoke Detectors X = =

=

=

Signal Load (bells, horns, strobes, and etc.) X

Auxiliary Power Supply for Annunciators, etc.

=

ALARM

Total currents (Add above currents) STANDBY ( A )

* Assume three Initiating Circuits are in alarm.

' Use 0.084

for five minutes of alarm as a multiplier figure.

Ò Using the Secutron 1400 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector. See Appendix A for other compatible smoke detectors.

Total Current Requirement: ALARM ( B )______ Amps. (Value obtained from column B )

Battery Capacity Requirement:

( [STANDBY ( A ) ______ ] X [(24 or 60 Hours) ___ ] ) + ( [ALARM ( B ) ______ ] X [Alarm in Hr.] _____ ) = ( C ) ______AH

Total Alarm Current: Must be 6 amperes or less for MR-2300 Series. Indicating Circuits must not to exceed 5 amperes.

Battery Selection: Multiply ( C ) by 1.20 to derate battery.

( B )

74






This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system endusers of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.

System Failures




• Power Failure






•System Users



Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not

75

Warranty & Warning Information be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.

• Software

Most Secutron products contain software. With respect to those products, Secutron does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.




Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearingimpaired person.








Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority

Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.




76




Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.








•water damage;








To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.





77

Warranty & Warning Information


Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.


Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron

Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.


78




SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR

IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.



Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S

LCD Fire Alarm Control Panel

I

NSTALLATION &

O

PERATION MANUAL

Document #: LT-906SEC Rev.1





Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3















MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual

Contents


Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2


Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3

Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3

Zone...................................................................................................................................... 3

Events ................................................................................................................................... 3

Wiring Styles ......................................................................................................................... 3

System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories........................................................ 4


Relay Module: 12 Relays ...................................................................................................... 5






Output Class A converter: four circuits ................................................................................. 7



MR-2312-AT Remote Annunciator........................................................................................ 7





DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder Modules .......................... 13



MR-2300-NC4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .................................................. 16

Relay Adder Modules (Models MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6) ........................................ 16



Field wiring ............................................................................................................................... 19









System Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 27


Power-up procedure ............................................................................................................ 27

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 27

Indicators, Controls and Operations...................................................................................... 28

Common Indicators............................................................................................................... 29

Common Controls ................................................................................................................. 29

Common Relays ................................................................................................................... 30

Circuit Types ......................................................................................................................... 31

Evacuation codes.................................................................................................................. 32

Fire Alarm Operation............................................................................................................. 33 i

Contents




Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 36


Command Menu................................................................................................................... 37

1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu) ............................................................................. 38

2. Config Info (Command-Menu).......................................................................................... 46


4. Set Password (Command-Menu)..................................................................................... 48







11. Bypass Det Ckt (Command-Menu) ................................................................................ 59

12. Bypass NAC Ckt (Command-Menu) .............................................................................. 59

13. Aux. Disconnect (Command-Menu) ............................................................................... 59








Warranty & Warning Information ........................................................................................... 72

Warning Please Read Carefully ........................................................................................... 72

Limited Warranty .................................................................................................................. 74

Warranty Procedure ............................................................................................................. 74

Disclaimer of Warranties ...................................................................................................... 74

Out of Warranty Repairs ...................................................................................................... 75 ii


List of Figures & Tables

Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount .............................................................................. 8

Figure 2: MR-2312-DDR Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting with trim ring ...................... 9

Figure 2A: MR-2306-DDR6DR Box dimensions, mounting and trim ring ............................. 10

Figure 3: Installation of Adder Modules for MR-2312 LCD Panels ........................................ 11

Figure 4: Installation of Adder Modules for MR-2306 LCD Panels ........................................ 12

Figure 5: Main Fire Alarm Board DIP switch and jumper settings for MR-2312 LCD Panels 13

Figure 6: Main Fire Alarm Board DIP switch and jumper settings for MR-2300 LCD Panels 14

Figure 7: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module ............................................... 15

Figure 8: MR-2300-NC4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .................................... 16

Figure 9: MR-2312-R12 twelve relay adder module .............................................................. 16

Figure 10: MR-2312/06-R12/6 Relay programming ............................................................... 17

Figure 11: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module .................................................................... 17

Figure 12: Polarity reversal and city tie module ..................................................................... 18

Figure 13: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B wiring ........................................................... 19

Figure 14: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring ........................................................... 20

Figure 15: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring ......................................................... 20

Figure 16: Indicating circuit – Class A or Style Z wiring ......................................................... 21

Figure 17: Four-wire smoke detector wiring ........................................................................... 21

Figure 18: Dialer wiring .......................................................................................................... 22

Figure 19: Relay per zone (MR-2312-R12) Terminal connection .......................................... 23

Figure 20: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection ............................................ 23

Figure 21: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection ..................................... 24

Figure 22: Power supply connection ...................................................................................... 25

Figure 23: LCD Display and control buttons .......................................................................... 28

Figure 24: Evacuation Codes ................................................................................................. 32

Figure 25: MR-2300 Configuration ......................................................................................... 36

Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board ......................................... 14

Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings ................................................................................... 18

Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ............................................................................................. 25

Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring ........................................................................................... 26 iii

List of Figures & Tables iv











CAUTION:

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.


Note:







(AHJ).

FCC Notice

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the telco transformer of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment is capable of siezing the line. This capability is provided in the hardware.







Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Fire Alarm System’s or an authorized representative of Secutron Fire Alarm System.

For information contact Secutron Fire Alarm System at the address and phone numbers shown on the back page of this document.

1

Introduction

Introduction

Secutron's MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel is a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based fire panel. The MR-

2300 provides a maximum of 12 supervised Class B or A (Style B or D) Initiating circuits, and maximum of four supervised Class B or A (Style Y or Z) indicating circuits. All circuits are supervised for opens and ground faults, and indicating circuits are supervised for shorts. Optional modules include Relay, Polarity Reversal and City Tie and

Class A Converters for initiating and indicating circuits. Semi-flush or surface mountable enclosures can be used for retrofits and on new installations.

Note:



70 and NFPA 72. Final acceptance subject to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).


• Basic unit has six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, which may be configured as Class A (Style D) using input

Class A converter adder module. Each initiating circuit can be configured as Alarm, Verified Alarm, Water flow

Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory, Monitor or Trouble-Only circuits.

• Basic unit has two Power Limited Class B (Style Y) indicating circuits. Each indicating circuit may be configured as Class A (Style Z) using output Class A converter adder module. Each indicating circuit may be configured as

Silenceable signal, non Silenceable signal, Silenceable strobe, non Silenceable strobe. The audible signal may be Steady, Temporal Code, California Code, or March Time.

• Each initiating and indicating circuit can be individually disconnected via the keypad and LCD display with

Password Access.

• Configurable Signal Silence Inhibit, Auto Signal Silence, and One-Man Walk Test.

• Four-wire resettable smoke power supply 300mA maximum.

• Relay Contacts for Common Alarm, Common Supervisory and Common Trouble all non-disconnect-able and


• RS-485 Interface for MR-2300 Series Remote Multiplex Annunciators, LCD Annunciators and Smart relay adder.



• With or without built-in UDACT (Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter).

• Easy configuration of the panel using front LCD display and keypad.

• Remote dial up (with built-in UDACT version) for event log checking and/or configuration changing.

• Laptop programmer for direct configuration changing and log checking.

2


Conventions

Circuits


Zone



Events

There are events associated with every initiating, indicating and common circuit of the fire panel displayed via the

LCD.

Wiring Styles



This is done without penalizing the number of circuits, which remains the same as in Class B (Style B). Changing the indicating circuits to Class A requires an MR-2300-NC4 adder board which will convert FOUR indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z) or an MR-2300-NC2 adder board which will convert TWO indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z).

3

System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories

System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories



Model

MR-2312-DDR

MR-2306-DDR

MR-2306-DR

Description

Twelve-Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with

LCD display and dialer (red door, black box).

12 Class B (Style B) Initiating circuits, and four

Power Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits (up to 1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total). Two six zone MR-2300-A Input Class

A Converter adder modules may be used for




Class A (Style Z) wiring of the Indicating circuits. The MR-2312-DDR contains





Wire Smoke Detector Power Supply. The unit has a dialer on the main board. Used with BA-

110 (10 ampere-hour) (Sota Enertech model

SA12120) batteries (two are required).

Six-Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display and dialer (Red enclosure). Six Class

B (Style B) Initiating circuits, and two Power



One six zone MR-2300-A Input Class A converter adder module may be used for




Class A (Style Z) wiring of the Indicating circuits. The MR-2306-DDR contains






(10 ampere-hour) (Sota Enertech model

SA12120) batteries (two required).

Same as the MR-2306-DDR except without dialer.

4

Relay Module: 12 Relays



RELAY 1

NO/NC C

RELAY 2

NO/NC C

RELAY 3

NO/NC C

RELAY 4

NO/NC C

RELAY 5

NO/NC C

RELAY 6

NO/NC C

RELAY 7

NO/NC

RELAY 8

C NO/NC C

RELAY 9

NO/NC C

RELAY 10

NO/NC C

RELAY 11

NO/NC C

RELAY 12

NO/NC C

MR-2312-R12 Twelve-relay module



MR-2306-R6 Six-relay adder module

RELAY 1

NO/NC

RELAY 2

C NO/NC C

RELAY 3

NO/NC

RELAY 4

C NO/NC C

RELAY 5

NO/NC C

RELAY 6

NO/NC C



MR-2300-PR


JW4

5

System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories


7.7"

SYSTEM NORMAL

18:01 MON 2003-04-05

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

FIRE

DRILL

BUZZER

SILENCE

LAMP

TEST

A.C. ON ALARM SUPV

1

4

GHI

7

PRS

*

2

ABC

5

JKL

8

TUV

0

QZ

TRBL CPU FAIL

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXY

#

ENTER

MENU

CANCEL

INFO



1.25"


7.2"

MR-2300-LCDR

Remote Annunciator Module,

LCD display, red enclosure


MR-2312-SR12/

MR-2312-SW12

Smart Relay Module (12 relays) with red or white enclosure

MR-2300 SERIES REMOTE RELAY


Model

MR-2300-A

Description

Input Class A converter

Module (six circuits). This module has built in Active

End-of-Line resistors

6

Output Class A converter: four circuits



MR-2300-NC4

Output Class A converter module (four circuits)


Model

MR-2300-NC2

Description



The MR-2300-X are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.


RED

BLACK MR-2300-X Active end-of-line resistor without plate



A.C.

ON

BUZZER

SILENCE

LAMP

TEST

COMMON

TROUBLE

SIGNAL

SILEBCE

SWITCH

ENABLE

SIGNAL

SILENCE

SYSTEM

RESET

FIRE ALARM

ANNUNCIATOR

MR-2312-ATW/

MR-2312-ATR

16 Zone remote annunciator


Model: MR-2306-ATR/MR-2306-ATW Eight Zone Remote Annunciator (ULC and ULI Approved)

Model: MR-2300T Remote Trouble Indicator (ULC and ULI Approved)

7




Install the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel enclosure as shown below for the twelve zone models. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes, as shown and the screws provided. The backbox may be semi-flush mounted using the trim ring model MR-2312-FT (BLACK), see Figure 2. Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front (if supplied) and mount the backbox in between the studs. Place the trim ring around the backbox. The trim ring is glued in place to the wall surface, after the wall is finished. Replace the front door and ground strap.


11"

Mounting Hole

1.5"

Mounting Hole

Mounting Hole

20.5"

5.4"

25.9"

Mounting Hole

4.5"

14.5"

8


Figure 2: MR-2312-DDR Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting with trim ring

11"

1.5"

PLACE MR-2312-FT TRIM RING OVER BACKBOX

17"

20.5"

26"

28.5"

Adhere trim ring to wall surface around

MR-2306 backbox.

5.4"

1"

1" is the minimum depth above the wall required for semi-flush mounting using the flush trim ring

3.5"

14.5"

3.5" is the maximum depth for semi-flush mounting using the flush trim ring

4.5

"

The figure below shoes a cross-section of the semi-flush mounted backbox and the trim ring. Make sure to allow a minimum depth of 1” above the wall surface for proper door opening.

TRIM RING

WALL

WOOD OR

METAL STUD

BACKBOX

9


Figure 2A: MR-2306-DDR6DR Box dimensions, mounting and trim ring

11"

1.5"

PLACE MR-2306-FT TRIM RING OVER BACKBOX

17"

14.5"

4 Mounting

Holes for

Surface

Mounting

20.0"

22.5"

Adhere trim ring to wall surface around the MR-2306 backbox.

5.425"

1"


3.5"

14.5"


4.5

"

10



MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm panels come pre-assembled with all components and boards except for Adder

Modules. Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 4 for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information section for wiring information.

Figure 3: Installation of Adder Modules for MR-2312 LCD Panels


CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300A

(6 circuits)

LCD DISPLAY

JW6

JW5

JW4

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENC

E

FIRE

DRILL

SILENC

E

SYSTEM NORMAL

18:01 MON 2003-04-05

TRB L CPU FAIL A.C. ON ALARM SUPV

1

4

GHI

7

PRS

*

2

AB C

5

JKL

8

TUV

0

QZ

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXY

#

ENTER

MENU

CANCEL

INFO


(6 circuits)

CLASS-A converter board for indicating circuits MR-2300-NC4

(4 circuits)



JW3

JW2

JW1

Fuse and AC wiring terminal

Transformer

P

3

BATTERY

P

4

_

SEC. TX

P

1

P

2



BATTERY

Relay Module MR-2312-R12 centre under main fire alarm board using three screws provided .

BATTERY

11


Figure 4: Installation of Adder Modules for MR-2306 LCD Panels


LCD configuration tool CFG-300 socket shown.


(6 circuits)

Reverse polarity and city tie module MR-2300-PR


JW7

JW4

JW5

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

SYSTEM NORMAL

18:01 MON 2003-04-05

A.C. ON TRB L CPU FAIL

1

ALARM SUPV

ENTER

BUZZER

SILENCE

4

GHI

7

PRS

*

2

AB C

5

J K

L

8

TUV

0

QZ

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXY

#

MENU

CANCEL

INFO

CLASS-A converter board for indicating circuits MR-2300-NC2

(2 circuits)

Fuse and AC wiring terminal

Transformer

JW1

TO PR-300

MO DULE

JW2

TO RM-312/RM-306 RELAY

MO DULE

BATTERY

_

P5 P6

P3 P4

SEC. TX

JW3

P1 P2



BATTERY BATTERY

12


DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder

Modules


Figure 5: Main Fire Alarm Board DIP switch and jumper settings for MR-2312 LCD

Panels

For PC programming use SUIMA interface module not UL-864 or

ULC-S527 listed.

Telephone line

#1

JW7- Normally Open

Telephone line

#2


Auxiliary Relay

Alarm Relay

Supervisory Relay

JW7

JW6

JW5

JW4

SYSTEM

RESET

SIG N AL

SILEN CE

FIRE

DRILL

BUZZER

SILEN CE

LAMP

TEST

SYSTEM NORMAL

18:01 MON 2003-04-05

S UPV A .C. O N ALARM

1

4

G HI

7

PRS

*

2

ABC

5

J KL

8

TUV

0

Q Z

TRBL CPU FAIL

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

W XY

#

EN TER

MEN U

CAN CEL

IN FO

Trouble Relay

Auxiliary Supply

4-wire Supply

Unfiltered 24V supply

Connect to Remote trouble indicator

JW2 - ON- when

MR-2306-R6/2312-R12 not connected

Connect to MR-2306-R6

MR-2312-R12

Relay Module

JW1 - ON- when


Connect to

MR-2300-PR

JW3

JW2

JW1

JW6 -Open all the time

JW5 -Normally Open

JW4 -Normally Open

JW3- Removed all the time

BATTERY

_

P3 P4

To Battery

SEC. TX

P1 P2

To secondary of AC transformer

13

DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder Modules

Figure 6: Main Fire Alarm Board DIP switch and jumper settings for MR-2300 LCD

Panels

For PC programming use SUIMA interface module not UL- 864 or

ULC-S527 listed.

Telephone line

#1

Telephone line

#2

JW7

Normally open


Auxiliary Relay

Alarm Relay

Supervisory Relay

Trouble Relay

JW7

SYSTEM

RESET

SIG N AL

SILEN CE

FIRE

DRILL

BUZZER

SILEN CE

LAMP

TEST

SYSTEM NORMAL

18:01 MON 2003-04-05

S UPV A .C. O N ALARM

1

4

G HI

7

PRS

*

2

ABC

5

J KL

8

TUV

0

Q Z

TRBL CPU FAIL

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

W XY

#

EN TER

MEN U

CAN CEL

IN FO

JW4

JW5

JW4 - Normally Open

JW5 - Normally Open

JW1 - ON- when


JW1

JW2

TO SPR-200 MO DULE TO SRM-212/SRM-206 RELAY MO DULE

BATTERY

_

P5 P6

P3 P4

To Battery

JW3

Removed all the time

JW2 - ON- when

MR-2313-R12/

MR-2306-R6 not connected

SEC. TX

JW3

P1 P2

To secondary of AC transformer

Signal Circuit-1

Signal Circuit-2

Auxiliary

Supply

4-wire Supply


Connect to

Remote Trouble

Indicator

P5

P6


JW1

Cable from P1 of the MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module connects here. Otherwise not used.

Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2312-R12 or MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here.

Otherwise not used.

On the Main Fire Alarm Module, this jumper must be removed if a MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City

Tie Module is installed.

JW2 Remove this jumper if a MR-2312-R12 or MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module is used .


JW4

JW5

Normally open. Place jumper here and power down (AC and Batteries) then power back to revert to default password. After reset remove the jumper. Leave normally open.

Normally open to BLOCK remote configuration via modem, PC with a UIMA converter module or using the

LCD and keys at the panel. Place jumper here to ALLOW any type of configuration.

JW6 Not used, open (not available on MR-2306 LCD panels).

JW7 Not used, open.

14




05$

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV

$OOWKHVHSLQVFRPHVZLWK

UHGDQGEODFNZLUHVZKLFK

DUHFRQQHFWHGWRWKH

GHWHFWLRQFLUFXLWRQWKH

PDLQILUHDODUPERDUG5HG

LVSRVLWLYHDQGEODFNLV

QHJDWLYH

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV




To convert all 12 initiating circuits of the Fire Alarm Panel, two of these MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter Adder

Modules are required.

Note:

This module has built in Active End-of-Line resistors and so the fire alarm system should be configured to enable Active End-of-Line. See Configuration section.

15


MR-2300-NC4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

Figure 8: MR-2300-NC4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV

051&

051&

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV

Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC4/2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit 1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.


Relay Adder Modules (Models MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6)

MR-2312-R12 Twelve-Relay Adder Module

The ribbon cable from P1 of the MR-2312-R12 is connected to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2312-R12 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts.

Figure 9: MR-2312-R12 twelve relay adder module

Connect to P6 on the main fire alarm board INDIVIDUAL

GREEN RELAY

STATUS LEDs

Three mounting holes for #6-32 screws

RELAY 1

NO/NC C

RELAY 2

NO/NC C

RELAY 3 RELAY 4

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 5 RELAY 6

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 7 RELAY 8

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 9 RELAY 10

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 11 RELAY 12

NO/NC C NO/NC C

P1: Cable from MR-2312-R12 Relay Adder Module connects to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board.

16



A typical relay circuit is shown below in Figure 10 with the jumper locations and descriptions.

Note:


Figure 10: MR-2312/06-R12/6 Relay programming

ZONE JUMPER

installed: turns ON relay when the zone

(1) is active

removed: does not turn ON the relay when zone (1) is active





Default: No jumper installed, connected on center pin only

A

Z1

S 1&2

LED (GREEN)




chaining example: if jumper is installed on 1&2 and 2&3 then all the three relays will be ON if any one of relays 1,2 and 3 is active


RELAY 1

NO NC






NO/NC C

RELAY 12

NO/NC C





INDIVIDUAL GREEN


RELAY 1

NO/NC C

RELAY 2

NO/NC C

RELAY 3 RELAY 4

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 5 RELAY 6


P1 : Cable from MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board.



Note:


17




Mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

P1 P2

Mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR


P1

JW1

JW2

Cable connects to P5 on the Main Fire Alarm Board

Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission. When this jumper is cut and a system trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or "open" circuit.

Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.

Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission of supervisory. When this jumper is cut and a supervisory trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or


P2 & JW4 Not used with MR-2300 Fire Alarm Panel. Jumper JW4 remains on board.

The Alarm Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to turn OFF when signal silence is active. This allows the City Tie Box to be manually reset. On subsequent alarms the silenceable signals will resound and the City

Tie Box will be retriggered. See Configuration section for more information.

The Trouble Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to delay AC power fail for 0, 8 or 18 hours if this is the only system trouble. See Configuration section.

18


Field wiring


Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to the Wiring Tables for wire gauges and to

Appendix A for specifications.

CAUTION:



Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below. The panel supports Style B wiring or Style D wiring for the initiating circuits. The initiating circuits are supervised by a 3.9K End-of-Line Resistor or for power saving an

Active-End-of-Line.

Note:





INITIATING

CIRCUIT #1

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

STYLE B

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 1

ALARM ZONE

STYLE B

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 2

SUPERVISORY

ZONE

ION SMOKE

DETECTOR

PHOTO SMOKE

DETECTOR

HEAT

DETECTOR

PULL STATION

SUPERVISORY

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR



THEY MUST BE USED ON ALL

THE INITIATING CIRCUITS.

19

Field wiring




INITIATING

CIRCUIT #1

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #2

-

+

-

+

4 MORE INITIATING

CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN

STYLE D

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 1

ALARM

ZONE

STYLE D

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 2

SUPERVISORY

ZONE

ION SMOKE

DETECTOR

PHOTO

SMOKE

DETECTOR

HEAT

DETECTOR


Note:

When using the ICAC Class A Converter Adder Modules, always use Active End-of-Line resistors on all initiating circuits including those that are not converted to Class A.


The MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm supports Class B (Style Y) and Class A (Style Z) wiring for its indicating circuits.


Note:





INDICATING

CIRCUIT #1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #2

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT - 1

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT - 2


20


Figure 16: Indicating circuit – Class A or Style Z wiring


CONVERTER MODULE STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT 1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #2

-

+

-

+

2 MORE INDICATING

CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT 2

BELL

STROBE

HORN




LEGEND

+

-



22VDC, 200mA



(POWER LIMITED)

+

-

+

-

POWER

+

-

DETECTION

+

-


TO INITIATING

CIRCUIT

6

3

4

5

2

1

END OF LINE RELAY

LISTED S3403

MODEL A77-716B

MANUFACTURED BY

SYSTEM SENSOR

NOTES




CABLE

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

21

Field wiring

Dialer Wiring

If you have Fire Alarm Panel Models MR-2312-DDR or MR-2306-DDR there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 18 below. The dialer circuitry also allows for remote configuration using a PC.



LINE-1

LINE-2

RED

GREEN

GREY

BROWN

1

RJ31X

2 3

4

8

7 6

5

TIP

RING

Public switch

Telephone company wiring

TIP

RING premise telephone

IF permitted


22



Wire relays on the relay adder modules MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figures 19 and 20.


RM-312 12 RELAY ADDER MODULE

RELAY

CIRCUIT #1

RELAY

CIRCUIT #2

C

NO/NC

C

NO/NC

NORMALLY OPEN

CONNECTION

NORMALLY CLOSE

CONNECTION

ALL RELAY CONTACTS

28V DC, 1 AMP

RESISTIVE LOAD

RELAY

CIRCUIT #12

C

NO/NC

NORMALLY OPEN OR

NORMALLY CLOSED

CONNECTION IS

SELECTED BY JUMPER

ON RELAY BOARD.

NOTE: ALL RELAY CIRCUITS ARE POWER

LIMITED AND MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR or

FPLP POWER LIMITED CABLE.


RM-306 6 RELAY ADDER MODULE

RELAY

CIRCUIT #1

RELAY

CIRCUIT #2

C

NO/NC

C

NO/NC

NORMALLY OPEN

CONNECTION

NORMALLY CLOSE

CONNECTION

NORMALLY OPEN OR

NORMALLY CLOSED

CONNECTION IS

SELECTED BY JUMPER

ON RELAY BOARD.

RELAY

CIRCUIT #6

C

NO/NC

ALL RELAY CONTACTS

28V DC, 1 AMP

RESISTIVE LOAD

NOTE: ALL RELAYS ARE POWER LIMITED

CIRCUITS AND MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR or


23

Field wiring


Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 21 , below. See Appendix A for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used.






Type


Power supply total current


Rating

120VAC, 60Hz, 3A\ 240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.5A main primary circuit breaker

6A maximum

10A Fuse, slow blow micro fuse

Wire as shown below in Figure 22 using the proper wire gauge. See Appendix A for power supply specifications.

CAUTION:


24



blk

J W1 red red

Battery

P3 red

BATTE RY

_

P4 blk

_ red

_

P1 P2

SEC. TX

Battery blk

L

G

N green

Connect AC power here: green wire to G

NOTE: TO PREVENT SPARKING, CONNECT BATTERIES AFTER THE

SYSTEM MAIN A.C. POWER IS TURNED ON



Wire gauge

AWG

22

20

18

16

14

12


Feet Meters

2990

4760

7560

12000

19000

30400

910

1450

2300

3600

5800

9200

Notes:




25

Field wiring



0.06

0.12

0.30

0.60

0.90

1.20

1.50

1.70


18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG


2350

1180

470

235

156

118

94

78

716

360

143

71

47

36

29

24

3750

1850

750

375

250

185

150

125

1143

567

229

114

76

56

46

38

6000

3000

1200

600

400

300

240

200

1829

915

366

183

122

91

73

61

Notes:



8500

4250

1900

850

570

425

343

285

2591

1296

579

259

174

129

105

87


2

1.5

1.2

1.0

30

15

6

3


4-wire smoke power is provided for 4-wire smoke detectors. This filtered supply is supervised, therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/

300mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.


Supervised auxiliary power is used to power the remote annunciators and smart relay modules. This filtered circuit is supervised, therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/500mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.


This unregulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. The main power must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.

26


System Checkout



AC supply.




4. Check all jumpers and DIP switches for proper setting.





7. Power up the panel. The "AC-ON" green LED and the “Trouble” LED should illuminate, and the buzzer should sound. Press the “System Reset” button. Since the batteries are not connected, the trouble buzzer should sound intermittently and the common trouble LED should flash.


All indicators should be OFF except for normal power "AC ON" green LED and green LED I47.

Note:


9. Configure the Fire Alarm Control Panel as described in the Configuration section.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms

(as displayed on the LCD)

Possible Cause

Circuit Trouble

Remote Fail

Ground Fault

Battery Trouble

Common Trouble

Normally when a circuit trouble occurs, the common trouble indicator will illuminate and trouble buzzer will sound. To correct the fault, check for open wiring on that particular circuit loop (as displayed on the LCD) or that the circuit has not been disconnected (or bypassed).

Disconnecting a Circuit will cause a system trouble (off-normal position).

Remote Fail will be indicated on the main LCD display for any failure reported by, or failure to communicate with a remote annunciator or other remote device.



If only a common trouble is indicated on the main panel and none of the above troubles exist, check the following for a possible fault:

Check for any missing interconnection wiring.

Check for any Module missing that was part of the Configuration.

Check for improperly secured cabling.

27



Refer to Figure 23 below which shows the LCD Display, the Keypad and Control Button locations.

Figure 23: LCD Display and control buttons

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

FIRE

DRILL

BUZZER

SILENCE

LAMP

TEST

S Y S T E M N O R M A L

1 8 : 0 1 M O N 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 5

A.C. ON ALARM SUPV TRBL CPU FAIL

1

4

GHI

7

PRS

*

2

ABC

5

JKL

8

TUV

0

QZ

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXY

#

ENTER

MENU

CANCEL

INFO


• 5 common LED Indicators (under the LCD display)

• 5 Common Buttons (column left of key pad)


Rates.


• Trouble Flash (Trouble) - 20 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle

28



Buzzer


Fire Alarm: Steady



If the Buzzer is turned ON in response to a Non-Latching Trouble or Supervisory, it will be turned OFF if the condition causing it goes away and there is no other reason for it to be ON.

AC ON LED

The green AC ON Indicator will illuminate steadily as long as the main AC power is above minimum level. The indicator turns OFF when the level falls below the power fail threshold and the panel is switched to standby (battery) power.

Alarm LED

The red Alarm Indicator will illuminate whenever the panel detects an alarm condition on any initiating circuit. Since all alarms are latched until the panel is reset, the Indicator will remain ON until then.

Supervisory LED

The amber Supervisory Indicator turns ON steady when there is a Supervisory Alarm in the Panel caused by any

Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory Circuit. The Indicator is turned OFF when all Non-Latching Supervisory

Circuits are restored and there are no active Latching Supervisory Circuits. Latching Supervisory Alarms remain active until the Panel is reset.

Trouble LED

The amber Trouble Indicator flashes at the Trouble Flash Rate when the panel detects any trouble condition. It turns

OFF when all Non-Latching Troubles are cleared.

CPU Fail LED


Common Controls


The System Reset button resets the Fire Alarm Control Panel and all circuits. In particular, the system reset button does the following:

• Resets all Latching Trouble Conditions

• Resets all Initiating Circuits

• Resets 4-Wire Smoke Supply

• Turns off all Indicating Circuits

• Turns off Signal Silence

• Turns off Fire Drill

• Stops and resets all Timers

• Processes inputs as new events

• Does not affect Aux Disconnect

29



Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits.

Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will resound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence

Inhibit Timer period (see Configuration section). It also does not function if the Indicating Circuits are active as the result of a Fire Drill.


The Fire Drill button activates all Non-Disconnected (un-bypassed) Indicating Circuits, but does not transmit any

Alarms via the City Tie, Common Alarm Relay or Auxiliary Alarm Relay. Fire Drill activates the signals in the evacuation code programmed. For example in the Temporal Code, the signals will be pulsed ON for 0.5 seconds,

OFF for 0.5 seconds in rounds of 3 and then pause for 1.5 seconds and repeat.



Activation of the Lamp Test button causes all front panel Indicators to steadily illuminate and turns the buzzer ON steady. If Lamp Test is active for more than 10 seconds, Common Trouble is activated. The Lamp Test will also show the panel type and software version on the LCD display if the button is held for at least 3 seconds.

Buzzer Silence Button


Common Relays


The Common Alarm Relay activates when a general alarm sequence is activated. Since all alarm conditions are latched until system reset, the relay will remain ON until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset. The common alarm can be disconnected by aux disconnect (use Command Menu #12, as switch) if programmed to do so (see

MR-2300 Config/Features 5 and 7).


The Common Supervisory Relay activates when the common supervisory sequence is activated as the result of an alarm or any un-bypassed latching or non-latching supervisory circuit. The relay is turned OFF if all non-latching supervisory circuits are restored and there are no latching supervisory circuits active. The relay can be disconnected by aux disconnect (use Command Menu as switch) if programmed (see Configuration section). This Common

Supervisory Relay will function the same way as a Common Alarm relay if programmed to (see MR-2300 Config/

Feature 12).



Note:



The Auxiliary Alarm Relay functions the same way as the Common Alarm Relay in every respect except that it can be disconnected by auxiliary disconnect (via Command Menu/Item 12 which acts like a switch) with or without correlated relays if it is programmed to do so (see Configuration section). When configured (see Configuration section) , the relay can also be disconnected if signal silence is active and reconnected if signal silence is deactivated.

30


Circuit Types




Control Panel. An Alarm condition causes the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.

Verified Alarm


Panel within four seconds. Smoke detectors will be verified for a real alarm within 60 seconds, depending upon the startup time of the devices being used. If four seconds is too long a response time for pull stations, then wire them separately on a Non-Verified Alarm Circuit. An alarm condition causes the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.



Alarm is confirmed and processed. An alarm condition causes the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.

Note:


120 seconds.



Flow Retard Operation is enabled, then these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Sprinkler Alarm is confirmed and processed. An Alarm condition causes the


Note:


120 seconds.


An activation on these circuits will cause the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will clear (as long as there are no other

Supervisory conditions in the system) and the Circuit Status LED will turn off.


An activation on these circuits will cause the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will NOT clear.

Monitor

This is a supervised general-purpose non-latching input used mainly for correlating to a relay circuit. No other system condition occurs as a result of its activation (short-circuit), although it is supervised for Trouble (opencircuit).

Trouble-Only

The Trouble-Only circuit monitors a Trouble Condition from an external device. Both open and short circuits generate a non-latching Trouble condition.



The Silenceable Signal circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may be silenced

31

Indicators, Controls and Operations either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during alarm.


The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during alarm.



)



)






Figure 24: Evacuation Codes

32


Fire Alarm Operation

In a basic system set up all alarm inputs are treated in a similar manner. Alarm inputs include any of the following:

Non-Verified Alarm, Verified Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, and Water flow Alarm. If any of these alarm inputs occur when the panel is not already in alarm, the following occurs:

• The Buzzer sounds steadily

• If Fire Drill is active, it is cancelled

• The Common Alarm Indicator turns on

• The Auxiliary Common Alarm Relay activates if Aux Disconnect is not active

• The Auto Signal Silence Timer, if configured, starts

• The Signal Silence Inhibit Timer, if configured, starts

• All connected relays programmed to the input are activated (provided that Aux Disconnect is not active)

• Non-disconnected strobes associated with the input are activated

• Non-disconnected signals associated with the input are activated at the evacuation rate


• The alert buzzer sounds steadily


Signal Silence Timer, if configured, is restarted

• Any additional non-disconnected strobes associated with the new input are activated continuously

• Any additional non-disconnected signals associated with the new input are activated at the evacuation rate

33




The synchronous strobe models that are supported by the MR-2300 panel include Secutron models MRL-ST and

MRA-HS. A separate compatibility list is available for different supported models.

Strobes can be configures as normal (e.g. not synchronized or any of the above; see configuration section). Any selection made is system-wide (e.g. whatever is selected applies to all the circuits in the system, configured as strobes).





Silenceable strobe


Note:



3

Devices

The MR-2300 fire control panel supports System Sensor’s i

3


3




3


3


3

zone and i

3


3

devices.



3

zone:



• Out of sensitivity: defective or dirty device

• Freeze trouble

34




Z o n e - 1

O p e n T r b . 1 / 1



Z o n e - 1

C o m m u n i c . T r b 1 / 1

Dirty Device trouble


3

zone are dirty, the panel shows a Dirty Device trouble. The device needs cleaning or be replaced with a new device.

Z o n e - 1

D i r t y D e v . T r b 1 / 1

Out of sensitivity trouble


3

zone is out of sensitivity and cannot detect an alarm condition, the panel shows out of sensitivity trouble. In this condition the device is not usable and should be replaced.

Z o n e - 1

O u t o f S e n s T r b 1 / 1

Freeze trouble


Z o n e - 1

F r e e z e T r b . 1 / 1

The LEDs on the i

3


i 3 Detector Condition Green LED Red LED

Power-up

Normal (Standby)

Out of sensitivity (defective or dirty)

Freeze trouble

Alarm

Blinks every 10 sec

Blinks every 5 sec

OFF

OFF

OFF

Blinks every 10 sec

OFF

Blinks every 5 sec

Blinks every 10 sec

Solid

35

Configuration

Configuration

There are three methods of configuring the MR-2300 LCD Series Fire Alarm Panels:

Direct configuration using the main LCD display and the menu buttons.

Using a PC or Lap Top Computer with a UIMA converter module.

Using a PC or laptop computer with remote connection (must use fire alarm with built-in UDACT).

The following information for configuring an MR-2300 LCD Series Fire Alarm Panel is based on using the front panel main LCD display for configuration.

To access configuration mode press the Menu button on the front panel display . The LCD will display the Main

Menu. The function of different buttons on the front panel display is shown in F igure 25, below.


SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

FIRE

DRILL

BUZZER

SILENCE

LAMP

TEST

S Y S T E M N O R M A L

1 8 : 0 1 M O N 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 5


1

4

GHI

7

PRS

*

2

ABC

5

JKL

8

TUV

0

QZ

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXY

#

ENTER

MENU

CANCEL

INFO


The programming section is passcode protected. The following image shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The minimum number of digits allowed is four and the maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long; numerical values only. Press the “ENTER” key after entering the passcode. If the passcode is right, it will take you to the main command menu. If the passcode is wrong the system will ask you to re-enter the passcode. The system will be exhausted after three retries and will then take you back to the Normal message display. The default password is “1111” (without quotes).

E n t e r p a s s c o d e

_

36


Command Menu


“-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press the “ENTER” key to make a selection. To exit from the main command menu, select the “Exit” menu option and then press either the “CANCEL” or “ENTER” key.

Note:


&RPPDQG0HQX

05&RQILJ

&RQILJ,QIR

6HW7LPH

6HW3DVVZRUG

9LHZ(YHQW/RJ

&OHDU(YHQW/RJ

:DON7HVW

,/RRSWHVW

'LDOHU&RQILJ

7HVW'LDOHU

%\SDVV'HW&NW

%\SDVV1$&&NW

$X['LVF

([LW

Pressing “LAMP TEST” at any time will show information about the system and the software version as shown below. It will also illuminate all the LEDs across the top of the display except for the CPU Fail LED.

MR-2312-DDR wUDACT

Version 0.0.4


37

Configuration

1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu)


MR-2300

Command Menu/MR-2300 Config-->Features

- F e a t u r e C o n f i g -

1 M a n . S i g . S i l .

2 F i r e D r i l l

3 O p t . C k t . C o r r

4 W t r / S p r k . R e t d

5 A u x D i s C o r r

6 S i g - S i l I n h T m r

7 A u x D i s A l m & S v

8 A u t o S i l . T m r

9 R e m . A n n u n .

1 0 A l m . X m i t - S i l .

1 1 P w r F a i l T m r .

1 2 C o m . S u p v . R l y

1 3 S i g - S i l . I s o l .

1 4 S t r o b e T y p e

1 5 E v a c . C o d e

1 6 A c t i v e E O L

38



1. Press MENU to enter the command menu.

2. Select a Command Menu option by pressing ENTER . The corresponding submenu will display.


4. Press ENTER to select a submenu option.

5. Use the left or right arrow buttons to select/unselect an option (selected = “X”). Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the different options.

6. Once you have made the correct selection, press ENTER to confirm the change. The display will return to the submenu screen.

7. Press CANCEL to return to the previous menu.


Features/


[X] ENABLE->Default

[ ] DISABLE



[ X ] E N A B L E


[ ] DISABLE



Features/

2.Fire Drill

F i r e D r i l l

[ X ] E N A B L E


Features/



[ X ] D I S A B L E

[X] DISABLE ->Def

[ ] ENABLE



Features/


Operation


[ X ] D I S A B L E

[X] DISABLE ->Def

[ ] ENABLE




39

Configuration


Features/



A u x D i s C o r r

[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/



[ X ] D I S A B L E

[ ] ENABLE



Alarm Relay when selected by

Command Menu, Item 12 which acts like an Aux. disconnect switch.

If enabled, this function will disconnect the Auxiliary Alarm relay and all correlated relays when selected by Command

Menu, Item 12 which acts like an Aux. disconnect switch.

Correlated relays include:

MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 relays,

MR-2312-S12 relays.


[ ] 10 SEC

[ ] 20 SEC

[ ] 30 SEC

[ ] 1 MIN




Features/



[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/



[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/




[ X ] N O N E

[ ] ENABLE



[ ] 5 Min

[ ] 10 Min

[ ] 15 Min

[ ] 20 Min

[ ] 30 Min

[X] NONE->Default

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

[ ] 3

[ ] 4

[ ] 5

[ ] 6

If enabled, this function will disconnect (when selected by

Command Menu, Item 12 which acts like an Aux. disconnect switch) the Common Alarm relay, the Common Supervisory relay and the MR-2300-PR will not transmit a supervisory or alarm event.

If disabled, selecting Aux disconnect via the Command

Menu, Item 12 (which acts like an Aux. disconnect switch) will have no effect on the Common

Alarm relay, the Common

Supervisory relay and the MR-

2300-PR.

Use this function to determine the time period for which the indicating circuits will sound before they are automatically silenced.



40



Features/



[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/



[ X ] N O N E


Features/



[ X ] E N A B L E

[X] DISABLE ->Def

[ ] ENABLE

Use this function to allow the alarm transmit and auxiliary alarm relay to reset on “SIGNAL


“RESET” switch.

[X] NONE ->Default

[ ] 8 HRS

[ ] 18 HRS

Use this function to delay the

AC power fail trouble for the programmed time period. If disabled, the AC power fail is reported right away.


[ ] DISABLE

If disabled, the common supervisory relay can be used as common alarm relay. It will act the same way as a common alarm relay. If enabled, it is used a common supervisory relay.


Features/



[ X ] D I S A B L E


Features/

14.Strobe Type

S t r o b e T y p e

[ X ] N O R M A L


Features/





Features/

16. Active EOL

A c t i v e E O L

[ X ] D I S A B L E

[ ] ENABLE

[X] DISABLE ->Def



[ ] SECUTRON

[ ] FARADY

[ ] WHEELOCK

[ ] GENTEX

[ ] SYSTEM SENSOR



[X] TEMPORAL->Def

[ ] CONTINOUS

[ ] MARCH TIME

[ ] CALIFORNIA



[ ] ENABLE




EOL resistors.

41

Configuration


Note:


Inp Zone


1 Z o n e - 1

2 Z o n e - 2

- -

- -

1 2 Z o n e 1 2

This menu is used to program the process type for the initiating circuits. The maximum number of initiating circuits supported is 12, but only those supported by the particular model will be shown.

Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/Ipt. Zone

1. Type (Initiating circuit)

12.

Z o n e - 1 T y p e

[ X ] A L A R M

[X] ALARM ->Default

[ ] VERIF ALARM

[ ] SPRKL ALM

[ ] WTR-FLOW ALM

[ ] NON-LATCH SUP

[ ] LATCH SUPV

[ ] GEN ALARM

[ ] MONITOR

[ ] TRB ONLY


Z o n e - 1 2 T y p e

[ X ] A L A R M

Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config i 3 Zone

I 3 D e t e c t i o n Z o n e s

[ ] Z o n e - 1

[ ] Z o n e - 2

- -

- -

[ ] Z o n e - 1 2

[ ] Zone-1->Default

.

.

.

[ ] Zone-12->Default

Use this function if i

3

devices are present on a zone. ( See i

3 devices section for details).

42



Note:


Opt Zone


1 N A C - 1

2 N A C - 2

3 N A C - 3

4 N A C - 4

This menu is used to program the process type of the indicating circuits. The maximum number of indicating circuits is four, but only those supported by the particular model will be shown.

Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/Opt.

Zone

1. Type (Indicating Circuits)

N A C - 1 T y p e

[ X ] S I L - A B L E


[ ] NON SIL-ABLE

[ ] SIL-ABLE STR

[ ] NON-SIL STR



4.

N A C - 4 T y p e

[ X ] S I L - A B L E


Correlation


Correlation

1.Correlation

Z o n e - 1 C o r r .

[ X ] N A C - 1

[X] NAC-1 ->Default

[X] NAC-2 ->Default

[X] NAC-3 ->Default

[X] NAC-4 ->Default


12.

Z o n e - 1 2 C o r r .

[ X ] N A C - 1

43

Configuration


Note:


Inp Zone Label


1 Z o n e - 1

2 Z o n e - 2

- -

- -

1 2 Z o n e 1 2

Use the keypad described below for entering a message.

Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/Ipt. Zone

Label


[Zone-1 ]->Default

[Zone-12 ]->Default

Z o n e - 1 L a b e l

Z o n e - 1

12.

Z o n e - 1 2 L a b e l

Z o n e - 1 2

KEYPAD TRANSLATION AS MARKED ON THE KEYS

Sequence refers to the number of times the key must be pressed to achieve the number or letter

KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4

--------------------------------------

Key #1 1

Key #2 2 A B C Key #3 3 D E F

Key #4 4 G H I Key #5 5 J K L

Key #6 6 M N O Key #7 7 P R S

Key #8 8 T U V Key #9 9 W X Y

Key #0 0 Q Z Key * Backspace

Key # Forward

Press the ENTER key to input the message.

44



Note:


Opt Zone Label


1 N A C - 1

2 N A C - 2

3 N A C - 3

4 N A C - 4

Use the keys in described below for entering a message. These letter keys are alternate functions of the numbered keys are physically located in the same position as described below.

Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/Opt.

Zone Label

1.Indicating zone label

4.

N A C - 1 L a b e l

N A C - 1

N A C - 4 L a b e l

N A C - 4

[NAC-1 ]->Default

[NAC-4 ]->Default

KEYPAD TRANSLATION AS MARKED ON THE KEYS

Sequence refers to the number of times the key must be pressed to achieve the number or letter

KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4

--------------------------------------

Key #1 1

Key #2 2 A B C Key #3 3 D E F

Key #4 4 G H I Key #5 5 J K L

Key #6 6 M N O Key #7 7 P R S

Key #8 8 T U V Key #9 9 W X Y

Key #0 0 Q Z Key * Backspace

Key # Forward

Press the ENTER key to input the message.








45

Configuration

2. Config Info (Command-Menu)

Note:





J o b N a m e :






U n k n o w n





Configuration date and time will appear for all means of configuration, thus revealing date and time configuration was last changed.

C f g . T o o l S / W V e r s . :

V e r s i o n : x . x . x . x



46



Note:



2 T i m e C l o c k


Command Menu/Set Time

1. Daylight saving time


[ X ] D I S A B L E

Command Menu/Time Clock

2. Set time and date


[ ] ENABLE



0 0 : 0 0 M O N 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

Default

00:00 MON 2000-01-01




Command Menu/Time Clock

3. Compensation


0

Once the compensation value is entered the display will be:




+15 seconds.

Use the up down arrow keys to select daily compensation value and press ENTER. For a fast clock adjust negatively. For a slow clock adjust positively.

For example: for a clock which runs 5 minutes a month (based on 30 days) fast select -10 seconds.

47

Configuration

4. Set Password (Command-Menu)

Note:



[ ]


[ ]



Use this function to change the passcode. The minimum number of digits is 4 and the maximum number is 10.

ONLY numeric digits are allowed.




The event log looks the same as the normal event queue. Pressing the “INFO” key has the same effect that it does in the event queue. The illustration below provides an example of how the “INFO” key works.


O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9

E V E N T

01 of 09


2 0 0 2 / 1 0 / 2 2 1 1 : 4 5 . A M

D AT E


48



Note:



1 A l a r m L o g


3 A l l L o g s



Use this function to clear alarm logs, general logs, or both.






49

Configuration


Note:







[ ] Z o n e - 1



A l a r m : 0 0 T r b : 0 0


(not Strobes) to activate briefly for a number of short bursts corresponding to the selected circuit number. If the first selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for one burst. If the second selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for two bursts, and so on. This means that if, for example, circuits 1, 3 and 5 were selected for the walk test, the indicating circuits would sound with one, two and three bursts respectively. The burst interval is half a second ON and half a second OFF. After the sounding pattern has been sent to the indicating circuits, the initiating circuit is reset and tested again. If it is still active (in alarm) the pattern will be re-sent. Trouble on any initiating circuit selected for the walk test activates the indicating circuits continuously for five seconds.

Activation of a circuit will also cause the alarm count to increase while the trouble on the initiating circuit will cause the trouble count to increase.


Notes:



OPERATION.

50


8. i

3


Note:


The i

3

maintenance test is designed to test the devices on the i

3


3

maintenance test can be invoked from the command menu. If the fire alarm has just been powered up or reset, wait six minutes before selecting the i

3

loop test. If the i

3

loop test is selected, the following message appears on the screen:


L o o p t e s t ? Y


3



[ ] Z o n e - 1

If the i

3




3



Once the zone goes into the i

3

loop test, no other zone can be put into the test. The maintenance test will take five minutes. During this time you can walk through the device and make sure all the devices are working properly. The following table lists the status of the devices while in loop test.

Note:

Out of sensitivity can mean the device is dirty.


Proper operation

Out of sensitivity

Freeze condition

Green LED


OFF

OFF

Red LED

OFF




51

Configuration


Note:


The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. Each item in this menu is described below in detail.

- D i a l e r C o n f i g -

1 A c c o u n t I n f o

2 T e l e p h o n e l i n e

3 R e p o r t O p t i o n s

4 T i m e P a r a m e t e r

5 E n a b l e / D i s a b l e

6 R i n g D e t e c t


Account Info

- A c c o u n t I n f o -

1 A c c o u n t # 1 I D



4 A c c o u n t # 2 I D



Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account

Info


A c c o u n t # 1 I D :

_

123456->Default

Use this function to set the Account

ID for the monitoring station to which the dialer reports events. The maximum # of digits allowed is six.

For contact ID, only the first four digits are used; the last two are truncated.

Unless you are using the SIA protocol, the allowed digits for the account ID are simple digits 0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F (the

SIA protocol only allows digits 0 to 9).

To enter hexadecimal digits, press the INFO button. The letter “A” will appear. To scroll through the rest of the letters, press INFO repeatedly.

Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left.

52



Info



_

[ 101 ]->Default

Use this function to set the telephone number of the monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is 19 including “,” and numerals. The “,” will be treated as 1 sec delay. To enter “,” press the INFO button.

Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left.

An example of a typical telephone # is 9,,12345678.


Info





Info


A c c o u n t # 2 I D :

_


Info



_


Info




[X] CONTACT ID-Def

[ ] SIA 300 Baud

[ ] SIA 110 Baud

654321->Default

[ 101 ]->Default

[X] Contact ID-Def

[ ] SIA 300 Baud

[ ] SIA 110 Baud


Same as Account#1.

Same as Account#1.

Same as Account#1.

53

Configuration


Telephone Line







Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone

Line


[X] DTMF Dial->Def

[ ] Pulse Dial




Line


[X] DTMF Dial->Def

[ ] Pulse Dial




Line



[ ] DISABLE


[ X ] E N A B L E


Line



[ ] DISABLE


[ X ] E N A B L E


Line


06 ->Default


0 6


Same as Line#1.


Same as Line#1.


54



Note:


Report Options

- Report Options -

1 Alarm Prio.

2 Trouble Prio.

3 Supv. Priority

4 Aux Dis Report

5 Fire Panel

6 Operation Mode

7 Checksum Bits

Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options



[ X ] A c c o u n t 1

[X] Account 1->Def

[ ] Account 2





[ X ] A c c o u n t 1

[X] Account 1->Def

[ ] Account 2





[ X ] A c c o u n t 1

[X] Account 1->Def

[ ] Account 2



4.Aux Disconnect, Cancels Alarm &

Supv Reporting Thru dialer

A u x D i s A l m & S u p v R p t .

[ X ] D I S A B L E

[ ] ENABLE



AUX DISCONNECT feature

(Command Menu, Item 12 as a switch) will block the alarm and supervisory events from the being reported through the built-in dialer.


5.Fire Panel type

[X] MR-2300 Panel->Def

Do not change this function; keep it as default.


05

55

Configuration



D i a l e r O p e r . M o d e :

[ X ] ( U ) D A C T


[ ] DACT




7.Checksum Bits

C h e c k s u m B i t s :

[ X ] 8 B i t s

[X] 8 Bit ->Default

[ ] 16 Bits

Do not change this function; keep it as default



Note:


Time Parameters





Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time Parameter

1.AC Loss delay

0 ->Default


0

0 to 20 hours





0

0 ->Default


3.Auto test time

A u t o - T e s t T i m e

0 0 : 3 0

00:30 ->Default

Use this function to set the test report date for the cell phone setup. If the date is set to 0, there will be no test reporting for cell phone or regular telephone line. Other settings could be anywhere from 01-28, representing which day of the month the test should be performed. When a cell phone service is employed for the panel, it should only be connected to telephone line #2 CO interface. Also, the dial tone detection feature of Line




Please avoid the following Test

Times: 00:00, 01:55, 02:00 and

03:00

56





[ X ] E N A B L E


[ ] DISABLE

The dialer is enabled by default.

When the dialer is enabled or disabled, a warning message appears.


- - - - - - W a r n i n g - - - - - - -



Ring Detect


[ X ] 5



1 . L # 1 M a n u al t e s t

2 . L # 2 M a n u al t e s t

3 . R e s e t Di a l e r

[ ] Disabled

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

[ ] 3

[ ] 4

[X] 5->Default

[ ] 6

[ ] 7

[ ] 8

Use this menu item to select the number of rings on which the panel’s modem will answer. The default number of rings is five. The maximum number of rings you can define is eight.


Note:


1 . L # 1 M a n u a l t e s t

2 . L # 2 M a n u a l t e s t

.

Press Enter to test Line #1. Press Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer Test Messages on the following page.

Press Enter to test Line #2. Press Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer Test Messages on the following page.

This feature flushes all reportable events from the buffer. Press Enter to reset the dialer. Press

Cancel to exit this menu.

57

Configuration




The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This message automatically displays when Maual Test is selected.

N o D C V o l t






N o D T M F t o n e





N o K i s s o f f




Waiting for availability of the receiver. The receiver confirms the avialablity by sending an ack tone.








58


11. Bypass Det Ckt (Command-Menu)

Note:


B y p a s s D e t Z o n e

1 . Z o n e - 1

[ ] B y p a s s e d

[ ] U n - B y p a s s e d

Initiating zones may be bypassed individually. This bypass command will allow you to scroll through all initiating zones 1 to a maximum of 12 depending on the size of the panel.

Press Enter to bypass the zone or scroll up or down to un-bypassed (normal connected circuit).

Press Enter to un-bypass the zone or scroll up or down to bypass (off normal unconnected circuit).

12. Bypass NAC Ckt (Command-Menu)

1 . Z o n e - 1

[ ] B y p a s s e d

[ ] U n - B y p a s s e d

Indicating zones may be bypassed individually. This bypass command will allow you to scroll through all indicating zones 1 to a maximum of 4 depending on the size of the panel.

Press Enter to bypass the zone or scroll up or down to un-bypassed (normal connected circuit).

Press Enter to un-bypass the zone or scroll up or down to bypass (off normal unconnected circuit).

13. Aux. Disconnect (Command-Menu)

D i s c o n n e c t A u x

R e l a y ? [ Y ]

Use the up or down keys to change from

YES to NO. This selection work like a switch. If Yes this command disconnects the auxiliary alarm relay and associated relays as long as the Aux disc feature has be enabled.

59

Configuration


Note:


Pressing “ENTER” after selecting “Exit” from the main menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation.

Zone messages

Point annunciation is indicated on the LCD display. There are no separate queues for “TROUBLE”, “ALARM”,


TROUBLE, ALARM and SUPVISORY LEDs will be flashing if at least one of the given types is in the queue.

Scroll through the events by using the “UP” and “DOWN” keys. If you need more information about the displayed event, press the “INFO” key.


Event “ 01/09 ” 01 of 09, “ OPEN TRB ” on physical “ Z-01 ” at “ EAST LOBBY ENTRANCE ” with process type as

“ VERIFIED ALARM ” and the event occurred on “ 2003/04/04 ” at “ 18:01 TUESDAY ”.

ZO N E

M essage

Process

Type

Physical

Zone N o.


O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9

EV E N T type

E V E N T

01 of 09

"IN FO " Key


1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 4

T IM E D AT E




ZO N E

M essage

Process

Type

Physical

Zone N o.

60


S H O R T T R B 0 2 / 0 9

EV E N T type

E V E N T

02 of 09

"IN FO " Key


1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 2

T IM E

D AT E

Note:

The queue hierarchy is Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Monitor ie, alarm has the highest priority and will always be shown at the beginning of the queue, followed by supervisory alarms, troubles and monitor zone troubles.



AC Power Fail


T rouble Typ e


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01

"IN FO " Key


T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 4

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D AT E

Battery trouble

The battery trouble is generated when the battery voltage drops below the specified UL value. The trouble is restored when the voltage returns to the normal value.

T rouble Typ e


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 8

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A TE

Ground Fault

T rouble Typ e


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

Note:


61

Configuration


Troubles related to the annunciator can have two possibilities: either the main panel and annunciator failed to communicate with each other, or an unconfigured remote annunciator is responding to the main panel. In both the cases, the following trouble message is displayed:

T roub le Type


E V E N T

01 of 09

"IN FO " Key

T rouble info

Trouble code

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

1 1 : 4 5 S A T 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 3

T IM E

D AT E


The four-wire smoke detector supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on the four-wire smoke supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore power to the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.

T roub le Type


E V E N T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

T IM E D AT E

62


Supervised auxiliary supply

The supervised auxiliary supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on supervised aux supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore power to the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.

Note:


T rouble Typ e


E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

City tie Polarity reversal - MR-2300-PR Relay module

The city tie or polarity reversal module is supervised for open and whether or not the MR-2300-PR is plugged in.

The relay module is supervised for whether or not it is plugged in.


T rouble Typ e

A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

63

Configuration


T roub le Type


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V E N T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

T IM E D AT E

Note:


64

















65















NORMAL)


Zone Fire Alarm






Waterflow

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

Test

Test

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Supervisory

Supervisory

Alarm

Waterflow restored



General Alarm


AC power lost

AC power restored

Battery Low

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble


Ground Fault

Trouble

Trouble

Ground Fault restored Trouble

NNN -Refers to Sensor number for zone causing event.

66

Qualifier Code

New event 1 351

New event 1 352

Restore

Restore

3 351

3 352

New event 1 354

Restore 3 354

New event 1 350

New event 1 602

New event 1 608

New event 1 601

New event 1 110

Restore 3 110

New event 1 300

Restore 3 300

New event 1 200

Restore 3 200

New event 1 113

Restore 3 113

New event 1 320

Restore 3 320

New event 1 140

Restore 3 140

New event 1 301

Restore 3 301

New event 1 302

Restore 3 302

New event 1 310

Restore 3 310

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00


00

00

00

00

Acct #

Acct #

00

00

000

000

000

000

Acct #

Acct #

485

000

000

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

000

000

000

000

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

000

000

000






SIA Event

Code

Parameter











Zone Fire Alarm






Waterflow alarm


General Alarm




AC power lost

AC power restored

Battery Low


Ground Fault


Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

Test

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Supervisory

Supervisory

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

New event

Restore

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

New event

New event

New event

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

UT

UR

AT

AR

WA

WH

QA

QH

YT

YR

YP

YQ

FT

FJ

FS

FR

RY

RX

FA

FH

RT

YK

YS

RP

LT

LT

LR

LR

000

000

000

000

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

000

000

000

000

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

001

002

001

002

Acct #

Acct #

485

000

67

Appendix C: Specifications


MR-2300 Fire Alarm Control Panel (LCD)




120 VAC 60 Hz 3 amps\ 240 VAC 50 Hz 1.5A (primary)

Power Supply Rating

6 amps maximum (secondary)

Battery

Type: 24VDC Gel-Cell/Sealed lead acid

Charging capability : 10AH


Indicating circuit

4 supervised style Z (Class B) indicating circuits, configured as normal or visual. Terminals are labeled “SIG”.

Power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 1.7A @ 49C per circuit





if no auxiliaries are used the max power is 5A


Aux supply (non resettable) power limited / 22.3VDC regulated / 500mA max


Power limited/22.3Vdcregulated / 300mA max


Power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 1.7A max at 49C







ID “A”

Power limited / 19VDC reg. / 3mA for detectors / 0.15Vp-p ripple

/ 40mA max (alarm short)




MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay Module (optional)

MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay adder module


Contact rating NO / NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max

Current consumption standby 0mA / alarm (MR-2312-R12)

160mA / alarm (MR-2306-R6) 80mA











MR-2300 Remote LCD Annunciator









8.5mA max (shorted)

Polarity reversal supv terminal


Polarity reversal alarm terminal



68


System Model: MR-2300 Series LCD Version Fire Alarm Control Panel

System Type: Local, Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR), Remote Protected Premise Station (using MR-2300-

PR or

MR-2312-DDR or MR-2306-DDR) Central Station Protected Premises (using MR-2312-DDR or

MR-2306-DDR)


Type of Signalling: Non-Coded

Applicable Standards: NFPA 70 and 72, UL-864 Rev. 9

69







Refer to Appendix A for specifications.

Model Number

MR-2312-DDR

MR-2312-DDR

MR-2306-DDR

MR-2306-DDR

MR-2306-DR

MR-2306-DR

MR-2300-A

MR-2300-NC4

MR-2300-NC2

MR-2300-PR

MR-2312-R12

Power Requirements (All Currents are in Amperes)

Description Qty Standby

Total

Standby

Fire Alarm Control Panel,

12 Inp, 4Out with UDACT

Using 3K9 resistors

Fire Alarm Control Panel,

12 Inp, 4Out with UDACT

Using active resistors

Fire Alarm Control Panel, 6

Inp, 2 Out with UDACT

Using 3K9 resistors





Inp,2 Out without UDACT

Using 3K9 resistors




Det Class A Converter

Adder Module

Sig Class A Converter

Adder Module--4 Circuits



Polarity Reversal and City

Tie Module

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

0.174

0.104

0.142

0.112

0.142

0.112

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.050

= 0.444

= 0.394

= 0.312

= 0.282

= 0.312

= 0.282

-0.000

-0.000

-0.000

=

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.300

Alarm

(City Tie in Use)

12 Relay Adder Module X 0.000

= 0.160

=

=

=

=

=

=

Total

Alarm

-0.000

-0.000

-0.000

=

=

MR-2306-R6

MR-2312-S12

MR-2300-LCD

MR-2306/2312-

ATW

MR-2300T

6 Relay Adder Module

Smart Relay Module

Smart Remote Annunciator

Remote Annunciator


Two-Wire Smoke Detectors

X

X

X

X

X

X

0.000

0.030

0.016

0.035

0.035

Ò 0.00012

=

=

=

=

=

=

0.080

0.140

0.040

0.090/0.140

0.035

* 0.090

=

=

=

=

=

= 0.090

= Four-Wire Smoke Detectors

Signal Load (bells, horns, strobes, and etc.)

X

X

=

=


= =

( B ) Total currents (Add above currents) STANDBY ( A ) ALARM


' Use 0.084

for five minutes of alarm or 0.5

for thirty minutes of alarm as a multiplier figure.

Ò Using the Secutron 1400 2-wire smoke detector.

Total Current Requirement: ALARM ( B ) _____ Amps. (Value obtained from column B )


( [STANDBY ( A ) ______ ] X [(24 or 60 Hours) ___ ] ) + ( [ALARM ( B ) ______ ] X [ ' Alarm in Hr.] _____ ) = ( C ) ______AH

Total Alarm Current: Must be 6 amperes or less for MR-2300 Series. Indicating Circuits must not exceed 5 amperes.

70



71







System Failures




• Power Failure






•System Users



Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side

72

MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.

• Software


















73












•water damage;













74














75



Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

M R - 2 3 2 0 S E R I E S

Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel

I

NSTALLATION &

G

UIDE

Revision 2



MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual

Contents

Industry Canada and FCC Notice .......................................................................................... 1

Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 2

Panel Type............................................................................................................................ 2


Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3

Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3

Zone...................................................................................................................................... 3

Display Points ....................................................................................................................... 3

Wiring Styles ......................................................................................................................... 3


Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel.................................................. 4


Polarity Reversal/City Tie...................................................................................................... 4


Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits.................................................................................... 5

Output Class A Converter: Two Circuits ............................................................................... 5



Additional System Accessories............................................................................................. 6





Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board ................................................. 10


MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module ..................................................... 12


Field Wiring............................................................................................................................... 14

Main Board Field Wiring........................................................................................................ 14

Abort and Manual Release Switch Wiring............................................................................. 16

Indicating Circuit Wiring ........................................................................................................ 18

Dialer Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 19



Power Supply Connection..................................................................................................... 22





System Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 25





Common LED indicators ....................................................................................................... 26

Menu Buttons........................................................................................................................ 28

Switches and Common Indicators ........................................................................................ 28

Common Controls ................................................................................................................. 29

Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons.......................................................................................... 29

Common Relays ................................................................................................................... 30

Circuit Types ......................................................................................................................... 30

Evacuation codes.................................................................................................................. 31 i

Contents

Configuration........................................................................................................................... 32

Using the CFG-300 Tool ...................................................................................................... 32


How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320............................................................... 34

Command Menu................................................................................................................... 34

1. Panel Config (Command-Menu) ...................................................................................... 35


3. Set password (Command-Menu) ..................................................................................... 42




7. Test Dialer (Command-Menu).......................................................................................... 49

8. Exit (Command-Menu) ..................................................................................................... 51

Operating the Panel ................................................................................................................ 52

Panel Operation During Various Hazard States................................................................... 52

General Panel Operation ..................................................................................................... 53

Pre-Programmed Modes......................................................................................................... 54

Mode 1: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release ........................ 54

Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ................. 56

Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release .................................... 58

Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release ............................. 60

Mode 5: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release................... 62

Mode 6: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ............ 63

Mode 7: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release............................... 64

Mode 8: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release ........................ 66

Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, NYC abort...................................... 68

Mode 10: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ............... 70

Mode 11: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release ...................... 72


Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices .......................................................................... 75

Appendix C: Reporting ........................................................................................................... 77



Appendix D: Specifications.................................................................................................... 79

Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)........................... 80

Warranty................................................................................................................................... 81 ii


List of Tables & Figures

Tables

Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board .....................................11

Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings ...................................................................................13

Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ............................................................................................23

Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring ..........................................................................................23

Figures

Figure 1: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring ..........................................7

Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules ................................................................................9

Figure 3: Main Control Board cable connector and jumper settings .................................10

Figure 4: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module ............................................11

Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .....................................12

Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module .....................................................................12

Figure 7: Polarity reversal and city tie module ....................................................................13

Figure 8: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B Wiring ........................................................14

Figure 9: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D Wiring .........................................................15

Figure 10: Abort and Manual Release Switch Class B or Style B Wiring ..........................16

Figure 11: Abort and Manal Release Switch Class A or Style D Wiring ............................17

Figure 12: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring .....................................................18

Figure 13: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring ......................................................18

Figure 14: Releasing Circuit Wiring ......................................................................................19

Figure 15: Dialer Wiring ..........................................................................................................19

Figure 16: Four-wire smoke detector wiring ........................................................................20

Figure 17: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection ..........................................20

Figure 18: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection ...............................21

Figure 19: Power Supply Connection ...................................................................................22

Figure 20: LED indicators and control buttons ....................................................................26

Figure 21: Evacuation and Alert Codes ................................................................................31

Figure 22: MR-2320 Configuration .........................................................................................32

iii

List of Tables & Figures iv





(ULC) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed MR-2320 series Pre-action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel under

Standard ULC-S527 (Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems) and ULC/ORD-C693-1994 (Central Station Fire Protective

Signalling Systems and Services). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the Canadian / Provincial /

Local Electrical Code; and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).



CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate


Note: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.



(ULI) for use in slave application in conjunction with a listed Pre-action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel under Standard 864

(Control Units for Fire Protective Signalling Systems). These Communicators comply with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) performance requirements for DACTs and should be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 4 (Supervising Station Fire Alarm

System). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70); and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

FCC Notice

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the telco transformer of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment is capable of seizing the line. This capability is provided in the hardware.







Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Inc. or an authorized representative of Secutron Inc. For information contact


1

Introduction

Introduction

Secutron’s MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel performs the function of fire suppression in a wide variety of applications. It is capable of being used in an agent release sprinkler system or in a pre-action or deluge sprinkler system. It can be used in single-hazard or dual-hazard applications with or without cross-zoning. The panel includes common alarm, supervisory, and trouble relays, and provides regulated and unregulated auxiliary power along with four-wire smoke power. It supports auxiliary relays and a city tie module. The auxiliary relays are based on a hazard area status. The MR-2320 has six input zones and four output zones, allowing for flexibility in most single- and dual-hazard applications for both deluge and agent releasing applications.

Panel Type

The panel can function as an agent release panel or as a pre-action/deluge panel, depending on which of the available fixed configurations are chosen from the main programming menu.

Deluge sprinkler system

In deluge sprinkler system open-valve sprinkler heads terminate to a water supply that is controlled by a single valve. When the system detects fire, it automatically opens the valve via a releasing circuit, allowing the water to flow through all the sprinkler heads. Deluge sprinkler systems are useful for applications in which simultaneous discharge of water through every sprinkler is required.

Pre-action sprinkler system

In a pre-action sprinkler system close-valve sprinkler heads are connected to pipes that are supervised for air pressure. The pipes terminate directly to a water supply. Pre-action systems are useful for applications in which the prevention of an accidental discharge of water is required.

Agent release system

In an agent release system, an extinguishing agent (such as Argon, dry chemical, CO 2 , Halon, etc.) is automatically released upon fire detection. An abort function is added to prevent the false release of the extinguishing agent.



Class A converter adder modules. Each initiating circuit is pre-configured as Alarm, Supervisory (Latching or non-latching), water-flow, Manual Release Switch, Abort Switch or Manual Release/Abort combination, depending upon the selected pre-programmed configuration. There are two LEDs per circuit, one for Trouble

(amber), and one dual color (amber/red) LED for Supervisory (amber) and Alarm (red).

• Basic unit has 4 power limited class B (style Y) output circuits. Output circuits 1 & 2 are indicating circuits while output circuits 3 & 4 are releasing circuits (circuit 4 can work as an indicating circuit in some situations; check the Pre-Programming Modes section on page for details). Each indicating circuit process type is pre-configured and can be silenceable. The signal rates depend on the selected pre-programmed configuration.

• A pushbutton associated with each initiating, indicating and releasing circuit can individually bypass the circuit.

• Configurable Signal Silence Inhibit and Auto Signal Silence Timers.


• Four wire reset-able smoke power supply: 22.3V DC regulated, 300mA maximum.

• Relay Contacts for Common Alarm, Common Supervisory, Common Trouble, and Auxiliary Alarm Relay

(disconnectable).

• RS-485 Interface for MR-2300 Series Remote Multiplex Annunciators and Smart relay Module.



• Easy configuration of the panel using LCD service tool (CFG-300).

• Releasing circuit protection from false alarm by disconnecting the battery if the voltage falls below 19V.

2


Conventions

Circuits

Refers to an actual electrical interface for initiating (detection), indicating (signal), and releasing.

Zone



Display Points



Wiring Styles



This is done without penalizing the number of circuits, which remains the same as in Class B (Style B). Changing the indicating circuits to Class A requires an MR-2300-NC2 adder board, which will convert TWO indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z). Releasing circuits (Z) are Class B (Style B) only.

3

System Components


Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel

X

M

?

AC ON

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT ACTIVE

AGENT RELEASED

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)

MR-2320 SERIES

Agent Release Control Panel

Model

MR-2320-R

Description

Six Zone Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release

Control Panel with LED display (red or white door, black box), six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, and four Class B (Style Y) output circuits. Output circuits 1 & 2 are Class B (Style

B) indicating circuits that can be converted to

Class A (Style Z) using an MR-2300-NC2

Output Class A Converter adder module.

Output circuits 3 & 4 are Class B (Style B) only releasing circuits. Each output circuit can draw

1.7A current, 5A total. A six zone MR-2300-A

Input Class A Converter adder module may be used for Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits. MR-2320 contains Common Alarm,

Common Supervisory & Common Trouble

Relays, auxiliary alarm relay (disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four Wire Smoke Detector

Power Supply. Two batteries are required.

MR-2320-DR Same as above except with dialer.



RELAY 1

NO/NC C

RELAY 2

NO/NC C

RELAY 3

NO/NC C

RELAY 4

NO/NC C

RELAY 5

NO/NC C

RELAY 6

NO/NC C

MR-2306-

R6

Six-relay adder module

Polarity Reversal/City Tie


MR-2300-PR

Polarity Reversal and/or City

Tie Module

JW4

4



Model

MR-2312-SW12

Description

Smart Relay Module

(12 relays) with white enclosure

MR-2312-SR12

Smart Relay Module

(12 relays) with red enclosure

MR-2300 SERIES

REMOTE RELAY

Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits

Model

MR-2300-A

Description


Module (six circuits). This module has built-in active

EOL resistors.

Output Class A Converter: Two Circuits

Model

MR-2300-NC2

Description


MR-2312-ATW Remote Annunciator


A.C.

ON

COMMON

TROUBLE

SIGNAL

SILENCE

BUZZER

SILENCE

LAMP

TEST

SWITCH

ENABLE

SIGNAL

SILENCE

SYSTEM

RESET

FIRE ALARM

ANNUNCIATOR

MR-2312-ATW 16 Zone remote annunciator

5

System Components


The ELRX-400R(W) are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.


ELRX-400

RED

BLACK

ELRX-400R

Active end-of-line resistor without plate

Active end-of-line resistor with end-ofline red plate

Additional System Accessories

Model: MR-2306-ATR/W Eight Zone Remote Annunciator

Model: MR-2300T

Model: MP-400

Model: MP-400R

Model: BC-160


EOL resistor plate, 3.9K

EOL resistor plate, red

External Battery Cabinet

Model: MP-1500R/W Current

Model: MP-320R/W Solenoid Module

Model: MR-2316-AT Remote Annunciator

Ω

(ULC and ULI Approved)



(ULC Approved)


6




Install the MR-2320 Series panel enclosure as shown below. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes with the provided screws.


11"

1.5"

PLACE MR-2320 TRIM RING OVER BACKBOX

17"

14.5"

4 Mounting

Holes for

Surface

Mounting

20.0"

22.5"


5.425"

1" 3.5"

14.5"

4.5

"



Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front and semi-flush mount the backbox into the wall.

Peel the adhesive cover from the trim ring and stick to the wall surface around the backbox, after wall is finished.

7



TRIM RING

WALL MIN 1”

WOOD OR

METAL STUD

BACKBOX

8



The MR-2320 Series panel comes pre-assembled with all components and boards except for adder modules.

Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 3 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wiring specifications.



(6 circuits)

JW4

JW7

JW5

JW6

X

M

?

AC ON

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT

RELEASED

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

PRE

RELEASE

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)



JW1

TO MR-2300-PR MODULE

JW2

TO MR-2306-R6 RELAY MODULE

P6

SIGNAL

POWER

RTI PORT UNFLTD SPLY

TRB TRL COM- COM+

P6

BATTERY

P5

SEC TX

Relay Module MR-2306-R6


(2 circuits)

Transformer

AC wiring terminal

BATTERY BATTERY

9



Modules

Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board

Figure 3: Main Control Board cable connector and jumper settings

JW3-Removed all the time

JW3

For front panel programming use CFG-300 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed. Please refer to Document LT-922 for details

JW5-Normally Open

JW6-Normally Open


Alarm Relay

Supervisory

Relay

JW4 -Normally Short

Auxiliary Relay

JW4

JW7

JW5

JW6

X

M

?

AC ON

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT

RELEASE

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

PRE

RELEASE

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)

Trouble Relay

JW1 - ON- when


Connect to

MR-2300-PR

Connect to

MR-2306-R6

Relay module

JW1


JW2


P3

SIGNAL

POWER


TRB TRL COM- COM+

P4

JW2 - ON- when



Power supply and control interface, including

AC power and battery supplies.

10



JW1 Remove this jumper if MR-2300-PR is connected.

P4

Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here.

Otherwise not used.

JW2 Remove this jumper if an MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module is used.


JW4 Normally short.

JW5

JW6

Normally open. Place jumper here and power down the panel (both AC power and batteries). Then power up the panel again, the password is restored to the default after system startup. Once the system has reset, REMOVE the jumper from the pins at JW5.

Leave normally open.

Normally open to BLOCK configuration via modem, PC with a UIMA converter module or a

CFG-300 Configuration Tool. Place jumper here to ALLOW any type of configuration.



mounting hole for

#6-32 screws


#6-32 screws




11


MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

OCAC-302

MR-2300-NC2 mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit

1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.


Relay Adder Module


Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module main fire alarm board

INDIVIDUAL GREEN


RELAY 1

NO/NC C

RELAY 2

NO/NC C

RELAY 3 RELAY 4

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 5 RELAY 6



The correlation of the relays are fixed and is as follows:

Active State

Relay1

Hazard 1

Alert

Relay2

Hazard 1

Alarm

Relay3

Hazard 1

Release

Relay4

Hazard 2

Alert

Relay5

Hazard 2

Alarm

Relay6

Hazard 2

Release

12




Mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

P1 P2

Mounting hole for

#6-32 screws



P1

JW1

JW2

Cable connects to P5 on the Main Board






City Tie Box will be retriggered. See configuration of Alarm Xmit-Sil on page for more information.

The Trouble Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to delay AC power fail for 0, 1 or 3 hours if this is the only system trouble. See Pwr Fail Dly Tmr configuration on page for more information.

13

Field Wiring

Field Wiring

Main Board Field Wiring

Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wire gauges and Appendix D on page 80 for specifications.

CAUTION: Do not exceed power supply ratings.


Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below. The panel supports Style B wiring for the initiating circuits and Style D wiring for the indicating circuits. The initiating circuits are supervised by a 3.9K

Ω EOL resistor or an active EOL module.

Figure 8: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B Wiring


INITIATING

CIRCUIT #1

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

STYLE B

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 1

ALARM ZONE

STYLE B

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 2

SUPERVISORY

ZONE

ION SMOKE

DETECTOR

PHOTO SMOKE

DETECTOR

HEAT

DETECTOR

PULL STATION

SUPERVISORY

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR





14

Figure 9: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D Wiring




INITIATING

CIRCUIT #1

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

4 MORE INITIATING


STYLE D

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 1

ALARM

ZONE

STYLE D

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 2

SUPERVISORY

ZONE

ION SMOKE

DETECTOR

PHOTO

SMOKE

DETECTOR

HEAT

DETECTOR


15

Field Wiring

Abort and Manual Release Switch Wiring

Wiring for the abort and manual release switches is shown in Figures 10 and 11 . Depending on the selected mode, the Abort and Manual release switches can either be on different circuits or they both can be on the same circuit.

When on separate circuits, DET5 is used for the Abort switch and DET6 is used for the manual release switch.

When on the same circuit, DET 5 Abort/Manual release combination is for hazard area 1, while DET6 Abort/Manual release combination is for hazard area 2. When an Abort/Manual release combination is used, ensure that the

Manual release switch is always before the Abort switch. Also ensure that there is a current limiting resistor (MP-

1500R/W) between the Manual release and Abort switch for differentiating between the two switches.

Figure 10: Abort and Manual Release Switch Class B or Style B Wiring

Abort and Manual Release switches on separate circuits


INITIATING

CIRCUIT #5

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #6

+

-

+

-

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

OR ELRX-300/R

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

OR ELRX-300/R

Abort and Manual Release switches on a combined circuit


INITIATING

CIRCUIT #5

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #6

+

-

+

-

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

OR ELRX-300/R

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

OR ELRX-300/R

MANUAL RELEASE

SWITCH

Use MS-403,404

USE ONLY NO

CONTACT

ABORT SWITCH

CCONNECT A UL/ULC LISTED ABORT STATION ACCEPTABLE TO

THE AHJ, COMPLYING WITH THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:

MAXIMUM IMPEDENCE = 1.4K OHMS

RATED CURRENT = 45mA

RATED VOLTAGE= 24V

Note: Maximum 4 Abort Switches can be connected on each combined Manual Release and

Abort Switch circuit.

Note: For the circuit with the combined Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch, a maximum of four Abort

Switches can be connected.

16


Figure 11: Abort and Manal Release Switch Class A or Style D Wiring



MR-2300-A

CLASS A

CONVERTER

MODULE

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #5

+

-

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #6

+

-



INITIATING

CIRCUIT #5

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #6

+

-

+

-

MR-2300-A

CLASS A

CONVERTER

MODULE

MANUAL RELEASE

SWITCH

USE MS-403,404

USE ONLY NO

CONTACT

ABORT SWITCH

CCONNECT A UL/ULC LISTED ABORT STATION

ACCEPTABLE TO THE AHJ, COMPLYING WITH THE

FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:



RATED VOLTAGE= 24V

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Note: Maximum 4 Abort

Switches can be connected on each combined Manual

Release and Abort Switch circuit.

17

Field Wiring



Each circuit is supervised by a 3.9K

Ω EOL resistor or active EOL module. Each indicating circuit provides up to 1.7

A, 5 A maximum total if no auxiliaries are used.


MR-2320 Panel

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #2

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT - 1

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT - 2



MR-2320 Panel

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT 1

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT 2

BELL STROBE

OCAC-302 CLASS A


HORN

18


Releasing Circuit Wiring

Wiring for the releasing circuit is shown in Figure 14 , below. SIG3 and SIG4 output circuits are reserved for the releasing circuits. Solenoid EOL module (MP-320R/W) is used to supervise the solenoid coil. If the solenoid is already fitted with the directional diode then only the 3.9K

Ω EOL resistor is used. The supervisory current passes through the solenoid coil thus confirming the integrity of the solenoid coil for open coil. The wiring is supervised for the open and short conditions.

Figure 14: Releasing Circuit Wiring


Releasing circuit #1


+

-

+

-

Solenoid EOL module

MP-320R/W

Solenoid EOL module

MP-320R/W

Solenoid Coil (See the listing for the approved solenoids)

Dialer Wiring

If you have an MR-2320-DR, there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 15 below.

Figure 15: Dialer Wiring

FIRE ALARM MAIN

BOARD

LINE-1

LINE-2

GREEN

RED

BROWN

GREY

1

RJ31X

2 3

4

8

7 6

5

TIP

RING

Public switch

Telephone company wiring

TIP

RING premise telephone

IF permitted


19

Field Wiring



LEGEND

+

-

+

-

POWER

+

-



22VDC, 200mA



(POWER LIMITED)

+

-

+

DETECTION


TO INITIATING

CIRCUIT

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

6

3

4

5

2

1

END OF LINE RELAY

LISTED S3403

MODEL A77-716B

MANUFACTURED BY

SYSTEM SENSOR

NOTES




CABLE


Wire relays on the relay adder module MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figure 17.


RELAY

CIRCUIT #1

RELAY

CIRCUIT #2

C

NO/NC

C

NO/NC

RELAY

CIRCUIT #6

C

NO/NC

NORMALLY OPEN

CONNECTION

NORMALLY CLOSE

CONNECTION

NORMALLY OPEN OR

NORMALLY CLOSED

CONNECTION IS

SELECTED BY JUMPER

ON RELAY BOARD.

ALL RELAY CONTACTS

28V DC, 1 AMP

RESISTIVE LOAD




20



Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 18 , below. See Appendix D on page 80 for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used.





+

-

+

-

+

CITY TIE LOCAL ENERGY

RATED - 24VDC FILTERED

TRIP COIL - 14 Ohms, 250mA,

5mV RIPPLE

POWER LIMITED

POLARITY REVERSAL ALARM

24VDC OPEN

12VDC AT 3.5mA

8mA MAX. SHORT

POWER LIMITED

POLARITY REVERSAL SUPV.

24VDC OPEN

12VDC AT 3.5mA

8mA MAX. SHORT

-

POWER LIMITED

1

2

S

1

2

S

1

2

S

1

2

S

PROTECTOR

1

2

S

+

-

USE A SHORTING WIRE

WHEN THE CITY TIE IS

NOT USED

1

2

+

-

S

CONFIRMS TO NEMA STANDARD

SB3-1969 INTENDED FOR

CONNECTION TO POLARITY

REVERSAL CIRCUIT OF A REMOTE

STATION RECEIVING UNIT HAVING

COMPATIBLE RATINGS

DIN RAIL CONNECTION

TO EARTH GROUND

PROCTECTOR

1

+

2

-

S

1

2

S

POWER LIMITED CABLE TYPE

FPL, FPLR or FPLP MUST BE

USED FROM PR-300 TO

PROTECTORS.

DIN RAIL CONNECTION

TO EARTH GROUND

21

Field Wiring

Power Supply Connection


Type


Rating

120 VAC 60Hz 1.7A /240 VAC 50 Hz 0.85 A, 10A slow blow fuse on secondary of transformer

6.5A AC maximim @ secondary of transformer Power supply total current



Wire the power supply as shown below in Figure 19 using the proper wire gauge.


Figure 19: Power Supply Connection

Deluge Panel Control Board

BUZZER

SILENCE

SPARE

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)

P6

Power Supply Control Board

P6

BATTERY

P5

10A slow blow red

+ red red

+ blk yellow red blk green

240 VAC 50Hz

120 VAC 60Hz

N

GND

BATTERY BATTERY

NOTE:

TO PREVENT SPARKING, CONNECT BATTERIES AFTER THE


22




Wire gauge

AWG

22

20

18

16

14

12


Feet

2990

4760

7560

12000

19000

30400

Meters

910

1450

2300

3600

5800

9200

Notes:






0.06

0.12

0.30

0.60

0.90

1.20

1.50

1.70

18 AWG

2350

1180

470

235

156

118

94

78

716

360

143

71

47

36

29

24


16 AWG

3750

1850

750

375

250

185

150

125

1143

567

229

114

76

56

46

38

14 AWG


6000

3000

1200

600

400

300

240

200

1829

915

366

183

122

91

73

61

Notes:



12 AWG

8500

4250

1900

850

570

425

343

285

2591

1296

579

259

174

129

105

87


30

15

6

3

2

1.5

1.2

1.0


Four-wire smoke power is provided for four-wire smoke detectors. This filtered supply is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power and the common trouble is active. The power is reconnected after the 'RESET' key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/300mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.


Supervised auxiliary power is used to power the remote annunciators and smart relay modules. This filtered circuit is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power and the common trouble is active. The power is reconnected after the 'RESET' key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/500mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.

23

Field Wiring


This regulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC FWR/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. This power supply must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.

24


System Checkout



AC supply.








The best way to check out a panel first is to not connect any field wiring. Power up the panel with an end of line. The panel should be free of trouble. Then connect one circuit at one time. If a trouble occurs, correct the fault then continue the field wiring.



8. Power up the panel. The "AC ON" green LED and the “Common Trouble” LED should illuminate, and the buzzer should sound. Press the “System Reset” button. Since the batteries are not connected, the trouble buzzer should sound intermittently and the common trouble LED should flash.


All indicators should be OFF except for normal power "AC ON" green LED and green LED I4 (below the

TROUBLE relay at left bottom of board).

Note: Green LED I4 is illuminated when the system is normal. This LED indicates that the trouble relay is in normal standby condition.


Troubleshooting

Symptoms

Circuit

Trouble

Remote

Trouble

Ground Fault

Battery

Trouble

Common

Trouble

Possible Cause

To correct the fault, check for open wiring on that particular circuit loop or if the Circuit

Disconnect Button is active. Notes: (1) Bypassing a detection circuit or signal circuit will cause a system trouble (off-normal status); (2) Bypassing a releasing circuit will cause a supervisory signal.

Remote Trouble will be indicated on the main panel display for any failure reported by, or failure to communicate with a remote annunciator or other remote device.







25





AC ON

X

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE M

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

?

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT

RELEASED

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

PRE

RELEASE

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)

The Main Display Panel on the Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board consists of:

• 16 common LED Indicators (left portion of display)

• Ten Common Buttons (left half portion of display)

• Up to six Initiating Circuit Alarm LEDs and six Initiating Circuit Trouble LED Indicators

• Four Indicating/Releasing Circuit LEDs (labeled NAC for Notifying Appliance Circuit or RAC for Releasing

Appliance Circuit)

• Up to ten disconnect buttons (six for initiating circuits & four for indicating/releasing circuits)

LED Indicators may be amber, red, or green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two flash rates.



Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is Secutron #ND-2056SEC.

Common LED indicators

AC ON

The AC ON led is on steady green while the main AC power is within acceptable levels. It is turned off when the level falls below the power-fail threshold.

26


COMMON ALARM

The common alarm led is illuminated steady red as a result of any active alarm present in the system

COMMON TROUBLE

The common trouble led in illuminated steady amber as a result of a trouble condition being detected on the system

BATTERY TROUBLE

Flashes amber at a slow rate, when the battery voltage is lower than the specified threshold or the battery is off line.

Flashes amber at a fast rate when there is a trouble on the battery charger circuit

REMOTE TROUBLE

Flashes amber at a slow rate as a result of any remote trouble condition

GROUND FAULT

Flashes amber at a slow rate when there is a ground fault detected in the system

CPU FAIL

Flashes amber at a slow rate when the CPU is not working properly

ABORT

Illuminate steady amber when the abort circuit is active

RELEASED

Illuminate steady red when the releasing circuit(s) is active

SYSTEM RESET

Turn on steady amber during the system reset process

SIGNAL SILENCE

Flashes amber at a slow rate when the signal circuits are silenced

AUXILIARY DISCONNECT

Flashes amber at a slow rate when the auxiliary disconnect function is active

LAMP TEST

Illuminate amber steady when the lamp test button is pressed

BUZZER SILENCE

Flashes amber at a slow rate when the buzzer is silenced

PRE RELEASE

Flashes red at a fast rate, when the release timer is started turns off when the release timer expires or the system is reset

27


Menu Buttons

To use the menu buttons you will need to install the CFG-300 configuration tool. See Using the CFG-300 Tool on page for details.

Menu Button

M

Pressing M and entering the passcode will allow you to enter the command menu.

Info Button

?

X

When the system is off-normal, press

?

to display extra information of the event.

Enter Button

Pressing this button to select a menu option or to confirm a menu operation.

Cancel Button

To return to previous menu in the configuration or command mode.

Switches and Common Indicators

The MR-2320 Series panel is a six-zone panel with four output circuits. The circuits are arranged in the following configuration:

Zone 1 Input circuit




Zone 5 Manual Release/Abort switches combination or individual switch


Out 1

Out 2

NAC1

NAC2

Out 3

Out 4

Releasing circuit 1

Releasing circuit 2 or NAC3 in some applications

Zone 1 to Zone 4

• Alarm LED (red) turns on steady when an alarm is detected

• Supervisory LED (amber) turns on steady when the circuit is active

• Trouble LED (amber) turns on at slow flash rate when in trouble or bypassed

Zone 5 and Zone 6

• Alarm LED & Trouble LED The zone type and LED behavior varies upon the configuration. Steady when turned on.

Out1 and Out2 (NAC circuits)


Out3 and Out4 (Releasing circuits)

• Trouble LED (amber) turns on steady when the circuit is bypassed turns on at slow flash rate when in trouble

Input Circuits Bypass Switch

These bypass switches are used to bypass the input circuit. Bypass is a toggle switch which will bypass and unbypass in a sequence whenever the switch is pressed. When the input circuit is bypassed a trouble is generated and the system will not respond to any trouble or alarm on the bypassed input circuit. If the bypassed input circuit is active and the Bypass Switch is pressed for un-bypassing, the Alarm LED will flash at the fast rate for 10 seconds.

During these 10 seconds, pressing the Bypass Switch can bypass the active input circuit again. After 10 seconds, the bypassed alarm will be processed.

28


Output Circuits Bypass Switch

The output circuit bypass switches bypasses the NAC circuit and the releasing circuit. The switch is a toggle switch and pressing it again, will un-bypasses the output circuit the trouble LED turns off.

Common Controls




• Resets all Initiating and Releasing Circuits



• Turns off Signal Silence Indicator





Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm turns on the Signal Silence indicator and deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits. Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will re-sound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence Inhibit Timer period.








Circuit (Zone) Disconnect pushbuttons are provided for all initiating indicating, and releasing circuits on the Fire

Alarm Control Panel. These pushbuttons are located beside their respective indicating LED.

Pressing a Circuit Disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated circuit and turns on its Trouble Indicator, activating Common Trouble. Pressing a releasing circuit disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated releasing circuit and turns on its LED, activating common supervisory. While a Circuit is disconnected, all changes in status

(alarms and troubles) on that circuit are ignored. The panel does not activate disconnected indicating circuits.

Circuit Disconnect pushbuttons are toggle switches; therefore, pressing an activated switch a second time will unbypass (reconnect) the circuit.




29


When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to unbypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active, the Status Indicator flashes for 10 seconds at the Fast Rate without processing the input. If the Circuit is not re-bypassed by then, it will be processed as a new input.

Common Relays

Relay Type

Trouble Relay

Supervisory Relay

Alarm Relay

Aux Alarm Relay

Single Hazard

Trouble

Supervisory

Alarm

Alarm (Silence-able)

Dual Hazard

Trouble

Supervisory

Hazard1 (Alarm)

Hazard2 (Alarm)

Note: Some troubles are latching once they are detected they remain active until system reset. In this case the common trouble indicator will also remain active until system reset. The common trouble is not bypassed by the auxiliary disconnect function.

Circuit Types






Water Flow Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms except that any indicating circuits programmed to these circuits (all are by default) are Non-Silenceable. Also, if Water Flow Retard Operation is enabled, these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Water flow Alarm is confirmed and processed. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm

LED to illuminate red.

Note: Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed

120 seconds.


Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate.

The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will clear (as long as there are no other Supervisory conditions in the system) and the Circuit Status LED will turn off.



The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will NOT clear.

Abort Switch

When the hazard area is in alarm (pre-discharge) state and the release timer is running, the activation of the corresponding Abort Switch will pause the releasing timer. The release process is held while the Abort Switch is pressed. Releasing the Abort Switch will resume the releasing timer and the corresponding hazard area goes into

Alarm (pre-discharge) state again. The value of the release timer after Abort Switch is released depends on the type

30

MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual of Abort Delay in the configuration. When the release timer expires, the corresponding releasing circuit is activated.

When the panel is in normal condition, activation of the Abort Switch will cause a trouble signal and the corresponding zone amber LED turns on at slow flash rate.

Manual Release Switch

Activation of the Manual Release Switch of a hazard area will activate the corresponding releasing circuit. If the corresponding Manual Release Delay is non-zero, the releasing circuit will be activate after the Manual Release

Delay expires.

Combination of Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch

This type of circuit is the combination of both Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch. This combination always applies to the same hazard area. A short condition on the circuit is a Manual Release Active and a current limit condition is an Abort Switch Active.



The Silenceable Signal circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may be silenced either manually or automatically.


The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the evacuation code pattern that is configured by the user. For more information on evacuation codes, refer to Evacuation Codes on page.


Silenceable strobes will be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed.


Non-Silenceable Strobes will not be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed.


Continuous

Temporal Code

20 BPM

60 BPM

120 BPM

On 100% of the time

3 of 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off then, 1.5 second pause

1.5 seconds on, 1.5 seconds off

0.5 second on, 0.5 second off



0.5s

0.5s

1.5s

1.5s

CONTINUOUS

1.5s

TEMPORAL CODE

20 BPM

0.5s

0.5s

0.25s

0.25s

60 BPM

120 BPM

31

Configuration

Configuration

Configure the MR-2320 Series Panels using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with

CFG-300 for configuration information).

Using the CFG-300 Tool

Connect the CFG-300 to the panel, then press M (Menu button). The CFG-300 LCD display will display the Main

Menu. The function of different buttons on the front panel display is shown in Figure 22, below.


AC ON

X

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

M COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

?

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT

RELEASED

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)


0

QZ

1

2

ABC

3

DEF

4

GHI

5

JKL

*

(left shift)

#

(right shift)

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

PRE

RELEASE

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)

6

MNO

7

PRS

8

TUV

9

WXY

32



The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press

(Enter button) after entering the passcode. If the passcode is correct, it will take you to the main command menu. If the passcode is wrong the system will ask you to re-enter passcode. The system will be exhausted after three retries and will then take you back to the Normal message display.

Enter passcode:

_

Three leves of access are defined:

1) Command - Level 0:

The default password is for this level “1111” without quotes. In this level the user can only perform regular testing and operation.

2) Configuration - Level 1:

The default password is for this level “2222” without quotes. User can change configuration and have access to command level.

3) Factory - Level 2:

Currently not used.

When the user presses “MENU” and enters the passsword, they should enter the password of the level intended. If the user is in a lower level of access, attempts to operate functions requiring a higher level of access will be refused.

33

Configuration


1. Press M (Menu button). You will be prompted to enter your password.

2. Enter your password, then press (Enter button) to continue.

3. Select a Command Menu option by pressing . The corresponding submenu will display.


5. Press to select a submenu option.

6. Use the left or right arrow buttons to select/unselect an option (selected = “X”). Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the different menu options. When entering numerical data, use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the number.

7. Once you have made the correct selection, press submenu screen.

8. Press X

to confirm the change. The display will return to the

(Cancel button) to return to the previous menu.

Command Menu

The main command menu is pictured below. The first line of the LCD will always show “-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press the key to make a selection. To exit from the main command menu, select the “Exit” menu option and then press either the X or key.

Note: Command Menu Item 1 and 6 can only be accessed if jumper JW6 is placed on the main board.


MR-2320 Mode-1 DACT

Version 0.1.17

The first line shows the panel mode number, pre-programmed mode and the information if the panel has a dialer or not. The second line shows the software version number. The version of the software is read as

Major.Minor.Revision.

-Command Menu-

1. Panel Config

2. Set Time

3. Set Password

4. View EventLog

5. Clear Event Log

6. Dialer Config

7. Test Dialer

8. Exit

Access level Required

Configuration

Configuration

Configuration

Command

Command

Configuration

Command

Command

34


1. Panel Config (Command-Menu)


Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.

-P a ne l Co n fig -

1 . C h o o se a m o d e

2 . H a za r d C o nfig

3 . P a ne l Fea tu res

4. Default Config

Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Choose a mode

Command Menu-->Panel Config-->

Choose a mode

1. Choose a mode

Choose a mode:

1

1-->Default

Use this function to choose a pre-programmed panel configuration.

Selections range from modes 1 to 11. Refer to Pre-Programming

Modes on page for details on mode configurations.

Note: changing the fixed configuration of the panel will cause all configuration data set to default for that particular mode.

35

Configuration

Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Hazard Config

-Hazard Param.-

1. Release timer

2. Abort Delay

3. Manual Rls Delay

4. Soak timer



Hazard Config

1. Release Timer

Release timer(sec):

60


Hazard Config

2. Abort Delay

Abort Delay Type:

[X] Standard UL


Hazard Config

3. Man. Rls Delay

Man. Rls Delay(sec):

0

60->Default

Available options:

0,5,10,15,20,25,30,35,40,

45,50,55,60 seconds

[X] Standard UL->Default

[ ] IRI

[ ] NYC

[ ] Local Juris.

0->Default

Available options:

0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds

Use this function to set the programmable timer that delays the activation of the releasing application circuits.

This timer starts immediately after receiving a confirming alarm (cross-zoned hazard area) or a single alarm (noncross-zoned hazard area).

When the timer expires, the releasing circuit activates.

Value: 0 to 60 seconds in fivesecond increments.

Use this function to set how the

Abort Switch operates with the

Release Timer.

Note that if the Release Timer is set to zero, the Abort Switch does not operate.

In Standard UL mode, the release timer will stop and hold when the Abort Switch is pressed. When the switch is released, the Release Timer restarts from whichever is greater: the remaining time on the timer or 10 seconds.

In IRI mode, the switch works in the same way as it does in

Standard UL mode, except that the switch will function only if it is pressed and held before the second alarm comes in.

In NYC mode, pressing the

Abort Switch will reset to the

Release Timer and add 90 seconds to the configured timer duration. After the Abort Switch is released, the Release Timer will restart.

In Local Juris. (Local

Jurisdiction Delay), pressing the

Abort Switch will reset the

Release Timer back to its configured value. After the switch is released, the Release

Timer will restart.

Use this function to set the time delay of activation of corresponding releasing circuit(s) after activation of the manual release switch.


36



Hazard Config

4. Soak timer

Soak timer(sec):

0

0->Default (continuous)

The selectable values are in seconds: 0, 10, 20, 30,

40, 50, 60, 120(2min),

180(3min), 240(4min),

300(5min), 360(6min),

420(7min), 480(8min),

540(9min), 600(10min),

660(11min), 720(12min),

780(13min), 840(14min),

900(15min)

Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features

Use this function to set the length of time for which the releasing circuit is active. When the soak timer expires, the control panel automatically shuts off the activated releasing circuit.

0 seconds means that the soak timer is disabled and the releasing circuit is active continuously.

-Panel Features-

1. Man. Sig. Sil

2. Wtr/Sprk. Retd

3. Aux Dis Corr

4. Sig-Sil Inh Tm

5. Aux Dis Alm&Sv

6. Auto Sil. Tmr

7. Rem. Annun.

8. Alm. Xmit. Sil.

9. Pwr Fail Tmr.

10. Com. Supv. Rly

11. Sig. Sil. Isol.

12. 1st Alarm Code

13. 2nd Alarm Code

14. Supv. Latching

15. Supv on NAC-2

16. Sig-Sil NAC


Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features

1. Manual Sig. Silence

Man. Sig. Sil.

[X] ENABLE


[ ] DISABLE

Use this function to enable or disable the Signal Silence operation on the panel.

37

Configuration


2. Wtr/Sprk. Retd

Waterflow/Sprk Retd

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE



3. Aux Dis Corr

Aux Dis. Dis Corr

[X] ENABLE


[ ] DISABLE


4. Sig-Sil Inh Tmr

Sig-Sil. Inhibit Timer

[X] DISABLE


[ ] 10sec

[ ] 20sec

[ ] 30sec

[ ] 1min


5. Aux. Dis. Dis Alam&Sv

Aux Dis. Dis Alm&Sv

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE



6. Auto Sig-Sil. Tmr

Auto Sig-Sil. Tmr

[X] DISABLE


[ ] 5 Min

[ ] 10 Min

[ ] 20 Min

[ ] 30 Min


7. Rem. Annun.

No. of Remote Annun.

[X] NONE

[X] NONE->Default

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

...

[ ] 6


8. Alarm Xmit-Sil.

Alm Xmit-Sil.

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE


By default all the initiating circuits configured as waterflow or sprinkler act as non-verified alarms. If enabled, a retard operation is performed for initiating circuits configured as waterflow or sprinkler.

By default this function will disconnect the auxiliary alarm relay when the aux disconnect button is pressed. If enabled, this function will disconnect the auxiliary alarm relay and all correlated relays when the aux disconnect button is pressed.


MR-2306-R6 and MR-2312-

S12.

Use this function to inhibit the signal silence switch for a desired length of time. The time period should expire before the signals may be silenced.



If enabled the Common Alarm and Common Supervisory relays will be disconnected when Aux. Disconnect is pressed. Also, the MR-2300-PR will not transmit a supervisory or alarm event.If disabled, the Aux disconnect switch has no effect on the Common Alarm relay, the

Common Supervisory relay, and the MR-2300-PR.

Use this function to set the time period for which the indicating circuits will sound before they are automatically silenced.


National Building Code, this timer should not be set to less than 20 minutes.



Use this function to allow the alarm transmit and auxiliary alarm relay to reset on the

Signal Silence rather than the

Reset switch.

38



9. Pwr Fail Tmr

AC Pwr Fail Dly Tmr.

[X] None

[X] NONE->Default

[ ] 1 HRS

[ ] 3 HRS


10. Com. Supv. Rly

Common Supv. Relay

[X] ENABLE

[X] ENABLE->Default

[ ] DISABLE


11. Sig-Sil. Isol.

Sig-Sil. Isol.

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE



12.1st Alarm NAC Code

1st Alarm NAC Code

[X] Temporal

[X] Temporal ->Default

[ ] 20 BPM


13. 2nd Alarm NAC Code

2nd Alarm NAC Code

[X] 120 BPM

[X] 120 BPM->Default

[ ] 60 BPM

[ ] Temporal

Use this function to delay the reporting of AC power fail trouble for a specific time period. If disabled, the AC power fail will be reported immediately.

If disabled, the common supervisory relay can be used as a common alarm relay. It will act the same way as a common alarm relay. If enabled, it is used as a common supervisory relay.

Enable this function only when suite isolators are used (Canada only).

Sets the NAC indicating code when the 1st alarm comes in.

Choose the NAC indicating code when the 2nd alarm comes in.


14.Supv. Latching

Supervisory Latching

[X] Non-latching

[ ] Latching

[X] Non-latching->Default

Use this function to set the supervisory circuit as either latching or non-latching.

NOTE: For ULC operation the supervisory should be programmed as latching


15. Supv on NAC-2

Supv. Alert on NAC-2

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE


Use this function to enable/ disable the supervisory circuit indication on NAC-2.


16. Sig-Sil NAC

Silenceable NAC

[X] NAC-1

[X] NAC-1->Default

[X] NAC-2->Default

Use this function to set which

NAC circuits are silenceable or non-silenceable.

39

Configuration

Command Menu/MR-2320 Config/Features/

17. Active EOL

Active EOL

[X] DISABLE


[ ] ENABLE




EOL resistors.

Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.

Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Default Config


Default Config

4. Default Config

Y-->Default

Load the default

Settings? Y

Use this function to reset the panel to the default configuration of the chosen programming mode.

40




1. Daylight Save

2. Time Clock

3. Compensation


1. Daylight saving time

Daylight Saving

[X] DISABLE


2. Set time and date

HH:MM WKD YYYY-MM-DD

00:00 MON 2000-01-01


[ ] ENABLE


Default

00:00 MON 2000-01-01





2. Compensation


0 0 : 0 0 M O N 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1


Default: 0 seconds

(no compensation)

Compensation values can range from -15 to

+15 seconds.



Daily Compen. (Sec):

Panel Config Updated

41

Configuration

3. Set password (Command-Menu)


First choose the level of password to be changed

Select Access Level

0

Then

Enter new passcode:

Re-enter new passcode:


0 -> Default invalid passcode


If the passcode is OK the following message appears and exits to the main menu passcode updated

The user can change the password only for the current access level as well as any lower levels.

42





ZONE

Message

Process

Type

Physical

Zone No.

Zone-1

OPEN TRB 01/09

EVENT type

EVENT

01 of 09

"INFO" Key

DATE

NVERIF ALARM Z -01

11:45 THU 2005-3-31

TIME




-Select Log-

1. Alarm Log

2. General Log

3. All Logs



Clear all the

Selected log(s)? Y




Log(s) cleared

43

Configuration




-Dialer Config-

1. Account Info

2. Telephone line

3. Report Options

4. Time Parameter

5. Enable/Disable


Account Info

-Account Info-

1. Account#1 ID

2. Account#1 Tel

3. Accnt#1 Format

4. Account#2 ID

5. Account#2 Tel

6. Accnt#2 Format



Account#1 ID

123456

123456->Default



If you are using contact ID the allowed digits for the account

ID are simple digits 0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F (the



44




Account#1 Telnum:

101

[101]->Default





# is 9,,12345678.



ACCOUNT#1 Format:

[X] CONTACT ID


[ ] SIA 300 Baud

[ ] SIA 110 Baud




ACCOUNT#2 ID:

654321

654321->Default



ACCOUNT#2 Telnum:

101

[ 101 ]->Default

Same as Account#1.

Same as Account#1.



ACCOUNT#2 Format:

[X] CONTACT ID


[ ] SIA 300 Baud

[ ] SIA 110 Baud

Same as Account#1.


45

Configuration



Telephone Line

-Telephone Line-

1. Line1 Dialtype

2. Line2 Dialtype

3. Line1 Dialtone

4. Line2 Dialtone

5. Num of Retries


Line


Line#1 Dialing Type:

[X] DTMF Dial


[ ] Pulse Dial



Line



[X] DTMF Dial


Line


Line#1 Wait Dialtone

[X] ENABLE


Line



[X] ENABLE


[ ] Pulse Dial

Same as Line#1.


[ ] DISABLE



[ ] DISABLE

Same as Line#1.

46



Line


Number of Retries:

06

06 ->Default

Number of retries ranges between 5 to 10




Report Options

-Report Options-

1. Alarm Prio.

2. Trouble Prio.

3. Supv. Prio

4. Aux Dis Report


Options

1. Alarm Report priority

Alarm Report Prio:

[X] Account 1


Options


Trouble Report Prio:

[X] Account 1


Options

3. Supervisory priority

SUPV Report Prio:

[X] Account 1


[ ] Account 2



[ ] Account 2



[ ] Account 2


47

Configuration


Options

4. Aux Disc Alm/Supv Rpt.

AuxDis Alm/Supv Rpt.

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE








Time Parameters

-Time Parameter-

1. AC-Loss Delay

2. Cellphone Date

3. Auto-Test Time


Parameter

1. AC Loss delay

AC-Loss Delay(Hrs)

0


Parameter

2. Cellular report date

Cellular Report Date

0


Parameter

3. Auto test time

Auto-Test (HH:MM):

00:30

0 ->Default

The AC loss delay ranges from 0 to 20 hours

Use this function to delay the reporting of AC loss trouble on the dialer for the programmed time period. Press UP or

DOWN button to increase or decrease the number of hours.

0 ->Default

The cellular report date ranges from 0 to

28

00:30 ->Default


Other settings could be anywhere from 01-28, representing which day of the month the test should be performed. Press the UP or

DOWN buttons to scroll through the days.


00:30 is 30 minutes after midnight. Press the UP or DOWN buttons to increase or decrease the time.


01:55, 02:00 and 03:00.

48





Dialer Ena/Dis

[X] ENABLE

------WARNING-----

Dialer Disabled!!!


[ ] DISABLE




-Dialer Test-

1. L#1 Manual test

2. L#2 Manual test

3. Reset Dialer

L#1 Manual test

L#2 Manual test

3. Reset Dialer








49

Configuration



Dialer idle now The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This message automatically displays when Manual

Test is selected.

No DC Volt


Waiting for Dialtone


Failed: No Dialtone

Dialing Receiver Now



No DTMF tone

Waiting for Acktone

Failed no Acktone

Reporting Event Now

Waiting for Kissoff


Waiting for availability of the receiver. The receiver confirms the availability by sending an ack tone.





50


No Kissoff


Passed: Manual Test




51

Operating the Panel

Operating the Panel

Panel Operation During Various Hazard States

The escalating hazard zone states include Idle, Alert, Alarm and Release. They are defined based on the status of

Hazard Area input zone(s), correlated Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch.

Hazard Idle

• No correlated alarm zone active.

• Release Timer is not started.

• Manual Release Delay Timer is not started.

• Abort Switch is off.

• Manual Release Switch is off.

• Corresponding NAC circuit is off.

• Releasing circuit(s) is off.

Hazard Alert (or equivalently first Alarm in Cross-zoned Application)

• The panel enters the Hazard Alert state when

• a single alarm comes in for a cross-zoned hazard. For non cross-zoned hazard area, a single alarm will put hazard into Hazard Alarm state directly.

• the Abort Switch becomes active during Hazard Alarm state, so that the hazard area state downgrades from

Hazard Alarm to Hazard Alert.



• Correlated NAC circuit(s) turns on at alert rate.

Hazard Alarm (pre-discharge, or equivalently second Alarm in Cross-zoned Application)

• The panel enters the Hazard Alarm state when

• it detects the confirming alarm for hazard area (single alarm active for the non cross-zoned system, or 2nd alarm active in the cross-zoned system), or

• Manual Release Switch is active.

• Release Timer (RT) is started when the panel enters Hazard Alarm state after by detecting the 2nd alarm in cross-zoned hazard or 1st alarm in non cross-zoned hazard.

• Manual Release Delay Timer is started when the panel enters Hazard Alarm state by detecting the correlated

Manual Release Switch active.

• Releasing circuit(s) will be activated after the Release Timer or Manual Release Timer expires.

• Corresponding NAC(s) turns on at alarm rate.

• During Hazard Alarm State, when the release timer is running and the Abort Switch turns on, the hazard area state will change from Hazard Alarm to Hazard Alert. Release Timer is held and the corresponding NAC sounds the Alert rate. If the Abort Switch is released, the hazard state will go back to Hazard Alarm and the Release

Timer resumes running. The value of release timer depends on Abort Delay Type. The corresponding NAC sounds Alarm rate again.

Hazard Release

• Panel enters Hazard Release when the Release Timer or Manual Release Timer expires. The correlated releasing circuit is activated.

• NAC code for Hazard Release state is steady.

52


General Panel Operation

• Activation of Manual Release Switch starts the Manual Release Delay Timer. The expiration of Manual-release

Delay Timer (MDT) activates the releasing circuits consequently. Manual Release Switch overrides the Abort

Switch always and Manual-release Timer (MDT) always overrides Release Timer (RT).

• When the manual release switch is active and the panel is in the Hazard Alarm (pre-discharge) state, Abort

Switch cannot override the Manual Release Switch. Only the System Reset key can interrupt and reset the panel and hazard area.

• System Reset will reset all circuits, including releasing circuits.

• The supervisory circuit can be optionally indicated on NAC-2 circuit. The NAC code of supervisory circuit should be different from those of Hazard Alert or Hazard Alarm. By default, when the NAC code for Hazard Alert is

Temporal, the NAC code for supervisory circuit is 20 BPM or verse visa. This configuration change is automatically done by the panel. If NAC code for alert is chosen other than 20 BPM and Temporal, Supervisory

NAC code will remain unchanged during the configuration.

• In some pre-programmed modes, the Alert Rate and the Alarm Rate are configured the same. So the action of

Abort Switch does not change the NAC rate.

• AB/MR is the combination of Manual Release Switch and Abort Switch in the Agent Release panel. Short condition means Manual Release active. Current Limit means Abort Switch active.

• To avoid the conflict of different NAC code on the same circuit, the priority of signals are defined as, Water-flow alarm has the highest priority, then hazard cadence. The supervisory signal has the lowest priority.

• Soak Timer sets the time period how long the releasing circuits should be active. Upon the expiration of soak timer, the releasing circuits will be shut off. Setting of 0 second means the releasing circuits will be turned on without timer running. They will be shut off upon system reset.

• Abort function is not applicable in pre-action and deluge application.

53

Pre-Programmed Modes

Pre-Programmed Modes

Mode 1: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release

Detection Zones Phantom Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Zp1 Zp2

Release Timers

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp

Out1 Signal Steady

Out2 Signal Escalating

Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing

RLS TMR 1 Started

RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted

RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled

RLS Tmr 2 Started



Alm Alm WF Sup AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4

X X X X

X (X) X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Zone Configuration

• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area1, Cross-zoned)


• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Pressure Switch or Water-flow)

• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (Non-latching by default)

• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch

• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release Switch

• NAC-1: Signal, will be on steady if there is any alarm zone or manual release switch active.

• NAC-2: Signal, indicates the cadence of hazard area 1 state or supervisory circuit (optional).

• RAC-1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)


Hazard Configuration

• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds

• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.

• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.

• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds

54


NAC Configuration

• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:

• Hazard Idle: Off

• Hazard Alert: Temporal

• Hazard Alarm: 120 BPM

• Hazard Release: Steady

• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.

How the Panel Works in Mode 1

•

• Activation of either Z-1or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Idle into Alert. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.

• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change the Hazard Area1 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on steady.

NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM. Release timer-1 (RT-1) is started.

• Expiration of Release Timer-1 change Hazard Area 1 state to Release. Both RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on. NAC-2 sounds steady.

• Activation of Z-6 in any situation changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on steady, NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM. The manual release delay timer 1 (MDT-1) is started. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, Hazard

Area 1 state changes to Release. RAC-1 and RAC-2 are activated. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turns on steady.

• When Hazard Area 1 state is in Alarm, if Z-5 is pressed, Release Timer-1 is held and NAC-2 rate changes from

120BPM to Temporal. After releasing of Z-5, Release Timer-1 resumes running and NAC-2 goes back to

120BPM. Release Timer -1 value depends on Abort Delay Type.

• Activation of Z-3 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 on steady.

• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20BPM, if enabled.

55


Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release

Detection Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6

Phantom Zones

Zp1 Zp2

Release Timers

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing








X X X X

X (X) X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X


• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)


• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Water-flow or pressure switch)

• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (default non-latching)


• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release














• Hazard Alarm: Temporal


• Default NAC code of Supervisory Signal is 20 BPM.

56



• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady.

• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes the Hazard Area 1 state from Idle into Alarm directly. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 turns on Temporal. Release Timer-1 is started.

• Expiration of Release Timer-1 activates both RAC-1 and RAC-2. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on steady.

• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual-release Timer 1 (MDT-1) in any situation. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 turns on Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on.

• During Hazard Alarm state, if Z-5 is pressed, Release Timer-1 is held. After releasing of Z-5, Release Timer-1 resumes running and Release Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.



57


Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







Z1 Z2

Detection Zones

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6

Phantom Zones Release Timers

Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp

Alm Alm Alm Alm AB/MR AB/MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4

X X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X


• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, Cross-zoned)




• Detection Zone -5: Abort/Manual Release Combination (Hazard Area 1)


• NAC -1: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 state


• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)








Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:





58



• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area1 state from Idle into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.

• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area1 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on at 120BPM.

Release timer-1 is started.

• Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, RAC-1 is activated. NAC-1 turns on steady.

• Short on Z-5 indicates Manual Release Switch active. Manual Release Delay Timer 1 (MDT-1) is started. NAC-

1 turns on at 120 BPM while this timer is running. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-1 turns on steady and

RAC-1 is activated.

• A current limit on Z-5 means Abort Switch active. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Alarm to Alert. Release

Timer is held and NAC-1 changes from 120BPM to Temporal.

• Removal of the current limit on Z-5 means that Abort Switch is released. Hazard Area 1 state changes from

Alert to Alarm. Release Timer -1 resumes running and NAC-1 goes back to 120BPM. Release Timer-1 value depends on Abort Delay Type.

• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state from Idle into Alert. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.

• Activations of both Z-3 and Z-4 turn the Hazard Area 2 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM.



• Short on Z-6 indicates Manual Release Switch active. Manual Release Delay Timer - 2(MDT-2) is started. NAC-


RAC-2 is activated


Timer -2 is held and NAC-2 changes from 120BPM to Temporal.

• Removal of the current limit on Z-6 means Abort Switch is released. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Alert to

Alarm. Release Timer -2 resumes running and NAC-2 goes back to 120BPM. Release Timer-2 value depends on Abort Delay Type.

59


Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







Z1 Z2

Detection Zones

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp


X X X

X X X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X X

X

X






• Detection Zone -5: Abort/Manual Release Combination (hazard 1)

















• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area1 state from Idle to Alarm. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.

Release Timer-1 is started.

60


• Upon expiration of Release Timer-1. RAC-1 is activated. NAC-1 turns on Steady.

• A current limit on Z-5 means Abort Switch active. Release Timer-1 is held. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.

Removal of the current limit on Z-5 means that Abort Switch is released. Release Timer -1 resumes. Release

Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.

• Short on Z-5 indicates Manual Release active. Manual Release Delay Timer - 1 (MDT-1) is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-1 turns on steady and RAC-1 is activated.

• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 turns the Hazard Area 2 state from Idle into Alarm. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.


• Upon expiration of Release Timer-2, RAC-2 is activated. NAC-2 turns on steady.

• A current limit on Z-6 means Abort Switch active. Release Timer -2 is held. Removal of the current limit on Z-6, means releasing Abort Switch. Release Timer -2 resumes running. Release Timer 2 value depends on Abort

Delay Type.

• Short on Z-6 indicates Manual Release active and Manual Release Delay Timer - 2(MDT-2) is started. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-2, NAC-2 turns on steady and RAC-2 is activated.

61


Mode 5: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing




Detection Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5

Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv

X X X X

(X)

Z6

WF

X

X

Phantom Zones

Zp1

Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4

RT1 Exp

X

X

X

62


• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)




• Detection Zone -5: Supervisory

• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow Alarm.

• NAC -1: Signal, will be activated if there is any alarm zone active.

• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 status, Supervisory Optional.





• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds (not used)

• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL (not used)

• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)









• Activation of Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 1 state from Idle to Alert. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 sounds Temporal.

• Activations of any two of Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 and Z-4 change Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. NAC-2 turns on at 120 BPM. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, both RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on.

NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on Steady

• Activation of Z-6 turns on both NAC-1 and NAC-2 steady.

• Activation of Z-5 is indicated on NAC-2 at 20 BPM, if configured.


Mode 6: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing




Detection Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5


X X X X

(X)

X X X X

Z6

WF

X

Phantom Zones

Zp1

Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4

RT1 Exp

X

X







• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow.

• NAC -1: Signal, steady on any alarm.

• NAC -2: Supervisory optional.
















• Activation of any one among Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 and Z-4 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, NAC-1 turns on steady. RAC-1 and RAC-2 are activated.

• Activation of Z-5 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20 BPM, if configured.

• Activation of Z-6 turns NAC-1 steady.

63


Mode 7: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







Detection Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5


Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp

WF Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4

X X

X X

X

X

X

X








• NAC -1: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 status













• Hazard Alarm: 120BPM



64



• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.

• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1 turns on steady.


• Activations of both Z-3 and Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state into Alarm. Release Timer 2 is started. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 2, RAC-2 is active. NAC-2 turns on steady.

• Activation of Z-6 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 steady.

• Activation of Z-5 can be indicated on NAC-2, if enabled.

65


Mode 8: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release

Detection Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp

Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv

X X

X X

WF

X

X

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







X X

X X

X

X










• RAC 1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)














66



• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer 1 is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1 turns on steady.

• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state into Alarm. Release Timer 2 is started. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal. Upon expiration of Release Timer 2, RAC-2 is active. NAC-2 turns on steady.



67


Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, NYC abort

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Releasing

Out4 Strobe Steady







Z1 Z2

Detection Zones

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp

Alm Alm WF Supv AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4

X

X

X

(X) X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X








• NAC-1: Escalating Signal, indicate Hazard Area 1 status.

• NAC-2: Escalating Signal, indicate Hazard Area 1 status, Supervisory Optional.


• NAC-3: Silenceable Strobe.



• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds

• Default Abort Delay Type: NYC





• Hazard Alert: Steady



• Default NAC code of supervisory is 20 BPM

68



• The activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady.

• The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 120BPM. Hazard Area 1 state changes to Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started.

• Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1, NAC-2 and NAC-3 turn on steady.

• If Abort Switch Z-5 is active when Release Timer-1 is running, Hazard Area 1 state changes to Alert. NAC-2 turns off and NAC-1 turns on Steady. Release Timer-1 is held.

• If Abort Switch Z-5 is released, NAC-1 turns off and NAC-2 turns on 120BPM. Release Timer resumes running.

Release Timer-1's value depends on Abort Delay Type.

• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Timer 1 (MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-2 and NAC-3 turn on steady. RAC-1 is active.

• Activation of Z-4 is indicated at 20BPM on NAC-2, if configured.

69



Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







Z1 Z2

Detection Zones

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp


X X X X

X (X) X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area1, not cross-zoned)






• NAC -1: Signal, will be activated steady when there is any alarm zone active.

• NAC -2: Signal, indicate the Hazard Area1 status.

• RAC 1: Releasing Circuit

• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit





• Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)




• Hazard Alert: 20BPM



• Default NAC code of supervisory is Temporal

70




• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started.


• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Delay Timer -1(MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, both RAC-1 and

RAC-2 are active. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on steady.

• If Z-5 is active, Release Timer-1 is held and NAC-2 is downgraded from 60BPM to 20 BPM.

• Releasing of Z-5 resumes Release Timer-1 and NAC-2 goes back to 60BPM. Release Timer-1's value depends on Abort Delay Type.


• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at Temporal, if configured.

71



Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







Z1 Z2

Detection Zones

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp


X

X (X) X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area1, cross-zoned)



• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (Default non-latching)



















72




• The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started.

• Expiration of Release Timer-1 results in the activation of RAC-1 and RAC-2. NAC-2 turns on steady.

• If Z-5 is active, when the Release Timer-1 is running, NAC-2 turns off and NAC-1 turns on Steady. The Release

Timer is held.

• If Z-5 is released, NAC-1 turns off and NAC-2 turns on 60BPM. Release Timer-1 resumes running. Release


• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Delay Timer-1(MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, RAC-1 and

RAC-2 are active. NAC-2 turns on steady.

• Activation of Z-3 turns NAC-2 on steady.

• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20BPM, if configured.

73



The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR):














74

Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices


series supported synchronous horn/strobe (UL and ULC listed)

Horn/Strobes

Maximum # of Devices

Secutron

MRA-HS3-24ww 8

Amseco/Potter

FHS-240-110 9

System Sensor

P1224MC

Wheelock

NS-24MCW-FW

5

13

MR-2320 series supported synchronous module (UL and ULC listed)

Sync Modules

Secutron

AVS44R

Amseco/Potter

SDM-240

System Sensor

MDL

Wheelock

DSM 12/24

75

Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices

MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (ULC listed)

Make Model/Base

System Sensor

1400A

2400A

1451/B401B

2451/B401B

MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (UL listed)

Make Model/Base

System Sensor

1400

2400

1451/B401B

2451/B401B

Compatibility Identifier head/base

A- N/A

A-N/A

A-A

A-A

Rated standby current

(mA)

0.10

0.12

0.12

0.12

MR-2320 series compatible solenoids

ASCO 8210 series

T8210A107 24VDC

R8210A107 24VDC

8210A107 24VDC

76


Appendix C: Reporting












NORMAL)

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

Test


Zone Fire Alarm



Test

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble



Trouble

Supervisory


Waterflow Alarm

Waterflow restored



AC power lost

AC power restored

Battery Low


Ground Fault


Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Restore 3 113

New event 1 320

Restore 3 320

New event 1 301

Restore 3 301

New event 1 302

Restore 3 302

New event 1 310

Restore 3 310

Qualifier Code

New event 1 351

New event 1 352

Restore

Restore

3 351

3 352

New event 1 354

Restore 3 354

New event 1 602

New event 1 608

New event 1 601

New event 1 110

Restore 3 110

New event 1 300

Restore 3 300

New event 1 200

Restore 3 200

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00


00

00

00

00

Acct #

Acct #

00

000

000

000

000

Acct #

Acct #

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

77

Appendix C: Reporting




Event Description










Zone Fire Alarm






Waterflow alarm




AC power lost

AC power restored

Battery Low


Ground Fault


Event Family

Test

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Supervisory

Supervisory

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

Test

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Qualifier

SIA Event

Code

FJ

FS

FR

WA

RX

FA

FH

FT

RT

YK

RP

RY

LT

LT

LR

LR

AR

YT

YR

YP

YQ

WH

UT

UR

AT

New event

New event

Restore

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

New event

New event

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

Parameter

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

001

002

001

002

Acct #

Acct #

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

78


Appendix D: Specifications

MR-2320 series pre-action/deluge, releasing control panel






6.5A AC maximim @ secondary of transformer

Battery

Type: 24VDC Gel-Cell/Sealed lead acid - 10AH to 26AH

Charging capability: 10AH to 26AH



2 supervised style Y (Class B) indicating circuits, configured as strobes or audibles. Terminals are labeled “SIG 1,2”

Power limited / Regulated 24VDC FWR / 1.7A @ 49C per circuit

Releasing Circuit

Power Limited/Special application 18.18-26.08VRMS/1.7A Max

Terminals are labelled “SIG 3,4”





If no auxiliaries are used the max power is 5A for the indicating and the releasing circuits


Aux supply (non resettable)

Power limited / 21.1Vdc regulated / 500mA max




Power limited / Regulated 24VDC FWR / 1.7A max at 49C

Minimum Load 5mA





6 supervised style B (Class B) initiating circuits, configurable.

Terminals are labeled “DET”. Compatibility ID “A”

Power limited / 19VDC reg. / 3mA for detectors /110MVpp AC ripple / 45mA max (alarm short)


For remote annunciators. Terminals are labeled “RS-485”. Line impedence is 120 ohms.

MR-2300-PRPolarity reversal city tie module (optional)

MR-2306-R6 Relay Module (optional)

Ground Fault Circuit

Less the 3K will generate a ground fault.

MR-2306-R6 Relay adder module


Contact rating FormC/ 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max, zoned

Current consumption standby 0mA, alarm 80mA














City tie power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 250mA max / 14ohms trip coil


8.5mA max (shorted)





Current consumption standby 50mA / alarm 300mA (city tie in use) / alarm 70mA (city tie not in use

System Model: MR-2320 Series Control Unit - Fire

Alarm, for Releasing services

System Type: Local Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR),

Remote Protected Premises Station (using MR-2300-

PR or MR-2320-DR/R). Central Station Protected

Premises (using MR-2320-DR/R) For ULC application also use MR-2300-PR for alternate communication path.



Applicable Standards: NFPA 12, 12A, 12B, 12, 15,

16,70,72,2001, UL-864 Rev. 9, ULC S-524, ULC S-

527-99

79

Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)

Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations





Refer to Appendix A on page 74 for specifications.

Model

Number

MR-2320-R

MR-2320-DR

MR-2300-A

MR-2300-NC2

MR-2300-PR

MR-2306-R6

MR-2312-S12



Total

Standby

Pre-Action/Deluge and

Agent Release Control

Panel FIXED ELR/

ACTIVE ELR



Panel FIXED ELR/

ACTIVE ELR with dialer


Adder Module




Tie Module

X

X

X

X

X

0.123/

0.092

0.123/

0.100

0.000

0.000

0.050

=

=

Alarm

0.316/

0.292

0.318/

0.300

= 0.000

= 0.000

= 0.300

X 0.000

= 0.080


12 Relay Smart Relay

Module

X 0.030

= 0.140

MR-2306/12-

ATW

MR-2300T

Remote Annunciators



X

X

X

0.035

0.035

Ò 0.00011

=

=

=

0.090

0.035

* 0.135

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

Total

Alarm

Four-Wire Smoke Detectors


X

X

= =

=


=



' Use 0.084

for five minutes, 0.168 for 10 minutes and 0.5 for 5 minutes of alarm as a multiplier figure.

Ò Using the 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector. See Appendix A on page 74 for other compatible smoke detectors.


ALARM


Battery (AH) = ( [STANDBY ( A ) ______ ] x [(24,60 or 90 Hours) ___ ] ) +

( [ALARM ( B ) ______ ] x [Alarm in Hr.] _____ ) = ( C ) ______AH

Total System Current in Alarm State: Must be 5.5 amperes or less for MR-2320 Series.


(

=

B )

80







System Failures




• Power Failure






•System Users




81


• Software


















82












•water damage;
















83





84









Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

M R - 2 3 2 0 S E R I E S

Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel

I

NSTALLATION &

O

PERATION

G

UIDE

Revision 2




Contents

Industry Canada and FCC Notice .......................................................................................... 1

Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 2

Panel Type............................................................................................................................ 2


Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3

Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3

Zone...................................................................................................................................... 3

Display Points ....................................................................................................................... 3

Wiring Styles ......................................................................................................................... 3


Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel.................................................. 4


Polarity Reversal/City Tie...................................................................................................... 4


Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits.................................................................................... 5

Output Class A Converter: Two Circuits ............................................................................... 5



Additional System Accessories............................................................................................. 6





Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board ................................................. 10




Field Wiring............................................................................................................................... 14

Main Board Field Wiring........................................................................................................ 14

Abort and Manual Release Switch Wiring............................................................................. 16

Indicating Circuit Wiring ........................................................................................................ 18

Dialer Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 19



Power Supply Connection..................................................................................................... 22





System Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 25





Common LED indicators ....................................................................................................... 26

Menu Buttons........................................................................................................................ 28

Switches and Common Indicators ........................................................................................ 28

Common Controls ................................................................................................................. 29


Common Relays ................................................................................................................... 30

Circuit Types ......................................................................................................................... 30


Contents

Configuration........................................................................................................................... 32

Using the CFG-300 Tool ...................................................................................................... 32



Command Menu................................................................................................................... 34

1. Panel Config (Command-Menu) ...................................................................................... 35






7. Test Dialer (Command-Menu).......................................................................................... 49

8. Exit (Command-Menu) ..................................................................................................... 51

Operating the Panel ................................................................................................................ 52

Panel Operation During Various Hazard States................................................................... 52

General Panel Operation ..................................................................................................... 53

Pre-Programmed Modes......................................................................................................... 54

Mode 1: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release ........................ 54

Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ................. 56

Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release .................................... 58

Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release ............................. 60

Mode 5: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release................... 62

Mode 6: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ............ 63

Mode 7: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release............................... 64

Mode 8: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release ........................ 66

Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, NYC abort...................................... 68

Mode 10: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ............... 70

Mode 11: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release ...................... 72


Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices .......................................................................... 75

Appendix C: Reporting ........................................................................................................... 77



Appendix D: Specifications.................................................................................................... 79

Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)........................... 80

Warranty................................................................................................................................... 81 ii


List of Tables & Figures

Tables

Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board .....................................11

Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings ...................................................................................13

Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ............................................................................................23

Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring ..........................................................................................23

Figures

Figure 1: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring ..........................................7

Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules ................................................................................9

Figure 3: Main Control Board cable connector and jumper settings .................................10

Figure 4: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module ............................................11

Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .....................................12

Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module .....................................................................12

Figure 7: Polarity reversal and city tie module ....................................................................13

Figure 8: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B Wiring ........................................................14

Figure 9: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D Wiring .........................................................15

Figure 10: Abort and Manual Release Switch Class B or Style B Wiring ..........................16

Figure 11: Abort and Manal Release Switch Class A or Style D Wiring ............................17

Figure 12: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring .....................................................18

Figure 13: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring ......................................................18

Figure 14: Releasing Circuit Wiring ......................................................................................19

Figure 15: Dialer Wiring ..........................................................................................................19

Figure 16: Four-wire smoke detector wiring ........................................................................20

Figure 17: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection ..........................................20

Figure 18: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection ...............................21

Figure 19: Power Supply Connection ...................................................................................22

Figure 20: LED indicators and control buttons ....................................................................26

Figure 21: Evacuation and Alert Codes ................................................................................31

Figure 22: MR-2320 Configuration .........................................................................................32

iii

List of Tables & Figures iv





(ULC) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed MR-2320 series Pre-action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel under

Standard ULC-S527 (Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems) and ULC/ORD-C693-1994 (Central Station Fire Protective

Signalling Systems and Services). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the Canadian / Provincial /

Local Electrical Code; and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).



CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate


Note: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.



(ULI) for use in slave application in conjunction with a listed Pre-action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel under Standard 864

(Control Units for Fire Protective Signalling Systems). These Communicators comply with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) performance requirements for DACTs and should be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 4 (Supervising Station Fire Alarm

System). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70); and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

FCC Notice








Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Inc. or an authorized representative of Secutron Inc. For information contact


1

Introduction

Introduction

Secutron’s MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel performs the function of fire suppression in a wide variety of applications. It is capable of being used in an agent release sprinkler system or in a pre-action or deluge sprinkler system. It can be used in single-hazard or dual-hazard applications with or without cross-zoning. The panel includes common alarm, supervisory, and trouble relays, and provides regulated and unregulated auxiliary power along with four-wire smoke power. It supports auxiliary relays and a city tie module. The auxiliary relays are based on a hazard area status. The MR-2320 has six input zones and four output zones, allowing for flexibility in most single- and dual-hazard applications for both deluge and agent releasing applications.

Panel Type

The panel can function as an agent release panel or as a pre-action/deluge panel, depending on which of the available fixed configurations are chosen from the main programming menu.

Deluge sprinkler system

In deluge sprinkler system open-valve sprinkler heads terminate to a water supply that is controlled by a single valve. When the system detects fire, it automatically opens the valve via a releasing circuit, allowing the water to flow through all the sprinkler heads. Deluge sprinkler systems are useful for applications in which simultaneous discharge of water through every sprinkler is required.

Pre-action sprinkler system

In a pre-action sprinkler system close-valve sprinkler heads are connected to pipes that are supervised for air pressure. The pipes terminate directly to a water supply. Pre-action systems are useful for applications in which the prevention of an accidental discharge of water is required.

Agent release system

In an agent release system, an extinguishing agent (such as Argon, dry chemical, CO 2 , Halon, etc.) is automatically released upon fire detection. An abort function is added to prevent the false release of the extinguishing agent.



Class A converter adder modules. Each initiating circuit is pre-configured as Alarm, Supervisory (Latching or non-latching), water-flow, Manual Release Switch, Abort Switch or Manual Release/Abort combination, depending upon the selected pre-programmed configuration. There are two LEDs per circuit, one for Trouble

(amber), and one dual color (amber/red) LED for Supervisory (amber) and Alarm (red).

• Basic unit has 4 power limited class B (style Y) output circuits. Output circuits 1 & 2 are indicating circuits while output circuits 3 & 4 are releasing circuits (circuit 4 can work as an indicating circuit in some situations; check the Pre-Programming Modes section on page for details). Each indicating circuit process type is pre-configured and can be silenceable. The signal rates depend on the selected pre-programmed configuration.

• A pushbutton associated with each initiating, indicating and releasing circuit can individually bypass the circuit.

• Configurable Signal Silence Inhibit and Auto Signal Silence Timers.


• Four wire reset-able smoke power supply: 22.3V DC regulated, 300mA maximum.

• Relay Contacts for Common Alarm, Common Supervisory, Common Trouble, and Auxiliary Alarm Relay

(disconnectable).

• RS-485 Interface for MR-2300 Series Remote Multiplex Annunciators and Smart relay Module.



• Easy configuration of the panel using LCD service tool (CFG-300).

• Releasing circuit protection from false alarm by disconnecting the battery if the voltage falls below 19V.

2


Conventions

Circuits

Refers to an actual electrical interface for initiating (detection), indicating (signal), and releasing.

Zone



Display Points



Wiring Styles



This is done without penalizing the number of circuits, which remains the same as in Class B (Style B). Changing the indicating circuits to Class A requires an MR-2300-NC2 adder board, which will convert TWO indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z). Releasing circuits (Z) are Class B (Style B) only.

3

System Components


Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel

X

M

?

AC ON

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT ACTIVE

AGENT RELEASED

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)

MR-2320 SERIES

Agent Release Control Panel

Model

MR-2320-R

Description

Six Zone Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release

Control Panel with LED display (red or white door, black box), six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, and four Class B (Style Y) output circuits. Output circuits 1 & 2 are Class B (Style

B) indicating circuits that can be converted to

Class A (Style Z) using an MR-2300-NC2

Output Class A Converter adder module.

Output circuits 3 & 4 are Class B (Style B) only releasing circuits. Each output circuit can draw

1.7A current, 5A total. A six zone MR-2300-A

Input Class A Converter adder module may be used for Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits. MR-2320 contains Common Alarm,

Common Supervisory & Common Trouble

Relays, auxiliary alarm relay (disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four Wire Smoke Detector

Power Supply. Two batteries are required.

MR-2320-DR Same as above except with dialer.



RELAY 1

NO/NC C

RELAY 2

NO/NC C

RELAY 3

NO/NC C

RELAY 4

NO/NC C

RELAY 5

NO/NC C

RELAY 6

NO/NC C

MR-2306-

R6

Six-relay adder module

Polarity Reversal/City Tie


MR-2300-PR

Polarity Reversal and/or City

Tie Module

JW4

4



Model

MR-2312-SW12

Description

Smart Relay Module

(12 relays) with white enclosure

MR-2312-SR12

Smart Relay Module

(12 relays) with red enclosure

MR-2300 SERIES

REMOTE RELAY

Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits

Model

MR-2300-A

Description


Module (six circuits). This module has built-in active

EOL resistors.

Output Class A Converter: Two Circuits

Model

MR-2300-NC2

Description


MR-2312-ATW Remote Annunciator


A.C.

ON

COMMON

TROUBLE

SIGNAL

SILENCE

BUZZER

SILENCE

LAMP

TEST

SWITCH

ENABLE

SIGNAL

SILENCE

SYSTEM

RESET

FIRE ALARM

ANNUNCIATOR

MR-2312-ATW 16 Zone remote annunciator

5

System Components


The ELRX-400R(W) are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.


ELRX-400

RED

BLACK

ELRX-400R



Additional System Accessories

Model: MR-2306-ATR/W Eight Zone Remote Annunciator

Model: MR-2300T

Model: MP-400

Model: MP-400R

Model: BC-160


EOL resistor plate, 3.9K

EOL resistor plate, red


Model: MP-1500R/W Current

Model: MP-320R/W Solenoid Module

Model: MR-2316-AT Remote Annunciator

Ω




(ULC Approved)


6




Install the MR-2320 Series panel enclosure as shown below. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes with the provided screws.


11"

1.5"

PLACE MR-2320 TRIM RING OVER BACKBOX

17"

14.5"

4 Mounting

Holes for

Surface

Mounting

20.0"

22.5"


5.425"

1" 3.5"

14.5"

4.5

"



Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front and semi-flush mount the backbox into the wall.

Peel the adhesive cover from the trim ring and stick to the wall surface around the backbox, after wall is finished.

7



TRIM RING

WALL MIN 1”

WOOD OR

METAL STUD

BACKBOX

8



The MR-2320 Series panel comes pre-assembled with all components and boards except for adder modules.

Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 3 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wiring specifications.



(6 circuits)

JW4

JW7

JW5

JW6

X

M

?

AC ON

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT

RELEASED

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

PRE

RELEASE

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)



JW1


JW2


P6

SIGNAL

POWER


TRB TRL COM- COM+

P6

BATTERY

P5

SEC TX



(2 circuits)

Transformer

AC wiring terminal

BATTERY BATTERY

9



Modules

Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board

Figure 3: Main Control Board cable connector and jumper settings


JW3

For front panel programming use CFG-300 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed. Please refer to Document LT-922 for details

JW5-Normally Open

JW6-Normally Open


Alarm Relay

Supervisory

Relay

JW4 -Normally Short

Auxiliary Relay

JW4

JW7

JW5

JW6

X

M

?

AC ON

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT

RELEASE

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

PRE

RELEASE

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)

Trouble Relay

JW1 - ON- when


Connect to

MR-2300-PR

Connect to

MR-2306-R6

Relay module

JW1


JW2


P3

SIGNAL

POWER


TRB TRL COM- COM+

P4

JW2 - ON- when





10




P4


Otherwise not used.



JW4 Normally short.

JW5

JW6







mounting hole for

#6-32 screws


#6-32 screws




11




mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

OCAC-302

MR-2300-NC2 mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit

1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.


Relay Adder Module


Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module main fire alarm board

INDIVIDUAL GREEN


RELAY 1

NO/NC C

RELAY 2

NO/NC C

RELAY 3 RELAY 4

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 5 RELAY 6



The correlation of the relays are fixed and is as follows:

Active State

Relay1

Hazard 1

Alert

Relay2

Hazard 1

Alarm

Relay3

Hazard 1

Release

Relay4

Hazard 2

Alert

Relay5

Hazard 2

Alarm

Relay6

Hazard 2

Release

12




Mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

P1 P2

Mounting hole for

#6-32 screws



P1

JW1

JW2

Cable connects to P5 on the Main Board






City Tie Box will be retriggered. See configuration of Alarm Xmit-Sil on page for more information.

The Trouble Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to delay AC power fail for 0, 1 or 3 hours if this is the only system trouble. See Pwr Fail Dly Tmr configuration on page for more information.

13

Field Wiring

Field Wiring

Main Board Field Wiring

Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wire gauges and Appendix D on page 80 for specifications.



Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below. The panel supports Style B wiring for the initiating circuits and Style D wiring for the indicating circuits. The initiating circuits are supervised by a 3.9K

Ω EOL resistor or an active EOL module.

Figure 8: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B Wiring


INITIATING

CIRCUIT #1

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

STYLE B

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 1

ALARM ZONE

STYLE B

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 2

SUPERVISORY

ZONE

ION SMOKE

DETECTOR

PHOTO SMOKE

DETECTOR

HEAT

DETECTOR

PULL STATION

SUPERVISORY

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR





14

Figure 9: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D Wiring




INITIATING

CIRCUIT #1

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

4 MORE INITIATING


STYLE D

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 1

ALARM

ZONE

STYLE D

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 2

SUPERVISORY

ZONE

ION SMOKE

DETECTOR

PHOTO

SMOKE

DETECTOR

HEAT

DETECTOR


15

Field Wiring

Abort and Manual Release Switch Wiring

Wiring for the abort and manual release switches is shown in Figures 10 and 11 . Depending on the selected mode, the Abort and Manual release switches can either be on different circuits or they both can be on the same circuit.

When on separate circuits, DET5 is used for the Abort switch and DET6 is used for the manual release switch.

When on the same circuit, DET 5 Abort/Manual release combination is for hazard area 1, while DET6 Abort/Manual release combination is for hazard area 2. When an Abort/Manual release combination is used, ensure that the

Manual release switch is always before the Abort switch. Also ensure that there is a current limiting resistor (MP-

1500R/W) between the Manual release and Abort switch for differentiating between the two switches.

Figure 10: Abort and Manual Release Switch Class B or Style B Wiring



INITIATING

CIRCUIT #5

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #6

+

-

+

-

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

OR ELRX-300/R

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

OR ELRX-300/R



INITIATING

CIRCUIT #5

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #6

+

-

+

-

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

OR ELRX-300/R

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

OR ELRX-300/R

MANUAL RELEASE

SWITCH

Use MS-403,404

USE ONLY NO

CONTACT

ABORT SWITCH

CCONNECT A UL/ULC LISTED ABORT STATION ACCEPTABLE TO

THE AHJ, COMPLYING WITH THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:



RATED VOLTAGE= 24V

Note: Maximum 4 Abort Switches can be connected on each combined Manual Release and

Abort Switch circuit.

Note: For the circuit with the combined Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch, a maximum of four Abort

Switches can be connected.

16


Figure 11: Abort and Manal Release Switch Class A or Style D Wiring



MR-2300-A

CLASS A

CONVERTER

MODULE

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #5

+

-

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #6

+

-



INITIATING

CIRCUIT #5

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #6

+

-

+

-

MR-2300-A

CLASS A

CONVERTER

MODULE

MANUAL RELEASE

SWITCH

USE MS-403,404

USE ONLY NO

CONTACT

ABORT SWITCH

CCONNECT A UL/ULC LISTED ABORT STATION

ACCEPTABLE TO THE AHJ, COMPLYING WITH THE

FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:



RATED VOLTAGE= 24V

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Current limiter

MP-1500R/W

Note: Maximum 4 Abort

Switches can be connected on each combined Manual

Release and Abort Switch circuit.

17

Field Wiring



Each circuit is supervised by a 3.9K

Ω EOL resistor or active EOL module. Each indicating circuit provides up to 1.7

A, 5 A maximum total if no auxiliaries are used.


MR-2320 Panel

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #2

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT - 1

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT - 2



MR-2320 Panel

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT 1

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT 2

BELL STROBE

OCAC-302 CLASS A


HORN

18


Releasing Circuit Wiring

Wiring for the releasing circuit is shown in Figure 14 , below. SIG3 and SIG4 output circuits are reserved for the releasing circuits. Solenoid EOL module (MP-320R/W) is used to supervise the solenoid coil. If the solenoid is already fitted with the directional diode then only the 3.9K

Ω EOL resistor is used. The supervisory current passes through the solenoid coil thus confirming the integrity of the solenoid coil for open coil. The wiring is supervised for the open and short conditions.

Figure 14: Releasing Circuit Wiring




+

-

+

-

Solenoid EOL module

MP-320R/W

Solenoid EOL module

MP-320R/W

Solenoid Coil (See the listing for the approved solenoids)

Dialer Wiring

If you have an MR-2320-DR, there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 15 below.

Figure 15: Dialer Wiring

FIRE ALARM MAIN

BOARD

LINE-1

LINE-2

GREEN

RED

BROWN

GREY

1

RJ31X

2 3

4

8

7 6

5

TIP

RING

Public switch


TIP


IF permitted


19

Field Wiring



LEGEND

+

-

+

-

POWER

+

-



22VDC, 200mA



(POWER LIMITED)

+

-

+

DETECTION


TO INITIATING

CIRCUIT

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

6

3

4

5

2

1

END OF LINE RELAY

LISTED S3403

MODEL A77-716B

MANUFACTURED BY

SYSTEM SENSOR

NOTES




CABLE


Wire relays on the relay adder module MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figure 17.


RELAY

CIRCUIT #1

RELAY

CIRCUIT #2

C

NO/NC

C

NO/NC

RELAY

CIRCUIT #6

C

NO/NC

NORMALLY OPEN

CONNECTION

NORMALLY CLOSE

CONNECTION

NORMALLY OPEN OR

NORMALLY CLOSED

CONNECTION IS

SELECTED BY JUMPER

ON RELAY BOARD.

ALL RELAY CONTACTS

28V DC, 1 AMP

RESISTIVE LOAD




20



Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 18 , below. See Appendix D on page 80 for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used.





+

-

+

-

+

CITY TIE LOCAL ENERGY

RATED - 24VDC FILTERED

TRIP COIL - 14 Ohms, 250mA,

5mV RIPPLE

POWER LIMITED

POLARITY REVERSAL ALARM

24VDC OPEN

12VDC AT 3.5mA

8mA MAX. SHORT

POWER LIMITED

POLARITY REVERSAL SUPV.

24VDC OPEN

12VDC AT 3.5mA

8mA MAX. SHORT

-

POWER LIMITED

1

2

S

1

2

S

1

2

S

1

2

S

PROTECTOR

1

2

S

+

-

USE A SHORTING WIRE

WHEN THE CITY TIE IS

NOT USED

1

2

+

-

S

CONFIRMS TO NEMA STANDARD

SB3-1969 INTENDED FOR

CONNECTION TO POLARITY

REVERSAL CIRCUIT OF A REMOTE

STATION RECEIVING UNIT HAVING

COMPATIBLE RATINGS

DIN RAIL CONNECTION

TO EARTH GROUND

PROCTECTOR

1

+

2

-

S

1

2

S

POWER LIMITED CABLE TYPE

FPL, FPLR or FPLP MUST BE

USED FROM PR-300 TO

PROTECTORS.

DIN RAIL CONNECTION

TO EARTH GROUND

21

Field Wiring

Power Supply Connection


Type


Rating


6.5A AC maximim @ secondary of transformer Power supply total current



Wire the power supply as shown below in Figure 19 using the proper wire gauge.


Figure 19: Power Supply Connection

Deluge Panel Control Board

BUZZER

SILENCE

SPARE

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)

P6


P6

BATTERY

P5

10A slow blow red

+ red red

+ blk yellow red blk green

240 VAC 50Hz

120 VAC 60Hz

N

GND

BATTERY BATTERY

NOTE:



22




Wire gauge

AWG

22

20

18

16

14

12


Feet

2990

4760

7560

12000

19000

30400

Meters

910

1450

2300

3600

5800

9200

Notes:






0.06

0.12

0.30

0.60

0.90

1.20

1.50

1.70

18 AWG

2350

1180

470

235

156

118

94

78

716

360

143

71

47

36

29

24


16 AWG

3750

1850

750

375

250

185

150

125

1143

567

229

114

76

56

46

38

14 AWG


6000

3000

1200

600

400

300

240

200

1829

915

366

183

122

91

73

61

Notes:



12 AWG

8500

4250

1900

850

570

425

343

285

2591

1296

579

259

174

129

105

87


30

15

6

3

2

1.5

1.2

1.0


Four-wire smoke power is provided for four-wire smoke detectors. This filtered supply is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power and the common trouble is active. The power is reconnected after the 'RESET' key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/300mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.


Supervised auxiliary power is used to power the remote annunciators and smart relay modules. This filtered circuit is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power and the common trouble is active. The power is reconnected after the 'RESET' key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/500mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.

23

Field Wiring


This regulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC FWR/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. This power supply must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.

24


System Checkout



AC supply.








The best way to check out a panel first is to not connect any field wiring. Power up the panel with an end of line. The panel should be free of trouble. Then connect one circuit at one time. If a trouble occurs, correct the fault then continue the field wiring.



8. Power up the panel. The "AC ON" green LED and the “Common Trouble” LED should illuminate, and the buzzer should sound. Press the “System Reset” button. Since the batteries are not connected, the trouble buzzer should sound intermittently and the common trouble LED should flash.


All indicators should be OFF except for normal power "AC ON" green LED and green LED I4 (below the

TROUBLE relay at left bottom of board).

Note: Green LED I4 is illuminated when the system is normal. This LED indicates that the trouble relay is in normal standby condition.


Troubleshooting

Symptoms

Circuit

Trouble

Remote

Trouble

Ground Fault

Battery

Trouble

Common

Trouble

Possible Cause

To correct the fault, check for open wiring on that particular circuit loop or if the Circuit

Disconnect Button is active. Notes: (1) Bypassing a detection circuit or signal circuit will cause a system trouble (off-normal status); (2) Bypassing a releasing circuit will cause a supervisory signal.








25





AC ON

X

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE M

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

?

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT

RELEASED

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

PRE

RELEASE

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)

The Main Display Panel on the Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board consists of:

• 16 common LED Indicators (left portion of display)

• Ten Common Buttons (left half portion of display)

• Up to six Initiating Circuit Alarm LEDs and six Initiating Circuit Trouble LED Indicators

• Four Indicating/Releasing Circuit LEDs (labeled NAC for Notifying Appliance Circuit or RAC for Releasing

Appliance Circuit)

• Up to ten disconnect buttons (six for initiating circuits & four for indicating/releasing circuits)

LED Indicators may be amber, red, or green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two flash rates.



Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is Secutron #ND-2056SEC.

Common LED indicators

AC ON

The AC ON led is on steady green while the main AC power is within acceptable levels. It is turned off when the level falls below the power-fail threshold.

26


COMMON ALARM

The common alarm led is illuminated steady red as a result of any active alarm present in the system

COMMON TROUBLE

The common trouble led in illuminated steady amber as a result of a trouble condition being detected on the system

BATTERY TROUBLE

Flashes amber at a slow rate, when the battery voltage is lower than the specified threshold or the battery is off line.

Flashes amber at a fast rate when there is a trouble on the battery charger circuit

REMOTE TROUBLE

Flashes amber at a slow rate as a result of any remote trouble condition

GROUND FAULT

Flashes amber at a slow rate when there is a ground fault detected in the system

CPU FAIL

Flashes amber at a slow rate when the CPU is not working properly

ABORT

Illuminate steady amber when the abort circuit is active

RELEASED

Illuminate steady red when the releasing circuit(s) is active

SYSTEM RESET

Turn on steady amber during the system reset process

SIGNAL SILENCE

Flashes amber at a slow rate when the signal circuits are silenced

AUXILIARY DISCONNECT

Flashes amber at a slow rate when the auxiliary disconnect function is active

LAMP TEST

Illuminate amber steady when the lamp test button is pressed

BUZZER SILENCE

Flashes amber at a slow rate when the buzzer is silenced

PRE RELEASE

Flashes red at a fast rate, when the release timer is started turns off when the release timer expires or the system is reset

27


Menu Buttons

To use the menu buttons you will need to install the CFG-300 configuration tool. See Using the CFG-300 Tool on page for details.

Menu Button

M


Info Button

?

X

When the system is off-normal, press

?


Enter Button


Cancel Button


Switches and Common Indicators

The MR-2320 Series panel is a six-zone panel with four output circuits. The circuits are arranged in the following configuration:







Out 1

Out 2

NAC1

NAC2

Out 3

Out 4

Releasing circuit 1

Releasing circuit 2 or NAC3 in some applications

Zone 1 to Zone 4

• Alarm LED (red) turns on steady when an alarm is detected

• Supervisory LED (amber) turns on steady when the circuit is active


Zone 5 and Zone 6

• Alarm LED & Trouble LED The zone type and LED behavior varies upon the configuration. Steady when turned on.

Out1 and Out2 (NAC circuits)


Out3 and Out4 (Releasing circuits)

• Trouble LED (amber) turns on steady when the circuit is bypassed turns on at slow flash rate when in trouble

Input Circuits Bypass Switch

These bypass switches are used to bypass the input circuit. Bypass is a toggle switch which will bypass and unbypass in a sequence whenever the switch is pressed. When the input circuit is bypassed a trouble is generated and the system will not respond to any trouble or alarm on the bypassed input circuit. If the bypassed input circuit is active and the Bypass Switch is pressed for un-bypassing, the Alarm LED will flash at the fast rate for 10 seconds.

During these 10 seconds, pressing the Bypass Switch can bypass the active input circuit again. After 10 seconds, the bypassed alarm will be processed.

28


Output Circuits Bypass Switch

The output circuit bypass switches bypasses the NAC circuit and the releasing circuit. The switch is a toggle switch and pressing it again, will un-bypasses the output circuit the trouble LED turns off.

Common Controls




• Resets all Initiating and Releasing Circuits



• Turns off Signal Silence Indicator





Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm turns on the Signal Silence indicator and deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits. Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will re-sound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence Inhibit Timer period.








Circuit (Zone) Disconnect pushbuttons are provided for all initiating indicating, and releasing circuits on the Fire

Alarm Control Panel. These pushbuttons are located beside their respective indicating LED.

Pressing a Circuit Disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated circuit and turns on its Trouble Indicator, activating Common Trouble. Pressing a releasing circuit disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated releasing circuit and turns on its LED, activating common supervisory. While a Circuit is disconnected, all changes in status

(alarms and troubles) on that circuit are ignored. The panel does not activate disconnected indicating circuits.

Circuit Disconnect pushbuttons are toggle switches; therefore, pressing an activated switch a second time will unbypass (reconnect) the circuit.




29


When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to unbypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active, the Status Indicator flashes for 10 seconds at the Fast Rate without processing the input. If the Circuit is not re-bypassed by then, it will be processed as a new input.

Common Relays

Relay Type

Trouble Relay

Supervisory Relay

Alarm Relay

Aux Alarm Relay

Single Hazard

Trouble

Supervisory

Alarm

Alarm (Silence-able)

Dual Hazard

Trouble

Supervisory

Hazard1 (Alarm)

Hazard2 (Alarm)

Note: Some troubles are latching once they are detected they remain active until system reset. In this case the common trouble indicator will also remain active until system reset. The common trouble is not bypassed by the auxiliary disconnect function.

Circuit Types






Water Flow Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms except that any indicating circuits programmed to these circuits (all are by default) are Non-Silenceable. Also, if Water Flow Retard Operation is enabled, these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Water flow Alarm is confirmed and processed. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm

LED to illuminate red.

Note: Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed

120 seconds.



The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will clear (as long as there are no other Supervisory conditions in the system) and the Circuit Status LED will turn off.



The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will NOT clear.

Abort Switch

When the hazard area is in alarm (pre-discharge) state and the release timer is running, the activation of the corresponding Abort Switch will pause the releasing timer. The release process is held while the Abort Switch is pressed. Releasing the Abort Switch will resume the releasing timer and the corresponding hazard area goes into

Alarm (pre-discharge) state again. The value of the release timer after Abort Switch is released depends on the type

30

MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual of Abort Delay in the configuration. When the release timer expires, the corresponding releasing circuit is activated.

When the panel is in normal condition, activation of the Abort Switch will cause a trouble signal and the corresponding zone amber LED turns on at slow flash rate.

Manual Release Switch

Activation of the Manual Release Switch of a hazard area will activate the corresponding releasing circuit. If the corresponding Manual Release Delay is non-zero, the releasing circuit will be activate after the Manual Release

Delay expires.

Combination of Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch

This type of circuit is the combination of both Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch. This combination always applies to the same hazard area. A short condition on the circuit is a Manual Release Active and a current limit condition is an Abort Switch Active.



The Silenceable Signal circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may be silenced either manually or automatically.


The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the evacuation code pattern that is configured by the user. For more information on evacuation codes, refer to Evacuation Codes on page.


Silenceable strobes will be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed.


Non-Silenceable Strobes will not be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed.


Continuous

Temporal Code

20 BPM

60 BPM

120 BPM

On 100% of the time

3 of 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off then, 1.5 second pause

1.5 seconds on, 1.5 seconds off




0.5s

0.5s

1.5s

1.5s

CONTINUOUS

1.5s

TEMPORAL CODE

20 BPM

0.5s

0.5s

0.25s

0.25s

60 BPM

120 BPM

31

Configuration

Configuration

Configure the MR-2320 Series Panels using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with

CFG-300 for configuration information).

Using the CFG-300 Tool

Connect the CFG-300 to the panel, then press M (Menu button). The CFG-300 LCD display will display the Main

Menu. The function of different buttons on the front panel display is shown in Figure 22, below.


AC ON

X

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

M COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

?

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT

RELEASED

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)


0

QZ

1

2

ABC

3

DEF

4

GHI

5

JKL

*

(left shift)

#

(right shift)

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

PRE

RELEASE

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

RAC1

(ZONE 3)

RAC2

(ZONE 4)

6

MNO

7

PRS

8

TUV

9

WXY

32



The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press

(Enter button) after entering the passcode. If the passcode is correct, it will take you to the main command menu. If the passcode is wrong the system will ask you to re-enter passcode. The system will be exhausted after three retries and will then take you back to the Normal message display.

Enter passcode:

_

Three leves of access are defined:

1) Command - Level 0:

The default password is for this level “1111” without quotes. In this level the user can only perform regular testing and operation.

2) Configuration - Level 1:

The default password is for this level “2222” without quotes. User can change configuration and have access to command level.

3) Factory - Level 2:

Currently not used.

When the user presses “MENU” and enters the passsword, they should enter the password of the level intended. If the user is in a lower level of access, attempts to operate functions requiring a higher level of access will be refused.

33

Configuration








7. Once you have made the correct selection, press submenu screen.

8. Press X

to confirm the change. The display will return to the

(Cancel button) to return to the previous menu.

Command Menu

The main command menu is pictured below. The first line of the LCD will always show “-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press the key to make a selection. To exit from the main command menu, select the “Exit” menu option and then press either the X or key.

Note: Command Menu Item 1 and 6 can only be accessed if jumper JW6 is placed on the main board.


MR-2320 Mode-1 DACT

Version 0.1.17

The first line shows the panel mode number, pre-programmed mode and the information if the panel has a dialer or not. The second line shows the software version number. The version of the software is read as

Major.Minor.Revision.

-Command Menu-

1. Panel Config

2. Set Time

3. Set Password

4. View EventLog

5. Clear Event Log

6. Dialer Config

7. Test Dialer

8. Exit

Access level Required

Configuration

Configuration

Configuration

Command

Command

Configuration

Command

Command

34


1. Panel Config (Command-Menu)



-P a ne l Co n fig -

1 . C h o o se a m o d e

2 . H a za r d C o nfig

3 . P a ne l Fea tu res

4. Default Config

Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Choose a mode


Choose a mode

1. Choose a mode

Choose a mode:

1

1-->Default

Use this function to choose a pre-programmed panel configuration.

Selections range from modes 1 to 11. Refer to Pre-Programming

Modes on page for details on mode configurations.

Note: changing the fixed configuration of the panel will cause all configuration data set to default for that particular mode.

35

Configuration

Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Hazard Config

-Hazard Param.-

1. Release timer

2. Abort Delay

3. Manual Rls Delay

4. Soak timer



Hazard Config

1. Release Timer

Release timer(sec):

60


Hazard Config

2. Abort Delay

Abort Delay Type:

[X] Standard UL


Hazard Config

3. Man. Rls Delay

Man. Rls Delay(sec):

0

60->Default

Available options:

0,5,10,15,20,25,30,35,40,

45,50,55,60 seconds

[X] Standard UL->Default

[ ] IRI

[ ] NYC

[ ] Local Juris.

0->Default

Available options:

0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds

Use this function to set the programmable timer that delays the activation of the releasing application circuits.

This timer starts immediately after receiving a confirming alarm (cross-zoned hazard area) or a single alarm (noncross-zoned hazard area).

When the timer expires, the releasing circuit activates.


Use this function to set how the

Abort Switch operates with the

Release Timer.

Note that if the Release Timer is set to zero, the Abort Switch does not operate.

In Standard UL mode, the release timer will stop and hold when the Abort Switch is pressed. When the switch is released, the Release Timer restarts from whichever is greater: the remaining time on the timer or 10 seconds.

In IRI mode, the switch works in the same way as it does in

Standard UL mode, except that the switch will function only if it is pressed and held before the second alarm comes in.

In NYC mode, pressing the

Abort Switch will reset to the

Release Timer and add 90 seconds to the configured timer duration. After the Abort Switch is released, the Release Timer will restart.

In Local Juris. (Local

Jurisdiction Delay), pressing the

Abort Switch will reset the

Release Timer back to its configured value. After the switch is released, the Release

Timer will restart.

Use this function to set the time delay of activation of corresponding releasing circuit(s) after activation of the manual release switch.


36



Hazard Config

4. Soak timer

Soak timer(sec):

0

0->Default (continuous)

The selectable values are in seconds: 0, 10, 20, 30,

40, 50, 60, 120(2min),

180(3min), 240(4min),

300(5min), 360(6min),

420(7min), 480(8min),

540(9min), 600(10min),

660(11min), 720(12min),

780(13min), 840(14min),

900(15min)

Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features

Use this function to set the length of time for which the releasing circuit is active. When the soak timer expires, the control panel automatically shuts off the activated releasing circuit.

0 seconds means that the soak timer is disabled and the releasing circuit is active continuously.

-Panel Features-

1. Man. Sig. Sil

2. Wtr/Sprk. Retd

3. Aux Dis Corr

4. Sig-Sil Inh Tm

5. Aux Dis Alm&Sv

6. Auto Sil. Tmr

7. Rem. Annun.

8. Alm. Xmit. Sil.

9. Pwr Fail Tmr.

10. Com. Supv. Rly

11. Sig. Sil. Isol.

12. 1st Alarm Code

13. 2nd Alarm Code

14. Supv. Latching

15. Supv on NAC-2

16. Sig-Sil NAC



1. Manual Sig. Silence

Man. Sig. Sil.

[X] ENABLE


[ ] DISABLE

Use this function to enable or disable the Signal Silence operation on the panel.

37

Configuration


2. Wtr/Sprk. Retd

Waterflow/Sprk Retd

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE



3. Aux Dis Corr

Aux Dis. Dis Corr

[X] ENABLE


[ ] DISABLE


4. Sig-Sil Inh Tmr

Sig-Sil. Inhibit Timer

[X] DISABLE


[ ] 10sec

[ ] 20sec

[ ] 30sec

[ ] 1min


5. Aux. Dis. Dis Alam&Sv

Aux Dis. Dis Alm&Sv

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE



6. Auto Sig-Sil. Tmr

Auto Sig-Sil. Tmr

[X] DISABLE


[ ] 5 Min

[ ] 10 Min

[ ] 20 Min

[ ] 30 Min


7. Rem. Annun.

No. of Remote Annun.

[X] NONE

[X] NONE->Default

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

...

[ ] 6


8. Alarm Xmit-Sil.

Alm Xmit-Sil.

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE


By default all the initiating circuits configured as waterflow or sprinkler act as non-verified alarms. If enabled, a retard operation is performed for initiating circuits configured as waterflow or sprinkler.

By default this function will disconnect the auxiliary alarm relay when the aux disconnect button is pressed. If enabled, this function will disconnect the auxiliary alarm relay and all correlated relays when the aux disconnect button is pressed.


MR-2306-R6 and MR-2312-

S12.

Use this function to inhibit the signal silence switch for a desired length of time. The time period should expire before the signals may be silenced.



If enabled the Common Alarm and Common Supervisory relays will be disconnected when Aux. Disconnect is pressed. Also, the MR-2300-PR will not transmit a supervisory or alarm event.If disabled, the Aux disconnect switch has no effect on the Common Alarm relay, the

Common Supervisory relay, and the MR-2300-PR.

Use this function to set the time period for which the indicating circuits will sound before they are automatically silenced.


National Building Code, this timer should not be set to less than 20 minutes.



Use this function to allow the alarm transmit and auxiliary alarm relay to reset on the

Signal Silence rather than the

Reset switch.

38



9. Pwr Fail Tmr

AC Pwr Fail Dly Tmr.

[X] None

[X] NONE->Default

[ ] 1 HRS

[ ] 3 HRS


10. Com. Supv. Rly

Common Supv. Relay

[X] ENABLE

[X] ENABLE->Default

[ ] DISABLE


11. Sig-Sil. Isol.

Sig-Sil. Isol.

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE



12.1st Alarm NAC Code

1st Alarm NAC Code

[X] Temporal

[X] Temporal ->Default

[ ] 20 BPM


13. 2nd Alarm NAC Code

2nd Alarm NAC Code

[X] 120 BPM

[X] 120 BPM->Default

[ ] 60 BPM

[ ] Temporal

Use this function to delay the reporting of AC power fail trouble for a specific time period. If disabled, the AC power fail will be reported immediately.

If disabled, the common supervisory relay can be used as a common alarm relay. It will act the same way as a common alarm relay. If enabled, it is used as a common supervisory relay.

Enable this function only when suite isolators are used (Canada only).

Sets the NAC indicating code when the 1st alarm comes in.

Choose the NAC indicating code when the 2nd alarm comes in.


14.Supv. Latching

Supervisory Latching

[X] Non-latching

[ ] Latching

[X] Non-latching->Default

Use this function to set the supervisory circuit as either latching or non-latching.

NOTE: For ULC operation the supervisory should be programmed as latching


15. Supv on NAC-2

Supv. Alert on NAC-2

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE


Use this function to enable/ disable the supervisory circuit indication on NAC-2.


16. Sig-Sil NAC

Silenceable NAC

[X] NAC-1

[X] NAC-1->Default

[X] NAC-2->Default

Use this function to set which

NAC circuits are silenceable or non-silenceable.

39

Configuration

Command Menu/MR-2320 Config/Features/

17. Active EOL

Active EOL

[X] DISABLE


[ ] ENABLE




EOL resistors.


Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Default Config


Default Config

4. Default Config

Y-->Default

Load the default

Settings? Y

Use this function to reset the panel to the default configuration of the chosen programming mode.

40




1. Daylight Save

2. Time Clock

3. Compensation



Daylight Saving

[X] DISABLE



HH:MM WKD YYYY-MM-DD

00:00 MON 2000-01-01


[ ] ENABLE


Default

00:00 MON 2000-01-01





2. Compensation


0 0 : 0 0 M O N 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1


Default: 0 seconds

(no compensation)

Compensation values can range from -15 to

+15 seconds.



Daily Compen. (Sec):

Panel Config Updated

41

Configuration



First choose the level of password to be changed

Select Access Level

0

Then

Enter new passcode:

Re-enter new passcode:


0 -> Default invalid passcode


If the passcode is OK the following message appears and exits to the main menu passcode updated

The user can change the password only for the current access level as well as any lower levels.

42





ZONE

Message

Process

Type

Physical

Zone No.

Zone-1

OPEN TRB 01/09

EVENT type

EVENT

01 of 09

"INFO" Key

DATE

NVERIF ALARM Z -01

11:45 THU 2005-3-31

TIME




-Select Log-

1. Alarm Log

2. General Log

3. All Logs



Clear all the

Selected log(s)? Y




Log(s) cleared

43

Configuration




-Dialer Config-

1. Account Info

2. Telephone line

3. Report Options

4. Time Parameter

5. Enable/Disable


Account Info

-Account Info-

1. Account#1 ID

2. Account#1 Tel

3. Accnt#1 Format

4. Account#2 ID

5. Account#2 Tel

6. Accnt#2 Format



Account#1 ID

123456

123456->Default



If you are using contact ID the allowed digits for the account

ID are simple digits 0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F (the



44




Account#1 Telnum:

101

[101]->Default





# is 9,,12345678.



ACCOUNT#1 Format:

[X] CONTACT ID


[ ] SIA 300 Baud

[ ] SIA 110 Baud




ACCOUNT#2 ID:

654321

654321->Default



ACCOUNT#2 Telnum:

101

[ 101 ]->Default

Same as Account#1.

Same as Account#1.



ACCOUNT#2 Format:

[X] CONTACT ID


[ ] SIA 300 Baud

[ ] SIA 110 Baud

Same as Account#1.


45

Configuration



Telephone Line

-Telephone Line-

1. Line1 Dialtype

2. Line2 Dialtype

3. Line1 Dialtone

4. Line2 Dialtone

5. Num of Retries


Line



[X] DTMF Dial


[ ] Pulse Dial



Line



[X] DTMF Dial


Line



[X] ENABLE


Line



[X] ENABLE


[ ] Pulse Dial

Same as Line#1.


[ ] DISABLE



[ ] DISABLE

Same as Line#1.

46



Line


Number of Retries:

06

06 ->Default

Number of retries ranges between 5 to 10




Report Options

-Report Options-

1. Alarm Prio.

2. Trouble Prio.

3. Supv. Prio

4. Aux Dis Report


Options

1. Alarm Report priority

Alarm Report Prio:

[X] Account 1


Options


Trouble Report Prio:

[X] Account 1


Options

3. Supervisory priority

SUPV Report Prio:

[X] Account 1


[ ] Account 2



[ ] Account 2



[ ] Account 2


47

Configuration


Options

4. Aux Disc Alm/Supv Rpt.

AuxDis Alm/Supv Rpt.

[X] DISABLE

[ ] ENABLE








Time Parameters

-Time Parameter-

1. AC-Loss Delay

2. Cellphone Date

3. Auto-Test Time


Parameter

1. AC Loss delay

AC-Loss Delay(Hrs)

0


Parameter

2. Cellular report date

Cellular Report Date

0


Parameter


Auto-Test (HH:MM):

00:30

0 ->Default

The AC loss delay ranges from 0 to 20 hours

Use this function to delay the reporting of AC loss trouble on the dialer for the programmed time period. Press UP or

DOWN button to increase or decrease the number of hours.

0 ->Default

The cellular report date ranges from 0 to

28

00:30 ->Default


Other settings could be anywhere from 01-28, representing which day of the month the test should be performed. Press the UP or

DOWN buttons to scroll through the days.


00:30 is 30 minutes after midnight. Press the UP or DOWN buttons to increase or decrease the time.


01:55, 02:00 and 03:00.

48





Dialer Ena/Dis

[X] ENABLE

------WARNING-----

Dialer Disabled!!!


[ ] DISABLE




-Dialer Test-

1. L#1 Manual test

2. L#2 Manual test

3. Reset Dialer

L#1 Manual test

L#2 Manual test

3. Reset Dialer








49

Configuration



Dialer idle now The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This message automatically displays when Manual

Test is selected.

No DC Volt


Waiting for Dialtone


Failed: No Dialtone

Dialing Receiver Now



No DTMF tone

Waiting for Acktone

Failed no Acktone

Reporting Event Now

Waiting for Kissoff







50


No Kissoff


Passed: Manual Test




51

Operating the Panel

Operating the Panel

Panel Operation During Various Hazard States

The escalating hazard zone states include Idle, Alert, Alarm and Release. They are defined based on the status of

Hazard Area input zone(s), correlated Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch.

Hazard Idle

• No correlated alarm zone active.



• Abort Switch is off.

• Manual Release Switch is off.

• Corresponding NAC circuit is off.

• Releasing circuit(s) is off.

Hazard Alert (or equivalently first Alarm in Cross-zoned Application)

• The panel enters the Hazard Alert state when

• a single alarm comes in for a cross-zoned hazard. For non cross-zoned hazard area, a single alarm will put hazard into Hazard Alarm state directly.

• the Abort Switch becomes active during Hazard Alarm state, so that the hazard area state downgrades from

Hazard Alarm to Hazard Alert.



• Correlated NAC circuit(s) turns on at alert rate.

Hazard Alarm (pre-discharge, or equivalently second Alarm in Cross-zoned Application)

• The panel enters the Hazard Alarm state when

• it detects the confirming alarm for hazard area (single alarm active for the non cross-zoned system, or 2nd alarm active in the cross-zoned system), or

• Manual Release Switch is active.

• Release Timer (RT) is started when the panel enters Hazard Alarm state after by detecting the 2nd alarm in cross-zoned hazard or 1st alarm in non cross-zoned hazard.

• Manual Release Delay Timer is started when the panel enters Hazard Alarm state by detecting the correlated

Manual Release Switch active.

• Releasing circuit(s) will be activated after the Release Timer or Manual Release Timer expires.

• Corresponding NAC(s) turns on at alarm rate.

• During Hazard Alarm State, when the release timer is running and the Abort Switch turns on, the hazard area state will change from Hazard Alarm to Hazard Alert. Release Timer is held and the corresponding NAC sounds the Alert rate. If the Abort Switch is released, the hazard state will go back to Hazard Alarm and the Release

Timer resumes running. The value of release timer depends on Abort Delay Type. The corresponding NAC sounds Alarm rate again.

Hazard Release

• Panel enters Hazard Release when the Release Timer or Manual Release Timer expires. The correlated releasing circuit is activated.

• NAC code for Hazard Release state is steady.

52


General Panel Operation

• Activation of Manual Release Switch starts the Manual Release Delay Timer. The expiration of Manual-release

Delay Timer (MDT) activates the releasing circuits consequently. Manual Release Switch overrides the Abort

Switch always and Manual-release Timer (MDT) always overrides Release Timer (RT).

• When the manual release switch is active and the panel is in the Hazard Alarm (pre-discharge) state, Abort

Switch cannot override the Manual Release Switch. Only the System Reset key can interrupt and reset the panel and hazard area.

• System Reset will reset all circuits, including releasing circuits.

• The supervisory circuit can be optionally indicated on NAC-2 circuit. The NAC code of supervisory circuit should be different from those of Hazard Alert or Hazard Alarm. By default, when the NAC code for Hazard Alert is

Temporal, the NAC code for supervisory circuit is 20 BPM or verse visa. This configuration change is automatically done by the panel. If NAC code for alert is chosen other than 20 BPM and Temporal, Supervisory

NAC code will remain unchanged during the configuration.

• In some pre-programmed modes, the Alert Rate and the Alarm Rate are configured the same. So the action of

Abort Switch does not change the NAC rate.

• AB/MR is the combination of Manual Release Switch and Abort Switch in the Agent Release panel. Short condition means Manual Release active. Current Limit means Abort Switch active.

• To avoid the conflict of different NAC code on the same circuit, the priority of signals are defined as, Water-flow alarm has the highest priority, then hazard cadence. The supervisory signal has the lowest priority.

• Soak Timer sets the time period how long the releasing circuits should be active. Upon the expiration of soak timer, the releasing circuits will be shut off. Setting of 0 second means the releasing circuits will be turned on without timer running. They will be shut off upon system reset.

• Abort function is not applicable in pre-action and deluge application.

53


Pre-Programmed Modes


Detection Zones Phantom Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Zp1 Zp2

Release Timers

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing








X X X X

X (X) X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X





• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (Non-latching by default)


• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release Switch










54










•

• Activation of either Z-1or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Idle into Alert. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.

• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change the Hazard Area1 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on steady.

NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM. Release timer-1 (RT-1) is started.

• Expiration of Release Timer-1 change Hazard Area 1 state to Release. Both RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on. NAC-2 sounds steady.

• Activation of Z-6 in any situation changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on steady, NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM. The manual release delay timer 1 (MDT-1) is started. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, Hazard

Area 1 state changes to Release. RAC-1 and RAC-2 are activated. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turns on steady.

• When Hazard Area 1 state is in Alarm, if Z-5 is pressed, Release Timer-1 is held and NAC-2 rate changes from

120BPM to Temporal. After releasing of Z-5, Release Timer-1 resumes running and NAC-2 goes back to

120BPM. Release Timer -1 value depends on Abort Delay Type.



55



Detection Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6

Phantom Zones

Zp1 Zp2

Release Timers

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing








X X X X

X (X) X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X




• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Water-flow or pressure switch)

• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (default non-latching)


















• Default NAC code of Supervisory Signal is 20 BPM.

56




• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes the Hazard Area 1 state from Idle into Alarm directly. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 turns on Temporal. Release Timer-1 is started.


• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual-release Timer 1 (MDT-1) in any situation. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 turns on Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on.

• During Hazard Alarm state, if Z-5 is pressed, Release Timer-1 is held. After releasing of Z-5, Release Timer-1 resumes running and Release Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.



57


Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







Z1 Z2

Detection Zones

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp


X X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X























58



• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area1 state from Idle into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.

• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area1 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on at 120BPM.



• Short on Z-5 indicates Manual Release Switch active. Manual Release Delay Timer 1 (MDT-1) is started. NAC-


RAC-1 is activated.


Timer is held and NAC-1 changes from 120BPM to Temporal.

• Removal of the current limit on Z-5 means that Abort Switch is released. Hazard Area 1 state changes from

Alert to Alarm. Release Timer -1 resumes running and NAC-1 goes back to 120BPM. Release Timer-1 value depends on Abort Delay Type.

• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state from Idle into Alert. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.

• Activations of both Z-3 and Z-4 turn the Hazard Area 2 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM.



• Short on Z-6 indicates Manual Release Switch active. Manual Release Delay Timer - 2(MDT-2) is started. NAC-


RAC-2 is activated


Timer -2 is held and NAC-2 changes from 120BPM to Temporal.

• Removal of the current limit on Z-6 means Abort Switch is released. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Alert to

Alarm. Release Timer -2 resumes running and NAC-2 goes back to 120BPM. Release Timer-2 value depends on Abort Delay Type.

59


Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







Z1 Z2

Detection Zones

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp


X X X

X X X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X X

X

X























• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area1 state from Idle to Alarm. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.

Release Timer-1 is started.

60


• Upon expiration of Release Timer-1. RAC-1 is activated. NAC-1 turns on Steady.

• A current limit on Z-5 means Abort Switch active. Release Timer-1 is held. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.

Removal of the current limit on Z-5 means that Abort Switch is released. Release Timer -1 resumes. Release


• Short on Z-5 indicates Manual Release active. Manual Release Delay Timer - 1 (MDT-1) is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-1 turns on steady and RAC-1 is activated.

• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 turns the Hazard Area 2 state from Idle into Alarm. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.


• Upon expiration of Release Timer-2, RAC-2 is activated. NAC-2 turns on steady.

• A current limit on Z-6 means Abort Switch active. Release Timer -2 is held. Removal of the current limit on Z-6, means releasing Abort Switch. Release Timer -2 resumes running. Release Timer 2 value depends on Abort

Delay Type.

• Short on Z-6 indicates Manual Release active and Manual Release Delay Timer - 2(MDT-2) is started. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-2, NAC-2 turns on steady and RAC-2 is activated.

61


Mode 5: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing




Detection Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5


X X X X

(X)

Z6

WF

X

X

Phantom Zones

Zp1

Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4

RT1 Exp

X

X

X

62







• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow Alarm.

• NAC -1: Signal, will be activated if there is any alarm zone active.

• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 status, Supervisory Optional.
















• Activation of Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 1 state from Idle to Alert. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 sounds Temporal.

• Activations of any two of Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 and Z-4 change Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. NAC-2 turns on at 120 BPM. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, both RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on.

NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on Steady

• Activation of Z-6 turns on both NAC-1 and NAC-2 steady.

• Activation of Z-5 is indicated on NAC-2 at 20 BPM, if configured.


Mode 6: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing




Detection Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5


X X X X

(X)

X X X X

Z6

WF

X

Phantom Zones

Zp1

Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4

RT1 Exp

X

X








• NAC -1: Signal, steady on any alarm.

• NAC -2: Supervisory optional.
















• Activation of any one among Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 and Z-4 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, NAC-1 turns on steady. RAC-1 and RAC-2 are activated.

• Activation of Z-5 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20 BPM, if configured.

• Activation of Z-6 turns NAC-1 steady.

63


Mode 7: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







Detection Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5


Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp

WF Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4

X X

X X

X

X

X

X
























64




• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1 turns on steady.


• Activations of both Z-3 and Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state into Alarm. Release Timer 2 is started. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 2, RAC-2 is active. NAC-2 turns on steady.

• Activation of Z-6 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 steady.


65


Mode 8: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release

Detection Zones

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp

Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv

X X

X X

WF

X

X

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







X X

X X

X

X










• RAC 1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)














66



• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer 1 is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1 turns on steady.

• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state into Alarm. Release Timer 2 is started. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal. Upon expiration of Release Timer 2, RAC-2 is active. NAC-2 turns on steady.



67


Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, NYC abort

Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Releasing

Out4 Strobe Steady







Z1 Z2

Detection Zones

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp


X

X

X

(X) X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X








• NAC-1: Escalating Signal, indicate Hazard Area 1 status.

• NAC-2: Escalating Signal, indicate Hazard Area 1 status, Supervisory Optional.


• NAC-3: Silenceable Strobe.




• Default Abort Delay Type: NYC









68




• The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 120BPM. Hazard Area 1 state changes to Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started.

• Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1, NAC-2 and NAC-3 turn on steady.

• If Abort Switch Z-5 is active when Release Timer-1 is running, Hazard Area 1 state changes to Alert. NAC-2 turns off and NAC-1 turns on Steady. Release Timer-1 is held.

• If Abort Switch Z-5 is released, NAC-1 turns off and NAC-2 turns on 120BPM. Release Timer resumes running.

Release Timer-1's value depends on Abort Delay Type.

• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Timer 1 (MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-2 and NAC-3 turn on steady. RAC-1 is active.

• Activation of Z-4 is indicated at 20BPM on NAC-2, if configured.

69



Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







Z1 Z2

Detection Zones

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp


X X X X

X (X) X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X








• NAC -1: Signal, will be activated steady when there is any alarm zone active.


• RAC 1: Releasing Circuit










• Hazard Alert: 20BPM



• Default NAC code of supervisory is Temporal

70




• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started.


• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Delay Timer -1(MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, both RAC-1 and

RAC-2 are active. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on steady.

• If Z-5 is active, Release Timer-1 is held and NAC-2 is downgraded from 60BPM to 20 BPM.

• Releasing of Z-5 resumes Release Timer-1 and NAC-2 goes back to 60BPM. Release Timer-1's value depends on Abort Delay Type.


• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at Temporal, if configured.

71



Out1 Signal Steady


Out3 Rel.

Out4 Rel.

Releasing

Releasing







Z1 Z2

Detection Zones

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6


Zp1 Zp2

RT1

Exp

RT2

Exp


X

X (X) X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X





• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (Default non-latching)



















72




• The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started.

• Expiration of Release Timer-1 results in the activation of RAC-1 and RAC-2. NAC-2 turns on steady.

• If Z-5 is active, when the Release Timer-1 is running, NAC-2 turns off and NAC-1 turns on Steady. The Release

Timer is held.

• If Z-5 is released, NAC-1 turns off and NAC-2 turns on 60BPM. Release Timer-1 resumes running. Release


• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Delay Timer-1(MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, RAC-1 and

RAC-2 are active. NAC-2 turns on steady.

• Activation of Z-3 turns NAC-2 on steady.

• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20BPM, if configured.

73



The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR):














74

Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices


series supported synchronous horn/strobe (UL and ULC listed)

Horn/Strobes

Maximum # of Devices

Secutron

MRA-HS3-24ww 8

Amseco/Potter

FHS-240-110 9

System Sensor

P1224MC

Wheelock

NS-24MCW-FW

5

13

MR-2320 series supported synchronous module (UL and ULC listed)

Sync Modules

Secutron

AVS44R

Amseco/Potter

SDM-240

System Sensor

MDL

Wheelock

DSM 12/24

75

Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices

MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (ULC listed)

Make Model/Base

System Sensor

1400A

2400A

1451/B401B

2451/B401B

MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (UL listed)

Make Model/Base

System Sensor

1400

2400

1451/B401B

2451/B401B

Compatibility Identifier head/base

A- N/A

A-N/A

A-A

A-A

Rated standby current

(mA)

0.10

0.12

0.12

0.12

MR-2320 series compatible solenoids

ASCO 8210 series

T8210A107 24VDC

R8210A107 24VDC

8210A107 24VDC

76


Appendix C: Reporting












NORMAL)

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

Test


Zone Fire Alarm



Test

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble



Trouble

Supervisory


Waterflow Alarm

Waterflow restored



AC power lost

AC power restored

Battery Low


Ground Fault


Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Restore 3 113

New event 1 320

Restore 3 320

New event 1 301

Restore 3 301

New event 1 302

Restore 3 302

New event 1 310

Restore 3 310

Qualifier Code

New event 1 351

New event 1 352

Restore

Restore

3 351

3 352

New event 1 354

Restore 3 354

New event 1 602

New event 1 608

New event 1 601

New event 1 110

Restore 3 110

New event 1 300

Restore 3 300

New event 1 200

Restore 3 200

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00


00

00

00

00

Acct #

Acct #

00

000

000

000

000

Acct #

Acct #

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

77

Appendix C: Reporting




Event Description










Zone Fire Alarm






Waterflow alarm




AC power lost

AC power restored

Battery Low


Ground Fault


Event Family

Test

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Supervisory

Supervisory

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

Test

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Qualifier

SIA Event

Code

FJ

FS

FR

WA

RX

FA

FH

FT

RT

YK

RP

RY

LT

LT

LR

LR

AR

YT

YR

YP

YQ

WH

UT

UR

AT

New event

New event

Restore

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

New event

New event

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

Parameter

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

001

002

001

002

Acct #

Acct #

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

78


Appendix D: Specifications

MR-2320 series pre-action/deluge, releasing control panel






6.5A AC maximim @ secondary of transformer

Battery





2 supervised style Y (Class B) indicating circuits, configured as strobes or audibles. Terminals are labeled “SIG 1,2”


Releasing Circuit

Power Limited/Special application 18.18-26.08VRMS/1.7A Max

Terminals are labelled “SIG 3,4”





If no auxiliaries are used the max power is 5A for the indicating and the releasing circuits


Aux supply (non resettable)

Power limited / 21.1Vdc regulated / 500mA max





Minimum Load 5mA





6 supervised style B (Class B) initiating circuits, configurable.

Terminals are labeled “DET”. Compatibility ID “A”

Power limited / 19VDC reg. / 3mA for detectors /110MVpp AC ripple / 45mA max (alarm short)


For remote annunciators. Terminals are labeled “RS-485”. Line impedence is 120 ohms.

MR-2300-PRPolarity reversal city tie module (optional)


Ground Fault Circuit

Less the 3K will generate a ground fault.

MR-2306-R6 Relay adder module

















City tie power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 250mA max / 14ohms trip coil


8.5mA max (shorted)





Current consumption standby 50mA / alarm 300mA (city tie in use) / alarm 70mA (city tie not in use

System Model: MR-2320 Series Control Unit - Fire

Alarm, for Releasing services

System Type: Local Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR),

Remote Protected Premises Station (using MR-2300-

PR or MR-2320-DR/R). Central Station Protected

Premises (using MR-2320-DR/R) For ULC application also use MR-2300-PR for alternate communication path.



Applicable Standards: NFPA 12, 12A, 12B, 12, 15,

16,70,72,2001, UL-864 Rev. 9, ULC S-524, ULC S-

527-99

79

Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)

Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations





Refer to Appendix A on page 74 for specifications.

Model

Number

MR-2320-R

MR-2320-DR

MR-2300-A

MR-2300-NC2

MR-2300-PR

MR-2306-R6

MR-2312-S12



Total

Standby



Panel FIXED ELR/

ACTIVE ELR



Panel FIXED ELR/

ACTIVE ELR with dialer


Adder Module




Tie Module

X

X

X

X

X

0.123/

0.092

0.123/

0.100

0.000

0.000

0.050

=

=

Alarm

0.316/

0.292

0.318/

0.300

= 0.000

= 0.000

= 0.300

X 0.000

= 0.080



Module

X 0.030

= 0.140

MR-2306/12-

ATW

MR-2300T

Remote Annunciators



X

X

X

0.035

0.035

Ò 0.00011

=

=

=

0.090

0.035

* 0.135

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

Total

Alarm

Four-Wire Smoke Detectors


X

X

= =

=


=



' Use 0.084

for five minutes, 0.168 for 10 minutes and 0.5 for 5 minutes of alarm as a multiplier figure.

Ò Using the 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector. See Appendix A on page 74 for other compatible smoke detectors.


ALARM


Battery (AH) = ( [STANDBY ( A ) ______ ] x [(24,60 or 90 Hours) ___ ] ) +

( [ALARM ( B ) ______ ] x [Alarm in Hr.] _____ ) = ( C ) ______AH

Total System Current in Alarm State: Must be 5.5 amperes or less for MR-2320 Series.


(

=

B )

80







System Failures




• Power Failure






•System Users




81


• Software


















82












•water damage;
















83





84









Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S


U SER

G UIDE

Revision A






Secutron Inc.

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3















MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide

Contents

Contents.................................................................................................................................... i

Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1

About this Manual ................................................................................................................. 1

Technical SupportTechnical Support .................................................................................... 1

Main Display ............................................................................................................................. 2

The Buzzer and LED Indicators .............................................................................................. 3

Common LED Indicators....................................................................................................... 3

Alarm Circuit Indicators......................................................................................................... 5

Supervisory Circuit Indicators ............................................................................................... 5

Monitor Circuit Indicators ...................................................................................................... 5

Trouble-only Circuit Indicators .............................................................................................. 6

Signal Circuit Indicators ........................................................................................................ 6

Main Display Buttons............................................................................................................... 7

Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons......................................................................................... 8

Glossary.................................................................................................................................... 9 i


Introduction

About this Manual

This user’s guide provides information on the main indicators and controls of the MR-2300 Fire Alarm Control

Panel. Specifically, with this manual you will learn about what the LEDs indicate and what the buttons on the main display do.

Refer to the Glossary on page 9 for an explanation of commonly used terms in this manual.

Technical Support

For all technical support inquiries, please contact Secutron’s Technical Support Department between 8 A.M. and 5

P.M. (EDT) Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.

Local Phone: 1-888-732-8876

Local Fax: (905) 660-4113

Toll-Free Phone: 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876)

Toll-Free Fax:1-888-660-4113

1

Main Display

Main Display

Refer to the diagram below for the LED indicators and control buttons locations.

WALK

TEST

REMOTE

TROUBLE

CPU FAIL

GROUND

FAULT

ZONE-1

DISCONNECT

ZONE-3

DISCONNECT

ZONE-5

DISCONNECT

ZONE-7

DISCONNECT

ZONE-9

DISCONNECT

ABORT

NAC-1

DISCONNECT

RELEASE

CIRCUIT-1

SIGNAL

SILENCE

FIRE

DRILL

ACK

GENERAL

ALARM

A.C.

ON

COMMON

ALARM

COMMON

SUPV

COMMON

TROUBLE

BATTERY

TROUBLE

SYSTEM

RESET

AUX

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

ZONE-2

DISCONNECT

ZONE-4

DISCONNECT

ZONE-6

DISCONNECT

ZONE-8

DISCONNECT

ZONE-10

DISCONNECT

MANUAL

RELEASE

NAC-2

DISCONNECT

RELEASE

CIRCUIT-2

The main display panel on the main fire alarm control board consists of:

• 18 common LED indicators (top half of display)

• Eight common buttons (top half of display)

• Up to 12 Initiating circuit alarm LEDs and 12 initiating circuit trouble LED indicators

• Four indicating circuit LEDs (labeled NAC- Notifying Appliance Circuit)

• Up to sixteen disconnect buttons (12 for initiating circuit & four for indicating circuits)

LED indicators may be amber, red, or green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two flash rates:

• Fast flash (supervisory): 120 flashes per minute

• Trouble flash (trouble): 20 flashes per minute

Paper labels for buttons and indicators

Each display is supplied with laser printable labels. These labels slide into the plastic label templates on the panel.

2


The Buzzer and LED Indicators

Common LED Indicators

Buzzer

The buzzer sounds if there is a fire alarm, a supervisory alarm, or a trouble in the fire alarm system. It turns off if the condition causing the buzzer to sound goes away or if the Buzzer Silence Button is pressed.

AC On LED

A.C.

ON

The green AC On LED illuminates steadily as long as the main power is above minimum level. The indicator turns off when the level falls below the minimum level and the panel switches to standby

(battery) power.


COMMON

ALARM

The red Common Alarm LED will illuminate steadily whenever there is a fire alarm. If the panel is set for two stage operation, pressing the red General Alarm button will also turn on the Common

Alarm indicator. This indicator will remain on until the system is reset.


COMMON

SUPV

The amber Common Supervisory LED illuminates at the fast flash rate when there is a supervisory alarm in the fire alarm system. For non-latching supervisory alarms, the Supervisory LED will turn off when the condition causing the alarm goes away. For latching supervisory alarms, this LED remains on until the panel is reset.


COMMON

TROUBLE

The amber Common Trouble LED flashes at the trouble flash rate when the panel detects any trouble condition. For non-latching trouble conditions, the Common Trouble LED will turns off when the condition causing the alarm goes away. For latching trouble conditions, this LED remains on until the panel is reset.


REMOTE

TROUBLE

The amber Remote Trouble LED flashes at the trouble flash rate if the panel detects a trouble at the

City Tie or UDACT module, communication trouble with a remote annunciator, or a local trouble at a remote annunciator.

Fire Drill LED

FIRE

DRILL

The amber Fire Drill LED illuminates steadily after you press the Fire Drill button. This LED remains on until you press the Fire Drill button again.

Acknowledge LED

ACK

If the panel is configured as a two-stage system, the amber Acknowledge LED flashes at the fast flash rate while the Auto General Alarm timer is timing out. The Acknowledge indicator illuminates steadily when the General Alarm timer is cancelled by the pressing of the Acknowledge or Signal

Silence buttons. If the Auto General Alarm timer times out and puts the panel into general alarm, this LED turns off.

3

The Buzzer and LED Indicators

General Alarm LED

GENERAL

ALARM

If the panel is configured as a two-stage system, the red General Alarm LED illuminates steadily when the General Alarm button is pushed, a General Alarm Initiating circuit is activated, or the Auto

General Alarm timer times out. Once the General Alarm LED has turned on, it will stay active until the panel is reset.

Walk Test LED

WALK

TEST

The amber Walk Test indicator illuminates steadily to indicate that the panel is in walk test mode. If the panel is left in this mode for over an hour with no operator activity, the panel will return to normal and the Walk Test indicator will turn OFF.

CPU Fail LED

CPU FAIL

The CPU Fail LED flashes amber at the trouble flash rate to indicate a microprocessor failure on the main board.


AUX

DISCONNECT

The amber Auxiliary Disconnect LED flashes at the trouble rate when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed. It turns off when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed a second time. When on, the Auxiliary Disconnect LED signifies that auxiliary alarm relay and relay adder modules (if disconnect is enabled) are not activated. If installed and enabled, the city tie module and the smart relay annunciator relays are also inactive.


SIGNAL

SILENCE

The Signal Silence indicator flashes amber at the trouble rate when indicating circuits are silenced either by the Signal Silence button or by the Auto Signal Silence timer. It turns off when the signals are re-sounded by a subsequent alarm or when the panel is reset.


BATTERY

TROUBLE

The amber Battery Trouble LED flashes at the trouble rate when the battery is either low or disconnected.


GROUND

FAULT

The amber Ground Fault LED flashes at the trouble rate when the ground fault detector detects a ground fault on any field wiring. It turns off when the ground fault is cleared.


SYSTEM

RESET

The amber System Reset LED illuminates for a short time when the System Reset button is pressed.

4




Sprinkler Alarm, or General Alarm Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications at different events:

Event


Disconnected

Circuit in Alarm

Circuit in Alarm



(amber)


(amber)

OFF

Steady (red)

Configuration

Verified Alarm

Non-Verified Alarm

Water Flow Alarm

Sprinkler Alarm

General Alarm


Verified Alarm

Sprinkler Alarm

Water flow Alarm

Active circuit reconnected OFF


This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as latching or non-latching supervisory circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events:

Event


Disconnected

Circuit in Alarm

Circuit in Alarm




(amber)


(amber)

OFF

Steady (amber)


Configuration

Latching Sup.

Non-Latching Sup.

Latching Sup.

Non-Latching Sup.


This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as monitor circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events:

Event


Disconnected

Circuit Active

Circuit Active




(amber)


(amber)

OFF

Steady (amber)


Configuration

Monitor

Monitor

5



This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as Trouble-Only Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events:

Event


Disconnected

Short Circuit



(amber)


(amber)


(amber)

Configuration

Trouble Only




Open Circuit

Disconnected

Short Circuit



(amber)


(amber)


(amber)

Configuration

Signal

6


Main Display Buttons


The System Reset button resets the fire alarm control panel and all circuits.

SIGNAL

SILENCE


SIGNAL

SILENCE

Pressing the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm deactivates any silenceable signal devices in the fire alarm system. Non-Silenceable signal devices are unaffected. If you press the

Signal Silence button a second time, or if there is a subsequent alarm, the signals will re-sound. If the panel has been configured with a Signal Silence Inhibit timer, this button will not work until the timer times out. This button also does not work if you have pressed the Fire Drill button.In a two stage system, if the Auto General Alarm timer has timed out, this button also performs the same function as the Acknowledge button.


FIRE

DRILL

Pressing the Fire Drill button will simulate a fire alarm by activating the fire alarm signals without transmitting an alarm to the central station. To cancel the fire drill, press the button again. If the fire alarm system goes into a real alarm while you are performing a fire drill, this button will not turn off the signals or activate any programmed relays.

Acknowledge Button

ACK

If the panel is not configured for two-stage operation, this button is not active. If the panel is configured for two-stage operation, pressing the Acknowledge button while the Auto General Alarm timer is timing (there is an alarm in the panel, but it is still in the first stage), the timer is cancelled and the amber Acknowledge LED illuminates steadily.

General Alarm Button (or Info button for single stage system)

GENERAL

ALARM

If the panel is not configured for two-stage operation, this button is not active. If the panel is configured for two-stage operation, pressing the General Alarm button immediately sends the panel into second stage general alarm. It will also re-activate the signals if they have been silenced during general alarm. The general alarm condition remains active until the panel is reset.


AUX

DISCONNECT

Pressing the Auxiliary Disconnect button activates the auxiliary disconnect function. Pressing the button again de-activates this function.


LAMP

TEST

Pressing and holding the Lamp Test button causes all front panel LEDs to illuminate and sounds the buzzer. Use this button to test that all LEDs in the main display are working. If you hold the

Lamp Test button for more than ten seconds, the Trouble LED will illuminate.


BUZZER

SILENCE

Pressing the Buzzer Silence button while the buzzer is sounding silences the buzzer. The buzzer will resound if there is a subsequent event. Pressing the button when the buzzer is not sounding has no effect.

7

Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons

Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons

Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons are provided for all initiating and indicating circuits on the fire alarm control panel.

These buttons are located beside their respective indicating LEDs.

Pressing a circuit disconnect button disconnects that circuit from the system and turns on its trouble indicator. While a circuit is disconnected, the panel will ignore all changes in the status (alarms and troubles) of that circuit. Circuit disconnect buttons are toggle switches; therefore, pressing an activated button a second time will reconnect the circuit.

Disconnecting an active latching initiating circuit such as alarms, water-flow alarm, sprinkler alarm, general alarm, and latching supervisory does not affect its status until the panel is reset. Disconnecting active non-latching initiating circuits including non-latching supervisory and trouble-only causes them to behave as if the alarm situation has disappeared. Disconnecting an active indicating circuit immediately deactivates the circuit.

When an initiating circuit disconnect button is pressed a second time, the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active and will cause a false alarm, the Status LED flashes for ten seconds at the fast flash rate (red for alarm or amber for supervisory) without processing the input. If the circuit is not re-disconnected by then, it will be processed as a new input.

8


Glossary

Alarm

Condition

Occurs when devices such as detectors, pull stations, or sprinklers are activated.

In a single stage system, this condition will activate all signalling devices throughout the building. In a two stage system, this condition will activate an alert signal and the General Alarm timer.

Circuits

Refers to an actual electrical interface and can be classified as initiating

(detection), indicating (signal), or relay. The terms “circuit” and “zone” are often used interchangeably in the fire alarm industry.

Fast Flash Rate

120 flashes per minute is the rate at which an LED will flash to indicate a supervisory alarm.

General Alarm

Timer

In a two stage system, the general alarm timer begins timing when the panel is in the alert stage. When the general alarm timer times out, the system will go into a general alarm, where all signals in the building will sound.

Indicating

Circuit

A circuit in a fire alarm system that is connected to audible or visual signalling devices.

Initiating

Circuit

A circuit in a fire alarm system that is connected to detectors, pull stations, or sprinkler flow switches.

Latching Circuit

A circuit that, when activated, will cause a condition on the panel that cannot be cleared until the panel is reset.

LED

The light-emitting diodes (LEDs) of the MR-2306 ar colored either amber, red, or green. When lit, LEDs provide information regarding the status of the panel.

Monitor

Condition

Occurs when dampers open or close, when supply and return fans are running, etc.

Non-latching

Circuit

A circuit that, when activated, will cause a condition on the panel that will be cleared once the circuit is deactivated. This term is used to describe supervisory and trouble circuits.

Non-

Silenceable

Circuit

Relay Circuit

A signal circuit that cannot be silenced by pressing the Signal Silence button.

A circuit in a fire alarm system that connects relay devices (e.g. fan damper relays, etc).

Remote

Annunciator

A device that visually indicates, either by LCD or LEDs, the floor or zone where the alarm originated.

Single Stage

System

A type of fire alarm system that immediately sounds all the signals throughout the building when an alarm is detected in any part of the system.

Silenceable

Circuit

A signal circuit that can be silenced by pressing the Signal Silence button.

9

Glossary

Supervisory

Condition

Trouble

Condition

Trouble Flash

Rate

Two Stage

System

Walk Test

Zones

Occurs when the system detects open circuits, short circuits, and grounds. A supervisory condition is one that would interfere with the operation of the fire alarm system.

Occurs when an abnormal condition such as a problem in the wiring, battery or power circuits exists in the fire alarm system.

20 flashes per minute is the rate at which an LED will flash to indicate a trouble condition.

A type of fire alarm system that causes an alert signal to sound when an alarm is detected in any part of the system. An alert signal advises designated persons of a fire emergency. If the alert signal is not acknowledged within five minutes of its initiation, an alarm signal will automatically sound throughout the building.

A test performed by a technician to ensure that each detection device is connected to the panel and working properly.

A fire alarm protected area that consists of at least one circuit. The terms “circuit” and “zone” are often used interchangeably in the fire alarm industry.

10



Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S

LCD Fire Alarm Control Panel

U SER

G UIDE

Revision A



MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide

Contents

Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1

About this Manual ................................................................................................................. 1

Technical Support ................................................................................................................. 1

Main Display ............................................................................................................................. 1

The Buzzer and LED Indicators .............................................................................................. 2

Buzzer................................................................................................................................... 2

AC On LED ........................................................................................................................... 2

Alarm LED............................................................................................................................. 2

Supervisory LED ................................................................................................................... 2

Trouble LED.......................................................................................................................... 2

CPU Fail LED........................................................................................................................ 2

Main Display Buttons............................................................................................................... 3

System Reset Button ............................................................................................................ 3

Signal Silence Button............................................................................................................ 3

Fire Drill Button ..................................................................................................................... 3

Lamp Test Button.................................................................................................................. 3

Buzzer Silence Button........................................................................................................... 3

The Up and Down Arrow Buttons ......................................................................................... 3

The Info Button ..................................................................................................................... 3

The Enter, Menu, and Cancel Buttons.................................................................................. 3

Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Circuit (Zone) ...................................................................... 4

Understanding On-screen Messages..................................................................................... 5

Common Messages .............................................................................................................. 6

Glossary.................................................................................................................................... 10 i


Introduction

About this Manual

This user’s guide provides information on the main indicators and controls of the MR-2300 Fire Alarm Control

Panel. Specifically, with this manual you will learn about:

• What the LEDs on the main display indicate

• What the buttons on the main display do

• What certain common LCD screen messages mean

Refer to the Glossary on page 11 for an explanation of commonly used terms in this manual.

Technical Support

For all technical support inquiries, please contact Mircom’s Technical Support Department between 8 A.M. and 5

P.M. (EDT) Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.

Toll-Free Phone: 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876)

Local Fax: 905-660-4113 Toll-Free Fax: 1-888-660-4113

Main Display

Refer to the diagram below for the LCD display, LED indicators, and control buttons locations.

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

FIRE

DRILL

BUZZER

SILENCE

LAMP

TEST

System Normal

18:01 MON 2003-04-05


1

4

GHI

*

7

PRS

2

ABC

5

JKL

8

TUV

0

QZ

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXY

#

ENTER

MENU

CANCEL

INFO

The main display panel on the fire alarm control board consists of:

• Five LED indicators (located just below the LCD screen)

• Five buttons (left edge of display)

• 16 program buttons (right part of display)

LED indicators may be amber, red, or green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two flash rates:

• Fast flash (supervisory): 120 flashes per minute

• Trouble flash (trouble): 20 flashes per minutes

1


The Buzzer and LED Indicators


Buzzer

The buzzer sounds if there is a fire alarm, a supervisory alarm, or a trouble in the fire alarm system. It turns off if the condition causing the buzzer to sound goes away or the Buzzer Silence button is pressed.

AC On LED

The green AC On LED illuminates steadily as long as the main power is above minimum level. The indicator turns off when the level falls below the minimum level and the panel switches to standby (battery) power.

Alarm LED

The red Alarm LED will illuminate steadily whenever there is a fire alarm. This indicator will remain on until the system is reset.

Supervisory LED

The amber Supervisory LED illuminates at the fast flash rate when there is a supervisory alarm in the fire alarm system. For non-latching supervisory alarms, the Supervisory LED will turn off when the condition causing the alarm goes away. For latching supervisory alarms, this LED remains on until the panel is reset.

Trouble LED

The Trouble LED flashes amber at the trouble flash rate when the panel detects any trouble condition. For nonlatching trouble conditions, the Supervisory LED will turns off when the condition causing the alarm goes away. For latching trouble conditions, this LED remains on until the panel is reset.

CPU Fail LED

The CPU Fail LED flashes amber at the trouble flash rate to indicate a microprocessor failure on the main board.

2


Main Display Buttons


The System Reset button resets the fire alarm control panel and all circuits.

SYSTEM

RESET


SIGNAL

SILENCE

Pressing the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm deactivates any silenceable signal devices in the fire alarm system. Non-silenceable signal devices are unaffected. If you press the

Signal Silence button a second time, or if there is a subsequent alarm, the signals will re-sound. If the panel has been configured with a Signal Silence Inhibit timer, this button will not work until the timer times out. This button also does not work if you have pressed the Fire Drill button.


FIRE

DRILL

Pressing the Fire Drill button will simulate a fire alarm by activating the fire alarm signals without transmitting an alarm to the central station. To cancel the fire drill, press the button again. If the fire alarm system goes into a real alarm while you are performing a fire drill, this button will not turn off the signals or operate any programmed relays.


LAMP

TEST

Pressing and holding the Lamp Test button causes the LCD to display the software version, all the front panel LEDs to illuminate, and sounds the buzzer. Use this button to test that the LCD display and all LEDs on the main display are working. If you hold the Lamp Test button for more than ten seconds, the Trouble LED will illuminate.


BUZZER

SILENCE

Pressing the Buzzer Silence button while the buzzer is sounding silences the buzzer. The buzzer will resound if there is a subsequent event. Pressing the button when the buzzer is not sounding has no effect.

The Up and Down Arrow Buttons

2

ABC

Use these buttons to scroll through any events listed on the screen. The up arrow moves to the next listed condition and the down arrow moves to the previously listed condition.

8

TUV

The Info Button

INFO

Press the Info button while the there is a message on the LCD screen to view additional information.

The Enter, Menu, and Cancel Buttons

The Enter, Menu, and Cancel buttons are only used by technicians to program the fire alarm control panel.

3

Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Circuit (Zone)

Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Circuit (Zone)

You can disconnect and reconnect detection and signal circuits (zones) from the panel using the bypass options in the menu.

To select the bypass options, you must be in the Command Menu. To enter the Command Menu, press

MENU

.

Step 1: Enter your passcode

1.

Enter your passcode.

Enter the passcode

2.

ENTER continue.

Step 2: Select the Bypass Menu

- Bypass Det

Zone -

È

1.

Use

2

ABC

and

8

TUV

to scroll the cursor to select the zone you would like to disconnect / reconnect.

2.

ENTER continue.

Step 3: Select “BYPASSED” or “UNBYPASSED”

1.

Use

2

ABC

and

8

TUV

to scroll the cursor to

• “Bypassed” to disconnect a circuit or

• “Unbypassed” to reconnect a circuit

Zone-1

[ ] BYPASSED

È

2.

Use

4

GHI

and

6

MNO

to toggle the selection ON

(“X” appears), or OFF (space is blank).

3.

ENTER continue.

4.

Press

CANCEL

twice to return to the main menu.

If you have disconnected (bypassed) a circuit, a trouble message will display on the main screen until the circuit is reconnected.

4


Understanding On-screen Messages

The LCD screen of the fire alarm control panel displays messages regarding system events. System events display on the screen in a queue. Events in this queue are listed on the screen in order of priority: alarms are of highest priority, followed by supervisory, trouble, and monitor conditions. If the same type of event happens more than once

(for example, two trouble conditions occur successively) they will be listed in the order of the most recent event to the least recent event. If an alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition occurs, their respective LED will flash.

Scroll through the events by using the

2

ABC

and displayed event, press

INFO

.

8

TUV

arrow buttons. If you need more information about a

Example 1 (detection circuit)

The message below indicates that event 1 of 9 is an open trouble at the East Lobby Entrance. When

INFO

is pressed, the screen shows that the process type is a verified alarm on Z-01 and the event occurred on Tuesday

April 4, 2003 at 18:01.

ZO N E

M essag e

P rocess

T ype

Physical

Zone N o.


O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9

EV E N T type

E V EN T

01 of 09

"IN FO " Key


1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 4

TIM E D AT E


The message below indicates that event 2 of 9 is a short trouble at the East Wing Lobby. When

INFO

is pressed, the screen shows that the process type is silenceable on NAC-1 and the event occurred on Tuesday February 2,

2003 at 18:01.


S H O R T T R B 0 2 / 0 9

EV E N T

Message

“INFO” Key


1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 2

5

Understanding On-screen Messages

Common Messages

Common system messages are outlined below.

AC Power Fail

The “AC Power Fail” message indicates that the power has dropped below the minimum level and the system is running on backup battery power. The trouble is removed when the power returns to the normal value.

T roub le Type


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V E N T

01 of 01

Trouble code Trouble Info

"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 4

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

T IM E D AT E

Battery Trouble

The “Battery Trouble” message indicates that the battery voltage has dropped below the minimum value. The trouble is restored when the voltage returns to the normal value.

T roub le Type


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V E N T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 8

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

T IM E D A T E

Note:

The trouble code is a reference code for trained service personnel only.

6


Ground Fault

The “Ground Fault” message indicates that

T rouble Typ e


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

RAU num mismatch

The “RAU num mismatch” message can display for one of two reasons: either the main panel and annunciator failed to communicate with each other or an unconfigured remote annunciator is communicating with the main panel. In both the cases, the following trouble message is displayed:

T rouble Typ e


E V EN T

01 of 09

"IN FO " Key

T rouble info

T rouble code

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

1 1 : 4 5 S A T 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 3

TIM E

D A T E

Note:


7

Understanding On-screen Messages

4Wire Pwr. Supply

The “4Wire Pwr. Supply” message indicates that the panel has detected a short on a four-wire smoke supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the SYSTEM

RESET

key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.

T roub le Type


E V E N T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

T IM E D AT E


The “Aux. Power Supply” message indicates that the panel has detected a short on the auxiliary power supply

(battery backup) and has cut it off. Press SYSTEM

RESET

to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.

T roub le Type


E V E N T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

T IM E D AT E

Note:


8


City tie Polarity reversal - SPR-200/ Relay module

The “CtyTie/MR2312 missin” message below indicates that the city tie, polarity reversal module or the relay module is not plugged in.

T rouble Typ e

A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

The “City Tie trouble” message below indicates that the panel detects an open on the city tie output.

T rouble Typ e


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

Note:


9

Glossary

Glossary

Alarm Condition

Occurs when devices such as detectors, pull stations, or sprinklers are activated. In a single stage system, this condition will activate all signalling devices throughout the building. In a two stage system, this condition will activate an alert signal and the General Alarm timer.

Circuits

Refers to an actual electrical interface and can be classified as initiating (detection), indicating (signal), or relay. The terms “circuit” and “zone” are often used interchangeably in the fire alarm industry.

Fast Flash Rate

120 flashes per minute is the rate at which an LED will flash to indicate a supervisory alarm.

Indicating Circuit

A circuit in a fire alarm system that is connected to audible or visual signalling devices.

Initiating Circuit

A circuit in a fire alarm system that is connected to detectors, pull stations, or sprinter flow switches.

Latching Circuit

A circuit that, when activated, will cause a condition on the panel that cannot be cleared until the panel is reset.

LED

The light-emitting diodes (LEDs) of the MR-2300 are colored either amber, red, or green. When lit, LEDs provide information regarding the status of the panel.

Monitor Condition

Occurs when dampers open or close, when supply and return fans are running, etc.

Non-latching Circuit

A circuit that, when activated, will cause a condition on the panel that will be cleared once the circuit is deactivated.

This term is used to describe supervisory and trouble circuits.

Non-Silenceable Circuit

A signal circuit that cannot be silenced by pressing the Signal Silence button.

Relay Circuit

A circuit in a fire alarm system that connects relay devices (e.g. fan damper relays, etc).


A device that visually indicates, either by LCD or LEDs, the floor or zone where the alarm originated.

Silenceable Circuit

A signal circuit that can be silenced by pressing the Signal Silence button.

Supervisory Condition

Occurs when the system detects open circuits, short critics, and grounds. A supervisory condition is one that would interfere with the operation of the fire alarm system.

Trouble Condition

Occurs when an abnormal condition such as a problem in the wiring, battery or power circuits exists in the fire alarm system.

10


Trouble Flash Rate

20 flashes per minute is the rate at which an LED will flash to indicate a trouble condition.

Walk Test

A test performed by a technician to ensure that each detection device is connected to the panel and working properly.

Zones

A fire alarm protected area that consists of at least one circuit. The terms “circuit” and “zone” are often used interchangeably in the fire alarm industry.

11



Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

M R - 2 3 0 6 - L D


I

NSTALLATION &

O

PERATION

G

UIDE

Document #: LT-950SEC Rev. 2

February 2007


MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual

Table Of Contents


Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2


Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3

Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3

Zone...................................................................................................................................... 3

Display Points ....................................................................................................................... 3

Wiring Styles ......................................................................................................................... 3










MR-2312-AT Remote Annunciator........................................................................................ 6











Field wiring ............................................................................................................................... 13





Wiring Tables and Information .............................................................................................. 19



Auxiliary Power (unfiltered) ................................................................................................... 19

System Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 20





Common Indicators............................................................................................................... 22

Alarm Circuit Indicators......................................................................................................... 23

Supervisory Circuit Indicators ............................................................................................... 23

Monitor Circuit Indicators ...................................................................................................... 24

Trouble-only Circuit Indicators .............................................................................................. 24

Signal Circuit Indicators ........................................................................................................ 24

Common Controls ................................................................................................................. 25


Common Relays ................................................................................................................... 26

Circuit Types ......................................................................................................................... 27


Table Of Contents

Single Stage Operation ........................................................................................................ 29




Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool .................................................................... 32


Command Menu................................................................................................................... 33


1. PANEL CONFIG (Command-Menu) ................................................................................ 34

2. Config Info (Command-Menu........................................................................................... 43










CFG-300 LCD Service tool operation .................................................................................. 56







Warranty & Warning Information ........................................................................................... 65

Warning Please Read Carefully ........................................................................................... 65

Limited Warranty .................................................................................................................. 67

Warranty Procedure ............................................................................................................. 67

Disclaimer of Warranties ...................................................................................................... 67

Out of Warranty Repairs ...................................................................................................... 68 ii


List of Figres & Tables

Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount ............................................................................7

Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules ...............................................................................8

Figure 3: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings ...............................9

Figure 4: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module .............................................10

Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .....................................11

Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module ....................................................................11

Figure 7: MR-2306-R6 Relay programming .........................................................................12

Figure 8: Polarity reversal and city tie module .....................................................................12

Figure 9: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B wiring ...........................................................13

Figure 10: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring .........................................................14

Figure 11: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring .......................................................14

Figure 12: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring ........................................................15

Figure 13: Four-wire smoke detector wiring .........................................................................15

Figure 14: Dialer wiring ........................................................................................................16

Figure 15: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection ..........................................16

Figure 16: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection ...................................17

Figure 17: Power supply connection ....................................................................................18

Figure 18: LED indicators and control buttons .....................................................................21

Figure 19: Evacuation and Alert Codes ...............................................................................29

Figure 20: MR-2306 Configuration .......................................................................................32

Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board .......................................10

Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings .................................................................................12

Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ...........................................................................................19

Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring .........................................................................................19

iii

List of Figres & Tables iv











CAUTION:

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate


Note:



Secutron’s MR-2300 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Digital Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.




(AHJ).

FCC Notice








Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Fire Alarm Systems or an authorized representative of Secutron Fire Alarm Systems

For information contact Secutron Fire Alarm Systems at the address and phone numbers shown on the back page of this document.

1

Introduction

Introduction

Secutron's MR-2306 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel is a Digital Signal Processor (DSP)-based fire panel. The

MR-2306 provides six supervised Class B or A (Style B or D) Initiating circuits, and four supervised Class B or A

(Style Y or Z) indicating circuits. All circuits are supervised for opens and ground faults, and indicating circuits are supervised for shorts. Optional modules include Relay, Polarity Reversal and City Tie and Class A Converters for initiating and indicating circuits. Semi-flush or surface mountable enclosures can be used for retrofits and on new installations.

Note:



70 and NFPA 72. Final acceptance subject to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Testing and maintenance as per ULC-S536



Class A converter adder modules. Each initiating circuit can be configured as Alarm, Verified Alarm, Water flow

Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory, Monitor or Trouble-Only circuit. There are two

LEDs per circuit, one for Trouble (amber), and one dual color (amber/red) LED for Supervisory (amber) and

Alarm (red).

• Basic unit has four Power Limited Class B (Style Y) indicating circuits with individual trouble indicators. Each indicating circuit may be configured as Class A (Style Z) using output Class A converter adder module. Each indicating circuit may be configured as Silenceable signal, non Silenceable signal, Silenceable strobe, non

Silenceable strobe. The audible signal may be Steady, Temporal Code, California Code, or March Time.

• A pushbutton associated with each initiating and indicating circuit can individually disconnect the circuit.

• Configurable Signal Silence Inhibit, Auto Signal Silence, and One-Man Walk Test.

• Subsequent Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble operation

• Four-wire resettable smoke power supply 300mA maximum

• Relay Contacts for Common Alarm, Common Supervisory and Common Trouble all non-disconnectable and


• RS-485 Interface for LCD Annunciators, MR-2300 Series Remote Multiplex Annunciators and Smart relay adder.


• Extensive transient protection

• With or without built-in UDACT (Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter)

• Easy configuration of the panel and built-in UDACT using LCD service tool (CFG-300)

• Remote dial up (with built-in UDACT version) for event log checking and/or configuration changing

• Laptop programmer for direct configuration changing and log checking

2


Conventions

Circuits


Zone



Display Points



Wiring Styles



This is done without penalizing the number of circuits, which remains the same as in Class B (Style B). Changing the indicating circuits to Class A requires an MR-2300-NC2 adder board which will convert TWO indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z).

3

System Components




Model

MR-2306-LD(R/W)*

MR-2306-L

Description

6 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (white door, black box). 6 Class B (Style

B) Initiating circuits, and two Power Limited

Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits (up to 1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total). One six zone

MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter adder modules may be used for Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits. One MR-2300-NC2

Output Class A Converter adder module may be used for Class A (Style Z) wiring of the

Indicating circuits. The MR-2306-LD contains







Six-zone Fire Alarm with LED display. Same asMR-2306-LD except without dialer.

*R = red door; W = white door



MR-2306-R6 Six-relay adder module

RELAY 1 RELAY 2

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY 3

NO/NC C

RELAY 4

NO/NC C

RELAY 5 RELAY 6

NO/NC C NO/NC C



MR-2300-PR


JW4

4


7.7"

SYSTEM NORMAL

18:01 MON 2003-04-05

TRBL CPU FAIL

SYSTEM

RESET

A.C. ON ALARM SUPV

FIRE

DRILL

LAMP

TEST

1

4

GHI

7

PRS

*

2

ABC

5

JKL

8

TUV

0

QZ

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXY

#

ENTER

MENU

CANCEL

INFO




Model

MR-2300-LCDW

Description

Remote Annunciator module, LCD display, white painted box

7.2"

MR-2300-LCDR

Remote Annunciator

Module, LCD display, red painted box

1.25"

Model

MR-2312-SW12

Description

Smart Relay Module (12 relays) with white enclosure

MR-2312-SR12

Smart Relay Module (12 relays) with red enclosure

MR-2300 SERIES

REMOTE RELAY

5

System Components


Model

MR-2300-A

Description

Input Class A converter Module

(six circuits). This module has built in Active End-of-Line resistors.


Model

MR-2300-NC2

Description



The ELRX-300 are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.


ELRX-300

RED

BLACK

ELRX-300R





$&

21

%8==(5

6,/(1&(

/$03

7(67

&20021

7528%/(

6,*1$/

6,/(%&(

6:,7&+

(1$%/(

6,*1$/

6,/(1&(

6<67(0

5(6(7

),5($/$50

$1181&,$725


Model: MR-2306-ATW Eight Zone Remote Annunciator

Model: MR-2605-T

Model: MP-300

Model: MP-300R

Model: BC-160


End-of-line resistor plate, 3.9K ohm

End-of-line resistor plate, red


MR-2312-AT 16 Zone remote annunciator




(ULC Approved)


6




Install the MR-2306 Series Fire Alarm Panel enclosure as shown below. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes, as shown and the screws provided.


3/$&(05)775,05,1*29(5%$&.%2;

0RXQWLQJ

+ROHVIRU

6XUIDFH

0RXQWLQJ

$GKHUHWULPULQJWR

ZDOOVXUIDFHDURXQG

WKH05EDFNER[

LVWKHPLQLPXPGHSWK

DERYHWKHZDOOUHTXLUHG

IRUVHPLIOXVKPRXQWLQJ

XVLQJWKHIOXVKWULPULQJ

LVWKHPD[LPXPGHSWK

IRUVHPLIOXVKPRXQWLQJ

XVLQJWKHIOXVKWULPULQJ

Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front and semi-flush mount the backbox into the wall. Peel the adhesive cover from the trim ring and stick to the wall surface around the backbox, after wall is finished.


TRIM RING

WALL MIN 1”

WOOD OR

METAL STUD

BACKBOX

7



MR-2306 Series Fire Alarm panels come pre-assembled with all components and boards except for Adder Modules.

Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 3 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information for wiring specifications.


JW3

JW4

JW7

JW5

JW6

X

M

?

AC ON

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

ABORT ACTIVE

AGENT RELEASED

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

FIRE DRILL

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

GENERAL

ALARM

ACK



JW1


JW2


P6

SIGNAL

POWER


TRB TRL COM- COM+

P6

BATTERY

P5

SEC TX



(6 circuits)

CLASS-A converter board for indicating circuits ME-2300-NC2

(2 circuits)

Transformer

AC wiring terminal

8



Modules


Figure 3: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings


JW3

For front panel programming use CFG-300 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed. Please refer to Document LT-922SEC for details.

JW4 -Normally Short

JW5-Normally Open

JW6-Normally Open


Auxiliary Relay

JW4

JW7

JW5

JW6

Alarm Relay

Supervisory

Relay

Trouble Relay

JW1 - ON- when


Connect to

MR-2300-PR

Connect to

MR-2306-R6 relay module

X

M

?

AC ON

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

WALK TEST

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

FIRE DRILL

IAC1

(ZONE 1)

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

GENERAL

ALARM

ACK

JW1

JW2


SIGNAL

POWER


TRB TRL COM- COM+

JW2 - ON when





9




P4


Otherwise not used.



JW4 Normally short.

JW5

JW6







05$

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV

$OOWKHVHSLQVFRPHVZLWK

UHGDQGEODFNZLUHVZKLFK

DUHFRQQHFWHGWRWKH

GHWHFWLRQFLUFXLWRQWKH

PDLQILUHDODUPERDUG5HG

LVSRVLWLYHDQGEODFNLV

QHJDWLYH

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV




10




PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV

051&

051&

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV

PRXQWLQJKROHIRU

VFUHZV

Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit 1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.






INDIVIDUAL GREEN


RELAY

1

RELAY

2

NO/ NC C NO/ NC C

RELAY

3

RELAY

4

NO/NC C NO/NC C

RELAY

5

RELAY

6





Note:


11


Figure 7: MR-2306-R6 Relay programming

ZONE JUMPER installed: turns ON relay when the zone

(1) is active removed: does not turn ON the relay when zone (1) is active

Default: Jumper is installed




Default: No jumper installed, connected on center pin only

A

Z1

S 1&2

LED (GREEN)

LOGICAL OR WITH ADJACENT ZONE jumper installed: this relay 1 works in conjunction with relay 2 jumper removed: relay 1 does not operate with the adjacent relay 2 chaining example: if jumper is installed on 1&2 and 2&3 then all the three relays will be ON if any one of relays 1,2 and 3 is active

Default: No jumper installed, connected on one pin only

RELAY 1

NO NC


NC: terminal provides normally closed contacts

NO: terminal provides normally open contacts

Default: jumper is installed on normally open (NO)


NO/NC C

RELAY 12

NO/NC C



Mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

P1 P2

Mounting hole for

#6-32 screws

12



P1 Cable connects to P3 on the Main Fire Alarm Board

JW1

Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission. When this jumper is cut and a system trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or "open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.

JW2

Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission of supervisory. When this jumper is cut and a supervisory trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or "open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.

The Alarm Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to turn OFF when signal silence is active. This allows the City Tie Box to be manually reset. On subsequent alarms the silenceable signals will resound and the City

Tie Box will be retriggered. See Configuration and CFG-300 Service Tool on page 32 for more information.

The Trouble Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to delay AC power fail for 0, 8 or 18 hours if this is the only system trouble. See Configuration and CFG-300 Service Tool on page 32 for more information.


Field wiring


Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to the Wiring Tables on page 19 for wire gauges.

CAUTION:



Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below. The panel supports Style B wiring for the initiating circuits and Style D wiring for the indicating circuits. The initiating circuits are supervised by a 3.9K End-of-Line Resistor or for power saving an Active-End-of-Line.

Note:





INITIATING

CIRCUIT #1

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

STYLE B

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 1

ALARM ZONE

STYLE B

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 2

SUPERVISORY

ZONE

ION SMOKE

DETECTOR

PHOTO SMOKE

DETECTOR

HEAT

DETECTOR

PULL STATION

SUPERVISORY

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR





13

Field wiring




INITIATING

CIRCUIT #1

INITIATING

CIRCUIT #2

+

-

+

-

4 MORE INITIATING


STYLE D

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 1

ALARM

ZONE

STYLE D

WIRING

INITIATING

CIRCUIT - 2

SUPERVISORY

ZONE

ION SMOKE

DETECTOR

PHOTO

SMOKE

DETECTOR

HEAT

DETECTOR


Note:

When using MR-2300-A Class A Converter Adder Modules, always use Active End-of-Line resistors on all initiating circuits including those that are not converted to Class A.




Note:





INDICATING

CIRCUIT #1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #2

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT - 1

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT - 2


14




INDICATING

CIRCUIT #1

INDICATING

CIRCUIT #2

-

+

-

+


STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT 1

STYLE Y

WIRING

INDICATING

CIRCUIT 2

BELL

STROBE

HORN




LEGEND

+

-

+

-

POWER

+

-



22VDC, 200mA



(POWER LIMITED)

+

-

+

DETECTION


TO INITIATING

CIRCUIT

3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR

6

3

4

5

2

1

END OF LINE RELAY

LISTED S3403

MODEL A77-716B

MANUFACTURED BY

SYSTEM SENSOR

NOTES




CABLE

15

Field wiring

Dialer Wiring

If you have Fire Alarm Panel Model MR-2306-LD there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 14 below.


FIRE ALARM MAIN

BOARD

LINE-1

LINE-2

GREEN

RED

BROWN

GREY

1

RJ31X

2 3

4

8

7 6

5

TIP

RING

Public switch


TIP


IF permitted



Wire relays on the relay adder module MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figures 15.


RELAY

CIRCUIT #1

RELAY

CIRCUIT #2

RELAY

CIRCUIT #6

NORMALLY OPEN

CONNECTION

NORMALLY CLOSE

CONNECTION

NORMALLY OPEN OR

NORMALLY CLOSED

CONNECTION IS

SELECTED BY JUMPER

ON RELAY BOARD.

28V DC, 1 AMP

RESISTIVE LOAD

NOTE: ALL RELAY CIRCUITS ARE POWER

LIMITED AND MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR or

16



Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 16 , below. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used.





0535

&,7<7,(/2&$/(1(5*<

5$7('9'&),/7(5('

75,3&2,/2KPVP$

P95,33/(

32:(5/,0,7('

32/$5,7<5(9(56$/$/$50

9'&23(1

9'&$7P$

P$0$;6+257

32:(5/,0,7('

32/$5,7<5(9(56$/6839

9'&23(1

9'&$7P$

P$0$;6+257

32:(5/,0,7('

6

3527(&725

6

86($6+257,1*:,5(

:+(17+(&,7<7,(,6

12786('

6 6

',15$,/&211(&7,21

72($57+*5281'

352&7(&725

&21),50672 1(0$67$1'$5'

6% ,17(1'(')25

&211(&7,217232/$5,7<

5(9(56$/&,5&8,72)$5(027(

67$7,215(&(,9,1*81,7+$9,1*

&203$7,%/(5$7,1*6

6

6

6

6

',15$,/&211(&7,21

72($57+*5281'

32:(5/,0,7('&$%/(7<3(

)3/)3/5RU)3/30867%(

86(')520053572

3527(&7256

17

Field wiring



Type


Rating

120VAC, 60Hz, 1.7A / 240VAC, 50Hz, 85A, 10A slow blow fuse on secondary of transformer

6.35A maximum at secondary of transformer Power supply total current



Wire the power supply as shown in Figure 17 using the proper wire gauge.

CAUTION:



MR-2300 Control Board

BUZZER

SILENCE

GENERAL

ALARM

ACK FIRE DRILL

P6


P6

BATTERY

P5 red

SEC TX yellow red blk green

240 VAC 50Hz

120 VAC 60Hz

N

GND

+ red red

+ blk

BATTERY BATTERY

NOTE:



18




Wire gauge Maximum wiring run to last device

AWG Feet Meters

22

20

18

16

14

12

2990

4760

7560

12000

19000

30400

910

1450

2300

3600

5800

9200

Notes:



• Maximum capacitance of

0.5uF total on each initiating circuit.



0.06

0.12

0.30

0.60

0.90

1.20

1.50

1.70


18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG


2350

1180

470

235

156

118

94

78

716

360

143

71

47

36

29

24

3750

1850

750

375

250

185

150

125

1143

567

229

114

76

56

46

38

6000

3000

1200

600

400

300

240

200

1829

915

366

183

122

91

73

61

Notes:



8500

4250

1900

850

570

425

343

285

2591

1296

579

259

174

129

105

87


30

15

6

3

2

1.5

1.2

1.0


4-wire smoke power is provided for 4-wire smoke detectors. This filtered supply is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. A trouble signal will be generated once there is a short. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/300mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.


Supervised auxiliary power is used to power the remote annunciators and smart relay modules. This filtered circuit is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. A trouble signal will be generated once there is a short.This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/500mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.

Auxiliary Power (unfiltered)

This unfiltered supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC FWR/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. The main power must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.

19

System Checkout

System Checkout



AC supply.








The best way to set up a panel for the first time is to avoid connecting any field wiring at first. To begin set up, power up the panel with an end of line resistor. The panel should be free of trouble. If the panel is free of trouble, connect one circuit at a time, checking for troubles each time. If a trouble occurs at any point during the setup, correct the fault, then continue the field wiring.



8. Power up the panel. The "AC-ON" green LED and the “Common Trouble” LED should illuminate, and the buzzer should sound. Press the “System Reset” button. Since the batteries are not connected, the trouble buzzer should sound intermittently and the common trouble LED should flash.


All indicators should be OFF except for normal power "AC ON" green LED and green LED I4 (located at the left bottom of panel, near the trouble relay).

Note:



Troubleshooting

Symptoms

Circuit Trouble

Remote Trouble

Ground Fault

Battery Trouble

Walk Test Mode

Common Trouble

Possible Cause

Normally when a circuit trouble occurs, its designated trouble indicator will be illuminated, as well as the common trouble indicator and trouble buzzer. To correct the fault, check for open wiring on that particular circuit loop or that the Circuit Disconnect Switch is in the ON or

CLOSED position.

Note: Disconnecting a Circuit will cause a system trouble (off-normal position).




If the Walk Test LED is illuminated steadily, the system is in Walk Test Mode.





20





AC ON

X

COMMON ALARM

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE M

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

?

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

WALK TEST

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

FIRE DRILL

IAC1

(ZONE1)

IAC2

(ZONE2)

IAC3

(ZONE3)

IAC4

(ZONE4)

IAC5

(ZONE5)

IAC6

(ZONE1)

NAC1

(ZONE1)

NAC2

(ZONE2)

NAC3

(ZONE3)

NAC4

(ZONE4)


• 15 common LED Indicators (left half of the display)

• 10 Common Buttons (left half of the display)

• up to six Initiating Circuit Alarm LEDs and six Initiating Circuit Trouble LED Indicators

• Four Indicating Circuit LEDs (labeled NAC- Notifying Appliance Circuit)

• up to ten disconnect buttons (six for initiating circuit & four for indicating circuits)


Rates.



Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is Secutron# NP-2057 ; this includes English and French versions.

21



Buzzer


Fire Alarm: Steady



If the Buzzer is turned on in response to a Non-Latching Trouble or Supervisory, it will be turned off if the condition causing it goes away and there is no other reason for it to be on.

AC ON LED

The green AC ON Indicator will steadily illuminate as long as the main AC power is above minimum level. The indicator turns OFF when the level falls below the power-fail threshold and the panel is switched to standby (battery) power.


The red Common Alarm Indicator steadily illuminates whenever the panel alarms on any initiating circuit. Since all alarms are latched until the panel is reset, the Indicator will remain ON until then.


The amber Common Supervisory Indicator turns ON steady when there is a Supervisory Alarm in the Panel caused by any Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory Circuit. The Indicator is turned OFF when all Non-Latching

Supervisory Circuits are restored and there are no active Latching Supervisory Circuits. Latching Supervisory

Alarms remain active until the Panel is reset.


The amber Common Trouble Indicator turns ON steady when the panel detects any trouble condition. It turns OFF when all Non-Latching Troubles are cleared.


The amber Remote Trouble Indicator flashes at the Trouble Flash Rate if there is trouble detected at a City Tie or

DACT, or if there is communication trouble detected with a Remote Annunciator or if a Remote Annunciator reports a local trouble. It is turned off if these conditions go away.

Fire Drill LED

The amber Fire Drill Indicator illuminates steadily while Fire Drill is active.

Walk Test LED

The amber Walk Test Indicator illuminates steadily to indicate that the panel is in Walk Test Mode. If the Panel is left in this mode for over an hour with no operator activity, the panel will return to normal and the Walk Test indicator will turn OFF.

CPU Fail LED



The amber Auxiliary Disconnect Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed. It turns OFF when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed a second time. When ON flashing, the

Auxiliary Disconnect Indicator signifies that the Auxiliary Alarm Relay is disconnected. Depending on the programming the auxiliary disconnect switch can also disconnect the common alarm and supervisory relay, see

Configuration section. When the Auxiliary Disconnect LED is flashing, the trouble buzzer will also sound.

22



The Signal Silence indicator flashes amber, at the trouble rate, when indication Circuits are Silenced either by the

Signal Silence button, or by the Auto Signal Silence Timer. It is turned off when the Signals are re-sounded by a subsequent Alarm.


The amber Battery Trouble Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Battery is either low (below 20.4 VDC) or disconnected.


The amber Ground Fault Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Ground Fault Detector detects a Ground

Fault on any field wiring. It turns off when the Ground Fault is cleared.


This indicator is activated for a short time when the RESET key is pressed.



Sprinkler Alarm, or General Alarm Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications at different events.

Event Configuration


Disconnected

Circuit Active



(amber)


(amber)

OFF

Verified Alarm

Non-Verified Alarm

Water flow Alarm

Sprinkler Alarm

General Alarm

Event Circuit Status LED Configuration

Circuit Active Steady (red)


Verified Alarm

Sprinkler Alarm

Water flow Alarm

Active circuit reconnected Fast flash rate (red)


This operation applies to Initiating Circuits configured as Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events


Disconnected



(amber)


(amber)

Configuration

Latching Sup.

Non-Latching Sup.

Circuit Active

Event

Circuit Active


OFF


Steady (amber)


Configuration

Latching Sup.

Non-Latching Sup.

23



This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as monitor circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events.



Disconnected


(amber)


(amber)

Monitor

Circuit Active

Event

Circuit Active


OFF


Steady (amber)


Configuration

Monitor


This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as Trouble-Only Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events.




(amber)

Disconnected

Short Circuit


(amber)

Trouble Only


(amber)





Open circuit

Short Circuit

Disconnected


(amber)


(amber)


(amber)

Signal

24


Common Controls

Menu Buttons

To use the menu buttons you will need to install the CFG-300 configuration tool. See Configuration and CFG-300

Tool on page 32 for details.

Menu Button

M


Info Button

?

X

When the system is off-normal, press ?


Enter Button


Cancel Button





• Resets all Initiating Circuits



• Turns off Signal Silence

• Turns off Fire Drill





Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm turns on the Signal Silence indicator and deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits. Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will re-sound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence Inhibit Timer period. It also does not function if the Indicating

Circuits are active as the result of a Fire Drill.


The Fire Drill button activates all Non-Disconnected Indicating Circuits, but does not transmit any Alarms via the

City Tie, Common Alarm Relay or Auxiliary Alarm Relay. Fire Drill activates the signals in the evacuation code programmed. For example in the Temporal Code, the signals will be pulsed ON for 0.5 seconds, OFF for 0.5 seconds in rounds of 3 and then pause for 1.5 seconds and repeat.




25



Activation of the Lamp Test button causes all front panel Indicators to steadily illuminate and turns the buzzer ON steady. If Lamp Test is active for more than 10 seconds, Common Trouble is activated. The lamp test for CPU Fail

LED is during power up.




Circuit (Zone) Disconnect pushbuttons are provided for all initiating and indicating circuits on the Fire Alarm Control

Panel. These pushbuttons are located beside their respective indicating LED.

Pressing a Circuit Disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated circuit and turns on its Trouble Indicator, activating Common Trouble. While a Circuit is disconnected, all changes in status (alarms and troubles) on that circuit are ignored. The panel does not activate disconnected indicating circuits. Circuit Disconnect pushbuttons are toggle switches; therefore, pressing an activated switch a second time will un-bypass (reconnect) the circuit.




When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to unbypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the bypassed input circuit is active and the Bypass

Switch is pressed for un-bypassing, the Alarm LED will flash at the fast flash rate for 10 seconds. During these 10 seconds, pressing the Bypass Switch can bypass the active input circuit again. After 10 seconds, the bypassed alarm will be processed.

Disconnect pushbuttons are also used during Walk-Test as described in the System Checkout section.

Common Relays


The Common Alarm Relay activates when the common alarm sequence is activated. The common alarm relay is disconnected by aux disconnect if programmed (see Configuration section). Since all alarm conditions are latched until system reset, the relay will remain ON until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset.


The Common Supervisory Relay activates when the common supervisory sequence is activated as the result of an alarm on any un-bypassed latching or non-latching supervisory circuit. The relay is turned OFF if all non-latching supervisory circuits are restored and there are no latching supervisory circuits active. The relay can be disconnected by aux disconnect if programmed (see Configuration section). The relay will function the same way as an alarm relay if the supervisory relay is disabled ( see Configuration section ).



Note:


26



The Auxiliary Alarm Relay functions the same way as the Common Alarm Relay in every respect except that it can be disconnected by auxiliary disconnect with or without other correlated relays if it is programmed to do so (see

Configuration section). When configured ( see Configuration section ), the relay can also be disconnected if signal silence is active and reconnected if signal silence is de-activated.

Circuit Types





Verified Alarm


Panel within four seconds. Smoke detectors will be verified for a real alarm within 60 seconds, depending upon the startup time of the devices being used. If four seconds is too long a response time for pull stations, then wire them separately on a Non-Verified Alarm Circuit. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the




Alarm is confirmed and processed. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common

Alarm LED to illuminate red.

Note:


120 seconds.



Flow Retard Operation is enabled, then these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Sprinkler Alarm is confirmed and processed. An Alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.

Note:


120 seconds.


Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will clear

(as long as there are no other Supervisory conditions in the system) and the Circuit Status LED will turn off.


Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will NOT clear.

27


Monitor

This is a supervised general-purpose non-latching input used mainly for correlating to a relay circuit. No other system condition occurs as a result of its activation (short-circuit), although it is supervised for Trouble (open-circuit).

Trouble-Only

The Trouble-Only circuit monitors a Trouble Condition from an external device such as an external Audio System.

Both open and short circuits generate a non-latching Trouble condition.



The Silenceable Signal circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during Single-Stage Alarm.


The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during Single-Stage Alarm.



)



)


Single stage codes





Two-step codes

Alert Code 0.5 second on, 2.5 seconds off

General Alarm Evacuation Code as selected from above.

28



C O N T IN O U S

0.5s

0.5s

0.5s

0.5s

5s 10s

1.5s

TE M P O R A L C O D E

M A R C H C O D E

C A LIFO R N IA C O D E

0.5s

2.5s

A LE R T C O D E

Single Stage Operation

In a single stage system all alarm inputs are treated in a similar manner. Alarm inputs include any of the following:

Non-Verified Alarm, Verified Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Water flow Alarm, and General Alarm Circuits. If any of these alarm inputs occur when the panel is not already in alarm, the following occurs:

• The Buzzer sounds steadily

• If Fire Drill is active, it is cancelled

• The Common Alarm Indicator turns on

• The Common Alarm, Auxiliary Alarm and all correlated relays will activate if Aux Disconnect is not active

• The Auto Signal Silence Timer, if configured, starts

• The Signal Silence Inhibit Timer, if configured, starts

• All connected relays programmed to the input are activated (provided that Aux Disconnect is not active)

• Non-disconnected strobes associated with the input are activated

• Non-disconnected signals associated with the input are activated at the evacuation rate


• The alert buzzer sounds steadily


Signal Silence Timer, if configured, is restarted

• Any additional non-disconnected strobes associated with the new input are activated continuously

• Any additional non-disconnected signals associated with the new input are activated at the evacuation rate

29




The synchronous strobe models that are supported by the MR-2306 panel include Secutron models MRL-ST and

MRA-HS. A separate compatibility list is available for different supported models (LT-1007).

Strobes can be configured as normal (e.g. not synchronized or any of the above; see configuration section). Any selection made is system-wide (e.g. whatever is selected applies to all the circuits in the system, configured as strobes).





Silenceable strobe`


Note:



3

Devices

The MR-2306 fire control panels support System Sensor’s i

3


3




3


3


3

zone and i

3


3

devices.



3

zone:



• High Maintenance and Low Maintenance (Out of sensitivity: defective or dirty device)

• Freeze trouble

30




Z o n e - 1

T r o u b l e O p e n 1 / 1



Z o n e - 1

C o m m u n i c . T r b 1 / 1

High Maintenance trouble

A High Maintenance trouble means that one or more units on the i3 zone have exceeded the high sensitivity limit and are vulnerable to false alarms. The unit does not need to be serviced immediately, but should be cleaned out at the earliest possible time.

Z o n e - 1

H - M a i n t T r b 1 / 1

Low Maintenance trouble

A Low Maintenance trouble means that one or more units on the i3 zone have exceeded the low sensitivity limit and their ability to detect smoke is compromised. The unit should be serviced immediately.

Z o n e - 1

L - M a i n t T r b 1 / 1

Freeze trouble


Z o n e - 1

F r e e z e T r b . 1 / 1

The LEDs on the i

3


The smoke detector LED status should be confirmed with the panel, since High and Low Maintenance Troubles have the same LED indication on the detector and the only way to distinguish between the two is to use the CFG-

300 Configuration Tool and check the log messages as noted above.


Power-up

Normal (Standby)

High or Low Maintenance

(Out of sensitivity: defective or dirty)

Freeze trouble

Alarm

Blinks every 10 sec

Blinks every 5 sec

OFF

OFF

OFF

Green LED

Blinks every 10 sec

OFF

Blinks every 10 sec

Solid

Red LED

Blinks every 5 sec

31


Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool

There are three methods of configuring the MR-2306 LED Series Fire Alarm Panels:

1. Using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with CFG-300 for configuration information).

2. Using a PC or Lap Top Computer with a UIMA converter module.

3. Using a PC or laptop computer with remote connection (must use fire alarm with built-in UDACT).

The following information for configuring an MR-2306 LED Series Fire Alarm Panel is based on using CFG-300 LCD service tool for configuration.

To access configuration mode using a CFG-300 tool, connect the CFG-300 and then press the Menu button.

The CFG-300 LCD display will display the Main Menu. The function of different buttons on the front panel display is shown in F igure 20, below.



IAC1

(ZONE 1)

0

QZ

AC ON

X

COMMON ALARM

M

COMMON SUPV

COMMON TROUBLE

BATTERY TROUBLE

REMOTE TROUBLE

?

GROUND FAULT

CPU FAIL

WALK TEST

IAC2

(ZONE 2)

IAC3

(ZONE 3)

IAC4

(ZONE 4)

1

2

ABC

SYSTEM

RESET

IAC5

(ZONE 5)

IAC6

(ZONE 1)

3

DEF

4

GHI

5

JKL

SIGNAL

SILENCE

*

(left shift)

#

(right shift)

AUXILIARY

DISCONNECT

LAMP

TEST

BUZZER

SILENCE

FIRE DRILL

NAC1

(ZONEV 1)

NAC2

(ZONE 2)

NAC3

(ZONE3)

NAC4

(ZONE4)

6

MNO

7

PRS

8

TUV

9

WXY

32



The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press the (Enter button) key after entering the passcode. If the passcode is right, it will take you to the main command menu. If the passcode is wrong the system will ask you to re-enter passcode. The system will be exhausted after three retries and will then take you back to the Normal message display. The default password is

“1111” (without quotes).

Enter passcode:

_

Command Menu


“-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press to make a selection. To exit from the main command menu, select the

“Exit” menu option and then press either X or .

Note:


-Command Menu-

1. Panel Config

2. Config Info

3. Set Time

4. Set Password

5. View Event Log

6. Clear Event Log

7. Walk Test

8. i3 Loop Test

9. Dialer Config

10. Test Dialer

11. Exit

33



MR-2306-6LD wUDACT

Version 0.0.4









7. Once you have made the correct selection, press to confirm the change. The display will return to the submenu screen.Press X (Cancel button) to return to the previous menu.

1. PANEL CONFIG (Command-Menu)


-Panel Config-

1. Features

2. Inp. Zone

3. i3 Zones

4. Opt Zone

5. Correlation

6. Inp Zone Label

7. Opt Zone Label

8. Default Config

34


Command Menu/Panel Config-->Features

-Feature

Config-

1. Man. Sig. Sil

2. Fire Drill

3. Opt. Ckt. Corr

4. Wtr/Sprk. Retd

5. Aux Dis Corr

6. Sig-Sil Inh Tm

7.Aux Dis, Alm&Sup

8. Auto Sil. Tmr

9. Rem. Annun.

10. Alm. Zmit-Sil.

11. Pwr Fail Tmr.

12. Com. Supv. Rly

13. Sig-Sil. Isol.

14. Strobe Type

15. Evac. Code

16. Active EOL

17. Verify. Alarm

Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/



[ X ] E N A B L E

[X] ENABLE->Default

[ ] DISABLE



2.Fire Drill

F i r e D r i l l

[ X ] E N A B L E


[ ] DISABLE


35





[ X ] D I S A B L E


[ ] ENABLE


Command MenuPanel Config/Features/


Operation


[ X ] D I S A B L E

[X] DISABL ->Default

[ ] ENABLE




A u x D i s C o r r

[ X ] D I S A B L E

[ ] ENABLE





[ X ] D I S A B L E


[ ] 10 SEC

[ ] 20 SEC

[ ] 30 SEC

[ ] 1 MIN




[ X ] D I S A B L E

[ ] ENABLE





[ X ] D I S A B L E


[ ] 5 Min

[ ] 10 Min

[ ] 15 Min

[ ] 20 Min

[ ] 30 Min





Alarm Relay when selected by the Aux Disconnect button.

If enabled, this function will disconnect the Auxiliary Alarm

Relay and all correlated relays by pressing the Aux Disconnect button. Correlated relays include: MR-2306-R6 relays,

MR2312-S12 relays.





If enabled, this function will disconnect (when the Aux. disconnect switch is pressed) the Common Alarm relay and

Common Supervisory relay and the MR-2300-PR will not transmit a supervisory or alarm event.

If disabled, the Aux disconnect switch has no effect on the

Common Alarm relay, the

Common Supervisory relay and the MR-2300-PR.

Use this function to determine the time period for which the indicating circuits will sound before they are automatically silenced. According to the

Canadian National Building

Code, this timer should not be set to less than 20 minutes.

36






[ X ] N O N E




[ X ] D I S A B L E




[ X ] N O N E

[X] NONE->Default

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

[ ] 3

[ ] 4

[ ] 5

[ ] 6




[ ] ENABLE

[X] NONE ->Default

[ ] 1 HRS

[ ] 2 HRS

[ ] 3 HRS

[ ] ENABLE


Use this function to allow the alarm transmits and auxiliary alarm relay to reset on “SIGNAL


“RESET” switch.

Use this function to place a timed delay on reporting the AC power fail trouble externally via common trouble relay. If this problem corrects itself within the specified time, the common trouble relay will not be activated If disabled, the trouble relay is activated immediately.

If enabled, the common supervisory relay can be used as common alarm relay. It will act the same way as a common alarm relay. If disabled, it is used a common supervisory relay.




[ X ] D I S A B L E




[ X ] D I S A B L E

Command MenuPanel Config/Features/

14.Strobe Type

S t r o b e T y p e

[ X ] N O R M A L





[ ] ENABLE




[ ] SECUTRON

[ ] FARADY

[ ] WHEELOCK

[ ] GENTEX

[ ] SYSTEM SENSOR



[X] TEMPORAL->Default

[ ] CONTINOUS

[ ] MARCH TIME

[ ] CALIFORNIA


37



16. Active EOL

A c t i v e E O L

[ X ] D I S A B L E


17. Verify. Alarm

A l a r m v e r i f i c a t i o n

[ X ] U L C


[ ] NO

[X] ULC->Default

[ ] ULI




EOL resistors.

Select alarm verification timing according to ULI or ULC standard.

Command Menu-->Panel Config

Note:


Inp Zone

-Initiating Zone-

1 Zone-1

2 Zone-2

3 Zone-3

4 Zone-4

5 Zone-5

6 Zone-6

This Inp Zone menu is used to program the process type for the initiating circuits. Only six circuits will be shown for models MR-2306-LD and MR-2306-L.

Command Menu/ Panel Config /Ipt. Zone

1.Process Type (Initiating circuit)

Z o n e - 1 T y p e

[ X ] A L A R M

[X] ALARM ->Default

[ ] VERIF ALARM

[ ] SPRKL ALM

[ ] WTR-FLOW ALM

[ ] NON-LATCH SUP

[ ] LATCH SUPV

[ ] MONITOR

[ ] TRB ONLY


6.

Zone-6

[X] ALARM

38



Note:

Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. i3 Zones

This i3 Zones menu is used to program the process type for the initiating circuits. Select the zone to be an i3 zone, otherwise the panel will treat the zone as a normal detection zone. Only six circuits will be shown for models MR-

2306-LD and MR-2306-L..

-i3 Detection Zones-

1 [ ] Zone-1

2 [ ] Zone-2

3 [ ] Zone-3

4 [ ] Zone-4

5 [ ] Zone-5

6 [ ] Zone-6

[ ] Zone-1 ->Default

-

-

-

-

[ ] Zone-6 ->Default

Use this function if i3 devices are present on a zone. (See i3 devices section for details).

39



Note:


Opt Zone

Indicating Zone

1 NAC-1

2 NAC-2

3 NAC-3

4 NAC-4

This menu is used to program the process type of the indicating circuits.

Command Menu/ Panel Config /Opt. Zone

1.Process Type (Indicating

Circuits)

N A C - 1 T y p e

[ X ] S I L - A B L E


[ ] NON SIL-ABLE

[ ] SIL-ABLE STR

[ ] NON-SIL STR



4.

NAC-4 Type

[X] Sil-able


Correlation

Command Menu/ Panel Config /Correlation

1.Correlation

Z o n e - 1 C o r r .

[ X ] N A C - 1

[X] NAC-1 ->Default

[X] NAC-2 ->Default

[X] NAC-3 ->Default

[X] NAC-4 ->Default


6.

Zone-6 Corr.

[X] NAC-1

40



Note:


Inp Zone Label

-Initiating Zone-

1 Zone-1

2 Zone-2

3 Zone-3

4 Zone-4

5 Zone-5

6 Zone-6

Use the keys described below for entering message. These keys are alternate functions of bypass switches and are physically located in the same position as described following.

Command Menu/ Panel Config /Ipt. Zone Lab


Zone-1 Label

Zone-1

[Zone-1]->Default

[Zone-6]->Default


6.

Zone-6 Label

Zone-6

KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4

--------------------------------------




NAC-1 6 M N O NAC-2 7 P R S

NAC-4 8 T U V NAC-3 9 W X Y

Aux Disconnect Back Space Lamp Test Forward

41



Note:


Opt Zone Label

Indicating Zone

1 NAC-1

2 NAC-2

3 NAC-3

4 NAC-4

Use the keys in described below for entering message. These keys are alternate functions of bypass switches and are physically located in the same position as described below.

Command Menu/ Panel Config /Opt. Zone

Lab

1.Indicating zone messages

4.

NAC-1 Label

SIGNAL-1

NAC-4 Label

SIGNAL-4

[NAC-1 ]->Default

[NAC-2 ]->Default

[NAC-3 ]->Default

[NAC-4 ]->Default


KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4

--------------------------------------




NAC-1 6 M N O NAC-2 7 P R S

NAC-4 8 T U V NAC-3 9 W X Y

Aux Disconnect Back Space Lamp Test Forward








42


2. Config Info (Command-Menu

Note:







J o b N a m e :




U n k n o w n





Configuration date and time will appear for all means of configuration, thus revealing date and time configuration was last changed (if Time and Date have been set at the panel).

C o n f i g u r a t o r V e r s i o n x . x . x . x



43



Note:



2 T i m e C l o c k





[ X ] D I S A B L E




[ ] ENABLE



0 0 : 0 0 M O N 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

Default

00:00 MON 2000-01-01





2. Compensation


0



+15 seconds.

Use the up down arrow keys to select daily compensation value and press ENTER. For a fast clock adjust negatively.

For a slow clock adjust positively. For example: for a clock which runs 5 minutes a month (based on 30 days) fast select -10 seconds.



44



Note:



[ ]


[ ]










O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9

E V EN T

01 of 09


2 0 0 2 / 1 0 / 2 2 1 1 : 4 5 . A M

D AT E


45



Note:



1 A l a r m L o g


3 A l l L o g s









46



Note:







[ ] Z o n e - 1



A l a r m : 0 0 T r b : 0 0


(not Strobes) to activate briefly for a number of short bursts corresponding to the selected circuit number. If the first selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for one burst. If the second selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for two bursts, and so on. This means that if, for example, circuits 1, 3 and 5 were selected for the walk test, they would sound with one, two and three bursts respectively. The burst interval is half a second on and half a second off. After the sounding pattern has been sent on the indicating circuits, the initiating circuit is reset and tested again. If it is still active (in alarm) the pattern will be re-sent. Trouble on any initiating circuit selected for the walk test activates the indicating circuits continuously for five seconds. Activation of a circuit will also cause the alarm count to increase while the trouble on the initiating circuit will cause the trouble count to increase.


Notes:



OPERATION.

47


8. i

3


Note:

Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the FA-300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.

The i

3

maintenance test is designed to test the devices on i

3


3

maintenance test can be invoked from the command menu six minutes after power-up or after pressing the reset. If the i

3

maintenance test is selected, the following message appears on the screen:


L o o p t e s t ? Y


3



[ ] Z o n e - 1

If the i

3




3



After the zone goes into the i

3

maintenance test, no other zone can be put into the test. The maintenance test will take five minutes. During this time you can walk through the device and make sure all the devices are working properly. The following table lists the status of the devices while in walk test.


Proper operation

Out of sensitivity

(Low and High Maint)

Freeze condition

Green LED


OFF

OFF

OFF

Red LED




48



Note:



-Dialer Config-

1. Account Info

2. Telephone line

3. Report Options

4. Time Parameter

5. Enable/Disable

6. Ring Detect


Account Info

-Account Info-

1. Account#1 ID

2. Account#1 Tel

3. Accnt#1 Format

4. Account#2 ID

5. Account#2 Tel

6. Accnt#2 Format



Account#1 ID

123456

123456->Default

Use this function to set the Account ID for the monitoring station to which the dialer reports events. The maximum # of digits allowed is six.

For contact ID, only the first four digits are used; the last two are truncated.

Unless you are using the SIA protocol, the allowed digits for the account ID are simple digits 0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F (the



49




Account#1 Telnum:

101

[101]->Default

Use this function to set the telephone number of the monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is 19 including “,” and numerals.

The “,” will be treated as 1 sec delay. To enter

“,” press the INFO button. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left. An example of a typical telephone # is

9,,12345678.







ACCOUNT#2 ID:

654321


[ ] SIA 300 Baud

[ ] SIA 110 Baud


654321->Default Same as Account#1.



ACCOUNT#2 Telnum:

101

[ 101 ]->Default Same as Account#1.






[ ] SIA 300 Baud

[ ] SIA 110 Baud

Same as Account#1.

50



Note:


Telephone Line








Line





[ ] Pulse Dial



Line





Line



[ X ] E N A B L E


Line



[ X ] E N A B L E


Line



0 6


[ ] Pulse Dial

Same as Line#1.


[ ] DISABLE



[ ] DISABLE

Same as Line#1.

06 ->Default


51



Note:


Report Options

- R e p o r t O p t i o n s -

1 . A l a r m P r i o .

2 . T r o u b l e P r i o .

3 . S u p v . P r i o .

4 . A u x . D i s R e p o r t

5 . O p e r a t i o n M o d e


Options



[ X ] A c c o u n t 1


Options



[ X ] A c c o u n t 1


Options



[ X ] A c c o u n t 1


[ ] Account 2


[ ] Account 2


[ ] Account 2


Options

4.Aux Disconnect, Cancels Alarm

& Supv Reporting Through dialer

[ ] ENABLE


A u x D i s A l m / S u p v R p t .

[ X ] D I S A B L E








52



Options


D ia le r O p e r. M o d e

[X ] ( U )D A C T

[ ] D A C T


[ ] DACT




Note:


Time Parameters






Parameter

1.AC Loss delay


0


Parameter



0

0 ->Default



Parameter


Auto-Test (HH:MM):

00:30

0 ->Default

00:30 ->Default


Other settings could be anywhere from 01-28, representing which day of the month the test should be performed. When a cell phone service is employed for the panel, it should only be connected to telephone line #2

CO interface. Also, the dial tone detection feature of Line





01:55, 02:00 and 03:00.

53



Note:




[ X ] E N A B L E

- - - - - - W a r n i n g - - - - - - -



[ ] DISABLE




Ring Detect


[ X ] 5

[ ] Disabled

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

[ ] 3

[ ] 4

[X] 5->Default

[ ] 6

[ ] 7

[ ] 8

Use this menu item to select the number of rings on which the panel’s modem will answer.

The default number of rings is five. The maximum number of rings you can define is eight.




1 . L # 1 M a n u a l t e s t

2 . L # 2 M a n u a l t e s t

3 . R e s e t D i a l e r

1 . L # 1 M a n u a l t e s t

2 . L # 2 M a n u a l t e s t

.








54





The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This message automatically displays when Manual

Test is selected.

N o D C V o l t






N o D T M F t o n e





N o K i s s o f f












55




CFG-300 LCD Service tool operation

If an LCD service tool is connected to the panel, you will only be able to view the latest message–you cannot scroll through them. In order to see all of the messages, you must enter the programming menu and see the event logs.

The logs are arranged so that the most recent message is shown first. Listed below are the different kinds of messages that can be displayed on the LCD service tool.

Zone messages

Point annunciation is indicated on the LCD. There are no separate queues for “TROUBLE”, “ALARM”,


TROUBLE, ALARM, SUPVISORY and MONITOR LEDs will be flashing if at least one of the given types is in the queue.

The LCD service tool will only show the first alarm or trouble. If a trouble happens first and then an alarm, the alarm will be displayed. Any further events will change the total number of events, shown in the right hand corner of the

LCD display. The order of priority is alarm, supervisory, trouble and monitor.


Event “ 01/09 ” 01 of 09, “ OPEN TRB ” on physical “ Z-01 ” at “ EAST LOBBY ENTRANCE ”. Press the INFO key to show the process type as “ VERIFIED ALARM ” and the event occurred on “ 2003/04/04 ” at “ 18:01 TUESDAY ”.

ZO N E

M essage

Process

Type

Physical

Zone N o.


O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9

EV E N T type

E V E N T

01 of 09

"IN FO " Key


1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 4

T IM E D AT E




ZO N E

M essage

Process

Type

Physical

Zone N o.

56


S H O R T T R B 0 2 / 0 9

EV E N T type

E V E N T

02 of 09

"IN FO " Key


1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 2

T IM E

D AT E



AC Power Fail


T rouble Typ e


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 4

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D AT E

Battery trouble

The battery trouble is generated when the battery voltage drops below the specified value. The trouble is restored when the voltage returns to the normal value.

T rouble Typ e


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 8

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A TE

Ground Fault

The “Ground Fault” message indicates that there is a short in the electrical connection between the metal chassis of the panel and the earth.

Trouble Type


A c t i v e 1 / 1

EV E N T

0 1 of 0 1

Trouble code Trouble Info

"IN F O " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A TE

Note:


57



Troubles related to the annunciator can have two possibilities: either the main panel and annunciator failed to communicate with each other, or an un-configured remote annunciator is responding to the main panel. In both the cases, the following trouble message is displayed:

T roub le Type


E V E N T

01 of 09

"IN FO " Key

T rouble info

Trouble code

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

1 1 : 4 5 S A T 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 3

T IM E

D AT E


The four-wire smoke detector supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on a four-wire smoke supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.

T roub le Type


E V E N T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

T IM E D AT E

Note:


58



The supervised aux-supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on supervised aux-supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.

T rouble Typ e


E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

City tie Polarity reversal - MR-2300-PR/ Relay module

The city tie or polarity reversal module is supervised for open and whether or not the PR-300 is plugged in. The relay module is supervised for whether or not it is plugged in.


T rouble Typ e

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E


T rouble Typ e


A c t i v e 1 / 1

E V EN T

01 of 01


"IN FO " Key

T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1

0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1

TIM E D A T E

59

















60















NORMAL)

Test


Zone Fire Alarm



Test

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble



Trouble

Supervisory


Waterflow Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

Waterflow restored



General Alarm


AC power lost

AC power restored

Battery Low


Ground Fault


Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Restore 3 113

New event 1 320

Restore 3 320

New event 1 140

Restore 3 140

New event 1 301

Restore 3 301

New event 1 302

Restore 3 302

New event 1 310

Restore 3 310

Qualifier Code

New event 1 351

New event 1 352

Restore

Restore

3 351

3 352

New event 1 354

Restore 3 354

New event 1 350

New event 1 602

New event 1 608

New event 1 601

New event 1 110

Restore 3 110

New event 1 300

Restore 3 300

New event 1 200

Restore 3 200

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00


00

00

00

00

Acct #

Acct #

00

00

000

000

000

000

Acct #

Acct #

485

000

000

000

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

000

000

000

000

000

000

61






SIA Event

Code

Parameter











Zone Fire Alarm






Waterflow alarm


General Alarm




AC power lost

AC power restored

Battery Low


Ground Fault


Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

Test

Alarm

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

Supervisory

Supervisory

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Test

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

New event

Restore

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

New event

New event

New event

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

New event

Restore

UT

UR

AT

AR

WA

WH

QA

QH

YT

YR

YP

YQ

FT

FJ

FS

FR

RY

RX

FA

FH

RT

YK

YS

RP

LT

LT

LR

LR

000

000

000

000

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

000

000

000

000

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

NNN

001

002

001

002

Acct #

Acct #

485

000

62



MR-2306-L series fire alarm control panel MR-2306-R6 adder module

Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable using CFG-300 with Password Access.



120VAC, 60Hz, 1.7A / 240VAC, 50Hz, 0.85A,10A slow blow fuse on secondary of transformer


6.35 amps maximum at secondary of transformer

Battery





4 supervised style Y (Class B) indicating circuits, configured as strobes or audibles. Terminals are labeled “SIG 1,2,3,4”






if no auxiliaries are used the max power is 5A for the indicating circuits


Contact rating NO / NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max.

Only suitable for DC applications such as visual indicators.


MR-2306-R6 Input Class A Converter module


MR-2306-R6 Output Class A Converter module






MR-2306/12-AT 8/16 Zone Remote Annunciator




Aux supply (non resettable) power limited / 21.1Vdc regulated / 500mA max







FormC / 28VDC / 1A resistive load max.

Only suitable for DC applications such as visual indicators.




ID “A”

Power limited / 19VDC reg. / 3mA for detectors / 200mV AC ripple / 45mA max (alarm short)









8.5mA max (shorted)






Ground Fault circuit

Less the 3K will generate a ground fault.

System Model: MR-2306-L Series LED Version Fire Alarm Control Panel

System Type: Local Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR), Remote Protected Premises Station (using MR-2300-

PR or

MR-2306-LD). Central Station Protected Premises (using MR-2306-LD)



Applicable Standards: NFPA 70 and 72, UL-864 Rev. 9, ULC S-524, ULC S-527-99, ULC-S-536

63







Model

Number

MR-2306-LD

MR-2306-L

MR-2300-A

MR-2300-NC2

MR-2300-PR

MR-2306-R6

MR-2312-S12

MR-2300-LCD



Total

Standby

Fire Alarm, 6 Det, Control

Panel FIXED ELR/

ACTIVE ELR

Fire Alarm, 6 Det, Control

Panel FIXED ELR/

ACTIVE ELR


Adder Module




Tie Module

X

X

X

X

X

0.123/

0.092

0.123/

0.100

0.000

0.000

0.050

=

=

Alarm

0.316/

0.292

0.318/

0.300

= 0.000

= 0.000

= 0.300

6 Relay Adder Module X 0.000

= 0.080


Module

Smart Remote

Annunciator

X

X

0.030

0.016

=

=

0.090

0.040

MR-2306/12-

AT

MR-2605-T

Remote Annunciators



X

X

X

0.035

0.035

Ò 0.00011

=

=

=

0.090

0.035

* 0.135

Four-Wire Smoke Detectors X =

Signal Load (bells, horns, strobes, and etc.) X

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

Total

Alarm


=

Total currents (Add above currents) STANDBY ( A ) ALARM


' Use 0.084

for five minutes, 0.168 for 10 minutes and 0.5 for half hour of alarm as a multiplier figure.

Ò Using the a 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector.



Battery (AH) = ( [STANDBY ( A ) ______ ] x [(24, 60 or 90 Hours) ___ ] ) +

( [ALARM ( B ) ______ ] x [Alarm in Hr.] _____ )

= ( C ) ______AH

Total Alarm Current: Must be 6 amperes or less. Indicating Circuits must not to exceed 5 amperes.


=

( B )

64







System Failures




• Power Failure






•System Users




65


• Software


















66












•water damage;













67








68









Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

Model MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder Module

The MR-2306-R6 provides six programmable relays. It mounts below the FA-300 main fire alarm board using the 2 screws provided. Before mounting the relay adder module, program the relays using the jumpers on the board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2306-R6 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts. The ribbon cable from P1 of the

MR-2306-R6 is connected to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board.

Figure 1: MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder module



A typical relay circuit is shown below in Figure 2 with the jumper locations and descriptions.

Note: Relay programming should be done before installing the board into the fire alarm backbox.

Figure 2: MR-2306-R6 Relay programming




ZONE JUMPER installed: turns ON relay when zone

(1) is active removed: does not turn ON the relay when zone (1) is active

Default: Jumper is installed

Default: No jumper installed, connected on center pin only

RELAY 1

Z1

A S

NO NC

1&2

LED (GREEN)

LOGICAL OR WITH ADJACENT ZONE jumper installed: this relay 1 works in conjunction with relay 2 jumper removed: relay 1 does not operate with the adjacent relay 2 chaining example: if jumper is installed on 1&2 and 2&3 then all the three relays will be ON if any one of relays 1,2 and 3 is active

Default: No jumper installed, connected on one pin only


NC: terminal provides normally closed contacts

NO: terminal provides normally open contacts

Default: jumper is installed on normally open (NO)


NO/NC C

RELAY 12

NO/NC C

LT-1000SEC Nov 2005 Page 1 of 2

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contact Rating:

28V

Normally Open NO, Normally Closed NC per

1A resistive load max

Current Consumption: Standby: 0 mA

Alarm: 80 mA

LT-1000SEC Nov 2005 Page 2 of 2

M R - 2 3 1 2 - S


I

NSTALLATION

M

ANUAL

Revision

2



MR-2312-S Installation and Operation Manual

Contents

Contents ......................................................................................................................................................... i

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 1

Mechanical Installation................................................................................................................................. 1

Functional Setup........................................................................................................................................... 2

Jumpers ................................................................................................................................................. 2

DIP Switches ......................................................................................................................................... 3

Configuration of the Relays ......................................................................................................................... 4

Wiring............................................................................................................................................................. 5

Specifications & Features ............................................................................................................................ 6

Warranty ........................................................................................................................................................ 7 i


Introduction

The Model MR-2312-S Smart Relay Module provides twelve supervised configurable relays and comes complete with a white MR-2312-SW12 or red enclosure MR-2312-SR12.


To mount the MR-2312-S open the front door, and mount the backbox to the wall using the four screws provided. This enclosure may also be mounted to a standard double gang electrical box. There are two conduit areas provided at the bottom of the enclosure.

8.2"

6.3"

0.75”

9.0

FOUR

MOUNTING

HOLES

2“ KNOCKOUT

7.5"

1.5"

1

Functional Setup

Functional Setup

Place 120 ohm EOL resistor between + and - on the RS-485 on last wired MR-2312-S only.

DIP Switch for relay address

P4 is for factory use only

P4

+ S

RS-485 IN/OUT

C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC

Z7

RLY. 7

A

7&8

S

Z8

RLY. 8

A

8&9

S

RLY. 9

A

Z9

S

9&10

RLY. 10

A

Z10

10&11

S

RLY. 11

A

Z11

11&12

S

RLY. 12

A

Z12

S

12

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DSW1

JW49

JW48

DSCNN

TX/RX

PWR ON

CPU FAIL

24VDC

+IN/OUT-

Z1

1&2

S

A

Z2

2&3 A

S

RLY. 1

C NO/NC

RLY. 2

C NO/NC

Z3

A

S

3&4

RLY. 3

C NO/NC

Z4

4&5

A

S

RLY. 4

C NO/NC

Z5

S

A

5&6

RLY. 5

C NO/NC

Z6

6&7 A

S

RLY. 6

C NO/NC

Relay jumpers for programming

INDIVIDUAL

RELAY STATUS

GREEN LEDS

Leave jumpers JW48,

JW49 and JW50 intact on board.

Wire 24 Volts from filtered Auxiliary

Power at the Fire Alarm Panel.

LEDs:

DSCNN - if enabled (via DIP switch DSW1-4), this LED illuminates steadily (amber) when auxiliary disconnect is activated at the Fire Alarm Panel.

TX/RX - transmit/receive LED flashes (green as long as there is communication with the Fire Alarm Panel.

PWR ON - illuminates steadily (green) as long as there is power to the relay board.

CPU FAIL - will illuminate steadily (amber) when CPU fails at the Fire Alarm Panel.

Jumpers

Jumper

JW48

JW49

JW50

Jumper Function

FACTORY USE ONLY (JUMPER INSTALLED)



2


DIP Switches

There is one DIP switches to be set. DSW1 is found at the top left hand corner and is used to select the smart relay address. Valid addresses are 1 to 6 inclusive. DIP switches 6 to 8 are not used. Set address as follows:

MR-2312-S Address DIP Switch Setup

Address

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

DSW1-1

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

DSW1-2

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

INVALID

DSW1-3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Dip Switch DSW1-4

DSW1-4 is used to disable the Auxiliary Disconnect function from the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel.

DIP Switch DSW1-4

Position

ON

OFF

Function

Enable auxiliary disconnect function from the MR-2300 Series fire alarm panel.

Disable auxiliary disconnect function from the MR-2300 Series fire alarm panel (Aux. disconnect will not disconnect these twelve relays).

This is the default setting. The DSCNN (Aux Disconnect) LED is not active when Aux Disconnect is active on the MR-2300 Series Fire

Alarm Control Panel in this mode.

Dip Switch DSW1-5 (MR-2320 only)

Used to enable added support for hazard zone message for the MR-2320. This option is enabled by putting DSW1-

5 to the “ON” position.When this option is enabled, relay 1 to 6 will show the status for Hazard Area 1 and Hazard

Area 2 as shown in the table below.

RLY1

Hazard Area 1

RLY2 RLY3

Alert

RLY4

Alarm Release Alert

Hazard Area 2

RLY5

Alarm

RLY6

Release

3

Configuration of the Relays

Configuration of the Relays

The twelve Relays may be configured to operate alone or in combination with other relays on the board. This configuration is accomplished by jumper selection on the Smart Relay module. The following illustration explains how the relays are configured.

ZONE JUMPER

installed: turns on relay when the zone

(1) is active

removed: does not turn on the relay when zone (1) is active





chaining example: if jumper is installed on 1&2 and 2&3 then all the three relays will be on if any one of relays 1,2 or 3 is active


LED (GREEN)

RELAY

Z1

1&2

RELAY 1

NO/NC C


S: Relay turns on when common supervisory is active

A: Relay turns on when common alarm is active

Default: Jumper is NOT installed, connected on center pin only





Note: if the jumper is not installed on any selection, then the relay is not connected to the terminals

RELAY 6

NO/NC C

4


Wiring

Wire from the last MR-2312-S to the next MR-2312-S and so on; then from the first MR-2312-S to the Fire Alarm

Panel. There are only two connections to be made, one for power and one for the RS-485 loop.

The RS-485 Wiring to the MR-2312-S is recommended to be Twisted Shielded Pair.

The wire gauge may be:

• 22 AWG up to 2000 ft.

• 20 AWG up to 4000 ft.

The 24V DC field wiring needs to be of an appropriate gauge for the number of smart relays and the total wiring run length. See Current Drain for Battery Calculations , page 6 and calculate the Maximum current for all smart relays summed together.

Note:

All circuits are power limited and must use type FPL, FPLR or FPLP Power Limited Cable.

CAUTION: Accidentally connecting any of the 24V DC wires to the RS-485 wiring will result in damage to the Annunciator and/or to the Fire Alarm Control Panel to which it is connected.

Total Maximum

Current for all

Smart Relays

Amperes

0.12

0.30

0.60

0.90

1.20

1.50

1.70

ft

1180

470

235

156

118

94

78

Maximum Wiring Run to Last Smart Relay

18AWG 16AWG 14AWG 12AWG

47

36

29

24 m

360

143

71 ft

1850

750

375

250

185

150

125

76

56

46

38 m

567

229

114 ft

3000

1200

600

400

300

240

200

122

91

73

61 m

915

366

183 ft m

4250 1296

1900

850

579

259

570

425

343

285

174

129

105

87

Max. Loop

Resistance

Ohms

15

6

3

2

1.5

1.2

1.0

5

Specifications & Features

Specifications & Features

Enclosure:

Enclosure may be mounted on a standard 4” square Electrical Box or on a wall.

Electrical Specifications:

² 24 VDC nominal voltage.

² Common LEDs DISCNN (Aux. Disconnect), TX/RX (Transmit/Receive), PWR ON, CPU FAIL and individual relay status LED indicators.

² 28V DC, 1A maximum per contact (resistive load)

² 12 programmable relays available.

² Not Expandable.

² Standby 30 mA Max., Alarm 140 mA Max. All LEDs illuminated 140 mA Max.

Current Drain for Battery Calculations:

The maximum normal current drain will be during Lamp Test when all lamps are illuminated on one chassis at a time.

Thus the currents are:

Normal Standby = 30 mA

Maximum = 140mA

The Normal Standby Current is used for Battery Size Calculations (see the MR-2300 or MR-2320 Series Fire Alarm

Control Panel manual for battery calculations) and includes the current drain for the common LEDs. The Maximum

Current is used to calculate the wire size (see Wiring section above).

6







System Failures




• Power Failure






•System Users




7

Warranty & Warning Information of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.

• Software


















8












•water damage;













9














10

© 200

7

Secutron, Inc.


Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

M R - 2 3 0 0 - L C D


I

NSTALLATION

M

ANUAL

Revision

2



Contents

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 1

Mechanical Installation...................................................................................................................... 2

Functional Setup ............................................................................................................................... 3

Jumpers ................................................................................................................................... 3

Potentiometer........................................................................................................................... 3

DIP Switches............................................................................................................................ 4

Wiring ................................................................................................................................................ 5

Specifications & Features ................................................................................................................. 7

Enclosure ................................................................................................................................. 7

Electrical Specifications ........................................................................................................... 7

Current Drain for Battery Calculations ..................................................................................... 7

Operating Instructions ....................................................................................................................... 8

Warranty ........................................................................................................................................... 9 i

MR-2300-LCD Installation and Operation Manual

Introduction

The MR-2300-LCD is a remote annunciator used for the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panels. It provides remote access to the fire alarm panel.

Note:

Configuration of the MR-2300 series fire alarm panel from this remote annunciator is not allowed.

The MR-2300-LCD has an LCD display, common feature LEDs and pushbuttons, as well as an alpha numeric keypad for the LCD.

The MR-2300-LCD comes complete with an enclosure and can be surface mounted.

7.7"

SYSTEM NORMAL

18:01 MON 2003-04-05

SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

FIRE

DRILL

LAMP

TEST

A.C. ON ALARM SUPV

1

4

GHI

7

PRS

*

2

ABC

5

JKL

8

TUV

0

QZ

TRBL CPU FAIL

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXY

#

ENTER

MENU

CANCEL

INFO

7.2"


1.25"

Each MR-2300-LCD has its own address. Addresses available are 1 to and including 6. The buttons on the left side may be individually disabled if required, by setting DIP Switch SW31, see Functional Setup section following.

This annunciator may be selected to operate as an ancillary device using DIP Switch SW31-6 to disable all buttons except, Lamp Test, Buzzer Silence, Info and Arrow Buttons.

Note:

This option, if selected takes priority over any other selections made on DIP Switch SW31.

1



To mount the MR-2300-LCD open the front door, remove the dead front plate and mount the backbox to the wall using the four screws provided. This enclosure may also be mounted to a standard double gang electrical box.

There are two conduit areas provided at the bottom center of the enclosure. With the dead front plate removed, you may do the functional setup and wiring before replacing the dead front, see following sections.

7.5"

6.0"

7.0

FOUR

MOUNTING

HOLES

5.9"

1.22"

2


Functional Setup

POTENTIOMETER FOR

LCD CONTRAST

ADJUSTMENT

VR1

JW1, JW2, JW3 ARE

FOR FACTORY USE

LEAVE JUMPERS

JW2 AND JW3 IN

PLACE.

JW1

JW2

JW3

P2

THESE PINS ARE

FOR FACTORY USE

ONLY

24V IN/OUT

- +

CUT JUMPER JW8 TO

MAKE RAM-300LCD AN

ANCILLARY DEVICE.

SYSTEM NORMAL

18:01 MON 2007-04-05


SYSTEM

RESET

SIGNAL

SILENCE

FIRE

DRILL

BUZZER

SILENCE

LAMP

TEST

JW8

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW31

1

4

GHI

7

PRS

*

2

ABC

5

JKL

8

TUV

0

QZ

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXY

#

ENTER

MENU

CANCEL

INFO

SW30

ON

1 2 3 4

SW31 DIP Switch for various system functions

SW30 DIP Switch for annunciator address setting. Valid addresses

1 to 6.

THIS

CONNECTOR IS

FOR FACTORY

USE ONLY

RS-485 IN/OUT

+ S

P1

Place the 120 ohm

EOL resistor between

+ and - terminals of the RS-485 on the last annunciator only.

Jumpers

Jumper

JW1

JW2

JW3

JW8

Jumper Function

FACTORY USE ONLY

FACTORY USE ONLY

FACTORY USE ONLY

CUT jumper to set the MR-2300-LCD as an ancillary device. Use NP-2051 blank labels to cover the System Reset, Signal Silence, Fire Drill, Enter, Menu and Cancel buttons for the

Ancillary Device Feature. Only Buzzer Silence, Lamp Test and Info are used.

Potentiometer

VR1 is a potentiometer used for LCD contrast adjustment and is located in the top left corner of the MR-2300-LCD board.

3

Functional Setup

DIP Switches

There are two DIP switches to be set. SW30 is found at the bottom right corner of the board and is used to select the annunciator address. Valid addresses are 1 to 6 inclusive for MR-2300. Set address as follows:

MR-2300-LCD Address DIP Switch Setup

Address SW30-1

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

SW30-2

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

NOT USED

SW30-3

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

Note:

SW30-4 DIP switch is not used.

DIP switch SW31 is found at the bottom left hand corner and is used to select a number of features. DIP switch

SW31 is set as follows:

DIP Switch SW31

6

7

5

5

7

8

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

Position

ON

OFF

NOT USED

ON

OFF

NOT USED

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Function

Disable System Reset Button

Enable System Reset Button

Disable Signal Silence Button

Enable Signal Silence Button

Disable Fire Drill Button

Enable Fire Drill Button

Disable Lamp Test Button

Enable Lamp Test Button

Disable Buzzer Silence Button

Enable Buzzer Silence Button

16 bit checksum (if available)

8 bit checksum (for MR-2300)

4


Wiring

To wire the MR-2300-LCD, you must first remove the dead front plate. Wire from the last MR-2300-LCD to the next

MR-2300-LCD and so on; then from the first MR-2300-LCD to the MR-2300 Fire Alarm Panel. There are only two connections to be made, one for power and the RS-485 loop. Replace the dead front plate once all functional setup and wiring is complete.

The RS-485 Wiring to the MR-2300-LCD is recommended to be Twisted Shielded Pair.

The wire gauge may be

• 22 AWG up to 2000 ft.

• 20 AWG up to 4000 ft.

The 24V DC field wiring needs to be of an appropriate gauge for the number of annunciators and the total wiring run length. See Current Drain for Battery Calculations on page 7 and calculate the Maximum current for all annunciators summed together.

Note:

All circuits are power limited and must use type FPL, FPLR or FPLP Power Limited Cable.

CAUTION: Accidentally connecting any of the 24V DC wires to the RS-485 wiring will result in damage to the Annunciator and/or to the Fire Alarm Control Panel to which it is connected.

Total Maximum

Current for all

Annunciators

Amperes

0.12

0.30

0.60

0.90

1.20

1.50

1.70

ft

1180

470

235

156

118

94

78

Maximum Wiring Run to Last Annunciator

18AWG 16AWG 14AWG 12AWG m

360

143

71

47

36

29

24 ft

1850

750

375

250

185

150

125 m

567

229

114

76

56

46

38 ft

3000

1200

600

400

300

240

200 m

915

366

183

122

91

73

61 ft

4250

1900

850

570

425

343

285 m

1296

579

259

174

129

105

87

Max. Loop

Resistance

Ohms

15

6

3

2

1.5

1.2

1.0

5

Wiring

The MR-2300-LCD is wired as shown below. Additional MR-2300-LCDs are wired in the same manner, make sure

ONLY the last MR-2300-LCD has the 120 ohm E.O.L. resistor connected to the RS-485 positive and negative terminals.

MAKE SURE

THERE IS A

120 OHM E.O.L.

RESISTOR

BETWEEN + AND -

ON THE LAST

ANNUNCIATOR

ONLY

MR-2300-LCD

ADDRESS 2

MR-2300-LCD

ADDRESS 1

6


Specifications & Features

Enclosure

Enclosure may be mounted on a standard 4-gang Electrical Box or on a wall.

Electrical Specifications

• 24 VDC nominal voltage.

• LCD Display, Pushbutton Controls and LED indicators.

• Local Buzzer, Indicators (AC-On, Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and CPU Fail), and Controls (System Reset,

Signal Silence, Fire Drill, Buzzer Silence and Lamp Test,).

• Annunciation of up to 16 Points.

• Not Expandable.

• Standby 16 mA Max., Alarm 40mA Max. All LEDs illuminated 40 mA Max.

Current Drain for Battery Calculations

The maximum normal current drain will be during Lamp Test when all lamps are illuminated on one chassis at a time. Thus the currents are:

• Normal Standby = 16 mA

• Maximum = 40 mA

The Normal Standby Current is used for battery size calculations (see the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control

Panel manual for battery calculations) and includes the current drain for the Trouble Buzzer, Trouble LED, and one

Alarm LED. The Maximum Current is used to calculate the wire size (see Wiring section above).

7

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions

Normal: All indicators are normally OFF except for the green A.C. ON light which illuminates steadily.

Alarm: Operate Alarm Initiating Devices to activate Indicating Appliances. Signals will sound, common alarm will illuminate red.

Silencing of Alarm: Press Signal Silence button momentarily to silence all audible signals.

Note:

The signal silencing function may be inhibited for up to one minute. The Signal silence button will not operate until the inhibit period has expired.

Waterflow: Indicating appliances and other output circuits that are activated in response to an alarm initiated by a designated Waterflow Zone cannot be silenced (manual or automatic).

Supervisory: Activation of any initiating devices for supervisory will sound the buzzer continuously. The Common supervisory indicator will illuminate amber (steady). The Common Supervisory indicator remains "ON" when the buzzer is silenced.

System Reset: Press the Reset button momentarily to restore normal operation. All alarm indicators will extinguish

& all latched functions are restored.

Trouble: Any system trouble will sound the buzzer intermittently and common Trouble indicator will flash amber until the fault is corrected. Specific types of trouble will be indicated by the LCD display by pressing the INFO button. Call for service.

Fire Drill: Press the Fire Drill button momentarily to sound all audible signals without initiating an alarm. Press the button again for normal system operation. Note: Auxiliary relays will not operate when Fire Drill is operated.

Lamp Test: Press the Lamp Test button momentarily to test all indicators. All indicators should be lit and buzzer will sound. Holding down this button will display the firmware version.

CPU Fail LED: Will illuminate amber for an inboard CPU error.

Menu Button: Press the Menu button to access the associated MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel. The Menu button operates as it does on the main MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel, refer to the fire alarm manual for further explanation. Use the keypad arrow keys (2, 4, 6 and 8) to scroll through the menu. Configuration of the fire alarm panel cannot be accessed from the MR-2300-LCD.

Enter, Cancel and Info Buttons: The Enter and Cancel buttons are used to input and erase data for the fire alarm panel and the Info button is used to view the fire alarm panel logs.

Keypad: The numbered keys and/or letter keys function as they do at the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel, refer to the fire alarm manual for further explanation.

8







System Failures




• Power Failure






•System Users




9

Warranty & Warning Information of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.

• Software


















10












•water damage;













11








12







Notes

© 200

7

Secutron, Inc.


Canada




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113

U.S.A




(888) 732-8876

Fax: (905) 660-4113


Important!



LT-2025 Rev. 1


RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-2200 Main

Board for MR-2100/MR-2200 Fire Alarm Control

Panel

Replacement for damaged Main Board.

Parts List

• Qty 1 ... RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-2200 Main Board

Installing the RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-2200 Main Board

The Main Board has removable terminal blocks which make installing a replacement easy. If possible, upload the panel’s database before beginning.

1. Power down the panel.

2. Disconnect the bridge rectifier harness and battery harness.

3. Disconnect the pluggable portion of TB’s 1-5.

4. Unplug the Expansion Module Harness (CON3), DACT/City Module Harness

(CON4) and Main Display (CON5).

5. Remove all screws and lock washers securing the Main Board to the back plate.

6. Remove the damaged Main Board and replace with the RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-

2200.

7. Secure the new Main Board with the screws and lock washers from the damaged one.

8. Re-connect AC wiring and terminals.

9. Power up the panel.

10. If the MR-2100/MR-2200 is connected to an MV-2700 system, download latest rev.

EVAX firmware.

11. Download the panel database.

NOTE: This is a replacement module for a damaged board. Battery calculations do not have to be updated.

Canada

25 Interchange Way


Tel: (905) 695-3545


USA



Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON

Fax: 888-660-4113

Dead Front

MR-2100/MR-2200 Panel Layout

Mounting Plate

DISPLAY BD

DISPLAY HARNESS Con 5

DACT BD

OR

CITY BD

MAIN BOARD

Con 3

NAC BD

OR RELAY BD

Com4

NAC BD

OR

RELAY BD

Replace RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-2200 Main Board

LED DISPLAY

NAC BD

OR

RELAY BD

TB5

RECTIFIER

XFORMER XFORMER

(optional)

+ +

BATTERY BATTERY

T/B

-

Figure 1. RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-2200 Replacement Main Board Installation

Secutron MODUL-R MR-2100, MODUL-R MR-2200 Installation Manual

Fire Alarm Systems

MANUALS

25 Interchange Way

Vaughan (Toronto), Ontario L4K 5W3

Telephone: 888.732.8876 Fax: 888.660.4113

60 Industrial Parkway

Cheektowaga (Buffalo), NY 14227

Telephone: 888.732.8876 Fax: 888.660.4113

Web Site: www.secutron.com

Email: [email protected]

Fire Alarm Control Unit

NSTALLATION

ANUAL

Revision E

Document #: LT-2000

WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.

Contents

List of Figures and Tables

Figures

Tables

1.0 Technical Information

1.1 Introduction

1.2 Features

1.3 Codes & Standards

1.4 Applications & Services

1.5 General Installation Requirements

1.6 System Verification

1.7 System Components

2.0 Technical Specifications

2.1 Electrical Specifications

3.0 Installation

3.1 Unpacking the MR-2100 or MR-2200

3.2 Mounting and Assembling the MR-2200

°

3.3 Internal Assembly

3.4 Wiring

3.5 Maximum Wiring Length for Addressable Circuits

3.6 Maximum Wiring Length for Bell Circuits

4.0 Appendix A: Compatible Addressable Devices

5.0 Appendix B: Battery Calculations & Compatible Batteries

5.1 Battery Calculation Worksheet

5.2 Battery Selection Calculations

6.0 Appendix C: Compatible Notification Appliances

6.1 Wheelock

ULC LISTED

ULC LISTED

6.2 Gentex

6.3 Space Age Electronics

6.4 System Sensor

Fire Alarm Control Unit

ROGRAMMING

ANUAL

Revision D

Document #: LT-2001

WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.

Copyrights and Trademarks

Cautions and Warnings

Contents

List of Figures

1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts

1.1 Introduction

1.2 General Information

1.3 Networks

1.4 Addressable Devices

1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors

2.0 Editing MHINP Databases

2.1 Introduction

2.2 General Comments

2.3 System Window

2.4 Switches Window

2.5 Groups Window

2.6 Panel Window

2.7 Annunciators Window

2.8 Outputs Dialog

2.9 Options Dialog

2.10 Circuits and Devices Windows

2.11 Internal Circuits Window

2.12 Relate Window

2.13 Pushbuttons